Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_6_Honeywell_and_Monrobot Auerbach Standard EDP Reports 196609 Volume 6 Honeywell And Monrobot
User Manual: Pdf Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_6_Honeywell_and_Monrobot
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 804
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AUERBACH STANDARD.EDP REPORTS
An Analytical Reference Service
for the Electronic Data Processing Field
Prepared and Edited by
AUERBACH Corporation
Philadelphia, Penna.
6
Published by
I
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
I
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports
Prepared and Edited by AUERBACH Corporation
.............. John R. Hillegass
Editor ............................... .
Associate Editor . , ............ .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;Alan E. Taylor
Assistant Editors ........................................ Fonnie H. Reagan, Jr.
Myra C. Weisgold
Consulting Editors. '.' ... , ... , .... , ...... , , , ' , , ' , . , . , , , ,John A. Gosden
Roger L. Sisson
Norman Statland
Production Manager. , . ' , .... , , ...... , . , ... ' .. , , , , . , . , , , ,Cecil C. Hamilton
Staff ... , .. , ... " .......... ' . , , , , , . , , , , , ... , . , , , , . , , ' ,Lenna W. Holt
Susan J. Lehman
Frances G. Maslin
Robert O. MacBride
George Neborak
Sally D. Nester
Director of Customer Relations, , , , , , .. , ....
,R. G. Scott
President ....... , , , ... , ........... , , , , , ....... , ....... Isaac L. Auerbach
Director of Information Products Group ..... , .... " ... , , . ,Robert E. Wallace
Publisher .... , .. , .... , , ....................... , . , ..... Richard K. Ridall
The information contained herein has been obtained from reliable sources
and has been evaluated by technical teams with extensive working experience
in computer design, selection and application. The informatiofl., however, is
not guaranteed.
Acknowledgement is made of the inspiration and guidance provided by the
Information Systems Branch of Office of Naval Research which has supported
data gathering activity by Auerbach Corporation in fields similar to some
covered in tHese reports. The data contained and formats used in STANDARD
EPD REPORTS were not prepared under any contract with the U. S. Government; and they are the exclusive property of the copyright holders.
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
55 n. seventeenth street
philadelphia, pa. 19103
215-locust 7-2930
7/64
I
J
HONEYWEll 400
Honeywell EDP Division
./
;----
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
HONEYWELL 400
Honeywell EOP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
501:001. 001
STANDARD
Honeywell 400
Contents
REPORTS
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
14
15.
16.
17.
Introduction
Data Structure
•
System Configuration
II
4-Tape Business System
III
6-Tape Business System
V
Auxiliary Storage System •
VI
6-Tape Business/Scientific System.
Internal Storage
H-402
Magnetic Core Storage
H -460
Magnetic Disc File.
Central Processor
H-401A
Central Processor.
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
H-409
Punched Tape Reader.
H-410
Punched Tape Punch
H-423
Card Reader
H-424-1
Card Punch
H-424
Card Punch
Input-Output; Printers
H-422-3
Printer.
H-422-4
Printer.
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
H -404-1
Magnetic Tape Unit
H-404-2
Magnetic Tape Unit
H-404-3
Magnetic Tape Unit
Input-Output; Other
H -480
Communication Control Unit
H-436
Tape Control Unit
..
H-405
Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
Simultaneous Operations.
Instruction List.
••
•
Data Codes
Internal and Printer Code .
Card Code
Problem Oriented Facilities
Simulation by H-800
EASY SORT II.
EASY COLLATE
THOR •
PERT..
•
Linear Program Package •
TABSIM.
Process Oriented Languages
Automath-400
COBOL-400 .
Machine Oriented Languages
EASY I & II •
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
501:011
Revised
Revised
501:021
Revised
501 :031. 200
501:031. 300
501:031. 500
501:031. 600
501:041
501:042
Revised
501:051
Revised
501:071
501:072
501:073
501:074
501:074
Revised
Revised
Revised
Revised
501:081
501:081
Revised
501:091
501:091
501:091
Revised
501:101
501:102
501:103
501:111
501:121
Revised
Revised
Revised
501:141
501:142
Revised
501:151.12
501:151. 13
501:151. 13
501:151. 16
501:151. 21
501:151. 22
501:151. 23
501:161
501:162
501:171
Revised
Revised
6/63
501:001.002
HONEYWELL 400
CONTENTS (Contd.)
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
RIP
6/63
Program Translators
EASY I &11
Automath-400 •
COBOL-400 . •
Operating Environment
EASY Monitor .
System Performance
Notes on System Performance •
Worksheet Data • • . . . .
Generalized File Processing
Sorting • • . • .
Matrix Inversion.
Physical Characteristics .
Price Data • . . • . . • . • .
= Report in process.
Revised
501:181
Revised
501:182
501:183 (RIP)
501:191
Revised
Revised
501:201. 001
501:201. 011
501:201. 1
501:201. 2
501:201. 3
501:211
501:221
Revised
501:011.100
Honeywell 400
Introduction
I NTRODUCTI ON
§Oll.
The H-400 is a small to medium scale business-oriented computer. It has a fair
range of conventional input-output and auxiliary storage units. Only one real option
(Multiply/Divide) exists so far as the central processor is concerned, so the computing
power of the unit is the same for most configurations. The H-400 was first delivered in
1961 and is mainly used as an independent computer rather than as a supporting satellite for
larger systems. The system can be used to support the larger H- 800 but such an application is comparatively unusual. Monthly rentals range from $5,000 to $14,000 and typical
systems are approximately $S,OOO.
Compatibility
The H-400 is the smallest of the Honeywell computers. The larger Honeywell
systems are the H-SOO I and II (502:), the H-1400 (505:) and the H-ISOO (503:).
There is complete programming compatibility between the H-400 and H-1400 systems,
which also share the same peripheral units, but there is no direct programming compatability between the H-400 and the H-SOO/ISOO systems. However, an H-400 simulator is
optionally available for use with the H-SOO to permit H-400 programs to be run on the H-SOO.
Hardware
The basic system, with no optional facilities, operates almost entirely serially
(i.e., computation, input, and output are handled one process at a time and do not overlap).
Simultaneous tape read and tape write operation is the only exception. Optionally, the
printer can be buffered so that the central processor can operate while the printer is
operating.
The processor, which has optional multiply/divide capabilities, uses binary or decimal arithmetic. Three address instructions ("ADD A, B, C" means ADD (A) to (B) and
place the result in C) are used and operands are in fixed word lengths (12 decimal characters
including sign, or 4S binary bits). The instruction repertoire is comprehensive and includes
especially good editing commands for translation of the 6-bit alphanumeric codes to and
from their decimal and binary equivalents. There is a powerful move command which allows
n words to be moved at a time. "n" can be of any size up to 4,095.
No variable length operations are possible. The processor also serves as the inputoutput controller. The system requires no additional controllers or buffers (beyond the
printer buffer) for this reason.
The core storage is available with 1,024, 2,04S, 3,072, or 4,096 4S- bit words.
Each 24- bit half of a word has a parity bit which is checked whenever the data is moved.
The store can accept words with incorrect parity from input-output devices. The processor
is made aware of this· condition by a forced transfer of control to a fixed location. A paritychecking instruction is provided to find the incorrect word and correct its parity. Other
instructions are provided to implement techniques to correct the incorrect data. They are
part of an internal program-executed system called OrthotronicControl.
Up to eight magnetic tape units can be connected. The three magnetic tape unit
models available operate at 32,000 characters or 48,000 digits per second, 64,000 characters or 96,000 digits per second, and 88,666 characters or 133,000 digits per second.
These units have pneumatic drives which handle tape more gently than mechanical drives. A
feature of the H-400(Orthotronic Control) enables it to ignore a faulty track when reading a
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
7/63
501 :011.101
HONEYWELL 400
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
OIl.
tape and to regenerate the correct data. Orthotronic Control is an error correction system
designed particularly to catch errors caused by tape skew. In contrast to read-after-write
error detection systems, Orthotronic Control has the advantage that it can cover errors
occurring during or after recording, either in storage or during reading. On the other hand,
it does not notice recording errors until later reading,.
The printer operates at 900 lines per minute. A print storage option is available for
this unit that frees the processor for 98 per cent of the printing time. The mM 1402 reader/
punch is now the card equipment normally used with the H-400, although some older installations are still using the converted version of the mM 088 collator. The 1402 reads BOO cards
per minute and punches 250 cards per minute.
Punched tape equipment is also available; the reader operates at 500 or 1,000 characters per second, the punch at 110 characters per second.
Software
A number of programming aids are available for the H-400 system. These include:
(1) EASY I, a basic symbolic assembler for systems with 1,024-word stores.
(2) EASY II, a more complete assembler for systems with stores of 2,048 or more
words. This includes an input-output macro which is also used in other software systems, such as AUTOMATH and COBOL.
(3) A Sorting Generator and Merging Generator Routine. These are based on the
polyphase method, which has been pioneered by Honeywell.
(4) Disc File Programs which are presently under development.
(5) A COBOL-61 compiler for the H-400, which has just been released. This compiles on a 2K machine with a minimum of four tape units. The compilation time
is approximately one-half hour, which is good for a machine of this size. The
language facilities are fairly complete. The object programs are reported to
require approximately the sam~ running time as those produced using normal
(EASY II) techniques.
(6) FORTRAN II (called AUTOMATH 400), a FORTRAN II compiler which has also
just been released. It includes a non-FORTRAN statement, OVERLAY, which
helps to overcome some of the limitations of systems with small storage (like
the H-400). It does a small amount of analysis of the coding and its context before creating the machine language and thereby improves the object time speed
of the programs. Subscripts are only allowed to two levels and error control of
the running program is not as strong as would be liked. Compilation times are
very good, approximately one hundred statements per minute. Object running
times are slowed down by the need to simulate the floating point arithmetic.
7/63
Revised
501:021.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
"fORTS
Honeywell 400
Data Structure
DnA STRUCTURE
§
.1
.2
021.
STORAGE LOCATIONS
DATA FORMATS
Type of information
Representation
48 bits in a word.
12 Characters, or sign plus 11
chars in a word.
8 Characters in a word.
I word.
Na me of location
Size
purpose or use
Binary:
Decimal or Hexadecimal:
Character:
Word:
Record:
6 bits
48 bits
I to 511 words
64 words
editing.
instructions, data irems.
magnetic tape block.
disc storage.
Alphabetic or Alphameric:
Instruction:
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
501:031.200
_STANDARD
_EDP
.,..
Honeywell 400
System Configuration
REPORTS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031 .
.2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION n)
Deviations from Standard System:
magnetic tape is 100% faster.
can read and write simultaneously on
magnetic tape.
printer is 80% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
includes indexing and console typewriter.
Equipment
Core Storage: 1,024 words
Processor & Console
)
Card Reader 800 cpm
1
Card Punch 250 cpm
Optional Equipment Includes:. • . . . . . • . • • •.
550
Printer 900 lpm
1,050
4 Magnetic Tapes 30, 000 cps
1,800
none
Total
© 1963
I
$4,215
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
$7,615
Revised 6/63
501:031.300
§
HONEYWELL 400
031 .
•3
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION ill)
Deviations from Standard System:
no read/compute or write/compute simultaneity.
printer is 80% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch 'is 150% faster.
Equipment
Core Storage: 2,048 words
$4,865
Processor & Console
Card Reader 800 cpm
550
Card Punch 250 cpm
Optional Equipment Includes:
Printer 900 lpm
1,050
6 Magnetic Tapes 30,000 cps
2,700
1. Multiply-Divide
2. Print Storage
Total
6/63 Revised
250
390
$9,805
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
501:031.500
031 .
.5
AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION V)
Deviations from Standard System:
no read/compute or write/compute simultaneity.
printer is 80% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
auxiliary storage is 25% larger.
Equipment
Magnetic Disc File:
25 million characters
$2,900
Core Storage: 2,048 words
Processor & Console
)
4,865
Card Reader 800 cpm
I
Card Punch 250 cpm
Optional Equipment Includes:
•••••..••••••
Printer 900 lpm
1,050
6 Magnetic Tapes 30,000 cps
2, 700
1. Multiply-Divide
2. Print Storage
250
390
TOTAL
© 1963
550
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
$12,715
Revised 6/63
HONEYWELL 400
501:031.600
§
031 .
•6
6-TAPE BUSINESs/scmNTIFIC SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION VI)
Deviations from Standard System:
no read/compute or write/compute simultaneity.
printer is 80% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
core storage is 49% smaller.
floating point hardware is not available.
Equipment
Core Storage: 4,096 words
Processor & Console
}
$6,065
Card Reader 800 cpm
550
Card Punch 250 cpm
Optional Equipment Includes:
Printer 900 lpm
1,050
6 Magnetic Tapes 30, 000 cps
2,700
1. Multiply-Divide
2. Print Storage
TOTAL
6/63 Revised
250
390
$11,005
501:041.100
•
STANO'"
EDP
••
REPOR1S
Honeywell 400
Internal Storage
Core
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE
§
041.
.24
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
. 12
Basic Use:
• 13
Description
Magnetic Core Storage.
402.
working storage.
The standard module of memory is common to all
Honeywell 400 systems and contains 1,024 words.
One 402-1, -2, or -3 module containing 1,024,
2,048, or 3,072 additional words, respectively, can
be added to the system for a total maximum capacity
of 4,096 words. Each word contains 48 data bits and
two parity bits. Words can be used by instructions:
as 48-bit binary words, as sign plus eleven decimal
(or hexadecimal) digit words, as twelve decimal (or
hexadecimal) digit words, or as eight six-bit character words, or in combinations of these. formats.
Each instruction also requires one word.
The first 94 words are used for input-output areas,
index registers, arithmetic registers, and interrupt
jump locations. Most of these areas can be used as
normal storage unless they are being reserved for a
particular function.
. 14
Availability: .•
9 months .
.15
First Delivery:
December, 1961.
.16
Reserved Storage
Purpose
Index registers:
Arith registers:
Logic registers: .
I/O control:
I/O areas:
Processing
irregularities:
.2
.21
PHYSICAL FORM
.22
Physical Dimensions
Storage Medium: .
Number of
locations
I
11
0
10
55
Locks
none.
none.
none.
none.
none.
6
none.
magnetic core.
• 221 Magnetic core type storage
Core diameter:.
0.050 inch.
Core bore: . . . . .
O. 030 inch.
Array size:. . . . .
32 bits by 64 bits by 25 bits.
• 23
Storage Phenomenon:
.241 Data erasable by
program: . . . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
.243 Data volatile:
• 244 Data permanent: .
.245 Storage changeable:
direction of magnetization.
© 1963
yes .
no.
no •
no.
no .
..
.28
The H-400 core is arranged in 25-bit groups, 2 of
which make up a single computer data word or instruction. The cycle time of the core is 9.25 microseconds per half-word, providing an effective word
time of 18.5 microseconds.
Recording Permanence
Access Techniques
coincident current.
coincident current.
uniform.
• 281 Recording method: •
. 282 Reading method: .•
.283 Type of access:
..
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data:
Conversion factor: •
Data rate:
. ...
...
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and S¥:stem Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
402-1 or
Basic
1,024
Words:
CharactelS: 8,192
Instructions: 1,024
12,288
Digits:
1
Modules:
word.
48 bits/word.
52,000 words/second.
402-2
402-3
2,048
16,384
2,048
24,576
1
3,072
24,576
3,072
36,864
1
Maximum
Storage
Basic plus
402-3.
4.096.
32,768.
4,096.
49,052.
4.
• 32
Rules for Combining
ModUles: . . . . . . . a module containing either
1,024, 2,048, or 3,072
words can be added to
the basic 1,024-word store.
.4
CONTROLLER:.
·5
ACCESS TIMING
,51
Arrangement of Heads:
.52
Simultaneous
Operations:. . . . . . none.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access
Access time: . .
Cycle time:, .•
For data unit of:
none.
single access circuit.
6/Jsec.
9.25 jJ.sec.
0.5 word,
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: • . . . • . none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
• 71
Data Transfer
With self: , . . . • . . yes,
by Auerbach Corporation and DNA incorporated
Revised 6/63
501:041.720
HONEYWELL 400
§ 041.
.72
.8
Transfer Load Size
With self: • . • . .
• 73
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
Action
Conflicting commands:
Physical record missing:
Parily error:
Illegal instruction:
Invalid address:
not possible •
not possible.
yes
yes
yes
processor stop.
processor stop.
processor stop.
N 48-bit words.
Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . . . . . . . 46.25 + 37N, where N is the
number of 48-bit words.
6/63 Revised
Error
I AUERBACH /
4n
501:042.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REl'ORTS
Honeywell 400
H-460 Magnetic Disc File
INTERNAL STORAGE: MAGNETIC DISC FILE
§
042.
.22
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
Magnetic Disc File.
Bryant Series 4000.
H-460.
. 12
Basic Use: .
auxiliary storage.
. 13
Description
This unit consists of a controller plus one disc cabinet. Three, 6, 12, 18, or 24 data discs can be connected, providing a capacity of from 12.5 to 100
million alphameric characters.
There are six zones on each disc face, and each zone
has its own read/write head. All the heads move
together, so that they are correctly positioned for
six physical tracks (or 32 64-word records) on each
disc at anyone time. The rotational delay for any of
the 32 records averages 34 milliseconds, but the
data transfer time varies with the zone. The number
of records per track also varies with the :clone, and
the table below shows the situation in detail.
Zone
Number of 64-Word Transfer Time per
Records per Disc
Record (milliseconds)
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
4
4
6
7
8
18.5
13.3
11.0
9.1
7.8
6.8
Access to the disc is achieved by addressing data
records of 512 alphameric or 768 numeric characters arranged into 64 words. Any record can be addressed independently. Slightly less than 1 per cent
of the file (that part over which the heads are positioned) is available in under 52.5 milliseconds, assuming average latency for disc rotation and a maximum of 18.5 milliseconds for data transfer.
To gain access to another band involves waiting an
additional 60 to 130 milliseconds for lateral head
movement. Thus, random access, including head
position changes, averages 139 milliseconds, allowing 430 records per minute to be obtained or stored
randomly.
.14
Availability:
9 months.
.15
First Delivery:
April, 1963.
. 16
Reserved Storage: .
none.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Storage Medium: .
...
magnetic disc.
© 1963
PhYSical Dimensions
.222 Disc
Diameter:
Thickness:
Number on shaft: .
39 inches.
thin.
4, 7, 13, 19, or 25.
.23
Storage Phenomenon:
direction of magnetization .
..24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . .
. 243 Data volatile:
. 244 Data permanent: .
. 245 Storage changeable:
..
.25
yes.
no .
no .
no .
no.
Data Volume Per Band of 6 Physical Tracks
Words: . . .
Characters:
Digits: . . .
Instructions: •
Records: . . .
2,048.
16,384.
24,576 (or 22,576 in signed
H-400 words).
2,048.
32.
.26
Bands Per Physical Unit: 256 per disc (128 on each
side).
.27
Interleaving Levels: .
.28
Access Techniques
none.
. 281 Recording method:.
. moving heads .
.283 Type of access
Description of stage Possible starting stage
Move head to
selected band:..
yes.
Wait until record is
in position: . . . . yes, if a record on the same
band of any disc face was
previously selected.
Transfer of record: no, but previous stage time
may be zero.
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Bits/inch/track: . .
Compound bit rate:.
.292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates: . . .
Unit of data: . . . .
Conversion factor: .
Gain factor:
Loss factor: • . . .
Data rate:' . . . . .
Compound data rate: .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
900 rpm.
variable.
615,000 bits/sec.
27,500 to 75,000 char/sec.
word •
48 bits/word.
1.
1.
3,472 to 9,375 words/sec.
3,472 to 9,375 words/sec.
6/63
501:042.300
§
HONEYWELL 400
042.
.52
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module Size
A:
B:
C:
D:
·.
·.
Discs:
Words: .
Characters:
Instructions: .
.32
1.
524,288.
4,194,304.
524,288.
Rules for Combining
Mooules: .
.....
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
· ...
3, 6, 12, 18, or 24 Data
Discs can be mounted on
the single shaft of the unit.
included in unit.
.421 On-line:
.. 422 Off-line:
. 43
Simultaneous Operations
1.
none .
reading a record.
writing a record.
searching for a record.
internal computation.
Overall System:
a+b+c~1.
a +b +d~ 1.
c +d~ 2.
.53
Access Time, Parameters, and Variations
.532 Variation in access time, in J.lSec.
Stage
Variation
Example
Head positioning: •• 0 or 60, 000 to
95,000.
130,000
Waiting for the disc
to be in position: . o to 67,000
32,000.
Transfer of record: 6,800 to 18,500
12,200.
139,200.
Total: . . . . . . • . 6,800 to
215,500
Connection to System
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:. • • .
none .
..
.44
Data Transfer Control
. 441
.442
. 445
. 447
• 448
Size of load: . .
Input - output area:
Synchronization: .
Table control: . .
Testable conditions: •
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
1 record =64 words.
none.
automatic.
none.
none.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: • • • • • • none.
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
· 71
Data Transfer
Pair of storage units possible
With self:. . • . • . . no.
With Main Memory: . yes.
With Control Memory: no.
.511 Number of stacks
Model 0 Model I
72
Stacks per module: 36
72
36
Stacks per yoke:
1
Yokes per module:
.512 Stack movement: .•
•6
Model 2 Model 3 Model 4
216
288.
144
144
216
288.
1
1.
1
.72
Transfer Load Size: . • 1 record of 64 words.
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
With Main Memory: • • not yet determined; depends
on the timing of the
inter-record gap.
across 1 zone of 1 disc face
(there are 6 zones on the
disc face) •
. 513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location:
one •
. 514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: . 1 band = 32 records of 64
words.
With all movement: . 128 bands =4, 096 records
of 64 words.
By all stacks
With no movement: . 32N records
where N = 6, 12, 24, 36,
or 48 depending on Model
(1. e., 1/128 of capacity).
.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations: . none.
.....
6/63
·8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Timing conflicts:
Check or
Interlock
Action
none
unpredictable.
not possible.
read tracking check
write tracking check
parity check
check
forced transfer.
forced transfer.
forced transfer.
system de-activated.
501:051.100
_STANDARD
II
Honeywell 400
Centro I Processor
REPORTS
ED
P
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
tions are available which work with a binary card image (four 12-bit columns per 48-bit word), or with 6bit print characters. These can be edited to six-bit
alphabetic, four-bit decimal (which can be used computationally), or three-bit octal characters by the editing instructions. Non-valid characters cause a
forced transfer. Insertion of specific characters,
suppression of leading zeros, and floating of the high
order character of a field can be performed automatically.
Honeywell 400.
Central Processor.
401A.
The 401A is the successor to the 401 as the central
processor of the H-400 system. A number of 401's
are still in the field, and are almost entirely program compatible with 401A (one console type-out location differs). However, it is not practical to
change a 401 to a 401A in the field.
Simultaneity in operation of the central processor and
input-output units is controlled by the method of transfer logic associated with each of the units concerned.
Thus, some units (such as the card units) allow overlapped operation of the central processor while the
peripheral unit is preparing to make the transfers.
This is not possible with the magnetic tape units. The
rules for such operations are given in Simultaneous
Operations (Section 501: 111).
The 401A utilizes three-address instructions and has
binary and decimal computational facilities. The instruction repertoire is comprehensive and includes
strong editing and Boolean operations. The 3 index
registers can be incremented by up to 4, 096 (the
maximum store size). Multiply-Divide instructions
are optional. Floating point arithmetic must be
handled by subroutines.
Errors and ends of input-output data transfers can
cause separate interrupts to occur. An interrupt
causes the processor to take its next instruction from
a unique location in storage without changing the sequence counter that normally directs the processor
to subsequent instructions. Since the sequence
counter and the three index registers are contained
in a single storage location, they are generally
stored and the specific I/O or diagnostic routine is
entered. This is done by one instruction. At the end
of this routine, the sequence counter and index registers can be restored. Thus only two instructions are
required to store and restore the contents of the program registers and to provide entrance and exit for
each appropriate routine (two routines are provided
to process data from each input/output channel, one
for the normal and one for the abnormal end of operation).
Cases involving mUltiple interrupts have been
handled in a convenient manner. When multiple interrupts occur, the processor accepts the interrupt
from the source with the highest priority which is
defined by built-in hardware.
One particular instruction operation deserves a special explanation. Its name is "SELECT". It is used
to cause other instructions to be executed under its
control one at a time as in table look-ups. The select
operation is recursive and may execute another
select instruction. The sequence counter is only affected by select instructions when they cause a jump.
The executed address of a select instruction is
formed by a logical combination of one address and
two masks.
Special input and output areas are fixed for the standard card reader, punch, and printer. Editing instruc-
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
The relatively small core storage capacity of a minimum system (1,024 48-bit words) may well restrict
attempts to get higher throughput without expanding
the system. In such cases the power of the central
processor may not be able to be fully utilized.
.13
Availability: . .
9 months.
• 14
First Delivery:
1962 •
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.• 21
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
Provision
Radix
Size
.211 Fixed point
10, 2
llD, 48B.
Add-Subtract: automatic
Multiply
none.
Short:
optional
Long:
10
llD.
Divide
No remainder: none.
optional
10
llD.
Remainder:
.212 Floating point
10
Add - Subtract: subroutine
subroutine
10
Multiply:
Divide:
subroutine
10
.213 Boolean
automatic
AND:
.
48 bits
Inclusive OR: automatic
bit"
bmary 48 bits.
Exclusive OR: automatic
automatic
48 bits.
A·B v B·C:
.214 Comparison
llD, sign.
2 instructions
Numbers:
48 bits.
2 instructions
Letters:
48 bits.
2 instructions
Mixed:
Collating sequence: o to 9 " =: +A to I; . ) % . JtoR#$*" /StoZ@, (CR.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
)
r'
Revised 6/63
501:051.215
§
HONEYWELL 400
051.
.215 Code translation
Provision
aiiiOiilatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
From
l2iiCard col
12B card col
128 card col
128 card col
6B alpha
4B unsigned D
4B signed D
3B octal
6B alpha
4B decimal
3B octal
4B hexadec
To
Size
6B alpha
4B unsigned D
48 signed D
3B octal
128 card col
12B card col
128 card col
12B card col
'OtOSOC.
o to 80D.
print image
print image
print image
4B decimal
o to 120C.
o to 120C.
o to 120C.
o to lID.
o to 80D.
o to 8OC.
o to 80D.
o to 80D.
o to 80D.
1 word.
Note: B =binary bits.
C • alphameric characters.
D = decimal digits.
.216 Radix conversion: . . • none.
.217 Edit format
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Provision
Siib'Wiitiiie
automatic
subroutine
Insert point:
Insert any:
Float hex char:
Protection:
automatic.
automatic.
automatic
automatic
Size
9 leading zeros
remainder and LOP • in
Std loco
1 word.
part of zero suppression
part of zero suppression
1 word.
1 word:
• LOP is Low Order Product. i. e •• the least significant digits.
.218 Table look-up:.. . .• none.
• 219 Others Provision Comment Size
Move: automatic entire
any number of
words.
memory
· 22
Special Cases of Operands
· 221 Negative numbers:. . . 4 binary zeros in first digit
of a signed decimal word;
all other configurations
are positive; absolute
value and sign.
.222 Zero:. . . . . . . ..•• plus and minus zero can
occur and are equal in
some comparisons.
· 223 Operand size
determination:
though generally one word,
in editing a character
count is used.
· 23
Instruction Formats
· 231 Instruction structure:
· 232 Instruction layout
1 word.
Part
OP A B C A B C
I I I
Size (Bits) 6 2 2 2 12 12 12
• 233 Instruction parts
Name
OP:
AI:
BI: •
CI:
A: .
B: •
C: .
6/63 Revised
Purpose
operation code.
A address index.
B address index.
C address index.
A address.
B address, or parameters.
C address.
• 234 .Basic address
structure: .
3 address.
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic:.
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . .
1.
Incrementing
modifiers: •
2.
.236 Directly address operands
· 2361 Internal storage type:
core.
Minimum
Maximum
Volume
size
size
accessible
6-bit char
entire
en~
• 2362 Increased address
capacity: . . . .
none .
• 237 Address indexing
one.
• 2371 Number of methods:
direct.
· 2372 Names: . • . .
the contents of a specified
.2373 Indexing rule: . . . .
index register are added
modulo memory size to the
associated address.
.2374 Indexing specification: one of ,three indices (or
none) specified by two bits
for each address.
• 2375 Number of potential
indexers: • . . . . .
3.
.2376 Addresses which can be indexed
Type of address
Application
Operands: . • . . . counting and modification.
.2377 Cumulative indexing:. none.
.2378 Combined index'and
none.
step: • . . . . . . .
none.
· 238 Indirect addressing: .
· 239 Stepping
.2391 Specification of
in stepping instruction.
increment: . .
positive.
• 2392 Increment sign: •
o to 4095.
· 2393 Size of increment:
specified in register.
· 2394 End value: . . • .
• 2395 Combined step and
yes.
test: • . • . . . .
• 24
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of Number of Size in
storage
locations bits
Program usage
12
modification.
3
Index:
1
12
program counter.
Sequence:
.242 Category of Total
Access Cycle
storage
time, time,
number Physical
locations form
J.Lsec
J.Lsec
Index &
sequence
6
register:
1
core
9.25
location
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing
• 311 Number of sequence
control facilities:
• 312 Arrangement: . .
.313 Precedence rule: ..
,314 Special sub-sequence
counters: . . . . . .
· 315 Sequence control step
size: . . • . . • . •
one.
sequence register.
interrupts take precedence
but do not affect the
sequence counter.
none.
instructions, 1. e. , words.
501:051.316
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
.42
. 316 Accessibility to
program: ••.
• 317 Permanent or
optional modifier:
.32
Look-Ahead:.
.33
Interruption
addressable.
optional.
none.
• 331 Possible causes
In-out units:
In-out controllers: •
Processor errors:
end of operation.
end of tape.
faulty transfer.
overflow.
editing illegal char.
.332 Program control
Individual control:
priority of tape file
interrupts.
by instruction.
Method: • . . • . .
.334 Interruption conditions: always when cause initiated.
• 335 Interruption process
Disabling interruption: none.
all (by convention).
Registers saved: •
fixed locations, dependent
Destination:
on type of interruption.
.366 Control methods
location arrived at.
Determine cause:
Enable interruption: • yes.
..
• 34
Multi-running: . .
yes; see Introduction
(501:011).
.35
MUlti-sequencing: . .
none.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in /.Lsec
.421 For random addresses Fixed Point
Ill.
c = a +b: .
Ill.
b = a +b: •
1UN.
Sum N items: •
c =ab:
1,260 + 55D. t
c = alb:.
1,710 + 72D. t
Fixed Point
.422 For arrays of data
305.
ci = ai + br·
305 •
bj = ai +bj:.
2ION.
Sum N items: •
1,930. :t:
c = c +aibj:
.423 Branch based on comparison
203.
Numeric data:
203.
Alphabetic data:
.424 Switching
157.
Unchecked: •
399.
Checked:
92 + I38N.
List search:
.425 Format control per character
12.
Unpack: •
15.
Compose: .
.426 Table look up per comparison
203N.
For a match: •
For least or greatest: 250N.
For interpolation
203N.
point:
.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
83 .
location:
Ill.
Set bit in pattern:
Test bit in separate
Ill.
location:
222.
Test bit in pattern: •
Test AND for B bits: . 222 .
Test OR for B bits: • .222.
46 + 37N, for N -word
. 428 Moving data: .
transfer.
Decimal (8 digit operands)
• 411 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply: .
Divide:
Processor Performance in !-Lsec
t = Using optional Multiply-Divide hardware .
Ill.
1,258 + 55. 5Z.
1,720 + 74Q. i
t
Z = no. of non-zero digits.
Q = sum of quotient digits.
• 412 Floating point: •
• 413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: •
Indirect addressing:
Re - complementing:
.414 Control
Branch: .
Compare & branch:
.415 Counter control
Step and test: •
.416 Edit: •
.417 Convert:
• 418 Shift: •
..
none •
.5
9. 25 per operand .
not available.
64.75
46.
Ill.
64 to 101.
74 + 12.5D.
none.
65 + 9. 25B.
B = Bits or Decimal Digits.
t = Using optional Multiply-Divide hardware.
© 1963
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
overflow:
Underflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
interrupt
not possible.
interrupt
interrupt
check
none.
check
interrupt
interrupt
Action
jump to std location ••
jump to std location ••
jump to std location ••
machine halt.
adjusted modulo memory size.
jum p to std location ••
jump to std location ••
• Sequence counter not changed.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
501:071.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
Honeywell 400
Input·Output
Punched Paper Tape Reader
REPDRTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE READER
§
071.
.23
Multiple Copies:. . . . . none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description
.13
The 409 Punched Paper Tape Reader and Control can .25
read strips of paper tape at 500 frames per second,
or reels at 1,000 frames per second. Peak speed is
only attained after 15 frames have been read without
interruptions. During the reading tim e, the processor is effectively restricted to the read tape instruc .3
tion. Each data frame is right- justified in twelve-bit
sections of 48-bit words and transferred to storage. .31
The reader can handle codes of up to eight bits.
The data read is dependent upon standard subroutines .311
to accomplish conversion to Honeywell 400 codes, but . 312
these are fast and simple. The amount of data read
is instruction-controlled and can vary from 1 to 256 .32
frames. The effective speed varies from 71 to 492
. 321
frames per second in the medium-speed mode and
from 142 to 984 frames per second in the high- speed
. 322
mode.
.323
. 324
The reader can read tape either from spools or in
strips. It uses swing arms for tension, and spool
motor drive control. The read mechanism is photoelectric and the tape is driven by a pinch roller. An
automatic rewinding feature is incorporated in the
unit.
6 months.
Availability: .
.325
. 14
First Delivery:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: . .
Capacity: .
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:
Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:.
· Punched Paper Tape Reader
and Control 409.
Burroughs Corp. Unit B 141.
Range of Symbols
Numerals:.. .
. any 5- to 8-bit code.
EXTERNAL STORAGE
Form of Storage
Medium: . . .
Phenomenon:
· paper tape.
· punched holes .
Positional Arrangement
Serial by:
· by row, la/inch .
Parallel by:
Bands:
Track use
Data:
Redundancy check:.
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused:
Total
Row use
Data:
Gap:
· 5 to 8 tracks •
· none .
.33
Coding:
· one character per row,
using 5 to 8 bits; any
5-, 6-, 7- or 8-bit code .
.34
Format Compatibility
· July, 1962 .
· 5 to 8 tracks.
· any track except sprocket.
· track 4 (sprocket track).
· none.
· none.
· 5 to 8 plus sprocket track.
· all rows.
· none.
· pinch roller friction.
.2.
· swinging arms.
.3 feet .
· servo motor .
· servo motor.
Other device or system Code translation
. .
. translation provided by
H 401:
routine.
.35
.22
· read.
.1.
· 8 plus sprocket.
· frame at a time .
Physical Dimensions
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:.
. 222 Sensing system:
. 223 Common system;
· none.
· photoelectric.
· none.
© 1963
. 351 Overall width: .
. 352 Length:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
.11/16; 7/8; 1 inch .
.8 to 700 ft. by 0.1 inch .
4-foot leader .
4-foot trailer .
Revised 6/63
501: 071. 400
§
HQNEYWELL 400
.56
071.
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity: . . . .
.42
Connection to System
. 421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line:.
. 43
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . .
Busy device: .
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
· controller contained in
reader.
· up to 5 .
· none.
ConnectlOn to Device
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
I:
.431 Devices per controller: . 1.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . . . none.
. 44
. 441 Size of load: .
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: .
.444 Input-output area
lockout:.
.445 Table control: .
. 446 Synchronization: .
.447 Synchronizing aids:
.62
· 1 to 256 frames.
· core storage.
· none.
· none.
· program.
· test busy.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
•511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . .
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521
.522
.523
.524
Input:
Output:
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
N = number of frames per
read instruction (256
max) .
.1 to 256 frames .
· count in instruction.
. 63
.525 Marking:.
.526 Searching:.
. 53
· by program .
.54
Reading 2 or more frames
at a time:
Processor:
· plugboard.
.81.
· rearrangement of tracks.
Request interrupt: .
Select format: .
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: ..
10.
5.
n
1
2
or
or
100.
100.
Adjustments
Adjustment
Method
Comments
Width:
movable tape guides
detents.
Other Controls
Form
Parity checH switch
Feed conuol: SWitch
· disable up to 3 tracks
(manual).
· yes.
· none.
· none.
· yes.
· yes.
Backspace:
Rewind:
Unload:
&
6/63 Revised
or
or
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Function
A-U-ER-BA-CH-.,--I~
r-I
0.1
0.1
.71
.72
msec per frame or Percentage
n
.7
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Condition
Reading 1 frame at a time:
Processor:
Format Control
Control: . . . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: . .
.55
Demands on System
Component
· 1 to 256 frames.
· none.
· none.
· unload forward or rewind
till end of tape is reached.
· none.
· none.
Code Translation:
Speeds
621 Nominal or peak speed: I 1,000 frames/sec .
II 500 frames/sec.
>22 Important parameters
Full speed:. . .
· 1, 000 frames/ sec.
Medium speed:.
· 500 frames/sec.
Start time: .
.5 m.sec.
Stop time: . . .
.1 m.sec.
. 623 Overhead: . . . .
· start/ stop time.
.624 Effective speeds:
· I 1,000 N/(N + 6) frames/
sec.
II 500 N/(N + 6) frames/
sec.
· none.
.5
· full speed I, 000 frames/
sec.
· medium speed 500 frames/
sec .
II:
Data Transfer Control
· no.
· not necessary.
· no.
· no.
· no.
· metallic foil at each end
of tape.
lever
button
button
Comment
allows checking odd/even or no parity.
allows tape to be fed from reel clockwise
(Reel Normal) or counterclockwise (Reel
Reverse) or strips (Strip).
moves tape backward one frame.
move to end of tape.
wind forward to end of tape.
501 :071.730
INPUT-OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE READER
§
071.
.73
.8
Error
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel: . . . . .
. 732 Replenishment time:
.733 Adjustment time~ .
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Capacity
.700 feet
1 to 2 mins .
reader needs to be stopped.
.5 to 10 mins.
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
none.
parity check
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
none.
none.
tape tension and
metallic. foil
sprocket check
none •
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Action
stoppage and signal to
control
stoppage, alarm.
stoppage, alarm •
. 1.4 mins.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
501 :072.1 00
IISTAND"D
II
EDP
Honeywell 400
Input-Output
Paper Tape Punch
REroRTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 410 PUNCHED PAPER TAPE PUNCH AND CONTROL
§
072.
.25
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . • . . • . Punched Paper Tape Punch
and Control 410.
Teletype BRPE Punch.
. 12
Range of Symbols
Letters:
Special:
Total: .
Description:
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
The 410-1 isa combination Punched Paper Tape Punch
and Control Unit designed to prepare five-channel
punched paper tape, ten frames to the inch, at 110
characters per second. The 410- 2 is the same,
except that it punches six-, seven -, or eight-channel
tape. The image to be punched is packed 4 characters to a 48-bit word. The last character to be
punched requires about 4.5 milliseconds of processor
time and all other characters occupy the processor
full time; i. e., nine .milliseconds. For this reason,
the programming practice may be to punch one character at a time even though up to 256 characters can
be punched by one instruction.
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium:. . .
. • . . paper tape.
.312 Phenomenon: . . . • • . . punch holes.
.32
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by: .
.322 Parallel by:
. 13
.323 Bands: . . •
. 324 Tiack use
Data: . . . . . . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: . . • . •
Although (unlike the card code conversion) no special
Control signals:
edit instructions are available for paper tape, a very
Unused: .
simple and fast subroutine is available for accomplishTotal: . • . . . •
ing character (or digit) to punch code convennon.
This technique permits the use of any size (up to
.325 Row use
eight-bit) or confIguration of code patterns.
Data:
Gap: .
Availability: .
.6 months.
. 14
First Delivery: .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
Number: .
Form:
Capacity:.
. 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:
.22
.410-1; any five-bit code.
.410-2; any 6-, 7-, or 8-bit
code •
. 410-1; 25 symbols.
410-2; 28 symbols.
• August, 1962.
.33
Coding: • . • . . • . . . 410-1; any 5-bit code.
410-2; any 6-, 7-, or
8-bit code.
. 34
Format Compatibility
Other device or
system
Code translation
Any compatible
punched tape
reader: . • . . . • programmed.
.2.
· swinging arm.
.3 feet .
· servo motor •
· servo motor.
.35
• 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
• 223 Common system:
· die punch.
· none.
· none .
• 23
Multiple Copies:.
• none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
Method of use: .
all rows.
none •
· sprocket drive pull.
Sensing and Recording Systems
Use of station:.
Stacks: . . . . •
Heads/stack:
· 10 rows /inch.
.410-1; 5 tracks.
410-2; 8 tracks.
· none .
410-1
410-2
-5S-none
none.
1
1.
none
none.
none
none.
5 plus
8 plus
sprocket.
sprocket
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width: .
.352 Length: . . . •
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:....
.42
Connection to System
· 410-1; 11/16" .
410-2; 7/8" or 1" .
· 6 to 1, 000 feet .
410-2
410-1
· punch'.
.1.
.5 plus
sprocket
• frame at a
time
© 1963
punch.
1.
8 plus
sprocket.
frame at a
time.
.421 On-line: •
.422 Off-line:.
by Auerbach Corporolion and BNA Incorporaled
• . H 410.
.1.
· none.
Revised 6/63
HONEYWELL 400
501:072.430
§
072.
.43
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per
Controller: .
. 432 Restrictions:
.44
.2.
· none.
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of Load:. . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.
.445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization: .
. 447 Synchronizing aids:
. .
· 1 to 256 frames.
· core storage •
· none .
· none.
· program.
· test busy •
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
Speeds
. 621 Nominal or peak speed:
.622 Important parameters
punch a frame:.
.623 Overhead: . . . .
.. 624 Effective speeds:
• 63
· counter in instruction.
.521
. 522
. 523
. 524
. 525
. 526
Input:
Output:
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching: .
· none.
· 1 to 256 frames •
· 1 frame forward .
.no~ .
· none.
· none.
.53
Code Translation: .
• by program.
. 54
Format Control: .
· none.
. 55
Control Operations: .
. none.
.56
Testable Conditions
. 110 frames/sec .
· 9.09 m. sec .
. none .
· 110 frames/sec.
Demands on System
m.sec
Component
Condition
per frame
Percentage
Processor:
Processor:
p~ch
4.5
50.
100 •
1 frame
punch additional frames
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
· 71
AdjJlstrnents
9.1
Adjust guide
· 8-bit frame.
Input-Output Operations
6/63 Revised
.62
· 72
.52
Disabled: . .
Busy device: .
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: . .
End of medium marks:
PERFORMANCE
· none.
.5
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: .
.6
.73
Other Controls
Function
Form
Comment
Rewind:
switch
tape must be removed
from punch head.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
· no.
· not necessary.
· no.
.20 feet.
· not necessary.
· no.
Storage
Capacity
Reel: •
• 1,000 ft.
.732 Replenishment time:
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
.8
2 to 5 minutes .
punch needs to be stopped .
. 18 min.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
none.
not possible.
not possible.
implicit.
not possible.
check
none.
not possible.
Action
special branching.
501:073.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Honeywell 400
Input-Output
Card Reader 423-2
REPORrs
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READER 423-2
§
073.
· 24
·1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Honeywell 400.
Card Reader.
423-2.
The 423- 2 Card Reader is a modified IBM 088
Collator which reads cards at 650 cards per minute.
Features of the IBM 088 that have been retained when
operating as the 423- 2 are blank-column checks,
hole-count checks, and character rearrangement and
insertion via the plugboard. When the unit is not online, it retains all of the features of the IBM 088 and
can be used as a Collator. Only one of these units
can be connected to the system at one time.
When the 423-2 is reading cards, a binary image of
each card column is stored in a twelve-bit section of
a 48-bit word. A fixed area of twenty words is used
to store this image in card column sequence. The
image is a one or zero picture of the punches from
row nine to row twelve in the high to low order, respectively, of the twelve-bit section. The processor
is occupied for 54 milliseconds of the 92.3 millisecond
read cycle. While the processor is thus occupied,
no other operations can take place. The remainder
of the cycle is broken down into the 33-millisecond
acceleration period and the 6-millisecond deceleration period. Central Processor use of the acceleration period is possible, although restricted. Unrestricted use can be made of the deceleration period.
Certain system considerations arising from this are
discussed in the Simultaneous Operations section,
501:111.
Editing instructions are available for editing a card
image, or any part thereof, into a six-bit alphameric
code, a four-bit numeric code, or an eight-bit octal
code.
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack:. .
Method of use: .
hole check.
Use of station: .
Distance: . . .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
Method of use: .
read.
20 card rows.
·3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
· 311 Medium: . .
.312 Phenomenon: .
· 32
row, 12.
column 80.
· 33
Coding: .
input data is stored in the
system in a column binary
representation; i. e., 12
bits per column, punch =
1, no punch = O. (Hollerith codes or direct
transcription).
.34
Format Compatibility
Other device or system Code translation
80-column card
compatibility: .
.35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity:....
· 42
Connection to System
· 14
First Delivery:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.421 On-line: . . .
.422 Off-line use: .
· 21
Drive Mechanism
.43
none necessary.
standard 80-column card.
built into processor .
1961.
pinch roller.
none.
Sensing and Recording Systems
. 221 Recording system:.
.222 Sensing system: .
none.
brush.
· 23
none.
Multiple Copies: .
punch card.
rectangular holes.
. 321 Serial by:
• 322 Parallel by:
Availability:...... no longer available
(replaced by H-427).
· 22
1.
80.
row at a time.
Positional Arrangement
,13
· 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . .
1.
80.
row at a time.
Connection to Device
_431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . . only one input device is
permitted per run.
· 44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
© 1963
1.
Collator (IBM 088).
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1 card .
fixed core locations are the
input storage area for the
"a.rd reader.
Revised 6/63
501:073.443
§
HONEYWELL 400
073.
.62
• 443 Input-output area
access: • . . . .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: • . • • .
.445 Table control: .•
,.446 Synchronization:.
word.
none; although card reading
occupies the computer
completely during the
actual reading, there is no
lockout.
none.
automatic.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: •
1 card.
Input-Output Operations
.521
• 522
.523
. 524
.525
.526
Input: .
Output: •
Stepping: •
Skipping: .
Marking: .
Searching:
1 card at a time.
none.
none .
none.
none.
none.
.53
Code Translation:
edit instructions provide for
Hollerith, octal or
decimal conversion.
plugboard.
none.
plugboard.
none.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
instruction.
no.
Testable Conditions
Disabled:. . . • .
Busy device: . • .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium marks:
Component Condition
PERFORMANCE
• 61
Conditions:....... none.
msec per card
Processor: controlling
reading
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.7l
Adjustments
52.3
Method
51-column hardware: insert
. ..
.72
Other Controls:
.73
Loading and Unloading
Percentage
or
56.7.
Comment
on primary feed only.
see IBM 088 manual.
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hoppers:
Capacity
3,600 primary; 1,200
secondary.
Stackers (5):
1,000 each.
.732 Replenishment time: •
0.5 to 1. 0 mins.
.733 Adjustment time:
0.5 to 1. 0 mins.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . . . . .
5.5 mins .
..
.8
no.
not necessary.
no.
not necessary.
no.
.6
6/63 Revised
Demands on System
Adjustment
Control Operations
Disable:
Request interrupt: .
Offset card:
Select stacker:.
Select format:
Select code:
Unload: .
• 56
· 63
Format Control
Control:
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
.55
.621 Nominal or peak speed: 650 cards per minute •
· 622 Important parameters
Cycle time:. . . . • . 92. 3 msec •
Acceleration time: . . 33. 0 msec.
Data Transfer time: • 52.3 msec.
Terminal time (during
which next read order
must be given to
maintain 650 card per
minute reading):
6.0 msec.
· 623 Overhead: . . • •
1 clutch point.
• 624 Effective speeds:.
650-C cards per minute •
C =number of clutch points
missed per minute.
1 card.
• 52
.54
Speeds
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
InterIocK
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
hole-count check
not possible.
not possible.
check
check
not possible.
Action
program jump.
alarm.
alarm •
501:074.100
_STANDARD
EDP
_
Honeywell 400
"PORIS
Input-Output
Card Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH
§
074.
.24
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
. 12
424-1
Honeywell 400.
Card Punch.
424-1.
424-2.
Description:
This unit is no longer produced, but is still in use
in the field.
The 424-1 or 424-2 Card Punch is a modified IBM
519 Reproducing Punch or IBM 544 Gang Punch. The
units punch at 100 and 250 cards per minute, respectively. Most of the normal plugboard features
are retained when the units are operating on -line.
Off-line, they assume their normal characteristics.
Only one of these units at a time can be connected
to the system.
Both units punch cards from a twelve-bit binary
image of each column. The punch image is stored
in a fixed 20-word area in core storage and is represented by a one or zero picture of the punches
from row nine to row twelve in the high- to loworder positions, respectively, of the twelve-bit
image. The images are stored sequentially by column. The processor is occupied for 500 or 177
milliseconds during the 600 -millisecond cycle of the
424-1 or 240-millisecond cycle of the 424-2. While
the processor is thus occupied, no other operations
may take place.
• 13
Availability: .
• no longer available.
.14
First Delivery:
• 1961.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs: .
.22
· die punch.
· brush.
· none.
.23
Multiple Copies:
· none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:.
Distance:.
Stacks:.
Heads/stack:
1 row at a time.
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
punch
1
80
1 row at a
time
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: • • • •
. 312 Phenomenon: • •
• 32
rows, 12 •
column, 80 •
.33
Coding:
system uses a column
binary image generated
by edit instruction;
1 = punch, and 0 = no punch
(Hollerith code or direct
transcription) •
.34
Format Compatibility
Code translation
• 35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity:
Connection to System
none necessary.
standard 80- column card •
• • • • built into processor •
424-2
.42
· *read
none,
.421 On-line: . • • . . . . • . one only.
.1.
• 80.
© 1963
.43
none.
80.
1 row at a
time.
stations.
punch card.
rectangular holes •
424-1
• *read verify
• 14 card rows.
1.
• 321 Serial by:
. 322 Parallel by:
Any 80 column
card equipment: •
.80.
• 1 row at a time.
gang punch.
14 card rows.
Positional Arrangement
Other device or
system
.1.
punch.
1.
80 •
1 row at a
time.
read verify
14 card rows
1
80
1rowata
time
* Cards being punched do not pass these
• pinch roller.
• none.
. 221 Recording system:.
. 222 Sensing system: .
.223 Common system:
424-2
Method of use:
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:
Sensing and Recording Systems
Use of station:.
Stacks:
Heads/stack:
Method of use:.
Arrangement of Heads (Contd.)
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: . one.
.432 Restrictions: . • • . . • only one punch may be connected to a controller
during anyone run .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
HONEYW~LL
501:074.440
§
074.
.44
.62
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load:. . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . .
.445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization:
· one card.
· core locations 0112 - 0135
(octal).
. word.
· implicit, as the processor
is completely involved in
the punching operation.
· none .
· automatic.
•5
PROGRAM F ACIl.JTIES AVAILABLE
. 51
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Output: .
.52
.1 card .
· none .
.1 card .
· none.
· none .
· none.
· none.
. 53
Code Translation: .
· edit instructions.
. 54
Format Control
Control: .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: .
Suppress zeros: .
Insert point: .
Insert spaces: .
Section sizes: .
.55
· plugboard.
. none.
· plugboard.
· none.
· .plugboard.
· plugboard.
· plugboard.
.no.
.no.
· yes (424-2 only).
· no.
· no.
· no.
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . .
Busy device: .
Output lock: .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller:. .
End of medium marks:
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 61
Conditions
I:.
II:
6/63 Revised
· no.
· not necessary.
.no.
· no.
· not necessary.
· no.
· type 424-1.
· type 424-2.
Demands on System
Component
Condition
m. sec
per card
Percentage
I Processor:
punching card
punching card
500
177
83.3
73.7.
II Processor:
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
Adjustment
424-1:
424-2: . .
• 72
Comment
· see IBM 519 Manual.
· see IBM 544 Manual .
Other Controls
Comment
· see IBM 519 Manual.
· see IBM 544 Manual.
Function
424-1:
424-2: .
· 73
Control Operations
Disable: .
Request interrupt:.
Offset card: .
Select stacker:
Select format: .
Select code: .
. 56
.63
Input-Output Operations
Input:
Output:.
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching: .
U
I
.621 Nominal or peak speed: . 100 cards
250 cards
per min
per min .
.622 Important parameters
Cycle time: . . . . . . 600 m. sec
240 m.sec.
Acceleration time: . . . 91 m.sec
55 m.sec.
Punching time:. . . . . 500 m. sec
177 m.sec.
Terminal time (during
which the next punch
OI~e:r must be given
to maintain maximum
punching speed): .
7 m.sec
7 m.sec.
. one clutch point.
.623 Overhead: . . . .
. 624 Effective speeds: . . . I: 100-C cards per min .
U: 250-C cards per min .
C =number of clutch points
missed per minute .
· fixed.
.521
. 522
. 523
.524
. 525
.526
Speeds
400
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Capacity. cards
I
U
Hopper:.
800
1,200
Stacker:
.1,000
1,900
.732 Replenishment time: .. . 0.5 to 1.0 mins.
no need to be stopped.
· 733 Adjustment time: .
.0.5 to 1.0 mins .
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . • .
.1: 8mins.
II: 4 mins.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Timing conflicts:
check
fixed.
not possible.
check
not possible.
program jump•
program jump.
501:081.100
IISIAND"D
II
EDP
R[NRIS
Honeywell 400
Input-Output
Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER (422-3 AND 422-4)
§
081.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •
.12
Honeywell 400 •
Printer.
422-3.
422-4.
.232 Types of master
Multilith:
Xerox:
Spirit:
.24
Description:
The 422-3 and 422-4 are essentially identical units
except that the 422-3 can print in any 120 out of
160 print positions and is plugboard-wired, whereas the 422-4 has a fixed 120 positions. They are
manufactured by Honeywell, but are quite similar
to the equivalent Anelex units. The printers can
print at up to 900 lines per minute, single spaced.
At double and one-inch spacing, the speed drops to
800 and 560 lines per minute respectively. These
speeds are due to unc1utched operation which permits printing to begin as soon as requested, provided that the unit has completed the previous
operation. Printing with a restricted range of
symbols may increase the speed up to 1, 200 lines
per minute. Paper tape loop control provides automaticor semi-automatic paper spacing.
.. 25
First Delivery:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: .
. 212 Reservoirs: .
. 22
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
print
1
160 (120used
ata time
line at a time
print.
1.
120.
•
. 10
. 26
. 20
o - 9.
A - Z.
'=&+;.)%-#$"
/ @ , (* CR : D·
yes.
yes.
yes.
Also, 6 special drums are available with
different special symbols.
Model 1 uses the same special characters as
the mM 407 keypunch, but with the following
added:
I
=+ ) ( "
Model 2 uses the mM 12F "Selfcheck" font,
suitable for use with the optical scanner.
Model 3 and 4 include the pound sterling
symbol ( ~ ) as well as the dollar sign ( $ ).
Model 5 replaces various commercial symbols
with lower case t and 0 and the following
Greek letters:
l\E:CJl-e-)..
Model 6 adds second versions of the following:
9 months.
/
and adds:
¢ and t
The follOWing are omitted:
December, 1961.
" + ; ) (
· sprocket drive push &
pull tractors .
· none.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: . . .
.312 Phenomenon:
.32
Multiple Copies:. .
line at a
time.
Range of Symbols
Sensing and Recording Systems
.22.1 Recording system:
.23
Type 422-4
ALGOL set:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total: .
• . . 56.
A 6 or 8 line per inch vertical spacing option is
also available.
.14
Type 422-3
Numerals: .
Letters: .
Special·:. .
A print storage option is available which eliminates
about 98% of the processor time that is required
when the buffer is not used. Without the buffer,
the processor is inhibited for 53 milliseconds aiter
a print instruction is initiated, after which
computing may resume.
Availability:
Arrangement of Heads
Method of use:
Options
.13
yes •
yes.
yes.
· on the fly hammer stroke
against engraved drum.
. . . . paper.
. . . . printing .
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by: .
. 322 Parallel by:
. line, 6 or 8 per inch.
.120 char, 10 per inch .
. 33
Coding: . .
. 6 bits per char .
. 34
Format Compatibility:. . none .
· yes.
. 231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon: . . 10 (8-pound paper).
6
PCI
Punch Card,
Interlocked
Punche s the contents of the card
punch area onto one card. Central processor interlocked until
completion of data transfer.
55. 5 + unit mech.
time (7)
PCO
Punch Edit,
Octal
Is the same as PCA, except
that data is edited from octal
format into punch area.
74+13.87n
PCU
Punch Edit,
Unsigned Decimal
Is the same as PCA, except
that data is edited from decimal
format into card punch area.
74+13.87n
PCW
Punch Card,
Without Interlock
Punche s the contents of the card
punch area onto one card. Central processor not interlocked
and central processor operations
are possible during acceleration
interval.
55.5 + unit mech.
time(7)
PDE
Prepare Decimal
Edit
Inserts special characters, suppresses leading zeros, floats
high characters in (A) according
to parameters at B. Stores
result in (C).
83. Z5+18. 5n(8)
PRS
Print and Space
Prints the contents of the print
area on the high-speed printer,
and spaces the form as specified
by B.
RCI
Read Card,
Interlocked
Reads the contents of one card
into the card read area. Central processor is interlocked
until the completion of data
transfer.
55.5 + unit mech.
time(7)
RCW
Read Card,
Without Interlock
Reads the contents of one card
into the card read area. Central processor not interlocke~
and so central processor operations are possible during the
acceleration interval.
55.5 + Unit mech.
time (7)
6/63 Revised
Ir-----:-~
AUERBACH / @I]
Without Storage Opti~n
55. 5+unit mech. time 2)
With Storage Option
1193.l5
INSTRUCTION LIST
501:121.105
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Description
RDP
Read Periplleral
Read and transfer n frames
of data from the device on
the input trunk specified in
B to memory location A.
RDT
Read Tape
Reads one record from the
specified magnetic tape and
stores in consecutive locations
beginning with A. If tape channel
is also specified, it regenerates
that channel simultaneously.
REJ
Reject Card
Rejects the card currently in
the card feed into one of two
pockets as specified in B.
92.5 + unit mech.
time(7)
RPX
Restore Subsequence Priority
Set the index registers and
sequence register to the values
specified in (A) (see SPX).
Alter or do not alter the contents of the subsequence control
register, as specified.
Execution time
not available.
RTX
Restore Index
Register
Stores the high- order three 12bit groups of (A) in the index registers 1, 2, 3, respectively;
stores low-order 12 bits of (C)
in the sequence register.
83.25
RWT
Rewind Tape
Rewinds the specified magnetic
tape to its physical beginning.
92. 5 + unit mech.
time(7)
SCH
Sequence Change
Changes sequence register setting
to the address specified by C.
46.25
SCO
Sequence Change
on Option
Changes sequence register setting
to address specified by A if setting of the console breakpoint
switche sand (B) coincide. Otherwise set sequence register to the
address specified by C.
74
SEL
Select
Modifies C using (A) and (B); then
makes a programmed subsequence
to the modified address.
120.25
SET
Set Index
Register
Adds A to index register speci.
74
fied in Ai and stores result in
index register 1; adds B to index
register specified in Bi and stores
result in index register. 2; adds C to
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
74 + 18. 5n + unit
mechanical time (7)
-(2)
Revised 6/63
HONEYWELL 400
501:121.106,
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Description
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
index register specified in Ci
and stores result in index register 3.
SLB
Binary Shift
Left
Shifts (A) to the left the specified
number of bits; the move is
cyclic, 50 that bits shifted off
the left end enter the word at the
right.
64.75+9. Z5n(9)
SLP
Decimal Shift
Left, Preserving
Sign
Shifts (A) to the left n decimal
digits, preserving the sign digits.
Digits shifted off the left end
are lost and replaced by zeros
at the right end."
64.75t9.Z5n
SMP
Superimpose
Places a 0 bit in all positions of
(C) where both (A) and (B) contain 0 bits; places 1 bits in all
other positions of (C).
III
SPX
Store Subsequence
Priority
Store the contents of the three
index registers and the sequence
register at A. Alter or do not
alter the contents of the subsequence control register, as
specified. 1£ the subsequence
call was caused by an error,
jump to C minus one; otherwise, jump to C.
Execution time
not available.
SRP
Decimal Shift
Right, Preserving
Sign.
Same as SLP, except that (A)
are shifted to the right.
64.75+9.Z5n
SST
Substitute
Places (A) in (C) in all positions where (B) contains a 1 bit;
leaves remaining bit positions
in (C) unchanged.
111
STX
Store Index
Register
Stores the contents of the three
index registers and the sequence
register in A. Sets sequence
register to C.
83.Z5
SUB
Decimal Subtract
Subtracts (B) from (A); treats
operands as signed 11 decimal
digits; stores result in C.
111+64.75T{l)
SUP
Stall
During the acceleration interval
of the card reader and readerpunch,
Stalls until end of
data transfer, or
(
6/63 Revised
INSTRUCTION LIST
501:121.107
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§ 121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
Desc.ription
this instruction stalls the central
processor; outside this interval.
it has the effect of NOP.
70 microseconds
TAC
Type.,Alphanumeric,
Console
Prints (A) on the consol~ printer
in alphanumeric form.
lOO-200ms per
character
TDC
Type Decimal.
Console
Prints (A) on the console printer
in decimal form.
1 00-200ms per
character
TOC
Type Octal.
·Console
Prints (A) on the console printer
in octal form.
1 00-200ms per
character
TSC
Transfer and
Sequence Change
Transfers (A) to location B; sequence changes to location C.
83.25
TSN
Transfer n Words
Transfers n words from consecutive memory locations. beginning
with word at A. to consecutive
memory locations beginning
with C.
46. 25+37n
WRP
Write Peripheral
Directs the device on the output
trunk specified in B to write
n frames of data transferred from
memory location A.
74 + 18. 5n + unit
mechanical time (7)
WRT
Write Tape
Writes one record of the specified
number of consecutive words from
memory. beginning with A, onto
tape.
_(2)
NOTES
1.
T. a variable factor. is derived from the following table:
Signs of Operands
T
A
B
IAI>JBI
+
+
+
0
-
-
IAI .<,.
up to 120 characters long only.
UPPER-BOUND(S); LOWER-BOUND(S).
HIGH-VALUE (S); LOW-VALUE (S).
Data Division
7
Computer-name
no alternative computer names.
File Description Clauses
6/63
8
9
10
Block-size
FILE CONTAINS
Label formats
12
Hashed
no range can be specified.
no approximate file size can be shown.
labels must be standard or omitted. If
omitted, they can be handled using own
coding.
hash totals cannot be created.
PROCESS
§
()~I 1:NED LM~ :;UAGE:
501:162.145
COBQL-61
162 •
• 145 COBOL-61 Electives Nor Implemented in H-400 COBOL (see 4:161.3) (Contd.)
Key No.
Comments
Elective
Record Description Clauses/Options
13
14
15
16
Table -length
Item -length
Bit usage
RANGE IS
18
19
SIGN IS
Item -length
21
Label-handling
only fixed length tables and arrays.
only fixed length items (see also 19).
items cannot be specified in binary.
no value range of item or character can
be shown.
no separate signs allowed.
no variable length items allowed.
(see also 16).
labels cannot be automatically specified as
specific data-names.
Verbs
--22
23
25
algebraic formulae are not available.
new verb definitions cannot be used.
no library routines can be called.
COMPUTE
DEFINE
INCLUDE
Verb Options
29
31
32
33
35
OPEN REVERSED
STOP
Formulas
Operand-size
Test
tapes cannot be read backwards.
non -alphabetic display provision.
algebraic formulae.
only up to 10 digits.
IF I I IS NOT ZERO.
Special Features
48
library routines cannot be called.
LIBRARY
.146 Non-Standard Implementations of COBOL-61 Language: • . • • . none.
rD 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
501: 171.100
Honeywell 400
Machine Oriented Language
EASY I & II
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 1:ASY I & II
§
171.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
• 12
• EASY.
Efficient Assembly
System.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram: .
.22
Legend
Card Number:
used to sort input deck
(optional, EASY II only) .
Location: •••.•.
absolute or symbolic location for this line of coding.
Command G,de:
mnemonic instruction code.
constant type code.
assembly control codes •
library pseudo code.
data descriptors.
A, B, or C Address:.. instruction operand
address, literals.
control parameters.
constant macro parameter.
data descriptors.
Remarks: • • • • • •. any comments; these do
not affect the assembly.
(Note: a special line containing remarks only can
be used when R is in columns 9 and 10.)
• Minneapolis -Honeywell.
• 13
Reference:
• 14
Description
• Manual DSI-84A .
DS1- 84B EASY 1.
DSI-133 EASY II.
There are three slightly different versions of the
EASY language: EASY I, EASY II, and EASY-800.
These are designed to run on an H-400 with a
1, 024-word core store, an H-400 with a 2,048word core store, and an H-800 computer, respectively. The language described below is EASY n.
and the restrictions upon EASY I are listed at the
end of this description. EASY 800, which was the
original version used before the H-400 was generally available, is no longer commonly used.
.23
Corrections:...... in the same format as
specified in 21 if the program is to be reassembled; otherwise, master
program tape may be updated with octal corrections.
.24
Special Conventions
The form of EASY is that of three-address instruction codes. simplified by labels. instead of absolute
addresses, mnemonic versions of the operation
codes, etc. Conventional symbols are used for
"this address" and an upper boundary address.
A small illustrative program appears on Page
501: 171. 900.
.241 Compound addresses: .
Macro routines, which can be stored on a library
tape, add trigometric and floating point facilities
to the language.
EASY is integrated system consisting of an assembler, a master tape updating and selection
process, an automatic object program operating
system, and extensive program diagnostic features,
including dynamic dumping. EASY is based on the
principle of batch -processing during assembly,
checkout, and production running.
EASY is a straightforward 3 -address machine
oriented language. It has an open-ended macro and
subroutine library, and descriptors for card, printer, and tape functions. Details of the library are
given in Paragraph • 8.
The following EASY II facilities are not available
in EASY I:
Segmentation
Sorting
Library Routines.
. 15
Publication Date: • • • • December, 1961
see page 501: 171.
.242 Multi -addresses:
. 243 Literals: .
. 244 Special coded
addresses: .
245 Other
*.
%:
.3
LABELS
.31
General
.311 Maximum number of
labels: . .
.312 Common label formation rule: . .
.313 Reserved labels:
.314 Other restrictions:
(01963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
·+
symbolic + absolute
(4 digit), index register.
· in control instructions
only.
· D)xxxx is numeric xxxx •
.@
= this address.
· highest storage address.
· common storage pool
address.
. unlimited.
. yes.
. none .
. none.
Revised 6/63
501:171.315
§
HONEYWELL 400
17l.
.42
Working Areas
.315 Designators
Alphabetic constant: . .A#.
Hexadecimal constant: H#.
.0#.
Octal:
Binary equivalent of
decimal constant:
· F #.
Symbolic address as
.T#.
constant: .
.421 Data layout
Implied by use:
Specified in program:
. 422 Data type: .
.423 Redefinition:
. 316 Synonyms permitted:
. 431 Data layout: .
.. 432 Data type:
. 433 Copy layout:
.32
· yes.
Universal Labels
.321 Labels for procedures
Existence: .
Formation rule
First character:
Last character:
Others:
Number of
characters: .
. 322 Labels for
routines:
. 323 Labels for
. 324 Labels for
. 325 Labels for
.326 Labels for
library
constants:
files:
records: .
variables:
. 33
Local Labels:
.4
DATA
.41
Constants
· optional.
· alphabetic or numeric
· alphabetic or numeric.
· alphabetic or numeric.
· 1 to 6; one must be alphabetic .
·
·
·
·
·
same as procedures.
same as procedures.
none as such.
none as such.
same as procedures.
· none.
.411 Maximum size constants
Integer
Digits
Decimal: .
12 digits.
Octal:
16 digits.
Hexadecimal:
12 digits.
Binary:
14 digits.
Fixed numeric
Decimal: .
12 digits.
Octal:
16 digits.
Hexadecimal:
12 digits.
Binary:
14 digits.
Floating numeric
Decimal:
none.
Octal:
none.
Hexadecimal:
none.
Alphabetic:
29 characters.
Alphameric: .
29 characters.
.412 Maximum size literals
Integer
Decimal: .
9 digits.
Octal:
9 digits.
Hexadecimal:
9 digits.
Binary:
9 digits.
Fixed numeric
Decimal: .
9 digits.
Octal:
9 digits.
Hexadecimal:
9 digits.
Binary:
9 digits.
Floating numeric:
none.
Alphabetic:
8 char.
Alphameric: .
8 char.
6/63 Revised
.43
· no.
· not required.
· yes.
Input-Output Areas
.5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number:
Example:
.512 Absolute
Existence:
Number:
Example: •
Comment:
.52
· yes.
· implicit .
· not required .
· yes .
yes.
59.
ADDX/Y/Z.
yes .
59 .
o #3300 T#X/T#Y /T#Z .
any form of constant
because codes are
binary .
Macro- Codes
.521 Number available:
Input- output:
Arithmetic:
Math functions:
Error control: .
Restarts:
Ortho correction:
Edit:
Number conversion:
. 522 Examples
Simple: •
Elaborate:
.523 New macros:
.53
Interludes:
..54
Translator Control
.541 Method of control
Allocation counter:
Label adjustment:
Annotation: .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:
Set to label:
Step forward:
Step backward:
Reserve area: .
.543 Label a.djustment
Set labels equal: .
Set absolute value:.
Clear label table:
.544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase:
library is open-ended .
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes .
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes .
L,MACNAM.
L, MACNAM Pl/P2
P25/.
written in EASY and inserted in library or at
head of program.
none.
· pseudo operation.
· pseudo operation.
· two methods.
· SETLOC.
SETLOC.
· SETLOC, RESV.
· SETLOC.
· RESV.
· EQUALS.
· EQUALS.
· none.
· remarks field.
· R or P in location field.
MACHIN;: ORIENTED LAN:;UAGE: EASY I & II
S 171.
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
Special Arithmetic
.611 Facilities: .
.612 Method of call:
.62
.74
Varieties of Contents: . mathematical routines.
generators.
data processing packages •
.75
Mechanism
•. 751 Insertion of new item:
standard updating program .
. 752 Language of new item: • EASY•
.753 Method of call: • • • . L, NAME in Command
field.
Special Functions
.621 Facilities: .
· trig. func tions .
log.
matrix.
differential equations.
statistics.
.622 Method of call: .
.63
· library of scientific subroutines. multiply. divide.
floating pOint package.
· macro or hand code or
deck insertion.
501:171. 600
· macro or hand code, or
deck insertion.
Overlay Control
.76
Insertion in Program
. 761 Open routines exist: .
.762 Closed routines exist:
.763 Open-closed is
optional:
.764 Closed routines
appear once:
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
.631 Facilities:
· all programs divided by
delimiter "SEGMENT"
into at least one segment.
overlay calls must be written in programs .
. 632 Method of call: . . . . . under program control by
Read Segment m a c r o . . 8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.64
Macros
Data Editing
.81
. 641 Radix conversion: .
Code translation:
. 642 Format control:
.65
Input-Output Control
. 651
.652
.653
.654
. 655
File labels:
Reel labels:
Blocking:
Error control:
Method of call:
. 66
Sorting
.661 Facilities:
. 662 Method of call:
· decimal to binary only .
· not necessary .
· not necessary.
· standard.
· standard.
· variable.
· standard.
· library call •
polyphase sorting
(3 to 6 tapes).
library call •
Open-ended library. A few examples are shown
below.
Code
L, A1DPK1:
L, AXDLI1:
L,
L,
L,
L,
L,
L,
AXDNIl:
A2DPK1:
A3DPK1:
A1FDV1:
A1FMY1: .
ACXDR1: .
L, AEDEX1:
L, AEDLN1:
L, AEDLOl:.
L, AlDSE1:
. 67
derail technique as controlled by Monitor, specified
by programmer.
Diagnostics:
L, AYDSE1:
L, AMDPK1:.
library.
L,
L,
L,
L,
L,
L,
. 721 Fixed master:
.722 Expandable master:
.723 Private:
no.
yes.
yes •
L, AVDRNl:.
L, ATIrrNl: .
L, AMIrrAl:.
. 73
tape.
L, AVDMRl:
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
• 71
Identity:
.72
Kinds of Libraries
.
Storage Form:
ARDSR1: .
ATDATl:.
ATDSCl: .
A1XDVl: .
AEDXYl:.
AVDMVl:.
(0 1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Description
· single precision package.
· less than or equals comparison .
· inequality comparison.
· double precision package.
· extra preCision package.
· fixed point divide.
· fixed point multiply.
· conversion radians to degrees & EX .
· evaluates EX.
· finds log to base E of X.
· finds log of X to base E,
2 or 10.
· matrix inversion, solution
to equations .
· as above with either single
or double precision.
· matrix addition, subtraction or scalar multiplication.
· finds the square root.
· evaluates arc-tangent.
· calculates sine or cosine.
· fixed binary divide .
· evaluates XY.
· mean, variance & correlation .
· random number generator.
· finds the tangent.
· premultiplication of a
matrix by its transpose.
· multiple regression .
Revised 6/63
501: 171.820
§
liONEYWELL 400
171.
.82
Pseudos
Description
· set location counter.
· header card.
· subheader card.
· repeats next card "n"
times.
· assigns values to labels.
· reserves storage.
· heads macro routine.
· ends macro routine.
· initialize indexes and se-.
quence register for object
program.
. . . . . . . exit from program to
monitor.
Code
SETLOC:.
PROGRAM:
SEGMENT:.
REP:
EQUALS:
RESV: . .
MACBO: .
MACTER:
BEGIN: . .
EXIT:
. .
l
A-U-ER-BA-CH-_.,....,/~
'--1
6/63 Revised
501: 171. 900
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: EASY I & II
§
171.
EASY
~:~NG
PR~O:B~L~~==~S~A~M~?~~~E~==========~==========~PR~OG~R:AMM::E:R_~~==========~~D~A~TE========~:PA~G~E==~O~F~~
CARD NUMBER
LOCATION COMMAND CODE
PI" . lIl11[ I UlIliT
A ADDRESS
& ADDRESS
R~ARKS
C ADDRESS
F·~F:~~<-~:·~9=~===f'~'~====~~"~==~~~~·h==*~·LJ==~·±'~~~=-~¥'='~~~~~==~~~~~==~~
I--,I'~¢_~I:_-+'-"NE::.:W-'-----+"P...:.cRQ.(':,RAM
:SAMPLE
s
r :1)2.:
------ -- ---------------.~_-3--r'--+---t=S:...:E::.::G-MENT
~AMPI.e.
PUNC.H _ _ - - - - - - - t - - - . r-:--;-'r:~_+.:---=-_+_S.:::..E:=-T,-"L::..:Oc..:.C. _ _ 4c6¢_____ r----1---- -- - - - - - - - _ 1
1 :~4:
~~--=-
lNI'T
1!¢5'
I :¢>b:
L -..
____ ~)-t 1
TN:.
@~_I_ _ _ 1------.----------1
§---- --- ----__ l-
liLT
lJ(lI_L
:,-E,-r---A-B-K.-P-=-T"'S---·-----1
- r;SN----;PAC-I:---·-+I------------ -39 . - - - - - - f - - - - -
'-, ;~Bj-
iSN
PRS
I'al~:
---~----- -i4
r-H~;...:-+::Ia-,--t--'-~::.c~:..~::....R.:-T--t::.----
: .
MAlIol
R.cW
:~;
. --H----·--
~---r--.--------------i
- - - - - - - - -' -- .------- ---------.--Oft::.-I,.-O-OP- - ---.- ------ -- - ---.---- -- + - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
-- ------
t--'7'-'-:-'---t----t----'I-j112:
. ~UM _. ___ .. _
BK.?T
--- - - - - - - . -----
-----
-
~~~ ~= !~===-~
-:~=~ --=~~-t7~~~---------==+---------------1
... .----..-----..
-4!~
-.--!~~.!-
-"':.-.-----t-------------.-.---
_Sl.A~~_. __ 2. ...... _____ ~+-I----_t.------- --------i
seo
:::;;l~~----
--'--c--
---------.-.. ----
-P'IW"T
-.-.------+--------+--------------
-H~+-~~S. ~-C-·--·--·-T~~~·--· "-:~;3-'-""--' ~.------ - - ----------.. -.-----.--I-,Tur----t..
-'---'" . -.- ...... ---- -..--..---.-. - --.-----.- .
---~------
p'w----~---··--
I :i2.:
-rAPO---'---
-·-I:2.~--
ro',l-rtsco'-'---
CARD NUMBER
LOCATION COMMAND CODE
-~.-.-----
Il)+'----·- -NUM--'+-~--UM---'--
-@+i-·-------·j-,-·-··--·---·MAI-""----------·····-
RFF~~- -r~:-~:-:-::'-=l ~~~~~=--~-=-:~-======
'1oK
'1,IMli
A ADDRESS
B ADDRESS
INS'I'
R~KS
C ADDRESS
~~:.~:.~~~===f'~.~~==~~"~==~~=b~X~*~~d=~~~F"~==~====~..~·6~~~~.~~~~~~~~9~
I-Z:..l·¢>.:...........':_+-__-l-'!>c H
__ --.-:-=----rM:=A:.:.I~:...--:....--_t_-----------___1
z.:Qlz..:
~,
FiLl.. A RES RoVED A \"'o"~TiON:>_ _-+-______ t _ - - - ---.......,-----i
1.'(113'
¢¢11
SiX
SAVe.SR
-r----- ~-V-F\..-W-_--I----- ..-------~
l--.::.z~:¢4....:,...:_-\,¢~¢_z.-:::.=2,-+--,~lX_ _ _ _ ~~_I:._S_R._+_I ___ ... ___ ._._ _ ~~li - - f - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - \
r--?-..i~'
¢¢z.~
STX
S.AVE~R+'Z.
PR...=S=-.E::;!a'-.R'-=-___-f-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __l
Z.:¢b:
¢¢Z4 .. r------NOP
t-"'7'-=-r--+,,::-'--:'::..!..
..- ...------ ..- - - -- .-- .. - - - - - - 1 f - - - - - ----------1
r-.~~L 1¢¢z.'5
ST~_____ ~~~laB ____._______ E-.~R.~~~ _______________.____.__
ZI\!l":
(lp2..6
z.,¢c).
¢¢21
NOP
ST)(.
r---z:;,',-r-- P.A2.8
¢(j!S3¢
_
____________ -----.-+-------------1
l c_ _
_ _ .~A'Jt:..SR:!4 _______ ._____ C:..:A.. .::lac:::t:...?:.....U
--1
+-__________
NaP
Z: I¢!:
~H
----.----.-
-il-l-t-T----+-----------I
- - - - - --.--.-.. -.. -.. --.--------+----------------1
ERItOt<..t::. R UTII\lES ~A"!I).b..cc:l~~'1P,,~ ____ . _ + _ - - - - - - - - - - - l
TAC.
oVERF\.. _________
Toe..
SA'll!:.:!> £.
flLT
1--+--c-_I-"---':....::.cL.....__I__'~~--.---
2.11'2.:
~.
_~Gi- OVfLW
z: 14:
21,-;;:
.....-.- ------'-.---+---.-----;--------~
.1.:1(,'
-.,,--1-- -
Z ,11'
--
L~l-I:
_._------+-----------------
SAVE.SI2..
---.----+-------- - . - - - - - - - i
-------t---- _________
. TOe.
~~B:
2.: 19i
-Z:z.9\:
SA"E~R...
Ril<.
- - - - - - - - - ---.------...----.--- .. -- ..
CI)E.I>II.--=r AC___~...!ER..R._ _ ~.. _____
5AVEf>~.....!~ - - - - - - - 1 - . - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - . - - - - 1
Ht.T
R::rX-·---- SAVE5R:+,"-- ··--·---SAVE!>R:t-I---- - - - - - - - - - . - - . - - - - . - -
-:t-------- --------- ---- ---.------ --- -..------.-..... ~----.- .. ---.-----
VRSER.~
T_f.'- __ ..-e_ruE~=_~~__11__-----.__I__'------.I__-----------_l
=--==== -===-- ---- ~~~~~!.7-_
. --.-----~~-.=:=_- ~===--~=
~#~cAR.~R{%-- ~~!:~~~-
I z.:u:
---r-:t:o,CzTz3f- -=tB~T_~--
SAVESR.+2.
. ---.....--...--.
©
---... ---'-'-
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
._
Revised 6/63
501:181.100
•
STANDARD
II
R[PORTS
EDP
Honeywell 400
Program Translator
EASY I & II
PROGRAM
§
TRANSLATOR~
181.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description:
Honeywell EASY I & II.
The EASY II translator is designed for use with the
EASY Monitor operating system, described in
Section 501:191. It translates one-to-one symbolic
instructions. library macros, and desci'iptions for
input-output editing. Translation speed is approximately 250 cards per minute. An updating and
selection routine maintains a master binary tape
using the results of translation and corrections,
derails (dump control instructions), and test data.
It also prepares an automatic run-to-run tape both
for check-out and production purposes.
. i3
Originator:.
Honeywell EDP Division.
.14
Maintainer:
Honeywell EpP Division.
. 15
Availability:
March, 1962.
.2
INPUT
.21
Language
. 22
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name:
.32
Conventions
.321 Standard inclusions:
.322 Compatible with:
.33
none.
EASY Monitor (Section
501:191).
Documentation
Subject:
Source program: .
Object program: .
Storage map:
Restart pOint list:
Language errors:
Provision
listing 1.
listing 1.
no.
no.
listing 1.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Pass 1: .
Passes 2, 3:
Passes 4, 5:
Pass 6: .
Passes 7 - 10:
Pass 11:
EASY I or EASY II.
see Description
(Paragraph .12).
EASY to H-40o. binary
language .
machine language .
magnetic tape or punched
cards.
. 42
Optional Modes
.421
.422
.423
. 424
. 425
Translate:. . .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching:.
Omit list:
.43
Special Features
input editing.
optional description
processing.
optional library processing.
optional input sort.
translation.
listing.
yes .
none.
no .
yes .
no .
Form
.221 Input media:
. 222 Obligatory ordering:
. 223 Obligatory grouping:
. 23
.3
.312 Language style:
. 313 Output media:
There are 3 EASY Translators, one for an H- 800
(EASY- 800), one for an H-400 with a 2, 048-word
core store and 4 tape units (EASY II), and one for
an H-400 with a 1, 024-word store and 3 tape units
(EASY I). Some editing of the input will be needed
before an input prepared for one translator can be
processed by another. There is no assembler for
the H-400 which can assemble on a card system or
on a 1- or 2-tape system.
.211 Name:
. 212 Exemptions:
EASY I & II
punched card, or tape .
no.
yes, by program segment.
Size Limitations
.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .
.232 Maximum size source
statements:
.233 Maximum number of
data items:
no limit.
instructions or library calls.
.431 Alter to check only: .
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate:
.433 Short translate on restricted program:
omit optional passes.
.44
Bulk Translating:
yes - batch processing.
.45
Program Diagnostics: .
handled through monitor
operation.
no limit.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA Incorporated
no .
no optimizing•
Revised 6/63
501:181.460
§
HONEYWELL 400
.522 Translating from tape:
1.2 minutes +0.21 sec/card .
. 53
Optimizing Data:
not necessary .
library.
none .
. 54
Object Program
performance: . . . • unaffected .
magnetic, tape.
in routine name sequence.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
lSI.
.46
Translator Library
.461 Identity: . . . . .
. 462 User restriction: .
. 463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization:
.464 Contents
Routines: . .
Functions:
Data descriptions:
Programs:
. 465 Librarianship
Insertion: . .
Amendment:
Call procedure:
variable.
macros.
no.
yes .
yes, library updating
routine.
yes.
macro, with or without
parameters.
.611 Minimum configuration: 2,04S-word core (EASY n).
4 magnetic tapes (EASY n).
1 reader.
1 printer.
(EASY I only uses 3 magnetic tape units and 1, 024
words of store.)
,.612 Larger configuration
advantages: . .
. none.
.62
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
. 51
Object Program Space
Target Comp.uter
.621 Minimum configuration: 1,024 word core.
1 magnetiC tape or card
reader .
. 622 Usable extra facilities: all .
• 511 Fixed overhead
Name
Monitor
Space
80 words
anho correction
80 words
In -.out
96 words
Comment
controls batch processing and
dynamic diagnostics.
corrects read errors off magnetic tape.
error sub-sequence, in -out areas.
.7
Error
Check or
Interlock
Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer overflow:
Inconsistent program
Duplicate descriptions:
.512 Space required for each
twice record size, input.
input- output file: .
record size, output.
,.513 Approximate expansion
unity, except macros.
of procedures:
.S
.52
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
none
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no.
no•
Action
listed
listed
listed
listed
listed
report.
report.
report.
report.
report.
ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS
Translation Time
.521 Translating from cards: 1.3 minutes +0. 24 sec/card.
6/63 Revised
Computer
H-800
Identity
Easy 800
Date
June 1961.
501:182.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Honeywell 400
Program Translator
Automath-400
REIORTS
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: AUTOMATH-400
§
182.
• 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.
. 12
Description
a practical necessity. It is not possible to substitute
additional tape units for the card equipment or the
printer •
. . . . . . Automath-400.
The object program can control eight tape units in
addition to a card reader, card punch, and printer.
The H-460 Random Access Storage cannot be utilized.
by the program.
The Automath-400 translator is a ·compile-and-go
translator for the FORTRAN II language. Automath400 translat«;!s the entire Automath-400 language
(which, except for only two levels of subscripts, is
nearly compatible with IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II;
see section 50l:161)'into a machine language program which is stored on magnetic tape and/or on
punched cards. During compilation, three listings
are produced (see specimens in Section 501:131)
which show the source and object programs and a
storage map. The compiling speed is between 80 and
120 cards per minute.
An Automath-400 programmer interested in object
program efficiency has to 'consider factors somewhat
different from those generally applicable to
FORTRAN compilers. The compiler uses a group of
11 locations as temporary storage for subexpressions
and uses the 3 index registers for subscripts. If a
programmer wishes to avoid reforming subexpressions or subscripts, he can sometimes do so implicitly by arranging them in these temporary storage
locations; There is no way in which he can obtain
use of the overlapping capabilities of the H-400; these
capabilities are themselves restricted to being able to
read from one tape unit while writing on the other, so
this limitation does not appear to be very important.
Subsequent to compilation, the program can be executed under monitor control. During execution, all
computation is performed in decimal mode and takes
no advantage of the binary features of the machine.
A large resident program block (911 words) must be
maintained in storage. Segmentation of the object
program is handled by the Auto}:llath-400 Monitor.
Floating point operations are simulated by subroutines and take 4 milliseconds for addition or subtraction, 4 milliseconds for multiplicat:ion, and 7. 2
milliseconds for division. By comparison, the mM
1410 takes 4, 5, and 8 milliseconds for the same
simulations, whereas the mM 1620 Model II takes
either 10, 12, and 24 milliseconds, respectively,
when simulating or 0.5, 3.3, and 9.0 milliseconds
when using the Automatic Floating Point Feature.
Error conditions are checked, but in many cases the
computation is allowed to continue; the only warning
given is a console typewriter message. This appears to be a weaker action than is advisable.
Description (Contd. )
. 13
Originator: .
Honeywell EDP Division .
. 14
Maintainer:
Honeywell EDP Division .
.15
Availability:
Language - April, 1963.
Compiler (Field Test) May, 1963.
.2
INPUT
.21
Lan~ge
.211 Name:
..
.212 Exemptions:
.22
Form
.221 Input media:
Segmentation of the object program is handled well,
and communication between the segments and the
main program is by means of the COMMON facility.
To increase the possible size of the segments, the
main program is overwritten if necessary and later
recalled into storage from the program tape. Up to
16 subprograms can be incorporated into a single
program by regarding them as segments. These can
be compiled together or separately. If the segments
are compiled separately, there is no library system
to collect them, so this muet be done manually.
The Automath-400 Compiler operates on a 4-tape,
2, 048-word H-400 system with a card reader and
printer. A card punch must also be"used if compiled programs are to be stored; thus, it is usually
© 1963
Automath-400; see Section
501:161.
none.
.23
. . . punched cards.
Size Limitations
· 231 Maximum number of
source statements: .
· 232 Maximum size source
statements:. . . . .
· 233 Maximum number of
data items: • . . ..
. 234 Others
Non-COMMON fixed
and floating point
variables:. . . . .
Fixed and floating
point constant
appearances: . . .•
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
no limit.
660 characters.
no limit .
150.
288.
6/63
501:182.234
§
HONEYWELL 400
182.
41
Phases and Passes
sets up tables for dimensioned and common variables.
The remainder of the source program deck is then
read as far as the two END statement cards, and the
source program listing, a sample of which is presented in coding specimens, is output to the printer,
with asterisks appended to any incorrect statements.
· 234 Others (Contd.)
Variables in
COMMON:.
. . 100.
Dimensioned and
equivalenced
variables:. . .
37.
DO's in a nest: .
10.
EFNs: . . . . .
150.
FUNCTION and SUBROUTINE
subprograms:. .•
16.
Subscripts in a
statement: . . . .
31.
Sets of parentheses
enclosing input-output
list index:. . . . . . 10.
Sets of parentheses
enclosing information
in an arithmetic
statement: .• . .
10.
Exits in a computed
GO TO: . . . . . .
9.
Functions in a nest:
5.
Subprogram calls in a
net:lt Ior preferred
subprograms:. • •
6.
· 235 Maximum number of
subprograms: . • .
16.
.3
OlJfPUT
· 31
Object Program
.311 Limguage name:
.312 Language style:
.313 Output media:
• 32
· 33
Automath sets up four files on work tapes 1, 2, and
3, as follows: a constant file; a format file; a file of
all other statements; and a diagnostic file . .When this
is completed, all constants are processed, and variable and array tables and a constant error listing are
output to the printer. The other statements are
processed, and any appropriate information is added
to the diagnostic file. Automath * then writes the
bootstrap routines and the Automath Monitor (including an input-output package, the Scientific Option
Simulator package, etc.,) onto work tape 2, which is
to become the run tape. The required library functions are allocated memory space. If diagnostics
have been produced earlier in the run, the diagnostic
file is printed at this point. The object program is
written onto the run tape in binary format, and, if
stipulated by the primary control card, a binary program deck is punched. Any required library functions
are then loaded from the system tape, relocated, and
written onto tape 2. The object program listing is
printed at this point, if it was specified on the primary
control card.
relocatable binary.
H-400 machine code.
magnetic tape and/or
punched cards.
Easy II Input-Output macro.
no other systems or subprograms can be used.
Documentation
Subject
Provision
Source program: •
Object program: .
Storage map: . . .
Restart point list:
Language errors:
Listing
Listing
Listing
none.
Listing
.4.
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
1.
3.
2.
1.
The Automath-400 system exists on a library tape as
an object program entitled 4TRAN. When the Automath run has been started, Automath begins its activities by reading the input deck for the first job.
As the primary control card is read, an execution
option key is set up. If the primary control card
specifies program compilation with or without subsequent execution, Automath reads and analyzes the
TITLE (or SUBROlJfINE or FUNCTION), COMMON,
DIMENSION and EQUIVALENCE statements, and
6/63
When the above activities have been completed, Automath reads any binary subprogram decks, relocates
them, and writes them onto the run tape. Any preferred subprograms are written in segment 20f the
run tape. Overlay subprograms are written as individual segments, #3 through #n of the tape. If any
OVERLAY subprograms. overlay the main program,
Automath repeats segment 1 following segment #no
When a JOBEND card is encountered, Automath writes
an end-of-program and an end-of-information record
onto tape 2, and then switches the address of this tape
to 0, so that it becomes a program tape, and turns
control over to it. The Automath Monitor is then
automatically loaded, and it in turn loads segments I
and 2 of the object program. When a STOP statement
signals the completion of the program, control is returned to the Monitor, which switches the run tape address back to logical address 2, and returns control
to the Automath IRT. The appropriate procedure is
then carried out for the next job in the input deck, as
specified by the new primary control card. Automath
will eventually stall waiting for a job.deck to be loaded
into the card reader.
Conventions
• 321 Standard inclusions: •
· 322 Compatible with: .
(Contd. )
.42
.421
• 422
.423
. 424
Optional Mode
Translate: • .
Translate and run: .
Check only:
Patching: • . . . • .
...
yes.
yes.
yes •
no.
.43 . Special Features
.431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate:. . . . .
• 433 Short translate on
restricted program:
*
no.
no •
no.
If the primary control card specifies EXECUTE,
Automath activities begin at this point.
501:182.440
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: AUTOMATH-400
§
. 54
182.
.44
Bulk Translating:
. yes.
. 45
Program Diagnostics
. 451
. 452
• 453
.454
Tracers: .
Snapshots:
Dumps:.
Other: . .
.46
Translator Library
.
magnetic tape.
open.
open and closed.
none.
own coding.
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
. 511 Fixed overhead
Name: . . . .
Space: ..
Comment:
Resident, including
Automath Monitor, EASY
II I/O macro, Floating
Point simulator, Scaling
routine and Buffer areas.
911 words.
because of the inevitable
size of the resident program, space has been
saved 'Y~ere possible even
at the ·cost Of object
performance .
• 512 Space required for each
input-output file: .
none in addition to resident
program.
Translation Time
• 521 Normal translating:
. 53
.54
Optimizing Data: .
(2) Use of temporary storage for subscripts. Subscripts have the sole use of the three index registers during running time. Normally, each subscript is evaluated whenever used; however, if
an index register already holds the subscript,
and it is known that it cannot have been altered,
then no re-evaluation is undertaken.
Automath-400 library .
none.
.5
. 52
of these temporary storages are checked to see
if the expression has previously been formed and
can be picked from temporary storage directly .
This allows the repeated use of common subexpressions in a single expression without increasing the running time of a program .
none.
none .
none.
a number of errors cause
console print-outs at object
time. Processing then
continues automatically.
. 461 Identity:
.462 User restriction:
.463 Form
Storage medium: •
• 464 Contents
Routines: .
Functions:
Data descriptions:
.465 Librarianship
Insertion: .
100 statements per minute .
none specifically, but knowledge of some of the compilation methods allows
stylized writing which
improves efficiency.
Object Program Performance
These figures are based on hand coding, using the
standard floating pOint simulation package. If more
space were available, a faster package could be used.
Addition, subtraction, and multiplication take 4
milliseconds each; division takes 7; 2 milliseconds.
Two techniques can be used to improve object program performance time.
(1) Use of temporary storages for data.
Eleven locations are allocated cyclically for use as
temporary storage in each object program.
Before any expression is compiled, the contents
© 1963
Object Program Performance (Contd. )
Type
Time
Space
Elementary algebra:
Complex formulae:
Deep nesting:
Heavy branching:
Complex subscripts:
Data editing:
Overlapping operations:
unaffected
increased
unaffected
unaffected
doubled
unaffected
not possible in
Automath-400
unaffected.
unaffected •
unaffected.
unaffected.
increased.
unaffected.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating: Computer
.611 Minimum configuration: H-400 with 4 tape units,
2,048 words of store, card
reader, printer.
.612 Larger configuration
advantages:. . • . .
a card punch or an extra
tape unit allows the object
program to be stored on
cards or tape,
respectively.
.62
Target Computer
.621 Minimum configuration: I-i-400 with 2,048 wores of
store, 2 tape units.
.622 Usable extra facilities: up to 8 tape units can be
utilized •
.7
§"RRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Missing entlies:
Unsequenced entlies:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Target computer
overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Check or
Interlock
check
not needed.
no check.
check.
Action
entry on listlng.
check during loading only.
check
listing.
Upon detection of object program errors, processing
normally continues, even after it is definite that the
output is valueless. Further, although the error has
been noted by a console typewriter message, no indication is given on the printout. Thus, the bad output
can still be used.
This condition occurs whenever a function is improperly utilized (such as_ asktngto]:, t!ie s~uare root
or logarithm of a negative number), upon incorrect
results from a truncation, or upon exponent errors of
various sorts.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
501: 191.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Honeywell 400
Operating Environment
EASY Monitor
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: EASY MONITOR
.44
§ 191.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ••
• 12
Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
EASY Monitor.
Minneapolis - Honeywell
Regulator Co.
May, 1962.
Loading input error:
Allocation impossible:
In-out error - single:
In-out error - pezs Istent:
Overflow:
Invalid instructions:
Program conflicts:
Description:
Production or test programs to be performed are
selected from a Master Program Tape and stored
on a run tape. The run tape contains test data,
derails (type and point of dumps), and the routines
for each program. Distribution of test data, operation of program, dynamic dumping, and sequencing
to next program may be automatic or under control
of operator type-ins. These functions use 200 words
of core storage.
.45
not possible.
none.
yes.
yes.
yes •
interlock..
interlock.
Action
automatic recovery.
program control.
forced jump.
forced jump.
wait.
Restarts
.451 Establishing restart
points:. • • • • •
control cards designate
restart points in routines.
type-in.
.452 Restarting process:
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
PROGRAM LOADING
.• 51
Dynamic
Source of Programs
.511 Tracing.
.• 512 Snapshots:.
only via snapshots •
yes, points selected
by programmer.
.52
Post Mortem: • • • •
yes, automatic - included
in system; may require
console forced jump to
Monitor •
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
.61
Signals to Operator
• 13
Availability:..
.2
• 21
1962 •
Master Program Tape •
must be incorporated during the preparation of the
Run Tape.
• 211 Libraries: ••
• 212 Independents:
• 22
Library Sub-Routines:.
none
.23
Loading Sequence:
Program sequence may be
detennmed when the run
tape is prepared by a set
of cards, one card per
program. At execution
time, there are 2 modes
of operation: 1) serial or
2) specific (under control
of operator type-ins).
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage:.....
•• 32
Input-Output Units
incorporated in program.
.• 611 Decision required by
operator:
'.612 Action required by
operator:
•613 Reporting progress of
run:
•62
Operator' s Decision: •
.63
Operator's Signals
.321 Initial assignment: • • • incorporated in program •
• 322 Alternation: • • •
incorporated in program.
• 323 Reassignment: • •
type-ins.
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
• 41
Simultaneous Working:
incorporated in program.
.42
Multi-Running: .
own programming, using
standard techniques.
.7
LOGGING
none.
~71
Operator Signals:.
.43
Check or
InterloCk
Multisequencing:.
•
© 1963
.631 Inquiry:. • • • •
.632 Change of normal
progress:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
yes, console printout.
yes, console printout •
console printout each time
a program is loaded •
breakpoint switches.
console forced jumps •
type-ins •
type-outs .
type-ins.
yes - console typewritten.
Revised 6/63
501: 191.720
§
HONEYWELL 400
191.
• 72
Operator Decisions: •
yes - console typewritten.
.73
Run Progress
yes - console typewritten.
•74
Errors:...
yes - console typewritten.
.75
Running Times:
• ••
no.
•76
Multi-Running Status:.
no.
6/63 Revised
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
Program Loading Time: search time + load time •
(The search time may be
zero.)
.82
Reserved Equipment:.
200 words •
.83
Running Overhead: • •
control is transferred from
the program to the monitor
under four conditions:
1) read error.
2) segment (or overlay)
loading.
3) dynamic dumping •
4) program exit.
501:201.001
STANDARD
REPORTS
Honeywell 400
Notes on System Performance
NOTES ON SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§ 201.
The format design and blocking of the main file were major considerations during the
preparation of the System Performance data. Some of the more unusual factors which were
considered were:
(1) The Block Length
The magnetic tape block length had to be short enough for a complete read or
write operation to be completed within 18 milliseconds, to avoid the possibility
of destroying the data transferred during the card read operations. The blocking factor is thus restricted to 2 on those configurations with the slowest model
tape unit (H-404-3).
(2) The Approximate Central Processor Interlock Time for the Magnetic Tape Units
The central processor is interlocked from the time the tape instruction is given
until the time the data transfer has been completed. The interlock time consists
of the data transfer time itself, the normal start time, and an additional time
which is necessary to pass over the remainder of the tape which makes up the
inter-block gap.
It is assumed that this distance includes all the gap not passed over during the
starting or stopping of the tape. This adds 2.7 milliseconds per block to the
time the tape units interlock the central processor.
(3) The Timing of the Card Reader and Printer
Because H-400 input-output and computation operations are performed independently of each other and serially, it was not evident that either the card
reader or printer would be able to operate at maximum speed for the entire
program. Accordingly, an allowance for the time used waiting for their respective clutch points to be reached was added, whenever appropriate, to their
timings •• These are reflected in the increased overheads on the central
Processor. A further complication was the probability of additional delay in
central processor operation when an interlock might be caused by the execution
of one of several types of instructions between the start-up of a card reader and
the actual data transfer from it. These instructions are mUltiply, print, tape
read-write, etc., and they automatically interlock the central processor so that
data transfers from the card reader are possible. No loading was computed to
cover these delays; thus, the central processor time may be slightly understated.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
501 :201.011
Honeywell 400
System Performance
HON EYWEll 400
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
501:201.012
HONEYWELL 400
HONEYWELL 400 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE
1
Configurotion
Worksheet
1
Input.
Output
Times
Item
Reference
II
III
IV
432
432
1,104
2
2
5
24.5 totlll
24.5 totlll
21.1
File 3
75.0
75.0
75.0
File 4
115.0
115.0
115.0
-----
---
---
-------
-----
14.6
14.6
16.6
File 3
46
46
46
File 4
52
1.3
1.3
al
1.1
1.1
2.3
msec/record
a2
2.8
2.8
2.8
msec/detail
b6
0.2
0.2
0.2
msec/work
b5 It b9
14.97
8.97
8.97
msec/report
b7 +b8
0.4
0.4
0.4
msec/block
for C.P.
and
'dominant
column.
al
1.1
1.1
2.3
a2 K
5.6
5.6
14.0
a3 K
31.1
19.1
47.4
' } li..6
} 16'.6
(File l)a
Char/block
Records/block
K
msec/block
File 1
msec/switch
File 1
(File 1)
= File
= File
2
2
File 3
File 4
msec/penillty
2
Central
Processor
Times
3
' msec/block
Standard
Problem A
= File
2
File 1 Master In
File 2 Master Out
F = 1.0
4
File 1
Unit of measure
4:200.1132
4:200.114
File 3 Details b
120.0
File 4 Reports
104.0
230
8.0
230
20.0
575
Totlll
278.4
2,30
170.4
230
400.3
575
120.0
300.0
word
Std. routine s
Standard
Problem A
Space
}lM
4:200.112
200
140
140
Fixed
94
94
94
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
90
90
90
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
360
360
360
Files
156
156
156
18
18
18
828
768
768
4:200.1151
Working
Totlll
=Includes
Expressed as 4-bit characters. Used as a mixture of 4-bit and 6-bit characters in unpacked form.
1ll1owance for is milliseconds caused by prohibition of certain instructions during start of card read cycles.
6/63 Revised
SO 1:20 1. lOQ
•
I)
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
Honeywell 400
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORM'ANCE
§
201.
.113 Timing Basis:
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
. 11
Standard File Problem A Estimates
• 111 Record Sizes
Master File: .
Detail File:
Report File:
. 112 Computation:
. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 .
. 114 Graph:. . . . . . . . see graph below .
.115 Storage Space Required
Configuration II: .
Configuration III:
Configuration IV:
Word: • . . . .
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
. standard.
828 words .
768 words.
768 words.
2 char.
3 digits •
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10. 000 Master
File Records
2
~:;;
-
10.0
7
4
2
1.0
--
--'
/'
/~
~
n/ ..,50
1,950
270
475
69,750
79,800
100
20
4;800
1,050
210
47,250
100
20
4, SOO
390
19.50
17,550
325
52.25
14,700
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
6/63
501 :221.102
HONEYWELL 400
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§
221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
INPUTOUTPUT
(CONTD.)
423-2A
436-1
440
480
4"1.1
427-2A
6/63 Revised
Name
Optional Equipment
Pocket Select
Tape Control Unit (1 Max.) for
compatibility with other
manufacturers' tapes.
Optical Scanner and Control
(1 Max.)
Q>Inmunications Control (1 Max.)
Card Reader-Card Punch
(800 CPM/250 CPM)
(1402 Modell)
Pocket Selection Feature
(for the ~odel 427)
Monthly
Rental
PRICES
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
15
1,380
0.30
195
675
62,100
2,530
505
121,440
790
79
35,550
550
30,000
15
675
HONEYWEll 800
Honeywell EDP Division
(r-
(
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
HONEYWEll 800
Honeywell EOP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
502:001.001
STANDARD
Honeywell 800
Contents
REPORTS
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
S.
9.
10.
11.
12.
14.
15.
Introduction.
.
H-SOO-II Summary Analysis
Data Structure .
. • •
System Configuration
Notes on On-line and Off-line System Configuration
Configuration V, 6-Tape Auxiliary .
Configuration VI, 6-Tape Business/Scientific
Configuration VII A, lO-Tape Integrated
Configuration VII B, 10- Tape Paired . .
Configuration VIII A, 20-Tape Integrated . •
Configuration VIII B, 20-Tape Paired General.
Internal Storage
Control Memory
Core Storage
H-S60
Magnetic Disc File
Central Proces sor
H-S01
Central Processor
Console.
..•
••
•
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
H-S09
Punched Tape Reader and Control
H-SlO
Punched Tape Punch and Control
H-S23
Card Reader
H-S27
Card Reader
H-S27
Card Punch
Input-Output; Printers
H-S22-3
High Speed Printer
H- S22-1 and 2 Standard Printers
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape
H-S04
Magnetic Tape Units
Input-Output: Other
H-8S0
Communication Control Unit
H - S40
Optical Scanner •
Simultaneous Operations
Instruction List. • • • • • ••
•
Data Codes
Collating Sequence and Card Units
General • • • • •
Standard Printer •
High Speed Printer •
Console Typewriter
Problem Oriented Facilities
502:011
502:012
502:021
502:031. 001
502:031.1
502:031.2
502:031.3
502:031.4
502:031.5
502:031.6
502:041
502:042
502:043
502:051
502:061
502:071
502:072
502:073
502:074
502:075
502:0S1
502:0S2
502:091
502:101
502:102
502:111
502:121
(INA)
502:141
502:142
502:143
502:144
502:145
502:151
INA = Information Not Available
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised
5/63
HONEYWELL 800
502:001. 002
CONTENTS (Contd.)
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Revised
Process Oriented Languages
Automath-800
FACT . . . . . . • . • •
COBOL . . . • . . • . •
Machine Oriented Languages
ARGUS • • . . •
Program Translators
COBOL-800 • • .
Operating Environment
ARGUS (for Production Runs)
System Performance . • . . .
Worksheet Data • . • . • •
Generalized File Processing
Sorting • . . . • • . • . •
Matrix Inversion. • . • . .
Generalized Mathematical Processing •
Generalized Statistical Processing.
.
Physical Characteristics
Price Data. . . . • • • . • . • • •
5/63
502:161
502:162
502:163
502:171
502:182
502:191
502:201
502:201. 011
502:201.1
502:201. 2
502:201. 3
502:201.4
502:201. 5
502:211
502:221
502:011.100
DP
Honeywell 800
Introduction
REPQRTS
I NTRODUCTI ON
§
OIl.
The H- SOO is a medium to large computer system designed to process more than one
program at a time *. This is an attempt to reduce the inefficiencies of individual programs,
which are usually input-output or central processor limited. In any installation, the degree
of success of mUlti-program operations depends upon how well the programs selected balance the sum of the demands on the central processor with the demands on the peripheral
units. In practice, installations with time- sharing programs operate an average of two programs at a time, with peaks of five or six. (The hardware is capable of sharing the central
processor time among up to eight programs.)
The H-800 rents for between $18,000 and $40,000 a month, depending on the configuration, and size, is intermediate between the H-400 and the new H-1400 on the one hand, and the
H-1800 on the other. The H-800 uses the same data-codes as the H-400 and the H-1400, and
thus, magnetic tapes can be interchanged between these systems. The H-1800 can run H·800
programs, as the H-800 order code is a subset of the H-1800 code.
The multi-running* feature of the H-800 is particularly valuable where large volume
input-output files are processed with either relatively little or peaked internal processing.
Typical applications of this character are found in the insurance and utility fields. This
approach also permits a program mix which includes a series of scientific (low volume inputoutput) computation programs.
The manufacturer has undertaken the development of software which should encourage
more use of multi-running. A package has been released for controlling up to seven simultaneous conversions between cards, paper tape, magnetic tape, and hard copy. The
elimination of the separate "program testing" executive system has been proposed because
many installations tend to retain it after testing has been completed rather than convert to
the different operating requirements of the standard production executive system.
The H-SOO has the capacity to execute 30,000 three-address instructions per second.
The computer uses a 48- bit word, either as 44 bits plus sign character, 11 decimal digits
plus sign character, or 12 unsigned decimal digits. Alphameric characters can be stored
eight to a word, but cannot be used in arithmetic.
Decimal and binary computing facilities are available in the H-800, as are multiword transfers, which allow economical programming. However, the computer has no
facility for easy conversion of external data codes to internal code, or vice versa. All
shifts are right end-around shifts, so that editing is costly. An edit generator and several
standard routines are available, but most routines appear to be written for individual cases.
The H-800 storage is divided into two parts, a Control Memory with eight "program
groups," and a Main Memory Which is divided into banks of 2, 04S 4S-bit words. The basic
H-SOO has two of these banks; larger units can contain up to 14. The eight program groups
are included in all cases. Each of these eight groups can control a separate program. A
total of 64 (eight per group) index registers are prOVided. The addressing structure is such
that while any program can reach or use any location in storage, it is necessary to use one
of a number of special addreSSing methods when referring to addresses in other program
groups or other bJP>
_
,
R£f'OR1S
~
','
-
Honeywell 800
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
Usually, one card reader, punch, or printer is connected to one controller to one channel; and several
magnetiC tape units to one controller to a pair of
channels. Therefore,' the degree of simultaneity is
limited by the types of connections and the limited
numbers of channels, controllers, and units. Each
simultaneous transfer by a unit monopolizes its
channel (wired at installation time), and its controller, or part of its controller.
111.
.1
SPECIAL UNITS
.12
Description
Simultaneous operations can be considered at two
levels:
(1) Simultaneous Programs.
.2
(2) Simultaneous Transfers.
P = 'Number of output channels to which controllers
are connected.
Q = Number of input channels to which controllers
are connected.
Program Simultaneity
Several programs can be run simultaneously by the
H- 800. Such operation is mechanized (described
under Central Processor, Paragraph :051. 3)
by executing one instruction in turn from each of
several programs. In the core storage, input-output transfers always receive priority over the central processor, taking place at the first available
core storage cycle. Interruptions are handled within the program concerned and do not cause any
slow-down of the other programs.
Software affects simultaneity only insofar as the
operating system allows. In ARGUS, a restriction
exists that when loading any sector of any program
into storage, all other programs are halted. The
length of the halt depends on the position of the tape
concerned, and while normally a matter of 20 to 50
milliseconds, it could be a full second in cases
where three or four large- scale programs are
being run simultaneously.
The following rules show what degree of simultaneous operation is possible at various levels of control in the Central Processor:
Maximum number of programs
simultaneously running
8.
Maximum number of interrupts
simultaneously being handled
8.
Maximum number of instructions
being proces sed
l.
Maximum number of storage
references
l.
Maximum number of other programs
running in parallel with the
standard executive routine
O.
Transfer Simultaneity
Each H- 800 has eight input and eight output channels,
each of which can operate simultaneously with all
the others and the other Central Processors.
Peripheral units are connected to channels via controllers. A variety of controllers are available.
In general, it is possible to connect eight units to a
controller which is connected to one, or a pair of
channels, or to connect eight controllers to one, or
a pair of channels, each controller having only one
unit.
© 1963
CONDITIONS
.3
CLASSES OF OPERATIONS
Operation
Class
Read magnetic tape backward or forward.
Write magnetiC tape
Rewind
Read a card
~l Read paper tape
Read scanner
r Punch a card
J Print a line
Punch paper tape
Transmit to data transmission unit
A
B
C
r
D
'1
E
.4
RULES
.41
Configuration Restrictions
a +d
b+e
. 42
= at most q
= at most p
Access Restrictions
When any tape unit is operating at a higher transfer
rate than 32, 000 alpha char/sec, further restrictions
on the total number of simultaneous input-output
transfers exist.
If any tape transfer rate of 124,000 alpha char/sec
. is in use: a + b + d + e may not exceed 9.
If any tape transfer rate of 88, 000 alpha char/sec
is in use: a + b + d + e may not exceed 13.
These limits are attainable only with little or no use
of Distributed Read-Gather Write facilities.
If these are used, then in the worst cases:
If any tape transfer rate of 124,000 alpha char/sec
is in use: a + b + d + e may not exceed 4.
If any tape transfer rate of 88,000 alpha char/sec
is in use: a + b + d + e may not exceed 6.
If any tape transfer rate of 164,000 alpha char/sec
is in use: a + b + d + e may not exceed 9.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
502:121.101
•
II
§
STANDARD
ElOP
REroRTS
Honeywell 800
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
121.
INSTRllCTION
OPERATION
A
B
C
DA
a
c
BA
a
a
b
b
b
OP Code
AritIunetic
WA
DS
a
BS
a
a
a
b
b
b
b
a
B
BT
DM
a
B
a
BT
a
b
b
SM
HA
a
a
EX
a
MT
TN
IT
RT
a
a
SWS
a
SPS
a
SWE
SPE
SSL
WD
HA
DT
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
}
(A) + (B)--7 C, in decimal, signed binary, or
absolute binary mode.
}
(A) - (B)~C, in decimal, signed binary, or
absolute binary mode.
}
(A) + (B)~C, in binary with no carries.
a l + a 2 ••• + a B ----;.. C, in binary or decimal mode.
Signs are assumed to be all positive or all negative.
}
(A) x (B)----;.. C, in decimal or signed binary mode.
Logic
(A) superimposed on (B) ~ C (Inclusive OR).
(A) hali-add to (B)~ C (Exclusive OR).
Logical AND (A) with (B), result to C.
c
c
c
Transfers
a
a
B
B
b
b
c
a
a
B
B
B
B
a
B
c
NA
NN
a
a
c
c
LA
a
a
a
b
b
b
b
b
a
a
b
b
LN
TS
CP
CC
(A)~C, B times. A and C can be incremented.
B words, starting at A, moved to B words starting at C.
Move an item starting at A to an area starting at C.
Move a record, starting at A to an area starting at C.
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
Shifts
Right-end-around shift (A) B binary places and store
in C. Different orders allow for sign treatment and
protection of present contents of C.
}
Transfer control to C modified by (A) shifted around
B bits.
Comparison
Jump to C if (A) t- (B) when treated alphabetically.
Jump to C if (A) t- (B) when treated numerically.
Jump to C if (A) ~ (B) when treated alphabetically.
Jump to C if (A) .:::; (B) when treated numerically.
Jump to C, and transfer (A) to (B).
c
c
c
Miscellaneous
Check Parity of (A). If incorrect, jump to C.
Orthocount the record starting at A, ending at C - 1.
If required, use scarier read techniques under control
of the table stored starting in B. Record the orthocount in C and C + 1 •
Simulate. Form a memory address (direct or indexed)
from the low-order 11 bits of the command code and
store this instruction in the location thus specified.
Jump under control of the co-sequence counter.
c
c
S
Scientific Instructions
Floating Point - Normalized
FBA
FDA
a
a
FBS
a
FDS
FBM
FDM
a
a
a
© 1963
b
b
b
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
"\
J
(A) + (B)-+C, in binary or decimal mode.
}
(A) -
c
c
}
(A) x (B)----;" C, and a special register, in binary or
decimal mode.
(B)~C,
in binary or decimal mode.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
502: 121.102
§
HONEYWELL 800
121.
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
OP Code
A
B
C
a
a
a
a
-
c
c
c
c
c
}
a
b
b
b
b
FBAU
FDAU
FBSU
FDSU
a
a
a
a
b
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
1
BD
DD
a
a
b
b
c
c
A
B
C
Floating Point - NormaJized (Contd. )
FBD
FDD
FLN
FNN
ULD
(B) / (A) ~C, in binary or decimal mode.
Jump to C if (A)". (B)
Jump to C if (A) ~ (B)
Store a double-length product into A and C.
Floating Point - Unnormalized
(A) + (B)-?o-C, in binary or decimal mode.
j
(A) -
(B)~C,
in binary or decimal mode.
Fixed Point
(A)~ C, in binary or decimal mode. The
remainder can be retained.
(B) /
INSTRUCTION
I/O
Channel
Device
X
X
RF
a
b
c
X
X
RB
a
b
c
X
X
X
X
WF
RW
a
a
b
b
c
c
X
X
X
X
X
X
PRA
PRD
PRO
a
a
a
b
b
b
2/63
OP Code
OPERATION
Peripheral Instructions
Read forward from peripheral device XX into consecutive locations beginning at A. If distributed read is
required, use the table starting at B. Interruption
occurs in case of end of file or error in previous
block is encountered.
Read Backwards, otherwise as Read Forward
Instruction.
Write Forward; otherwise as Read Forward.
Rewind Magnetic Tape or Paper Tape Unit XX. Lock
can be specified. Interruption occurs if an error
occurred on previous block.
Print the contents of A on the console typewriter.
Alphabetic, Decimal, or Octal format can be specified. Format instructions are given in B.
J
502: 141.1 00
•
STANDARD
•
EDP
•
'-
Honeywell 800
Dota Code Table
Collating Sequence
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1
§
. 23
141.
Character Codes
In ascending sequence, quoted in terms of key
punch symbols. (The numeric collating
sequence ends after the first 16 symbols. )
Collating Sequence and
Card Units.
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size: .
.22
Character Structure:. . 4 bits or 6 bits, intermingled in a word.
..
4 bits (numeric) or 6 bits
(alphameric)
© 1963
Internal
Code in
Octal
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
.11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Character
or
Key Punch
Internal
Code in
Octal
G
H
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
I
71
(y, B, 2)
72
73
74
75
76
77
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
(B, 2)
#
@
'Space
(B, 6)
(B, 7)
&
A
B
C
D
E
F
(y,
(y,
(y,
(y,
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
B, 4)
B, 5)
B, 6)
0)
Character
or
Key Punch
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
(X, B, 2)
$
*
(X, B, 5)
(X, B, 6)
(X, 0)
(8, 5)
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
(0, B, 2)
,
(
(0, 8, 5)
(0, B, 6)
(0, B, 7)
2/63
502:142.100
·STAND"'D
EDP
•
REPORTS
Honeywell 800
Dota Code Table
General
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
142.
.1
USE OF CODE: •
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
• 21
Character Size: .
.22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern:
.222 Less significant
pattern:
.
General and Magnetic
Tape.
Common to all I/O
equipment.
6 bits.
2 zone bits; B, A
16.
= 32,
4 numeric bits; 8, 4,
2, 1.
.23
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
48
0
16
32
0
0
+
-
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
$
,
*
(
10
11
=
)
12
13
blank
14
15
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
502: 143.1 00
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
RE!'ORTS
Honeywell BOO
Data Code Table
Standard Printer
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3
§
143.
.23
.1
USE OF CODE: •
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
• 21
Character Size: • . •
.22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: • • •
.222 Less significant
pattern: • . •
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
Standard Printer.
6 bits •
2 zone bits; B, A
16.
Character Codes
=32,
4 numeric bits; 8, 4,
2, 1.
0
16
32
48
0
0
+
-
-
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
10
9
I
R
11
=
12
-
13
© 1963
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
blank
14
=
15
-
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
$
,
)
*
(
)
*
(
$
,
0
(
0
2/63
•
502: 144.100
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
Honeywell 800
Data Code Table
High Speed Printer
DATA CODE TABLE NO. 4
§
144.
.1
USE OF CODE:.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
. 21
Character Size:. . .
. 22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: . • •
.222 Less significant
pattern: • . .
.23
High Speed Printer.
6 bits .
2 zone bits; B, A = 32,
16.
4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2,
1.
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNlF ICANT
PATTERN
0
16
32
48
0
0
+
-
blank
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
;
#
@
$
,
)
*
(
10
© 1963
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
,
11
=
12
:
13
blank
%
"
CR
14
blank
III
blank
blank
15
$
blank
blank
blank
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
502: 145.1 00
.SlANOARO
EDP
•
REPORTS
Honeywell 800
Data Code Table
Console Typewriter
DATA CODE TABLE NO. 5
•§
145.
• 23
•1
USE OF CODE: •
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
. 21
Character Size:. • •
.22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: . • •
.222 Less significant
pattern: . . •
Console Typewriter.
6 bits •
2 zone bits; B, A
16.
= 32,
4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2,
1.
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
16
32
48
0
0
+
-
0
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
;
#
@
,
10
© 1963
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
,
11
=
.
$
12
:
)
*
(
13
blank
%
"
CR
14
¢
LI!lI
~
0
15
&
A
?
®
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
502: 151.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
Honeywell 800
Problem Oriented Facilities
REPORTS
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
151.
.13
·1
UTILITY ROUTINES
· 11
Simulators of Other Computers
H-400
Reference:
Manual DSI-89, H-400 Easy
Programs on the H-800.
July, 1961.
Own coding facilities are provided.
Date available: .
Description
An integrated package of routines for assembling,
debugging and running of programs written in
H-400 Easy Language on the H-800.
H-650
Reference: . . .
Manual, 650 Simulator for
the H-800.
Date available: .
August, 1960.
Description
A package of routines for simulating input conversion, processing, output conversion of mM
650 programs.
UNIVAC I & II
Reference: . . .
Manual Honeywell 800 Univac Simulator.
Date available: .
August, 1961.
Description
The UNIVAC Simulator package contains two programs. One simulates the central processor of
the UNIVAC I or II, the second simulates card
conversion and printing.
Scientific Option Simulation
Reference: . . .
ESMESS01, H-800 Subroutine Library.
Date available: . . . . February, 1960.
Description
A package of routines that simulates scientific
option hardware. 80lB Floating Point Option.
• 12
Simulation by Other
Computers:. . . . . . none.
· 13
Data Sorting and Merging
Fact Compiler Sort
Reference: .
Record size:
Block size:
Key size: .
File size: •
Data Sorting and Merging (Contd.)
A sort on this type of file does not change the structure (it remains an Inventory File consisting of
Items within Product Groups within Areas), but can
change the order of each header (product Groups,
Areas, or Items) within itself.
FACT Manual.
see description.
:5: 28,! :5. pS, :5 256 words.
any number of keys.
each reel is sorted separately, then merged
under manual control.
3 to 5.
1961.
Number of tapes: .
Date available: . .
Description:
This routine provides sorting on FACT type files
where records are not used singly, but as a hierarchy of headers, each of which may have a number
of subgroups. A typical file would be aldnventory
File consisting of Items, within Product Groups,
within Areas. Here each "record" would effectively
consist of all the information in the Area header and
the Group header, as well as in the individual item.
© 1963
H-SOO Sort Package
Reference: .
Record size:
Block size:
Key size: .
File size: .
DSI-43A, Sort and Collate
Manual.
variable.
variable; preset number of
records.
preset; maximum one full
item.
one reel of tape or equivalent partial reels.
3 to 6.
December, 1960.
Number of tapes: .
Date available: . .
Description
Two parts, presort and merge sort. Presort
builds continuous strings of items in memory
taking advantage of any pre-ordering of the Data.
Merge sort is of Cascade type, in which the
power of sort is one less than the number of
tapes used.
H-SOO Collate Package
DSI-43A, Sort and Collate
Reference: .
Manual.
variable.
Record size:
variable; preset number of
Block size:
records.
preset; maximum one full
Key size: .
item.
99 reels of tape.
File size:.
3 to 13 tapes.
Number of tapes: .
December, 1960.
Date available: . .
Description
The collate routine can be a 2-way, 3-way, 4way or 5-way merge. Input in each of the above
can be a single input tape or a second or alternate
tape. Output can be on one file or an alternate.
Included, if desired, is a restart dump tape.
.14
Report Writing
Edit Generator
Reference: . .
DSI-129, Edit Generator
and Tape I/O Manual.
1961.
Date available: .
Description
The Edit Generator is a library routine which
may be used to prepare reports. The Edit Generator creates routines which obtain data from a
source location, edit it and record it on tape or
print it on-line.
Report Writer
Date available: • . . . 1961.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
HONEYWELL BOO
502: 151.150
151.
• 15 Data Transcription
'.17
§
Routine
Name
Timing
Function
(~)
Max Central
Processor Loading
E1AMCED1 Edits card input
1.3+0.4N 33.3 ms per card.
E1FAMED1i. Edits output for l 1 5+ 0 4N (49: 5 per 120 char
•
\. lme.
E1MAPED1J printer
J •
1. 0 per number.
E1FDC2M1 Edits floating point 1. 0 per
number
numbers packed
4 to a card
Card-to-tape routines are presently being prepared
for floating decimal and floating binary. No straight
transcription routines are included in the H-SOO
either for card-to-tape or for tape-to-printer.
.16
Other
Double-Precision and Complex Arithmetic Package
Reference: . . . . . . H-SOo Subroutine Library.
Date available: . • . . 1960.
Description
A series of packages for double-precision and
complex arithmetic have been provided. Separate
packages deal with specific changes of operands,
such as fixed decimal, floating binary, etc. The
timings are summarized in the following table:
2/63
Type of Arithmetie
Timings (ms)
+
-
x
+
Double-Precision
Fixed decimal
Floatinl1: decimal
Fixed binary
Floating binary
O.SS 0.92 2.45 4.32
Packal1:e not yet available.
No package planned.
0.9
2.1
0.9
1.1
Complex Arithmetic
Fixed decimal
Floating cfecimal
Fixed binary
. Floating binary
0.9
3.1
0.9
I.S
No package planned.
No packal1:e planned.
O.S
O.S
1.1
2.1
File Maintenance
FACT Compiler
Description
The FACT Compiler includes File Maintenance
provisions. (See under Section Proolem Oriented
Languages, FACT Compiler).
.17
Other (Contd.)
Code Conversion Routines
The H-SoO has a number of possible ways of representing numbers. A number of routines for converting from one form to another are available and
are listed below.
Fixed Decimal to Fixed
Binary: • . . . •.
2. 5 msec.
Floating Decimal to
Floating Binary:.
3. S msec.
Floating Binary to
Floating Decimal:
5.2 msec.
Floating Decimal to
Fixed Decimal: . . '. 2. 7 msec.
Radians to Degrees, in
Fixed Decimal: • . . o. S msec.
Degrees to Radians, in
Fixed Decimal: . . . O. 9 msec.
502: 161.100
•
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
ED
P
Honeywell 800
Process Oriented Language
Automath-800
PROCESS ORI EN TED LANGUAGE: AUTOMATH-800
§
161.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
AUTOMATH-800 •
. 12
Origin:.
Honeywell EDP.
. 13
Reference: ..
Honeywell EDP Publications
DSI-448.
• 14
Description
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
.21
Divisions: . . . • . • • one division, composed of
the following types of
statements.
Procedure statements: algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps •
input and output.
Data statements: . • . FORMAT: describes the
layout, size scaling, and
code of input-output data.
EQUIVALENCE: used to
cause two variables to
have a common location
or to specify synonyms.
COMMON: used to cause a
name to be common to
more than one segment
rather than local to each.
DIMENSION: describes the
elements in each dimension of an array or set of
arrays.
.22
Procedure Entities
Restrictions and extensions of the AUTOMATH-800
language relative to mM 709/7090 FORTRAN II are
summarized below.
Restrictions:
(1) Double precision and complex arithmetic are not
permitted, but can be implemented by entering
machine assembly language.
(2) IF SENSE SWITCH and IF SENSE LIGHT test
the status of specific core storage locations.
The monitor system must be used to alter the
settings of these pseudo sense switches.
Program: . .
Subroutine: .
Function: •
Statement:
(3) The following statements have not been implemented: FREQUENCY, READ DRUM, WRITE
DRUM.
(4) The CHAIN feature, which facilitates segmentation of programs too large to fit into core storage, has not been implemented. A similar feature, OVERLAY, has been incorporated for this
purpose.
.23
all variables.
integer variable or
constant.
floating point variable or
constant.
Boolean variable or
constant.
Hollerith item.
alphameric item.
Hollerith item: • • . • alphameric item that can
be used only for input and
output.
Alphameric: . • . • • alphameric item that can
be only input, output, or
in FORMAT, CALL, or
IF statements.
(1) The following number ranges can be handled:
Floating point: . . 1O- T6 10+7 5
Integer:. . . . . . -244 to +244
Boolean: •• . . . 16 octal digits (48 bits).
(2) Subscripts may be integer constants, integer
variables, integer functions, or any fixed point
arithmetic expressions.
(3) BUFFER statements allocate areas for the buffered reading or writing of one block on magnetic tape from sequential core storage locations, allowing tape/computation overlap.
(5) Two card readers, two card punches, and two
printers can be referenced separately by the
READ, PUNCH, and PRINT statements.
(6) Assembly code instructions can be interspersed.
.15
Data Entities
Arrays: •
Item: . .
Extensions:
(4) The statements IF (BOF), and IF (PARITY) permit tests for end-of-file conditions, and for
parity errors.
.24
Names
.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet: . • . • .
Size: • . • • . • .
Avoid key words:.
Formation rule:
Publication Date:. . . . 1960, as algebraic
compiler.
© 1963
subroutines and functions.
statements.
statements.
characters; . blanks are
ignored.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
A to Z, 0 to 9.
1 to 6 char.
no.
first char must be letter.
do not use final F if name
is more than 3 char long.
2/63
502: 161.242' '
§
HONEYWELL 800
161.
.242 Designators
Procedures'
Statement label:
Function label: .
.~
Subroutine label:
'Data
. Integer variables:
Floating point
variables: .
Equipment
Card: . . . .
Magnetic tape:
Printer: • • . .
Comments: . . .
Translator control:
.25
.......
initial I, ], K, L, M, N.
any other initial letter .
implied by verbs READ,
PUNCH.
use key word TAPE, or
READ, WRITE.
implied by verb PRINT.
C in col. 1 of statement.
key words EQUIVALENCE,
COMMON.
Structure of Data Names
.251 Qualified names:. .
.252 Subscripts
Number per item:
Applicable to:
Class may be Special
index variable:
Any variable:.
Literal: . • .
Expression:
..
Form may be.
, Intege'r only:
Signed: ••.
Truncated fraction:
Rounded fraction:
. 253 Synonyms
Preset: ..
....
Dynamically set: .
. 26
unsigned integer.
same as variable being
defined.
none.
o to 3.
all variables •
no.
only integers.
yes; only integers.
any integer expression or
function.
yes.
no.
no.
no .
EQUIVALENCE statement
causes sharing of storage
locations.
no.
Number of Names
Region of Meaning of
Names: . . . . . . .
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES
· 31
Methods of Direct Data Description
.311
· 312
· 313
.314
.315
· 316
.317
· 318
.319
Concise item picture:
List by kind: . . . . .
Qualify by adjective: .
Qualify by phrase: .
Qualify by code: . .
Hierarchy by list: •
Level by indenting:
Level by coding: . .
Others
Array size:. . . .
Four-digit integer:.
Four-digit integers,S:
Floating point items:.
FORMAT statement only.
no.
no.
no.
first letter of name.
no .
no.
no.
.32
Files and Reels: . .
own coding.
.33
Records and Blocks
.331 Variable record size:
.332 Variable block size: .
none.
.261 All entities: . . • . . • no .practicallimit.
• 262 Procedures
Numbered statements:
. FSubrOt~tines:
. }no practical limit.
unc Ions:
•
Others: •
~ 263 Data
no limit.
Files: .•
no practical limit.
Record formats:
Items: . • .
no practical limit.
• 264 Equipment
Tape units: •
64.
Card readers:
2.
2.
Card punches:
Printers: . . .
1.
.27
.3
. 333 Record size range:
.334 Block size
READ TAPE,
WRITE TAPE:
READ INPUT TAPE,
WRITE OUTPUT
TAPE: . . . . .
no limit (binary format).
Data Items
by name.
.341 Designation of class:
.342 Possible classes
yes.
Integer: . • . .
no .
Fixed point: .
yes.
Floating point:
yes.
Logical: . . .
yes.
Alphameric: .
.343 Choice of external
radix:. . . . . . .
FORMAT statement •
• 344 Possible external radices
Decimal: • . . . ..
yes.
Octal:. . . . . . .•
yes.
alpha automatic left justi.345 Internal justification:
fied.
integers automatic right
justified.
· 346 Choice of external code: FORMAT statement and
READ, WRITE statement.
"
!
2/63
dynamic.
specified in BUFFER
statement •
1 to N blocks.
up to 120 characters
(BCD format).
READ PUNCH:.
80 columns.
PRINT: . . . • .
120 characters.
.335 Choice of record size:. READ, WRITE statement.
.336 Choice of block size:
fixed for READ, PUNCH;
READ INPUT TAPE and
WRITE OUTpr~ TAPE .
variable and determiv'd by
statement and data itself
for READ TAPE, WRITE
TAPE •
own coding.
• 33l Sequence control: . .
own coding, using IF
· 338 In -out error control:
clauses .
none; lor more full blocks'
.339 Blocking control:.
per logical record .
.34
all names are local to the
program, subroutine, or
function in which they are
defined unless specified
explicitly or by block
name in COMMON
statement.
DIMENSION (4, 7).
FORMAT (14).
FORMAT (514).
FORMAT (F8.3, E10. 4) for
+999.999 and
+.0000E+99.
I. . A-U-ER-BA-CH-,@
502: 161.347
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOMATH-800
161.
_347 Possible external codes
Decimal: .
Octal: .
Hollerith: .•
Alphameric:
· 348 Internal item size
Variable size:
Designation: ••
Range
Fixed point numeric:
Floating point
numeric:
Alphameric:
.411
§
. 349 Sign provision: .
• 35
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
fixed.
none.
fixed, 1 word.
fixed, 1 word.
fixed, 1 word of up to 8
characters .
optional.
Data Values
none.
10- 77 to 10+76•
120 characters.
16 octal digits.
yes.
optional.
Boolean constants cannot be
written as literals; otherwise same as constants.
• 353 Figuratives: • _ . • . • own coding; e. g., TEN =
10.0.
.354 Conditional variables:. computed GO TO.
Special Description Facilities
.361 Duplicate format:
. 362 Re-definition: . .
• 363 Table description
Subscription: . .
Multi - subscripts:
Level of item: . .
• 364 Other subscriptible
entities: • . . • •
by mUltiple references to a
single FORMAT
statement.
COMMON statement.
EQUIVALENCE statement.
mandatory, in DIMENSION
statement.
1 to 3.
variables.
.4
OPERATION REPERTOIRE
. 41
Formulae
. 411
Operator List
+:.
*.
I: .
**.
=: . . . . . .
ABSF ( )t:.
INTE ( )t: ..
MODF (A, B)t: .•
MAXOF (A, ... )t: .
MAXIF (A, ... )t:
MINOF (A, ••• )t:
MINIF (A, ... )t:.
Mixed radices: .
Literals: • . • •
addition, also unary.
subtraction, also unary.
multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
is set equal to.
absolute value.
entire.
remainder A .;. B.
max value; fixed argument.
max value; floating
argument.
min value; fixed argument •.
min value; floating
argument.
© 1963
numeric only.
yes.
only in exponentiation and
functions.
no.
yes.
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
a + b x c means:
abb/c means: •
a c means: . .
(a-b) - c.
a + (b x c).
(a';' b)';' c.
illegal; parentheses must
be used.
Size limit: • . .
660 char.
Multi -results:
no .
. 414 Rounding of results: .
truncation of integers at
each step in expression.
.415 Special cases Fixed
Floating
x = -x: . .
K = -K
X = -X.
x=x+1: . ,
K=K+1
X=X+l.
x = 4. 7 Y:. . . K = 47*K/1O
X = 4. 7 * Y.
x = 5x107 +y2: 50000000+L**2 X = 5. E7 +Y**2 .
x = I y I: . ..
K = XABSF(L)
X = ABSF(y).
X = INTF(Y).
x = entire (3.5): K = XINTF(L)
.416 Typical examples: "
X = (-B+SQRTF(B*B-4. 0*
A *C»/(2. 0* A).
.42
Operations on Arrays
.421 Matrix operations: .
.422 Logical operations
Sizes of operands:
AND: ••••
Inclusive OR: •
Exclusive OR:
NOT: . . . .
Designation:
none.
diminish A by B.
transfer sign of A to B.
float an integer.
fix floating point variable.
natural log.
sine.
cosine.
exponential.
square root.
arctangent.
hyperbolic tangent.
exclusive OR.
t denotes function may have prefix X to denote
fixed point result .
.412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . . .
Mixed scaling: .
Mixed classes: .
· 351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer: .••
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Alphameric:
Boolean: • . • .
Subscriptible: _
Sign provision: •
_352 Literals: _ . . . .
• 36
Operator List (Contd.)
DIMF (A,B)t:
SIGNF (A,B)t: .
FLOATF ( ):
XFIXF ( ):.
LOGF ( ):
SINF ( ): .•
COSF ( ):
EXPF ( ):
SQRTF ( ):
ATANF ( ):
TANHF ( ):
EXCLORF (A,B):
. 423 Scanning:. • • • • •
none.
48 bits.
*
+
EXCLORF .
B in col. 1 of each Boolean
statement, or use of
EXCLORF.
none.
.43
Other Computation:
44
Data Movement and Format
. 441
.442
.443
• 444
Data copy example:
Levels possible: . .
Multiple results:. .
Missing operands: .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorpprated
subprograms in FORTRAN,
or a restricted ARGUS
may reference one
another.
Y=X •
items.
none .
not possible.
2/63
502: 161.445
HONEYWELL 800
16l.
.445 Size of ,operands
Exact match: . .
. 513 Switch: • • . . . .
GO TO M, or
GO TO M, (35, 47, 18).
implied, except for alpha
or input-output.
. 514 Setting a switch: .
• 515 Switch on data: •.
ASSIGN 35 to M.
GO TO (35, 47, 18) 1.
right justified or
normalized.
left justified.
.52
§
Alignment rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: .••
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: .••
Truncating rule
Numbers': . . .
Alpha: . . . . .
Variable size
destination:
zeros.
blanks.
truncate at left.
truncate at right.
.523
..
...
.45
.521 Designators
Condition:
Procedure:
• 522 Simple conditions: .
no.
.446 Editing possible
Change clas s :
Change radix:
Insert editing symbols
Actual point:
Suppress zeroes: .
Insert:
Float: . . . . . .
.448 SpeCial moves:. . • .
.449 Character manipUlation:
yes.
yes.
automatic.
automatic.
automatic point.
- sign only.
none.
none.
• 524
.525
. 528
File Manipulation
Open: . . . . . . .
own coding.
Close: ..........
own coding.
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
PRINT.
Step back a record:
BACKSPACE.
none.
Set restart point:
none.
Restart:
.. .. ..
Start new reel: .
own coding.
Start new block:
implied in each inputoutput statement.
Search on key: .
none.
Rewind:
REWIND.
Unload: . .. .. ..
none .
Conditional Procedures
.53
IF.
implied.
expression or variable
versus zero.
Conditional relations:
IF (A) n1, n2, n3: If value
of expression A is less
than, equal to, or greater
than zero, respectively,
go to statement n1, n2, or
n3.
Variable conditions: . . expression always against
zero.
Compound conditionals: no.
Typical examples: . . . IF (X**2.0 -3.0) 29, 37,
18; go to 29, 37, or 18 if
x 2-3 is respectively less
than, equal to or greater
than zero.
Subroutines
.531 Designation
Single statement: .
not possible
Set of statements
SUBROUfINE.
First: • . . . .
Last: ............
END.
'.532 Use in-line in program: no.
.534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters: CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
Number of parameters: no limit.
Cue without
parameters:
CALL XXX.
Operating Communication
RETURN at least once .
Formal return: . . •
Alternative return:.
none.
Log of progress:. • . . PRINT uses on-line printer. .535 Names
Messages to operator:. same as log (error mesParameter call by
sages are automatically
none.
value: . • . . • •
typed on console
Parameter call by
typewriter).
name: . . . . .
yes.
Offer options: .......... PAUSE and type octal
Non-local names:
use COMMON.
integer.
Local names: .
all.
PRINT message and PAUSE.
Preserved own
Accept option: ..
IF SENSE SWITCH n.
all.
variables:. .
.536 Nesting limit:
none.
Object Program Errors
' .537 Automatic recursion
Special
allowed: .. .. .. .. .. ..
no .
Error
Discovery
Actions
IF ACCUMULAown coding.
Overflow
TOR OVERFLOW
In-out
own coding. .54 Function Definition b;t Procedure
IF PARITY
Invalid data
format checks
own COding.
.541 Designation
I/O device bring none.
Single statement:.
same as set.
Set of statements
FUNCTION.
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
First: . . • . . •
Last: ............
END.
any number of statements.
.542 Level of procedure:
Jumps
.543 Mechanism
by name in expression.
.. ........
Destinations allowed:
statement.
Cue:
Unconditional jump: .
Formal return:.
RETURN.
GO TO N.
.
.
• 46
.461
.462
.463
• 464
.47
.5
.51
.511
. 512
2/63
...
.
...
/
502: 161.544
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOMATH-800
§ 16l.
.544 Names
Parameter call by
value: . . . . . .
Parameter call by
name: . . . . . •
Non -local names:
Local names: .
Preserved own
variables:. .
• 55
.56
Operand Definition
by Procedure:
• 75
none.
yes.
use COMMON.
all.
all.
Loop Control
• 562 Control by count:
. 563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index: .
Any variable: .
Step:
Criteria: . . . . . .
Multiple parameters:
• 564 Control by condition:.
.565 Control by list:
. 566 Nesting limit:
.. ...
..
.567 Jump out allowed:
. 568 Control variable
exit status: . .
.8
TRANSLATOR CONTROL
.81
Transfer to Another
Language: . . . • .
· 82
no.
integer only.
positive integers .
greater than.
no .
no.
no .
limit specific to each
translator.
yes •
available.
.7
LffiRARY FACILITIES
• 71
Identity: . . . . . .
CPT (Collector Programs
Tape).
Kinds of Libraries
.721 Fixed master: . . .
• 722 Expandable master:
no.
yes .
• 73
magnetic tape; variable
length blocks in
relocatable binary format.
• 74
Types of Routines
current place to named
end; e. g., DO 173 I =
1, N, 2.
none .
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: . • . . . can write new function in
library.
Storage Form: •
.76
none.
.6
• 72
· 751 Insertion of new item: . separate run, using AUTOMATH update phase.
.752 Language of new item:. FORTRAN, hand coding, or
FORTRAN -ARGUS.
named in procedures.
.753 Method of call:. •
.761 Open routines exist: . • yes .
. 762 Closed routines exist:. yes .
.763 Open-closed is variable: each case is pre-decided.
. . none.
.561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures:. . .
Mechanism
Varieties of Contents:. subroutines.
functions.
service routines;
compiled object programs.
© 1963
some ARGUS assembler
statements can be interspersed with FORTRAN
statements. They are
distinguished by an "A"
punched in col. l.
Optimizing Information Statements
· 821 Process usage
statements:. . . . . . none.
.822 Data usage statements: COMMON.
EQUIVALENCE.
.83
.84
Translator
Envirorunent: .
. . . no.
Target Computer
Environment:. •
no.
• 85
Program Documentation
Control: . . . . . . . no.
.9
TARGET COM:PUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
• 91
Choice of Storage Level: no .
.92
Address Allocation: . . none .
.93
Arrangement of Items in
Words iIi Unpacked
Form: . . . . . . . . standard for numerics .
.94
Assignment of lnputOutput Devices: . ,
· 95
specified in input-output
statements •
Input-Output Areas: . . BUFFER statements allocate the amount of storage to be used for I/O
purposes.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
502: 162.1 00
.SIANOARO
_EDP
.,-,
Honeywell 800
Process Oriented Language
FACT
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FACT
§
162.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
· FACT Language.
. 12
Origin:
· Honeywell EDP .
.13
Reference:
· FACT Manual, Interim
Edition, January, 1961.
.14
Description
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
.21
Divisions
File Outline:
.' . describes the layout of
each file and its contents.
Program: . .
. contains the description of
the procedures to be
executed.
Report Writer:
. describes the format of
the desired report in
semi-pictorial form, including its own file descriptions .
Input Editing: . . . . . defines the input code to be
accepted and the action to
be taken if incorrect
codes are received.
Sorting: . . . . . . . defines the files to be sorted, and their relationship; includes provisions
for first and last pass own
coding.
FACT, is a system for maintaining and servicing
magnetic tape files. These files can be, but are
not necessarily, "hierarchical" in the sense that all
items on the file have pre-set "levels". When any
particular item is being handled, all items senior to
it are available for reference. Thus, while a salesman's record is being updated, the area, regional,
and national records are also available for reference,
although they may be physically far apart on a
magnetic tape.
Four separate cycles of process are possible in the
system and generally separate facilities are provided for each in the language:
.22
Procedure Entities
Procedure:
1. Input Editing
2. File Updating
3. File Sorting
4. Report Preparation
Paragraphs:
Each of these has its own rules; for instance, the
Report Writer allows for description to be given by
picture, whereas this is not possible in the other
types.
The procedures in the language are written in a
COBOL-like English Language system, and formulae
may be employed in expressions if desired. Conditional statements (IF MANAGERIAL THEN . . .) are
allowed, and any group of conditions may be defined
and labeled (ELIGIDLE, OFFICER AND AGE LESS'
THAN 30)
A characteristic of Input Editing and Report Preparation is that a number of different files or Reports
can be created from a single input. Thus, an output
tape which will hold the details for several reports
can be created during a production run.
Sentences:. .
Subroutines:
.23
Data Entities
File: . . . .
Primary group:
Secondary groups:
The Sort facility allows sorting to take place while
retaining the "hierarchical" structure of the file.
Own coding.section can be inserted, in the FACT
language, either before or after a sort process.
Standard FACT File conventions are used throughout
the system. Housekeeping chores, including label
creation and checking, code conversions, etc., are
handled automatically.
© 1963
· consists of other procedures and paragraphs.
· consists of sentences, perhaps arranged in subparagraphs. If so, a hierarchial arrangement is used,
so that a paragraph at any
one moment consists of
the paragraph header plus
the CURRENT sub-paragraph (sons, grandsons,
etc.).
· words, perhaps arranged in
clauses.
· any namable entity above
(Le., procedure, paragraph, or sentence).
Fields: . .
Hierarchy:
Group header:
Group level: .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
· groups.
· primary groups and
fields.
· primary groups, secondary groups, and fields.
· characters.
· one group header from each
group level within the
hierarchy.
· fields.
· the relationship of a header
within a group; e. g. ,
Father and Son.
2/63
502: 162.240
§
HONEYWELL 800
162.
.24
Names
.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet:
Size:
Avoid key words:
Formation rules:
.242 Designators
Data
Numeric literals:
Non-numeric
literals:
.25
.272 Local names (Contd. )
Possible entities (Contd. )
assign statement.
Designator:
original designation.
Definition:
· A-Z, 0-9.
· 61 characters.
· yes.
• leading character must be
alphabetic.
· numeric leading character.
· quotes or two dots enclosing character.
Structure of Data Names
.3
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES
.31
.313
.314
· 315
.316
.317
.318
Methods of Direct Data Description
Input
Tape Files Reports
Concise item picture: no
no
yes.
List by kind: . . .. no
no
no.
Input t
Files tt Reports ttt
Qualify by adjective: no
no
no
Qualify by phrase: . no
yes
Qualify by code: . • yes
Hierarchy by list:
yes
yes
yes
Level by indenting:. no
yes
Level by coding:
no
.32
Files and Reels
.311
.312
.251 Qualified names
Example:
· MASTER TOTAL
Multiple qualifiers: . · yes.
Complete sequence: . · optional.
Broken sequence: .
· yes.
.252 Subscripts
Number per item:
.3.
Applicable to:
· fields occuring a fixed
(preset) number of times
in their father group.
Class may be
Special index variable:
· not necessary .
Any variable:
· yes.
Literal:
· yes.
Expression:
· no.
Form maybe
Integer only:
· yes.
Signed:
· no.
Truncated fraction:
· no.
Rounded fraction: .
· no.
.253 Synonyms
Preset:
· yes.
Dynamically set:
· yes.
· 321 File labels
Variable layout:
Control totals:
Identity control:
Multi-reel: . . .
· 322 Reel labels
Variable layout:
Block count: ..
Multi-files:
.26
· 34
Number of Names
.261 All entities:
.262 Procedures:
. 263 Data
Files:
Record formats:
Items:
Data levels:
.264 Equipment:
. 27
· max of 64.
· no limit.
· no limit.
· no limit.
· 'l
Region of Meaning of Names
.271 Universal names:
. 272 Local names
Possible .entities
Data fields:
2/63
· no limit.
· no limit.
· all, unless dynamically
reset during execution of
program .
.. can be assigned new names,
and both fields are altered
each time the new name is
used in a procedure. The
new name can then be reassigned. This is used
primarily for subroutines.
· 33
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no
optional"
yes
no
yes
yes
no.
no.
yes.
yes
yes
no.
yes.
Records and Blocks
.331 Variable record
size: . . . . .
no
.332 Variable block size: yes
· 333 Record size range
(in words): ..
· 334 Block size range
(in words): ..
11 to 104
· 335 Choice of record
size:. .. . ..
.336 Choice of block
size: . . . . . . . description
.338 In-out error
control:
description
own coding
.339 Blocking control:
· 346 Choice of code:
tt
ttt
24 to 251
16 to 124.
automatic
automatic
automatic
subroutine
own coding
awn coding.
description
description
description.
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
yes
yes.
·yes.
no.
yes.
yes.
code
code
code •
Data Items
.341 Designation of
class: ..
.342 Possible classes
Integer:
Fixed point:
Floating point:
Alphabetic: ..
Alphameric:
.343 Choice of external
radix: • . • . .
· 344 Possible radices
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
.345 Justification:
t
2 to 251
yes.
cannot be used arithmetically.
description automatic
description
description
description.
Described in Input Editing Section of the
source language.
Described in File Outline Section of the source
language.
Described in Report Writing Section of the
source language.
502: 162.347
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FACT
§
162.
.347 Possible codes:
Mode
Code
Legal Characters
Hollerith
HI
Any of the 64 legitimate keypunch
combinations
Standard
Hollerith
SH 1
Standard keypunch
characters, fO,
and -0
Alphabetic or
Single Punch
Alphanumeric
Alphabetic
Numeric or Zone
ASI
A-Z, 0-9, 11, or 12
ANI
Al
A-z or 0-9
NZI
A-Z
0-9, 11, or 12
Numeric Hollerith
Zone Punch
Octal
NH1
Zpl
oel, 5,6
0-9
11 or 12
0-7
Signed Decimal
D2, 7
0-9
Unsigned Decimal
Unsigned Decimal
with Check Digit
Single Punch
Decimal
003,7
0-9
CD3,7
0-9
Sp4,7
0-9, 11, or 12
Hexadecimal
HX5 ,8
0-9 or B-G
.348 Item size
Variable size:
Designation:
Range
Fixed point numeric:
Floating point numeric:
Alphameric:
.349 Sign provision:
.35
Designation: . .
.353 Figuratives
Examples:
.354 Conditional variables: . . . .
2. A decimal field may contain up to 11 digits and
sign. The length of such a field is the number
of digits, not including the sign.
3. An unsigned decimal field or a check decimal
field may contain up to 12 digits, including the
check digit if used.
4. The SP mode is limited to single-column fields.
. The field is converted as an unsigned decimal
field of length two and scale zero. Punches 1-9
become 01-09, a zero punch becomes 10, an 11
punch becomes 11, and a 12 punch becomes 12.
5. A hexadecimal or octal field may be up to 12 hex
digits or 16 octal digits.
6. An octal field is forced by the compiler to have
an even number of digits by prefixing a zero if
necessary. Thereafter, each digit pair is treated as a six- bit Hollerith character.
7. Four-bit modes.
8. A field in this mode cannot be used in arithmetic.
© 1963
not available.
999 characters.
optional.
12 digits unsigned
11 digits signed.
in description of Report
Writer; otherwise within
quotes or dots.
Blank, all cardinal and ordinal numbers; e.g.,
NINE MILLION EIGHT
HUNDRED SEVENTY
THOUSAND SIXTY FIVE;
TWENTY FIRST; 21ST.
yes; symbolic labels
allowed.
Special Description Facilities
.361 Duplicate format: .
.362 Re-definition:
Notes
1. Each of these modes is a subset of six-bit
Hollerith. These modes may be intermixed
to form a single field. The different classifications of six-bit Hollerith are used only for input
checking. After cards are read, the distinction
between these modes is ignored and all are considered to be Hollerith.
11 digits signed.
Data Values
.352 Literals
Possible sizes: .
.36
preset.
description.
.363 Table description
Subscription: . .
Multi - subscripts:
Level of item:
.364 Other subscriptible
entities: . . . .
yes; at file level.
yes, by defining as another
hierarchy. Can be done
at any level. Area sizes
need not match.
yes.
up to 3, e.g. (P)TH HOUR
OF (Q) TH DAY OF
MONTH.
any group level.
none.
.4
OPERATION REPERTOIRE
.41
Formulae
These can be only used as expressions within the
English language statement.
.411 Operator list
+
/
.412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . .
Mixed scaling:
Mixed classes:
Mixed radices:
Literals: . .
Figuratives:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
numeric.
yes, in fixed point operation.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
2/63
HONEYWELL 800
502:162.413
§
162.
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
a + b x c means:
a / b / c means:
abc means:
Size limit: . . . •
Multi-results: . .
.414 Rounding of results:
• 415 Special cases
x= -x: . . . . .
x=x+l:
x= 4.7 y: . . .
x = 5 x 107 + y2:
x = y integer part: .
.42
.43
.431
.432
. 433
. 434
•435
.436
.443 Multiple results: •
. 444 Missing operands:
(a - b) .- c
a + (b x c)
(a/b)/c
not available.
11 digit numeric.
yes.
.445 Size of operands
Numbers:
Alpha: ••
Filler rule
Numbers:.
Alpha: .•
Truncating rule
Numbers:
Data Movement and Format
.441 Data copy example:
.442 Levels possible: .
2/63
decimal point aligned.
left justified.
zeroes.
blanks .
decimal points aligned, then
SET X = 0 - X
truncated at left, optionSET X = X+ 1
ally rounded or truncated
SET X = 47 * Y/lO
at right.
SET X = 50000000 + Y * Y.
SET X = Y/lO*n; MAX
Alpha: . . . . • .
truncated at right.
where n is the number of .446 Editing possible
positions Y possesses
(in Report Writer)
to the right of the decimal
point.
Change class: . . .
. no
Change radix: . .•
. no
Operations on Arrays: . none.
Delete editing symboIs: • • • . . .
. no
Other Computation
Insert editing symbols
Actual point:
. yes
Operator list
Suppress zeroes:
. yes.
PLUS:
Insert:
• yes.
ADD:
Float:
. yes.
SUBTRACT:
.447 Special moves.
LESS:
Move Corresponding with
MULTIPLIED BY:
Exceptions:
. PUT A INTO B EXCEPT J.
TIMES:
.448 Code translation:
. no.
DIVIDED BY:
.449 Character manipulaOVER:
tion: . . . . . .
• yes; any single character
EQUALS:
can be addressed; groups
IS EQUAL TO:
of characters must be deOperands allowed
fined before being adMixed scaling: .
dressed.
· yes.
Mixed classes: .
· yes.
Mixed radices: •
.45 File Manipulation
· no.
Literals: . .
• yes.
Restrictions:
Open: .
· fields must be wholly
· implied by word GET for
fixed point numeric.
input; OPEN NEW or FILE .
Statement
Close:
• CLOSE FILE for input;
Mixed verbs:
· yes within sentence, no
CLOSE NEW for o.utput.
Advance to next rewithin clause.
Multi - results:
cord:
· GET NEXT (GROUP
· yes.
Size limits: .
NAME).
· 100 words per sentence if
Step back a record:
no group move.
· not available on input
files. REMOVE output
Multi -operand:
• yes.
group name for output.
Implied results:
· yes.
Set restart point: •
.SETRESTART
Rounding of results:
• description .
Restart:
· assumed to be automatic .
Special cases
Start new reel:
· END REEL PROCEDURE
x = -x: •
SET X = (-X).
Start new block:
· not available.
x= x+l:
ADD 1 TOX.
Search on key:
• FIND FILE (file name)
x= x+y:
ADDYTOX.
[SEARCHING BACKWARDS].
x= x+y:
DIVIDE X BY Y.
Rewind:
• REWIND, also included in
MULTIPLY X BY Y.
x= xy: .
x = remainder xfy:
LOCK.
not available.
Typical cases
Unload: .
• LOCK.
b=b+ai..
ADD A TO B AND C.
c=c+aJ:.
.46 Operatin~ Communication
c=c+a+b:
ADD A ANDBTO C.
.461 Log of progress: •
. 44
yes.
REPLACE A AND B BY C •
REPLACE (SECONDARY
GROUP A) BY (SECONDARY GROUP B).
PUT A INTOB.
any group level.
,.462 Messages to operator:
•.463 Offer options:
.464 Accept option:
segment names listed on
console as each is loaded •
none, unless programmed •
own coding only•
entry from console typewriter.
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FACT
§
502: 162.470
162.
.47
Object Program Errors
Error
Overflow:
In-out:
Invalid data:
.5
Special
Actions
Discovery
object program
check.
automatic
own coding.
use of IF VALID or
IF NO UNCHECKED
VALIDITY ERROR
orthotronic
correction
routine, or
abort.
own coding.
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
. 51
.523 Conditional relations (Contd.)
Less than or
equal: • • . . . . . IS LESS THAN OR EQUALS
negated conditions are obtained by replacing IF, by
UNLESS, or by inserting
NOT, and replacing OR
with NOR at the appropriate positions.
.524 Variable conditions:
. none.
.525 Compound conditionals
IF X AND Y:
. . yes.
IF X OR Y: •
• • yes.
IF XDO A AND Y DO
B: . . . . •.
• all conditions must be explicit when separated by
imperative sentences.
Thus phrasing would be
IF X DO A, IF X AND Y
DOB .
IF X 00 A AND B, OTHERWISE. IF Y DO B .
.527 Condition on alternative: . . . . .
· yes
.528 Typical examples: . . · IF X IS 1 OR 6 OR 9 OR
GREATER THAN 25 GO
TOA.
IF X OF (N)TH Primarygroup IS Y PUT 1 INTO X
OF (N)TH Primary-group.
IF X IS Y PLUS Z MINUS
1 PUT X INTO Y•
OTHERWISE PUT X INTO
.511 Destinations allowed: . · paragraph, procedure,
subroutine.
.512 Unconditional jump:
· implied by END OF (name)
PROCEDURE.
DO PROCEDURE (name)
LEAVE PROCEDURE
GO TO
.513 Switch: . • . .
· none.
. 514 Setting a switch:
· none.
.515 Switch on data:
· IF name GREATER WAN
literal USE BRANCH WITH'
field, 1st para., 2nd para. .53'
.52
Conditional Procedures
. 521 Designators
Condition:
Procedure:
.522 Simple Conditions
Expression v Expression:
Expression v Variable: .
Expression v Literal:
Expression v Figurative:
Expression v Condition:
Variable v Variable: .
Variable v Literal:
Variable v Figurative:
Variable v Condi"tion:
Conditional value:
• 523 Conditional relations
Equal:
Greater than:
Less than: .
Greater than or
equal:
· IF .... ;
UNLESS
· implied, with OTHERWISE
option.
.531 Designation
Single statement:
Set of statements
First:
Last:
.532
.533
· yes.
.534
· yes.
· yes.
· yes.
.no.
• yes.
· yes.
.535
· yes.
· no.
· yes .
· EQUALS, IS EQUAL TO,
=, IS
· IS GREATER THAN
• IS LESS THAN
· IS GREATER THAN OR
EQUALS
© 1963
Z.
Subroutines
.536
.537
· yes .
· named statement
· determined within subroutine coding.
Possible subroutines: . · procedure, paragraph,
subparagraph.
Use in-line in program:
· yes.
Mechanism
Cue with parameters:
· yes, all parameters must
be.
Number of parameters:
· dynamically assigned
local names.
Cue Without parameter: .
· no.
Formal return: .
· not necessary .
Alternative return:
.GOTO.
Names
Parameter call by
value:
· indirectly.
Parameter call by
name:
· yes.
Non-local names: .
· no.
Local names:
· yes.
Preserved local
variables:
· no.
Nesting limit:
· none.
Automatic recursion
allowed:
· no ('l)
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
HONEYWELL 800
502:162.540
§
162.
.54
.55
.56
.82
Function Definition b1
Procedure: .
· none.
0Eerand Definition b1
Procedure: .
.821 Process usage statements:
· none.
Loop Control
.822 Data usage statements:
.83
.561 Designation of loop
Single procedure: .
First and last procedures:
• DO PROCEDURE A
· all procedures must be
quoted.
· no.
· no.
.562 Control by count:
. 563 Control by step:
.564 Control by condi.565
.566
.567
.568
.6
.7
tion:
Control by list:
Nesting limit:
Jump out allowed:
Control variable
exit status:
· indefinite.
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE:
. none.
LffiRARY FACILITIES: . • .
· no.
· no.
· indefinite.
· no.
.84
.85
TRANSLATOR CONTROL
. 81
Transfer to Another
Language: . . . . . . no.
· none.
· none.
Translator Environment:
· none.
Target Computer Environment:
'. none.
Program Documentation:
• none .
.9
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
.91
Choice of Storage
Level:
· none .
.92
Address Allocation:
· none.
.93
Arrangement of Items
in Words in Unpacked
Form:
· description.
.94
Assignment of InputOutput Devices:
· description.
Input-Output Areas:
· ('1)
. . none.
.8
2/63
Optimizing: Information Statements
.95
502: 163.100,
Honeywell 80G
Process Oriented Language
COBOL
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
§
163.
.14
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
H-SOO COBOL.
. 12
Origin:.
Codasy! Committee •
. 13
Reference: •
Introduction to COBOL.
Honeywell EDP Document
DSII2S.
.14
Description
The COBOL compiler for the H-SOO is due to be released during the third quarter of 1963. Presently
available information indicates that it will contain all
Description (Contd.)
of Required COBOL-61. In addition, the H-SOO compiler will implement some electives and an interesting extension which allows the value of an item in a
record to determine which of a number of record
types on one file is presently being processed •
The extensions. which are listed below. primarily
allow free handling of input-output devices and the
central processor rather than enriching the language.
Thus, rerutming procedures and rewinding WITH
LOCK have been implemented, but formulae are not
available. Other electives allow COBOL programmers to enter the ARGUS assembly language.
COBOL-61 ELECTIVES TO BE IMPLEMENTED
IN H-SOO COBOL
Key No.
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
Formula" characters
Semicolon
Figurative Constants
Figurative Constants
Computer-name
+, -, *, I, * *, -.
;, always ignored.
HIGH-BOUND (S); LOW-BOUND (S).
HIGH-VALUE (S); LOW-VALUE (S).
labels data-description.
File Description Clauses
mock-size
FILE CONTAINS
Label formats
Sequenced-on
allows a range to be specified.
indicates approximate file size.
allows new or library formats.
gives a list of keys.
Record Description Clauses/options
Bit usage
RANGE IS
RENAMES
SIGN IS
Conditional- range
Label-handling
allows items to be specified in binary.
gives value range of item or character.
controls storage allocation.
allows separate signs.
allows a conditional-value to be a range.
provides free handling of labels.
*23
*25
26
Verbs
-COMPUTE
DEFINE
INCLUDE
USE
algebraic formula.
new verb definition.
calls library routines.
amplifies 1-0 error and labelling routines.
27
28
*29
*30
32
34
35
36
3S
39
Verb Options
LOCK
MOVE CORRESPONDING
OPEN REVERSED
ADVANCING paper
Formulas
Relationship
Tests
Conditionals
Complex conditionals
ON SIZE ERROR
I
3
5
6
7
S
9
10
11
15
16
*17
*IS
20
21
22
© 1963
locks rewound tapes.
moves and edits relevent records.
allows reading tapes backwards.
gives specific paper advance.
algebraic formulae.
IS UNEQUAL TO, EQUALS, and EXCEEDS.
IF I ) IS NOT ZERO.
implied objects with implied subjects.
provides extension of error routines.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
502:163.140
§
HONEYWELL 800
163.
COBOL-61 ELECTIVES TO BE IMPLEMENTED
IN H-800 COBOL (Contd. )
Elective
Key No.
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
*48
*49
Environment Division options
SOURCE-COMPUTER
OBJECT-COMPUTER
SPECIAL NAMES
File Description
1-0 Control
1-0 Control
Identification Division
DATE
Special Features
LmRARY
SEGMENTATION
Comments
allows selective use of previous description.
allows selective use of previous description.
specifies for ACCEPT, WRITE, and DISPLAY.
verbs.
can be taken from library.
can be taken from library.
allows programmer control.
gives compilation date.
allows calls of library routines.
* Will be deferred until 1964.
COBOL-61 ELECTIVES NOT TO BE IMPLEMENTED
IN H-800 COBOL
Key No.
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
Relationship characters
Long literals
=, > , < .
up to 120 characters long only.
File Descrietion Clauses:
none.
13
14
19
Record Desngmtion Clauses/oEtions
Table-Ie
Item -length
Item -length
only fixed length tables and arrays.
only fixed length items (see also 19).
no variable length items allowed (See also 16.)
24
~ER
no Non-COBOL computer languages.
33
37
Verb Options
Operand-size
Compound conditions
only up to 10 digits.
no mixed ANns and ORs .allowed.
44
Environment Division Options
PRIORITY is
2
4
Verbs
4/63
no priorities can be given for multiprogramming purposes.
Identification Division
none.
Special Features
none.
502: 171.100
.STANDARD_
II
REPORTS
EDP
Honeywell 800
M. O. Language
ARGUS
MACHINE-ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ARGUS
§
17l.
.1
· 14
GENERAL
Identity:
ARGUS.
. 12
Origin: .
Minneapolis - Honeywell .
.. 13
Reference: .
Manual DSI - 23 C.
.14
Description
•• 11
Special control instructions are available to define
symbolic tags. These definitions can be in terms of
absolute or relative storage addresses, symbolic
tags, or complex symbolic tags (e.g., indirect
addresses). The definitions can also be allocated to
the next available location modulo 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
or 64. Expressions can be used providing they contain no parentheses, and a form of local addressing
is available.
ARGUS is the basic machine oriented language for
the H-800, and as such, it reflects the complexities
of the H -800 addressing structure ~ Some instructions have been simplified; e.g., a left shift instruction is introduced which is converted to the appropriate right shift instruction in the translation.
A library system is available controlling open and
closed subroutines which can be called into the
program by name and parameter list. The preparation of a library is a function of each installation.
Segmentation of programs can be handled in the
. 15
assembly, as can the formation of binary, decimal,
alphameric, and floating point constants. Symbolic
.2
names can be used, but automatic reservation of a
location occurs only when the symbolic name is used.21
as a location address. Thus, working space, etc.,
Name
Card Col
Example
.22
Location Command Code
11
I
10
22
123TAG
DA
SIC
23
X
Publication Date:. . . . 1960.
LANGUAGE FORMAT
Diagram
A Address
24
37
C,+2
B Address C Address
38 55
56
65
X7,TAG+2
N,R3,9
Remarks
66
80
Legend
· 24
Location: .
.241 Compound Addresses: . yes, the base can be an
absolute or symbolic address; or the address
contained in either of the
sequence counters, or an
index register. Augmenters can be literal,
symbolic, or contained in
index registers of indirect
address locations .
none.
. 242 Multi Addresses:
up to 2, 047, written in
· 243 Literals:.
decimal for use in binary.
.244 Special
Coded Addresses:
C I the addresses in the
X' JSequence and
• Cosequence Counters.
STOPPER highest address
available •
absolute or symbolic location for this line of
cQding.
Command Code: . . . . mnemonic instruction code.
constant type code.
assembly control codes.
library pseudo code.
A, B, or C Address:. . instruction operand address, literals.
control parameters.
constants, macro
parameters.
data descriptors.
Remarks: . . . . . • . any comments; these do not.
affect the assembly.
Note: A special line containing remarks only can be
used when R, or P, is in columns 1 and 2.
• 23
Description (Contd.)
must be rererenced twice: once in its place as an
operand, and again to reserve a location for it.
Corrections:...... no special provision in the
language; control cards
are available which incorporate amendments
into an assembled
program.
© 1963
Special Conventions
.3
LABELS
.31
General
.311 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . . . . . unlimited.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
HONEYWELL 800
502:171.312
§
171.
· 312 Common label
fonnation rule:.
. 313 Reserved labels:.
. 314 Other restrictions:
· 315 Designators
F, tag:
S, tag:
B, tag:
L, tag:
z, tag:
ALF, n:
ALF, a:
OCT: .
DEC: .
FXBIN:
FLDEC:
FLBIN:
EBC: .
· 316 Synonyms pennitted:
· 32
yes.
none.
none.
Mask to be used in field
instructions.
Mask to be used in shift
instructions.
Mask to be. used in field or
shift instructions.
Tag at start of subsequent
segment.
Special register address.
alphabetic constant of n
words. 1 ~ n .::: 5.
alphabetic constant ending
with next occurrenne of
"a". "a" cannot be 0
through 5.
octal constant or constants.
decimal constant.
binary constant written in
decimal.
floating point decimal
constants .•
floating point binary constants written in decimal.
double precision, floating
point binary constants
written in decimal.
yes.
Universal Labels
· 321 Labels for procedures
Existence: . . • .
Fonnulation rule
First character:
Last character: .
Others: . . .
Number of
characters:
.411 Maximum size constants
Floating ninneric
Decimal: . • .
Octal: . • . • .
Hexadecimal: .
Alphabetic: . . .
Alphameric: . .
.412 Maximum size literals
Integer
Decimal: . • • .
Fixed numeric:. .
Floating numeric:
Alphameric: •
.42
10 digits.
none .
none .
29 characters.
29 characters.
4 digits.
none.
none.
none.
Working Areas
.421 Data layout
Implied by use:.
Specified in program:
.422 Data type: . . . . .
· 423 Redefinition: . . . .
· 43
(Contd.)
yes.
no.
not required.
yes.
Input-Output Areas
. 431 Data layout:
.432 Data type: •
.433 Copy layout:
.5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number: .
Example: .
optional.
implicit .
not required.
no.
yes.
67.
DA PRICE AMTDUE
AMTDUE. (Decimal
Add: Price to Amount
Due).
alphabetic or numeric.
alphabetic or numeric.
alphabetic or numeric.
.512 Absolute: . . . . . . . . not available in the
language.
.52
Macro-Codes
1 to 8; one must be alphabetic, spaces are ignored.
.521 Number available
.322 Labels for library routines: . . . . . . . .
· 323 Labels for constants:
.324 Labels for files.: . . .
· 325 Labels for records: .
· 326 Labels for variables:
same as procedures.
same as procedures.
none as such.
none as such.
same as procedures.
No central library;
each installation
may provide its own.
• 523 New macros:. . . . . .
can be written in program
and optionally placed in
library.
· 33
none.
· 53
Interludes:.....
none.
• 54
Translator Control
Local Labels: . . . .
.4
DATA
· 41
Constants
.541 Method of control
Allocation counter:.
Label adjustment:
Annotation: . . . .
. 542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute: .
Set to label: .
Step forward: . .
. 411 Maximum size constants
Integer
Digits
Decimal:
12 digits.
Octal: . .
16 digits.
Binary: .
14 digits.
Fixed numeric
Decimal:
12 digits.
Octal: .
16 digits.
Binary: .
14 digits.
Step backward: .
Reserve area: •
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table:
I
!§J
A-U-ER-BA-CH-_-:-'
r-I
2/63
yes, detailed below .542.
yes, detailed below .543 .
yes, detailed below .544 .
SETLOC.
SETLOC, ASSIGN, TAS .
SETLOC, RESERVE,
MODLOC.
SETLOC.
RESERVE.
SETLOC.
SETLOC, EQUALS.
none.
MACHINE-ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ARGUS
171.
· 544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase: . . .
502: 171.544
. 662 Method of call: .
§
remarks field.
R, or P, in cols 1 and 2.
·6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
Special Arithmetic
· 611 Facilities: • . . . .
library of scientific subroutines multiply, divide.
floating point package.
. 612 Method of call:. . . . . macro in library or in
program deck.
library call .
. 67
Diagnostics:..
snapshots specified before
assembly; new snapshots
require re-assembly.
.7
LmRARY FACILITIES
• 71
Identity: . . • • . .
.72
Kinds of Libraries
library .
,.
. 721 Fixed master: . . .
.722 Expandable master:
.723 Private: . . . .
no .
yes.
yes.
Special Functions
.73
Storage Form: . . .
tape .
. 621 Facilities: . . . .
. 74
Varieties of Contents: . mathematic routines.
generators.
data processing packages.
.75
Mechanism
· 62
trig. functions.
log.
matrix.
differential equations.
statistics.
.622 Method of call:. . . . . macro in library or in
program deck.
. 63
• 64
....
Overlay Control
· 631 Facilities: . . .
. 751 Insertion of new item: . standard updating program.
.752 Language of new item: . ARGUS.
.753 Method of call: .
L, NAME in Command
field.
all programs divided
by delimiter SEGMENT or
PROGRAM into at least
one segment.
overlay calls must be
written in programs, and
all programs are held in
abeyance while the overlay takes place.
.76
Insertion in Program
.761 Open routines exist: .
yes.
.762 Closed routines exist: . yes.
.763 Open-closed is optional: yes.
.8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.81
Macros
Data Editing
.641 Radix conversion:
Code translation:
• 642 Format control: .
none provided.
not necessary.
not necessary.
Open -ended library.
.82
· 65
Input-Output Control
· 651
'.652
• 653
• 654
. 655
File labels:
Reel labels:
Blocking: . .
Error control: .
Method of call:.
• 66
Sorting
Pseudos
Code
.661 Facilities:
standard.
standard.
variable.
standard .
library call.
forward cascade sorting
(3 to 6 tapes) single,
double, or extra precision.
©
SETLOC: .
PROGRAM: .
SEGMENT: .
EQUALS: . .
RESERVE: .
MACRODEF: •
FINIS:
SCON:
STOP:.
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Description
. set location counter.
:} controls segmentation .
assigns values to labels.
reserves storage.
heads macro routine.
ends macro routine.
initialize sequence register
for object program.
exit from program to
monitor.
2/63 .
502: 1B2.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
Honeywell BOO
Program Trans Iafor
COBOL-BOO
REPORTS
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: COBOL-BOO
§
. 12
182.
•1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . • . . COBOL-BOO.
CB B-0002 Revision I.
• 12
Description
Although the COBOL-BOO translator has not yet been
released, certain details regarding the translation
process and the object program are available.
The compilation process involves basically three
phases: the first phase performs syntactic analyses
of the source program; the second phase generates
the object code; and the third phase assembles the
generated code into a machine program. The Honeywell COBOL BOO System also includes two supporting
runs that are optional. First, a pre-compiling run
designed to maintain a master file of COBOL Source
Programs and select those to be compiled. Second,
an edit run that may be executed following all
compilations for a particular computer run to print
the source program listings and documentation for
each program compiled.
The machine program produced is able to run directlyon the H-800. The data and the instructions are
kept separate to allow dynamic. relocation of the
object program and thereby to improve overall production when multi -running is in progress. The
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
translating time is estimated at 50 to 75 statements
per minute, with the aim of making the efficiency of
the object program compare favorably with the efficiency of hand - coding •
With the COBOL-800, the original programmer is
able to specify binary or decimal arithmetic, and
fixed-point or floating point mode, so that the advantages of these features of the H-800 system can be
utilized. The original programmer can also specify,
as is standard in COBOL, his data as being DISPLAY
or COMPUTATIONAL. Numeric data fields may be
specified to occupy four bits per character, and may
be packed in a computer word in order to minimize
the volume of files. Numeric data may also be
specified synchronized in order to permit arithmetic
operations to be performed with maximum efficiency.
To make advantageous use of t;he different types of
computational which are available requires considerable knowledge of the H-1BOO machine code, as produced by the translator.
The compiling computer must have six tape units
(any type), 8,192 words of storage, a card reader,
and a printer. The object computer. must have one
tape unit, but otherwise any H-800 system is acceptable. Details are not presently available for the
handling of error conditions aiising during compilation or object program running.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
•
-
,...
502:191.100
STANO,\RO
111
ElDlP
Honeywell 800
Operating Environment
"'ORIS
ARGUS
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: ARGUS (PRODUCTION RUNNING)
§
.12
191.
.. 1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . ARGUS.
Automatic Routine Generating and Updating
System.
Program Selection Process
(4) Schedule the runs, and prepare a special run
program tape, operator documentation, etc.,
through the use of a special program.
(5) Arrange the program input and output as called
for in the schedule and set each program running.
B.
Executive Schedule Run.
Executive Production Run.
.12
The person functioning as scheduler therefore must
decide how many independent "portions" the computing system must be split into for the duration of a
run. He also must explicitly decide which programs
should be run on which portion, and implicitly, by
the order in which he provides details of these programs, the priority which should be given to each
program.
Description
The ARGUS system is organized to run programs
either serially or in parallel; however, many of the
standard programs (including the ARGUS assembler)
and all programs under test must run serially.
After a program has been tested, it can be run in
parallel with other programs. This section
describes the method of running such programs.
Based on this data the computer runs, establish
which (if any) programs can be run concurrently in
each "portion" of the computing system, produce operating documentation, and organize their loading
and supervision as needed. It can be seen that the
ability of the human scheduler to make the right decisions greatly affects the over-all efficiency of this
production technique.
The advantages to running in parallel under the
ARGUS system are:
o Sharing computer usage between programs,
some of which are input-output bound.
If a high-priority program has to be introduced into
a production run which has already started, all programs must be brought to a halt and the priority program must be run by itself; then the production run
can be restarted.
o Overlapping set-up time with the running of
other programs.
The advantages not supplied by the present system
which might be gained using multiprogramming are:
During the actual running of a program or program
mix, the supervisor routines take up no time, because the master program is switched off. When
more programs or sectors of programs are needed,
or when tape errors must be handled, etc., then the
master program is activated, and all other programs
are switched off.
o The ability to run unexpected programs in parallel with, but not interfering with, the already
operational work-load. (proposals are being
studied which will allow some measure of this
kind of operation. )
o The ability to optimize the use of storage and of
peripheral devices automatically.
o The ability to provide an accurate account of the
amount of central processor time used by each
individual program. (The peripherals assigned
to the program are known, but the actual cost of
running a specific program is not. )
Description (Contd.)
• 14
Originator: .
Honeywell EDP Division .
.15
Maintainer:
Honeywell EDP Division.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs
The method adopted in the ARGUS system is:
(1) Edit the program tapes onto a library tape
through the use of a special program.
(2) Divide, if desired, the computing system into
two or more "portions, " allocating specific
peripheral devices, control memory, and main
storage to each portion.
(3) Batch tape programs to be run by each "portion"
in order of probable priority, observing also
any necessary order.
© 1963
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:. . . . . . . yes. The Master Relocatable Tape (MRT) consists
of a library of all programs and subprograms
presently available for
production running .
. 212 Independent programs: no. These must be incorporated into the MRT
library before being used.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2/63
502:191.213
§
HONEYWELL 800
.44
191.
from any input device
under control of I/O routines located in each individual program.
. 214 Master routines: . . . . Executive run supervisor,
which loads programs,
provides operator communication' restart facilities, and the orthocorrection routine.
Errors, Checks and Action
.213 Data: •
• 22
Library subroutines:
these will have been incorporated with the original
program when it was
placed on the Master Relocatable Tape during the
Program Selection
Process B run.
Error
Check or
Interlock
Loading input error:
check
Action
onhotronic comction attempted •
Allocation impOllsible: check in Schedule Run.
In-out error:
error signal transmitted
along with data; or
with next data from
same I/O unit.
Storage overflew:
no check at run time.
Invalid instructions:
no check, behavior of
system not specified
for these cases.
Program conflicts:
Internal to specific
check
program:
n. check.
Between programs:
check
Arithmetic overflow:
check
Underflow:
check
Invalid address:
Reference to absent
check
area:
own coding.
automatic transfer.
autom atic uansfer.
automatic transfer.
automatic transfer•
Loading Sequence: . . • controlled by data supplied
automatic transfer.
to the Executive during
the Scheduling Run, which
.45 Restarts
. immediately precedes
Production running. Any
changes in priorities after .451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . • . .
established by calls written
this involve operator inby programmer; all protervention, and normally
grams must be restartany program brought forable on initiation.
cibly to the top of the
.452 Restarting process: . . either by program action,
queue cannot be run in
usually as a result of an
parallel with any other
error routine, or by opprograms.
erator intervention. Programs can be restarted
.24 Interpreter Input: . . . none.
individually. A restart
area large enough to hold
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
all necessary data is held
on the program tape for
.31 Storage
each active program .
• 311 Sequencing of program
.51 Dynamic: . . •
not available during
for movement between
production runs.
preset during scheduling
levels: " " "
"
run using data produced
in Program Selection Run. • 52 Post Mortem: . . . • . calls written into programmers own coding.
.312 Occupation of
dump of entire storage
allocated in scheduling run.
working storage: •
originated by operator .
. 32 Input-Output Units
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
. 23
.
.. .
.321 Initial assignment: .
.322 Alternation:
. 323 Reassignment: •
set by scheduler as input to :.61 Signals to Operator
scheduling run; checked
and supplemented if nec.611 Decision required
essary in scheduling run.
by operator: .
own coding.
own coding.
.612 Action required
by operator: .
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous Working:
yes, one unit physically
connected to each channel
can be operating.
• 42
Multi-programming: .
yes, unless special intervention has been programmed; one instruction
is taken from each program in turn.
.43
Multi-sequencing: . . . none.
2/63
standard or programmer
provided print-outs •
originated by a print-out on
the console typewriter to
provide, where necessary,
cross referencing between:
(a) Logical references;
1. e., Tape Unit C. D.
(b) Physical references;
i. e., Tape Unit 7.
(c) Data references; i. e. ,
Reel 2 .of Inventory
File.
also, to distinguish between
different programs.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: ARGUS (PRODUCTION RUNNING)
§
191.
.613 Reporting progress
of run:
" " "
.
..
502:191.613
.S
PERFORMANCE
.SI
Sxstem Requirements
log kept on console
typewriter.
.811 Minimum configuration: basic H-SOO with 4 tape
units, card reader, and
.62 Operator's Decisions: . manual actions by operator
printer.
as specified in
- . .812 Usable extra facilities: any, provided that the apappropriate document.
propriate checks are
hand-programmed.
.63 Operator's Signals
• S13 Reserved equipment:
1 tape drive and 512 words
of store, together with
• 631 Inquiry:
Print Special Registers .
" "
"
program group O•
.632 Change of normal
progress: • . . .
possibly, but normally
.82 System Overhead
causes any affected programs to be run singly.
.821 Loading time
Schedule: . .
1 to 4 minutes.
Production: •
1 second for each program
loaded.
.822 Reloading frequency
Schedule: ••
each batch of programs to
be scheduled.
Production: .
each production run.
• 823 Other
LOGGING
To schedule, prepare a Master Relocatable Tape
.7
ready for running and to set up the machine for a
production run takes from 10 to 15 minutes .
• 7i Operator Signals:
recorded on console
typewriter.
.83 Program Space
Available:
" " " " C - 512, where C is the
.72 Operator Decisions: . . actions recorded on
volume of core storage in
console typewriter.
the system.
.
.
..
..
.73
Run Progress: . . . . . start and end of each program recorded on
console typewriter.
• 74
Errors:
• 75
Running Times:
not available •
.76
Multi -running: Status:
available only by comparison of schedule documentations and console typewriter type-outs.
" " " "
.84
Program Loading Time: 2 to 4 minutes set-up per
production run; + n seconds, where n is the number of times any program
or segment is loaded from
tape.
.85
Program Performance:
recorded by print-outs .
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
the operating system is
turned off during production runs, and so has no
overhead at this stage; 10
to 15 minutes.
2/63
II ~'NDAR'
II
502:201.011
AtPORlS
ED
P
Honeywell 800
System Performance
HONEYWELL 800
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Carparatian and RNA Incarporated
4/63
502:201.012
HONEYWELL 800
HONEYWELL 800 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuration
Worksheet
Item
Reference
VI
1
Char/block
Recorda/block
msec/block
970
970
970
(File 1)
11
11
11
11
11
File 1 = File 2
39
22
14
22
14
File 3
92
92
75
7.7
6.7
File 4
107
107
107
&.7
7.7
K
3
= File 2
File 3
---
File 4
--= File 2
0.&
0.&
0.&
File 3
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
File 4
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
msec/block
al
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
maec/record
a2
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
maec/detail
b6
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
maec/work
b5+ b9
2.05
2.05
2.05
2.05
2.05
maec/report
b7+ b&
12.05
12.05
msec for
al
CP
0.7
&2 K
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
a3 K
199.1
199.1
199.1
199.1
199.1
File 1 Master In
0.&
0.&
0.&
0.&
0.&
File 2 Master Out
0.&
0.&
0.&
0.&
File 3 Details
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
File 4 Reports
1.1
1,177
1.1
1,177
1.1
20&.1
1,177
20&.1
1,177
20&.1
Standard
Problem A
F= 1.0
Unit of measure
12.05
CP
0.7
Printer
Printer CP File 2 &4
0.7
CP
0.7
12.05
CP
0.7
File 4
21.7
0.&
0.1
1.1
95.7
1.1
95.7
1,177 20&.
117.4
20&.1
95.7
1,177
1,400
1,400
1,400
1,400
1,400
Fixed
200
200
200
200
200
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
100
100
100
100
100
6 (Blocks 24 to 4&)
480
480
4&0
4&0
480
Filea
600
600
600
600
600
Working
100
100
100
100
100
2,8&0
2,8&0
2,&&0
2,&&0
2,880
4:200.1151
Totai
4/63
Printer
(4&·bit word)
Std. routine a
t
12.05
4:200.1132
4:200.114
Totai
Standard
Problam A
Space
4:200.112
0.&
C.P. and
dominant
column.
4
---
0.&
maec penalty
Central
Processor
Timea
VIII B
970
File 1
2
VII B
970
File 1
maec/switch
VIII A
(File 1)
t Input.
Output
Time.
VII A
Input/Output times aasume that the magnetic tapea paas over the Interblock gap at full speed.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
502:201.013
HONEYWELL 800 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Contd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Configurotion
Worksheet
5
Item
Reference
V
VI
input
H-S23/II
output
VII A
VIII A
H-S23-2
H-S23-2
H-S27
H-S22-3
H-S22-3
H-S22-3
H-S27
input
1 SO col card
1 SO col card
1 SO col card
1 80 col card
output
1 printed line
1 print ed line
1 printed line
1 printed line
Fixed/Floating point
Unit name
Size of record
Stondard
Mathemati cal
maec/block
Problem A
input
Tl
92
92
92
75
output
T2
67
67
67
67
input
T3
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
output
T4
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
maec/record
T5
2S.0
28.0
2S.0
2S.0
maec/5 loops
T6
92.0t
6.05
6.05
6.05
maee/report
T7
34.0
34.0
34.0
34.0
H-804-3
H-S04-S
H-S04-1
H-S04-4
4
.
4
<4
4:200.413
maec penalty
7
Unit name
Size of block
Standard
Statistical
Problem A
Recorda/block
B
maee/block
Tl
42
42
25
17
maec penalty
TS
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
maec/block
T5
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
maec/record
T6
O.S
O.S
O.S
O.S
maec/table
T7
O.S
0.3
0.3
0.3
4:200.512
C.P.
t Uaing aimulated floating point option.
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
502:201.100
Honeywell 800
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.111
.1
GENERAliZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A (Integrated Configuration)
• 112
• 113
.111
Record Sizes
Master File
• 114
96 4- bit characters with
24 6-bit characters.
Record Sizes (Contd.)
Detail File: . . •
Report File: .
Computation: •
Timing Basis: •
.
1 card.
1 line.
standard .
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.113.
Graph: • . • • • • • • see graph below .
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
~
./
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10,000 Master
File Records
/'
-
1/
2
1.00
~I/ lilA /IIA
/ ~
~c
.f
'..I
7
/
4
fI
2
~'
~
~C~---
----
---
_CP'--
~
'"
/ I;"
//
0.1 0
V
7
4
2
0.01
..
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
----CP-© 1963
Elapsed time
Central Processor time (all configurations)
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
502:201.101
§
HONEYWELL 800
201.
• 112 Computation:
.113 Timing Basis:
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A (Paired Configuration)
. 114 Graph: • • . . • .
standard .
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.113 .
see graph below •
• 111 Record Sizes
94 4-bit characters with
24 6- bit characters.
1 card.
IUne.
Master File-:
Detail File:
Report File:
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10,000 Master
File Records
2
VyB jIIB
1.00
J'
7
~
/
/
4
2
------~
./
~
j,Q
-
f
0.1 0
7
4
2
0.01
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
----.CP-6/63 Revised
Elapsed time
Central Processor time (all configurations)
502:201.120
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.12
.122 Computation:
. 123 Timing Basis:
Standard File Problem B (Integrated Configuration)
. 121 Record Sizes
Master File: •
48 4- bit characters with
12 6- bit characters.
1 card.
1 line.
Detail File: .
Report File: .
standard .
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.12 •
. 124 Graph: . . . . . • • . . see graph below .
100.od
7
4
2
10.0a
7
~
~
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
/'
/
2
1.0a
~cp""-
~I/ vyA
I
7
'I
/
4
/
~
--------~
... ---
_cP~
-
, -'
II
1//
2
0.10
!vIllA
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
Elapsed time
-
-
CP-~ Central Processor time (all configurations)
© 1963
by Auerbach Carparation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
502:201.121
§
HONEYWELL 800
201.
.12
• 122 Computation:
.123 Timing Basis:
Standard File Problem B (Paired Configuration)
• 121 Record Sizes
Master File: • •
. 124 Graph: . . • .
standard •
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.12 •
see graph below •
48 4- bit characters with
12 6- bit characters.
1 card.
1 line.
Detail File: .
Report File: •
10U.Uu
7
4
2
10.00
7
4
2
....
1.00
-'
7
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
v------ -------
/
1/
4
'"
VIIB~
ftf
2
I
o If-VIIIB & CP
0.1
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
----cp--
6/63, Revised
Elapsed time
GentrafProcessor time (all configurations)
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
502:201.130
201.
.13
• 132 Computation:
.133 Timing Basis:
Standard File Problem C (Integrated Configuration)
. 131 Record Sizes
Master File:
standard.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.13.
• 134 Graph: . • . . . . . . • see graph below •
192 4-bit characters with
48 6-bit characters.
1 card.
1 line.
Detail File: •
Report File:
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
~
/
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
./
-
1/
2
1.00
WV
II
/
.~
7
I""'J
4
~
./
1/
I"
~
~CP--
IIA
--
____ cp-
-
-
",'"
G~
/'
~r
1/
2
0.1 0
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-
Elapsed time
- C P - - Central Processor time (all configurations)
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
502:201.131
§
HONEYWELL 800
201.
. 13
.132 Computation:
. 133 Timing Basis:
Standard File Problem C (Paired Configuration)
. 134 Graph: • • . .
• 131 Record Sizes
Master File:
standard.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide. 4:200.13 •
see graph below •
• 192 4-bit characters with
48 6- bit characters.
.1 card.
• 1 line.
Detail File: •
Report File: •
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10. 000 Master
File Records
2
jHB
VyB
1.00
~
.L"
7
.MI'
/
/
~
---
--------
-
-'
~ ~IIIB&CP
4
/
tf
2
I
0.1 0
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-
6/63 Revised
-CP- -
Elapsed time
Central Processor time (all configurations)
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
502:201.140 .
.142 Computation:
.143 Timing Basis:
201.
.14
Standard File Problem D (Integrated Configuration)
. 141 Record Sizes
Master File:
trebled.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.13.
. 144 Graph: . . . . . . • . . see graph below •
96 4- bit characters with
24 6- bit characters.
1 card.
1 line.
Detail File: •
Report File:
100.00
7
4
2
--------
10.0a
7
~
./
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records .
___ cP-
/
1/
2
1.0a
r/
7
.1
4
/
cp----- -
inA
~
-
,~
~
c.:~
/
~"
.'
-,.I
2
VIIIA
I
0.1 a
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-----CP--
© 1963
Elapsed timp
Central Processor time (all configurations)
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Revised 6/63
502:201.141
§
HONEYWELL 800
201.
.14
• 142 Computation:
.143 Timing Basis:
Standard File Problem D (Paired Configuration)
• 141 Record Sizes
Master File:
• 144 Graph: • • . •
trebled .
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.13 •
see graph below •
96 4- bit characters with
24 6- bit characters.
1 card.
1 line.
Detail File: •
Report File:
100.00
7
4
2
10.0 0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10,000 Master
File Records
~-
VIIB-
~
1.00
-
~
VIlIS
-' --'
7
L~
IL'L
A- il'"
4
2
Vy
-
~
V
0.1 0
7
4
2
0.01
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33·
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
-
6/63 Revised
-
CP- -
Elapsed time
Central Processor time .(all configurations)
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
502:201.200
201.
.2
SORTING (Two-way merge)
• 21
Standard Problem EstiII.lates
. 212
.213
Key Size: . .
Timing Basis
• 214
Graph: . • • .
8 characters.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
see graph below •
.211 Record size:. • • • 80 characters.
100.0
7
/
4
/
~ I
,
V / lilt
2
/
10.0
"
7
/
4
~'f'
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required
2
Order
V
VI /V
V VII I
1.0
I
~
/
,, ,,
~
'/
/
~
VIII
1'1
, ," , " ,
7
/
4
/~
/
'/
2
~
0.1
2
4
7
2
1,000
100
4
7
2
4
10,000
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
HONEYWELL 800
502: 20 1. 20 1
§
201
•2
SORTING (Three-way merge)
• 21
Standard Problem Estimates
.211 Record Size: •
• 212 Key Size: ••
.213
Timing Basis:..
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 •
.214
Graph:.....
see graph below •
80 characters •
8 characters.
100.0
1
4
1;1
1.1
2
[7
/
10.0
1
7'
I
,/
V
4
/
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required 2
Order
I,J
v,
VI
V
V
1.0
,
II
1
,/
/
4
~
II'
~V[VVIII
~ IJ
II
1/
/
/~ /
.I
V
0.1
2
100
4
1
2
1,000
4
1
10,000
2
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
7/63
~
,/
V /
2
7 7
V
1/'
V/
'I
J
II'
V
II'
1
100,000
502: 20 1.300
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.312 Timing basis:
•3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
Standard Problem Estimates
. • . . using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.312; with Floating
Decimal Arithmetic
option.
see graph below •
. 313 Graph:
.311 Basic parameters:
general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.
100.00
7
4
·2
10.00
I
I
I
I
7
I
4
I
I
I
'I
2
I
J
Time in Minutes
for Complete 1.00
Inversion
J
II
7
-
I
4
I(
II
2
'I
/
0.10
II
7
I
J
I
4
I
V
2
/
0.01
1
2
4
©
7
2
10
Size of Matrix
4
7
100
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
2
4
7 1,000
4/63
HONEYWELL 800
502:201.400
.. .
.412 Computation:
§201.
•4
GENERAUZED MA THEMA TICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
(All Configurations)
.413 Timing basis:
. 414 Graph: .
•411 Record sizes: . . . •. 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.
.
5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions .
1 square root.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.413.
see graph below.
CONFIGURATION VI, VilA. VillA SINGLE LENGTH (36 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD
10,000
7
4
2
1,000
7
4
~
Time in Milliseconds per
2
Input Record
~
VI, VilA
7
~
V?IA
.L
100
I-
"
R = 1.0
4
/--~--
--
•• I-
R= 0.1 ha
""""!.:~
~-
-
-
~
7'
,-!dI'
~
I'"
~ Ii""
t--...
R = 0.01
2
10
7
4
2
2
0.1
4
2
7
1.0
4
7
4
10.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
4/63
7
100.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
502:201.500
201.
.512 Computation:
.5
GENERAUZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
.51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
(All Configurations)
.513 Timing basis:
•
.
. 514 Graph: •
. 511 Record size:
augment T elements in
cross-tabulation
tables.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users I
Guide, 4:200.513.
see graph below •
thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
1,000
7
4
2
~~
.I
100.0
7
~
/
4
Time in Milliseconds per
Record
"
IL
2
VII
10.0
7
-
Y
~
VIlA
4
(,-C, B times. A and C can be incremented.
B words, starting at A, moved to B words starting at C.
Move an item starting at A to an area starting at C.
Move a record, starting at A to an area starting at C.
c
Rlght-end-around shift (A) B binary places and store
in C'. Different orders allow for sign treatment and
protection of present contents of C.
Transfer control to C modified by (A) shifted around
. B bits.
Comparison
Jump to C if (A).r! (B) when treated alphabetiGally.
Jump to C if (A) r! (B) when treated numerically.
Jump to C if (A) ~ (B) when treated alphabetically.
Jump to C if (A) ':::; (B) when treated numerically.
Jump to C; and transfer (A) to (B).
c
c
c
c
c
Miscellaneous
Check Parity of (A). If incorrect, jump to C.
Orthocount·the record starting at A, ending at C - l.
If required, use scatter read techniques under control
of the table stored starting in B. Record the orthocount in C and C + 1 .
Simulate. Form a memory address (direct or indexed)
"from the low-order 11 bits of the command code and
store this instruction in the location thus specified.
Jump under control of the co-sequence counter.
c
c
S
Scientific Instructions
Floating Point - Normalized
FBA
a
FDA
a
a
a
FBS
FDS
FBM
FDM
a
a
b
b
b
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
c
c
}
}
}
© 1963
(A) + (B)~C, in binary or decimal mode.
(A) -
(B)~C,
in binary or decimal mode.
(A) x (B) - ? C, and a special register, in binary or
decimal. mode.
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
503:121.102
HONEYWELL 1800
§ 121.
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
A
B
C
FBD
FDD
FLN
FNN
ULD
a
a
a
a
a
b
b
b
b
-
c
c
c
c
c
FBAU
FDAU
FBSU
FDSU
a
a
a
a
b
b
b
b
c
c
c
c
BD
a
a
b
b
c
c
OP Code
A
B
C
OP Code
Floating: POint - Normalized (Contd. )
}
(B) / (A) ~C; in binary or decimal mode.
Jump to C if (A)" (B)
Jump to C if (A) ~ (B)
Store a doUble-length product into A and C.
Floating Point - Unnormalized
DD
}
(A) + (B)----?>-C, in binary or decimal mode.
(A) - (B)----;"C, in binary or decimal mode.
Fixed Point
(B) / (A)---;;' C, in binary or decimal mode. The
remainder can be retained.
INSTRUCTION
I/O
Channel
Device
X
X
RF
a
b
c
X
X
RB
a
b
c
X
X
X
X
WF
RW
a
a
b
b
c
c
X
X
X
X
X
X
PRA
PRD
PRO
a
a
a
b
b
b
8/63
OPERATION
Peripheral Instructions
Read forward from peripheral device XX into consecutive locations beginning at A. If distributed read is
required, use the table starting at B. Interruption
occurs in case end of file or error in previous
block is encountered.
Read BackwardBf; otherwise as Read Forward
Instruction.
Write Forward; otherwise as Read Forward.
Rewind Magnetic Tape or Paper Tape Unit XX. Lock
can be specified. Interruption occurs if an error
occurred on previous block.
Print the contents of A on the console typewriter.
Alphabetic, Decimal, or Octal format can be specified. Format instructions are given in B.
}
A
AUERBACH
®
503: 151.100
Honeywell 1800
Problem Oriented Foci lities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
.13 . Data Sorting and Merging (Contd.)
151.
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
. 11
Simulators of Other Computers
each "recoret" would effectively consist of all
the information in the Area header and the
Group header, as well as in the individual item •
A sort of this type of file does not change the
structure (it remains an Inventory File consisting of Items within Product Groups within Areas),
but can change the order of each header (Product
Groups, Areas, or Items) within itself.
H-400
Reference: . • . . Manual 051-89: H-400 Easy
Programs on the H-800.
Date available: . . July, 1961.
Description
An integrated package of routines for assembling, debugging and running of programs
written in H-400 Easy Language on the H-800.
IBM 650
Reference: . . .
Own coding facilities are provided.
H-800 Sort Package
Reference: .
· O5I-43A, Sort and Collate
Manual.
Record 'size:
• variable.
Block size:
· variable; preset number of
records.
Key size: .
· preset; maximum one full
item.
File size:.
• one reel of tape or equivalent partial reels.
Number of tapes: • 3 to 6.
Date available: ••• December, 1960.
Description
Two pa.rts, presort and merge sort. Presort
builds continuous strings of items in memory
taking advantage of any pre-ordering of the
Data.- Merge sort is of Cascade type, inwhich
the power of sort is one less than the number
of tapes used.
Manual: 650 Simulator for
the H-800.
August, 1960.
Date available:.
Description
A package of routines for simulating input
conversion, processing, output conversion of
mM 650 program s.
UNIVAC I & II
Reference: •
Manual: Honeywell 800 Univac Simulator
August, 1961.
Date available:.
Description
The UNIVAC Simulator package contains two
programs. One simulates the central processor
of the UNIVAC lor II, the second simulates
card conversion and printing.
H-800 Collate Package
Reference: •
• O5I-43A, Sort and Collate
Manual.
Record size: •.
variable.
mock size:.
variable; preset number of
records.
Key size: . .
preset; maximum one full
item.
File size: .•
99 reels of cape.
Number of tapes: .." 3 to 13 tapes.
Date available: • . . December, 1960.
Description
The collate routine can be a 2-way, 3-way,
4-way or 5-way merge. Input in each of the
above can be a single input tape or a second
or alternate tape. Output can be on one file
or an alternate. Included, if desired, is a
restart dump tape.
Scientific Option Simulation
Reference: • . .
ESMESS01, H-800 Subroutine Library.
Date available: • February, 1960.
Description
A package of routines that simulates scientific
option hardware, 801B Floating Point Option.
.12
Simulation by Other
Computers:. . . . none.
.13
Dita Sorting and Merging
Fact Compiler Sort
Reference: .
Record size:
mock size:
Key size: •
File size:.
FACT Manual.
see description.
S28, ~128, S',256 words.
any number of keys.
each reel is sorted separately, then merged under
manual control.
3 to 5,
1961.
Number of tapes:
Date available: •
Description
This routine provides sorting on FACT type
files where records are not used singly, but
as a hierarchy of headers, each of which may
have a number of subgroups. A typical file
would bean Inventory File consisting of Items,
within Product Groups, within Areas. Here
© 1963
.14
Report Writing
Edit Generator, including Report Writer.
Reference:. . .
051-129, Edit Generator
and Tape I/O Manual.
Date available:
1961.
Description
The Edit Generator is a library routine which
may be used to prepare reports. The Edit Generator creates routines which obtain data from a
source location, edit it, and record it on tape
or print it on-line.
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
HONEYWELL 1800
503:151.140
§
151.
.14
. 17
Report Writing (Contd.)
EacJtreport, each type of line, . and all editing
needed are previously specified in Standard
descriptive terms. During the program macro
codes are used to cause the actual preparation
of the report itself.
. 15
0.4 + O. 13N 11. 1 msec per card.
E1AMCEDl Edits card Input
E1FAMED11. Edits output for
o. 5 + IBN
16. 7 per 120 char
EIMAPED1J printer
line.
O. 3 per number.
E1FDC2M1 Edits fioallng point O. 3 per
numbers packed
number
4 to a card
Card-to-tape routines are presently being prepared
for floating decimal and floating binary .
SCOPE Transcription:
This is a single program that allows up to 8 simultaneous transcription operations betWeen punched
cards, printers, and magnetic tape units. The
operator supplies the parameters for each transcription operation needed.
File Maintenance
FACT Compiler
'Description
The FACT Compiler includes File Maintenance
provisions. (See under Section 502: 162).
.17
Other
Double- Precision and Complex Arithmetic Package
Reference: . • . . . . H- 800 Subroutine Library.
Date available:. . . . 1960.
Description
A series of packages for double-precision and
complex ar~thmetic have been provided. Separate packages deal with specific types of .
operands, such as fixed decimal,- floating binary,
etc. The timings are summarized in the following
table:
8/63
Timings (msec)
Type of Arithmetic
+
-
x
Double- Precision
Data Transcription
Max Central
Processor Loading
.16
Other (Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
®
Fixed decimal
Floating decimal
Fixed binary
Floating binary
0.30 0.31 0.82 1.41
not vet available.
No package planned.
0.7
0.4
0.3 0.3
Packa~
Complex Arithmetic
Fixed decimal
Floating decimal
Fixed binary
Floating binary
0.3
0.3
1.6
1.0
Nopacka~planned.
No package planned.
0.7
0.4
0.3 0.3
Code Conversion Routines
The H-1800 has a number of possible ways of
representing numbers. A number of routines
for converting ~rom one form to another are
available and are listed below. All times are
per number converted; number size may not
exceed one 48-bit word.
Fixed Decimal to Fixed
Binary: . . . . . . . . 0.8 msec.
Floating Decimal to
Floating Binary:. . 1. 3 msec.
Floating Binary to
Floating Decimal:
. 1:7 msec.
Floating Decimal to
Fixed Decimal:
.0.9 msec.
Radians to Degrees, in
Fixed Decimal: •.• 0.3 msec.
Degrees to Radians, in
Fixed Decimal: . . • 0.3 msec.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
503:201.011
HONEYWELL 1800-11 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuration
Worksheet
Reference
Item
VII A
1
InputOutput
Times
Char/block
Records/block
K
msec/block
File 1
VIII A
VIII B
(File 1)
970
970
970
970
(File 1)
11
11
11
11
21.7
21.7
21.7
21.7
= File
2
File 3
75
6.6
75
6.7
File 4
107
7.7
107
6.7
File 3
---
-----
File 4
---
---
---
-------
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
File 3
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
File 4
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
msec/block
al
0.23
0.29
0.29
0.29
msec/record
a2
0.16
0.16
0.16
0.16
ms ec/detail
b6
1.33
1.33
1.33
1.33
msec/work
b5
+ b9
0.69
0.69
0.69
0.69
msec/report
b7
+ b8
4.02
4.02
4.02
4.02
msec/block
for C. P.
and
dominant
column.
al
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
a2 K
1.76
1.76
1.76
1. 76
a3 K
66.44
66.44
66.44
66.44
File 1 Master In
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
File 2 Master Out
0.29
0.29
0.29
0.29
File 3 Details
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.22
File 4 Reports
0.33
1,177
0.33
84.7
0.33
1,177
0.33
73.7
69.56
1,177
69.56
84.7
69.56
1,177
69.56
73.7
msec/switch
msec/penaity
2
VII B
File 1
File 1
= File
= File
---
2
2
-----
4:200.112
Central
Processor
Times
3
Standard
Problem A
F
= 1.0
4:200.114
Total
..
Unit of measure (words)
1,400
1,400
1,400
1,400
Fixed
200
200
200
200
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
100
100
100
100
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
480
480
480
480
Files
600
600
600
600
Working
100
100
100
100
2,880
2,880
2,880
2,880
Std. routines
Standard
Problem A
Space
4:200.1132
4:200.1151
Total
©
1963 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
Reprinted 9/63
503:201.012
HONEYWELL 1800-11
HONEYWELL 1800-11 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Contd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Can fj gu rati on
Worksheet
5
Item
Reference
Fixed/Floating point
VII A
VII B
Floating·
Floating·
VIII A
VIII B
Floating·
Floating·
input
827
804-1
827
804-4
output
822
804-1
822
804-4
input
1 card
1 card image
1 card
1 card image
output
1 line
1 line image
1 line
1 line image
Unit name
/
Size of record
Standard
Mathemati ca I
",sec/block
Problem
A
input
T1
75
6.7
75
5.9
output
T2
67
7.7
67
6.7
input
T3
0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02
output
T4
0.03
0.03
0.03
0.03
msec/record
T5
1.30
1.30
1.30
1.30
rnsee/5 loops
T6
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
ms ec /report
T7
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
4:200.413
rnsee/penalty
7
Standard
Statistical
Problem
A
Unit name
804-1
804-4
Size of block
960
960
Records/block
B
24
24
rnsee/block
Tl
25
17
~sec/penalty
T3
0.3
0.3
msec/block
T5
0.02
0.02
m sec/record
T6
0.28
0.28
rnsec/table
T7
0.10
0.10
4:200.512
C.P.
• Using Scientific Option
9/63 Reprinted
A
AUERBACH
®
•
503:201.100
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Honeywell 1800·11
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
• 11
Standard File Problem A
. III Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
. 112. Computation:.
. standard.
• 113 Timing,BasiS:
. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 •
. 114 Graph: • . . . . . . . . • see graph below .
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
100.0
7
4
2
10.0
7
~
~
.-/
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
--
/
/
2
/~
~13,~13
1.0
/I
7
A1fI"'"
/I
H
4
2
VIIB
Ii
.~
t.7'...... '
--
~
....-
..,."...,
-CP
vmB /
/r
,I
0.1
7
~
/I
4
2
0.01
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - Elapsed time
-- - - Central Processor time (all configurations)
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
HONEYWELL 1800·11
503:201.130
§
201.
.13
Standard File Problem C.
. 131 Record sizes
Master file: .
Detail file: .
Report file: .•
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
.132 Computation:. •
. standard.
.133 Timing basis: .
. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 .
. 134 Graph: • • . . . . . . . . see graph below.
100.0
7
4
2
~p..,"'lnp.. _
10.0
-
.- .-
7
J'
./
4
./
/
2
/
1.0
Time in Minutes
to Process
10,000 Master
File Records
'I'
.!lIB, ",nIB _
VIIB
7
I
I
4
JIll'
vmB
~,.
2
~'
"""""--
.---
,-
C-;
-,-
-,'"
~/
0.1
7
II
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - Elapsed time
- - Central Processor time (all configurations)
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
8/63
A
AUERBACH
®
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
503:201.140
§20l.
.14
Standard File Problem D
.141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
• 142 Computation:.
trebled .
.143 Timing basis:
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14.
.144 Graph: . . • ., . . . . see graph below.
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
7
./
-
.- .-
./
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
2
10 ,000 Master
File Records
/
/'
I
1.0
,
_I
7
..,.-
II
I
4
..",
VIIB
II VIlIB
../
--
~, '1UlB, CP_
/'
2
6tJ
0.1
I
7
L
iI
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
LEGEND
------~---
-
-
-
Elapsed time
Central Processor time (aU configurations)
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
HONEYWELL 1800.11
503:201.300
§
.312 Timing basis: • . . • . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312; with optional
floating point hardware •
201.
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
.313 Graph: . . . .. . . . . . see graph below .
. 311 Basic parameters: . . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.
10.0
7
I
I
2
I
1.0
/
7
4
J
~
V
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
0.1'
7
I
I
4
1/
J
2
II
0.01
7
I
I
1
4
I
/
2
~
0.001
2
4
7
10
2
4
7
Size of Matrix
8/63
2
100
A
AUERBACH
®
4
7
1,000
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
503: 20 1.400
201.
5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions •
1 square root .
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413; with optional
floating point hardware.
.412 Computation: .
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
.413 Timing basis:
.411 Record sizes: . . . . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.
.414 Graph: . • . •
. see graph below.
CONFIGURATIONS VilA, VIIB, VillA, VIIIB; 40 BIT PRECISION FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD
10,000
7
4
2
,000
7
4
Time in Milli seconds per
Input Record
2
100
VIlA, VIIIA; R - 0.01, 0.1, 1.0
7
/
/
4
/
~
2
~
V
VIIB, R = 1.0"
10
7
VIIB, R = 0.1, 0.01.............
VIIIB, R = 1.0
4
JL
/
VIIIB, R = 0.1, 0.01/
2
1
2
0.1
7
2
1.0
4
7
2
4
10.0
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporatian and Info, Inc.
Reprinted 9/63
503:201.500
§
HONEYWELL 1800-11
201.
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
.51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
. 511 Record size:. •. • • . . thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
.512 Computation: .
augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables .
.513 Timing basis:
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.513 •
.514 Graph: • • • . • • . . • see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
~
Time in Milli - 2
seconds per
Record
V
It'
~LL
STANDARD
CONFIGURATION S
10.0
7
4
..-1'"
V
~
2
V
1.0
VIlA, VIIB
~
VIllA, VIIIB
7
I.....
4
-
~C?
2
0.1
2
4
7
4
2
10
2
7
100
T, Number of Augmented Elements
(Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations.)
9/63 Reprinted
A
AUERBACH
®
4
7
1,000
503:211.101
Honeywell 1800
Physical Characteristics
HONEYWELL 1800
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1963 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
503:211.102
HONEYWELL 1800
H.1800 PHYSICAL CHARACT ERISTICS
Unit Name
Central
Processor
Floating
Point
Option
Console
Power
Unit
1801
1801-B
1801-C
180.l->P
Additional
Memory
Tape
Control
Unit
Magnetic
Tape
Unit
803
804
Magnetic
Tape
Unit
IDENTITY
Model Number
Height x Width x Depth, in.
Weight, Ibs.
1802
72X255x30 72x50X30 36X 92 X 30 72x110x33 72X39X30 72X50X 30 67 X 28 X 29
6,000
1,20·0
300
3,320
-----
800
1,200
1,250
---
6,420
6,840
8,538
---
PHYSICAl
Maximum Cable Lengths
Temperature, OF.
50 to 110
Storage
Ranges
Humidity, '7'.
Temperature, of.
70 to 74
Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE
Humidity, '7'.
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
25,500
6,840
200
20,640
Air Flow, cfm.
I
Intemal Filters
20'7'.
efficiency
208,2000r
440 unregulated
~.
208,200 or
440 unregulated
.~
Nominal
208
208.
Tolerance
±2o/.
±2%
60 C.P.S.
60 C.P.S.
60
±0.5
C.P.S.
±0.5
C.P.S.
---
1
2 8
Voltage
Nominal
ELEC.
TRICAL
Included
in 180J.
-r·+1
J
60,.P,S.
Cycles
I
Tolerance
Phases and Lines
Load KVA
3
3.6
±J.5
C.P.S.
3
---
32.6
NOTES
8/63
~
A
AUERBACH
®
1.2
2.0
2.8
---
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
503:211.103
H·1800 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)
Magnetic
Tape
Unit
Printer
Control
Card
Reader
Control
Card
Punch
Controls
Model Number
---
806
807
808
Height XWidth x Depth, in.
---
72 x54x30
Weight, Ibs.
---
1,200
Unit Name
IDENTITY
72x54X30 72X54X30
1,200
1,200
High Speed Standard
Paper
Speed
Multiple
Tape
Paper
Terminal
Reader
Tape
Control
and
Punch and
Control
Control
809
58x61X36
750
810
811
58X61X36 72X85x30
600
2,000
Off·Line
Input
Control
Off.Line
Input.
Output
Control
Standard
Speed
Printer
Bill.
Feed
Printer
High
Speed
Printer
Standard
Speed
Card
Reader
815
816
817
822·1
822·2
822·3
823·1
823-2
72X20X30
47X71x19
50X42x26
58x58X30
400
2,815
1,600
715
1,500
1,012
900
---
1,200
1,200
1,200
---
---
6,350
4,918
4,800
4,800
3,960
3,960
---
6,840
6,840
6,840
---
---
---
1.8
1.7
1.7
1.5
1.5
---
2.0
2.0
2.0
---
?
72X20x30 72X20x30
400
400
47x71X19 57x80X36
2,815
High
Speed
Card
Reader
Standard
Speed
Card
Punch
824-1
High
Speed
Card
Punch
Tape
Control
824-2
831
Magnetic
Ink Char.
Sorter/
Reader
Off·Line
Output
Control
49x53x 25 42X29X35 72x51x30
833
Printer
PUilch
Control
Tape
Control
Contra I
Unit
12 Disc
Storage
Module
24 Disc
Storage
Module
834
835
860
860-1
860-2
through 9
72X51x30 72X51x30
72x51x30
72x51X30 52x70x44 52x70X44
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths
Temperature, of .
.
,
50 to 110
Storage
Ranges
Humidity, %
Temperature,
0
F.
70 to 74
Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE
Humidit y, '7.
---
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
8,520
5,400
5,160
4,585
3,203
10,440
1,680,
1,680
1,680
7,200
7,200
Air Flow, cfm.
Internal Filters
Nominal
208
Voltage
Tolerance
...
±2'7•
Nominal
ELECTRICAL
60 C.P.S.
Cycles
±0.5
C.P.S.
Tolerance
Phases and Lines
Load KVA
---
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.3
0.71
2.0
0.18
0.18
0.18
2.5
2.5
3.5
NOTES
©
1963 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
503:221.101
.ST,"IlAA'
ElD>lP>
•
REPCRTS
Honeywell 1800
Price Doto
PRICE DATA
§
221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Monthly
Rental
Name
$
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
1801
IS01-II
1801-B
STORAGE
1802
860-1
860-2
860-3
860-4
860-5
860-6
860-7
860-8
860-9
CARD
READERS
dnd
PUNCHES
823-1
823-2
824-1
824 lA
824-2
827
807-1
Central Processor with 8, 192-word
c;ore store, power supply, and console
Central Processor with 8, 192-word
core store, power supply, and console
Floatlng- Point Option
8, 192-Word Additional Memory Block
(maximum of 3)
Random Access Storage and Control
(50 million characters)
Random Access Storage and Control
(100 million characters)
Random Access Storage and Control
(200 mUlion characters)
Random Access Storage and Control
(300 millil)n characters)
Random Ac, 'ess Storage and Control
(400 million characters)
Random Access Storage and Control
(500 million characters)
Random Access Storage and Control
(60n milllon characters)
Random Access Storage and Control
(700 million characters)
Random Access Storage and Control
(800 million characters)
Standard-Speed Card Reader (240
CPM) (085)
HIgh-Speed Card Reader (650 CFM)
(0881I1)
Standard-Speed Card Punch (100 CPM)
includes basic unit (519 model II)
summary punch feature
45 columns of comparing
offset stacker
30 columns double-punch blank-column
detection
Heavy Duty Power Supply for the Model
824-1 (requIred for transcription mode
punching)
High-Speed Card Punch (250 CPM)
includes basic unit (544 model I)
offset stacker
half- time emitter
Card Reader--Card Pu.,lch (800 CPM/250
CPM) (1402)
Card Reader Control
(for 823-1)
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc,
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchase
$
19,150
960
919,200
18,000
?
858,000
4,300
215
206,400
3,200
160
153,600
6.100
1,220
275,000
8,100
1,620
365,000
12,500
2,500
560,000
16,900
3,380
760,000
21,300
4,260
960,000
25,700
5,140
1,160,000
30,100
6,020
1,360,000
34,500
6,900
1,560,000
38,900
7,780
1,760,000
125
15
7,700
325
52
14,700
154
39
7,881
-- -
-- -
490
35
22,275
550
45
30,000
950
50
45,600
---
S/63
503:221.102
HONEYWELL 1800
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§
221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
PRICES
CLASS
No.
Monthly
Rental
Name
$
CARD
READERS
and
PUNCHES
807-2
807-3
808-1
(Cont'd.)
808-2
808-3
- ...
PAPER
TAPE
UNITS
809
PRINTERS
822-1
810
Card Reader Control
(for 823-2)
Card Reader Control
(for 827)
Card Punch Control
(for 824-1)
Card Punch Control
(for 824-2)
Card Punch Control
(for 827)
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchase
$
1,100
60
52,800
1,100
60
52,800
1,050
60
50,400
1,150
60
55,200
1,150
60
55,200
Paper Tape Reader and Control
(1000 FPS)
Paper Tape Punch and Control
(110 FPS)
(specify model 1 for 11/16" tape or
model 2 for 7/8" or I" tape)
975
104
46,200
725
73
34,800
Standard-Speed Printer (150 LPM)
800
147
42,000
),175
190
70,125
1,950
100
475
20
79,800
4,800
1,050
55
50,400
1,250
125
60,000
1,450
145
69,600
2,000
3,100
2,000
4,100
900
900
550
900
75
700
700
950
1,550
100
155
100
205
180
180
165
180
5
50
50
70
270
96,000
148,800
96,000
196,800
43,200
43,200
26,400
43,200
3,600
33,600
33,600
45,600
74,400
1,700
85
81,600
1,850
145
88,800
1,950
200
93,600
(407)
822-2
822-3
822-3A
806-1
806-2
806-3
MAGNETIC
TAPE
UNITS
ALTERNATNE
CONTROL
UNITS
803-1
803-2
803-3
803-4
804-1
804-2
804-3
804-4
805
815
816
817
818
811-1
811-2
811-3
8/63
Bill-Feed Printer
includes basic unit (408 model AI)
equal-unequal compare (15 positions)
carriage storage (15 positions)
High-Speed Printer (900 LPM)
Vertical Spacing Option for the Model
822-3 (allows spacing of six lines per
inch or eight lines per inch) An installation charge will be made if this feature·
Is field installed.
Printer Control
(for 822-1)
Printer Control
(for 822-2)
Printer Control
(for 822-3)
Tape Control
High Density Tape Control
Economy Tape Control
Super Density Tape Control
Magnetic Tape Unit
High Density Magnetic Tape Unit
Economy Magnetic Tape Unit
Super Density Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
Off- Line Output Auxiliary Control
00- Line Input Auxiliary Control
Off- Line Input- Output Auxiliary Control
Off- Line Printer Control
(for use with 822-3 and 804-1,
804-2 or 804-3,
Printer- - Card Reader- - Card Punch
Control (for use with 822-1, 823-1 or
823- 2; 824-1 or 824- 2)
Printer- - Card Reader- - Card Punch
Control (for use with 822- 2; 823-1 or
823- 2; 824-1 or 824-2)
Printer- - Card Reader- - Card Punch
Control (for use with 822- 3; 823-1 or
823- 2; 824-1 or 824- 2)
A
AUERBACH
®
/
503: 221.1 03
PRICE DATA
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
§
221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Name
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
-- --
LTE RNATrvE ! 811-4
I ACONTROL
UNITS
(Cont'd. )
811-5
811-6
MlSCE LLANEOUS 833
UNITS
870
871
872
880
?rinter- - Card Reader- - Card Punch
Control (for use with 822-1; 827)
Printer- - Card Reader- - Card Punch
Control (for use with 822- 2; 827)
Prlnter- - Card Reader- - Card Punch
Control (for use with 822-3; 827)
1,700
85
81,600
1,850
145
88,.800
1,950
200
93,600
Magnetic Ink Character Sorter- Reader
Input Control Unit
Inquiry Station Control Unit
Inquiry Station
Slave Console Typewriter
Communications Control Unit
1,300
87
62,400
750
750
300
990
56
150
60
99
36,000
36,000
14,400
47,520
© 1963
Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
8/63
HONEYWEll 1400
Honeywell EDP Division
/
(
'''---
,~
I
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
HONEYWEll 1400
Honeywell EOP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
505:001.001
Honeywell 1400
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration
II
4-Tape Business System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
III
6-Tape Business System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-Tape Business System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IV
VI
6-Tape Business/Scientific System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Real-Time System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Storage
H-1402 Magnetic Core Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-460 Magnetic Disc File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Processor
H-1401 Central Processor . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
H-409
Paper Tape Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-410
Paper Tape Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-427-1 Card Reader-Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
H-423-2 Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output; Printers
H-422-3 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-422-4 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
H-404-1 Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-404-2 Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-404-3 Magnetic Tape Unit . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output; Other
H-440
Optical Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-416
Tape Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-405 Magnetic Tape Switching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
H-484
Communication Control . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-481
Communication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-480
Communication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . • • . • . .
Instruction List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Data Codes
Internal and Printer Code . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
Card Code . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Oriented Facilities
Simulation by H-800 . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
EASY SORT ll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EASY COLLATE . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
THOR . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERT . . • . . . . . . . • . . • • . • • . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linear Program Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • •
TABSIM . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Oriented Languages
AUTOMATH-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COBOL-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Oriented Language::;
EASY 1& II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Translators
EASY I & II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOMATH-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment
EASY Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
505:011
505:021
505:031. 200
505:031.300
505:031. 400
505:031.600
505:031. 700
505:041
505:042
505:051
505:061
505:071
505:072
505:073
501:073*
505:081
505:081
505:091
505:091
505:091
502:102**
505:102
505:103
505:104
505;105
505:106
505:111
505:121
505:141
505:142
501:151.12*
501:151.13*
501:151. 13*
501:151.16*
501: 151.21 *
501:151.22*
501:151.23*
501:161*
501:162*
501:171*
501:181 *
501:182*
501:191*
* Refer to indicated section of Honeywell 400 report; all Honeywell 400 software is
directly usable on the 1400.
** Refer to indicated section of Honeywell 800 report.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
HONEYWELL 1400
505:001.002
CONTENTS (Contd.)
20.
22.
3/64
System Performance
Notes on System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized File Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
505:201.001
505:201. 012
505:201.100
505:201. 200
505:201.300
505:221
505:011.100
Honeywell )400
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
§
011.
The Honeywell 1400 is a medium scale computer system oriented primarily toward
business data processing applications. Recent hardware developments make it possible to
adapt the system to a variety of real-time applications. Monthly rentals for H-1400 systems
range from about $9,000 to $18,000 and average around $13,000. Initial customer deliveries
were made in January, 1964.
Compatibility
The H-1400's throughput capacity places it in the middle of Honeywell's expanding
line of computers. The larger Honeywell systems are the H-800 (Computer System Report 502)
and the H-1S00 (Report 503). The smaller systems are the H-200 (Report 507) and the H-400
(Report 501).
The Honeywell 400 and 1400 are fully program-compatible and, with a few exceptions,
offer the same range of peripheral units. There is no direct program compatibility between
H-400/1400 systems and either H-200 or H-SOO/1800 systems, though a simulation routine permits H-1400 programs to be run on an H-800 or H-1S00.
All Honeywell computers can communicate with one another (but not with most competitive equipment) by means of a line of magnetic tape units uSing three-quarter inch tape.
Hardware
The central processor has facilities for both binary and decimal arithmetic. Both
multiply-divide instructions and floating point arithmetic are optional facilities, and all floating
point arithmetic is performed in the decimal mode. Three-address instructions are used (e. g. ,
"ADD A, B, C" means "add the contents of A to the contents of B and place the result in
location C"). The instruction repertoire is comprehensive and includes especially good editing
commands for translation of the 6-bit alphanumeric codes to and from their decimal and binary
equivalents. Except for the editing instructions, operand lengths are fixed at one 48-bit word.
A Honeywell 1400 word can hold one instruction, eight 6-bit alphanumeric characters, twelve
4-bit decimal digits (or eleven digits plus sign), sixteen octal digits, or a single 4S-bit binary
data item. A powerful "move" command permits the contents of up to 4,095 word locations to
be moved by one instruction.
The effective core storage cycle time, 13 microseconds per 48-bit word, is 30 percent faster than that of the Honeywell 400, providing an internal processing capacity for 10,000
to 12,000 typical three-address instructions per second. Other improvements over the H-400
include an increase in core storage capacity from the H-400 maximum of 4,096 words to the
H-1400 maximum of 32,768 words, addition of the Floating Point and Card Storage options, and
increases in the number of printers (now 2, previously 1) and magnetic tape units (now 16, previously 8) that can be connected.
The core storage is available in multiples of 4,096 48-bit word locations; maximum
size is 32,768 words. Each 24-bit half of a word has a parity bit which is checked whenever the
data is moved. The store accepts words with incorrect parity from input-output devices. The
processor is made aware of this condition by a forced transfer of control to a fixed location. A
parity-checking instruction is provided to find the incorrect word and correct its parity. Other
instructions are provided to implement techniques to correct the incorrect data. They are part
of a system called Orthotronic Control, which is used primarily with magnetic tape units and
disc files.
The central processor serves as the main input-output controller in H-1400 systems,
thereby minimizing the need for additional controllers or buffers. A special central processor
model, however, must be used with the fastest magnetic tape units (88.666 six-bit characters
per second).
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
HONEYWELL 1400
505:011.101
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
Iii 011.
The basic H-1400 system without optional facilities has very limited capabilities for
simultaneous operations. Except for a simultaneous tape reading and writing operation, computation, input, and output are handled one at a time and do not overlap. Optional buffer
features called Print Storage and Card Storage permit internal processing to be overlapped with
printing and/or card reading or punching.
Up to 16 magnetic tape units can be connected. The three available magnetic tape
unit models operate at 32,000 characters (or 48,000 digits) per second, 64,000 characters (or
96,000 digits) per second, and 88,666 characters (or 133,000 digits) per second. These units
have pneumatic drives which handle the tape more gently than mechanical drives. The
Orthotronic Control feature enables the H-1400 to ignore a faulty track when reading a tape and
to regenerate the correct data. In contrast to read-after-write error detection systems,
Orthotronic Control can correct errors occurring during recording, in storage, or during
reading. On the other hand, it does not notice recording errors until a later reading.
The printer operates at 900 lines per minute. The Print storage option frees the
processor for 98 percent of the printing time. The IBM 1402 Card Read Punch is the card
equipment normally used with the H-1400. It reads 800 cards per minute and punches 250 cards
per minute. The Card Storage option allows card reading or card punching (but not both) to be
overlapped with processing.
Up to 5 input and 4 output general-purpose peripheral trunks are available for connecting any of the following devices:
•
Magnetic disc files (random access storage for up to
100 million alphameric characters per file unit).
•
Communication controls (process messages to or
from remote equipment).
•
Paper tape reader (500 or 1,000 characters per
second).
•
Paper tape punch (110 characters per second).
•
Optical scanner (196 to 312 documents per minute).
Real-Time Processing
The basic Honeywell 1400 system is designed primarily for standard batch processing
applications. Through the addition of communication controls and magnetic disc files, the
H-1400 can handle inquiry, data collection, and management control functions as well. Batchtype production programs can be interrupted as necessary to process incoming messages and
transmit the replies.
Three types of communication control units are available. Up to five such control
units, in any combination, can be connected to an H-1400. The 484 multi-channel control can
accommodate up to 56 communication channels and handle several messages Simultaneously to
or from remote devices with speeds of up to 300 characters per second. The 481 single-channel
control is designed for lower message volumes and handles only one channel. The 480 control
handles the transfer of data between an H-1400 and another computer or a high-speed remote
device. The central processor's interrupt facility is used to initiate a transfer of data between
core storage and a buffer in the communication control whenever the buffer has been filled
(during input) or emptied (during output). Priorities can be established so that some routines
will be interrupted freely, other routines will be interrupted only to handle selected functions
of higher priority, and still other routines will never be interrupted.
A wide variety of remote input-output devices can be used in Honeywell 1400 realtime systems. Virtually any business data transmitter that can be connected to a telephone or
teleprinter circuit can be used. The remote equipment can be connected to the computer either
through a standard switched telephone network or through leased lines.
Software
Software for the H-1400 is the same as for the program-compatible H-400, with minor
modifications. Programs and programming systems available from Honeywell include:
•
3/64
EASY II, a standard assembler with symbolic addreSSing
and relocatable output. It includes an input-output macro
facility which is also used in other systems, such as
COBOL-61 and AUTOMATH.
505:011.102
INTRODUCTION
§
INTRODUCTION (Conld.)
011.
•
A COBOL-61 compiler which can be used on any
H-1400 system with a minimum of four tape units.
The compilation time for typical programs is approximately one-half hour, which is good for a
machine of this size. The language facilities are
fairly complete. The object programs are reported
to require approximately the same running time as
those produced uSing normal (EASY II) symbolic
coding techniques.
•
A FORTRAN II compiler (called AUTOMATH 400) that
includes a non-FORTRAN statement, OVERLAY,
which helps to overcome some of the limitations of
svstems with limited internal storage (like the H-400).
The compiler does a small amount of analysis of the
coding and its context and thereby improves the execution speed of the object programs. Only two levels
of subscripting are allowed, and the facilities for
detecting and handling errors at execution time are
limited. Compilation speed is high: approximately
one hundred statements per minute. Object program
execution times are slowed down by the need to simulate the floating point arithmetic on all H-400 machines,
but should be much improved when the Floating Point
option is available on H-1400 computers.
o
Sort Generator and Merge Generator Routines. These
are based on the polyphase method, which has been
pioneered by Honeywell.
o
Disc File Programs, which are currently under development to facilitate the programming of disc file
operations.
o
THOR (Tape Handling Option Routine), a general
routine for locating, copying, comparing, editing, and
correcting information on magnetic tape.
•
TABSIM, a "load-and-go" program that simulates the
functions of conventional punched card tabulating equipment, USing a source language that is compatible with
IBM 1401 FARGO.
Mathematical and statistical routines, which handle
functions, conversions, programmed multiply-divide
and floating point arithmetic, and curve fitting.
•
PERT and Linear Programming Packages.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
•
505:021.100
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
ED
P
Honeywell
1400
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§
021.
.1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Na me of location
Character:
Word:
Record:
Purpose or use
6 bits
48 bits
1 to 511 words
64 words
editing.
instructions. data items.
magnetic tape block.
disc storage.
© 1963
DATA FORMATS
Type of information
Representation
Binary:
Decimal or Hexadecimal:
48 bits in a word.
12 Characters, or sign plus 11
chars in a word.
8 Characters in a word.
1 word.
Alphabetic or Alphameric:
Instruction:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:031.200
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
Honeywell 1400
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031 .
•2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION II)
Deviations from Standard System:. • • . . • • .
magnetic tape is 100% faster.
can read and write simultaneously on
magnetic tape.
printer is 80% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
includes indexing and console typewriter.
core storage is 300% larger.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage: 4,096 words
Processor
&Console
}
$ 7,350
Card Reader: 800 cards/minute
550
Card Punch: 250 cards/minute
Printer: 900 lines/minute
Magnetic Tapes (4):
30,000 char/sec.
Optional Equipment Includes: • • . • . . . . . • . . •
© 1963
1,050
1,800
$11,150
none
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:031.300
§
HONEYWELL 1400
031 .
.3
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION m)
Deviations from Standard System: • . • . . • . •
no read/compute or write/compute simultaneity.
printer is 80% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
core storage is 100% larger.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage: 4,096 words
Processor
&Console
}
$ 7,350
Card Reader: 800 cards/minute
550
Card Punch: 250 cards/minute
Optional Equipment Includes: • • . • . • • • • . • . .
6/63
Printer: 900 lines/minute
1,050
Magnetic Tapes (6):
30,000 char/second
2,700
1. Multiply- Divide
2. Print Storage
390
250
$12,290
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
505:031.400
031.
.4
12-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION IV)
Deviations from
S~ndard
System: . . . . . . . . .
no read/compute or write/compute simultaneity.
printer is 10% slower.
card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is 25% faster.
Rental
Equipment
Core Storage: 4,096 words
Processor
&Console
}
$ 7,350
Card Reader: 800 cards/minute
550
Card Punch: 250 cards/minute
Printer: 900 lines/minute
Extended Tape Control
Magnetic Tapes (12):
64,000 char/second
Optional Equipment Includes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Print Storage
2. Multiply-Divide
3. Card Storage
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1,050
100
10,800
390
250
490
$20,980
6/63
505:031.600
§
HONEYWELL 1401l
031.
.6
6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION VI)
Deviations from Standard System:. • • . . • . . . .•
no read/compute or write/compute simultaneity.
printer is 80% faster.
card reader is 60% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage: 8,192 words
}
$ 8,950
Processor &: Console
Card Reader: 800 cards/minute
550
Card Punch: 250 cards/minute
Optional Equipment Includes: • . • • . • • . . • . . •
6/63
Printer: 900 lines/minute
1,050
Magnetic Tapes (6):
30,000 char/second
2,700
1.
2.
3.
4.
Multiply-Divide Option
Print Storage Option
Card Storage Option
Floating Point Option
250
390
490
150
$14,530
505:031.700
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
.7
031 .
TYPICAL REAL-TIME SYSTEM
Up to 56 buffered lines; input or output
as required.
Equipment
Rental
485 Communication Adapter Units
(56 max.)
*
484-2 Communication Control
(2 Bays): 14 buffers included
980
Core storage: 16,384 words
}
12,150
Processor and Console
Card
800
Card
'250
Reader:
cards/minute
Punch:
cards/minute
560
Printer:
900 lines/minute
1,050
Magnetic Tapes (6):
32,000 char/second
2,700
Real Time Clock
460-1 Disc File and Control:
25,000,000 characters
Optional Equipment Includes: . . . . . . . . • . • . . . ..
}
Multiply-Divide
Print Storage
Card Storage
155
2,490
250
390
,490
$21,215>1'
*
Cost of necessary adapter units ($25 to $40 per month each) is not included.
@1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info,lnc.
3/64
505:041.100
Honeywell 1400
Core Storage
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
§
041.
.16
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
Magnetic Core Storage.
H-1402.
. 12
Basic Use: ..
working storage.
. 13
Description
Reserved Storage
Purpose
Each Honeywell 1400 System contains, as standard
equipment, an H-1402 Core Storage module which
has a capacity of 4, 096 words. Seven additional
modules are available for extending the storage
capacity, in 4, 096-word increments, up to a
maximum of 32, 768 words. Each word contains
48 data bits and 2 parity bits. A word location
can hold data represented in anyone, or a combination, of the following formats:
€I
48-bit data word or instruction.
•
12 decimal digits (or 11 digits plus sign).
4)
8 alphameric characters.
The H-1402 core storage is arranged in 25-bit
groups, 2 of which make up a single computer
data word or instruction. The cycle time is 6.5
microseconds per half-word access, providing
an effective operating time of 13. 0 microseconds
for basic full-word operands.
The first 96 words are normally reserved as
input-output areas, index registers, arithmetic
registers, and interrupt jump locations. However
if they are not being reserved for a particular
'
function, they can be used for normal storage.
Because of the limited number of bits (12) in
each operand address, only the first or basic
storage bank of 4, 096 words can be addressed
directly. To gain access to the additional banks
requires use of the Bank Indicator Registers (see
Central Processor, 505: 051). One of these is
associated with the sequence register and one
with each of the three index registers. Addresses
are then formed relative to the bank indicated·
no extension beyond the 4, 096 words of each '
bank boundary is possible.
. 14
Availability: ...•.
6 months.
• 15
First Delivery: .
January, 1964.
Index and sequence
registers:
Arithmetic registers:
I/O control:
I/O areas:
Unprogrammed transfer
locations:
Machine working
locations:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: .
.22
Physical Dimensions
Number of
Locations
Locks
1
11
6
55
none.
none.
none .
none.
8
none.
15
none.
. magnetic core.
.221 Magnetic core type storage
Core diameter: . . . . 0.050 inch.
Core bore: • . . . .. 0.030 inch.
Array size:. . . . .. 32 bits by 64 bits.
Number of planes:. 25 .
. 23
Storage Phenomenon:
· 24
Recording Performance
.241 Data erasable by
program: . . . . .
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . ..
.243 Data volatile: . . . •.
· 244 Data permanent: . ..
.245 Storage changeable:.
.28
direction of magnetization.
yes .
no.
no.
no.
no.
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method: .. coincident current.
.282 Reading method: .
coincident current.
· 283 Type of access: . . • . . uniform.
· 29
Potential Transfer Rates
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: ...
Conversion factor: •
Data rate: . . . . .
word.
48 bits/word.
77,000 words/second.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
Identity:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions :
Digits:
Modules:
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
Minimum
Storage
Maximum
Storage
Basic
4,096
24,576
4, 096
36,864
basic plus 1402-7.
32,768.
262,144.
32,768.
393,216 .
2.
1
3/64
505:041.320
HONEYWELL 1400
§ 041.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.32
. 71
Data Transfer
.4
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . . . a single module containing
either 4, 096, 8,192,
12,286, 16,384, 20,480,
24, 576, or 28,672 words
can be added to the basic
4, 096-word module.
CONTROLLER: . . . . . no separate controller
required.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of
Heads: . . . . . . . . . . single access circuit.
· 52
Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . . . none.
· 53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
With self: . . . . . . . . . yes.
. 72
Transfer Load Size
With self: . . . . . . . . . N 48-bit words.
.73
Effective Transfer-Rate
With self: . . . . . . . . . 31. 4 + 26N, where N is
the number of 48-bit
words transferred.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Illegal instruction:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
· 531 For uniform access
Cycle time: . . . . . . . 6.5 Ilsec.
For data unit of:
O. 5 word.
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
·6
Invalid character:
3/64
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . • . none.
Check or
Interlock
yes
yes
none.
record parity
bits.
parity check
send parity
bits.
validity check
Action
processor stop.
processor stop.
processor stop.
forced transfer.
505:042.100
Honeywell 1400
Internal Storage
H-460 Magnetic Disc File
INTERNAL STORAGE: MAGNETIC DISC FILE
§
· 13
042.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . .
. 12
Basic Use: . . . . . . . . auxiliary storage .
.13
Description
There are six zones on each disc face, and each
zone has its own read/write head. All the heads
move together, so that they are correctly positioned over six physical tracks (or 32 64-word
records) on each disc at anyone time. The
rotational delay for any of the 32 records averages
34 milliseconds, but the data transfer time· varies
with the zone. The number of records per track
also varies with the zone, and the table below
shows the different values associated with each.
Zone
1
2
3
4
5
6
Search instruction initiates an access operation,
after which control reverts to the main program
in the central processor. An automatic interrupt
occurs upon completion of the search operation
(two milliseconds prior to the time when reading
or writing of the selected record may begin),
and the program normally branches to a routine
that reads or writes a record. All searching can,
therefore, be fully overlapped with internal
processing.
Magnetic Disc File.
Bryant Series 4000.
H-460.
The H-460 is a random access storage unit that
consists of a controller plus one disc cabinet.
Three, 6, 12, 18, or 24 data discs can be connected, providing a capacity of from 12.5 to 100
million alphameric characters per unit. The
maximum number of H-460 units per system is
four.
Number of 64-Word Transfer Time per
Records per Track Record (milliseconds)
3
4
4
6
7
8
19.4
14.0
11.5
9.5
7.4
7.1
Access to the disc is achieved by addressing data
records of 512 alphameric or 768 numeric characters arranged into 64 words. Any record can be
addressed independently. Slightly less than 1 per
cent of the file (that part over which the heads are
positioned) is available in under 44 milliseconds,
assuming average latency for disc rotation and a
weighted average time of 10.4 milliseconds for
data transfer.
To gain access to another band involves waiting an
additional 60 to 130 milliseconds for lateral head
movement. Thus, random access, including head
position changes, averages 139 milliseconds,
allowing 430 records per minute to be obtained or
stored randomly.
Three instructions are used in connection with the
H-460 Disc File: Read, Write, and Search. The
Read and Write instructions transfer up to 64
words between core storage and a disc track. The
Description (Contd. )
.14
Availability: . . . . . . . 9 months.
.15
First Delivery: . . . . . April, 1963.
.16
Reserved Storage: ... none.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: . . . . magnetic discs.
· 22
Physical Dimensions
.222 Disc
Diameter: . . . . . . . • 39 inches.
Thickness: . . . . • . . thin.
Number on shaft: ••• 4, 7, 13, 19, or 25.
· 23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
· 24
Recording Permanence
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . .
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . .
.243 Data volatile: • . . . . .
• 244 Data permanent: . . . .
. 245 Storage changeable: •.
.25
yes.
no.
no.
no .
no.
IJata Volume Per Band of 6 Physical Tracks
Words: . . . . . . . . . . . 2,048.
Characters: ..••... 16,384.
Digits: . . . . . . . . • . . 24,576 (or 22,576 in signed
H-1400 words).
Instructions: . . . . . . . 2,048.
Records: . . . . . . . . . 32.
· 26
Banis Per Physical
Unit: . . . . . . .
256 per disc (128 on each
side).
.27
Interleaving Levels: .. one (i. e., no interleaving).
.28
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method: ... moving heads.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
HONEYWELL 1400
505:042.283
§ 042.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.283 Type of access
Description of stage Possible starting stage?
Move head to
selected band: ..• yes.
Wait until record
is in position: ... yes, if a record on the same
band of any disc face was
previously selected.
Transfer of record: no, but previous stage time
may be zero.
.51
Arrangement of Heads
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
. 291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates: •....
Bits/inch/track: ..•
Compound bit rate: ..
.292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates: •••..
Unit of data: .•.•..
Conversion factor: ..
Gain factor: . . • . . .
Los s factor: . . . . . .
Data rate: . . . . . . . .
Compound data rate:.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module Size
900 rpm.
variable.
615,000 bits/sec.
27,500 to 75, 000 char/sec.
word.
48 bits/word.
1.
1.
3,472 to 9,375 words/sec.
3,472 to 9,375 words/sec.
· 52
1.
8,192.
524,288.
4,194,304.
Digits: • . . . . • • . . . 6,291,456.
Instructions: . . . . . . 524,288.
.53
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . included in unit.
. 42
Connection to system
Access Time, Parameters, and Variations
· 532 Variation in access time, in J.'sec.
Stage
Variation
Head positioning: . . . . 0 or 60, 000
to 130,000
Waiting for the disc
to be in position: ... 0 to 66,700
Transfer of record: .. 7, 100 to 19, 400
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . . . 3, 6, 12, 18, or 24 data
discs can be mounted on
the single shaft of the unit.
.4
Simultaneous Operations
All but the last 2 milliseconds of each disc seek
operation can be overlapped with internal processing, but reading and writing cannot be overlapped. Only one disc seek, read, or write
operation at a time is possible.
Discs: . . . . . . . . . .
Records: . . . . . . . .
Words: ...•••..•.
Characters: . . . . . •
.32
.511 Number of stacks
(See table below. )
.512 Stack movement: . . . . across 1 zone of 1 disc
face (there are 6 zones .
on the disc face).
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location: . . . . . . . . . one.
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack
With no movement: . 1 band = 32 records of 64
words each.
With all movement: . 128 bands = 4, 096 records
of 64 words each.
By all stacks
With no movement: . 32N records
where N = 6, 12, 24, 36,
or 48 depending on Model.
(i. e., 1/128 of capacity).
.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations: none.
Total: . . . • . . . . . . • 7, 100 to
216,100
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . • . none •
. 421 On-line: . . . . . . . . . . 4 .
. 422 Off-line: . . . . . . . . . none.
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
.43
· 71
Data Transfer
Connection to System
Data Transfer Control
.441
.442
. 445
.447
.448
Size of load: . • . . . . .
Input-output area: ...
Synchronization: .. . .
Table control: . . . . . .
Testable conditions: ..
. 72
133,700 .
· 73
Transfer Load Size: .. 1 record of 64 words .
Effect Transfer Rate
With core storage: ... not yet determined; depends
on the timing of the interrecord gap.
.511 Number of stacks
3/64
33,300.
10,400 .
With self: . . . . . . . • no.
With core storage: .. yes .
1 record = 64 words.
none .
automatic.
none.
none.
Stacks per module:
Stacks per yoke:
Yokes per module:
90,000.
Pairs of storage units possible
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions: . . • . . . . none.
. 44
Average
Model 0
36
36
1
Modell
72
72
1
Model 2
144
144
1
Model 3
216
216
1
Model 4
288.
288.
1.
INTERNAL STORAGE: MAGNETIC DISC FILE
505:042.800
§ 042 .
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Timing conflicts
Check or
Interlock
none
unpredictable.
not possible.
read tracking
check
forced transfer.
write tracking
check*
forced transfer.
parity check* forced transfer.
check
system deactivated.
* Orthotronic Control is optional. When used, two
Orthowords (computed by a single instruction)
are appended to each disc record and used to
detect and (in many cases) correct recording
errors when the data is read back.
© 1964 Auerbach Corparation and Info,lnc.
3/64
505:051.100
Honeywell 1400
Centra I Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Honeywell 1400.
Central Processor.
H-1401.
The H-1401 Central Processor is 30 per cent
faster than the H-400, and can (by means of bank
indicators) address eight times as much storage
(32,768 versus 4,096). otherwise, the processors are essentially the same.
The increase in speed causes no complications;
in fact, it results directly from the faster
storage cycle (6. 5 microseconds per half word of
25 bits versus 9.25 for the H-400). However,
the increase in storage capacity introduces programming complications for any machine which
has more than 4, 096 words of storage.
The 1400 utilizes three-address instructions and
has binary and decimal computational facilities.
The instruction repertoire is comprehensive and
includes strong editing and Boolean operations.
The 3 index registers can be incremented by up
to 4, 096. Floating Point and Multiply-Divide
instructions are optional. Multiply-Divide is a
prerequisite for the Floating Point hardware.
Description (Contd.)
One particular instruction operation deserves a
special explanation: "SELECT." It is used to
cause other instructions to be executed under its
control one at a time, particularly as in table
look-ups. The select operation is recursive and
may execute another select instruction. The
sequence counter is affected by select instructions
only when they cause a jump. The executed
address of a select instruction is formed by a
logical combination of one address and two masks.
It is possible to have eight storage banks, each
of 4, 096 words, in H-1400 systems. As the
original H-400 addressing systems had space
for only 12 bits (i. e., 4, 096 possibilities) it became necessary to increase the addressing
capacity. There are actually seven types of
addresses (the instruction sequence; the A, B,
and C addresses; and the three index registers),
but only four can be extended with the auxiliary
addressing provided in the H-1400. These are
allocated to the instruction sequence register and
the three index registers. If a programmer
wishes to reference an address outside the bank
in which the instruction is executed, he must use
an index register. This effectively reduces the
capacity of the indexing system (which was previously only adequate).
The created addresses are not properly sequential,
and addressing cannot be incremented outside the
actual bank address to which the index register is
set. Thus, if ill 3 contains 0024 8, is set for bank
1, and is used to increment an address 0477 8 , the
effective address will be 05238 in bank 1. However,
if it were set to address 77778, the effective address would be 00238; but it would be in bank 1,
not bank 2.
Errors and ends of input-output data transfers
can cause separate interrupts to occur. An
interrupt causes the processor to take its next
instruction from a unique location in storage
without changing the sequence counter that normally directs the processor to subsequent instructions. Since the sequence counter and the
three index registers are contained in a single
storage location, they are generally stored and
the specific I/O or diagnostic routine is entered.
This is done by one instruction. At the end of
this routine, the sequence counter and index
registers can be restored. Thus, two instructions are required to store and restore the
contents of the program registers and to provide
entrance and exit for each appropriate routine.
(Two routines are provided to process data from
each input-output channel, one for the normal
and one for the abnormal end of operation. )
Special input and output areas are fixed for the
standard card reader, punch, and printer. Editing
instructions are available which work with a binary
card image (four 12-bit columns per 48-bit word),
or with 6-bit print characters. These can be
edited to six-bit alphameriC, four-bit decimal
(which can be used computationally), or three-bit
octal characters by the editing instructions. Nonvalid characters cause a forced transfer. Insertion of specific characters, suppression of leading
zeros, and floating of the high order character of
a field can be performed automatically.
Cases involving multiple interrupts have been
handled in a convenient manner. When multiple
interrupts occur, the processor accepts the interrupt from the source with the highest priority,
which is defined by built-in hardware. Having
accepted an interrupt, all further interrupts are
disabled for 2 milliseconds. This should be
enough time to perform almost all of the diagnostic
routines. It is at least sufficient time to prepare
for subsequent interrupts.
Simultaneity in operation of the central processor
and input-output units is controlled by the method
of transfer logic associated with each of the units
concerned. Thus, some units (such as the card
units) allow overlapped operation of the central
processor while the peripheral unit is preparing
to make the transfers. This is not possible with
the magnetic tape units. The rules for such operations are given in Simultaneous Operations (Section
505:111).
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
505:051.130
§
HONEYWELL 1400
05lo
.13
.14
Availability: . . . . . . . 9 months.
First Delivery: . . . . . January, 1964.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
. 21
Operations and Operands
.218 Table look-up: . . . . . . none .
. 219 Others
Provision Comment
Move:
Operation
and Variation
Provision
. 211 Fixed point
Add-Subtract:
automatic
Multiply
Short:
none.
Long:
automatic
Divide
No remainder: none.
Remainder:
automatic
.212 Floating point
Add-Subtract:
automatic *
automatic
Multiply:
Divide:
automatic
*With optional hardware.
. 22
10,2
llD,48B.
*
10
110.
*
10
llD.
*
10
10
10
9 & 2D.
9 & 2D.
9 & 2D.
*
.216 Radix conversion: ... none.
entire memory
Special Cases of Operands
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure:. 1 word.
.232 Instruction layout
Part
OP A
I
Size (Bits)
6
2
B
I
2
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
subroutine.
subroutine
automatic
Insert point:
Insert any:
Float hex char:
automatic.
automatic.
automatic
Protection:
automatic
B
C
12
12
Note: Partial addresses are used with the index
registers to provide access to other core
banks.
.234 Basic address
structure: . . • . . . . •
.235 Literals
Arithmetic: .•.•..•
Comparisons and
tests: . . . • • • . . . .
Incrementing
modifiers: ••.•.•
Comment
9 leading zeros
remainder and LOP*
in std. location.
part of zero suppression
part of zero suppression
1 word.
1 word.
1 word.
* LOP is Low Order Product, i. e., the least significant
digits.
3/64
C A
I
2 12
.233 Instruction parts
Purpose
Name
OP: . • . . . . . . . • . operation code.
AI: . . . . . . . . . . . A address index .
BI: . . . . . . . . . . . B address index.
CI: . . • • . . . . . . . C address index.
A: . . . • . . . . . . . • A partial address.
B: •..••••••.•• B partial address or
parameters.
C: ••.••.•••.•• C partial address.
. 217 Edit format
Provision
any number
of words .
.221 Negative numbers: ... 4 binary zeros in first
digit of a signed decimal
word; all other configurations are positive; absolute value and sign.
.222 Zero: . • • . . . • . . • . . plus and minus zero can
occur and are equal in
some comparisons.
.223 Operand size
determination:. . . • . though generally one word,
in editing a character
count is used.
.23
. 213 Boolean
AND:
automatic}
Inclusive OR:
automatic
binary 48 bits.
Exclusive OR:
automatic
automatic
A·B v B·C:
.214 Comparison
Numbers:
2 instructions
llD sign.
Letters:
2 instructions
48 bits.
Mixed:
2 instructions
4B bits.
Collating sequence: 0 to 9 " = : + A to I ; . ) %0
-JtoR#$*"/StoZ@,
( CR.
. 215 Code translation
Size
Provision From
To
6B alpha
Oto BOC.
automatic 12B card col
4B unsigned D OtoBOD.
automatic 12B card col
automatic 12B card col
4B signed D Oto11D.
Oto BOD.
automatic 12B card col
3B octal
12Bcardcol Oto80C.
automatic 6B alpha
automatic 4BunsignedD 12Bcardcol Oto80D.
automatic 4B signed D
12Bcardcol OtoBOD.
12Bcardcol Oto BOD.
automatic 3B octal
print image
Oto 120C.
automatic 6B alpha
Oto 120C.
print image
automatic 4B decimal
print image
Oto 120C.
automatic 3B octal
automatic 4B hexadec
4B decimal
1 word.
Note: B = binary bits.
C = alphameric characters.
D = decimal digits.
automatic
Size
3 address.
none.
up to 4, 095.
up to 4, 095 •
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
505:051.236
051.
. 236 Directly addressed operands
.2361 Internal storage type:. core.
Maximum size: . . . . 32,768 locations.
Volume accessible:
4,096 with anyone bank
setting .
. 2362 Increased address
capacity: .. • . . . . by use of one of eight bank
settings.
.237 Address indexing
. 2371 Number of methods:. 1.
direct.
. 2372 Names: . . . • . . .
. 2373 Indexing rule: . . . . . the contents of a specified
index register are added
modulo 4, 096 to the
associated address.
· 2374 Index specification: . 1 of 3 indices (or none)
specified by 2 bits for each
address.
· 2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . . . 3 .
. 2376 Addresses which can be indexed
Type of address
Application
Operands:. . . .
out-of-bank addressing,
counting, and modification.
· 2377 Cumulative
indexing: . . .
none.
· 2378 Combined index
and step: . . . . . . . none.
. 238 Indirect addressing: .. none.
· 239 Stepping
. 2391 Specification of
increment: . . . . . . in stepping instruction.
. 2392 Increment sign: . . . . positive .
. 2393 Size of increment: .. 0 to 4,095.
.2394 End value: . . . . . . . specified in register.
.2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . . . • . yes.
. 24
Special Processor Storage
.241
Category
of Storage
Index registers;
Sequence register:
.242 Category
of
Storage
Index & sequence
registers:
Number of Size
locations in bits
3
1
12
12
Program usage
modification.
program counter.
Total
Access
number Physical time,
locations form
~
Cycle
time
~
· 316 Accessibility to
program: . . . .
addressable •
.317 Permanent or optional
modifier: . . . . . . . . optional.
· 32
Look-Ahead: . . . .
.33
Interruption
none.
.331 Possible causes
In-out units: . . . . .
.332
.334
.335
end of operation.
end of tape .
In-out controllers: . faulty transfer.
Processor errors: .. overflow.
editing illegal char.
Program ~ontrol
Individual control: .. as indicated by programmer.
Method: . . . . . . . . . by instruction and special
control register.
Interruption conalways when operation is
ditions:
initiated, unless
restricted by special
control register settings.
Interruption process
Disabling interrupyes; by control register
tion:
setting.
Registers saved: ... all.
fixed locations, dependent
Destination:
on type of interruption•
Control methods
Determine cause: ... location arrived at indicates
cause.
Enable interruption: . yes .
........
..........
.....
.336
normally restricted to one
main run and one independent peripheral
operation.
.34
Multi-running:
.35
Multi-seguencing: ..• none.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
· 41
Instruction Times in klsec
Decimal (8 digit operands)
.411 Fixed point
Add-subtract: . .
78.
Multiply: . . . . .
890 + 39Z. t
Divide:. . . . . . .
1210 + 52Q. t
Z = number of non-zero digits.
Q = sum of quotient digits.
4
core
location
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Seguencing
6
6.5.
· 412 Floating point
Add-subtract: . . • . . 130 to 149. :j:
Multiply: . . . . . • . . 1,014 + 39Z.:I:
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . 884 to 4,641.:j:
Z
.311 Number of sequence
control facilities: ... one.
. 312 Arrangement: . . . . . . sequence register.
. 313 Precedence rule: . . . . interrupts take precedence
but do not affect the
sequence counter.
.314 Special sub-sequence
counters: . . • . . . . . none.
.315 Sequence control step
size: . . . . . . . . . . . instructions; i. e. , words.
= number of non-zero digits in the multiplier.
· 413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: . . . . . . . . 6.5.
Indirect addressing:. not available.
Re-complementing:
45.
.414 Control
Branch: . . . . . . .. 32.
Compare & branch:
78.
· 415 Counter control
Step and test: .. . . . 45 to 65.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
505:051.416
HONEYWELL 1400
§ 051.
. 416 Edit: . . . . . . . . . • . . 52 to 78D.
none.
. 417 Convert:.....
. 418 Shift: . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 + 6. 5B.
B = Bits or decimal digits.
.42
Processor Performance in /lsec
.421 For random addresses
c = a + b: . . . . . . . .
b = a + b: . . . . . . . .
Sum N items: . . . . .
c = ab: . . . . . . . . . .
c = alb: . . . . . . . . .
Fixed Point
78
78
78N
890 + 39D t
1210+52D t
Fixed Point
.422 For arrays of data
ci = ai + br . . . . . . . 215
bj = ai + b i : . . . . . . . 215
Sum N items:' . . . . . 147N t
c = c + aibj= . . • . . . 1,360 t
.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data: . . . . . 142.
Alphabetic data: . . . . 142.
.424 Switching
Unchecked: . . . . . . . 112.
Checked: . . . . . . . . 282.
List search: . . . . . . 70 + 112N.
. 425 Format control per character
Unpack: . . . . . . . . . 8. 5.
Compose: . . . . . . . . 10.5
Floating Point
130 to 149.:1:
130 to 149.
130 to 149N.:j:
1, 014+39Z.:I:
884 to 4,641. +
*
Floating Point
280 to 299.:j:
280 to 299. f
280 to 299N. :I:
1,483 to 1,814.+
tUsing optional Multiply-Divide hardware.
:I: Using optional Floating Point hardware.
3/64
.426 Table look-up per comparison
For a match: . . . . . . 142 .
For least or
greatest: . . . . . . • 177 •
For interpolation
point: . . • . . . . . . 142 .
. 427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 58.
Set bit in pattern:. . . 58.
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 78.
Test bit in pattern: .. 56.
Test AND for B bits: 56.
Test OR for B bits: . 56.
.428 Moving data: . . . . . . . 32 + 26N for N-word transfer (8 characters per
word).
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
Overflow:
Underflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
interrupt
not possible.
interrupt
interrupt
check
none •
check
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
interrupt
interrupt
* Sequence counter not changed.
jump to std location*.
jump to std loc1l.tion*.
jump to std location*.
machine halt.
adjusted modulo
memory size.
jump to std location*.
jump to std location*.
505:061.100
Honeywell 1400
Console
CONSOLE
§
.13
061.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
. 12
Associated Units: . . . . Input Keyboard.
Output Typewriter.
. 13
Operator's Console.
Description
The H-1400 Operator's Console consists of a
desk and display panel which contain a small
complement of pushbutton switches and indicator
lights. An input keyboard, which is built into
the desk top, permits direct communication with
the central processor. A typewriter located
behind the sloping display panel can monitor the
system by typing data directly from storage.
Description (Contd.)
•
Determine the status of each peripheral device;
i. e., check for "ready" or error condition.
Q
Determine the cause of a processor stop
(machine or program fault) .
The input keyboard consists of 53 keys in a
standard typewriter arrangement. It is used by
the operator to perform the following operations:
III
Print the contents of a selected storage location.
o Enter data into a selected storage location.
o Load starting address and start processing.
o Select a card or tape unit and start initial
loading of a "bootstrap" program.
o Rewind tape on a selected tape unit.
The console switches and displays enable the
operator to:
•
Start and stop execution of the stored program.
o Clear certain registers and reset error
indicators.
o Set four independent program control (breakpoint) switches.
o Type log data without entering it into the
computer.
The console typewriter acts as an output device
under program control. Three instructions are
available to provide for alphameric, octal or
decimal printout formats. A one-word console
buffer enables other instructions to be processed
during the relatively long printing time of 100 to
200 milliseconds per character.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
3/64
505: 071. 100
•
STANDI"
EDP
•
REPORTS
Honeywe II 1400
Input-Output
Punched Paper Tape Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE READER
§071.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . Punched Paper Tape Reader
and Control 409.
Burroughs Corp. Unit B 141.
• 12
Description
.23
Multiple Copies: . . . . none.
• 24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack:. .
Method of use: •
. 25
The 409 Punched Paper Tape Reader and Control can
read strips of paper tape at 500 frames per second,
or reels at 1,000 frames per second. Peak speed is
only attained after 15 frames have been read without . 3
interruptions. During the reading time. the processor is effectively restricted to the read tape instruc.31
tion. Each data frame is right-justified in twelvebit sections of 48-bit words and transferred to storage. The reader can handle codes of up to eight bits. .311
• 312
The data read is dependent upon standard subroutines to accomplish conversion to Honeywell 1400
.32
codes, but these are fast and simple. The amount
of data read is instruction -controlled and can vary
.321
from 1 to 256 frames. The effective speed varies
.322
from 71 to 492 frames per second in the medium.323
speed mode and from 142 to 984 frames per second
•
324
in the high-speed mode.
The reader can read tape either from spools or in
strips. It uses swing arms for tension, and spool
motor drive control. The read mechanism is photoelectric and the tape is driven by a pinch roller. An
automaac rewinding feature is incorporated in the
unit.
.13
Availability :
6 months.
• 14
First Delivery: . .
July, 1962.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head: .
. 212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: . .
Capacity: .
• 213 Feed drive:
• 214 Take-up drive: .
Range of Symbols
Numerals: • . . .
any 5- to 8-bit code.
EXTERNAL STORAGE
Form of Storage
Medium: . . •
Phenomenon-: .
paper tape .
punched holes.
Positional Arrangement
Serial by:
Parallel by:
Bands:
Track use
Data: •.
Redundancy check: •
..
Timing: . . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: .
Total: •
· ....
. 325 Row use
Data:
Gap:
by row, lO/inch.
5 to 8 tracks.
none.
5 to 8 tracks.
-any- track except
sprocket.
track 4 (sprocket track)
none.
none.
5 to 8 plus sprocket
track•
all rows.
none.
.33
Coding:.
.34
Format Compatiblitr
one character per row.
using 5 to 8 bits;
any 5-, 6-, 7- or 8-bit
code .
pinch roller friction .
2.
swinging arms.
3 feet.
servo motor .
servo motor.
Other device or system Code translation
H 401:
translation provided by
routine.
· .......
.35
· 22
read.
1.
8 plus sprocket.
frame at a time.
Physical Dimensions
Sensing and Recording Systems
• 221 Recording system: .
· 222 Sensing system: .
• 223 Common system: .
none.
pho~oelectric.
.351 Overall width:
. 352 Length: . ..
·
none.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/16; 7/8; 1 inch •
8 to 700 ft. by O. 1 inch.
4-foot leader.
4-foot trailer.
6/63
505:071.400
§
HONEYWELL 1400
071.
.56
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity: •.....
. 42
Connection to System
. 421 On-line:
. 422 Off-line: • . . . . . .
· 43
Disabled: . .
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: •
End of medium marks:
controller contained in
reader
up to 5 .
none.
Connection to Device
Testable Conditions
.6
PERFORMANCE
· 61
Conditions
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
. 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
I: .
· 44
II:
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load: . . ..
.442 Input-output areas:
· 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . •
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
. 445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization:.
· 447 Synchronizing aids:
1 to 256 frames.
core storage.
none .
none.
none .
program.
test busy.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: • . . . . . •
. 52
Input-Output Operations
.521
. 522
· 523
. 524
Input:. . .
Output: ..
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
· 525 Marking:.
.526 Searching:
.53
Code Translation:
.54
Format Control
Control: . • . .
Format alternatives:
Rearrangement: ..
· 55
Request interrupt: •
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Unload: . . .
full speed 1,000
frames/sec.
medium speed 500
frames/sec •
Speeds
.621 Nominal ot' peak speed: I; 1,000 frames/sec.
II; 500 frames/sec.
· 622 Important parameters
Full Speed: . . .
1,000 frames/sec.
Medium speed: .
500 frames/sec.
Start time:
5 msec.
Stop time: . . .
1 msec.
· 623 Overhead: • . . •
start/stop time ..
· 624 Effective speeds:
I; I, OOON/ (N + 6)
frames/sec •
II; 50ON/(N +6)
frames/sec .
N =number of frames per
read instruction (256
max) •
count in instruction.
1 to 256 frames .
none.
none .
unload forward or rewind.
till end of tape is
reached.
none.
none.
by program.
.63
Condition
Reading 1 frame at a time:
Procesaot:
msec
I
n
Reading 2 or more frames
at a time:
Processor:
I
.7
n
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
8!.
rearrangement of tracks.
· 72
disable up to 3 tracks
manual.
yes.
none.
none.
yes.
yes.
Demands on System
Component
plugboard.
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
6/63
1 to 256 frames .
.62
no.
not necessary.
no.
no.
no .
metallic foil at each end
of tape .
per frame ot Petcentage
0.07
0.07
or
or
1.0
or 100.
or 100.
2.0
Adjustment Method
Comments
Width:
movable tape guides
Other Controls
detents.
7.
3.5
Function
Form
Comment
Parity check:
Feed control:
Switch
switch
Backspace:
RewiDd:
Unload:
lever
button
button
allows checking odd/even or no parity.
allows tape to be fed from reel clockWise
(Reel Normal) or countetclockwise (Reel
Revetse) or strips (Strip).
moves tape backward one frame.
move to end of tape.
wind forward to end of tape.
INPUT-OUTPUT: PUNCHED TAPE READER
§
.8
071.
. 73
505:071.730
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel: . . . • •
• 732 Replenishment time:.
. 733 Adjustment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • • . . . •
ERRORs, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Capacity
700 feet.
1 to 2 mins •
reader needs to be stopped.
5 to 10 mins •
1.4 mins.
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Check or
Interlock
none.
parity check
none.
none.
tape tension and
metallic foU
Imperfect medium: sprocket check
Timing conflicts:
none.
©.1963 by Auerboch Corporotion and BNA Incorporated
Action
stoppage and signal to controL
stoppage. alarm.
stoppage. alarm.
6/63
505:072.100
.STANOAAD
II
EDP
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
Paper Tape Punch
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: PUNCHED PAPER TAPE PUNCI1
§
072.
.25
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
.. . . . . . .
Range of Symbols
Letters:
Special:
Punched Paper Tape Punch
and Control 410.
Teletype BRPE Punch.
Total:
.
Description
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
The 410-1 is a combination Punched Paper Tape
Punch and Control Unit designed to prepare fivechannel punched paper tape, ten frames to the inch,
at 110 characters per second. The 410-2 is the
same, except that it punches six-, seven-, or eightchannel tape. The image to be punched is packed 4
characters to a 48-bit word. The last character to
be punched reqUires about 4.5 milliseconds of processor time and all other characters occupy the processor full time; 1. e., nine milliseconds. For this
reason, the programming practice may be to punch
one character at a time even though up to 256 characters can be punched by one instruction.
.31
Form of Storage
. 311 Medium: . . .
. 312 Phenomenon: • . .
.32
. 321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
• 14
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Drive Mechanism
· 211 Drive past the head: •
.212 Reservoirs.
Number: . . . . .
Form: . . . . . . .
Capacity: . . .
.213 Feed drive: . . . .
.214 Take-up drive:. . .
. 22
sprocket drive pull.
• 33
Coding: .
.34
Format Compatibility
2.
swinging arm.
3 feet.
servo motor.
servo motor.
Any compatible
punched tape
reader: . . .
· 221 Recording system: .
· 222 Sensing system: •
• 223 Common system:
die punch.
none.
none.
.35
· 23
Multiple Copies: .
none.
.352 Length:. . . .
• 24
Arrangement of Heads
410-1
410-2
.4
CONTROLLER
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: . .
punch
1
5 plus
sprocket
frame at a
time
punch.
.41
Identity:....
© 1963
10 rows/inch •
410-1; 5 tracks.
410-2; 8 tracks.
none .
410-1
410-2
rnone
s.-
.none.
1
1.
none
none
5 plus
sprocket
none.
none.
8 plus
sprocket.
all rows.
none.
410-1; any 5-bit code.
410-2; any 6-, 7-, or
8-bit code.
Other device or system Code translation
Sensing and Recording Systems
Method of use: •
paper tape .
punch holes.
Positional Arrangement
.323 Bands:
. 324 Track use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Although (unlike the card code conversion) no special
Timing:..
..
edit instructions are available for paper tape, a very
Control
signals:
simple and fast subroutine is available for accomUnused: .
plishing character (or digit) to punch code'converTotal: .
sion. This technique permits the use of any size (up
to eight- bit) or configuration of code patterns.
.325 Row use
Availability: • .
6 months.
Data:
Gap:
First Delivery: • . • • August, 1962.
.13
410-1; any five-bit code .
410-2; any 6-, 7-, or 8-bit
code.
410-1; 25 symbols.
410-2; 28 symbols.
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width:
1.
8 plus
sprocket.
frame at a
time.
programmed .
410-1; 11/16".
410-2; 7/8" or 1 ".
6 to 1, 000 feet.
H 410.
.42 . Connection to System
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1.
none.
6/63
505:072.430
§
HONEYWELL 1400
072.
.43
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per
controller: .
.432 Restrictions: •
.44
2.
none.
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load: • . .
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output
area access: •
• 444 Input-output
area lockout: •
. 445 Table control: •
• 446 Synchronization: .
.447 Synchronizing aids:
1 to 256 frames.
core storage
PERFORMANCE
.62
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed:
.622 Important parameters
punch a frame: .
..
• 623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:
. .
.63
none.
none.
program.
test busy.
.51
Blocks
Condition
msec
I!er frame
Processor:
Processor:
P~ocessor:
punch 1 frame
punch additional frames
4.5
9.1
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
Percentage
50.
100.
Adjust guide.
8-bit frame •
.72
counter in instruction.
Other Controls
Comment
Function
Form
Rewind:
switch tape must be removed from punch
head .
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521
. 522
. 523
.524
. 525
•..526
Input: •.
Output: .•
Stepping: •
Skipping: •
Marking: •
Searching:
none.
1 to 256 frames •
1 frame forward •
none.
none.
none.
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Reel:
.732 Replenishment time:.
.53
Code Translation:
by program.
• 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
• 54
Format Control: •
none.
.8
.55
Control Operations:
none.
.56
Testable Conditions
6/63
9.09 msec.
none .
110 frames/sec.
Demands on System
ComI!0nent
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Disabled: .•
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium marks:
110 frames/sec.
none .
.5
. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: • . . . . .
.6
no.
not necessary.
no.
20 feet.
not necessary.
no.
• 73
Loading and Unloading
.....
Capacity
1,000 ft.
2 to 5 minutes .
punch needs to be stopped .
18 mins.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlo~K
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicu:
none.
not possible.
not possible.
implicit.
not possible.
check
none.
not possible.
Action
special branching.
505:073.100
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
Card Reoder-Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READER-PUNCH
. 12
§ 073.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ..
.12
Description
to be punched. Punching will usually be preceded
by a programmed conversion from internal
character code (alphabetic, decimal, or octal) to
standard Hollerith code, using special edit instructions. A post-punch reading station permits
a hole-count comparison check to be made on
the data punched. Any discrepancy results in a
forced transfer of control to an error routine
after punching is completed on the following card.
An Offset Stack instruction can then be used in
the error routine to cause the error card to be
deposited in the reject stacker. The 1,200-card
feed hopper and two 1, OOO-card stackers (normal
and reject) can be loaded or unloaded without
stopping the punch.
427-1 Card Reader-Punch
(IBM 1402 Card ReadPunch).
The 427-1 Card Reader-Punch utilizes the IBM
1402 Card Read-Punch mechanism, which consists
of an 800-card-per-minute reader and a 250card-per-minute punch housed in the same
cabinet. From the user's viewpoint, the reader
and punch are completely independent. One 427-1
can be used in a Honeywell 1400 system. The
older, 650-card-per-minute model 423-2 Card
Reader (see Section 501:073) can be used instead
of the 427, although it is no longer available
from the manufacturer.
The 1411 Card Storage Option is available for use
with the 427-1 Reader-Punch. The Card Storage
Option provides a one-card buffer store which
enhances the simultaneous processing capability
of the H-1400 system. With this option, either
card reading or card punching, but not both, can
occur simultaneously with internal processing.
Processing is delayed only during the 0.55 millisecond interval that is required to load or unload
the card buffer for each card punched or read.
The reader portion of the 427-1 reads standard
80-column cards at a peak speed of 800 cards
per minute. A binary image of each card column
is stored in a 12-bit section of a 48-bit word. A
fixed input area of 20 words (core locations 0005400073) is reserved for storage of the card image
in card column sequence. Special edit instructions
can then be used to convert standard Hollerith
card codes into any of three internal representations: 6-bit alphameric, 4-bit decimal, or 3-bit
octal characters. A hole-count comparison check
is made upon each row read from the card, using
a second reading station, and the bit configuration
of each character is checked for validity after it
has been converted to alphameric, decimal, or
octal form. If either of these checks discloses an
error condition, a forced transfer of control to an
error routine will take place.
Two types of read and punch instructions are
available on the H-1400 system: "interlocked"
and "without interlock" instructions. Varying
portions of the read and punch cycles are available
for simultaneous central processor operations,
depending upon whether or not the initiating
instruction was interlocked and whether or not
the system is equipped with the Card Storage
Option. The interlock instruction prevents internal
processing during the acceleration period of the
reader or punch; if the interlock is removed, then
internal processing can proceed during the acceleration period.
A hopper with a 3, OOO-card capacity and 3
stackers with 1, OOO-card capacities can be loaded
and unloaded without stopping the reader. All
cards are routed to stacker 3 after they have been
read unless a Reject Card instruction specifies
that stacker 1 or 2 shall be selected instead. An
"Early Card Read" feature is incorporated into
the 427 -1, providing a 3-point clutch so that card
reading can be initiated at 25-millisecond intervals.
In addition, an "Interchangeable Feed" feature is
available on an optional basis. This feature permits reading of either 80- or 51-column cards by
interchanging hardware.
The punch unit punches standard 80-column cards
at a peak speed of 250 cards per minute. A fixed
output area of 20 words (core locations 0007400093) is used to store a binary image of the card
Description (Contd. )
During each 75-millisecond card reader cycle, the
time available for overlapped internal processing
is a minimum 31 milliseconds without interlock
and only 6 milliseconds in the interlocked mode.
During each 250-millisecond card punch cycle, the
time available for internal processing is a minimum 55 milliseconds without interlock and only 10
milliseconds in the interlock,ed mode. As explained
in the preceding paragraph, the Card Storage
Option permits better than 99 per cent overlapping
of card reading or punching with internal processing.
.13
Availability: ..
9 months.
.14
First Delivery:
January, 1964.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
505:081.100
.STANOARD
EDP
_
R[!'ORTS
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: PRINTER (422-3 AND 422-4)
§
.232 Types of master
Multilith: .
Xerox:
Spirit: .•
081.
,.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: •
. 12
Printer.
422-3.
422-4.
.24
Description
The 422-3 and 422-4 are essentially identical units
except that the 422-3 can print in any 120 out of 160
print positions and is plugboard-wired, whereas the
422-4 has a fixed 120 positions. They are manufactured by Honeywell, but are quite similar to the
equivalent Anelex units. The printers can print at
up to 900 lines per minute, single spaced. At double
and one-inch spacing, the speed drops to 800 and 560
lines per minute respectively. These speeds are due
to unclutched operation which permits printing to begin as soon as requested, provided that the ul).it has
completed the previous operation. Printing with a
restricted range of symbols may increase the speed
up to 1,200 lines per minute. Paper tape loop control provides automatic or semi-automatic paper
spacing.
Arrangement of Heads
Type 422-3
Use of station: •
Stacks: . • . .
Heads/stack: .•
print
.25
Type 422-4
print.
1.
160 (120 used 120.
at a time)
line at a time line at a time.
1
Method of use: .
Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters: •
Special * :
10
26
20
ALGOL set:
FORTRAN set: .
Basic COBOL set:
Total: . . . . . .
56.
0 - 9.
A - Z.
' = & + ; . ) %- # $ , /
@, (* CR : [j'
yes.
yes.
yes.
* Also, 6 special drums are available with different
Options
special symbols.
,A print storage option is available which eliminates
about 98% of the processor time that is required when
the buffer is not used. Without the buffer, the
processor is inhibited for 53 milliseconds after a
print instruction is initiated, after which computing
may resume.
Model 1 uses the same special characters as the IBM'
407 keypunch, but with the following added:
, = +) ("
Model 2 uses the l'BM 12F "Selfcheck" font, suitable
for use with the optical scanner.
A 6 or 8 line per inch vertical spacing option is also
available.
Availability:
9 months.
.14
First Delivery:
December, 1961.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
Model 3 and 4 include the pound sterling symbol (L)
as well as the dollar sign ($).
Model 5 replaces various commercial symbols with
lower case t and 0 and the following Greek letters:
.13
• 22
yes.
yes.
yes.
Model 6 adds second versions of the following:
/
sprocket drive push & pull
tractors.
none.
and adds:
¢ and
Sensing and Recording Systems
The following are omitted:
· 221 Recording system: .
on the fly hammer stroke
against engraved drum.
• 23
yes.
Multiple Copies: .
· 231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
t
• 10 (8-pound paper).
© 1963
" + ; ) (
•3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
· 311 Medium: • • . • .
,312 Phenomenon: . . .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
paper.
printing.
6/63
HONEYWELL 1400
505:081.320
§
081.
· 32
Positional Arrangement
• 321 Serial by: .
· 322 Parallel by:
line, 6 or 8 per inch •
120 char, 10 per inch.
· 33
Coding:...
6 bits per char.
.34
Format Compatibility:. none.
. 35
Physical Dimensions
.53
Code Translation:
.54
Format Control
edit instructions.
plugboard.
yes.
none.
Rearrangement:
Insert spaces:
Recording density:.
.55
Control Operations
"End of run" light: .
. 351 Overall width: . .
. 352 Length: • . .
.
. 353 Maximum margins
Left:
Right: . . . . .
3. 5 to 22 inches .
indefinite .
.. .
.
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity:
. 42
450 Print Storage Option .
418 Off-line Controller
(422-4) only.
1400 Central Processor.
· 43
. 1.
Associated equipment
Off-line Controller Type
418 using a Magnetic
Tape Type 404- 3 and a
Printer Type 422-4.
Testable Conditions
no .
not necessary.
30 lines.
yes.
Disabled: . . . . .
Busy device: .. .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
3 inches.
3 inches.
Connection to System
. 421 On-line:
. 422 Off-line
Use
Printer: .
.56
activate •
.6
PERFORMANCE
.62
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed:
'.622 Important parameters
Cycle time: • . . .
Printing time: . .
Spacing time first
line: . . . . . . .
Spacing time
additionalline~.
.623 Overhead: . . . .
• 624 Effective speeds:'
900 lines per min.
67 msec.
53 msec .
14 msec .
8 msec.
spacing time; operation is
unc1utched. .
60, 000/(59+8L) lines/min .
L = average number of lines
skipped per print.
Connection to Device
. 63
· 431 Devices per controller: 1.
· 432 Restrictions:. . . . . . none.
· 44
Demands on System
Component
Condition
Processor:
Processor with
print storage
option:
print
msec per or Percentage
line
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size oUoad: • . . .
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
.445 Table control: ..
. 446 Synchronization:.
· 447 Synchronizing aids:
120 char .
fixed in core .
y,es.
none .
automatic.
interrupt when finished
printing, and before
spacing.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.52
.524 Skipping:.
.525 Marking: .
· 526 Searching:
6/63
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
0.84
1.3
Method
Adjustment
Head of form:
.72
... . .
hand-operated vernier
screw .
Other Controls
Function
Form
Manual single space:
Manual form space:
Stop at next'head of
form: • . .
button.
button.
120 char .
fixed.
. ..
Input-Output Operations
.522 Output: . .
. 523 Stepping: .
print
79.1.
char or words.
.5
.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Output: . . . . . .
53.0
1 ,line .
print then step, 0 to 63
lines.
paper tape loop; print then
skip.
none.
none.
.73
button.
Loading. and Unloading
..
.731 Volumes handled:
• 732 Replenishment time: .
.733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . • • • . .
box of forms.
0.5 to 3 mins.
needs to be stopped.
2 to 5 mins.
?
INPUT - OUTPUT: PRINT ER (422-3 AND 422-4)
§
505:081.800
081.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock Action
Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
echo check
fixed.
none.
interlock
Ribbon Tension:
interlock
Cycle check:
check
program jump.
device stoppage with operator
indication.
device stoppage with operator
indication.
device stoppage with operator
indication.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
HONEYWELL 1400
505:081.801
§
EFFECTIVE SPEED
081.
422.3 AND 422·4 PRINTERS
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
I'-
f'.
600
"
Effective Speed: 500
Printed Lines
per Minute
400
~
.........
, .........
300
'-.
~ ...............
200
-----....
----------
;
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
:
30
20
o
1/2
1
2
3
Inter- Line Pitch in Inches
6/63
4
5
505:091.100
·STANDAAD
EDP
_
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
Magnetic Tape
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE
§
.12
091.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .•
.12
Description
Magnetic Tape Unit .
404-1, 404-2, 404-3.
Except in speed, the 404-1, 404-2 and 404-3 Magnetic Tape Units are similar units. The 404-1 and
404-2 pass tape at 120 inches per second and the
404-3 at 60 inches per second. Rewinding speed is
three times as fast in each case. A row on any 404
tape consists of ten bits, including eight for data and
one each for parity and timing. Each row contains
either two digits or one and a third characters; i.e.,
an eight-bit segment from a 48-bit word. The recording density is 400 rows per inch on the 404-1 and
404-3, and 555 rows per inch on the 404-2. Peakand
effective data transfer speeds, in characters per
second and digits per second, are shown below •
When card reading is liable to be in process simultaneously with tape operations, tape block lengths
must be limited so that no interference occurs between the two operations. This is done by providing
an 18-millisecond period before the card reader
starts transferring data, during which time no tape
read or write operations will be initiated. It is
therefore advised that no tape instructions should be
allowed which will take longer than this 18 milliseconds to complete. This reduces the effective speed
to between one-third and one-half of the peak speed.
Details are shown in the table below.
To keep tape running at full speed requires very
careful programming. After the data transmission
Description (Contd.)
has ceased, there is time for only 20 simple instructions to be executed before a further tape instruction is given. Since magnetic tape input and
output can be overlapped with one another but not
with internal processing, programming is geared towards processing a block and then writing it out and
reading in the next block at the same time. It is not
possible to use the same area for simultaneous input
and output.
Orthotronic control words (which consist of 96 parity
bits arranged in two words) can be generated by program in the processor and appended to the tape record. Special instructions are also included in the
processor to use the Orthotronic words in reconstructing data read from tape with parity errors.
When the errors can be traced to a particular track
on the tape, a special read instruction is used to regenerate the data. The incorrect track is replaced
by a new track generated from the remaining data
and parity tracks. The Orthotronic procedures can
also be used to verify this data.
These units are equipped with vacuum capstans and
brakes which minimize wear by spreading acceleration forces over a larger area of tape than is customary with pinch rollers. The oxide surface of the
tape touches only the read-write head. The reels
and sections of the tape are accessible even when
reading or writing is taking place, although this disrupts the pressurized, air-cleaned environment that
is normally maintained over the tape. A writeenable ring can be inserted after tapes have been
mounted. A second write interlock is provided by
a toggle switch on the control panel.
Performance Characteristics of 404 Tape Units
Stopping Between Blocks
Condition:
Not Stopping Between mocks
Model:
404-3
404-1
404-2
404-3
404-1
404-2
32,000
48,000
64,000
96,000
.
89,000
133,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
96,000
89,000
133,000
24',200
36,300
48,400
72,600
58,500
87,750
21,400
32,100
39,000
58,850
47,000
70,500
400
600
800
1,200
1,120
1,680
400
600
800
1,200
1,120
1,680
17,400
26,100
43,000
64,500
60,000
90,000
14,500
21,750
35,000
52,500
49,000
73,500
Peak Rates:
Char/sec.
Digits/sec.
Effective Rates
(1,000 character
blocks):
Char/sec.
Digits/ sec.
Suggested maximum
block sizes:
Characters
Digits
Effective Rates
with suggested
block sizes:
Char/sec.
Digits/sec.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:091.130
§
HONEYWELL 1400
091.
.34
. 13
Availability:
6 months •
. 14
First Delivery: •
404-1 December, 1961.
404-21962.
404-3 January, 1963.
•2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
Other device or system Code translation
Honeywell 800/1800: • compatible.
Honeywell 400 off
line printers: . .
compatible.
Honeywell 1400: ••
compatible •
.35'
• 211 Drive past the head:.
• 212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form:
Capacity: •
• 213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive:
• 22
.351 Overall width:
• 352 Length: . . • •
2.
.4
CONTROLLER
vacuum.
7 feet each.
own motor •
own motor •
.41
Identity:....
.42
Connection to System
. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
.223 Common system:
magnetic head .
magnetic head .
single head.
.23
Multiple Copies:
none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
D. C. erase.
1.
1.
full row.
.43
Use of station:
Distance:
•
Stacks:
•
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:
read/write.
0.213 inch.
1.
.44
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: ••
• 312 Phenomenon:
.32
Serial by: •
Parallel by:
Bands: • .
Track use
Data: •.
Redundancy check: •
Timing:
Total: .
.325 Row use
Data:.
Gap: •
6/63
row at a time.
plastic base magnetizable
tape •
magnetization.
Positional Arrangement
.321
.322
• 323
.324
.33
10.
Coding:
row, 400 per inch.
10 tracks, 0.035 inch.
none.
8.
1.
1.
10.
3 to 511 words.
0.61 inch.
8 bits out of a 48-bit word
are recorded in each row;
this may be considered
two digits or 1-1/3 alpha
characters.
0.748 to 0.750 in •
250 to 2, 550 feet .
• built into processor •
.421 On-line: • • • • . • • 1.
•422 Off-line
Associated equipment
Use
Connect H 400 to
H 1400/H 800 or
H 800 or H 1800 and type
other H 400:. .
405 switch.
Off-line printer:
type 418 off-line controller
& type 422-4 printer.
Use of station:
Stacks: • • •
Heads/stack:
Method of use:
EXTERNAL STORAGE
Physical Dimensions
vacuum capstan .
SenSing and Recording Systems
.3
Format Compatibility
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 8.
.432 Restrictions:. • • • . none.
Data Transfer Control
•441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:.
• 444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
•446 Synchronization:
· .
· .
3 to 511 words •
any core location.
any word.
none •
none .
automatic.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
mocks
.511 Size of block:
•512 mock demarcation
Input:
Output: •
.·
·
.52
3 to 511 words .
gap .
count in instruction •
Input-Output Operations
.
.. 521 Input:
•522 Output:
.523 Stepping:
.524 Skipping:
• 525 Marking:
•526 Searching:
1 block forward.
1 block forward.
1 block forward or backward.
none •
none .
none.
.53
Code Translation:
matched codes.
.54
Format Control:
none.
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE
§
505:091.550
091.
. 55
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:' . • •
Unload: • • .
• 56
yes.
no.
no.
not necessary •
yes.
no.
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . .
Busy device: . • •
Output lock: . . .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller: •
End of medium marks:
no.
not necessary.
no.
1 block writing.
none.
implicit.
.624 Effective speeds (Contd.)
Stopping between blocks
404-3: • • . • • • 48,OOON/(732+N)
digits/sec.
32,OOOC/(488+C)
char/sec.
404-1: . . • . • . 96, 000N/(954 +N)
digits/sec.
64,OOOC/(636+C)
char/sec.
404-2:
133, OOON/(l, 284+N)
digits/sec .
89,OOOC/(876+C)
char/sec.
where N '" number of decimal digits per block.
C = number of alphameric characters per
block.
.63
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
Demands on System
Component
Operation
Msec per block
Percentage
Processor:
compute
Orthocount
O. 08 + 0.013n,
100"/0
Processor:
I: •
II:
.62
stopping between nlocks .
not stopping between blocks.
Speeds
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
.621 Nominal or peak speed
404-3:
48,OOO·digits/sec.
32,000 characters/sec.
404-1:
96,000 digits/sec.
.
64,000 characters/sec.
404-2:
133,000 digits/sec.
89,000 characters/sec •
. 622 Important parameters 404-3
.
404-1, 404-2
Start/stop time msec: 3.5/5.0
2.7/3.5
Start/stop distance
inches: . • • . • . 0.15/0.24
0.15/0.27
Gap, inches: • . • • 0.67
0.67
Min. cross-gap time: 11.1
5.55
Additional time if
tapes' stop between
blocks (msec):. . • 3.9
4.15
Tape speed (ins/sec):. 60
120
Pulse density
(rOWS/in): •
400
400 (404-1)
555 (404-2)
• 623 Overhead: . .
gap time •
start/ stop time.
Orthotronic check word
passage time.
• 624 Effective speeds
Not stopping between blocks
404-3:. . . • . .• 48,OOON/(556+N)
digits/sec.
32, 000C/(370 +C)
char/sec.
404-1:. . • • . ••
96,OOON/(556+N)
digits/sec.
64, 000C/(370 +C)
char/sec.
404-2: • • • . • . • 133,OOON/(760+N)
digits/ sec.
89,OOOC/(51O+C)
char/sec.
© 1963
read, write"
or read and
write
where n = number
ofwotds •
variable; does not
include stop time
of tape
Adjustment
Method
can be done while tape
is in motion.
Other Controls
Function
Fonn
Tape change: toggle
.73
and data
transfer time.
Comment
Write release: write ring
.72
100"/0 of start
Comment
3 position automatic rewind
unload, load, permit write
load, inhibit write (always
in read status).
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Capacity.
Storage
2,550 feet.
Spool:
0.5 to 1.0 min.;
•732 Replenishment time: •
needs to be stopped.
. 733 Adjustment time: .
0.5 to 1.0 min •
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . • • • •
5.66 mins.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Error correcting:
none.
row parity and Orthocount
check
none.
not possible.
check
pre-checked tapes.
Orthocount
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated
Action
program jump.
program jump.
program jump.
program.
6/63
505:091.800
§
HONEYWELL 1400
091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED
H.404·1 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
10,000,00 0
.-
- . --
7
4
2
. -r-.
I
!
-
i
1,000,00 0
7
4
2
NU ld5J.I<:_DAT A
100,000
..-
7
!/
4
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
.,- '" IA?:..-
,~
v--....:::::::: I::::-..
/I~ ~
2
....
L..- ~
ALPHAMERIC
DATA
.
.--'r-
~if"1
ILIl ,
10,000
.:/"
/~
7
./
1/....
/. V
4
2
1,000
/
~ 1/
/' /~
V/
V
7
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
4
2
100
7
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
Characters Per Block
LEGEND
Continuous reading (i. e., not stopping between blocks).
Non-continuous reading (i.e., stopping between blocks).
l
A-U-ER-BA-CH-'~
'-1
6/63
505:091.801
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE
§
091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED
H-404-2 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
10,000,000
.-
7
-
-
-
-J_.
4
2
1,000,000
7
4
2
NV
4
~
2
)1
10,000
z,- "
J,
7
7/
1,000
/
V
Al1/''
"'"
,
.
"
,ALPHAMERIC
DATA
.
..
I .... ' "
~'*'
/
,
L
0
4
"" ,
~....
/' V
~~
t-..-
,.,..'"
..,... ,'\
.JI'.
7
2
IC lATA
~
100,000
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
1
/
bf'/
7
:
4
2
100
I
.2
4
10
7
2
4
100
7
2
t,OOO
4
7
10,000
Characters Per Block
LEGEND
-
-- -
-
© 1963
Continuous reading (i. e., not stopping between blocks).
Non-continuous reading (i.e., stopping between blocks).
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
HONEYWELL 1400
505:091.802
§
091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED
H·404·3 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
10,000,00 0
..
-.
7
-...
- ..
4
-
2
1,000,00 0
7
4
2
100,000
NUMERIC DATA
7
VI
4
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
I
/1
~,....--
I
2
~~~
'/~'
~~i
~I""~
10,000
I
.l~
~rA.M~RI~DATA
/q..i{..~
~
x; .,.~
7
1M
4
~ j,S
A
2
/
1,000
~~
V' ~y
V
7
;
4
2
100
2
4
10
7
2
4
100
7
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
Characters Per Block
LEGEND
_
-
-- -
Continuous reading (i. e ., not stopping between blocks).
Non-continuous reading (i.e., stopping between blocks).
~---~
6/63
I AUERBAC~~
505: 101.100
_STANDARD
_EDP
."
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
Communications Control
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL
.12
§ 101.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .
.12
Description:
480 Communications
Control.
The 480 Communications Control is a 150 eight-bit
character buffer and the associated controls that
enable it to communicate with another 480, and
880 (a similar unit used with the H-800), an
mM 1009 Data Transmission Unit, or an mM 7701
Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal. The 480
can either send or receive data at a speed of 75 or
150 characters per second.
Description: (Contd.)
cepts the accumulated data. The characters are
stored, as are punched tape characters; i. e., four
characters to a word, right-justified in twelve- bit
sections, and the same conversion and checking are
necessary under program control. This process
requires about 0.7 millisecond per character. It is
expected that the 480 can be used continuously,
using no more than 20% of the processor's time for
all control and conversion operations.
The 480 uses a four-out-of-eight-bit character code
for transmission that lessens the chance of leaving
errors undetected. This unit connects to commercial transmission services through modulation equipment which is currently available.
The 480 informs the processor that it has sent or
received a block of data by means of an interrupt.
The processor then either sends new data or ac-
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505: 102.1 00
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
Tope Control Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: TAPE CONTROL UNIT
§
.12
102 •
•1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: . .
• 12
Description
figuration. Translation of these 8-bit groups into the corresponding H-14OD 6-bit codes is
automatic •
Tape Control Unit •
436-1.
The 436-1 Tape Control Unit accepts and implements the normal H-1400 tape instructions.
The Model 436-1 Tape Control Unit is an inputoutput device for the Honeywell 1400 system designed to operate with one mM 729-11 magnetic
tape transport to permit reading and writing
binary coded decimal information on mM magnetic
tape. The Model 436-1 Tape Control Unit and its
associated mM 729-11 Tape transport will read
tapes which have been written on an mM 727,
729-11, 729-IV, or 7330 tape unit, and will write
tapes which are readable on any of these units.
It will not permit simultaneous reading and
writing. Only 729-11 tape transports can be connected to the Model 436-1 Tape Control Unit, and
only BCD information can be read or written, at
a density of 200 or 556 characters per inch.
ijach mM 7-bit row (six information bits, one
parity) is read into the H -1400 as if it were a
9-bit row on Honeywell tape. Channels 1 through
6 correspond directly; IBM channel 7 (parity) is
treated as H~1400 channel 9 (parity); and H-1400
channels 7 and 8 contain zeros. The eight data
bits from these rows are positioned in memory,
six rows to the word, in standard H-1400 con-
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
Error Checking
A. Read Errors
Read checks implemented in the 436-1 Tape
Control Unit include row parity and longitudinal parity checks. If an error is detected,
a read error condition is stored.
B.
Write Errors
Row parity and longitudinal parity are generated within the 436-1 and are checked by
the mM read-after-write checking feature.
An echo check is performed with signals
generated in the 729-11 tape drive during
writing. Any attempt .to write on a fileprotected tape results in a write error.
• 13
Availability: ••
9 months •
.14
First Delivery:. •
July, 1963_
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505: 103.1 00
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
405 Mognetic Tape
Switching Unit
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE SWITCHING UNIT
• 12
,§l03.
:.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . .
.12
Description
Switching Units can be used. Switching Units are
field installable.
Model 405 Magnetic Tape
SWitching Unit.
The Model 405 Magnetic Tape Switching Unit is
designed to permit manual switching of one Model
404 or Model 804 Magnetic Tape Unit between any
two H-400, H-1400, or H-800 devices that can be
connected to a magnetic tape unit. (It should be
noted, however, that a magnetic tape unit cannot
be switched to a given device unless it is possible
to attach it to that device directly.) This unit operates solely as a switching device and performs no
logical operations on the. information flowing
through it. Up to four Model 405 Magnetic T.ape
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
A Model 405 Magnetic Tape Switching Unit is most
commonly used to switch a magnetic tape unit between a model 401 or 1401 central processor and
one of the following devices:
1. Another model 401 or 1401 central processor.
2. A model 803 tape control unit.
3. An H-800 off-line peripheral control unit
(PCU).
4. A model 418 off-line printer control.
.13
Availability:
6 months.
,.14
First Delivery:
May, 1963.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505: 104.100
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
484 Communication Control
INPUT -OUTPUT: 484 COMMUNICATION CONTROL
§ 104.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identi1;y: • •
.12
Description
484 Communication
Control.
The 484 Communication Control is a multichannel communication control which allows the
H-1400 to handle up to 56 messages simultaneously
from a variety of remote devices. It is intended
primarily for use in inquiry station applications
and operates at speeds up to 300 characters per
second.
Each channel of the 484 requires a separate 485
Communication Adapter Unit which is tailored for
each remote device. Among the devices that can
be handled by the 484 are: teletype networks,
typewriter inquiry stations, paper tape readers,
and specially designed management consoles.
There are four models of the 484 Communication
Control, whose buffer storage facilities vary as
follows:
o 484-1; up to 7 input-output buffers.
Ii)
484-2; up to 14 input-output buffers.
GI
484-3; up to 28 input-output buffers.
o 484-4; up to 56 input-output buffers.
Description (Contd.)
Each buffer can hold up to 16 characters, and
each is individually addressable by the program.
Simultaneous send-receive operations over the
same communications channel can be accommodated by assigning two buffers to that channel.
Code translation between the internal 6-bit code
and any of the Baudot or ASA Standard codes is
automatic; any other special code translation
must be done in the central processor by programming. A parity checking scheme is included
for checking the accuracy of incoming and outgoing messages. Error conditions generate an
interrupt signal which causes the program to
transfer to a special corrective routine. Where
applicable, this routine can attempt to have the
error message retransmitted.
Interrupt facilities are used to transfer data
between core storage and the device whenever a
buffer area is filled or emptied. The bit transfer
rate is 12 bits every 13 microseconds. Each
484 Communication Control requires one H-1400
I/o trunk, and a maximum of five 484's can be
connected.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
3/64
505:105.100
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
481 Communication Control
INPUT-OUTPUT: 481 COMMUNICATION CONTROL
§
105.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . .
. 12
Description
. 12
481 Communication
Control.
Description (Contd.)
preceding section for the 484 unit (Section 505:104).
The following list enumerates all significant
characteristics which are different for the 481:
o single channel device .
The 481 Communication Control is a singlechannel control device which is intended for use
in low-volume inquiry traffic. It is also suitable
as a supplement to the 484 Communication Control
in those situations requiring an additional 1-0
channel. Except for opeorating on a smaller scale,
the general characteristics of the 481 unit are
essentially the same as those described in the
Q
one 4-character buffer.
G
no automatic code translation.
o one 485 Communication Adapter Unit designed
for either send or receive operation.
o bit transfer rate is 6 bits every 13 microseconds.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
505: 106.100
Honeywell 1400
Input-Output
480 Communication Control
INPUT -OUTPUT: 480 COMMUNICATION CONTROL
§
.12
106.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
. 12
Description
Description (Contd.)
The 4S0 performs the following functions:
4S0 Communication
Control.
The 4S0 Communication Control handles the transfer of data between the H-1400 and another computer or high-speed remote device. It is intended
primarily for communication with one of the
following:
o H-400 or 1400 system equipped with another
4S0.
o It establishes synchronization with remote
equipment.
o In accordance with read, write, and control
instructions issued in the central processor,
it controls the flow of data between the H-1400
and the remote equipment.
o It supplies an input-output buffer area of 512
six-bit characters.
o H-SOO, lS00, SOO-II, or lS00-II system
equipped with an SSO Communication Control.
o It performs code translations between internal
6-bit code and a 4-out-of-S transmission code
that is designed to improve error detection
capability .
o IBM 1401 or 1410 system equipped with a 1009
Data Transmission Unit.
o It generates all control codes and performs
most control functions automatically.
o IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminal.
Each 4S0 Communication Control requires one
H-1400 I/O channel. The 4S0 informs the processor that it has sent or received a block of data
by means of an interrupt. The processor then
either sends new data or accepts the accumulated
data. The data transfer rate between the 4S0 and
the central processor is 12 bits every 19.5 microseconds. It is expected that the 4S0 can be used
continuously, using no more than 20% of the
processor's time for all control and conversion
operations.
III
IBM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission
Terminal.
Data conversion subsets are required at each end
of the communication line in order to convert a-c
line frequencies to/from digital form. The
manufacturer recommends using the Bell System
Data-Phone 200 series, which have conversion
rates from 1,200 to 2,400 bits per second.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
505: 111.1 00
STANDARD
REPORTS
Honeywell 1400
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§ 111.
A Honeywell 1400 system with magnetic tape, punched card equipment, and an on-line
printer is capable of only three sets of truly simultaneous operations:
(1) Tape reading simultaneously with tape writing.
(2) Printing and any other operation, if the Print Storage Option is installed.
(3) Card reading or card punching with any other operation, if the Card Storage
Option is installed.
This configur~tion can perform no other truly simultaneous operations - neither
operations involving the central processor and one of the peripheral units, nor those involving
two peripheral units. However, in both cases, a limited amount of effective simultaneity is
possible.
Some of the other available units are able to overlap all or part of their mechanical
cycles with internal processing. These include the H-460 Magnetic Disc System, which can
position its read/write heads while processing continues, and the Communication Control
Unit, which is completely buffered.
Central Processor/Peripheral Unit Simultimeity
When a peripheral unit is starting (before the actual data transfer), the central
processor can sometimes operate. Table 1 indicates the basic peripheral units with which
this feature is possible.
Peripheral Unit/Peripheral Unit Simultaneity
Two magnetic tape units can operate simultaneously, one reading and one writing.
If one operation takes longer than the other, the central processor is delayed for the longer
time. A paper tape operation which lasts less than 18 milliseconds (the time to punch
1 character or read 6) can be overlapped with the start-up time of the card units.
Printing can operate simultaneously with another input-output operation only if the
Print Storage Option is installed. Card reading or card punching (but not both) can proceed
simultaneously with other operation(s) only if the Card Storage Option is installed.
Other Operations
Rewinding and backspacing of magnetic tapes are not carried out under continuous
computer control. After they have been initiated, the central processor is no longer concerned with their operation and becomes available for other functions.
Programming Considerations
These considerations arise in connection with the card reader. While card reading
is in process, the programmer has the option of using the start-up time for other work. If
he does so, 18 milliseconds before the actual data transmission from the reader starts, a
number of specific instructions will be interlocked in order to prevent garbling of the input.
It follows that, in these circumstances, no instruction which can engage the central processor
longer than 18 milliseconds shall be executed once a card read operation has been initiated.
This restriction particularly affects magnetic tape operations, and limits maximum
block lengths to specific sizes, depending on the magnetic tape unit concerned. These are
(in alphabetic characters): 400 characters for the H-404-3, 800 characters for the H-404-I,
and 1,120 characters for the H-404-2.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:111.101
§
HONEYWELL 1400
111.
Programming Consideration (Contd.)
Honeywell EDP Division (Training and Research) recommends that this situation be
avoided entirely by always using a pre-edit run to transcribe the punched cards to tape, and
then processing the card images against the main file.
TABLE I
Peripheral Unit
Card Reader 423- 2 without Card Storage
Card Reader 423-2 with Card Storage
Card Reader 427 without Card Storage
Card Reader 427 with Card Storage
Card Punch 427 without Card Storage
Card Punch 427 with Card Storage
Printer without Print Storage
Printer with Print Storage
Magnetic Tape 404- 3
Magnetic Tape 404-1
Magnetic Tape 404- 2
409 Paper Tape Reader:
Reading 1 character
Reading 2 or more characters
410 Paper Tape Punch
Console
..; -
Start Time
A.vailability
and Time
(msec)
Cycle
(msec)
93
93
75
75
240
240
67 + 8 LS
67 + 8 LS
variable a
variable a
variable a
1
Cb
9.1
100
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
..;
33
33
23
23
65
65
to 126c
to 126
to 42
to 42
to 305
to 305
L3
L3
5.0 d
5.O d
5.0 d
0.0
1 to 7
4.0
o to 100
Transmis sioij. Stop Time
Availability Availability
and Time
and Time
(msec)
(msec)
x
..;
x
..;
x
..;
x
..;
x
x
x
x
x
x
..;
time is available for central processor work.
x - time is not available for central processor work.
a
b
c
d
LS
6/63
-
dependent on block length.
where C = number of characters read.
dependent on the time relative to the clutch point within the card cycle.
assuming Magnetic Tape has been stopped between blocks.
number of lines skipped between printed lines.
54
54
46
46
178
178
5L 7
5L7
variable
variable
variable
0.01
(G - 1)
9.1(C-I)
100
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
..;
6
6
6
6
7
7
14 + 8 LS
14+ 8LS
1O.0 d
4.7 d
4.7 d
1.0
1.0
5.1
-
505:121.101
Honeywell
1400
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
Instruction
Description
ADD
Decimal Add
Adds (A) to (B). stores result in
C: treats operands as signed II
decimal digits.
BAD
Binary Add
BST
Backspace Tape
Adds (A) to (B). stores result in 71.5
C: treats operands as unsigned
binary numbers
_(2)
Backspaces specified magnetic
78 + 45. 5T(l)
tape by one record.
BSU
Binary Subtract
Subtracts (B) from (A). stores
result in C: treats operands as
48-bit numbers.
71. 5
CHP
Check Parity
Checks parity of n words: corrects parity of first bad word
then subsequences to C.
65 + 13n
COC
Compute
Orthotronic
Count
Computes the orthocount for n
consecutive words. beginning
with. the word at A. It stores
first orthoword in C: second
in C + 1.
84.5 + 13n
CPI
Control
Peripheral
Input
Directs the peripheral device
connected to the input trunk
specified in B to perform the
operation also specified in B.
These operations include Start.
Halt. Rewind. and Rescan Document.
CPO
Control
Peripheral
Output
Is the s arne as CPl. except that 65 + ~it mech.
time(
it controls a device connected
to an output rather than an input
peripheral trunk. Possible operations include Start, Stop. Pocke
Selection.
DIV
Decimal Divide
Divides (B) by (A) •. stores result
in C, and stores remainder in
remainder word: treats operands
as signed II decimal digits.
ECA
Card Edit,
Alphanumeric
Edits n consecutive characters
52+8. 13n C odd
of alphanumeric data from card 52+9. 75n C even
area; stores edited data in memory" beginning with specified
position in word at A.
ECD
Card Edit,
Signed Decimal
Edits n consecutive characters
of decimal data from card area;
stores edited data in one word,
beginning with specified position
in word at A.
58. 5+1. 67n C odd
58.5+8.65n C even
ECO
Card Edit, Octal
Is the same as ECA, except that
data is edited into octal format
52+7.3n C odd
52+8. 13n C even
65 + unit mech.
time(7}
Avg. 3. 77ms: T =
6.5 [185+8(° 1+° 2 +•••••
On)] ° = Magnitude of
Quotient
Entire Instruction List reprinted from Honeywell 1400 Summary Description, pp. 31-38.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:121.102
HONEYWELL 1400
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Description
ECU
Card Edit,
Unsigned Decimal
Is the same as ECA, except that
data is edited into decimal
format
EPA
Print Edit,
Alphanumeric
Edits n consecutive alphanumeric 52+8.13n
characters, beginning ;with the
one specified in word at A, into
the print area in consecutive
positions, beginning with one
specified by C.
EPD
Print Edit,
Decimal
Is the same as EPA, except data 5Z+8.13n
is edited from decimal format
into print area.
EPO
Print Edit, Octal
Is the same as EPA, except that 5Z+8.13n
data is edited from octal format
into print area.
EXC
Extended Compare
Compares (A) with (B), bit by
bit, then (A + 1) with (B + 1),
etc., until two operands are
found unequal. If "A" operand
is less than "B", sequence
changes to C.
EXT
Extract
Places (A) in word at C wherever 78
(B) contains a 1 bit; places 0 bits
in all other positions in word at
C.
FPA
Floating-Point Add
130_149(11)
Adds (Al to (B), stores result
in C; treats operands as normalized, floating-point words composed of a I-digit sign, 2-digit
exponent, and a 9-digit mantissa.
FPS
Floating-Point
Subtract
Subtracts (B) from (A), stores
result in C; treats operands as
normalized, floating-point
words composed of a I-digit
sign, 2 digit exponent, and a
9-digit mantissa.
FPM
Floating-Point
Multiply
1014+39n(11)
Multiplies (A) by (B), stores
result in C; treats operands as
n = no. of non-zero
normalized floating-point words. digits in multiplier.
FPD
Float~ng-Point
Divide
FLT
6/63
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
Float
.
52+7.35n C odd
52+8.65 C even
n. 5+52n\~1
130-149(11)
884_4641(11)
Divides (B) by (A), stores
result in C; treats operands as
normalized floating-point words.
Converts Fixed-point decimal
76+13n(11) n
word in B to normalized floating- digit shifts
point decimal word under control
of exponent in A, stores result
in C.
= no. of
505:121.103
INSTRUCTION LIST
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Description
HAD
Half Add
Adds (A) to (B) without carries;
treats operands as unsigned
binary numbers; stores result
in C.
65
HLT
Halt
Stops the central processor,
depending on the setting of the
console breakpoint switches
and on B.
45.5
LAC
Less than or
Equal Compa:r':son,
Alphanumeric
Compares (A) to (B) bit by bit;
sequence changes to C if (A) :S
(B). Otherwise, continue in
sequence.
78
LDA
Locate Disc
Address
DireCts the random access
storage unit on the output trunk
specified in B to position the
read/write head at the disc
address stored in main memory
location (A).
78 + unit mech.
time(7)
LNC
Less than or
Equal Comparison
Numeric
Compares (A) and (B); treats
operands as signed II decimal
digit words; sequence changes
to C if (A) ~ (B).
78\"t/
LUP
Test Index and
Increment
Jump:IR.=Z: 65(5)
Compares A with contents of
1
index register associated with
IRi=1 or 3: 71.5
B. If contents of this index regNo Jump:IR.=Z:45. 5(5)
ister are less than A, the in1
struction increments them by B,
IRi=1 or 3:5Z
sequence chiUlges to C.
MPY
Decimal
Multiply
Multiplies (A) by (B)i treats
884+39n
operands as signed 11 decimal
n
no. of non-zero
digits; stores result with sign in digits in multiplier
C, low-order result with sign in
low-order product word.
NAC
Inequality
Comparison,
Alphanumeric
Compares (A) with (B) bit by bit. 78
If (A) F (B), sequence changes to
C.
NNe
Inequality
Comparison,
Numeric
Compares (A) with (B); treats
operands as signed 11 decimal
digits. If (A) F (B), sequence
changes to C.
78(bl
NOP
No Operation
Passes to next instruction, performing no other action.
3Z.5
OFS
Offset Stack
Rejects a card into an alternate
pocket.
65 + unit mech.
time(7)
PCA
Punch Edit,
Alphanumeric
Edits n consecutive alphanumeric characters, beginning
with the one specified in word
5Z+9.75n
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
=
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
HONEYWELL 1400
505:121.104
I
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Basic Time
in
Micro BecondB
Description
at A, into the card punch area
in consecutive columnB, beginning with the one specified by C.
PCD
Punch Edit,
Signed Decimal
Is the Bame aB PCA, except
that data is edited from decimal
format into punch area, and ·operates only on one word.
PCI
Punch Card,
Interlocked
Punches the contents of the card Without Storage Option
punch area onto one card. Cen- 39+unit mech. time(7)
tral processor interlocked until
completion of data tranBfer.
With Storage Option
1098.5
PCO
Punch Edit,
Octal
Is the same as PCA, except
that data is edited from octal
format into punch area.
5Z+9.75n
PCU
Punch Edit,
Unsigned Decimal
Is the same as PCA, except
that data is edited from decimal
format into card punch area.
5Z+9.75n
PCW
Punch Card,
Without Interlock
Punches· the contents of the card Without Storage Option
punch area onto one card. Cen- 39+unit mech. time(7)
tral processor not interlocked
With Storage Option 1098.5
and central processor operations
are posBible during acceleration
interval.
PDE
Prepare Decimal
Edit
Inserts special characters, sup- 58.5+l3n(8)
preSBes leading zerOB, floats
high characters in (A) according
to parameters at B. Stores
result in (C).
PRS
Print and Space
Prints the contents of the print
Without Storage Option
area on the high-speed printer,
39+unit mech. time(7)
and spaces the form as Bpecified With Storage Option 838.5
by B.
RCI
Read Card,
Interlocked
Reads the contents of one card
into the card read area. Central proceBsor iB interlocked
until the completion of data
. tranBfer.
RCW
Read Card,
Without Interlock
Reads the contents of one card
into the card read area. Central processor not interlocked
and so ceJ:ltral processor operationB are pOBsible during the
acceleration interval.
Without Storage Option
39+unit mech. time(7)
With Storage Option 1098.5
RDP
Read Peripheral
Read and transfer n frameB
of data from the device on
the input trunk specified in
B to memory location A.
5Z+13n + unit
mechanical time(7)
A
6/63
Ir-A-UE-R-BA-CH-I.....,~
5Z+9. 75n for n S 6
58.5+9. 75n for n > 6
Without Storage Option
39+unit mech. time(7)
With Storage Option 1098. 5
505: 121.105
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
INSTRUCTION LIST
121.
(Contd.)
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Description
RDT
Read Tape
Reads one record from the
specified magnetic tape and
stores in consecutive locations
beginning with A. If tape
channel is also specified, it
regenerates that channel
sirnultaneously.
REJ
Reject Card
Rejects a card currently in the
card reader feed into one of two
pockets as specified in B.
65 + unit mech.
time(7)
RPX
Restore Subsequence Priority
Set the index registers and
sequence register to the values
specified in (A) and (C). Then
reset the four bank indicator
registers to the values specified
in (A + 1). Alter or do not alter
the contents of the subsequence
control register, as specified in
Bi.
71.5
RTX
Restore Index
Register
Stores the high-order three 12bit groups of (A) in the index
registers 1,Z, 3, respectively:
stores low-order 1Z bits of (C)
in the sequence register.
58.5
RWT
Rewind Tape
Rewinds the specified magnetic
tape to its physical beginning.
65 + unit mech.
time(7)
SCH
Sequence Change
Changes sequence register
setting to the address specified
by C.
3Z.5
SBr
Set Bank Indicators
Set the bank indicator registers
specified in A to the values
specified in B. Reset the sequence register to C.
32.5
SCO
Sequence Change
on Option
Changes sequence register
setting to address specified by
A if setting of the console
breakpoint switches and (B)
coincide. Otherwise set sequence register to the address
specified by C.
52
SEL
Select
Modifies C using (A) and (B):
84.5
then makes a programmed subsequence to the modified address.
SET
Set Index
Register
Adds A to index register speci52
fied in Ai and stores result in
index register 1; adds B to index
register specified in Bi and
stores result in index register Z;
© 1963
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
_(2)
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
HONEYWELL 1400
505:121.106
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
Mnem.onic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Description
Basic Tim.e
in
Microseconds
adds C to index register
specified in Ci and stores result in index register 3.
SLB
Binary Shift
Left
Shifts (A) to the left the
specified num.ber of bits; the
m.ove is cyclic, so that bits
shifted off the left end enter the
word at the right.
45.5+6.5n(9}
SLP
Decim.al Shift
Left, Preserving
Sign
Shifts (A) tD the left n decim.al
digits, preserving the sign
digits. Digits shifted off the
left end are lost and replaced by
zeros at the right end.
45.5+6.5n
SMP
Superim.pose
Places a 0 bit in all positions of
78
(C) where both (A) and (B) con-
tain 0 bits; places 1 bits in all
other positions of (C).
6/63
SPX
Stores Subsequence
Priority
Store the contents of the fOUT
117 if SCR is not
changed (IZ)
bank indicator registers and
130 if SCR is changed(IZ)
the subsequence control register at location A+l. Set the
bank indicator registers to the
values specified in B. Store the
contents of the three inde:x;
registers and the sequence
register at A. Alter or do not
alter the contents of the subsequence control register, as
specified in Bi. If the subsequence call was caused by an
error, jum.p to C m.inus one;
otherwise, jum.p to C.
SRP
Decim.al Shift
Right, Preserving
Sign.
Same as SLP, except that (A)
are shifted to the right.
45. 5+6. 5n
SST
Substitute
Places (A) in (C) in all positions where (B) contains a 1
bit; leaves remaining bit
positions in (C) unchanged.
78
STX
Store Index
Register
Sto,res the contents of the three
58.?
index registers and the sequence
register in A. Sets sequence
register to C.
SUB
Decimal Subtract
Subtracts (B) from (A); treats
operands as signed 11 decimal
digits; stores result in C.
78 + 45. STIlI
SUP
Stall
During the acceleration interval
of the card reader and reader-
Stalls until end of
data transfer, or
INSTRUCTION LIST
505: 121.107
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
Mnemonic
Operation
Code
Instruction
Basic Time
in
Microseconds
De s c ri ption
punch. this' instruction stalls
the central processor; outside
this interval. it has the effect
of NOP.
45.5 microseconds
TAC
Type Alphanumeric.
Console
Prints (A) on the console printer IOO-ZOOms per
in alphanumeric form.
character{lO)
TDC
Type Decimal.
Console
Prints (A) on the console printer IOO-ZOOms per
in decimal form.
character( 10)
TOC
Type Octal,
Console
Prints (A) on the console printer IOO-ZOOms ger
character{l )
in octal form.
TSC
Transfer and
Sequence Change
Transfers (A) to location B; sequence changes to location C.
58.5
TSN
Transfer n Words
Transfers n words from
consecutive memory locations,
beginning with word at A, to
consecutive memory locations
beginning with C.
3Z.S+Z6n
UNF
Unfloat
Converts floating-point decimal
word in B to fixed-point decimal
word under control of exponent
in A. stores result in C.
76+l3n{ll)
n
=no.
of digit shifts
WRP
Write Peripheral
Directs the device on the output
trunk speci'fied in B to write
n frames of data transferred
from memory location A.
SZ+13n + unit
mechanical time(7)
WRT
Write Tape
Writes one record of the
specified n1,lmber of consecutive
words from memory, beginning
with A, onto tape.
_(Z)
NOTES
1.
T, a variable factor, is derived from the folloWing table:
Signs of Operands
T
A
B
+
+
0
0
+
-
1
Z
0
0
1
Z
0
1
1
1
-
1
1
+
1
1
-
-
+
+
+
+
-
-
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Addition
Subtraction
6/63
505:121.108
HONEYWEll 1400
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
§
121.
• Z.
For Model 404-1, 5.5 ms plus O. 1 Z5n; for Model 404-Z, 5.5 ms plus
0.09 n; for Model 404-3, 11.0 ms plus O. Z50n. (n is the number of
words read, written or backspaced. )
3.
n = number of pairs of words compared.
4.
If IA I =1 BI, and the sign of (A) is positive and the sign of (B) is
negative, add 45.5 microseconds.
5.
IRi is the number (i. e., r, Z, or 3) of the index register associate9
with the B address. Thus, for a Jump, the time is 71.5 microseconds
for index registers 1 amI 3, and 65 microseconds for index register Z.
Similarly, for a No jump, the times are 52 and 45.5 microseconds,
respectively.
6.
If IAI = IBI, and the signs of (A) and (B) are different, add 45.5
microseconds.
7.
Mechanical time varies with peripheral equipments and with time at
which peripheral order is issued.
8.
n = number of non-significant decimal zeros outside of sign position.
If 6 S n < 8, add 6.5 microseconds; if n < 6, add 13 microseconds.
If PI is a plus or minus sign, add 6.5 microseconds. If P2 is F (for
floating), add 6.5 microseconds.
9.
6/63
n = number of shifts; n = Number of bits shifted
4
+
Remainder
+ Remainder
2
10.
Central processor operations may continue after approximately 0.7
milliseconds for alphanumeric typeouts, 1 millisecond for decimal
typeouts, and 1. 3 milliseconds for octal typeouts.
11.
Add 13.0 microseconds for each indexed address.
12.
Add 6. 5 microseconds if the subsequence call was caused by an error.
1
505:141.100
Honeywell 1400
Data Code Table
Interna I and Printer
DATA CODE TABLE No.1: INTERNAL AND PRINTER
§
141.
.23
.1
USE OF CODE: . . . . . Internal and Printer .
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size: . ..
.22
Character Structure
. 4-bit numeric and 6.-bit
alphameric .
.221 More significant pattern: two bits: values are 16, 32.
.222 Less significant pattern: 4 bits: values are I, 2, 4,
8.
©
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
MORE SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
48
32
0
16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
.
+
J
C
L
M
N
0
D
E
F
Blank
Blank
&
K
Blank
7
S
T
U
V
W
X
G
H
P
I
R
Z
;
#
@
:
-
A
B
)
%
Q
y
$
,
.*
"{
CR
Blank Blank
Blank Blank Blank
•
6/63
505:142.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Honeywell 1400
Data Code Table
Card Input Code
DATA CODE TABLE No.2: INPUT VIA CARD
§
. 23
142 .
.1
USE OF CODE: . . . . . Input via card.
.2,
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size: . . . . . One column.
Character Codes
UNDERPUNCH
©
None
12
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
OVERPUNCH
None 12
11
Blank
+
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
.
:
Blank
Blank
&
+
+
-
%
•
0
-
Blank Blank
A
J
B
K
L
C
D
M
E
N
F
0
P
G
H
Q
I
R
;
#
$
)
0
..
*
0
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
Z
.
@
(
CR
Blank Blank
Blank
6/63
505:201.001
Honeywell 1400
Notes on System Performance
NOTES ON SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§ 201.
The format design and blocking of the main file were major considerations during the
preparation of the System Performance data. Some of the more unusual factors which were
considered were:
{I) The Block Length
The magnetic tape block length had to be short enough for a complete read or
write operation to be completed within 18 milliseconds, to avoid the possibility
of destroying the data transferred during the card read operations. The blocking
factor is thus restricted to 2 on those configurations with the slowest model tape
unit (H -404 -3).
(2) The Approximate Central Processor Interlock Time for the Magnetic Tape Units
The central processor is interlocked from the time the tape instruction is given
until the time the data transfer has been completed. The interlock time consists
of the data transfer time itself, the normal start time, and an additional time
which is necessary to pass over the remainder of the tape which makes up the
inter-block gap.
It is assumed that this distance includes all the gap not passed over during the
starting or stopping of the tape. This adds 2.7 milliseconds per block to the time
the tape units interlock the central processor.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:201.011
Honeywell 1400
System Performance
HONEYWELL 1400
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:201.012
HONEYWELL 1400
HONEYWELL 1400 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
Configuratian
Worksheet
1
InputOutput
Times
Item
11\
IV
432
432
1,104
2
2
5
24.5
24.5
21.1
File 3
-75.0
75.0·
75.0
File 4
115.0
(FU. l-)a
Char/block
Records/block
K
msec/block
FUe 1
msec/switch
Reference
1\
File 1
(FUe 1)
= FUe
2
= FUe
2
= FUe
2
115.0
115.0
4:200.112
File 3
File 4
msec/penalty
2
Central
Processor
Times
3
Standard
Problem A
F = 1.(1
..
File 1
14.6
14.6
16.6
FUe 3
46
46.0
3.0
File 4
52
1.3
1.3
msec/block
al
0.7
0.7
1.6
msec/record
a2
1.9
1.9
1.9
maec/detail
b6
0.1
0.1
0.1
msec/work
b5 +b9
10.5
6.7
6.7
msec/report
b7 +b8
0.3
0.3
0.3
msec/block
for C.P.
and
dominant
column.
al
0.7
0.7
1.6
a2 K
3.8
3.8
9.5
a3 K
21.6
13.5
33.5
File 1 Master In
14.6
14.6
16.6
4:200.114
File 2 Master Out
FUe 3 Detailsb
120.0
FUe 4 Reports
104.0
230
8.0
230
20.0
575
Total
264.1
230
160.6
230
92.6
575
120.0
15.0
Unit of measure 41-bit word
Std. routine a
Standard
Problem A·
Space
4:200.1132
200
140
140
Flzed
94
94
94
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
90
90
90
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
360
360
360
Files
156
156
156
18
18
18
768
768
4:200.1151
Working
Total
828
..
..
a Expressed as 4-bit characters. Used as a mixture of 4-bit and 6-blt characters in unpacked form.
b Includes allowance of 15 ml111seconds caused by prohibition of certain instructions during start of card read cycles.
6/43
505:201.100
•
STANDARD
_EDP
.,-,
REPORTS
Honeywell 1400
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.112 Computation: .
.113 Timing basis: .
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
.111 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .
standard.
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
• 114 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 115 Storage space required
Configuration II: .
828 48- bit words.
Configuration III:.
76848-bitwords.
Conf(guration IV:.
768 48-bit words.
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10,000 Master
File Records
-
2
-- -
10.0
7
/\\\'" / '
4
1.0
7
..-
-'"
~
/
2
~-
.~ ~
'J
L
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.33
0.1
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:201.120
§
HONEYWELL 1400
201.
.12
.122 Computation:.
.123 Timing basis:
standard.
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.12 .
.124 Graph:. . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard File Problem B
•121 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .
54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10,000 Master
File Records
2
~
10.0
7
-
.JII'
~7
--;Iii"7
4
2
1.0
//
/ r/
I~
I
7
f7
4
"
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
6/63
1.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
505:201.130
201.
.13
.132 Computation:.
. 133 Timing basis:
Standard File Problem C
. 131 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
.134 Graph:. . . . . . . .
standard •
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.13 .
see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
10.0
7
4
2
1.0
~
-- -- -
--
./
.JIIII' . /
.JI ~/
~V
/'
~
lt4
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.33
0.1
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:201.140
§
HONEYWELL 1400
. 142 Computation:.
.143 Timing basis:
201.
.14
trebled .
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.14 .
.144 Graph:. . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard File Problem D
. 141 Record sizes
Master file:.
Detail file: .
Report file: .
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
"'" -- -
10.0
.-
7
/~
4
2
1.0
~
~
----
",
~'f/
P
~
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
I
6/63
I'A-U-ER-BA-CH-/-'-'ID
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
505:201.200
201.
.213 Timing basis:
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
. 211 Record size: .
• 212 Key size: . . . . . .
. . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.213, corrected
for non-standard block
sizes used· in File
Problem A •
.214 Graph:. . . . . . . . see graph below .
80 cbaracters.
8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
IL
~
~
4
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
2
Into Required
Order
,.
~
~~
~
10
7
II'~
4
~~
"~
m\
2
~
II~ ~
II
II
7
4
~~~
~
2
o. 1.
~~
2
~~
4
100
7
1,000
2
4
7
2
4
10,000
7
100,000
Number of records to be sorted, using a 2-way merge technique
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
© 1963
by Auerbach Corooration and RNA Incorporated
6/63
505:201.215
§
HONEYWELL 1400
201 .
. 215 Graph:. . . . . . . .
see graph below.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
1I~[jI
4
I/. ~V
III~~
Time in Minutes 2
to Put Records
Into Required
Order
I~
10
~
VIV
",
7
"
11'/
4
I.J
2
~~
~ ~~
~
,~
7
",
///
"//
4
V
~~~
2
~
~
.J~
0.1
2
100
4
7
4
2
1,000
7
2
4
10,000
Number of records to be sorted. using a 3 -way merge technique
!ID
I
6/63
A-U-ER-BA-CH-_"-"
'-1
7
100,000
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
505:201.300
§20l.
.312 Timing basis:
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
. • • . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.312 •
• 313 Graph: ••• • • . • • • see graph below, showing
times for both floating
point subroutines and
optional floating point
hardware.
.311 Basic parameters: . . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating pOint to 9 decimal
digits.
100.00
7
4
IJ
2
)
10.00
7
I
I
II
4
III
I
Time in Minutes 2
for Complete
Inversion
1.00
II
iJ
L
7
I
I
L
I
I
4
I
2
USING SUBROUTIN E
II
I
~
1/
LUSING OPTIONAL HARDWARE
0.1 0
I
7
I
I
IJ
4
II
1/
2
II
O. 01
2
j
4
7
2
4
7
2
100
10
4
7
1,000
Size of Matrix
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
505:221.101
Honeywell 1400
Price Data
PRICE DATA
§ 221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Name
No.
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
$
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Monthly
Purchase
Maintenance*
$
$
1401-1
Central Processor
Standard Equipment:
3 Index Registers
4,096 Words Storage (accepts
404-1 or 404-3 magnetic tape
units)
7,350
588.00
330,750
1401-2
Central Processor
Standard Equipmeut:
3 Index Registers
4, 096 Words Storage (accepts
404-2 magnetic tape units)
OQtional EguiQment
8,100
648.00
364,500
1401-B
Floating-Point Option
(requires 451 option)
150
12.00
6,750
1,600
3,200
4,800
6,400
8,000
9,600
11,200
250
35
155
80.00
160.00
240.00
12.50
3.00
12.50
72,000
144,000
216,000
288, 000
360,000
432,000
504, 000
11,250
1 575
6,975
1,990
2,490
3,680
5,100
6,200
580.00
800.00
1,020.00
1,240.00
89,550
112,050
165,600
220,000
260, 000
900
900
450
75
155.00
155.00
100.00
5.00
43,200
43,200
20,250
3,600
540
54.00
24,300
540
54. 00
24,300
1402-1
1402-2
1402-3
1402-4
1402-5
1402-6
1402-7
451
1413-3
1413-4
INTERNAL
STORAGE
Additional Core Storage
4,096 Words
8,192 Words
12,288 Words
16,384 Words
20,480 Words
24,576 Words
28,672 Words
Multiply-Divide Option
Elapsed TimQ Clock
Real Time C10ck
Magnetic Disc File and Control
(4 max.)
460-0
460-1
460-2
460-3
460-4
INPUTOUTPUT
404-1
404-2
404-3
405
409
410
12. 5
25
50
75
100
million
million
million
million
million
characters
characters
characters
characters
characters
Magnetic TaQe (8 or 16 max. ,
one type only)
64,000 CPS or 96,000 DPS
89,000 CPS or 133,000 DPS
32,000 CPS or 48,000 DPS
Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
PaQer Tape
Punched Tape Reader and.
Control (5 max.)
Punched Tape Punch and Control
(4 max.)
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3/64
HONEYWELL 1400
505:221.102
PRICE DATA (Contd.)
S 221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Contd. )
No.
418
422-3
422-3A
422-4A
422-3B
422-4B
422-4
1450
Name
Printer (2 max.)
Off-Line Printer Control
Printer (can be substituted for
422-4) 900 LPM, 120 out of
160 positions.
Optional Equipment: Vertical
Spacing, 6 or 8 lines per inch
Optional Equipment: Two-Speec
Printing (600 or 900 LPM)
Printer (can be substituted for
422-3) 900 LPM, 120 fixed
positions
Print Storage Option
Card
Card Reader - 650 CPM
(1 max.)
1423-2A
Pocket Select
427-1
Card Reader-Card Punch - 800
cpm/250 cpm (1 max. )
1427-2A
Pocket Select
1411
Card Storage Option (to be used
with Model 423-2 or 427)
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance*
Purchase
$
$
$
1,550
1,550
270.00
69,750
74,400
100
20.00
4,800
1,920
40
1,050
210.00
47,250
390
19.00
17,550
325
15
52.25
0.30
14,700
675
560
15
45.00
0.30
30,215
675
490
39.00
22,050
2,530
1,990
380.00
300.00
121,440
89,550
1,490
120.00
67,050
790
'r9.00
35,550
300
24.00
13,650
940
1,020
94.00
102.00
42,300
45,900
980
98.00
106.00
114.00
112.50
2.50
2.50
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00
44,100
47,700
51,300
55,125
1,125
1,125
1,350
1,350
1,350
1,800
100
8.00
4,500
625
50.00
28,125
1,380
195.00
62,100
423-2
440
441
442-1
480
481
484-1
484-2
485-lR
485-lT
485-lli
485-2R
485-2T
485-2H
CONTROLLERS
1403
1406
436-1
Optical Scanner and Control
(5 max.)
Orthoscanner
Orthoscanner Cuntrol Unit Off-Line
Communication Controls
Single-Channel - high speed
remote devices
Single-Channel - low speed
remote devices
Multi-Channel (7 buffers)
2 Bays
3 Bays
Multi-Channel (14 buffers)
2 Bays
3 Bays
4 Bays
5 Bays
Communication Adapter Unit
Communication Adapter Unit
Communication Adapter Unit
Communication Adapter Unit
Communication Adapter Unit
Communication Adapter Unit
Controllers
Extended Tape Control (for 9th
through 16th tape units)
Storage and Control for Second
Printer (for on-line operation;
requires 1450 option on first
printer)
Tape Control Unit (1 max.) controls one IBM 729 II
Magnetic Tape Unit
1,060
1,140
1,225
25
25
30
30
30
40
I
I
j
* Monthly maintenance charges shown here apply for the first 36 months after installation.
3/64
HONEYWEll SERIES 200
Honeywell EDP Division
(
c
(
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
Honeywell EDP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
1.
IA
AUERBAC~
•
510:001. 001
SlANOlID
EDP
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
CONTENTS
REPORTS
CONTENTS
Heport 510: Honeywell Series 200 - General
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
Data Structure . . . . .
System Configuration .. , . . . . . . . .
Internal Storage 202
Core Storage.. . . . . . . . .
270
Random Access Drum Storage . . . .
250
Mass Memory Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output: Punched Tape and Card 227
Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ..... .
227
Card Punch . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ..... .
209
Paper Tape Reader ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ..... .
210
Paper Tape Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
,223
Card Reader . . . . . .
. .............................. .
Card Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
224
214
Card Reader/Punch . . . . . . . . . . ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .' . . . .
123
Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input":Output: Printers222
Printer (65'O-lpm versions)
222
Printer (950-lpm versions)
222
Printer (450-lpm versions)
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape 204A Magnetic Tape Units (3/4-inch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
204B Magnetic Tape Units (1/2-inch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output: otherHoneywell Series 200 Family
Interface Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ; ..
205
Magnetic Tape Switching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212-1
On-Line Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
Single-Channel Communication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-Channel Communication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
286
233
MICR Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
Communication Switching Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
On-Line Adapter (for Honeywell 800/1800) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
288
Data Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289-2
Page Printer & Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289-3
Page Printer & Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289-4
Paper Tape Reader . . . .
. ......................... .
Paper Tape Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289-5
289-6A
Paper Tape Reader & Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289-6B
Paper Tape Reader . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289-7
Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
289-8
303
Display Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
Display Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
312
Display Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Compatibility Compatibility with IBM 1400 Series . . . ; ..
Data Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Problem Oriented Facilities Basic Programming System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating System - Mod 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
Process Oriented Languages COBOL B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
COBOL D and COBOL H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FORTRAN D and FORTRAN H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
510:011
510:021
510:031
510:041
510:043
510:044
510:051
510:061
510:071
510:072
510:073
510:074
510:075
510:076
510:077
510:078
510:082
510:083
510:084
510:091
510:092
510:102
510:102
510:102
510:103
510:104
510:105
510:106
510:107
510:108
510:108
510:108
510:108
510: 108
510:108
510:108
510:108
510:108
510: 109.121
510:109.122
510:109.123
510:111
510:121
, 510:131
510:141
510:151
510:152
510:161
510:162
510:163
7/66
510:001.002
Machine Oriented Lan~ua~e Easycoder . . . . . . . . . .
P ro~ram Translato I'S Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . .
Easycoder Assemblers . . . . .
Easytrrul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Basic Programmin~ System . . .
Operating System - Mod 1 . . . .
Operating System - Mod 2 . . . .
System Performance . . . . . . . . .
Physical Characteristics .. .
Price Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:171
510:181
510:182
510:183
.
510:191
510:192
510:193
510:201
510:211
510:221
.
.
.
.
Heport 511: Honeywell 120
511:001
511:031
511:051
511:111
511:201
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . .
Central Processor . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . .
System Performance . . . . . . .
Report 512: Honeywell 200
512:011
512:031
512:051
512:111
512:201
Introduction . . . . . . . .
System Configuration .
Central Processor . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . . .
System Performance . . . . . .
Report 513: Honeywell 1200
513:011
513:031
513:051
513:111
513:201
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . .
Central Processor . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations . . . .
System Performance . . . . . .
Report 514: Honeywell 2200
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Processor .. ~ . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
514:011
514:031
514:051
514:111
514:201
Report 516: Honeywell 4200
Introduction . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . .
Central Processor . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations ..
System Performance . . . . . . .
516:011
516:031
516:051
516:111
516:201
Report 518: Honeywell 8200
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration
Core Storage . . . . . .
Central Processor . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations .. .
Instruction List ... .
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Performance . . . . . .
Price Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7/66
518:011
518:031
518:041
518:051
518:111
518:121
518:191
518:201
518:221
A
AUERBACH
'"
1.
510:011. 100
"IN,,,,
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INTRODUCTION
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
INTRODUCTION
.1
SUMMARY
The Honeywell Series 200 line of computers consists of five program-compatible central
processors - Models 120, 200, 1200, 2200, and 4200. The sixth processor in the Series,
the large-scale Honeywell 8200, offers compatibility not only with other members of the
Series 200, but also with the earlier Honeywell 800 and 1800 systems. Peripheral device
compatibility within the series is provided through the use of a common input-output interface.
The Series 200 family of computer systems - with the exception of the Model 8200 - is
based upon an improved version of the original Honeywell 200 system, first delivered in
July 1964. The Honeywell 2200 system was the second entry in what has since become the
Series 200 family. Announced in 1964, the 2200 was first delivered in December 1965.
The Honeywell 120, 1200, and 4200 systems were announced in February 1965, and the
120 and 1200 systems are currently being delivered. Delivery of the first 4200 system is
not expected until October 1967. The model number of each computer system reflects its
relative position in the series.
The Honeywell 8200 joined the Series in June 1965. It provides compatibility with the H-800
and H-1800 systems through use of a 48-bit word processing subsystem. The word processor in the Model 8200 provides the hardware capability to run up to eight independent user
programs concurrently. A second 8200 subsystem, the variable-length-field (VLF) processing subsystem, provides compatibility with other members of the Series 200. Throughout the remainder of this Computer System Report, all general statements concerning the
Series 200 refer to the H-8200's VLF processor only. Separate paragraphs are devoted
to descriptions of the word processor and to the overall performance of the Honeywell 8200.
The Honeywell 200, and the computer family that grew from it, had as a major marketing
goal the replacement" of the slower, "second generation" IBM 1400 Series systems. With
such a goal, certain advances in computer system design, such as a-bit character codes
and extensive multiprogramming facilities, were not seen as necessary inclusions in the
line. To a large extent, the instruction complement of the 1400 Series was incorporated
in the Honeywell 200 Series, and software routines were developed to resolve the minor
incompatibilities between the instruction sets of the two series.
The key software package released with the original Honeywell 200 centered around a program called Bridge, the "Liberator" for 1400 Series users. This program accepted IBM
1401 object programs as input and generated Series 200 object programs after a fairly
straightforward translation process. Linkages to simulation subroutines were generated
to resolve most discrepancies between the two machines.
This unique approach to the problem of converting problem programs for use on a new system was successful within the scope of its design, but it proved unsatisfactory in two principal
areas. First, the process of program translation from one machine language to another
within a limited amount of core storage generally lacks flexibility, resulting in some program
elements that cannot be translated or else are error-prone. Such was the case with Honeywell's "Bridged" programs. Second, the object code output of the translation process is
difficult to maintain, since it is in machine-language form.
\
Recognizing these problems, Honeywell currently stresses a symbolic assembly language
translator program called Easytran as an alternative to the Bridge translator approach to
conversion of IBM 1400 Series programs. Through use of Easytran, almost 100 per cent
of the 1400 Series source language statements can be correctly translated to Honeywell's
Easycoder assembly language, which can be readily modified as part of normal program
maintenance. Honeywell maintains that programs so translated from IBM 1400 Series assembly languages will operate on Honeywell Series 200 systems at least 80 per cent as efficiently
as programs originally written for execution on Series 200 systems. Honeywell's current
Easytran translator converts IBM 1401 and 1460 programs for use with any Series 200 system;
a similar translator will be provided by Honeywell during the third quarter of 1966 for translating IBM 1410 and 7010 assembly language programs for use with Models 1200, 2200, and
4200. IBM ]440 assembly language programs and other 1400 Series programs that utilize
the IBM 1311 Disk Storage Drives will be subject to the Easytran liberation technique during the second quarter of 1967.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510:011. 101
.1
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
SUMMARY (Contd.)
A user of IBM 1400 Series equipment who wants to "trade up" to new equipment is faced
with many important considerations when comparing offerings by Honeywell in its Series
200 and by IBM in its System/360. Among these considerations are the following:
•
Much of the newly-designed System/360 peripheral equipment offers
higher performance than similar Series 200 devices and at virtually
equivalent prices.
•
Decimal arithmetic in Honeywell Series 200 processors is in many
cases faster than that in comparable processor models of the IBM
System/360.
•
System/360 computer systems that have over 65K bytes of core storage
have extensive multiprogramming capabilities, whereas similar-sized
Series 200 systems have limited hardware/software multiprogramming
control facilities that generally cannot go beyond performing one "background" and one "foreground" program concurrently. (Honeywell's new
Model 8200 system will provide excellent multiprogramming control
facilities for users of medium.-to-large-scale equipment, as described
in Paragraph . 26 below).
•
Conversion to Honeywell Series 200 computer systems can be accomplished with little reprogramming via the program translation process without sacrificing many processing facilities in the new system. Conversion to IBM System/360 computers can involve either total reprogramming or "emulation" of the 1400 Series object programs. With
the emulation technique, the full potential of the emulating system cannot
be utilized (although it is paid for), and the 1400 Series programs must
be maintained in machine language.
•
The Series 200 offers a wide selection of time-proven software. System/360
software, by contrast, is still relatively new - although it is potentially
more comprehensive and powerful than the Honeywell offerings.
•
The equipment delivery period for a Series 200 is generally shorter than
for a System/360.
•
The retraining of personnel familiar with 1400 Series equipment will be
minimal when converting to Series 200 equipment, since the processors
within. this series use the same data structure and largely the same instruction sets as the IBM 1400 Series processors. Use of the System/360 will
require extensive retraining of personnel.
This g~neral Computer System Report (510:) discusses the characteristics of the Honeywell
Series 200 that are common to all computer systems within the family. Included in the.
general report sections are descriptions of the data structure (based on the 6-bit character),
configuration rules, peripheral devices, compatibility with the IBM 1400 Series, pricing
schedules, and software systems. This general report is followed by individual subreports
(511: through 518:) on each of the six current Series 200 processor models, analyzing specific
configuration possibilities, performance characteristics, capacity for simultaneous operations,
specialized software (in the case of the Honeywell 8200), and other details which vary from
model to model within the series.
In this Introduction, a number of important topics are discussed. Each topic is independent,
and can be read separately if desired. The topics are:
.1
.2
•3
•4
•5
·6
·7
•2
Summary .
Central Processors •
Peripheral Units.
Software .
Compatibility with the IBM 1400 Series.
Compatibility within the Honeywell Series 200 and with the Honeywell
800 and 1800.
Pricing Policy •
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
Six central processors currently form the nucleus of the Honeywell Series 200. -Honeywell
considers that these processors - Models 120, 200, 1200, 2200, 4200 and 8200 - span a
range equivalent to that spanned by the IBM System/360 Models 20 through 65. Listed in
Table I are certain central processor tasks and the times required to .perform these tasks
for each Series 200 processor. Comparable execution times for the System/360 processors
can be found in Table I of the IBM System/360 report, Section 420: 011.
(Contd.)
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
INTRODUCTION
510:011. 200
TABLE I: ARITHMETIC EXECUTION TIMES FOR THE SERIES 200 PROCESSORS
T ASK (Times expressed
in microseconds)
CENTRAL PROCESSOR MODEL
120
200
1200
2200
4200
8200**
84
480
1,148
63
360
900
51
244
600
16
92
233
1.8 to 3.0
5.0
14.0
84
480
1,148
63
360
900
51
244
600
16
92
233
1. 8 to 3.0
5.0
14.00
#
#
#
#
#
#
84*
120*
·149*
56*
81*
99*
31*
44*
46*
2.3t05.5*
<5.0
<13.0
#
#=
#
#
60*
60*
40*
40*
16*
15*
<17.8
<9.5
Fixed Point Binary
c=a+b
c=axb
c=a/b
123
#
#
Fixed Point Decimal
c=a+b
c=axb
c=a/b
123
3,100 (s)
3,700 (s)
Floating Point Binary
c=a+b
c=axb
c-a/b
Radix Conversion
Decimal to Binary
Binary to Decimal
(s)
#
***
Note:
.2
Subroutine times; hardware facility not available.
Hardware facility not available; subroutine times not provided.
With optional feature.
Times are for 8200 Word Processor Subsystem; range of times reflects the use of maximum memory
bank interleaving to the use of no interleaving.
All decimal operands are considered to be five digits in length .
CENTRAL PROCESSORS (Contd.)
All of the character-oriented Series 200 central processors use add-to-storage logic. There
is no addressable accumulator. Both instruct ions and operands can be of variable length.
Operand lengths are not specified in Series 200 instructions; instead, most operations are
terminated when the processor senses a word mark, item mark, or record mark in the
operand field. Table II summarizes the principal distinguishing characteristics of the six
central processors of the Series 200 .
. 21
Model 120
The Honeywell Model 120 is a card- or tape-oriented computer system with the ability to
control two or three input-output operations concurrently with processing. Automatic
processor interrupt facilities are also provided. The Model 120 has 6 index registers and
a core storage capacity of 2,048 to 32,768 characters. Core storage cycle time is 3 microseconds per character. The Model 120 Processor can be connected to any of the Series 200
peripheral devices, to another Series 200 computer, or to a data communications network.
The Model 120 is a general-purpose data processing system, able to operate either as an
independent, stand-alone system or as a satellite in an integrated operation. The rental
for typical Model 120 systems ranges from about $1,900 per month for a 4K card system
to about $4,000 per month for a 16K, 4-tape system. Deliveries of the Model 120 Processor started in March 1966.
The Model 120 contains built-in peripheral device control units to regulate the operations
of a 450-line-per-minute printer, a 400-card-per-minute reader, and a 100 to 400 cardper-minute card punch. A built-in magnetic tape control unit is optionally available to
control up to four 13. 3KC magnetic tape units. In addition to the control units already
mentioned, either of two optional features permits the connection of up to six more standard
Series 200 peripheral device control units .
. 22
Model 200
The Model 200 is a card- or tape-oriented computer system with the ability to control either
three or four input-output operations concurrently with processing. It has 15 index registers
and a core storage capacity of 4,096 to 65,536 characters. Core storage cycle time is 2
microseconds per character. The Model 200 Processor can be connected to any of the Series
200 peripheral devices, to another Series 200 computer, or to a data communications network.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
5tO:Ot 1. 220
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
TABLE II: SUMMARY OF SERIES 200 PROCESSOR CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum
Processor
Model
Main
Memory
Speed
(cycle time)
Memory
Capacity
(thousands of
characters)
Jl(umber of
Peripheral
Controllers
Accepted
Max.
No •. of
I/o Opera-
tions Simultaneous with
Computing
Advanced
Programming
Instructions
Financial
Edit
Instruction
Multiply
and Divide
Instructions
Scientific
Processing
Instructions
Memory
Protect
Facility
120
3 microseconds per
character
2 to 32
9
3
•
•
-
-
-
200
2 mlcroseconds per
character
4.to 65
16
4
•
.
Standard
-
-
1200
1.5 microseconds per
character
16 to 131
16
4
Standard
Standard
Standard
2200
1 microsecond per
character
16 to 262
32
8
Standard
Standard
Standard
4200
188 nanoseconds per
character
65 to 524
48
16
Standard
Standard
8200 word
processor
94 nanoseconds per 131 to 1,048
character
96
32
-
-
·
·
·
Standard
•
•
Standard
*
Standard
•
- Feature not available on this model.
• Feature optionally available •
. 22
Model 200 (Contd.)
The Model 200 is suitable for use either as an independent, stand-alone system or as a satellite system in an integrated operation. The rental for typical Model 200 systems ranges from
about $2,600 per month for a 4K card system to $9;800 per month for a 24K, 8-tape system.
Deliveries of the new Model 200 Processor begari in November 1965. The noteworthy changes
between the original Model 200 Processor and this version are the inclusion of automatic
interrupt facilities, an 8-bit compatibility feature, and multiply/divide instructions as standard equipment .
. 23
Model 1200
The Model 1200 is a tape-oriented computer system with the ability to control four inputoutput operations concurrently with processing. It has 15 or 30 index registers, an automatic
interrupt system, and a core storage capacity of 8,192 to 131,072 characters. Core storage
cycle time is 1. 5 microseconds per character. A floating-point arithmetic option is available.
The Model 1200 Processor can be connected to any of the Series 200 peripheral devices, to
another Series 200 computer, or to a data communications network.
The Model 1200 is a general-purpose data processing system, able to operate either as a
stand-alone system or as part of a larger, integrated operation. The rental for typical
Model 1200 systems falls between $7,800 per month for a 32K, 6-tape system and $16,000
per month for a 131K, 12-tape system. Deliveries of the Model 1200 Processor began in
February 1966. Compared to the Model 200 Processor, the Model 1200 offers increased core
storage speed and capacity, the optional availability of floating-point instructions for scientific applications; optional table look-up facilities that permit IBM 1410 "Liberation," and a
Memory Protect facility that provides 15 additional index registers .
. 24
Model 2200
The revised Model 2200 is primarily a tape-oriented computer system with the ability to
control either four or eight input-output operations concurrently with processing. It has
either 15 or 30 index registers, an automatic interrupt system, and a core storage capacity
of 16,384 to 262,144 characters. Core storage cycle time is 1 microsecond per character.
All options currently available with the Model 1200 are also available with Model 2200. The
Model 2200 Processor can be connected to any of the Series 200 peripheral devices, to another
Series 200 computer, or to a data communications network.
The Model 2200 is a general-purpose system, able to operate either as a stand-alone system
or as part of a larger, integrated operation. The rental for typical Model 2200 systems ranges
from about $9,400 per month for a 32K, 6-tape system to $20,000 per month for a 196K, 12-tape
system. Deliveries of the Model 2200 Processor started in December 1965.
(Contd.)
6/66
A
AUERBACH
7
,
4
L
2
~
10,000
2
~
~V V
~
~~
~
D
4
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
i..' 1..-"
~
".
7
~
.--;;
2041\_2
.l- V'
f
~
II
V
/
~/
1,000
7
4
2
/
100
2
10
4
7
4
2
100
7
2
1,000
Characters Per Block
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
4
7
10,000
510:092. 100
A
sunUD
EDP
AUFRBAC~
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
IN PUT-OUTPUT
2048 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
RHORIS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 2048 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
,1
OENEHAL
,lI
ldlo'nti ty:
The 204B Series is currently composed of three
basic groups of models. These groups are:
. . • . . . . . Magnetic Tape Units.
Models ~04B-l through
204B-12.
I"
•
Models 1 through 5: densities of 200 and 55G
characters per inch; data transfer rate!:! of
7,200 to 83,300 characters per second.
•
Models 7 through 9: densities of up to iJ{){)
characters per inch; data transfer rates of
7,200 to 96,000 characters per second.
•
Models 11 and 12: densities of 200 and 551i
characters per inch; data transfer rate!:! of
13,333 characters per second; simuHaneou!:!
read-write on same control not available; no
rewind and release.
lJl'SC ['iplion
Two distinct types of magnetic tape units are
offered 1'0[' the Honeywell Series 200. The 204A
Series tapp units use three-quarter-inch tape, have
limited error-recovery abilities, and are compatiblt' with the tape units used in Honeywell 400/1400
and HooIIHOO systems; they are described in the
preceding' report section (510:091).
The I10neywell 204B Series tape units are compatible with the mM 729 and 7330 tape drives. All
1lI0deis provide read-after-write checking, allow
for backward reading, and can be connected to, or
manually switched between, any members of the
Honeywell Series 200 computer family. The length
of the tape gap can be reduced, in most cases,
from the industry-standard O. 75-inch length, providing appreciably improved performance (relative
to other tape drives with identical peak speeds and
recording densities) where short block-lengths are
needed. (Details of the effective performance of
these units are listed in Table II and illustrated in
the graphs at the end of this section.)
Details of the tape speeds, available densities, gap
lengths, and data transfer rates are shown in
Table 1.
Honeywell 204B tape units with peak speed!:! of Ie!:!!:!
than 45,000 characters per second and maximum
densities of 556 characters per inch are part of
"economy" tape systems. In these systems, part
of the logical circuitry in the first tape lilH connected to each controller is used by all of the
connected tape units. The resulting savings in
cost are reflected in the pricing structure. Naturally, this arrangement means that a breakdown in
TAilLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF 204B
Tape Drive
110del
Control
Unit
Model
Tape Speed,
inches/sec
simms MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Uensitic~,
char/Inch
Minimum
Inl~r-Blocl,
GUJJ Length,
(Jata
Tr:Ul~fcr
Hal..,.
ch:tr/~cc
inches II
~04B-l,
-2*
~03B-I
36
551i
O.4ii
~O,OOO
1),61)
44,4011
Hi,OOC!
0.70
6(;,700
7,~0C!
~oo
J04B-a, -04*
~03B-1
80
55£)
~()()
:..!U4B-;)
~03B-2
120
556
~",OO()
~OO
204B-7
203B-'1
36
800
556
0.45
~04B-H
~03B-4
80
204B-U
~03B-6
120
204B-ll, -12'
203B-5"
~4
~H,800
20,000
~OO
7,~00
0.60
64,000
44,400
16,000
BOO
556
200
0.70
96,000
66,700
556
200
0.45
800
556
~OO
~4,OO()
13,333
4,800
* In these units, the primary tape drive connected to each controller has special circuitry and bears a different
model nwnber from any other connected tape drives,
#
The operational characteristics are identical for both models.
Industry-standard gap lengths of 0.75" are also possible under program control.
•• The Honeywell 120 uses the 103 Non-Simultaneous Tape Control Unit, which includes one 204B-ll Tape Unit.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
6/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:092. 120
.12
Description (Contd.)
the primary tape unit such that the shared circuitry
can no longer operate will effectively prevent the
use of all of the tape units connected to the controller.
number of tape controls allowed in each Series 200
system is described in the System Configuration
section of the appropriate subreport.
Optional Features
IBM Format and IBM BCD Code options are available and are fitted into the Tape Control Units.
Both these options are required to achieve full
compatibility between IBM 7-track tape units and
the Honeywell 204-B Series tape units.
All controllers for the 204B Series tape units,
except the 203B-5, can handle simultaneous reading and writing. The optional backward-read
facility stores the data into core memory in the
same manner as does a forward read. The tape
control units maintain either even or odd row
parity, as desired, and even track parity for
checking purposes.
.13
Availability: . . . . . . . 3 months.
. 14
First Delivery
Models 204B-l through
-5, and204B-7and-8: July 1964.
Model 204B-9: .••... September 1966.
Models 204B-ll, -12: . January 1966.
Eight tape units can beeonnected to each controller,
except for the 203B-5 (l3KC) control, which can be
connected to a maximum of four tape units. The
TABLE II: PERFORMANCE OF 204B SERIES MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Model
Nominal or
Peak Speed,
char/sec
DenSity,
char/inch
Tape
Speed,
inchesl
sec
Rewind
Speed,
inches/
sec
Inter-block
Gap,
inches
Overhead
(cross-gap
time),
msec/block
' Short Long
Gap
Gap
Effective Speeds,
char/sec' (where
N = no. of characters
per block)
Short Gap
Long Gap
204B-1, -2
7,200 or
20,.000
200 or 556
36
lOS
0.45 or 0.75
12.5
20.S
7, 200N/(N + 90)
or 20, OOON/
(N + 250)
7 ,200N/(N + 150)
or 20, OOON/
(N+417)
204B-3, -4
16,000 or
44,400
200 or 556
SO
240
0.60 or 0.75
7.5
9.4
16, OOON/(N + 120)
or 44,400N/
(N + 333)
16, OOON/ (N + 150)
or 44,400N/
(N + 417)
204B-5
24,000 or
66,700
200 or 556
120
360
0.70 or 0.75
5.S
6.3
24, OOON/(N + 140)
or 66, 700N/
(N + 3S7)
24,000N/(N + 150)
or 66, 700N/
(N + 417)
204B-7
20,000 or
2S, SOO
556 or SOD
36
lOS
0.45 or 0.75
12.5
20. S
20, OOON/(N + 250)
or 2S, SOON/
(N + 360)
20,OOON/(N + 417)
or 2S, SOON/
(N + 600)
204B-7
7,200 or
2S,SOO
200 or SOD
36
lOS
0.45 or 0.75
12.5
20.S
7,200N/(N + 90)
or 2S, SOON/
(N + 360)
7 ,200N/(N + 150)
or 2S, SOON/
(N + 600)
204B-7
7,200 or
20,000
200 or 556
36
lOS
0.45 or 0.75
12.5
20. S
7, 200N/(N + 90)
or 20, OOON/
(N + 250)
7,200N/(N + 150)
or 20, OOON/
(N + 417)
204B-S
44,400 or
64,000
556 or SOO
SO
240
0.600rO.75
7.5
9.4
44,400N/(N + 333)
or 64, OOON/
(N + 4S0)
44,400N/(N + .J17)
or 64, OOON/
(N + 600)
204B-8
16,000 or
64,000
200 or 800
SO
240
0.69 or 0.75
7.5
9.4
16,OOON/(N + 120)
or 64, OOON/
(N + 4S0)
16,OOON/(N + 150)
or 64, OOON/
(N + 600)
204B-S
16,000 Of
44,400
200 or 556
80
240
0.60 or 0.75
7.5
9.4
16,OOON/(N';- 120)
or 44,400N/
(N + 4S0)
16, OOON/(N + 150)
or 44,400N/
(N + 600)
204B-9
66,700 or
96,000
556 or BOO
120
360
0.70 or 0.75
5.B
6.3
66, 700N/(N + 387)
or 96,OOON/
(N + 557)
66,700N/(N + 417)
or 96,000N/
(N + 605)
204B-9
24,000 or
96,000
200 or 800
120
360
0.70 or 0.75
5.8
6.3
24,OOON/(N + 140)
or £6, OOON/
(N + 557)
24, OOON/(N + 150)
or 96,000N/
(N + 605)
204B-9
24,000 or
66,700
200 or 556
120
360
0.70 or 0.75
5.8
6.3
24, OOON/(N + 140)
or 66,700N/
(N + 3B7)
24, OOON/(N + 150)
or 66, 700N/
(N + 417)
4, BOO or
13,333
200 or 556
24
144
0.45 or 0.75
18.7
31. 2
4, 800N/(N + 90)
or 13,300N/
(N + 24B)
4, 800N/(N + 150)
or 13, 300N/
(N+417)
204B-ll, -12
/
•
Assuming no deceleration between blocks.
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
@
510:092.200
INPUT-OUTPUT: 2048 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the Head: .. pneumatic capstan.
.212 ReservoirsNumber: ....•.••• 2.
Form: . . . . . . . • . . vacuum.
.213 Feed drive: . . . . . . . motor.
.214 Take-up drive: . . . . . motor.
· 22
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording systems: .. magnetic head.
.222 Sensing system: .•... magnetic head .
. 223 Common 'system: ...• 2-gap head provides readafter-write checking.
. 23
Multiple Copies: ..••• none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: . . • . . .
Stacks: . • . . . • . . . .
Heads/stack: . . . . . .
Method of use: ..••.
Use of station: . . . • . .
Stacks: . . . . • . . • . .
Heads/stack: . . • . . .
Method of use: . . . . .
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
recording.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
reading.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
.311 Medium:
. . . • . . . . . Mylar-base, oxide-coated
tape.
.312 Phenomenon: • . . . . . . magnetization.
· 32 Positional Arrangement
· 321 Serial by: . . . . . . . . . 1 to N rows at 200, 556,
or 800 rows/inch: N
limited by available core
storage.
. 322 Parallel by: ••.••••• ,7 tracks.
· 324 Track use Data: . • . • . . • • . . . 6.
Redundancy check: .• 1.
Timing: •..••... 0 (self-clocking).
Control signals: .•.• O.
Unused: • • • . . . . . . O.
Total: • . . . . . . . . . 7.
.325 Row use Data: ...•.••.••• 1 to N.
Redundancy check: .• 1.
Timing: . . . . . • . • • O.
Control signals: ..•. O.
Unused: .•..••.•. O.
Gap: . . . • . . • . • . . 0.45 to 0.75 inch, depending on tape speed. See
Table I for a tabulation of
each unit's capabilities.
. 33
• 34
Coding: •.•••....• as in Data Code Table
510:141.100.
Format Compatibility
Other device or system
Code translation
IBM 727 Magnetic
Tape Units: •.••.• IBM format and code compatibility are optional
features.
IBM 729 Series
Magnetic Tape
Units: . . • . • . . . . IBM format and code compatibility are optional
features.
Other device or system
Code translation
IBM 7330 Magnetic
Tape Units: ...•.• IBM format and code compatibility are optional
features.
Note: Only format compatibility is available for the
203B-5 Tape Control.
• 35
PhYSical Dimensions
.351 Overall width: .•.••• 0.50 inch.
.352 Length: ..•••.••.• 2,400 feet per reel.
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
.•.•.•..•• Tape Control Unit Models
203-1, 203B-2, and
203B-4 through 203B-6 .
See Table I for allowable
combinations of tape
drives and control units.
Connection to System
.42
.421 On-line: ....•••••. depends on number of
trunks available; each
control requires 2 inputoutput trunks and 2 address assignments.
.422 Off-line: . . . . • . . . . • none •
• 43 Connection to Device
.431 Devices per
controller: . . . . . • • up to 8 tape drives per
controller (4 per 203B-5).
.432 Restrictions: . • . . . . all tape units connected to
a given control unit must
have the same data transfer rate.
.44 Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: •...••. 1 to N characters, limited
by available core storage.
.442 Input-output areas: .. core storage .
.443 Input-output area
'access: . . . . • • . . . each character.
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . . . . • . . none.
. 445 Table control: . . . . • . none •
• 446 Synchronization: .•.. automatic .
.5
.51
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Blocks
.511 Size of block: •...•. 1 to N characters, limited
by available core storage.
.512 Block demarcation Input: . • . . . . . • • . . gap on tape or limiting
mark in core storage.
Output: . • . . • . . . . . limiting mark in storage.
.52 Input-Output Operations
.521 Input: . • • . . . . . . . . • 1 block forward .
1 block backward (optional).
During the backward-read
operation, data is stored
in core memory as in a
forward read •
. 522 Output: ••••..•••. 1 block forward.
.523 Stepping: ..••••.•• none.
.524 Skipping: • . • . . . • . . 1 block backward (backspace).
erase 3.5 inches forward
(to skip defective tape
areas).
1 block forward (space
forward).
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:092.525
.525 Marking: ..•.•••.. interblock gap.
end-of-file mark (tape mark).
.526 Searching: ••.••... none.
. 53
Code Translation: •.. matched codes; optional
feature for translation
between IBM BCD tape
code and Honeywell Series
200 internal code.
.54
Format Control: •.... none.
. 55
Control Operations
.6
.61
.62
Speeds: •••••.•••• See Table II.
.63
Demands on System
Components: •.•.... Central Processor.
Condition: ••••••... all.
Msec per block: .•.• 1 core storage cycle per
4 characters in Model
4200; 1 cycle per character in all other models.
Percentage of data
transfer time: .••.• see Simultaneous Operations
section of the subreport
on the appropriate processor model.
Disable: . . . . . • • . . . disable after unloading
(except the 204B-ll, -12).
Request interrupt: ... no.
Select format: ••••.. no.
Select code: • . . . . . . odd or even parity only.
Rewind: ..•.. ' . . . . . yes.
Unload: ..•••.•... yes.
. 56
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . . . . . . .
Busy device:' . . . . . .
Output lock: . . . • . . .
Nearly exhausted: •..
Busy controller: ••..
no.
yes.
no.
yes.
yes; "busy reading" and
"busy writing" can be
tested separately.
End of medium
marks: . . . . . . • • •' . yes.
Error: . . . . . . . .• . . yes.
Beginning ,of medium
marks: . : . . . • . . • ; yes.
.8
PERFORMANCE
Conditions: .•••••.• performance varies with
model number as indicated in Table II .
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.73
Loading and unloading
.731 Volumes handled: .•. 2,400 feet per reel.
.732 Replenishment time: •. 0.5 to 1. 0 minute; tape unit
needs to be stopped.
.734 Optimum reloading period Model 204B-l, -2 ••. 13 minutes.
Model 204B-3, -4 .•• 6 minutes.
Mode1204B-5 •.••. 4 minutes.
Mode1204B-7 ••..• 13 minutes.
Mode1204B-8 ••.•. 6 minutes.
Mode1204B-9 ••••. 4 minutes.
Model 204B-ll, -12 . 20 minutes •
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
Input area
overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted
medium:
Timing conflicts:
read-after-write
parity check
track and row
parity check
set indicator.
set indicator.
record mark in
core storage
terminates data
transfer.
all codes valid.
sense reflective
spot
set indicator.
check for busy
device
set indicator.
(Contd.)
6/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
INPUT-OUTPUT: 2048 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
510:092.900
EFFECTIVE SPEED: 204B-1 THROUGH 204B-5 AND 204B-ll, -12
MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
556 Characters per Inch
Short Inter-block Gaps
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
~-r;
./
2
~
10,000
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
7
~
/
4
~
2
20413•
.., i-'"
4
V/
V/
1,000
'/
1/
~
V
"
L;
V L;~
V
./
~_'3,4
"", i,..-" ~~
V'
i,..-" ~
J'
,.....
1-'1-
204B~l' 2
t !
20413-11, 12
.......
i/
'-"
V
7
IT
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
Characters per Block
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510:092.901
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
EFFECTIVE SPEED: 204B-7, -8, AND -9 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
800 Characters per Inch
Short Inter-block Gaps
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
~04-e~9
7
204-e~S
~
4
~
2
~V
10,000
Effective Speed,
(,har/sec.
~
~
~
~
10'"
~
~I"
2~4B~7
k---"": I"'"
I
~ ""I"
7
..
./
4
2
1,000
V
l.,;'
V/
h V
V/ V
i'
~
I~
1I
7
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
4
100
7
2
1,000
Characters per Block
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
4
7
10,000
510:102.100
~ "'"...
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
•
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INPUT-OUTPUT
FAMILY INTERFACE COMPONENTS
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: FAMILY INTERFACE COMPONENTS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.........
Peripheral/Peripheral
Interface: Model 205
Magnetic Tape Switching
Unit.
.12
The actual transfer of data takes place at 167,000
characters per second, irrespective of the computers involved. During memory-to-memory data
transfers, one core memory cycle in each computer is used for each character transferred. For
the Honeywell 200, with its two-microsecond memory, the resulting central processor load is 33%.
Computer/Computer Interface: Model 212-1 Online Adapter.
.122 Model 205 Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
The Model 205 Switching Units are used to switch
magnetic tape units from one controller to another.
Different versions handle the switching of threequarter-inch (204A Series) tape and half-inch
(204B Series) tape units.
Description
Honeywell currently provides several interface
units that permit the interconnection of its Series
200 computer systems and allow Series 200 communication with its older 800 and 1800 computer
systems. Interface units are also provided to
switch magnetic tape units between controllers in
the same or different Series 200 computer systems,
and to permit two Series 200 systems to share a common group of communication lines. Described
below are the Model 212-1 On-Line Adapter for
linking Series 200 processors, and the Model
205 Magnetic Tape Switching Unit. The Model 215
Communication Switching Unit is described in
Section 510:106 of this report, and the Model 212
On-Line Adapter for linking Series 200 processors
and Honeywell 800 or 1800 systems is described in
Section 510:107.
A single magnetic tape unit can be connected to the
basic Model 205 Switching Unit; additional tape
units can be connected by using one 052 Feature
per connected additional tape unit. A maximum of
three 052's can be connected to the Model 205A
(three-quarter-inch) Switching Unit, or seven 052 's
to the Model 205B (for half-inch tapes). Where,
as in the case of the 203B-1 Tape Control Unit,
one of the tape units is acting as a primary unit
while others are acting as secondary units, any
units which are not switched along with the primary unit become inoperable and cannot be used
by either system.
Switching can be between controllers on the same
or different computer systems. In the case of the
Model 205A switching unit, three-quarter-inch
tape drives can be switched from a Honeywell
Series 200 computer system to the appropriate
control unit of the Honeywell 400/1400 or 800/
1800 computer families.
.121 Model 212-1 On-Line Adapter
The highest level at which two Honeywell Series
200 computer systems in a single installation can
share facilities is through a direct memory-tomemory connection between them. This is made
possible by the Model 212-1 On-Line Adapter,
which links together two input-output channels one from each computer. The computer initiating
a data transfer operation treats the other computer
as an ordinary input-output unit; data transfers
between the two computers are initiated and monitored under program control through the use of
standard input-output instructions.
.14
First Delivery
Model 212-1 On-line
Adapter: . . . . . . . . . March 1965.
Model 205 Magnetic
Tape Switching
Unit: . . . . . . . . . . . January 1965.
.15
Availability: . . . . . . . 6 months for Models
212-1 and 205.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510:103.100
A•
AUERBACH
SUNDUD
EDP
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INPUT-OUTPUT
281 SINGLE-CHANNEL
COMMUNICATION CONTROL
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 281 SINGLE-CHANNEL COMMUNICATION CONTROL
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: •••..•..•. Single-Channel
Communication Control.
Models 281-1, -2, -3,
and -4.
• 12
Description
The 281 Single-Channel Communication Control
enables the transmission and reception of messages over toll and leased communication lines.
Data can be in 5- to 8-level codes and can be transmitted at rates of up to 5,100 characters per second. The 281 is a single-channel, half-duplex
control that sends or receives either by single
character or by whole message. Additional 281
Controls can be added to a Series 200 system in .
order to provide full duplex or multiple-channel
operation. Each 281 Control requires two inputoutput trunks.
By means of the Model 281 and/or 286 Communication Controls and appropriate communication
networks, a Honeywell 200 system can communicate with a wide variety of remote devices, such as:
•
Other Honeywell Series 200 computers.
•
Honeywell 400, 1400, 800, or 1800 computers.
•
Teleprinters used with AT&T and Western
Union telegraph services.
•
IBM System/360 computers equipped with 2701
Data Adapter Units, or 2702 and 2703 Transmission Controls.
•
IBM 1401 or 1410 computers equipped with
1009 Data Transmission Units.
•
IBM 1013 Card Transmission Terminals.
•
IBM 7701 or 7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission
Terminals.
•
Digitronics DIAL-O-VERTER equipment.
•
•
•
•
•
•
UNIVAC 1004 equipment.
Teletype Dataspeed equipment.
UNIVAC 1004 Series equipment.
Circuit switching systems.
Paper tape readers and punches.
Keyboards and printers.
There are four basic models and a number of
variations in the 281 series. The characteristics
of each model (type of communication service and
terminals, transmission speed, and data-set requirements) are summarized in Table 1.
The program can test for the presence of incoming data or for readiness of the control to transmit data. The Program Interrupt facility can perform the same tests and interrupt the execution
of the stored program automatically. Data being
transmitted and received by a Communication
Control is protected by three different methods:
checks for transmission lapses, an optional character parity check, and a semi -automatic messagereceipting system. Failure of a transmission or
parity check sets a program-testable indicator.
When desired, a transmitting control can interrogate the status of the receiving control to insure
that the previous message was correctly received.
The normal turn-around time between messages
ranges from 20 to 400 milliseconds, depending on
line characteristics.
Under program control, the 281 can transmit a
single character or an entire message from core
storage to a remote device, or it can accept a
single character or an entire message from a remote device and transfer it into core storage.
Data transfers engage the Central Processor for
two microseconds per character in 5- or 6-level
codes and four microseconds per character in
7- or 8-level codes.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510: 103. 120
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
TABLE Ii CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 281 COMMUNICATION CONTROL MODELS
SingluCh mlllc I
Control
Typc
Terminal
Service & Line
Dataset (2)
Transmission Speed
~81-1H
AT&T Dataspeed 2
Voice-grade private line
DDD
202D
202C
105 cps
~81-3A
AT &T Dataspeed 5 Hecoivers
Voice-grade private line
DDD
402C
75 cps
281--IA
AT&T Dataspeed 5 Send Uri its
Voice-grade private line
DDD
402D
75 cps
~81-~C
Digi tronics
Voice-grade private line
DDD
202D
202C
150 cps
V~!ce-grade
DIAL~O-VEHTEH
~81-~E
~81":~B
,
Digitronics Type 1
DIA L-O-V ERTER
private line
DDD
201B
201A
300 cps
250 cps
Honeywell Series 200
Computer :(1)
Voice-grade private line
DDD
20lB
20iA
300 cps
250 cps
Telpak A
48 KC broad-band channel
301B
5100 cps
'Voice-grade private ' line
DDD
202D
202C
120.cps-
VOice-grade private line
202D
202C
180 cps"
120 cps
202B
202A
250 cps
300 cps
281-2F
2S1-UI
HoneYwell Data Station
"
~81-1R
HoneYwell Display Stations
-281-2R
,
281-1S
281-2S
--
High-
High-speed direct
connect
Speed
Control
Interface
281-1E
IBlII,l050 Data
-CommWlication
"System
IBM Standard STR Series
(7702, 1013, 1009; etc.)
281-2D
41,600 cps
1181. 1A*
816
103F
14.8 cps
14.8 cps
Tel. Co. TWX-CE
Tel. Co. DDD
103A
103A
14.8 cps
14.8 cps
Voice-grade private line
DDD
202D
202C
150 cps
VOice-grade private line
DDD
20lB
201A
- W. U. 180 baud
Tel. Co. 150 baud
VOice-grade private 'line
281-1K
281-2A
120 cps
'300 cps
Direct-connect
--
300 cps
250 cps
,-
60,66,75, or 100 wpm
281-1C
Teletype 15, 19, 28
5-Level TTY circuit
--
Teletype 33, 35
TWX
TWX-CE
Tel. Co. 150 baud
DDD
sl1B
lO3A
816
103A
100 wpm
281-lB
281-lD
281-lB
-;
281-lD
Teletype 33,35, 37 Modell
Voice-grade private line
W.U. 180 baud
103F
1181.IA*
100 wpm
281-2E
UNIVAC 1004/DLT2
VOice-grade private line
DDD
201B
20lA
300 cps
250 cps
281-2F
UNIVAC 1004/DLT2B
Telpak A
48 KC broad-band channel
30lE
5100 cps
281-1A
\V.U. TELEX
W. U. Telex
W.U. Adapter*
66 wpm
(1)
Type 281-2F single-channel control in Honeywell-to-Honeywell service is aVailable in half-duplex and full-duplex forms.
(2)
Except where indicated by an asterisk, Dataset deSignations refer to Bell System Data-Phone Datasets.
,/
6/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
-1.
IA
__
AUERBAC~
510: 104. 100
SIANO'"
EDP
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INPUT-OUTPUT
286 MULTI-CHANNEL
COMMUNICATION CONTROL
REPORTS
-~----_.J
INPUT-OUTPUT: 286 MULTI-CHANNEL COMMUNICATION CONTROL
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
Description
Multi-Channel Communication Control, Types 286-1
through 286-5.
285 Series Adapter Units.
The 286 Multi-Channel Communication Control can
control the transmission and reception of messages
over as many as 63 communication lines. A Type
285 Communication Adapter Unit (CAU) is required as an interface between the 286 and each
line being used. Table I lists the various 285
Adapter Unit models and the remote terminal units
that can be connected to these adapters. Data can
be transferred by the 286 Multi-Channel Communication Control at rates of up to 300 characters per
second in individual lines.
The five available models of the 286 Multi-Channel
Control fall into two logical groups, depending on
whether they operate in character mode or message
mode.
The character-mode models (Types 286-1, -2,
and -3) require that the transmission or reception
of each character in the message be individually
controlled. A total character transmission rate of
2, 500 characters per second can be maintained in
the character mode, a figure that includes allowances for the input-output programming that
accomplishes each operation.
The message-mode models (Types 286-4 and -5)
maintain the current input-output area address for
each of the connected communication lines and
automatically control the data flow for the duration
of the message transmission. A program interrupt
is generated only at the end-of-message. The
demand on the central processor is limited to the
actual data transfer time between the Type 286-4
or -5 Multi-Channel Control and the core storage
of the associated Series 200 processor. A total
throughput capacity of 7, 000 characters per second
can be maintained with the message-mode MultiChannel Control models.
Each 286 Communication Control requires two
Series 200 input-output trunks. The total number
of communication lines serviced by these two
trunks varies according to the model of the 286
Control, as follows:
Type
286-1
286-2
286-3
286-4
286-5
Number of Lines Controlled
2 to 13
4 to 15
16 to 63
2 to 32
32 to 63
The Central Processor must be equipped with the
Advanced Programming feature in order to use the
286 Communication Control. Data is stored in the
input-output area in the same bit configuration as
it appears on the transmission lines. Code
conversion is facilitated by the Move and Translate
instruction which is included in the Advanced
Programming feature package.
Data transmission is protected by three methods:
checks for transmission lapseR, an optional
character parity check, and a semi-automatic
message-receipting system. A "long, " longitudinal parity check is also available. Failure of
a transmission or parity check automatically sets
an indicator. Whenever desired, a transmitting
control unit can interrogate the status of the
receiving control unit to insure that the previous
message was correctly received.
Optional Features
Parity Check and Generation, Option 086.
Long Check (longitudinal parity check), Option 087.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510: 104. 120
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF MODEL 285 ADAPTER UNITS
Adapter
Unit
Type(i)
Terniinal
285-lH
AT&T Dataspeed 2
285-3A
AT&T Dataspeed 5 Receivers
285-4A
AT&T Dataspeed 5 Send
Units
Digitronics . .
285-2C
DIAL-O~VERTER
285-2E
285-2B
-
-
Digitronics Type 1
DIAL-b-VERTER
Honeywell Series 200
Computer
285-1M .
Honeywell Data Station
285-lR
Honeywell Display
Stations
Service & Line
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Telpak.A
48 KC broad-band channel
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Voice-grade private line
285-2R
285-1S
. 285-2S
High-Speed
Control
Interfacp.
285-lE
..
IBM 'StandardSTR Series
(7702, 1013, 1009;' etc.)
285-2D
285-lC
105 cps
402D
75 cps
202D
202C
201B
201A
201B
201A
::lOlB
150 cps
20.2D
202C
202D
202C
202B
202A
High-speed direct
connect
IBM 1050 Data
Communications
System
Teletype 15, 19, 28
285-2E
-285-1A
(1)
(2)
Teletype 33, 35
Teletype 33, 35,37
Modell
UNIVAC 1004/DLT2
UNIVAC 1004/DLT2B
W. U. TELEX
75 cps
300
250
300
250
5100
cps
cps
cps
cps
cps
120 cps
180
120
250
300
120
300
cps
cps
cps
cps
cps
cps
41,600 cps
W. U. 180 baud
Tel. Co. 150 baud
Voice-grade private line
Tel. Co. TWX-CE
Tel. Co. DDD
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Voice-grade private line
DDD
5-Level TTY circuit
1181. lA*
816
103F
103A
103A
202D
202C
201B
201A
TWX
TWX-CE
Tel. Co. 150 baud
DDD
Voice-grade private line
W. U. 180 baud
Voice-grade private line
DDD
Telpak A
48 KC broad-band channel
W. U. Telex
8llB
103A
816
103A
103F
1181. lA*
201B
201A
301B
--
..
285-lN
285-lB
285-lD
285-lB
285-10
Transmission
Speed
202D
202C
402C
Direct-connect
285-lK
285-2A
Dataset (2)
W. U.
Adapter*
14.8 cps
14.8 cps
14 ..8 cps
14.8 cps
150 cps
300
250
60,
75,
100
100
cps
cps
66,
or
wpm
wpm
100 wpm
300 cps
250 cps
5100 cps
66 wpm
References to adapter units imply Type 286 communication controls, since a 285 adapter
interfaces each line connected to a multi-channel control.
Except where indicated by an asterisk, Dataset designations refer to Bell System
DATA-PHONE Datasets.
/
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
510: 105. 100
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INPUT-OUTPUT
233 MICR CONTROL UNIT
INPUT-OUTPUT: 233 MICR CONTROL UNIT
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: • • . . . . . • . . MICR Control Unit,
Models 233-1, -2.
. 12
Description
Honeywell does not manufacture or supply MICR
equipment, but does provide MICR Control Units
which link the Series 200 systems with either the
Burroughs B 102 or B 103 Sorter/Readers or the
IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader.
Delivery of the MICR Control Units is available 15
months after receipt of order.
. 121 Burroughs B 102 Sorter/Reader
The Burroughs B 102 Sorter/Reader reads magnetically-encoded paper documents at a peak speed
of 1,560 documents per minute for. documents with
the minimum allowable length of 5. 94 inches. The
effective rate for documents of other lengths, including allowances for slippage and interdocument
gaps, can be calculated by dividing 9,000 by the
average document length, in inches. A 9-inch
document, for example, would be read at a rate of
1,000 documents per minute.
A single line of magnetic-ink characters printed
in Font E-13B can be read. During reading the
central processor is interrupted for only one
memory cycle per character.
After a document has been read, at least 5.0 milliseconds remain before the pocket selection signal
need be given to guide the document into the appropriate pocket. Further time is available, if
needed, when documents under the maximum length
of 9.06 inches are used, or when the end of data
occurs before the extreme right-hand end of the
document being read.
One H-200 input-output trunk is connected to the
MICR Control Unit. Because no multiple-tapelisting printers are currently available with the
Honeywell 200 system, it is not normally practical
to operate the Burroughs reader at speeds higher
than the peak printer operating speed if on-line
listing of the documents is desired .
Features and characteristics of the Burroughs B
102 Sorter/Reader are presented as part of the
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Computer System Report, on page 201:102.100.
.122 Burroughs B 103 Sorter/Reader
The Burroughs B 103 Sorter/Reader is substantially
the same as the B 102, described above, except
that it may optionally include an endorsing station.
The B 103 therefore requires two Honeywell 200
input-output trunks to be connected to the MICR
Control Unit •
.123 IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader
The IBM 1419 Magnetic Character Reader reads
magnetically-encoded paper documents at a peak
rate of 1600 documents per minute for documents
with the minimum allowable length of 6.0 inches.
The effective rate for documents of other lengths,
including allowances for slippage and 2. 5-inch
interdocument gaps, can be calculated by dividing
9,600 by the average document length, in inches.
An 8-inch document, for example, would be read
at a rate of 1,200 documents per minute.
A single line of magnetic-ink characters printed
in Font E-13B can be read from each document.
During reading, the central processor is interrupted for only one memory cycle per character.
After a document has been read, at least 13 milliseconds remain before the pocket selection signal
need be given to guide the document into the appropriate pocket. Further time is available, if
needed, when documents under the maximum length
of 8.75 inches are used, or when the end of the data
to be read occurs before the extreme right-hand
end of the document being read.
Features and characteristics of the IBM 1419
Magnetic Character Reader are presented as part
of the IBM 1401 Computer System Report, on page
401: 103.100.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510: 106. 100
1. "'' ' '
I4.EDP
AUERBACH
•
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INPUT-OUTPUT
215 COMMUNICATION
SWITCHING UNIT
REPORts
INPUT-OUTPUT: 215 COMMUNICATION SWITCHING UNIT
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Communication Switching
Units, Models 215-1
and 215-2.
The 215-1 and 215-2 Communication Switching
Units allow two computers to share a group of
communication lines and enable one computer to
switch between different groups of lines. The
Model 215-1 is used with 285-1 and 285-2 Adapter
Units, and the Model 215-2 is used with 285-3 and
285-4 Adapter Units (each line having one Adapter
Unit). See Section 510:104 for a list of the characteristics of the Model 285 Adapter Units.
The basic Communication Switching Unit!;! can be
used to switch a group of up to eight lines between
two 286 Communication Controls (each of which
is connected to a computer) or to switch one 286
Communication Control between two groups of
eight lines each. By adding the appropriate 083 or
084 Expansion Features, the group switching capability can be expanded (in increments of eight lines
per expansion feature) to handle up to 63 lines. All
lines connected to anyone switching device are
switched simultaneously.
The switching unit is housed in a central processor
drawer which must be mounted in the cabinet as an
"end" unit; a manual selector on the unit's front
panel controls and indicates the switch setting. The
computers must be stopped by their STOP keys and
the STOP indicators must be on before the switch
setting is changed.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510: 107. 100
HONEYWELL.SERIES·200
INPUT-OUTPUT
212 ON-LINE ADAPTER
INPUT-OUTPUT: 212 ON-LINE ADAPTER
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
orders and to set and test the various registers and
flip-flops of the On-Line Adapter. The H-BOO/1BOO
peripheraJ instr~ction which defines the operation
to be performed is encoded and stored 'in: the OnLine Adapter. The 200 interrogates the On- Line
Adapter, interprets the operation requested, and
initiates appropriate responses depending upon the
nature and type of equipment available and the conditions present.
.. O~- Line Adapter.
Model 212.
."
The On- Linl'l Adapter is an~lagous toa peripheral
control unitJorboth Series 200 and li-800hBOO data
processing systems .. It is a device.which enables
an H-BOO or H-1BOO to communicate on-line with a
Series 200. Information transferred through the On.,
Line Adapter requires 66 microseconds' for each 4B .
bit word.
A tape produced previously'on the H~BOO/1BOO
which contains mixed modes of4-bitaJid6-bit
characters can be transferred directly into the
H.;,BOO/1BOO without need for editing. Information
transmitted from the If-BOO/1BOO through the OnLine Adapter'to tape can also be in mixed mode.
-Information froin the H-BOO/1BOO' which is to be
used for printing or punching on ·the200, however,
must be in 6-bit mode throughout.
A software package called LINK is provided to
facilitate usage of a Series 200 system as asatellite to a larger H-BOO or H-1BOO system. See
Section 510:151.15 for the capabilities of the LINK
package.
IBM tapes can also be used as input to the H-BOO/
1800 through the On-Line Adapter. The data must
be converted into Honeywell code and format by
either the translation hardware in the Tape Control
Unit or by the Move and Translate instruction.
The On-Line Adapter contains the following registers and flip-flops:
•
•
•
•
One-word (4B-bit) data buffer - successively
filled by the H-BOO/1BOO and emptied by the
Series 200 program during write (WF) operations, and vice versa during read (RF and
RB) operations.
All data which is to be processed by a Series 200
system in decimal mode after being read in from
Honeywell tapes must be converted to 6-bit format. This involves using the Extract and Substitute instructions on each character.
Six-bit ID Register - stores an identification
character that defines the II-BOO/1800 operation
to be performed.
In general, communication between the Series 200
system and the II-BOO/1BOO is carried out by the
following steps:
Device Busy and Error flip-flops - can be set
by the H-200 program and sensed by the If-BOO/
1BOO hardware if the peripheral device requested
is unavailable or has a stored error indication.
o The LINK program tests the ID Register with a
PCB (Peripheral Control and Branch) instruction.
Transfer, Busy, Error and Incomplete flipflops - automatically set by the On-Line Adapter
hardware, and can be sensed by H-200 Peripheral
Control and Branch instructions.
The Peripheral Data Transfer and Peripheral Control and Branch instructions are used by the Series
200 program to respond to H-BOO/1BOO peripheral
•
The input-output device corresponding to the m
Register setting is started by the 200 system.
•
At the same time, the 200 issues a response
to the II-BOO/1BOO or turns off the Busy and
Incomplete latches. This causes an unprogrammed transfer in the H-BOO/1800, and
information is transmitted from the 200 core
to the H-BOO/1BOO core.
/
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
510:108.100
~
AUERBACH
STANDARD
E1D>P
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INPUT-OUTPUT
DATA STATION
REPORTS
~
INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA STATION
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: •••....... 288-1 Central Control Unit.
(See list of Data Station
input-output devices in
Table 1.)
Description
.12
and checking of parity codes, error correction, and
transmission control. The basic control unit can
handle up to four of the peripheral devices listed
in Paragraph .123.
The Data Station can operate in two modes: Remote
and Local. In the Remote mode, the data station
exchanges data with a computer over standard telephone lines and is normally controlled by the computer; however, control can be retained by the
Data Station operator if desired. In the Local
mode, the Data Station can be used for data preparation and editing activities, such as data transcription, off-line printing, etc. In either the Local
or Remote mode, several output devices can
simultaneously punch or print data received from
anyone input device (including the computer).
The Honeywell 288 Data Station consists of a group
of comparatively slow input-output devices which
are connected together by a central control unit.
These input-output devices can operate together
to perform data transcription functions (card to
printer, paper tape to punched cards, etc.) or
they can be connected, via Bell System Dataphone
subsets, with another system at a remote location.
Usually, but not necessarily, the remote system
will be a Honeywell Series 200 computer. Communication to and from the Data Station can occur at up
to 120 characters per second, in one direction at a
time.
The Data Station uses an eight-bit code (sevenlevel ASCII plus one parity bit). Hollerith
punched-card code and the five-level bar code are
automatically converted into the eight-bit code.
The Data Station input-output devices canbe selected
from the devices listed in Table 1. At least four of
these devices, in any combination, can be connected to a central control unit to form a Data
Station.
Transmission errors are detected by row parity
and longitudinal (channel) parity checking. Detected
errors cause immediate retransmission of the incorrect block, provided the Buffer Option is included. As an alternative, an optional backup
feature is available with the 120-cps paper tape
reader; this feature enables the reader to move
the tape backward one block to permit retransmission .
In the following description of the Data Station, the
central control unit and communication facilities
are described first, followed by a description of
each of the currently-available peripheral devices.
. 121 Central Control Unit and Communication Facilities
An interrupt feature enables the Data Station operator to regain control of the Data Station during a
computer-controlled transmission. When the
Branch button on the control panel is depressed,
the Data Station completes transmission or reception of the current block of data and then requests
the computer to service the operator-initiated
interrupt. While the interrupt is being serviced, all
devices except those required for the execution
of the interrupting operation are momentarily deactivated. Interlocks protect the data of the interl1upted operation so that no mixing of data or loss
of sequence will occur. The interrupt feature
provides the ability to interrupt lengthy transmissions in order to send urgent inquiries to the
computer.
The Data Station is a multi-purpose remote terminal
device that transmits and receives data asynchronously, in half-duplex mode, at a maximum rate of
120 characters per second over toll or leased lines.
A Bell System Dataphone 202C or 202D subset is
required to convert data signals used by the communication units to signals acceptable for transmission over communication networks. To communicate with the Data Station, Honeywell Series
200 computers can use either the 281-1M SingleChannel Communication Control Unit or the 286
Multi-Channel Communication Control Unit with
a 285-1M Adapter Unit.
The 288-1 Central Control Unit performs the functions of device selection and activation, generation
TABLE I: DATA STATION INPUT-OUTPUT DEVICES
Device
Speed,
char/sec
Model No.
Card Reader
120
289-7
Paper Tape Reader
Paper Tape Punch
120
120
289-4
289-5
Optical Bar Code Reader
Page Printer and Keyboard
Keyboard Data Entry
Page Printer and Keyboard
50
10
operatordependent
40
289-8
289-2
289-2A
289-3
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:108.122
. 122 Optional Features
Buffer Option: Provides two 132-character buffers,
allowing immediate and automatic error correction
through retransmission, and enabling a transmission rate of 120 characters per second to be maintained regardless of the speed of the peripheral
devices involved. This feature is required when
dther the optical bar code reader or the card
reader is included in the system.
•
Extended Operation Option: includes the follOWing
five features •
•
•
Alarm Feature: Turns on an alarm (light
and/or buzzer) in the event of error detection
or line failure. The buzzer may be used in
preference to the light to alert the operator
when his attention is required. The alarm
should be responded to and turned off by the
operator; alternatively the computer can be
programmed to turn off the alarm after a
predetermined interval of time.
Telephone: Permits the computer and Data
Station operators to contact one another for
voice conversations.
Party Line: Permits the Data Station to
monitor the communication line for any
message bearing its address. Thus, several
stations can share the same line.
Repeat-Last-Acknowledge: Permits the Data
Station to send a second Acknowledge signal
to the computer if for some reason the first
signal was not received. Inclusion of this
feature prevents unnecessary retransmission
of an entire message in cases where the first
Acknowledge signal is missed.
• Buffer Bypass: Permits bypassing of the Data
Station Buffer in remote or local mode and
allows transmission of messages of improper
format or excess length.
•
289-5 Paper Tape Punch: Like the 289-4 Paper
Tape Reader, this 120- character-per- second
paper tape punch provides maximum utilization
of the Data Station's transmission capability.
Code and tape characteristics are the same as
those of the 289-4 Reader. No read-afterpunch check is performed upon the accuracy of
the punched data.
•
289-7 Card Reader: Reads Hollerith-coded
data from punched cards at the rate of 120
characters per second. Automatic feeding
from the 500-card input hopper can be halted
to permit entry of from 1 to 15 cards. The card
reader stops when the hopper is empty. A
program disc enables the reading of selected
card fields. Reading time is 8.3 milliseconds
per column. The reading mechanism consists
of star wheels. This unit requires use of the
Buffer Option on the 288 Central Control Unit.
•
289-8 Optical Bar Code Reader: Reads printed
5-level bar code (4 data bits and 1 parity bit)
at the rate of 50 characters per second. Card
or paper documents 3. 5 inches wide by 5 to 8
inches long can be used. Printing density is
10 characters per inch. Only one line of coded
printing per document is permitted. The bar
code can be printed by Honeywell high-speed
computer printers or, where the data is constant, by lithography. Check digits can be incorporated into the coded information. The
reader includes an input hopper and an output
stacker. Either 20-pound paper stock or 80pound card stock can be handled. Documents
must be white in color and must have greater
than 75% reflectance.
•
. 123 Peripheral Devices
The Data Station offers a selection of seven peripheral devices. At least four of these devices
can be connected to the basic Data Station control
unit, and, with additional power, several more
devices can be added. The Data Station requires
a keyboard. This can be obtained either by using
the 289-2A Keyboard 01' by connecting a Model
289-2 or 289-3 Page Printer. The keyboard has
four banks and includes conventional alphabetic
and numeric keys plus control keys. It uses the
7-bit ASCII code.
Two modes of data transmission are possible
with the 289-8 Bar Code Reader. The modes are
Continuous and Single Block. In Continuous Mode,
one character at a time is read and sent to the
Data Station Control Unit. In Single Block Mode,
the data from 1 to 7 documents can be stored
and transmitted as a single block. This feature
can improve line utilization appreciably by reducing the number of required Acknowledge
messages.
As an option, the Optical Bar Code Reader can
read a two-bit mark-sense code; this makes
it possible to enter variable information manually
at the point of a transaction entry. For example,
a salesgirl might mark on a bar-coded document
any combination of the two bits to represent "cash",
"credit", "partial payment", or "full payment. "
e 289-2 Page Printer and Keyboard: Operates
in character-at-a-time fashion, at the rate
of 10 characters per second, and prints lines
up to 74 characters in length. Paper rolls
5 inches in diameter and 8. 5 inches in width
are used.
•
289-2A Keyboard Data Entry: permits anoperator to send messages of up to 132 characters
to the Data Station Central Control Unit. The
289-2A is an input device, with no output capabilities. Its keyboard contains a 65-character
set.
• 289-3 Page Printer and Keyboard: Operates
at 40 characters per second, using a 61character set, and prints lines up to 72 characters in length. Paper stock can be in either
5-inch rolls or fanfold, both 8.5 inches in
6/66
width. Paper can be fed by friction or sprockets .
The higher speed of this printer makes it suitable for use as a direct, on-line printer for the
central computer.
289-4 Paper Tape Reader: Operates at 120
characters per second, thus fully utilizing the
Data Station's transmission capability. An optional retransmission capability enables the
reader to back up the tape one block and retransmit the block. The code used is 7 -bit ASCII
plus parity. Subsets of ASCII (5- or 6-level
codes) can be accommodated. Oiled, dry, or
Mylar tape of 1, 7/8, or 11/16 inch widths can
be used.
IA
AUERBACH
'"
The Buffer Option is required on the 288 Central
Control Unit when the Optical Bar Code Reader is
attached.
,/
510: 109. 100
&.
$1m",
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INPUT-OUTPUT
DISPLAY STATIONS
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
INPUT-OUTPUT: DISPLAY STATIONS
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity .
Model 303 Display Station.
Model 311 Display Station.
Model 312 Display Station.
Model 322 Universal Control Unit.
Model 323 Universal Control Unit.
Model 331 Communication
Module.
Model 332 Communication
Module.
Model 355 Polling Control
Module.
. 12
Description
The Honeywell Series 200 now includes in its product line an array of "Visual Information Projection" (VIP) facilities - most of which are
manufactured by the Bunker-Ramo Corporation.
Three Display Stations, featuring keyboard input
and cathode-ray tube alphameric data display capabilities, are the principal components of Honeywell's new line of display equipment. These
devices can be used as local units for operator
communication or as terminal units in a remote
data communications network.
Models 303, 311, and 312 Display Stations are
operationally and functionally similar. The selection of a particular model Display Station is based
primarily on keyboard input requirements and
display screen capacities (see Table 1).
The viewing screen of these devices is a cathoderay tube that utilizes a high-contrast, low-persis-tence, emerald green phosphor. Each displayed
character is composed of a 7 x 5 dot matrix and
can be adjusted for brightness, focus, and size.
The available range of character sizes extends
from approximately typewriter size up to 1/4-inch.
The displayed data is regenerated more than 40
times per second, producing a character display
which appears steady to the human eye.
An Entry Marker or cursor indicates the current
writing pOSition on the viewing screen; it steps to
the next position as each character is entered.
Optional editing features permit the cursor to be
moved to any line and any character position for
character deletion or correction purposes.
Message data is entered via the keyboard of the
Display Station. It is immediately displayed on the
screen and simultaneously stored in the station's
Universal Control Unit buffer. Nothing is transmitted to the local or remote central processor
until the TRANSMIT key is depressed. A Carriage
Return/Line Feed key, as well as Erase and Clear
keys, are also provided to facilitate message preparation. Function keys are included to call for
user-specified functions at the central computer
site. Responses from the central computer can be
displayed in addition to or in place of the input
query.
Described below are the three models of Honeywell
Series 200 Display Stations. The models can be
intermixed on a single control unit, provided that
each model is installed with the same data display
capacity (i, e., the same maximum number of lines
and characters per line displayed). The great
variety of data display capacities that can be selected with each model Display Station is summarized in Table 1.
. 121 Model 303 Display Station
Model 303 provides a 5. 5-inch by 7. 75-inch display
viewing area on a screen that can be separated from
the keyboard input device. The data display
capacity is 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, or 768 characters, arranged in various numbers of lines, as
shown in Table I. The keyboard of the Model 303
Display Station is a 4-row, Teletype-style unit
that includes 26 alphabetic and 10 numeric characters in addition to 3 fixed special symbols and 15
variable special symbols (whose function can be
specified by the user). Special keys for message
editing can also be provided as optional features.
.122 Model 311 Display Station
Model 311 is a combined keyboard/display unit that
includes a 4. 75-inch by 3. 75-inch viewing screen,
four special symbol keys, and a block of ten
numeric input keys. Twelve other keys are provided
for user-specified special functions and message
editing operations. The 311's data display capacity
is 32, 64, 128, 256, or 384 characters, arranged
in a set number of line combinations.
.123 Model 312 Display Station
The Model 312 is also a combined keyboard/display
unit with a 4. 75-inch by 3. 75-inch viewing screen.
The screen can display 32, 64, 128, 256, or 384
characters arranged in a set number of line
combinations, as shown in Table I. The keyboard
contains 26 alphabetic and 10 numeric characters,
as well as 4 fixed special symbols and 12 userspecified function keys.
. 124 Display Control
The Display Stations described above require a
Model 322 or 323 Universal Control Unit to provide individual, local buffering of data during
message preparation and reply transmission. The
Universal Control Units also provide the power
supply, message generation, and general control
facilities for one or more of the three Display
Station models.
The basic Universal Control Unit contains a buffer
storage capacity of 768 characters. This basic
storage capaCity can serve the following number
and types of Display Stations:
o One Display Station of 768 characters (Model
303 only).
o Two Display Stations of 384 characters.
o Three Display Stations of 256 characters.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510: 109.124
T ABLE I: DATA ARRANGEMENT ON VIEWING SCREEN
Display
Capacity
(Characters)
Number
of
Linea Displaye,l
Display Station
Model
312
3ll
303
Numher of
Characlers/Line
32
x
x
x
1
32
x
x
x
2
16
64
x
x
x
2
:12
32
64
x
x
Ui
x
4
:!2
. 256
x
x
x
x
x
4
128
x
8
:!2
*378
x
x
x
9
42
384
x
x
x
12
3::l
x
12
H4
768
*Considcred as 384 from standpoint of control unit storage requirements .
lines. Final linkup with the central processor is
accomplished by a Model 281 or Model 286 Communication Control Unit. These single- and multiline communication control units are described in
Report Sections 510:103 and 510:104.
When the Display Stations are used as local inputoutput devices, the Universal Control Unit and its
Communication Interface unit connect directly to a
Model 281 or 286 Communication Control Unit and
then to the central processor. No data sets are
required in this configuration. The central processor
can be located up to 200 feet from the Display Stations' Universal Control Unit. (Each Display Station is connected to the Universal Control Unit by
an individual cable with a nominal length of up to
1, 000 feet.)
. 124 Display Control (Contd.)
•
Six Display Stations of 128 characters.
•
Twelve Display Stations of 64 characters.
•
Eighteen Display Stations of 32 characters.
Expansion modules are available for extending the
basic buffer storage capacity of the Universal
Control Units in increments of 768 characters. The
Model 322 Universal Control Unit can be expanded
to include 2 Expansion Modules, giving a total
buffer storage capacity of 2,304 characters. The
323 Universal Control Unit can add 8 Expansion
Modules, providing a total buffer storage capacity
of 6,912 characters.
In addition to controlling the operations of the
Display Stations, the Universal Control Units can
control on-line receive-only printers, paper-tape
or card readers and punches, and Model 33 or 35
Teletype Keyboard Send-Receive (KSR) Page
Printers as components in a remote data communications system. For each input-output device that
is connected, a special Control Module must be
added to the Universal Control Unit.
Included within the Universal Control Unit cabinet
is a Model 331 or Model 332 Communication Interface Module. These modules are required as data
interface units to either a communications line or
to a local central processor. The Model 331 Interface unit provides a 1, 200-bit-per-second data
transmission speed over half-duplex, 2- or 4-wire
lines: the Model 332 Interface unit provides a
2, 400-bit-per-second transmission rate, also over
half-duplex, 2- or 4-wire lines. In addition,
Honeywell is developing a High Speed Interface unit
that will transfer data at 41, 600 characters per
second.
All data transmission in a Honeywell Visual Information Projection system uses the 7 -level ASCII
character code with single-bit parity. Data is
transferred between processor and Universal
Control Unit either in an asynchronous serial-bybit mode (using a 10-level character that includes
start and stop bits in addition to the basic 8-level
character) or in a synchronous serial-by-bit mode
(using the basic 8-level character).
When the Display Stations form part of a remote
communications network, Bell System Data-Phone
Data Sets 201A, 201B, 202C, or 202D are used as
interfacing units at both ends of the communications
6/66
. 125 Optional Features
The following special features are available for
Models 322 and 323 Universal Control Units:
• 341/342/343 Expansion Modules: described in
Paragraph. 124 above, these modules provide
increased buffer storage capacity for the Universal Control Units.
• 351 Message-Editing Module: provides the display Stations with STEP-Left and SCAN-Left
editing facilities, permitting the cursor to be
moved to any line and any character position.
• 352 Multi-Message Transactions Module: provides
the capability to retain several inquiry and response messages on the viewing screens of any
Display Station controlled by the Universal Control
Unit in which this feature is installed.
• 355 Polling Control Module: enables the central
processor to control the transmission of all
messages within the Visual Information Projection system .
. 126 Programming
According to Honeywell, all programming facilities
required to utilize the Display Stations are included
in Communications I/O C, the software package provided for the control of all communications devices
connected to a Model 286 Communication Control
Unit. The user must code in detail only his message di!3play formatting routine, a task that appears
to be similar to coding printer formatting routines.
.127 Availability
All of the Display Station Models are currently in
production. They can be delivered within a 6-month
period after placement of order.
fA
AUERBACH
@
/
-A
510: 111. 100
AUERBAC~
~
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
All Honeywell Series 200 processors can handle concurrent input-output operations
on each of the available input-output channels in conjunction with continuing processing of the
stored-program instructions. Full use can generally be made of these capabilities for concurrent operations because the connections between the peripheral units or controllers and the
input-output channels are left flexible and established during program execution. (In most
competitive systems these connections are established when the equipment is installed, so that
only one or two channels can service any given peripheral unit. )
One significant restriction concerns the "auxiliary" data channels. An auxiliary
channel is normally the fourth of a set of four channels. In fact, the auxiliary channel is not a
separate channel at all, but is one half of the first channel of the set which has been divided
into two logically distinct subchannels. Each of these two subchannels has only half the capacity
of the original channel and may be unable to handle the data transfer rates of certain peripheral
devices.
For details about the capabilities for simultaneous operations of each of the Series 200
processor models, please refer to the Simultaneous Operations sections of the individual subreports:
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
Honeywell
6/66
STmAID
AEDP
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
SI MUL TANEOUS OPERATIONS
120: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • . . . . • . .
200: . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
1200: . . . .' . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
2200: . . . . . . . . . • • . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4200: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • .
8200: . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
fA
AUERBACH
'"
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
511: 111
512: 111
513: 111
514: 111
516: 111
518: 111
REPDllS
510:121. 100
A
AUERBACH
SUItllUD
EDP
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
INSTRUCTION LIST
I£PDRlS
INSTRUCTION LIST
Certain basic instructions are standard in all of the Honeywell Series 200 central processor
models; other instructions are standard in the large models and either optional or not available in the
smaller models. The following table lists each of the instructions in the Series 200 repertoire and
indicates its availability (standard, optional, or not available) in each of the processor models.
There is a close and highly important relationship between the machine instruction repertoires of the Honeywell Series 200 and the IDM 1400 Series. Therefore, two additional columns
have been added to the Instruction List to indicate which Series 200 instructions are also available
in the IDM 1401 and 1410 computer systems.
The list of instructions on the following pages also includes the instruction timing formulas for
Honeywell processor models 120, 200, 1200, 2200, and 4200. See page 510:121.104 for the meanings
of the symbols used in the timing formulas. Timing formulas for the significantly different Model
8200 Word Processor are presented in Section 518:121 of the Model 8200 subreport.
S:
0;
NA:
Standard instruction, included in all versions of the processor model.
Optional instruction, included in some versions of the processor model.
Not available in any version of the processor model.
\
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510:121. 101
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
TIMING FORMULAS (Memory Cycles)
AVAILABILITY IN PROCESSOR
IN~TllllCTION
NAME
IBM
Honeywell
FIXED-POINT ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS
120 200 1200 2200 4200 8200 1401 1410
H
Dl'l'imal .-\dd
I)pl'imal Subtract
r--"
S
H
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
No Recomplement(2)
Ni + 2 + Nw + 2Nb
Recomplement(2)
Ni + 2 t Nw + 4Nb
S
S
4200
120/200/1200/2200 (1)
S
No Recomplement
Wi + . 5Nww + 2. 5Nbw
f
4.5
Recomplement
Wi + .5Nww + 5Nbw + 4.5
No Recomplement(2)
Ni + 2 + Nw + 2Nb
Recomplement(2)
Ni + 2 + Nw + 2Nb
Recomplernent
Wi + . 5Nww + 5Nbw
see Individual Central
Processor subsections
for timing
see individual Central
Processor subsections
for timing
No Recomplement
Wi + .5Nww + 2. 5Nbw • 4.5
oj.
4.5
Ih'L'imal l\lultiply
NA
S
S
S
S
S
0
S
Dl'eimal lHddl'
NA
S
S
S
S
S
0
S
see Individual Central
Processor subsections
for tlining
see individual Central
Processor subsections
for timing
Binary.-\.dd
S
S
S
S
S
S
NA
NA
Nj + 1 + Nw + 2Nb
Wi + .5Nww + 2.5Nbw
NA
NA
Ni + 1 + Nw + 2Nb
WI + .5Nww + 2.5Nbw + 4.5
-+
4.5
Binar~' ~lIhtl'act
S
H
S
S
S
S
Zl'r(.J and Add
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Ni + 1 + Nw + Nb
Wi + Nww + Nbw + 4.5
Zl'l'O and Subtract
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Nj + 1 + Nw + Nb
Wi + Nww + Nbw + 4.5
Floating' Add
NA
NA
0
0
0
0
NA
NA
Ni + 13 + [n/4]
WI + 11.5 + n/6
Floating- ..\dd
NA
NA
0
0
0
0
NA
NA
11 + [n/4]
WI + 6.5 + n/6
Floating' Subtract
NA
NA
0
0
0
0
NA
NA
Nj + 13 + [n/4]
Wi + 11. 5 + n/6
Floatin~
Subtract
NA
NA
0
0
0
0
NA
NA
11 + [n/4]
WI + 6.5 + n/6
Floating
~lultiply
NA
NA
0
0
0
0
NA
NA
NI + 21 + [N;l2] + [n/4]
WI + 16.5 + 5G/6 + K/3 + n/6
Fl()'tin~ ~Iultiply
NA
NA
0
0
0
0
NA
NA
19 + [Ni/2] + [n/4]
Wi + 11.5 + 5G/6 + K/3 + n/6
Floating· Divide
NA
NA
0
0
0
0
W, + 16.5 + p/3 +r/3 + n/6
: (2)
&
- or
+
/
A
B
S
T
U
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
V
w
X
y
Z
;
.
)
0/0
0/0
•
? (2)
5
Central
Processor
Code
Octal
X.l
X.2
X.3
X.4
X.5
X.6
X.7
X.8
X.9
X. 8. 2
X. 8. 3
X.8.4
X. 8. 5
X. 8. 6
X or X.O(l)
8. 5'~
100000
100001
100010
100011
100100
100101
100110
100111
101000
101001
101010
101011
101100
101101
101110
101111
110000
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0,6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0.8.2
0,8.3
0.8.4
0.8.5
0.8.6
110001
110010
110011
110100
110101
110110
110111
111000
111001
111010
111011
11 1100
111101
111110
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
0.8.7
111111
77
Card
Code
x. a
or X(I)
High
Speed
Printer
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
#
$
*
II
~
(2)
l/z 0 r : (2)
<
(2)
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
@l
.
(
CR
0
(2)
r:
(2)
(I)Special Code.
This card code-central processor code equivalency is effective when control
character 26 is coded in a card read or punch PCB instruction.
(2)Indicates symbol which will be printed by a printer which has a 63-character drum (Types 122and222
printers).
Reproduced from Honeywell 120 Programmers' Reference Manual, 2nd Edition. page B-6.
6/66
A
AUERBACH
®
510: 151. 100
l,mDm
;a
AUERBAC~
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
BASIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM
EDP
RlPORTS
~
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES: BASIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM
Software support for the Honeywell Series 200 is grouped into several general categories based
on the amount of core storage within which the programs will operate. The utilities covel'cd
in this section operate within the Honeywell Series 200 Basic Programming System's 4K-to
12K-character design level. The Advanced Programming feature and edit instructions are
generally required for use of these utilities.
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
they can utilize. SORT A uses the minimum 4Kcharacter memory and either 3 or 4 tape units of any
type. Both SORT C and SORT C- V can use anywhere
from 8K to 64K characters of core storage and up to 8
tape units. Only one-half-inch (204B Series) tape units
can be used by SORT C and SORT C-V. Variablelength records can be handled only by SORT C-V.
The utility programs of the Basic Programming
System fall into two sub-categories:
II)
1\1
A: Programs with an A designation are written
in the two-character addressing mode for use in
processors having 4, 096 characters of core
storage. The facilities included in the A design
levcl are generally a subset of those found in the
B design level.
B: Programs with a B designation are written
in the three-character addressing mode for use
in processors having 8, 192 to 12,288 characters
of core storage. The facilities included in
utility routines of the B design level are similar to those found in the larger Honeywell Operating Systems although more operator intervention is required with the Basic Programming
System utilities. (See Section 510: 152 for a
description of the utility programs that function
under control of the Operating System-Mod 1.
Minimum peripheral equipment requirements for
use of the Honeywell Series 200 Basic Programming System include a card reader, a card punch,
and a printer. Exceptions to this general minimum requirement are noted in the descriptions of
the individual programs.
• 11
Simulators of Other Computers
Bridge Object Program Translator B
This translator accepts mM 1401 machine-language programs, and converts them into equivalent
Honeywell Series 200 machine-language object programs. See Section 510: 181 for a detailed description of Bridge 1401.
Easytran 1401 and Easytran Symbolic TranslatorB
These Easytran programs convert mM 1401 and
1460 assembly language programs to Honeywell
Series 200 Easycoder assembly language programs.
This technique allows not only the conversion of
programs, but also the integration of programs
with Honeywell software. Standardized documentation is also provided. Easytran contrasts with
the Bridge conversion technique in which conversion takes place at machine-code level. See Section
510: 183 for a detailed description of the several
Easytran translators.
• 13
Data Sorting and Merging
Honeywell Series 200 SORT A, B, and C
\"
In all cases, own-code insertions are allowed in the
pre-sort and last-pass phases, so that records can
be added, deleted, or modified during the sort process.
The basic characteristics of each of these programs
are shown in Table I. They differ in the amount of
memory and the number and types of tape units
SORT B can utilize from 8K to 32K characters of
core storage and up to four magnetic tape units.
All records must be of fixed length and ha ve a minimum
length of 80 characters. Own-code insertions are
not permitted.
Drum SORT C is a key sort for use when the
records are stored on a magnetic drum device. The
keys are sorted into order and stored back on the
drum with the addresses of the associated records.
Only the keys and their addresses are involved in
this operation, so the size of the actual records does
not significantly influence timing requirements.
.14
Report Writing
Tabulating Simulator A and B (T ABSlM)
Reference: . . . . . . . Honeywell Software Manual
168.
Date available: . . . • . July 1964.
Description:
TABSIM is a "load and go" program designed to
simulate the summarizing and report-writing functions of punched card tabulating equipment. The
TABSlM coding specifications are designed to be
compatible with FARGO, the roughly equivalent
mM 1401 report program generator.
TABSlM A accepts input from punched cards or
magnetic tape. The output options include printing, punching, or a combination of both operations.
The reports produced by T ABSlM A can be one of
three types: listings, "group-printed" reports, or
"group-indicated" reports. A group-printed report provides a group total rather than a listing of
each entry within the group. A group-indicated
report lists each entry but omits repetitive info l' mati on within a group. Up to four levels of totals
can be provided, in addition to a final total.
Standard arithmetic operations can be performed
upon the data fields. Multiplication and division
operations are performed by subroutines included
in the TABSlM program. Own-coding entries can
be made only at the machine-language level.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:151.140
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF SORTING ROUTINES
SORT NAME
SORT A
SOHT B
SORT C
SORT C-V
DHUM SORT C
Hecord Sizes (characters)
1 to
80 or 160
1 to 4,095
1 to 4,085
4,000 max.
Hl'cord Type (fixed or variablc)
fixed size
fixed size
fixed size
variable
an.\'
Key Size (dmracters)
1 to (HJ3
1 to 80
1 to 990
1 to !HJI)
I to !J!)I)
MIL". Number of Keys
7
8
10
10
10
MIL". File Size
1 full reel
1 full reel
1 full reel
1 full recl
-
Core Storage
4K
8 to 32K
8 to 32K
8 to 32K
H to
Magnetic Tape Units
3 or 4
3 or 4
3 to 8
3 to 8
none
Card Reader/Punch
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Printer
No
No
No
No
No
forward
polyphase
backward
polyphase
backward
polyphase
backward
polyphase
meq{('
July 19G4
January 1966
October 1964
January 19fiG
July l!)fi;,
~OO
Equipment Hequirements:
Sorting Method
Date A vailab Ie
.H
Report Writing (Contd.)
.15
variable-way
Data Transcription
Simultaneous Media Conversion A (SCOPE)
TABSIlVI B p.rovides all of the TABSIlVI A functions
and offers in addition:
Reference: •..
• Signed arithmetic operations
• Sterling currency conversion routines
• Option to load the T ABSIlVI B program from
magnetic tape.
Date available:
Description:
. . Honeywell Software Manual
021.
.. July 1964.
Simultaneous Media Conversion A consists of a
group of independent subroutines to control the automatic transfer of data between magnetic tape and
punched card or paper tape devices, and from magnetic tape units to printers. Up to three of these independent input-output conversion operations can
be performed simultaneously within the minimum
allowable environment of 4, 096 characters of core
storage. Records on magnetic tape can be handled
only if they are unblocked and of fixed length. However, if at least 12K characters of core storage are
available, specialized data editing and blocking
and unblocking operations can be performed
during the data transcription operation by means
of own-coding routines.
Report Generator A and B
Reference: ... . Honeywell Software Manual 080.
Date available: ... July 1964.
Description:
The Honeywell Series 200 Report Generators are
compatible with the IBM ]401 RPG. Report Generator A permits single-buffered card punch and
printer operations. In Report Generator B, printer
operations can be double-buffered for efficiency of
printed report generation. Punched card operations which do not use the stacker-select feature
are also double-buffered. The two versions of the
Honeywell Report Generator vary only in these
methods of output device operation.
Honeywell supplies a SCOPE program deck tailored
to individual equipment configurations. The user
then assembles this deck to integTate all desired
peripheral device routines. The output of the
assembly is called a custom-designed "version"
of SCOPE.
There are four major steps in a Series 200 Report
Generator operation:
•
Describing the report and specifying the format
the output will take.
• Generating the symbolic program.
• Assembling the symbolic program.
• Executing the assembled program to produce
the desired report.
The media conversion operations that can be performed in installations that use 3/4-inch (Type
204-A) magnetic tape units simulate operations
typically performed by H-800/1800 off-line systems.
This simulation includes the performing of data
conversion operations necessary to produce ]4word (alphanumeric mode) or 24-word (transcription mode) card-image output records when transcribing data from 3/4-inch Honeywell magnetic
tape.
The facilities of these Report Generators include:
detecting control breaks within control groups;
arithmetic operations with optional rounding or
truncation of results; exiting to user-supplied owncoding for table lookup operations; and optionally
substituting magnetic tape units for both card
reader and printer.
7/66
:1~K
A,,·
AUERBACH
®
(Contd. )
510: 151. 150
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
.15
Data Transcription (Contd.)
•
Locate - to search tape files· for specified
records.
•
Write Label - to prepare a new tape file for
processing by creating a dummy label containing the physical tape reel serial number .
LINK. (Peripheral Processor Control Package)
Referencc: .. ,
Date available:
Dl'Rcl'iption:
. Honeywell Information
Bulletin DSI-257.
. July 1964.
This paeka/!:l' is ,il'signed for users of large-scale
Honeywell 800 or 1800 systems who wish to use a
Honeywell 200 as an on-line satellite. The LINK
packag-t' operates within 4, 096 character positions
of Sm'ies 200 core storage and can do both on-line
and off-line jobs. Any three of the following functions can be performed simultaneously:
•
•
On-line operationsen rei reading;
Card punching;
Paper tape reading;
Paper tape punching;
Printing;
Magnetic tape reading (maximum record size
using minimum 4K-character system: 24 H800 words);
Magnetic tape writing (maximum record size
using minimum 4K-character system: 24 H800 words).
Off-line operations, independent of the Honey\\'ell HOO or 1800 PUllched cards or paper tape to magnetic
tape; Magnetic tape to punched cards, paper
tape, or printer.
The LINK package will accept standard H-800/
1800 peripheral instructions through the Model
21:~ On-Line Adapter, so existing H-800/1800 programs will, in most cases, operate with the online H-200 as they would with standard H-800/
1800 peripheral devices.
• H;
File Maintenance
1/2-Inch Tape Handling Routine A (THOR)
Reference: ' . . .
Date available: ..
Description:
.• Honeywell Software Bulletin
DSI-367.
.. May 1964.
These operations and others areperfol'med under
the direction of parameters that are ",nterecl by
the operator from either punched cards, paper
tape, or the control pan~l of the central processor.
.17
Others
1/2-Inch Tape I/O A and B (TIPTOP-l and 1A)
Reference: • . . . . . • Honeywell Software Manuals
293 and OHl.
Date available:
• March 19(if•.
Description:
These two levels of Tape Input-Output macro routine packages relieve the programmer of repetitive
and complex coding of I/O routines. The packages
are provided in source language form for incOl'poration into the user's program dUl'illf4 a preassembly program pass. Descriptions 01 !IIP two offcrings follow.
o 1/2-Inch Tape I/O A: This version reads and
writes 1/2-inch tape files, blocks and unblocks
fixed-length items within records, opens and
closes files, detects error condHions, and automatically corrects them when possible, using
either IBM or Honeywell magnetic tape conventions. The A version uses approximately
1,640 characters of core storage.
• 1/2~lnch Tape I/O B: This versi(;11 performs
the same functions as Tape I/O A alld provides
additional capabilities for handling both fixed
and variable-length records. Another extension, the "move mode" of the GET and PUT
Macros, moves items between burIer and processing areas. The alternative "locate modo'
(used in both A and B versions) provides the
user's program with the starting address location of the record currently being processed.
The B version of the TAPE I/o package uses
approximately 2,250 chul'aetel'R of core storage.
EASYTAB
The Scries 200 1/2-Inch Tape Handling Routine A
(formerly called THOR) is a set of generalized
tape-handling and correction routines designed for
lise with Type 204-B 1/2-inch magnetic tape files
on ill1.\' Scl'ios 200 system that has at least 4, 096
dIal'ader,; of core storage, a printer, one or two
magnetic tape units, and a punched card or paper
tape reader.
The principal file maintenance functions performed
by these routines are the following:
• Edit - to dump to a printer specified records
or portions of records.
• Copy - to duplicate all or specified records
of one tape file on another file.
• Correct and Copy - to update designated
records with specified changes.
• Compare and Print - to mateh, record for
rt'cord, two tape files or portions of files, and
to print those records that are not identical,
Reference:
Date available:
Des cription:
.•. lIoneywell son·"
206.
. . . June 1966.
d 1e
Manual
EASYTAB provides· a means fOI' lI:,·'i· ()f ("'>1\['11tional tabulating.equipment to make i lie t.,ansilion
to computer equipment with minimal reorientation
of personnel and modifications of existing operating procedures. In the description below, the
name of each of seven routines is followed by the
name and function of the punched card tabulating
device that it replaCl;ls.
•
Merge B (Collator) - combines two ordered
files in either ascending or descenrling sequence
into one ordered file. Four prinCipal kinds of
. file merging can be specified: only matched
items in the, two files are merged into an output
file; 01' all items in the two filcs nJ'(' merged; or
matched items are merged aJ,d nOll-matched items
in the primary me are punched 01' printed; or
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
7/66
510:151.170
.17
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
others (Contd.)
matched items are merged and non-matched items
in the secondary file are punched or printed. Up
to five merge keys per record can be specified.
Either the primary or the secondary input file
can be on cards; alternatively both files can be
on magnetic tape.
•
Sort B (Sorter) - sorts a full reel of SO-character records on a maximum of eight sort keys,
using the backward merging polyphase technique.
The input file can be on either cards or magnetic tape.
•
Select·B (Collator) - selects items from an
input file either by item count (every Nth item),
by location in the group (first or last item in
each g1.'oup), or by test. In selection by test,
each of one, two, or three input-item fields is
compared with a corresponding parameter
card constant using high-low-equal tests. Logical tests (AND or OR) can also be specified.
•
•
The routines to accomplish these functions are
produced as part of the Easycoder assembly system output. A block of SO consecutive core storage positions is specified by the programmer for
the loader's use.
H-200 Memory Dump Houtine
The H-200 Memory Dump Routine edits and prints
the contents (both data and punctuation bits) of
core storage between limits specified by the user.
The output is in both alphameric and octal representation. There are two versions of this routine.
One operates in the 2-character addressing mode
and can dump the contents of up to 4,095 consecutive locations of core storage. The dump routine
operating in 3-character mode can dump the contents of any area of core storage.
The dump routine is produced by the Easycoder
assembly system as a separate card deck preceding the object program deck. The 2-character
mode routine requires 392 core storage positions,
card reader, and printer. The 3-character mode
dump routine requires an additional 93 core storage
positions.
.
Reproduce B (Reproducer) - provides any or
all of the following functions: reproduces each
SO-character record with the option of dropping
and/or offsetting specified fields; reproduces
each SO-character record while transferring information from a parameter card to specified
fields wit11in the record; or numbers each card
sequentially or by a specified increment.
Industry Applications (SK-character design level,
using a minimum of three magnetic tape units)
General Distribution:
Total B (Tabulator) - produces printed reports,
and offers the following capabilities: the Total
B mechanism accumulates and prints a maximum of seven totaled amount fields under control of a minimum of four control-break keys.
The list function of Total B produces a detail
line for each item processed and a total line
containing totals for all items within each specified control g1.'oup. The tabulating function of
Total B produces a total line containing an
accumulation of all items within each specified
control group.
SALE - a package developed to direct the even
flow of merchandise from warehouse to retail
store.
•
CASH - an integrated system of accounting for
the distribution industry that includes accounts
receivable, accounts payable,' and general
ledger accounting.
• PHOFIT - a system that provides inventory
control through production of order strategies
based on the concept of joint replenishment at
minimum total cost.
•
Alter B (Manual Operation) - deletes inserts
or replaces items on an ordered primary file
depending on the contents of a director deck.
Manufacturing:
•
Peripheral I/O B (No Tabulating Device Equivalent) - performs media conversions separately or in limited combinations between the
following media: card to tape, tape to card,
tape to printer, or tape to printer with
simultaneous card to tape or tape to card.
Forecasting for Inventory Control System (FICS)
makes demand forecast and inventory decisions.
The components of the system provide forecasting information concerning economic order
quantity, reorder point, safety stock, and exponential smoothing.
Card images on magnetic tape are generally blocked two records per block. Minimum equipment
requirements for Easytab include three 204B
magnetic tape units and S, 192 positions of core
storage. Extensions to the listed functions can be
added by the user in the COBOL B language (see
Section 510:061 for a description of COBOL B).
Education:
Pupil Registering and Operational Filing (PROF)
incorporates grade recording, attendance account-·
ing, testing, educational research, pupil assignment, and financial accounting. A valuable extension
of PHOF is the implementation of WORD COM, an
instructional programming language used in teaching students fundamental computing principles.
H-200 Card Loader
The H-200 Single Instruction Card Loader contains
routines to Clear core storage to specific characters (including zeros and blanks within specified
limits), to load core ·storage with instructions and
constants, and to set "inherent" and specially-requested punduation bits. Facilities are also
included to branch to the user's coding and initiate
execution of the object program upon partial or
total completion of loading.
7/66
•
Banking:
Demand Deposit Accounting is offered as an integrated package. MICR entry check sorting, settlement accounting, clearing and collection, customer
posting, exception procedures, and associated reports and statements are included. Equipment
requirements include a Burroughs MICR SorterReader.
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
®
510: 151. 171
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
. 17
Otlll'l'S (Cont(!.)
Indush'y Applications (12K-character design level,
using a minimum of three magnetic tape units)
Finance:
Variables such as program length, program complexity, and programmer experience are entcred
to obtain an installation or application status report.
AUTO LOG
Computerizecl portfolio analysis is provided. This
package originated from a conversion of the IBM
financial Analysis Paekage (FAP). (The use of a
fourth magnetic tape unit g1.·eatly increases the
capability of this system in terms of volume of
data and overall performance.)
General:
MANAGE facilitates the planning and control of a
Ilt'W computer installation or new applications.
Reference:
.. Autolog Reference Manual, 209
Date available: .• now in use.
Description:
This paekage provides equipment usuage reports
on a per-job and per-hardware-unit basis. The
minimum equipment requirements for use of
AUTOLOG include 4,096 characters of core storage, three 1/2-inch magnetic tape units, a card
reader, and a printer.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
-1.
510:152.100
111'0110
/AEDP
"'UERBAC~
-
•
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
OPERATING SYSTEMS- MOD I AND
MOD 2
IHPOITS
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES: MOD IIMOD 2 OPERATING SYSTEMS
.1
Programming System (see Section 510;151) •
Extensions and improvements of the C-level
utilities in relation to B-Ievel utilities are
discussed in this report section. The basic
features of each utility program are described
in Section 510;151, as noted above. Table I
lists the principal utility routines offered by
Honeywell, with references to descriptive
paragraphs within this and the previous report
section.
UTILITY ROUTINES
Software for the Honeywell Series 200 is grouped
into categories based on minimum core storage
requirements and the particular operating system
under whose control the software elements function. The utilities covered in this section operate
within either the 12K- to 65K-character design
level of the Honeywell Series 200 operating System - Mod 1, or the 49K-character design level
of the operating System - Mod 2. The Advanced
Programming feature and the Edit instructions are
generally required for both groups of programs.
• D - Programs with a D designation have a
minimum core storage requirement of 16,384
characters and generally offer additional features beyond those provided in C-level programs.
Utility programs in Operating System - Mod 1
fall into two subcategories:
•
C - Programs with a C designation have a
minimum core storage requirement of 12,288
characters. The facilities included in utility
routines of the C design level are similar to
those found in the B design level of the Basic
The utilities that are available with the Operating
System - Mod 2 provide few extensions to those
offered for use with the Basic Programming System and the operating System - Mod 1.
T ABLE I: SERIES 200 UTILITY ROUTINES
CLASS OF SERVICE
UTILITY ROUTINE
REFERENCE
General Data Processing
Sort and Collate A
Sort and Collate B
Sort and Collate C
Sort and Collate C (V)
TABSIM A and B
Report Generator A and B
Simultaneous Media Conversion
A and C
LINK
Tape I/O A, B, and C
TIPTOP II and III
Scientific and Mathematical
Routines
510:151.13
510:151.13
510: 152.13
510:152.13
510:151.14
510:151.14
510:151. 15
Autolog (equipment utilization
reporting)
MANAGE (aid to control of new
installations and applications)
510:151.17
General Installation
Maintenance
510:151.15
510:151.16
510:152.16
510:152.17
510:151. 17
Library Maintenance
Program Library Processors
510:171.100
IBM 1401 Simulation
BRIDGE
Easytran
Report Generator A and B
TIPTOP III
510: 181
510: 185
510: 151.14
510:152.16
Tabulating Equipment
Simulation
TABSIM
EASYTAB
510:151.14
510:151.17
Random Access Data
Processing
Drum Sort C
DIAL (transcription routines
between drum and cards or
tape; includes additional utility
functions)
DIPDOP (I/O package for Model
270 Drum storage)
510:152.13
510:152.15
Communications Systems
Message Switch, Input Interface,
Real Time Input Analyzer,
Output Stocking and Interface,
Communications Line Status
Director, and Standard Error
Control Routines.
510:152.17
Industry Applications
8K level
12K level
16K level or above
510:151.17
510:151.17
510:152.17
510:152.16
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510: 152. 110
• 11
quires a 132-position printer and one 1/2-inch tape
unit.
Simulators of Other Computers
Bridge 1401: ••••.•• Section 510:181.
Easytran for IBM 1401: Section 510: 183.
Easytran for IBM 1410: Section 510: 183.
· 12
Simulation by other
Computers: •••••.• none.
· 13
Data Sorting and Merging
· 14
Report Writing
The several Honeywell Series 200 Report Program
Generators are described in Paragraph 510:151.14.
• 15
Data Transcription
DIAL (Drum Interrogation, Alteration, and Loading System)
Tape Sort and Collate C, Tape Sort and Collate C
(V), and Drum Sort C.
Reference: ••••.•• ; Honeywell Software Bulletin DSI-361.
Date available: ••.•• January 1965.
Description:
The basic characteristics of each of these progranls are shown in Table II. Both Sort C and
Sort C (V) can use from 8K to 64K characters of
core storage and up to 6 magnetic tape units.
Sort C and Sort C (V) prog'I'ams can function only
with Type 204B 1/2-inch magnetic tape units.
Variable-length records can be handled only by
the Sort C (V) program.
DIAL is a generalized drum handling and correction routine which can examine the contents of a
drum and make corrections to a file. utility routines to transfer data between drum and punched
cards or magnetic tape (in either direction) are
included. The routines in the DIAL package can
be assembled individually with any Series 200
program. Easy-coder programs can make use of
specified DIAL functions through macro instructions
such as LOCATE, UNLOAD, RESTORE" EDIT,
CORRECT, COMPARE, and CLEAR.
In all programs, own-coding insertions are
allowed in the pre-sort and last-pass phases, so
that records can be added, deleted, or modified
during the sort process.
Drum Sort C is a key sort for use when records
are stored on a random access device. The keys
in a directory are sorted into order and stored
back on the mass storage device with the addresses
of the associated records. Only the keys and their
addresses are involved in the sort operation, so
the actual record size does not significantly influence timing considerations.
Other Honeywell Series 200 data transcription
routines are described in Paragraph 510: 151.15.
• 16
File Maintenance
THOR (Tape Handling Option Routine)
Reference: •••.•.•• Honeywell Software Bulletin
DSI-367
Date available: •.•.•• July 1964.
Description:
THOR is a general tape handling and correction
routine which can position tape, locate information on tape, copy one tape onto another, and
make corrections to information on tape. It can
also compare two tapes and edit information on a
tape. The various actions are controlled by
paranleters introduced via the card reader or
the operator control panel.
Simultaneous Bort and Print
Reference: •••.•..• Honeywell Software Manual
201.
Date available: •.••• December 1965.
Description:
This modification to Tape Sort C allows concurrent
sorting and printing operations, providing potential
time savings of up to 30% over separate sort and
print operations. The print program requires exclusive use of 942 memory positions, and also re-
T ABLE II: CHARACTERISTICS OF SORTING ROUTINES
SORT NAME
Record Sizes (characters)
SORT C
SORT C (V)
DRUM SORT C
1 to 4,095
1 to 4,095
4,000 max.
Record Type (fixed or variable) fixed size
Key Size (characters)
Max. Number of Keys
variable
1 to 990
any
1 to 990
10
1 to 4,000
10
10
-
1 full reel
1 full reel
Core Storage
8 to 64K
8 to 64K
Magnetic Tape Units
3 to 6
3 to 6
Card Reader/Punch
No
No
No
Printer
No
No
No
Max. File Size
Equipment Requirements:
8 to 64K
.I:1one
,
Sorting Method
backward
polyphase
backward
polypbase
Date Available
October 1964
January 1965
variable-way
merge
July 1965
(Conld.)
7/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
510:152.170
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
• 17
Others
Date available: ••••• October 1965 •
Description:
Input-Output Routines
•
TIPTOP II: This routine reads and writes
3/4-inch tape files, blocks and unblocks items
within records, detects error conditions, and
automatically corrects them when possible.
Honeywell 400/1400 and 800/1800 tape files
can be handled. The routine uses 1,800 characters, plus 500 characters for each input file
and 600 characters for each output file. These
are the space requirements at object time, i. e. ,
when the program that uses the TIPTOP routines is being executed. MACRO, a control
program, recognizes the TIPTOP II macroinstructions, selects the appropriate macro
routines, specializes them, and inserts them
into the Easycoder symbolic program for subsequent assembly. The MACRO program must
be run before the assembly proceeds; it requires at least an 8K Honeywell 200 system
with the Advanced Programming optional instructions.
Statistics Package D is a set of five programs
written in FORTRAN D that enable the user to
perform various statistical analyses on numerical
data. The number of variables permitted in most
of these programs depends on the amount of memory available when running the object program.
The user may change I/o, Dimensional, and Data
statements to fit the particular requirements of
his program. The five programs within the Statistics Package Dare:
Chi-Square
Least Squares Curve Fitting
Mean Variance and Correlation
Step-Wise Multiple Regression Analysis
Random Number Generator.
Industry Applications
Insurance
o FACILE (Fire and Casualty Insurmlce Library
Editions): This series of programs constitutes
an integrated management information and control system for fire and casualty insurance
companies. The major application areas
covered by FACILE include: Premium determination for private passenger automobiles and
pickup trucks; premium determination for homeowners' physical damage and liability insurance;
claims processing to verify coverage and to
produce claims face sheets; agents' production
and experience records, including compilation
of premium and loss information to produce incurred losses to earned premium ratios by
agent; and internal and external statistical
summaries.
• TIPTOP III: This version is a tape input-output
control package which is functionally compatible
with IBM 1401 IOCS. TIPTOP III consists of a
series of routines that manage the input-output
procedures for magnetic tape, punched card,
and printer operations without requiring detailed coding. IBM tape conventions are maintained. TIPTOP III became available in October 1964. The ability to handle Honeywell tape
conventions was added in June 1965.
Scientific Subroutines Package
A number of standard scientific subroutines are
available for the Honeywell Series 200. Table III
lists several of these routines together with their
core storage requirements and typical execution
times.
Linear Programming Package D
Reference: •..•..•. Honeywell Software Announcement 143.
Date available: ••... now in use.
Description:
This package is based on the simplex method of
solving linear equations. The simplex algorithm
is a constructive technique which, in addition to
demonstrating the existence of feasible solutions
to a linear programming problem, provides a
practical means of obtaining an optimal solution
on which the user can base required decisions.
Series 200 Linear Programming Package D is
composed of a resident control p!,ogram and a
group of major programs called "agenda." The
control program loads the agenda into memory as
directed by agendum call cards. These call cards
control the sequence of the agenda being executed.
Minimum equipment requirements for Linear
Programming Package D include 16,384 characters of core storage, a card reader, card punch,
printer, magnetic tape unit, and the Editing and
Advanced Programming instructions.
Statistics Package D
Reference: •.•••••• Honeywell Software Bulletin
0.01.
" SOLO: organizes the required information for
new policy issue; processes automatic internal
changes including premium billing, loan interest, coupon/ dividend funds and policy face
amount changes, as well as external changes.
External changes include the addition or deletion of benefits, inquiry into policy status, and
loan payments or loan requests.
The minimum hardware configuration required for
use of FACILE and SOLO includes 12,288 characters of core storage, four 204B magnetic tape
units, one card reader, one card punch, and one
printer. The Advanced Programming and Editing
instructions are also required.
Printing and Publishing
Q
STET (Specialized Technique for Efficient Typesetting) is a package designed to justify and
hyphenate hot metal type. The minimum hardware requirements include any Honeywell Series
200 processor, 16K characters of core storage,
a paper tape reader, and a paper tape punch.
Such a minimum system uses a strict orthographic logic method of hyphenation. The addition of a random access device to this equipment
complement enhances hyphenation accuracy by
combining the logic method with a dictionary
lookup technique. Hyphenation accuracy of 99%
is claimed with the combined technique, but no
maximum frequency of hyphenation is stated.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:152.171
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
TABLE III: TIME AND SPACE REQUIREMENTS OF REPRESENTATIVE
SCIENTIFIC SUBROUTINES
FUNCTION
COllE STORAGE
L()CATIONH USED
Fixed Puint Multiply
Fixed Point
~Iultiply
540
(2)
639
I'ix{'d Point Dh'idc (2)
681
Floatin~
Point
5
10
5
10
5
10
5
10
2.6
4.9
2.4
4.5
2.7
5.0
2.1
3.5
-
1144 + 6f (6)
-
Add/Hubtract
Multiply
(3)
10
10
10
1.44
1. 78
4.88
10
10
10
10
10
Comp'll'e (4)
Hine (4)
Cusine (·1), (5)
EXllunential (4)
Log (4)
Squ'll'e Hoot (·1)
Arctangent (4)
Conversion - Floating:
Decimal to Integer
Conversion - Integer
to Floating Decimal
(3)
(3)
364
657
140
482
10
0.34 to 1. 16
59.0
61.0
93.0
74.0
99.0
45.6
456
10
1.14
303
10
1.04
7Gl
G21
1,517
10
1,820
16,200
126,000
~Iatrix
Inversion (4)
(1)
Multiply indicated execution times by 1.50 for the Model 120, 0.75 for the
Model 1200, and 0.50 for the Model 2200. When the Scientific Option is
installed, the arithmetic subroutines will not be required, and execution
times for any of the transcendental functions will be approximately 1.8
milliseconds on Model 1200 and 1.2 milliseconds on Model 2200.
(2)
With Advanced Programming option.
approx. 1,600
approx. 3,400
approx. 10,000
5 x 5 matrix
10 x 10 matrix
20 x 20 matrix
(3)
Included in storage requirement for Floating Point Basic Package.
(4)
Floating Point Basic Package must be in core storage, and Advanced
Progrrunming option must be included in processor.
(5)
Sine routine must also be in core storage.
(6)
Where f = the len!';th of the mantissa.
Others (Contd.)
and Advanced Programming and Editing instructions.
One of the more valuable extensions of STET
in comparison to many competitive offerings
is the inclusion of up to 99 preset tabular formats for ease in setting tabular material.
• CART is a program package that provides the
trucking industry with an automatic system for
computing freight rates. CART can utilize
from 16K to 32K characters of core storage,
plus magnetic tape units, card reader, card
punch, random access storage, and a communications network.
• PHOTO-SET is another package used for outputting justified and hyphenated material to
photo-composition systems such as HarrisIntertype Fototronic, Mergenthaler Linofilm,
and Photon 713. At least 24K characters of
core storage are required to use PHOTO-SET.
Communication System General Routines
• Drum Storage and Retrieval Routine
General Distribution
A generalized drum storage routine capable of
allocating drum storage and storing and retrieving information from the drum on a realtime basis; will include both drum read/write
and message queuing functions. At least 8K
characters of core storage are required for use
of this routine.
• DISPATCH is a package of programs that provides the distribution manager with an assignment sheet advising him of order groupings
for vehicle loads, total weight and/or volume
of each group or orders, efficient distribution
routes for the vehicles to follow, and departure and arrival times. The minimum hardware requirements for use of DISPATCH include 16K characters of core storage, four
magnetic tape units, card reader, printer,
7/66
character~
MODEL 200 (1)
EXECUTION
TIME,
millisecondo;
Basic Pack.ag:c:
Divide
.17
537
Fixed Point Divide
OPEllANIl
LENGTll,
• Standard Error-Control Routines
Required equipment: interrupt feature and
Model 286 Communications Control Unit.
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
'"
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
.17
Others (Contd.)
A generalized standard error-control package
designed to provide positive error-control
action without causing the Central Processor
or working real-time devices to be shut down.
Provision will be made for the addition of
user-coded specific error routines in conjunction with the standard package.
510: 152. 172
A routine capable of performing editing and
"bookkeeping" functions, setting up data for
drum buffering, and providing buffering requests.
• Output Stacking and Interface Routine
Required equipment: Model 286 Communications Control Unit.
• Input Interface Routine
A routine capable of retrieving data from drum
storage, operating common-carrier equipment,
and causing data to be transmitted from the
H-200 to distant· stations.
Required eqUipment: Model 286 Communications Control Unit and interrupt feature.
A modularized interrupt control routine to
handle real-time input interrupts from several
lines, capable of utilizing common memory as
well as memory unique to a given input line.
• Real-Time Input Analyzer
Required equipment: 12K characters of core
storage.
•
Communications Line Status Director
Required equipment: Model 286 Communications Control Unit •
A polling routine capable of determining communication line availability and controlling the
operation of these lines.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:161.100
'A;;~~
.
_---------1
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
COBOL B
AUER8AC~
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL B
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . COBOL B .
·)
.1-
Origin: . . . . . . . . . . . Honeywell EDP.
.142 Restrictions of Honeywell's COBOL B with
Respect to ASA X3.4
. 1:l
Reference: . . . . . • . . Honeywell Software
Bulletin 028.
. 14
Description
Honeywell's COBOL B Compiler. is designed to
operate on a Series 200 system that has a minimum
of 8,192 charactcrs of core storage, two magnetic
tape units, a card reader, a card punch, and a
printer. COBOL B provides a restricted COBOL
source language but offers a fast and efficient compiler. (Paragraph .142 lists the principal language
restrictions of COBOL B in relation to Compact
COBOL.) Therefore, COBOL B may prove somewhat constricting to the experienced programmer.
However, it provides the new user with a language
that is easy to learn and use. Two larger COBOL
languages for use with the Honeywell Series 200
are described in the following report section
Any level number must be in the range 01
through 05, rather than 01 through 10 as
specified by ASA .
(2)
The MULTIPLE REEL clause of the FILECONTROL entry is not permitted, although
multiple-reel files can be handled in less
direct ways.
(3)
The RECORDING MODE IS clause of the File
Description entry is not included.
(4) The DATA RECORD IS clause is acceptcd by
the compiler, but no compilation action takes
place.
(5)
The USAGE IS and SYNCHRONIZED clauses
of the Record Description entry are not present.
(6)
Only one level of OCCURS is allowed in the
Record Description entry; the ASA standard
requires two.
(7)
The PICTURE IS clause of the Hecord Description entry is restricted to a string of characters
without further options. BLANK WHEN ZERO
is not implemented.
(8)
The ADD and SUBTRACT verbs permit only
two quantities to be added or subtracted.
(510: 162).
This compiler is offered in three forms: as a
stand-alone program, as a program integrated to
run under Control of Operating System-Mod 1, or
as an integral part of Easytab-the unit record
equipment simulator described in Paragraph
510: 151. 17. Any desired additions to the routines
provided by Easytab must be coded in the COBOL B
language. Users of tabulating equipment who desire to move up to their first computer are thus
offered use of a relatively easy-to-learn language
and easy-to-use conversion package.
The Compact COBOL language standards used in
the remainder of this section are those published
in the American Standards Associations X3. 4
COBOL Information Bulletin #5 in October 1964.
However, Compact COBOL has not been officially
adopted as an American standard to date.
. 1-11 Availability
Language
specifications: . . . . . October 1965.
Compiler: . . . . . . . . May 1966.
7/66
cm #5
(1)
(9) The DISPLAY verb does not provide an alternative output device to the on-line printer.
(10)
The AFTER ADVANCING option is not provided
with the WRITE verb.
.143 Extensions of Honeywell's COBOL B with Respect
to ASA X3.4 CIB #5
(1) A SENSE-SWITCH ON or OFF STATUS clause
is provided within the SPECIAL-NAME entry.
Up to four sense switches can be specified.
(2) An APPLY DOUBLE-BUFFER ON clause is
provided with the 1-0 CONTROL entry. This
permits use of the simultaneous input-output
operations capability of the Honeywell Series
200 systems .
(3) A Switch Status imperative statement is provided with the IF verb.
(4) A THRU Character option is provided with the
MOVE verb.
fA
AUERBACH
(j)
510:162.100
A
SUMDARD
ED]?
AUERBACH
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
COBOL D AND H
RHO.IS
~
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL D AND H
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . • . • . • . . COBOL D.
--COBOLH.
. 12
Origin: .' •••••..... Honeywell EDP.
. 13
Reference: . . . . . . • . Honeywell Software
Bulletin 065.
.14
Description
Two COBOL compilers are available for use with
Honeywell's Tape Resident Operating System Mod 1. The COBOL D and COBOL H languages
differ in the number of language elements provided,
in the addressing mode of the object code generated,
and in the minimum core storage requirements for
compilation.
COBOL D operates in a minimum environment of
16K characters of core storage and generates
instructions in the three-character address mode
at an average speed of 300 card images per minute.
Because of the relatively small core storage design
level, certain COBOL language deficiencies are
present relative to the Department of Defense Required COBOL-61. These deficiencies are tabulated in Paragraph .142.
COBOL H operates in a minimum environment of
32K characters of core storage and generates
instructions in the four-character address mode.
Three-character addresses can also be generated
if desired. COBOL H offers all of the features of
Required COBOL-61 with the exception of threelevel subscripting. COBOL H also provides certain features of COBOL-61 Extended, as well as
several elective features. Paragraphs. 142
through .145 compare the language facilities of
Honeywell's COBOL D and H languages to the
language facilities of COBOL-61.
In addition to the minimum core storage requirement already mentioned, both compilers require
the use of four magnetic tape units, a card reader,
a card punch, and an on-line printer. The compilers are designed to be expandable in modules and
are self-adapting to core memories larger than
their minimum requirements.
A Language Preprocessor is available to handle the
entire range of COBOL language features that involve
the use of duplicate user-created names. The
Language Preprocessor will operate outside the
main "compile loop" and will provide these additional
facilities at the cost of an additional tape pass. The
many users who require no duplicate names in their
source programs can bypass this Preprocessor pass.
The following language features are handled by the
Language Preprocessor:
Environment Division:
•
All RENAMING clauses in the FILE -CONTRa L
paragraph.
Data Division:
III
All non-library COPY statements.
8
All duplicate data-names, whether caused by
RENAMING, COPY, or normal use, which have
been referred to in the PROCEDURE DIVISION.
Procedure Division:
•
All duplicate paragraph-names, whether referred to or not.
III
All use of qualification in references to datanames or procedure-names.
•
All use of the CORRESPONDING options in
MOVE, ADD, and SUBTRACT statements.
The Extended facilities of COBOL-61 and new mass .141 Availability
storage handling and table look-up facilities have
Language: . . . . . . . . . 1961.
been included within the latest official DOD COBOL
language-COBOL-65. Honeywell is currently
Compilerimplementing the Sequential and Random Access
COBOL D: .••...• basic compiler available
with Sequential Processing statements of COBOL-65.
now; compiler with option
However, the PROCESS statement used for Random
to use up to 6 tape units
Access with Random Processing, and the Hold
will be available in
statement used for Asynchronous Processing, are
July 1966.
not included.
COBOL H: ••..... basic compiler available
now; complete mass
A number of COBOL-65 facilities are not provided
storage-oriented compiler
in either version of Honeywell's current COBOL
in first quarter 1967.
languages. These defiCiencies, in addition to that
mentioned in the paragraph above, include:
.142 Deficiencies of Honeywell COBOL D with Respect
• No Report Writing Options.
to Required COBOL 61
• Only a basic implementation of the SORT
Environment Division:
feature.
• The RENAMING option in the FILE-CONTROL
• No multiple receiving field facilities in
paragraph, which is used if more than one file
arithmetic statements.
utilizes the same File Description, is omitted.
(COBOL D will handle it if the Language Pre• No Table Handling facilities wi"th the indexing
and search options.
processor is used.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:162.142
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
.142 Deficiencies of Honeywell COnOL D with Respect
to Required COnOL-61 (Contd.)
• The INTO clause of the READ verb is omitted.
•
Data Division:
•
.143 Extensions of Honeywell COBOL D and H With
Respect to COBOL-61
Level numbers may be in the range 01 to 49
and level 77. Up to ten levels may be used
to describe a data item in a Record Description.
Extensions to COBOL-61 included in both COBOL D
and COBOL If include the CORRESPONDING
option of the ADD and SUBTRACT verbs. In addition, a special form of the PERFORM verb,
Option 5, is available in both versions to provide
optimization of subroutines and maintain compatibility with other COBOL compilers. COBOL H
provides the basic implementation of the SORT
verb, a restricted version of the table handling .
option, and a limited version of the Mass Storage
language extension of COBOL-61.
• Only 2 levels of subscripting are permitted.
Procedure Division:
•
The FROM clause of the WRITE verb is omitted.
The DEPENDING ON clause of the GO verb is
omitted.
• Subscript variation within. the PERFORM verb
(Option 5) is not allowed .
. 144 COBOL-61 Electives Implemented (see 4'161. 3)
Elective
Key No.
Comments
Characters and Words
1*
2*
3
5
6
+, -, *,
Formula characters
Re lationship characters
Semicolon
Figurative constants
Figurative constants
I,
**, =maybe used in formulas.
> and < are available.
Used for convenience of reader.
HIGH BOUND(S), LOW BOUND(S).
HIGH-VALUE(S); LOW-VALUE(S).
File Description
8
9
11
BLOCK size
FILE CONTAINS
SEQUENCED ON
Allows block size to be expressed as a range.
Approximate file size can be shown.
Specifies the keys on which records in a
file are sequenced.
Record Description
13
16*
19*
20
Table length
RANGE IS
SIZE clause option
Conditional range
22*
Verbs
COMPUTE
25
26
INCLUDE
USE
Lengths of tables and arrays may vary.
Value ranges of items can be shown.
Can be used to specify size of any record.
A conditional value can be a range.
Algebraic formulas are permitted. (This
feature is currently being implemented.)
Library routines can be called.
Enables own coding to be specified for I/O
errors and file and tape labels.
Verb Options
27
28
30
LOCK
MOVE CORRESPONDING
ADVANCING
32*
33
34
Formulas
Operand size
Relationships
35
36
36*
37
38
Tests
Conditionals
Conditionals
Compound conditionals
Complex conditionals
39
Conditional statements
40
SOURCE -COMPUTER
Locks rewound tapes.
Moves and edits relevant records.
Specifies paper advance for each line of
print.
Algebraic formulas can be used.
Up to 18 digits.
IS UNEQUAL TO, EQUALS, and EXCEEDS
are provided.
IF { } IS NOT ZERO form is provided,
Abbreviation 3 of IF verb.
Implied objects with implied subjects.
ANDs and ORs can be intermixed.
Conditional statements are permitted
within conditional statements.
Environment Division
Enables a programmer to describe a
subset of an automatic description.
* Implemented in COBOL H only.
7/66
/'
!
(Contd.)
fA
AUERBACH
®
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE:
510:162.144
COBOL D AND H
.144 COBOL-61 Electives Implemented (see 4'161 3) - Contd
Elective
Key No.
41
OBJECT-COMPUTER
42
SPECIAL-NAMES
43
FILE -CONTRO L
45
I-O-CONTROL
Comments
Enables a programmer to describe a
subset of an automatic description.
Enables names to be given to parts of
a console.
Enables a library description to be
used to describe a file.
Enables a library description to be used.
Identification Division
47
DATE-COMPILED
Current date will be inserted automatically.
Special Features
48
49
Library
Segmentation
Library routines can be called.
Object programs can be segmented.
.145 COBOL-61 Electives Not Implemented (see 4:161. 3)
Key No.
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
4
7
Long literals
Computer-name
Literals may not exceed 120 characters.
No alternative computer names
File Description
10
12
Label formats
HASHED
14
Item length
15
17
BITS option
RENAMES
18
SIGN IS
Label handling
Labels must be standard or omitted.
Hash totals cannot be created.
Record Description
21
Variable item lengths cannot be specified
in a PICTURE.
Items cannot be specified in bits.
Alternative groupings of elementary items
cannot be specified.
No separate signs are allowed.
Only standard labels (or none) may be
used.
Verbs
23
24
DEFINE
ENTER
New verbs cannot be defined.
Other languages can be entered only
through use of LOAD and CALL verbs.
Verb Options
29
31
OPEN REVERSED
STOP
Read reverse facility is not provided.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
-1
"......
510: 163. 100
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
FORTRAN D. H. AND J
/A..EDP
AUERBACH
REPONrS
~
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN D, H, AND J
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
Origin:
.13
Reference:
.14
Description
FORTRAND, H, and J.
..
Honeywell EDP.
FORTRAN Reference
Manuals 027 and 028.
The Honeywell FORTRAN compilers D, H, and J
can be used with the full spectrum of Series 200
processors - from a 16K-character Model 120
that has no multiply and divide hardware, through
a Model 200 that uses either three or four-character addressing, up to the larger Models 1200, 2200,
and 4200 that utilize the optional floating-point
Scientific Instruction Package. Compatibility is
stressed between the three levels of the FORTRAN
source language in order to permit graceful growth
from the smaller Series 200 processor models to
the larger. Recompilation of FORTRAN source
programs is all that is required to incorporate the
additional hardware features of the larger processor models.
or, in the case of I/O statements and library
function names, converts the FORTRAN II name
to its FORTRAN D equivalent. Table I provides
a listing of the statement conversions provided by
SCREEN.
Listed below are several extensions of the Honeywell FORTRAN H language as compared to the basic
FORTRAN D language. FORTRAN H requires the
use of at least 32K characters of core storage and
floating point hardware.
•
The FORTRAN H compiler can operate as a
background program in a communications
environment.
•
Both complex and double-precision data types
are permitted.
•
Mixed-mode arithmetic expressions are permitted. The priority of the data types within
arithmetic expressions follows, in descending
order: complex. double-precision, real and
integer.
I)
The compatibility goals of the Honeywell FORTRAN
language extend also to the earlier FORTRAN languages of the IBM 1400 Series. All language features of the 1401 FORTRAN language are provided
as a subset of the 16K design level FORTRAN D
language. Likewise, the language features of
IBM's 1410/7010 FORTRAN are provided as a subset of the 32K design level FORTRAN H and the
65K design level FORTRAN J.
Discrepancies between the FORTRAN II used with
the IBM 1400 Series and the Honeywell FORTRAN D
language can be resolved by a conversion program
supplied by Honeywell. This program requires a
separate pass prior to the FORTRAN D compilation
The conversion program, called SCREEN, either
reproduces the FORTRAN II statements directly,
•
In both arithmetic and logical assignment statements, evaluation takes place during execution
and the resultant value is assigned to a variable.
FORTRAN H provides a BEGIN TRACE statement that will cause the name of the variable and
its assigned value to be printed each time an
assignment statement is executed.
The programmer can optionally arrange data
records in free-form data sentences. Each
field in a sentence is associated by its position
with a list variable of a READ or WRITE statement. When data is formatted in data records.
no FORMAT statement is required for the data.
Each variable-length data-field corresponds to
a word of a sentence, and each data-field
corresponds to the variable in the same position
in the I/O statement.
TABLE I. SCREEN CONVERSION OUTPUT
Conversion of Library Function Names
Conversion of I/O Statements
FORTRAN II
FORTRAN D
FORTRAN II
FORTRAN D
FORTRAN II
FORTRAN D
ABSF
XABSF
INTF
XINTF
MODF
XMODF
SIGNF
XSIGNF
MAXOF
XMAXOF
MAXIF
XMAXIF
MINOF
XMINOF
ABS
lABS
AINT
INT
AMOD
MOD
SIGN
ISIGN
AMAXO
MAXO
AMAXI
MAXI
AMINO
MINO
MINIF
XMINIF
FLOATF
XFIXF
DIMF
XDIMF
LOGF
SINF
COSF
EXPF
SQRTF
ATANF
TANHF
AMINI
MINI
FLOAT
IFIX
DIM
!DIM
ALOG
SIN
COS
EXP
SQRT
ATAN
TANH
READ INPUT TAPE i. n, List
READ (i, n) List
READ TAPE i, List
READ (i) List
READ n, List
READ (i. n) List
WRITE OUTPUT TAPE i, n. List
WRITE (i, n) List
WRITE TAPE i. List
WRITE (i) List
PRINT n. List
WRITE (i. n) List
PUNCH n. List
WRITE (i, n) List
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:163.140
.1-1
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
Dl'scription (Contd.)
•
•
All Honeywell FORTRAN compilers require the
use of at least four magnetic tape units. Additional
tape units can be utilized to improve the performance of the FORTRAN compilers and to provide
flexible operational options during compilation.
Whenever a Hollerith constant is valid (such as
in FORMAT statements. data initialization
statements. and as an argumcnt in CALL statements), the programmer has the option of
substituting a self-defining charactcr string
delimited by colons. This eliminates the need
for counting the number of characters in the
string.
The minimum core storage requirements are as
follows: FORTRAN D - 16K characters;
FORTRAN H - 32K characters; and FORTRAN J 49K characters.
Honeywell states that compilation speeds for the
three FORTRAN compilers are approximately as
follows:
In FORMAT statements. the T-specification
indicates the next position in the record that
will be read or written; the G-specification
indicates a generalized format for integer. real.
alphabetic. logical. and double-precision data.
• An IMPLICIT statement permits assignment of
type-specification according' to the first letter
of variable names.
FORTRAN D: .
FORTRAN H:
FORTRAN J:
250 statements per minute.
800 statements per minute.
800 statements per minute.
.141 Availability
Language specifications: . . . . .
FORTRAN Compiler D: . . . . .
FORTRAN Compiler H: . . . . .
FORTRAN Compiler J:
Additional FORTRAN H extensions in relation to
FORTRAN D are presented in Table II.
The "Chaining" overlay technique used by Honeywell's FORTRAN compilers is a major extension
to the method of overlay control used in the IBM
1400 Series FORTRAN and in the 7090 FORTRAN II
languages. A job can consist of a group of independent segments (links) which can occupy memory
at different times. Each link is overlaid in memory by the subsequent linle The CALL CHAIN
statement causes transfer of control between linl(s.
This chaining feature permits execution of large
FORTRAN programs in relatively small core
storage environments.
1964.
July 1965.
3rd quarter 1966.
1st quarter 1967.
. 142 Restrictions of FORTRAN D Relative to
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
(1)
Integer constants can range to 2 23 _1 as
compared to 2 35 _1 in 7090/7094 FORTRAN.
.143 Extensions of FORTRAN D Relative to
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
(1)
Paragraphs . 142 and. 143 below compare Honeywell FORTRAN D to IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV.
The facilities of the FORTRAN D language are
compared to those of FORTRAN H in the above
description and in Table II. The FORTRAN J
language is provided for use with Honeywell's
large-scale Operating System - Mod 2 integrated
software control system. It is expected that
FORTRAN J will offer few. if any. language
extensions over FORTRAN H.
(2)
(3)
FORTRAN D floating-point constants can
range from 2 to 20 digits. IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV provides a range of from
1 to 9 digits in this type of constant.
The subroutines MDUMP. DUMP, and
PDUMP provide a variety of dynamic
dumping facilities.
The subroutines PARITY, EOF, and
EOT permit tests for parity error, end
of file, and end of tape I/O conditions.
TABLE II. COMPARISON OF FORTRAN H AND FORTRAN D
Feature
FORTRAN Compiler H
FORTRAN Compiler D
3 as in ASA
2
Extended ranges in DO nests
As in ASA
Not implemented
BLOCK DATA subprograms
As in ASA
Not implemented
Naming main program
Via control card
On TITLE statement
End-of-tape on object tapes
Console type-out, but
program re-entry not
permitted
EOT subroutine permits
program re-entry
Conversion of FORTRAN II
I/O statements
During compilation
Via SCREEN run mode
Parity and EOF checks
Via input statement
Via subroutine
Maximum dimension of arrays
/
7/66
A
AUERBACH
@
--.,.
A
IA
AUERBAC~
510: 171. 100
"'''AiD
EDP
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
EASYCODER
RfPlIlIlS
~
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: EASYCODER
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Origin:
.13
Referencc:
. 14
Description
The paragraphs that follow describe in considcrable
detail the facilities of the Easycoder C and D versions of the assembly language. The limitations
of the Easycoder A and B languages and their relationships to the two larger versions are discussed in Section 510: 182, Program Translators, wherc
the differentiating characteristics of the foul' Easycoder translators are presented. It should be noted
that the basic language facilities of Easycoder are
the same for all versions.
...• Easycodcr A, B, C, and D.
. Honeywcll EDP.
Honeywell 200 Programmers ncfercncc Manual.
Easycoder is the standard assembly language for
the Honeywell Series 200. It is patterned after the
IBM 1401 Autocoder language, but there is no direct
source language compatibility between the two
systems.
The instruction format in Easycoder consists of a
mnemonic operation code followed by a free-form
number of operands separated by commas. Addresses can be specified in absolute, symbolic, or
relative form. The operands may be core storage
locations or control characters which further define
the meaning of the instruction. See Figure] for
an Easycoder coding form and some sample coding.
There are four versions of the Easycoder language,
designed for use with progressively larger config"urations of the translating Series 200 computer
system. A fifth Series 200 symbolic assembly language, Assembler J, is described in Section 510:
193-0perating System-Mod 2.
Easycoder provides for the use of all the Series
200 machine instructions, for object-time modification by indirect addressing and indexing of
operands, and for relative addressing of operands
in the source language. The operand TEMP -j 26
will be interpreted by the assembly program as
referring to the field which is addressed by the
26th location after TEMP.
The four versions of Easycoder are:
•
Easycoder A: usable on minimum configurations
with card input-output units and 4, 096 positions
of core storage; no literals; macros can be used
only in systems with at least 8K storage positions.
•
Easycoder B: requires 8,192 core storage
positions, card or paper tape input-output units,
and a printer; provides all the facilities of Easycoder A plus macro instructions and literals.
•
Easycoder C: requires 12,288 core storage
positions and at least 3 magnetic tape units; provides additional facilities to simplify program
preparation and segmentation of object programs.
•
Easycoder D: requires 16,384 core storage
positions and at least 3 magnetic tape units;
provides all the facilities of Easycoder C, plus
the additional facility of assembling programs
that use 4-character mode addressing.
Relative addressing is widely used in the Easycoder language, particularly where the size of the
symbol table is restricted by core storage limitations (see Paragraph . 311). Because of the vari0us addressing modes, ambiguities can arise; for
instance, the references INST + 2, INST + 3", and
INST + 4 might all actually refer to the A-address
field of the instruction INST, depending on the addressing mode currently in use. Such ambiguities
are normally handled by defining a symbolic constant which is equated to the address length, and
using this in place of the absolute value of the
address length.
EASYCODER
COOING fORM
CARD
NUMBER
~ 6
I 2 ,. "
I
,.
I
lOCATION
TWO
"411/
211412
J
1141/.1
COM-PAR
..-,1 14 1
, "-'its
711411
• 1i4 IS!
, "'4 1/9
..-'211
,
,
·,
·
:
OPERATION
141$
U"
202.
A
ADDEND
S
AUG+I,JI, YEAN
SCE
GOTOIF
NA
AIIG -f 1,Jd., SAM.EAS
OF
M
AUG+IJ!
SAM£AS
s
+.J/,ACCUM
11285/1, BEGIN
THREE
BA
A
31
,
........L_~~
ADDEND, SEPT
SEPT, YEA R
BeE
A
PAGE
OPERANDS
CODE
IF
11,1161
:
OATE
PROGRAMMER
PROBLEM
FOUR
SEPT
3..-
ADDEND, s£pr+1
i i
~~~L ...
1 I
L I
1.......-.0-.<-..... _-1
,
,
L......-~
1
~
Figure 1.
Easycoder Coding Form and Sample Coding
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:.171. 140
. 14
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
Description (Contd.)
The programmer writing in Easycoder also has
the flexibility of deciding whether to refer to constants, reserved fields, and instructions by the
leftmost or rightmost character. Constants arid
reserved fields are normally addressed by the
rightmost character, and instructions by the leftmost. This convention can be reversed by the programmer by indenting the symbol name one character. (This also reduces the maximum label
length to five characters.) This indentation is
carried forward onto the program listing, but it
may not stand out in the absence of other contiguous symbolic names. However, when the symbol
is subsequently used, no explicit reference is
made on the listing to indicate that the conventions
have been reversed, so it is advisable for the programmer to take a few precautions to prevent misinterpretations.
only a single instruction in this manner can be restricting in some cases.
.. 15
November 1964 for
Easycoder A and B.
.16
Availability:
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram:
.22
. all four assemblers are
currently in operation.
. see Figure 1.
Legend
Card Number:
first 2 digits for page
number; next 2 for
line number; last one
for insertions.
Card Type: •••...•. blank for all instructions,
constants, and control
instructions. An * indicates a Remarks card.
In addition to the executable imperative statements
of the Easycoder language, a number of statements
are provided for initiating the system, formatting
constants and work areas, setting word marks, etc.
Still other statements guide the assembly process.
Included are statements that set the allocation
counter to some specific absolute or relative value,
or to the next value which is modulo any specified
power of two (i. e., a multiple of 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
etc.).
Mark:
"L" indicates an item
mark is to be placed
over leftmost character
of field or instruction;
"R" indicates item mark
over rightmost charactel'. Note that when L
is used and the leftmost
character already contains a word mark, a
record mark will result.
Also, in Easycoder C,
D, and J, the letters A
through T can be used
to indicate any punctuation (item, word, or
record mark) over the
leftmost and/or rightmost position in the
statement.
Location: . . . . . . . . . may be blank or may contain a symbolic tag or
an absolute decimal address. (If the first
column is left blank,
the normal address
assignment will be reversed. )
Operation Code: . . . . contains an octal or
mnemonic instruction
code, a data-defining
code, a library call, or
an assembly control instruction code.
Operands:
contains the operands and
variants (separated by
commas) for the instruction, in free form. Remarks may follow the
terminating space.
Another group of statements in the Easycoder language guides execution of the object program.
These include the CLEAR statement, which clears
specified core storage areas; the END statement,
which specifies the starting address of the program; and the EX (Execute) statement. The EX
statement allows certain parts of the program to
be executed before other parts are loaded. This
facility allows initialization and ending routines to
share the program area with the main program,
and it can be used in various other ways for saving
memory space. In form, it consists of a branch
address to which control is transferred during the
loading process.
Macro-instructions may be included in programs
written in Easycoder. These are single-statement
instructions, with parameters included as operands
in the instruction. Specialization and inclusion of
the desired macro-routines are accomplished during a separate pass preceding the assembly. Currently available macro-routines are designed to
facilitate the manipulation of data files on magnetic
tape, drum, or disc; to perform floating-point computations; and to evaluate mathematical functions.
7/66
Publication Date: ...•. February 1966 for
Easycoder C and D.
The Easycoder C and D languages include a number of assembly control instructions not provided
in the Easycoder A and B languages. These
statements are aimed primarily at simplifying
the use of segmented programs. The SFX (Suffix)
statement directs the assembly program to add a
single-character suffix to each symbolic tag in the
subsequent coding, and the SEG (Segment) header
defines the start of a segment.
.23
Two other instructions, REP (Repeat) and GEN
(Generate), act on a single adjacent instruction,
repeating it a specific number of times, with or
without modification. These facilities can be helpful where the contents of a table are to be accumulated, or where some other repetitive operation
must be performed. The limitation of processing
.231 Insertions: . • . . . . . . at bottom of page.
. 232 Deletions: . • . . . . . . cross out offending line .
.233 Alterations: . • . . . . . erase and correct. (Easycoder C and Dprovide
facilities for program
corrections during
assembly.)
A
Corrections
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
®
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: EASYCODER
.24
Special Conventions
. 241 Compound addresses: · any number of symbols
and decimal intcgers
(up to the limit of card
field length) combined
by addition (+) and/or
subtraction (-) signs.
.242 Multi-addresses:
· free-form, separated by
commas .
. 243 LiteralsEasycoder A and B: . none.
Easycoder C and D: . alphameric, decimal,
binary, octal, or address literals may be
used.
. 244 Special coded addresses: . . . . . .
. *refers to leftmost character of the instruction
in which the* symbol appears as an operand.
.245 OthersAbsolute addresses: · any decimal number from
zero to the largest numbers which can' be contained in an address field
(4095 for 2-character
addresses, 32, 767 for
3-character addresses,
65,535 for 4-character
addresses). Leading
zeros may be omitted.
Indirect addresses: · enclosed in parentheses.
Indexed addresses: · address followed by +X
and the number of the
index register.
Note: Indirect and indexed addresses can be used
only in the 3-character or 4-character addressing modes .
.3
LABELS
.31
General
. 311 Maximum number of labelsEasycoder A
.400.
(4K core):
Easycoder B
. 400.
(8K core):
Easycoder B
. 850.
(12K core):
Easycoder C and D: . no practical limit.
. 312 Common label formation rule: . . . . . . . . yes.
.313 Reserved labels: . . . . none.
. 314 Other restrictions:. . special characters are not
allowed in programmerdefined symbols.
.316 Synonyms permitted: . yes; EQU pseudo.
. 32
Universal Labels
.321 Labels for proceduresExistence: . . . . . . . mandatory if referenced by
other instructions, unless address arithmetic
is used.
Formation ruleFirst character: .. alphabetic.
Last character: ... numeric or alphabetic
Others: . . . . . . . . numeric or alphabetic.
Number of characters: . . . . . . . . 1 to 6.
510: 171. 240
.322 Labels for
routines:
. 323 Labels for
. 324 Labels for
.325 Labels for
.32(; Labels for
.33
library
.....
constants:
files: ...
records:
variables:
Local Labels:'
·
·
·
·
·
same
same
same
same
same
as
as
as
as
as
procedures .
procedures .
procedures.
procedures.
procedures.
· none.
.4
.41
Constants
.411 Maximum size constants:
IntegerDecimal:
.40 decimal digits.
Octal:
· 40 octal digits (20 character positions) .
Binary:
· (; decimal digits (20
character positions).
Alphabetic:
.40 characters, preceded and followed by (w.
Alphameric:
· same as alphabetic .
. 412 Maximum size
literals: . . . .
· same as constants;
all literals longer
than 5 characters will
be stored once for each
occurrence.
.42
Working Areas
.421 Data layoutImplied by use: . . . . alternative.
Specified in program: alternative (through
use of DA control
instruction) .
.422 Data Type: . . . . .. . not required.
.423 Redefinition: . . . .. . yes.
.43
Input-Output Areas
.431 Data layout: . . . . . . . implicit or specified
with DA control instruction .
.432 Data type:
· not required.
.433 Copy layout:
· yes.
·5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 MnemonicExistence:
Number:
Example:
.512 AbsoluteExistence:
Number:
Example:
Comment:
· 52
· alternative.
.41.
· 36 = Decimal Add.
· written as two octal digits
right justified in command field.
Macro-Codes
· 521 Number available:
.523 New macros: . . . .
.53
· alternative .
· 43 (many variations
through "V" variant
characters) .
· A = Decimal Add.
· 13 to date for inputoutput control.
· inserted into library
by assembly.
Interludes: . . . . . . . . none.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:171. 540
· 54
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
Translator Control
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.8
.81
.541 Method of controlAllocation counter: .. pseudo-operation.
Label adjustment: .. pseudo-operation.
Annotation: . . . . . . . special cards.
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
Special Arithmetic
Description
OPEN: . . . . . . . . • . . initializes a file and
checks label.
CLOSE: . . . . . • . . . . terminates and deactivates a file.
GET: . . . • . . . . . . . . locates a record for
processing.
PUT: . . . . . . . . . . . . inserts a record in an
output file .
FEOR: . . . . . .
. .. initiates end of reel
routine at other than
the normal end .
FETCH: . . . . . . . . . . reads items from disc
or drum in the order
of sorted keys.
LOCATE, UNLOAD,
RESTORE, EDIT,
CORRECT, COMPARE, CLEAR:
. initiate utility functions.
.611 Facilities: . . . . . . . . multiply, divide; floating-point add, subtract,
multiply, divide.
. 612 Method of call: . . . . . macro.
· 62
Special Functions
. 621 Facilities: . . . . . . . . log, sine, cosine, exponential, square root,
arctangent, hyperbolic
tangent.
· 622 Method of call: . . . . . macro.
.63
Overlay Control:
· 64
Data Editing
.. controlled by programmer;
no special facilities.
.82
Code
.641 Radix conversion: ... none.
· 642 Code translation: . . . . hardware capability
(optional) .
.643 Format control: . . . . . by hardware editing capability (optional).
· 65
Input-Output Control
. 651
.652
. 653
.654
.655
File labels: . . . . . . . .
Reel labels: . . . . . . .
Blocking: . . • . . . . • .
Error control: . . . . . .
Method of call: . . . • .
.66
Sorting: . . . • . . • . • . see Paragraphs 510:151. 13
and 510:152.13 for descriptions of the Series
200 Sort programs.
.67
Diagnostics
. . core memory and tape
dumps may be called in by
operator or connected by
programmed linkage.
.672 Tracers: . . . . . . . . . none.
.673 Snapshots: . . . . . . . . see Paragraph. 671.
.671 Dumps: . . . .
LIBRARY FACILITIES
· 71
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . Series 200 Easycoder
--Library.
· 72
Kinds of Libraries
· 721 Fixed master: . . . . . . no.
.722 Expandable master: .. yes.
.723 Private: . . . . . . . . . . may be added to.
· 73
Storage Form: . . • . . . magnetic tape or mass
storage devices.
· 74
Varieties of Contents: . subroutines and macro
routines.
.75
l\Iechanism
.751 Insertion of new item: . by Easycoder C and D
assemblers.
.752 Language of new item: Easycoder .
. 753 l\Iethod of call: . . . . . macro or insertion deck.
. 76
7/66
Description
CONF: . . . . . . . . . . . describes configuration
of translating and
object systems.
DCA: . . . • . . . . . • . . precedes a series of
file descriptions.
.
PROG: . . . . . . . . . . . identifies the program .
RESV: . . . . . . • . . . . reserves an area of core
memory .
**DA: . . . . . . . . • . . . . defines area(s) of memory
which contain fields
or subfields
ORG: . . . . . . . . . . . . specifies the following
coding is to be assigned
to memory locations
starting at the location
written in the operand
field.
MORG: . . . . . . . . . . . assigns locations to the
following coding starting at the next location
which is a multiple of
the numbers written
in the operand field
(must be a power of 2) .
EQU: . . . . . . . . . . . . assigns the value written
in the operand field to the
tag in the location field.
The operand may be an
absolute, symbolic, or
indexed address. If *
is used, it refers to the
next location available
for allocation.
CEQU: . . . . . . . . . . . equates an octal constant
with a tag which represents a variant character.
ADMODE: . . • . . . . . . directs assembler to
assemble the following
instructions with 2, 3,
or 4 character addresses,
as specified in the operand
field. Stays in effect
until the next ADMODE
instruction .
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
macro.
.7
Pseudos
Insertion in Program: . inserted in-line at point
of call.
** Not available in Easycoder A.
fA
AUERBACH
OJ
(Contd. )
510:171.820
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: EASYCODER
.82
Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
Code
Description
.. allows coding to be executed during the loading process~
END: . . . . . . . . . . . . last card of the program;
specifies starting address of program.
CLEAR: . . . . . . . . . . specifies which area(s)
of memory are to be
cleared before loading
the program (may be
specified in absolute or
symbolic).
DCW: . . . . . . . . . . . . loads a constant and sets a
word mark in the highorder position.
DC: . . . . . . . . . . . . . loads a constant without
a word marIe
.. stores a constant equivDSA: ..
alent to the machine
address assigned to a
specific symbolic address.
EX: .
Description
*SFX: . . . . . . . . . . . . assigns a suffix code to
the sixth position of
labels.
*SKIP: . . . . . . . . . . . . controls vertical spacing
of assembly listing.
**LITORG: . . . . . . . . . assigns storage locations
to previously encountered literals and
closed library routines.
*REP: . . . . . . . . . . . . indicates that the following statement (DC or
DCW) is to be repeated
N times, where N is
o to 63,
*GEN: . . . . . . . . . . . . indicates that the following statement is to be
repeated (with increments or decrements
applied to operands) N
times, where N is 0 to
63.
*Easycoder C and D only.
**Not available in Easycoder A.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
-~
510: 181. 100
""''''
.
~~EDP
HONEYWELL sERI Es 200
AUERBACH'
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
REPons
~
BRIDGE 1401
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: BRIDGE 1401
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . • . . . . . BRIDGE 1401.
.12
Description
•
The average BRIDGE'd 1401 program runs about
twice as fast on the H-200 as on the IBM 1401,
with exceptional programs running up to five times
as fast in some cases, and, in other cases, at
approximately the same speed as on the 1401.
BRIDGE 1401 is a translating program that will
convert IBM 1401 machine-language programs to
Series 200 machine-language programs automatically. Many 1401 programs will run immediately
after conversion, with no further intervention;
many others will require a few hours' desk checking by analysts familiar with the 1401 program and
with BRIDGE 1401; and a few programs (see
Paragraph . 123 below) may require a complete
overhaul.
The translation methods adopted, the reasons why
different programs will be improved by different
proportions, and the IBM 1401 facilities which are
not presently covered by BRIDGE 1401 are reviewed
separately in the sections below.
.121 Methodology of BRIDGE 1401
The final Honeywell program will have the same
logical structure as the original program, and
Honeywell estimates that it will run (on a Honeywell Model 200) from 2 to 5 times as fast as the
original, except in those cases where the 1401
program was limited by the speed of a single input
or output device (see Paragraph . 122 below).
BRIDGE 1401 runs on either a card or tape sys. tem. A condensed IBM 1401 Autocoder, condensed SPS, or SPS single load format program
deck (together with a card describing certain
options in conversion) is read in and stored in
main memory, character by character, as it
would be stored at the start of a regular 1401
operational run. During this operation all affected
locations are identified in tabular form. The program is then analyzed, and an attempt is made to
identify all instruction areas and list their locations
in a table. At this point, a capability is provided
for reproducing its contents so that other segments
and overlays will correspond in the operand analysis areas.
The principal restrictions of BRIDGE are:
(1)
The Honeywell system must have an additional
4, 096 core storage positions as well as all the
peripheral devices and features of the original
1401.
(2)
The Honeywell system must have the Advanced
Programming and Editing options (n. b., the
rental price of these two features, plus the
additional 4K core storage module, is $450
per month for Model 200).
(3)
Having isolated the instruction areas, BRIDGE
1401 then scans the 1401 program and produces
a Series 200 program. Instruction operation
codes, addresses, and variant characters are
replaced with their equivalents where it is possible
to do so on a character-by-character basis. Where
this is impossible, but a simulation technique can
be employed, an item mark is associated with the
op code. The op code itself is replaced by a number
which identifies the subroutine that exactly simulates the function of the instruction. (When the
converted program runs on the Honeywell system,
the computer is conditioned by instruction to
operate in the "item mark trapping" mode. In
this mode, an item -marked operation code will
cause the other Sequence Counter to control subsequent instruction executions. The value of the
operation code of this instruction is then used to
transfer control to the appropriate simulating
subroutine. The H-200, with its two Sequence
Counters, uses one for directly translated instructions and the other for executing closed
subroutines where simulation is required.) If the
scrutinized instruction is not recognized as a
legal 1401 instruction, or cannot at this point be
simulated, a stop or pass order is inserted in
its place and flagged for later use.
The 1401 program must be an operational,
legal program (i. e., it must not use instructions other than the way they are described
in the IBM programming manuals). In some
cases an installation will be able to modify
Bridge so that non-standard instructions
can be simulated. (See Paragraph . 122
below. )
BRIDGE 1401 has been operational since April,
1964. The results of its application to date, both
for demonstrations and operational use, are stated
by the manufacturer to be highly effective.
Translation time averages about one minute per
4,000 characters of IBM 1401 program volume.
For typical 1401 programs, the instruction breakdown currently being found by Honeywell is as
follows:
7/66
•
7691: of the 1401 instructions are being directly
translated.
•
23.491: of the 1401 instructions require objecttime interpretation by subroutines.
O. 6% of the 1401 'instructions cannot be handled
by BRIDGE 1401, and are flagged for programmers' scrutiny .
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
@
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: BRIDGE 1401
510: 181. 121
effect of these factors on any specific program
can be estimated with reasonable accuracy if the
timing factors that determine the performance
of the original 1401 program are known.
.121 Methodology of BRIDGE 1401 (Contd.)
The converted program is printed out, in memory
order, together with a corresponding listing of the
original 1401 program. Each line lists both the
1401 and Series 200 constant or instruction, together
with the location value, mnemonic operation code,
and error flag type, where pertinent. A Series 200
program deck is punched or written on tape.
Facilities added to the BRIDGE 1401 repertoire
since its original announcement include the following:
•
An optional final phase will accept the progTam
deck containing one instruction per card and produce a condensed Series 200 program deck.
o Magnetic tape can be read or written with
word marks.
o Compressed magnetic tapes, as used with the
. 122 The Resulting Honeywell Program
IBM 7070 and equivalent systems (see page
403:091.100 in the IBM 7070 Computer System
Report), can be used.
The final progTam, as run on the Series 200 system,
bears a character-by-character, instruction-by
instruction relationship to the original program
except in the following details:
(1)
(2)
Buffer input-output areas are provided
for the tape units (optionally), the card
reader. card punch, and printer, allowing
these units to operate simultaneously with
processing without disturbing the original
14(11 program logic.
o Column binary cards can be read, and all other
column binary instructions can be translated.
.123 IBM 1401 Facilities Not Currently Handled by
BRIDGE 1401
All simulated functions are handled interpretively. The actual work done within the
routine is usually short (simulation of an
input or output instruction, for example);
but if an instruction address is being arithmetically modified (i, e., if the original
program added the contents of a data field
to an address), a binary to decimal conversion and a decimal to binary reconversion
will have to be performed.
A number of ciifferent possible limiting factors
may control the performance of the object program.
The resultant program will overlap card reading,
card punching, anci printing. Overlapping of
magnetic tape reading and writing is optional.
Central processor time, in the case of the Model
200 Processor, will be reduced to between 20%
and 50t;b of the original 1401 time. The overall
o
Use of any RPQ (non-standard) features or
peripheral devices.
e
Use of 1311 Disk Storage Drives.
o Use of paper tape equipment.
There is a 300-microsecond overhead for each
1401 instruction that needs to be simulated. This
allows for the necessary branching and control
functions. In addition to this overhead, the simulation of the instructions concerned is handled by
special library routines. Typical timings for
these routines vary from 120 microseconds to
simulate a Move Numeric instruction to 4, 050
microseconds for a Clear Storage and Branch
instruction.
These routines are easily replaceable, and in
fact some installations have already written their
own versions, either to cover instructions or
RPQ features which are not present in the standard
library or to gain improved performance through
the use of additional storage. For example, the
decimal-to-binary conversions could be speeded
up, but this would require additional storage over
and above the 4, 000 additional locations normally
required by BRIDGE 1401. If an installation is
able to allow more storage space, then different
conversion routines can be substituted.
Magnetic tape reading and writing can be
buffered at object time.
CD
Use of 7340 Model 2 Hypertape Drives.
I)
Use of magnetic or optical character readers.
o
Use of the Console Inquiry Station.
•
Use of Teleprocessing devices, such as the
1009 and 7710.
•
Programs which modify operation codes arithmetically (e.g., add "3" to a "Read a Card"
instruction to make a "Punch a Card" instruction.
•
Programs which modify parts of operand
addresses arithmetically (e. g., add "5" to the
tens position of the address "454" to make
"504").
. 13
Originator: .
· Honeywell EDP.
.14
Maintainer:
· Honeywell EDP.
. 15
Availability:
· April 1964 .
.2
INPUT
.21
Language
.211 Name:
. . ........
· IBM 1401 Autocoder condensed load program
deck, SPS single, SPS
condensed, and Autocoder tape programs .
. 212 Exemptions: . . . . . . . programs which, while
running, modify operation
codes or partial addresses.
The replacement of a
complete operation code,
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510: 181. 212
which are not instructions are data - no direct
provision is made for any use of an instruction as
.data, except for address modifications.)
. 212 Exemptions (Contd.)
or the modification of an
entire address field will,
however, be handled
correctly.
· ~~
This analysis covers all cases of conditional and
unconditional branches, subroutine exits, and
other similar situations. A table is prepared
showing which areas of the IBM 1401 memory contain instructions .
Fornl
. 221 Input media: . . . . . . . IBM 1401 program deck or
card images on tape
(see . 211 above).
· 222 Obligatory ordering: .. none - patching cards may
be included anywhere in
the program deck.
')'1
.... c)
.,
Size Limitations:
Phase 3 - Preparation of Item Tape or Card Deck.
The IBM 1401 machine instructions and data constants are then placed on an "item tape" or "item
card deck." This output contains the 1401 form and
location of each instruction and data constant.
· must be able to be run on
an IBM 1401 computer
with 4K fcwer storage
positions than the target
system.
Phase 4 - Conversion, Printout, and Punching
of the Series 200 Program.
The item tape (or card deck) is read. Each instruction is checked for apparent validity, whether
the instruction code concerned is or is not logically identical in the two systems, and whcther
the operand addresses are in the instruction area
of the original program.
__
OUTPUT
._--_.-
••l
--.
.31
Ob~"ct
Program
.311 Lang-clage name:
.313 Output media:
· Series 200 machine code.
· punched card deck.
If the instruction appears to be valid, and the two
.321 Standard inclusions: .. subroutines to simulate the
1401 instructions that
have no direct Series 200
equivalent.
systems have logically identical codes, and the
opcrands are not in the instruction arcas, thcn the
necessary direct substitutions are made; the converted instruction and its corresponding word mark
location are prepared for punching; and a printed
record is made of the instruction in both the
IBM 1401 and Honeywell format.
· 33
If, however, the instruction code is not valid (it
0),)
.u~
Conventions
-----
Documentation
Subject
Source program: }
Object program:
Storage map: ..
Restart point list:
Language errors:.
may be some 1401 RPQ feature), an NOP instruction is inserted in the punched version of thc converted program, and a note is made on the printed
listing.
Provision
analysis listing of both
source and object programs in storage order.
in three parts: original
ins tructions, cons tants ,
and simulation package.
none.
any unrecognized 1401
instruction codes are
noted on the analysis
listing.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
If the instruction code is one which has no direct
equivalent, but can be completely simulated
on the Honeywell system, a jump to a subroutine
entry is made. The "item mark trapping technique" is used, which only takes one punctuation
position and will, therefore, never interfere with
the addresses of other instructions. This jump
will lead to a routine which will, at object time,
simulate the effect of the original instruction.
If an operand address refers to the instruction
area, a jump is inserted to a binary to decimal
conversion before the operation and to a decimal
to binary conversion after the operation, thus
allowing the address of the result to bc the correct
equivalent of the 1401 coding.
Phase 1 - Loading the Program to be Converted.
In this phase the 1401 assembly-language program
deck is read by BRIDGE 1401. The data and instructions are stored in equivalent positions in the
Honeywell system, and a memory table defining all
loaded areas is constructed. At the completion of
the phase, therefore, a virtual copy of the original
running 1401 program is stored in the Series 200
processor.
Phase 2 - AnalysiS of the Program.
If a data constant appears as an item, it is moved,
unchanged, to the output.
An object program deck is punched or written on
tape.
Phase 5 - Condensation of the new Program Deck
(optional). This also provides an Assembly listing.
.42
Working from the memory table, the loaded 1401
program is examined to identify which parts of it
are instructions. (It is considered that all parts
7/66
A
Optional Mode:
. translation may be re"
started at Phase 3 after
manual insertions have
been made to the list of
instruction areas.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
uage
and absolute object program instructions, comments, and error indications. The assembler
does not create storage maps, but cross-reference listings can be obtained in a post-assembly
run. A directory of the programs in the symbolic file is printed. Any program in the
symbolic file can be listed and/or placed in
the machine-language output without being
reassembled.
. Easycoder Assemblers
A, B, C and D.
Description
Easycoder Assembler programs translate Easycoder source-language programs into Honeywell
Serics 200 machine-language programs and produce object programs on magnetic tape, punched
paper tape, punched cards, or mass storage units.
The programs produced by the C and D versions
are cxecuted under control of the Series 200 Operating System-Mod 1 (described in Section 510: 192)
The A and B versions of Easycoder produce programs in a self-loading format to be run independently in the Basic Programming System environment. (See Section 510: 191 for a description of
this environment.)
The assembler with correction facility is a threephase program. The first phase edits the input
cards and performs the updating function, using
an input master symbolic file if one is present
for the run. The next two phases perform the
normal allocation and resolution of references.
On the larger versions of Easytran, these two
phases are repeated as many times as necessary
to handle all of the symbolic tags in the program.
Thus, there is no limit on the number of such
tags.'
(A fifth Assembler program is provided for use
with Honeywell Series 200 systems: Assembler
J. This assembler is used exclusively under
control of the Operating System-Mod 2 and is
described in Section 510: 193.)
The need for two versions of the Easycoder translator (Easycoder A and B, and Easycoder C and D)
within the same operating system is caused by the
variable-length addressing scheme in the Series
200. The addressing mode choice within the Basic
Programming System is 2- or 3-character addressing. The Operating System-Mod 1 offers the
option of 3- or 4-character addressing.
The assembly system may also include a macro
processor to handle the macro-instruction facilities of the Easycoder language. Macro-routines
are stored in a symbolic file, in exactly the snme
format as symbolic object programs. They cnn
therefore be maintained using the standard assembier. Incorporation of macro-routines in a program requires a special pre-assembly run
against this file.
Many of the facilities of the Easycoder versions
that operate under control of the larger operating
systems are offered in the two basic versions
through the use of separate program passes.
Four major facilities are not offered with Easycoder A and B in any manner:
•
Bulk translating is not provided. The Easycoder assembler program must be reloaded
prior to each program assembled.
•
The use of literals is not permitted.
•
The symbol table must be wholly contained in
the available core storage. Symbols defined
after the table has reached its limit are rejected.
•
The operational speed of the assemblers varies
between 125 and 1,000 statements per minute,
depending upon the size of the object program,
the configuration of the assembling machine, and
the output options selected.
Segmentation control statements are not provided.
The larger Easycoder assemblers (C and D) maintain a master file (library) of symbolic programs.
Programs can be added to this file during the
assembly run; also, programs existing in this
file can be updated with symbolic corrections,
insertions, and deletions, again as part of a normal assembly run. Programs can be batched
\\'hen this combined updating/assembling function
is performed. (Easycoder assemblers A and B
allow the user to simulate the symbolic correction
facility through separate program passes).
7/66
Memory requirements for use of the various
versions of Easycoder are shown in Table 1.
A
· 13
Originator:.
. . . . . . Honeywell EDP Division.
.14
Maintainer:.
. .. Honeywell EDP Division.
· 15
Availability:
... See Table 1.
.2
INPUT
· 21
Language
.. Easycoder (see Section
510:171).
.. none .
· 212 Exemptions:
. punched cards, magnetic
· 221 Input media:
tape, or paper tape.
.222 Obligatory ordering: .. according to program
logic.
(Contd.)
.211 Name: ...
AUERBACH
'"
./
510:182.223
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: EASYCODER ASSEMBLERS
TABLE I: CHARACTEIUSTICS OF THE VARIOUS EASYCODER ASSEMBLERS
A~~il'mhll!l' V('~I'sion
Availabillty
Hl'quh·l~m(.'I\ts
Opt'I'ationai
Minimum
-
Eusy(:olit.H' A
l,asyc"der B
Easyco!ler C
Easycoder D
July HI!iO\
Apl'il JO!i:,
Octoher 1964
Octo her 1964
4K positiolls of
HK
12K positions of
16K pOSitions of
('01'(.' HtOl'ag't'.
('ard 01' papt.'1'
tape "va del' .
card
01'
papel'
tape.' punch.
Advanced Pl'o!!,"l'am-
mingo feahll'/..',
positions of
t'OI"(~ stOI':tl!,:c.
core storage.
eol'C ::;toragc.
magnetic tape,
punched carel 01'
paper tape I'cader.
curd l'cadct', printer,
:md :1 magnetic
tape units.
card rcadol', pl'intcl',
and 3 magnetic
tape units.
magnptic tape,
Advanced Programming feature.
Advanced P)'og-l'am-
addi tiona I magnetic
tape units can he
additional magnetic
tape units can he
used in place of
card J'cadcr and
printer to incrcas'c
card punch 01'
papor tape punch.
ming feature.
.
Advanced Pl'ogramminp; feature.
Opt.'l'athll\al H"'l\uil'('IlH.'nls E:-i1 1;ll1dt·t!
pl'inlol':
lo
ohtain liHlinJ..!,'!->.
:'~ maglwtie lapp
units: lo sinlll-
or
Data Itellls
used in place of
card reader and
printer to increase
assembly speed.
a magnetic
correction PI'Ocl'dul'eH of. .
expanded
assemblerS.
tape
units: to simulate macro
Iibt'ury and
correction procedures of
expanded
assemblers.
additional core
storage fol' expanded label
capacity.
additional core
storage for expanded label
capacity.
·11<: 400 labeled
items.
8K: 300 labeled
SK: 900 labeled
items.
additional 4K
incl;ements: 500
labeled items per
latc macro
lilll'nl'Y nnd
l\laximul11 Number
pl'inter: to
ohtain listings,
addi tiona I core
storage for l:u'gCl'
lahel tahle capacity incl'cases
assembly speed.
12K: 300 labeled
items.
items.
increment.
assemhly speed ..
additional core
storage for lal'g:et'
lahel tahle capacity increases
assembly speed.
No limit to tahle
size,
additional 4K
increments: 500
labeled items per
increment.
No limit to table.
size on magnetic
tape .
. 223 Obligatory grouping: .. (1) PROOram card.
(2) CLEAR cards (if any).
(3) Program; including
EXecute cards where
part of the program
is to be executed before loading is completed.
(4) END card.
.23
Size Limitations
· 231 Maximum number of
source statements: .. no limit othel' than the
capacity of one full
reel of tape.
.232 Maximum size of
source statements: . 80 characters.
.233 Maximum number of
data items:
See Table 1.
......
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name: .
.312 Language style:
.313 Output media:
· 32
· Series 200 machine
language.
· machine.
· punched cards, punched
paper tape, magnetic
tape, or mass storage.
Conventions
· 321 Standard inclusions: .. bootstrap and loader.
.33
Documentation
Source program:
Object program:
Storage map: ...
Restart point list:.
Language errors: .
·
·
·
·
·
listing.
listing.
none.
operating instructions.
indicated on listing.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
. 41
Phases and Passes
Phase I
•
The symbolic card (or card image) input is
scanned, checked for legality, and edited into
a form acceptable by Phase II.
o The mnemonic operation codes of the source
program statements are translated into singlecharacter machine-language operation codes.
•
All literal operands (if available in the version
of the assembler) are scanned, legality is
checked and partially resolved.
•
Corrections are merged with programs on the
input symbolic program file.
•
Programs not being assembled are
the output symbolic program tape.
Phase I produces listings for these
and/or produces machine-language
them.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
copied to
Optionally,
programs
output for
7/66
510:182.410
.41
HONEYWELL SERIES.200
Phases and Passes (Contd.)
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
Phase II
.51
Object Program Space: same as for hand machinelanguage coding.
· 52
Translation Speed:
Allocates memory, builds a symbol table in
memory, and writes the partially assembled
coding onto intermediate storage.
Card systems: ..•..• approximately 125 statements/minute.
Phase III
Magnetic tape
systems: . . . . . . . . . up to 550 statements/
minute (with listing) or
1,000 statements/
minute (without listing).
Uses the symbol table to resolve the operands
and writes the fully or partially assembled
coding back on the output symbolic program
tape.
· 42
. 421
.422
.423
. 424
. 425
· 43
Mass storage systems: ?
Optional Mode
Translate: . . . . . . • .
Translate and run: ...
Check only: . • . . • . . .
Patching: " . . . . • . .
Updating: . . . . . . . . .
yes.
yes.
no.
no .
yes.
Special Features
· 431 Alter to check only: .. no.
· 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . . . . . • no.
· 433 Short translate on
restricted program: . no.
. 44
Bulk Translating: . . . . yes, but only with Easycoder C and D.
· 45
Program Diagnostics
· 53
Optimizing Data: . . . . none .
.54
Object Program
Performance: . . . . . same as for hand machinelanguage coding .
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration: see Table 1.
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . . . . . see Table 1.
· 62
Target Computer: . . . . any Series 200 system with
a card reader or magnetic tape unit •
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
.451 Tracers: . . . . . . . . . . no,
. 452 Snapshots: . • . . . . . . . no.
.453 Dumps: • . . . . . . . . . . yes.
.46
7/66
Error
Check or
Interlock
Missing entries:
check
flagged on
listing •
flagged on
listing.
Duplicate names:
check
(interlock
optional)
check
Improper format:
check
Incomplete
entries:
check
Target computer
overflow:
no check.
Unsequenced
entries:
Translator Library: .• yes; programs on a symbolic program file can
be incorporated into
object programs and
specialized according
to a parameter list; in
the case of Easycoder
A and B, library routines can be added by
means of a separate
pass.
fA..
AUERBACH
Action
flagged on
listing.
flagged on
listing.
flagged on
listing.
510: 183. 100
.A "..,,"
/Itb'-
"UER8AC~
•
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
EASYTRAN
EDP
RUORTS
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: EASYTRAN
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
Description
Easytran Symbolic
Program Translator.
Easytran is a punched card or magnetic tape
oriented translation system that accepts as input
symbolic programs in IBM 1400 Series assembly
codes and produces as output equivalent Honeywell
Series 200 programs in the Easycoder assembly
language. A number of Easytran translator programs are provided. each with specialized characteristics and capabilities. as described below.
.121 Easytran 1401
This version of Easytran translates IBM 1401/1460
SPS or Autocoder source language to Series 200
Easycoder language. using an IBM 1401 system as
the translating computer. The minimum 1401
configuration required for Easytran 1401 operation
is:
o IBM 1401 processor with the Advanced Programming feature.
•
4000 character positions of core storage.
•
4 magnetic tape units.
• 1402 Card Read-Punch.
., 1403-2 Printer with 132 print positions.
There are three phases to the Easytran 1401
translation process. Phase I performs an input
edit and reference analysis. and also replaces the
1401 input-output coding with subroutines that
permit use of the input-output simultaneity of the
Series 200 systems. Phase II performs the
translation of instructions. Phase III performs
the output edit and produces an Easycoder A
source-language deck. a symbol cross-reference
listing. a diagnostic listing. a program listing.
and a header page with control card print-out.
An extension of Easytran B over Easytran 1401
permits mixing of IBM 1400 Series SPS and Autocoder source programs in the input stream. This
is accomplished by a special prepass that converts
all source language input to the Autocoder source
language. Easytran 1401 uses different versions
of the program when converting SPS or Autocoder
programs.
The Easycoder program produced by Easytran
includes the coding for input-output routines, but
any input-output macro statements must be entered
manually by the programmer. If input-output
macros are entered, the modified symbolic program
is processed with Honeywell's 1/2-inch Tape InputOutput B(M) package in a pre-/lssembly phase (known
as Library Processor B) to linIe the automatically
generated input-output coding with the manually
inserted macro statements. The output of this
phase is then assembled by the Easycoder A or B
program.
. 123 Easytran C
Easytran C is an extended version of Easytran B.
The following prinCipal difference can be noted:
o Easytran C produces Easycoder symbolic programs as output which are assembled under the
Easycoder Assembler C system and executed in
the Series 200 Operating System - Mod 1 environment. By contrast, programs translated by
Easytran 1401 and Easytran B are assembled
by Easycoder A or B and are executed in the
environment of the Basic Programming System.
III
Easytran C automatically translates IBM lOCS
and user macro calls into macro calls compatible
with Honeywell's 1/2-inch Tape and Terminal
I/O C packages. A separate pass is still required
to integrate the macro routines into the object
program.
III
Easytran C permits translations to be batched
for consecutive processing.
Once a program has been converted, any hand
iii Easytran C requires a minimum of 12. 288 charediting required to ensure that the intentions of the
acters of core storage for· its operation, as comoriginal 1401 programmer have been carried out
pared to the 8. 192-character requirement of
can be performed in the Easycoder source language.
Easytran B.
No return to the original SPS or Autocoder language
. 124 Easytran D
is required.
.122 Easytran B
Easytran B uses a Series 200 system as the translating computer rather than an IBM 1401. The
minimum Series 200 configuration is:
• Any Honeywell Series 200 processor with
8. 192 characters of core storage and the
Advanced Programming and editing instructions
•
Four 1/2-inch tape units with IBM Format
and Code Compatibility features.
•
Card reader and punch with hole-count checking
feature.
•
Printer with 132 print positions.
The newly-released Easytran D translator embodies
a number of features which make it noticeably
superior to previous versions of Easytran. It is a
comprehensive system that includes facilities to
translate, update, and assemble programs in one
continuous operation. The final output of the Easytran D system is an executable program which is
compatible with the control facilities of the Series
200 Operating System - Mod 1.
The most significant advantage of Easytran Dover
earlier Easytrans is the addition of the file update
features. After initial translation, this update program accepts "change director cards" that will
modify an individual symbolic line. a group of lines,
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:183.124
.124 Easytran D (Contd.)
•
an overlay. or an entire program. Thus. the symbolic
output code of the translator can be automatically
altered. virtually eliminating the clerical handtailoring formerly necessary to resolve any
residual problems which the translator could not
handle.
Another feature of Easytran D permits either
individual translation or bulk translation of IBM
Autocoder programs.
.2
· 21
.211
Finally. Easytran D handles 1401 absolute addresses in a convenient way. All] 401 actual
addresses are related to a series of symbolic
tags. If it becomes necessary to modify certain
actual addresses in the course of preparing the
symbolic program for final assembly. the modifications can casily be made by simply reassigning
the corresponding tags. In previous versions of
Easytran. 140] absolute addresses were replaced
with fixed values which could be modified only by
manual adjustments throughout the program.
.212
.22
.221
· 222
.223
The following minimum equipment configuration is
required for use of Easytran Symbolic Translator D:
• Any Series 200 processor with Advanced Programming and editing instructions.
•
· 23
.231
16.384 characters of memory.
•
Four 1/2-inch magnetic tape units.
•
Printer with 132 print positions.
.13
· 14
.15
· 232
• Card reader.
.125 Easytran J
· 234
Easytran J translates IBM 1410/7010 Autocoder
assembly language into Assembler J language. the
symbolic assembly language used with the Series
200 Operating System - Mod 2. (See Section
510:193 for a description of the Operating SystemMod 2 and its associated components.) Easytran J
automatically resolves Series 200 and 1410 dilferences in addressing. indexing. and internal character codes.
.3
· 31
. 311
.312
Easytran J has the same extended processing
facilities as the Easytran D translator that functions under control of the Operating System Mod 1. The File Update feature. called a "default
translator" in Easytran J. reduces the need for
hand tailoring of translator symbolic output to an
average of 1 per cent of the translated instructions.
(The versions of Easytran that lack the File Update
feature require hand tailoring of an average of 5
per cent of the translated instructions.)
.313
· 32
.33
The minimum hardware requirements for use of
Easytran J include:
Any Series 200 processor with 32.768 characters of core storage and the Optional Instruction
package.
7/66
Subject
Provision
Source program: .
listed on right-hand side
of List 1.
listed on left-hand side of
List 1.
none.
not applicable.
flagged on List 1.
indexed and arranged by
category on List 2.
Storage map: ..
Restart point list:
Language errors:
Diagnostics:. . . .
• Six 1/2-inch magnetic tape units equipped with
the IBM Format and Code Compatibility Features.
Cross-reference
table: . . . . . . .
Card reader.
input-output routines.
IBM 1410 Operating System
lOCS.
Documentation
Object program:
1
•
Conventions
.321 Standard inclusions:
.322 Compatible with: .
The first version of Easytran J will be released for
field test in the third quarter of 1966 together with
the initial offering of Series 200 Operating System - Mod 2.
•
Printer with 132 print positions.
• Console typewriter.
Originator: ..
Honeywell EDP.
Maintainer:.
Honeywell EDP.
Availability: .
now in operation except
for Easytran J. which
is due for release in the
third quarter of 1!J66.
INPUT
Language
IBM ]401/1460 SPS or
Name: ..
Autocoder and IBM ]4]0
SPS or Autocoder.
Exemptions: . . . . . . most 1400 Series inputoutput instructions are
handled by specialized
Series 200 subroutines.
Form
Input media:
punched cards or magnetic
tape.
Obligatory ordering:
as in original assembly.
Obligatory grouping:
special Easytran control
cards must precede main
program.
Size Limitations
Maximum number of
source statements:
10, 000 SPS or Autocoder
lines.
Maximum size of
source statements:
one SPS or Autocoder line.
Others Maximum number of
ORG statements: .. 99.
Maximum number of
Execute cards: .
39.
OUTPUT
Object Program
Language name:
Easycoder or Assembler J .
Language style:
Series 200 symbolic assembly
code. (Note that the Easytran output program must
be assembled in normal
fashion by one of the Honeywell assemblers before it
can be executed.)
punched cards or magnetic
Output media:
tape.
List 3.
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
'"
/
510: 183.400
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: EASYTRAN
.4
• 41
Easytran D provides the following additional program phases following the actual translation
process.
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
Phases and Passes
There are at least four phases in an Easytran conversion process, as described below. A halt occurs
at the end of the optional phase 0 for possible operator action; transitions between the other phases
are automatic.
File Update
The File Update phase allows the programmer to
initiate whole series of changes to the program
being converted by means of individual change
director cards. Input to File Update is the Easycoder or Assembler J symbolic program output
from Phase III, plus an input change deck with
director cards, and, if necessary, change director
cards. Changes can be made applicable to a program, to a segment, or to a line or several lines
of a program or segment. The primary output of
File Update is a card-image tape in a suitable
format for input to Library Processor C.
Phase () (SPS-to-Autocoder Prepass)
Phase 0 converts any SPS statements into symbolic
1401 Autocoder statements, so that the input to
Phase I is always Autocoder.
Phase I (Input Edit and Reference Analysis)
The input symbolic program, in Autocoder language,
is analyzed and converted to a fixed form. During
this processing, symbolic references to actual
locations established by EQU statements are replaced by absolute references, and symbolic addresses are substituted for absolute addresses
which reference the fixed input-output areas.
Library Processor C
Library Processor C inserts macro routines which
exist on a library symbolic program tape (SPT)
into source programs in response to macro instructions within the source program generated by the
Easytran D translator process. The output of
Library Processor C can then be merged with
previously processed programs to allow bulk
translating by the Easycoder C assembler.
A number of passes are made over the program in
order to analyze the operands of each instruction.
The result of this analysis is detailed information
on the form of each referenced entry, which is then
used to determine the specific function of each
instruction and operand in the program.
Comparable File Update and Library Processor
program phases will also be provided within the
Easytran J system.
Phase II (Translation)
utilizing the information produced by the reference
analysis, one of the following actions is taken for
each instruction of the input program:
(1)
Its operation code is converted to a onecharacter pseudo op code that represents a
Series 200 instruction;
(2)
In-line macro-coding is substituted for the
instruction;
(3)
The instruction is replaced by a direct call
to a subroutine; or
(4)
The instruction is deleted. (If the instruction
is referenced elsewhere in the program, it is
changed to an NOP instruction. )
.42
Basic
. 421
.422
.423
. 424
. 425
Translate: . . . . . .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching: . . . . . . . .
Updating: . . . . . . .
.43
Special Features
.431 Alter to check only: .
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate: . . . . . .
\
\.
(,.
yes
no
yes
no
no
Easytran
D and J
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
.433 Short translate on
unrestricted program: . . . . . . .
Phase III (Output Edit)
In Phase III, the proper Easycoder mnemonic
operation code is substituted for each one-character
pseudo op code provided during the second phase.
Phase III performs any adjustment of address
modifiers that may be required as a result of
insertions, deletions, and substitutions performed
during Phase II. In addition, the outputs of the
previous phases are combined to produce the
following:
Optional Modes
no.
multiple programs can be
translated in a single
batch.
.44
Bulk Translating:
.45
Program Diagnostics: none (i. e., no facility is
included for running
automatic traces or
providing automatic
snapshots during execution of the translated
program).
.46
Translator Library
(1)
An Easycoder or Assembler J symbolic
program.
(2)
A parallel listing of the Autocoder and Series
200 symbolic programs with diagnostic messages.
.461 Identity: ......
. 462 User restriction:
.463 Form -
Easytran library.
none.
(3)
An English-language diagnostic listing pointing
out any areas where "hand-tailoring" may need
to be done by the programmer.
magnetic tape.
sequential.
(4)
A cross-reference listing of all tags used in
the input program.
Storage medium: .
Organization: '.'
.464 Contents Routines: ..
Functions: .
(5)
A control card warning listing (Easytran
control card and carriage control card).
input-output routines.
macros which replace
certain 1401 and 1410
instructions.
Data descriptions: .. none.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:183.465
maximum potential of the
Series 200 processor;
overlapping is available
for punched card and
printer operations, and
optionally for magnetic
tape.
.465 LibrarianshipInsertion:. . . . .
normally by manufacturer;
can be performed by
installation.
Call procedure: . . . . set bit in selector table.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
· 51
Object Program Space
.511 Fixed overhead: ..
.512 Space required for
each input-output
file: . . . . . . . . .
.513 Approximate expansion of procedures:
.52
see Table I.
Optimizing Data: .
· 54
Object Program
Performance: .
TABLE I.
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . .
card and printer file areas
are included in Table I;
magnetic tape files
require one buffer area
per input file, and a
single output buffer.
4-tape, 4K IBM 1401
or 8K Honeywell
Series 200 system.
132-position printer.
Advanced Programming
feature.
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . . . . additional tape units
speed translation;
larger memories reduce
the probability of passes
being repeated due to
table overflows.
typically 1. 1 to 1 in body
of translation, plus
fixed overhead as listed
in Table I.
Translation Time: ... approximately 5 minutes
overhead, plus 1 minute
per 1, 000 characters
of input program size
(e. g., 13 minutes for an
8K 1401 program).
· 53
.6
none.
Easytran D environment
permits smoother, less
time-consuming translations with its minimal
hand editing requirement
and bulk translation
procedures.
internal processing runs
at about 80 per cent of
Easytran J environment
permits conversion of
IBM 1410/7010 programs.
FIXED STORAGE REQUIREMENTS FOR EASYTRAN OBJECT PROGRAMS
Core Storage Requirement in Characters
Name of Subroutine
Basic (A and B)
Easytran C
Easytran D
Commonly used constants and routines
(including dynamic op code table, read/
write channel select, branch on
indicator, halt, and seven -character
store B-address Register)
Subroutine common entry
Decimal to binary conversion
Binary to decimal conversion
Clear storage
Read, print, punch buffers
351
391
630
74
153
164
148
93
375
90
375
-
548
346
481
110
375
I/O subroutine entry
Card Read
Card Punch
Print
Carriage Control
37
185
102
253
346
101
189
92
253
348
100
304
275
883
348
1724
27
1330
18
371
282
1776
140
160
375
-
Buffered tape I/O routines
Move and suppress zeros
Move and insert zeros
Multiply and divide
-
-
Note: The subroutine core storage requirements for Easytran J have not been released
to date.
(Contd. )
7/66
A
AUERBACH
®
510:183.620
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: EASYTRAN
· G2
Target Computer
.7
ERRORS. CHECKS. AND ACTION
· (i21 Mininlluu configu-
ration: . . . . . . . .
cxecution of converted
1401/1460 programs
requires any Series 200
system with Advanced
Programming feature,
Editing instructions,
carcl reader and punch with
hole-count checking.
Error
execution of converted 1410
programs requires any
Scries 200 processor with
the Table Lookup instructions and a minimum of
32, 768 characters of core
storage.
printer.
magnetic tape units (must
have IBM compatibility
features).
mass storage units (with
Easytran J).
Missing entries:
check
Unsequenced
entries:
Duplicate names:
no check.
check
Improper format:
check
Incomplete entries: check
Target computer
overflow:
mconsistent program:
· (j22 Usable extra
facilities: ..
Check or
Interlock
.8
ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS: .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
Action
entry on diagnostic
list.
entry on diagnostic
list.
entry on diagnostic
list.
entry on diagnostic
list.
no check.
no check.
Bridge 1401
(see Section 510:181).
7/66
-
510: 191. 100
-
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
BASIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: BASIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
•. Honeywell Series 200
Basic Programming
System.
The Basic Programming System is a loosely integrated software system offered by Honeywell for
users of Series 200 computers with from 4K to 12K
characters of core storage. The numerous components of the package are oriented for use with
punched card, paper tape, and magnetic tape equipment. The operating environment contains minimal supervisory control. Operator intervention
between independent programs is generally required unless run-to-run linkage is supplied by users'
routines.
Table I lists the principal independent program
elements supplied with the Basic Programming
System. Also listed are comparable integrated
control routines that are provided in the larger
Honeywell Mod 1 and Mod 2 Operating Systems as
described in Sections 510:192 and 510:193, respectively. All program elements listed in Table I
can function within 4K characters of core storage
except the Macro Program, which requires at
least 8K characters.
• TABSIM: This "load and go" program is designed to simulate the report-writing functions
of punched card tabulating equipment. The input format is compatible with FARGO, the mM
1400 Series equivalent report generator. See
Paragraph 510: 151. 14 for additional information on T ABSIM.
• Report Generator: This program produces its
output in a form acceptable to the machineoriented assembler. Its function is to simulate
the report writing functions of tabulating equipment in a form equivalent to the mM 1401
offering. See Section 510: 151 for additional information.
•
COBOL B: This compact COBOL compiler provides the user of unit record equipment with a
means of transition that is more flexible than
the basic offerings of TABSIM. See Section
510:161 for a detailed description of COBOL B.
•
Bridge: This routine facilitates conversion of
.mM 1401 machine-language programs to Honeywell Series 200 machine-language programs.
See Section 510: 181 for a detailed description
of Bridge.
•
Easytran: This routine facilitates conversion
of mM 1401 assembly-language programs to
equivalent Honeywell Series 200 assemblylanguage programs. This technique permits
standardized program conversions that include
the incorporation of Honeywell's simultaneous
input-output capabilities, along with standardized assembly-language program documentation. See Section 510: 183 for a detailed description of Easytran.
The language translators of the Basic Programming System are listed below. These translators,
excluding the machine-oriented assembler, are
oriented toward users converting to Honeywell
Series 200 systems from either unit record (tab)
equipment or from mM 1400 Series computer
systems.
TABLE I: BASIC PROGRAMMING SYSTEM ELEMENTS AND
COMPARABLE OPERATING SYSTEM CONTROL ROUTINES
Basic Programming
System Elements
Function
Comparable Control
Routines in Larger
Operating Systems
Easycoder Phase IT
Translates intermediate language to fixed object code
Linkage Editor
Card Image Loading
Routine
Loads a program and initiates
execution
Job Control
Macro Program
Provides common input -output
operations requested by users'
programs
Input-Output Control
Update Routines
Library maintenance
Librarian
Search Routine
Finds a program for loading
Job Control
The Basic Programming
System user
Maintains overall system
control
Supervisor
!
7/66
A '"
AUERBACH
(Contd. )
510:191. 120
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
.12
Description (Contd.)
Easycoder: This is a machine-oriented assembler prog-ram that includes the capability to
process macro routines supplied both by the
manufacturer and the user. See Sections 510:
171 and 510: 182 for detailed descriptions of the
Easycoder lang-uag-e and translator, respectively.
· 1..,·,
.4
.41
RUNNING SUPERVISION
Simultaneous
Working: . . . . . . . throug-h Honeywell-supplied
input-output routines.
.42
Multiprogramming:
Availability
. "SCOPE" provides concurrent execution of up to 3
data transcription operations. See Parag-raph
510: 151. 15.
Entire Basic Prog-rammingSystem: ..
1965.
.43
Multi-sequencing: ... none.
· 14
Originator:
Honeywell EDP.
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action*
.15
Maintainer:
Honeywell EDP.
·2
PROGRAM LOADING
· 21
Source of Programs
Error
.211 Prog-rams from on-line
libraries: . . . . . . . none; the user can elect
to store program elemellts
as separate card deckS or
reels of paper tape or as
card images on magnetic
tape.
.212 Independentprograms: entered via punched cards,
paper tape, or magnetic
tape.
· 213 Data: . . . . . . . . . . . from any device under
control of I/O routines
(either Honeywell or usersupplied) located within
individual programs.
.214 Master routines:
Search and Loader routines
are loaded as independent
programs.
. 22
Library Subroutines:. can be incorporated with
macro program processing prior to assembly.
Loading Sequence: ..
sequence is determined by
the order in which programs are loaded; alternatively, the operator
can manually enter the 6character program name
and initiate a magnetic
tape search for the program to be loaded.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
. 311
Sequencing of prog-ram
for movement between
levels: . . . . . . . . . loading' of prog-ram
segments can occur
by calling the Loader.
· 312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . .
storag-e allocation is fixed
at program generation time.
· 32
Input-Output Units
· 321 Initial assignment:
.322 Alternation:
. 323 Reassignment:
specified in individual
programs.
halilrlled by I/O routines
located in individual programs.
provided by programmer
or operator.
Check or . Action
Interlock
Loadi.ng- input
error
check
Allocation.
impossible;
.none.
In-out
error-single:
check
error routine
retry.
In-out
error-persistent:
check
errqr halt.
Storage overflow:
none.
error halt.
Invalid instrnctions:
check
Program conflicts:
none.
Arithmetic
overflow
check
error halt.
Underflow:
check
error halt.
Invalid operation:
check
printed messag-e .
Improper
format:
check
printed messag-e.
Invalid
address:
check
printed message.
Reference to forbidden area:
none.
printed messag-e.
*No single operating system component is responsible
for overall system error checking. Most errors must
be caught either at assembly or load time.
.45
Restarts: . . • . . . . . . provided by prog-rammer.
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
.511 Tracing:
.512 Snapshots:
· none.
· dynamic memory dumps
are available by calling the
dump utility program.
. 52
Post Mortem:
· initiated by operator .
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
.61
Signals to Operator
.611 Decision required by
operator: . . . . .
.612 Action required by
operator: . . . . .
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
indicated by contents of address register at halt point.
indicated by contents of address register at halt point.
7/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510: 191. 613
.613 Reporting progress
of rlm: ....•.. programmer's responsibility;
practical if console typewriter is available.
characters of core storage
for the resident search and
load function.
.631 Inquiry: . . . . . . . none.
• 632 Change of normal
progress:
manual actions by operator.
· 82 System Overhead
.821 Loading time: •... limited by speed of
input device.
• 822 Reloading
frequency: •.... program search and load
routines can remain in
storage and can be called
by users' programs .
.83
.62
.63
Operator's
Decisions:
.•.. manual actions by operator.
Operator's Signals
.7
LOGGING:. . . ..
.8
PERFORMANCE
provided by programmer.
.81
System Requirements
. 811 Minimum
configuration: .. at least 4, 096 characters of
core storage, card reader,
card punch, printer, and
Advanced Programming
feature.
.812 Usable extra
up to 4 magnetic tape units
facilities: ...
and paper tape equipment.
. 813 Reserved 6!quipment: 80 characters of core stor ...
age for card loader; I
magnetic tape unit and 177
· 84
.85
Program Space
Available: ..•.
Program Loading
Time: ..
Program
Performance:
C-177, where C is the ·core
storage capacity in characters .
limited by speed of input
device.
the load function is not
required during object program execution, except when
calls for further programs
are made. No running overhead is therefore associated
with the system.
/
7/66
A '"
AUERBACH
510: 192. 100
A
SUNnuo
EDP
AUERBACH
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
OPERATING SYSTEM-MOD I
U'IJRTS
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OPERATING SYSTEM-MOD 1
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ...
. 12
. Honeywell Series 200
Operating System-Mod 1.
Description
Operating System-Mod 1 is supplied by Honeywell
for use with Series 200 computer systems that
have between 12K and 262K characters of core
storage. Systems that have less than 12K characters of core storage will use those facilities provided with the Basic Programming System (Section 510: 191). Systems that have more than 65K
characters of core storage and include the Optional Instruction Package (available only with
Models 1200, 2200, and 4200) can use Operating
System-Mod 2 (Section 510: 193).
Two versions of the Operating System-Mod 1 are
provided: Tape Resident and Mass Storage Resident. The Tape Resident Operating System-Mod
1 has been in use since the release of the original
Honeywell 200 system in 1964. This version was
formerly called PLUS. The Mass Storage Resident Operating System-Mod 1 was announced in
May 1966 for delivery in the fourth quarter of
1966.
.121 Operating System-Mod 1 (Tape Resident)
The Tape Resident Operating System requires use
of from three to six magnetic tape units. The
nucleus of the system is a resident loader/monitor
which contains provisions for automatic job sequencing, program library searching, program
loading, and overlay handling. No centralized
input-output routines are provided.
Operator-to-monitor communication is accomplished directly through the control panel or by
means of parameter cards which can be entered
by the operator directly into a standard communication area. The operator can thus call for the
execution of any program or any group of programs (job). Parameter cards can also be placed
into the standard input file to provide for automatic job sequencing.
A major feature in the program library search
functions of the Tape Resident Operating System
is the assignment of key characters to programs
and program segments as a means of grouping
programs for execution. These keys are known
as "visibilities"; each program or segment can
be assigned one or several of the 37 visibilities
recognized by Mod 1; each visibility is denoted
by a single character code: A-Z, 0-9, and *.
When operating in the visibility mode, the loader
is conditioned to recognize only programs which
it "sees"; i. e., programs which include a particular visibility as part of their own set. There are
many useful applications of this feature. For
example, in testing a system of interrelated programs, it is possible to maintain, on the same
tape, several alternative program blocks. Each
alternative is associated with a particular visibility key. Programs which are common to
several versions are made "visible" to several
visibilities and therefore need not be duplicated.
On the other hand, programs which are specific
to a given version, although bearing exactly the
same identification, can be placed on the same
tape and yet be recognized by the loader on the
basis of their unique visibility. LikeWise, the
visibility scheme can be used to link any set of
programs into a given job.
An interrupt control program provides an extension to the resident loader/monitor. Interrupt
control provides a limited concurrent processing
facility. The monitor/interrupt control combination requires a minimum of 3. 6K characters of
core storage.
The interrupt control system of Tape Resident
Operating System-Mod 1 permits SWitching of
processor control between one program with extensive processing requirements and one with
high peripheral device dependency. Through use
of the interrupt system, a background program
can be run in normal mode while a foreground
program is executed in interrupt mode. When a
peripheral data transfer is initiated in the foreground program, control is transferred to the
background program until the foreground program's data transfer ends. Upon data transfer
termination, an interrupt signal is issued to the
peripheral control unit involved and control is
returned to the foreground program.
Standardization of translator and compiler machine-language output is provided by the Tape
Resident Operating System. Thus, the outputs
from the various language processors can be
readily combined into a single executable job.
The following language processors are provided
to function under control of the Tape Resident
Operating System-Mod 1.
•
Easycoder Assemblers C and D (Sections
510: 171 and 510: 182).
•
FORTRAN Compilers D and H (Section 510: 163).
•
COBOL Compilers D and H (Sections 510: 161
and 510: 162).
•
Easytran D (Section 510: 183).
Input-output routines are entered into each object
program at generation time by the various language processors.
Tape Resident Operating System-Mod 1 also
includes a comprehensive library of utility routines to facilitate program maintenance and debugging, and to assist in general production tasks.
Utility functions available include: dynamic and
postmortem dump routines; a program correction routine; a standard peripheral conversion
package (which can perform up to three data
transcription operations concurrently); general-
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510: 192. 121
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
.121 Operating System-Mod 1 (Tape Resident) (Contd.)
tine prepares a mass storage volume for use
in the Mass Storage Resident Operating System
by checking for bad surface areas, formatting
tracks, and establishing a volume label and
directory. Sort routines and data edit routines are also provided for use with mass
storage devices.
ized tape, drum, and disc I/O handling routines;
a data file generator; and facilities for communication with the operator.
. 122 Operating System-Mod 1 (Mass Storage Resident)
The Mass Storage Resident (MSR) Operating
System-Mod 1 consists of integrated software
modules designed to assist the user in efficient
usage of his mass storage equipment. These
modules provide four major control functions:
•
•
Supervision: All functions of the Mass Storage
Resident (MSR) Operating System-Mod 1 are
performed under the control of a supervisor
program. Portions of this program are permanently resident in main memory, and the
resident portions are relocatable (except for
the fixed-location communications area).
Other portions of the supervisor are loaded
from mass storage as required. The supervisor performs the same tasks as the resident
loader, monitor, and interrupt control routines of the Tape Resident Operating System.
Data Management: All mass storage files are
controlled and accessed by a common set of
Data Management routines. The primary
functions provided by the routines include file
support and input-output control.
File support includes allocator, load, and unload routines. Theseroutines create, organize,
and reorganize data files, and also convert
these files from one storage medium to another.
The allocation routine reserves storage areas
described by the user, modifies a volume
directory as necessary, and formats and initializes the area as required. The load routine loads data into a previously allocated file,
establishes the sequence of items, and sets up
indexes as required by the file organization.
The unload routine unloads data from a mass
storage file, reorganizing the data so that
storage utilization and access time are improved
when the file is reloaded.
The input-output functions furnish the programmer with macro routines to access files that
are arranged in one of the three supported file
organizations: sequential, direct, or indexed
sequential.
•
Program Development: Program development
support includes routines for language translation, program file maintenance, and program
analysis. A specialized monitor routine controls the automatic sequencing of the various
steps in a program development job.
The Easycoder and FORTRAN language translators are comparable to the D-level versions
of the Tape Resident Operating System. The
COBOL compiler provided is comparable to
COBOL B in the Series 200 Basic Programming
System (described in Section 510: 161).
•
7/66
Service: The utilities provided with the MSR
Operating System-Mod 1 are generally equivalent in function to those provided with the Tape
Resident Operating System (see Section 510: 152,
Problem Oriented Facilities). The volume
preparation routine is of special interest to
users of mass storage equipment. This rou-
1964 (Tape Resident).
1966 (Mass Storage
Resident).
· 13
Availability:
· 14
Originator:.
. Honeywell EDP Division.
. Honeywell EDP Division.
· 15
Maintainer:.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
· 21
Source of Programs
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries: . . . . . . . . yes.
.212 Independent programs: may either be placed on a
run tape, in a standard
input file, or, in the
case of MSR, in a mass
storage device .
. 213 Data: . . . . . . . . . . . . may be input from any
device under control of
I/O routines located in
each individual program
or supplied by the MSR
Data Management routines, or input from
standard input file and
distributed on programs'
private files.
· 214 Master routines: . . . . the loader/monitor program searches the program file for a program,
clears and punctuates
memory, and loads and
starts the program.
.22
Library Subroutines: .. can be incorporated as
part of the loading process, or called by the
program during a run.
· 23
Loading Sequence: ... sequence can be determined externally,
through the sequence of
control cards, or
internally, through the
sequence of programmed
calls.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
.311 Segmenting of program: Operating System-Mod 1
accepts mUlti-segment
programs; segment
loading occurs upon
calls to the loader.
· 312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . . . . . storage allocation is performed at generation or
subprogram collection
time.
.32
Input-Output Units
.321 Initial assignments:
A
. specified by operator
through control cards.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
510: 192. 322
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OPERATING SYSTEM-MOD 1
.322 Alternate assignments: handled by I/O routines
located in each individual program (in the Tape
Resident version),. or by
the Data Management
function (in the Mass
Storage Resident version).
.323 Reassignment: . . . . . . own coding is required.
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous Working: own coding is required.
.42
Multiprogramming: ... limited to two main programs: one with high
processing requirements
and one with high peripheral device requirements.
.43
Multi-Sequencing: .•.. none.
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Loading input error:
programmed
check
error halt.
Allocation impossible:
In-out error
(single):
In-out error
(persistent):
Storage overflow:
Program conflicts:
Arithmetic overflow:
Invalid operation:
Improper format:
Invalid address:
Reference to
forbidden area:
.45
".
.
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic: . . . . . . . . • dynamic memory and tape
dumps are available
through calls to utility
programs.
. 52
Postmortem: . . . . . . . dumps can be initiated by
calls written into the
programmer's own coding
or originated by the operator from system-provided
utility programs .
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
.61
Signals to Operator
.611 Decision required by
operator: . . . • . . . . indicated by address
register contents at
halt point.
. 612 Action required by
operator: . . • . . . . . indicated by address
register contents at
halt point.
.613 Reporting progress
run: . . . . . . . . . . . . comments cards in input
file are listed.
.62
Operator's
Decisions: . . . . . . . . manual actions by operator.
.63
Operator's Signals
none.
programmed
check
reread
or rewrite.
programmed
check
none.
none.
none.
programmed
check
programmed
check
none.
error halt.
program is
rejected.
program is
rejected.
.631 Inquiry: . • . . . • . . . . none.
.632 Change of normal
progress: •..•.... manual actions by operator.
.7
LOGGING
.71
.72
Operator Signals: ..... not recorded.
.73
Run Progress: ..•... comments cards in input
file.
.74
Errors:
.75
Running Times: .•... not recorded •
none.
Restarts
.451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . . . . . own coding.
.452 Restarting process: . . own coding.
(
.5
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System ReqUirements
Operator Decisions: .. not recorded unless
console ·typewriter is
available.
. .. not recorded unless
console typewriter is
available.
Tape Resident
. 811 Minimum configuration: .••..• 12,288 core storage
positions.
card reader.
printer.
Advanced Programming
feature.
3 magnetic tape units.
Mass Storage Resident
12, 288 core storage
pOSitions.
card reader.
printer.
Advanced Programming
feature.
1 mass storage device.
.812 Usable extra facilities: .•...• 4 magnetic tape units.
paper tape equipment.
card punch.
additional mass storage
devices.
additional magnetic
tape units
paper tape equipment.
card punch.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
I.
510:192.813
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
.813 Reserved equipment:. . . . . ..
· 82
S~'stem
'rape Resident
Mass Storage Resident
1 tape unit and
1,400 characters of
oore storage (for a
resident loader/
monitor operating
in 3-charaeter
addressing mode, and
using a control panel
as message medium).
Memory requirements
increase to 2,600
characters for a
resident monitor in
4-oharacter addressing mode using a console
typewriter as message
medium. The Interrupt
Control program requires an additional
1,000 characters of
core storage.
1,500 characters of
core storage and 2.9
million characters of
a mass storage
device for system
residence.
Overhead
dent Operating System is
operational during object
program execution except when calls for
additional routines are
made or when interrupt
service is required.
Therefore, no running
overhead is associated
with the system. Any
transfer of control to
interrupt routines and
then to the other main
program in a two-program multiprogramming
mix requires 500 microseconds.
· 821 Loading time: . . .
. negligible.
· 822 Reloading frequency: . loader/monitor program
is always in core storage.
.83
Program Space Available
Tape Resident: . . . . . . C-1, 400 to C-3, 600,
where C is the core
storage capacity in
characters.
Mass Storage Resident: C-1, 500.
.84
Pl'ogram Loading
Time: . . . . . . . . . . . input device speed.
.85
Program Performance: neither the Tape Resident
nor Mass Storage Resi-
7/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
510: 193.100
A
STANDARD
EDP
AUERBACH
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
OPERATING SYSTEM - MOD 2
RlPORts
~
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OPERATING SYSTEM-MOD 2
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . • . . . . . Honeywell Series 200
Operating System - Mod 2.
. 12
Description
The Series 200 Mod 2 Operating System consists of
an integrated set of programs that provide facilities
for supervision of overall system operation, development of user programs, maintenance of both
user and Honeywell-supplied programs, job and
data control, and utility operations. Series 200
processors that can use Mod 2 include Models 1200,
2200, and 4200 that have Table Lookup instructions
and at least 49K characters of core storage.
All of the Mod 2 language processors generate
common-language relocatable program modules
that can be easily combined by the control routines
of the system. Unlike the Mod 1 (Tape Resident)
Operating System, Mod 2 assumes responsibility
for all input-output operations, both at the physical
and logical levels. Flexibility is prOVided for data
transfers to and from card, tape, mass storage,
and communications equipment.
The minimum hardware configuration required for
use of the Mod 2 Operating System - in addition to
the processor and core storage requirements already mentioned - includes five 1/2-inch magnetic
tape units (Type 204B) and a tape control equipped
with the IBM Format and Code Compatibility
features. A mass storage unit can be used as an
alternate device for two of the five required magnetic tape units. Other required peripherals include a card reader, a printer with 132 print
positions, and a console typewriter.
Release dates of the Operating System - Mod 2
components extend from the third quarter of 1966
(for the initial system) to the fourth quarter of
1967 (for the fully expanded system). Table I
lists the principal components of Mod 2 together
with their scheduled availability dates.
.121 Processing Programs
(
"'-
The processing programs controlled by the Mod 2
Operating System include source language translators, programs for conversion of IBM 1410/7010
Autocoder programs, service programs, and the
user's problem programs. The initial versions of
the language translators supplied with Mod 2 include the facilities provided by the highest level
of the Operating System - Mod 1 translators,
differing only in the fact that Mod 2 programs produce relocatable program-module output, rather
than fixed object-code output. Language facility
extensions, primarily in the area of mass storage
handling capabilities, will be provided approximately one year after initial Mod 2 deliveries.
The language translators available with Mod 2
include the following:
•
Assembler J: This is a new Series 200
symbolic assembly'system designed for
use exclusively with the Operating System Mod 2. The Assembler J language is a highlevel machine-oriented language that includes
statements to control program generation and
execution in a monitored, multiprogramming
environment. Five types of statements are
provided: (1) Imperative statements that are
directly translated into machine-language instructions; (2) Declarative statements that
define symbols and establish common and
peculiar data areas, data constants, and address constants; (3) Linkage Loader statements
that direct the independent Linkage Loader program to convert the relocatable Assembler J
output into absolute machine code; (4) Control
statements to direct the contents and form of
the card and print output of Assembler J and to
direct the address generation in all subprograms; and (5) Macro statements that enable
the programmer to use the library of macro
routines and to insert new macro routines into
the library. In all, more than 200 assemblylanguage statements are provided.
o
FORTRAN J: The FORTRAN J language is a
full implementation of ASA FORTRAN IV.
Features include TRACE debugging statements,
mixed-mode arithmetic statements, and the
acceptance of FORTRAN II I/O statements.
Section 510:163 describes the currently available Series 200 FORTRAN languages.
I'!I
COBOL J: COBOL J has the same basic language facilities as COBOL H (described in
Section 510: 162). The library copy facility
included with COBOL H becomes a function
of the centralized system maintenance control
program of Mod 2.
I'!I
Easytran J: As described in Section 510:183,
Easytran J is a conversion program that is designed to translate IBM 1410/7010 Autocoder
assembly language programs into Honeywell
Series 200 Assembler J assembly-language
programs. Easytran J will resolve, at the
assembly-language level, basic machine dissimilarities, such as in the areas of addreSSing,
indexing, and internal character codes. It is
estimated by Honeywell that only one percent
of the original IBM 1410/7010 Autocoder instructions will require hand editing following
the Easytran J conversion process. Converted
programs then become components of the Mod 2
Operating System. These programs are translated by Assembler J, processed by the Linkage
Loader, and executed under control of the
Resident Monitor.
In addition to the language translators, a number of
service routines are included among the processing
programs available with Mod 2. These include
Linkage' Loader J, System Maintenance J, Tape
Sort J, Mass Storage Sort J, and program testing
and media preparation services.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:193.121
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
TABLE I: RELEASE DATES FOR OPERATING SYSTEM - MOD 2 COMPONENTS
AVAILABILITY DATE
PROGRAM
Tape Resident Components
Language Processing
Assembler J
COBOL J
FORTRAN J
1410/7010 Easytran J
3rd qtr 66
3rd qtr 66
1st qtr 67
3rd qtr 66
Program Editing and Maintenance
System Maintenance J
I/O Control System J
3rd qtr 66
3rd qtr 66
Input-Output Control
Input-Output Editor A
3rd qtr 66
Operation Control
System Monitor J
3rd qtr 66
Data Transcription and Editing
Linkage Loader J
Tape Sort J
Utility J
3rd qtr 66
3rd qtr 66
3rd qtr 66
Language Processing (extended)
COBOL J
FORTRAN J
Easytran J
4th qtr 67
4th qtr 67
1st qtr 67
Input-Output and Operation Control
(extended)
1 st, 2nd, 3rd, and
4th qtr 67
1st and 3rd qtr 67
2nd qtr 67
I/O Control System J
System Monitor J
SCREEN J
Data Transcription and Editing
(extended)
4th qtr 67
4th qtr 67
Tape Sort J
Linkage Loader J
Mass Storage Resident Components
Basic Mass Storage Capability
Assembler J
COBOL J
System Maintenance J
System Monitor J
I/O Control System J
Linkage Loader J
Utility J
J
1 st qtr 67
}
Extended Mass Storage Capability
}
COBOL J
FORTRAN J
I/O Control System J
7/66
A
3rd qtr 67
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OPERATING SYSTEM - MOD 2
.121 Processing Programs (Contd.)
Linkage Loader J prepares absolute machinelanguage programs for execution by selecting and
combining relocatable program modules generated
by the source-language translators. Complete
programs may be built from any combination of
program modules.
System Maintenance J creates, edits, and maintains the Honeywell-supplied tape file containing
all elements of the Mod 2 Operating System required for a specific user's installation. These
elements are in the form of symbolic source-language modules. System Maintenance J also maintains the System Operating File containing all user
and Honeywell-supplied programs in absolute format. This tape or mass storage resident file can
also contain libraries of modules in relocatable
machine language and symbolic source language.
The file containing the output of the language processors is also handled by System Maintenance J.
Based on control card specifications supplied by
the user, System Maintenance J can create a new
System Operating File by adding program units in
a specified order. System Maintenance J can also
select a source module from a system file, produce a printed listing, and place it on another file
for later system input. The ability to selectively
update the various system files is also provided.
Tape Sort J is a program package that consists of
one routine in absolute format (called Sort Definition J) and several other program modules in relocatable format. Sort Definition J. as its name
implies, selects the relocatable sort/merge
modules required to create the user's particular
sorting program. The user can specify fixed or
variable-length records, the number and size of
key fields, and the presence or absence of userwritten modifications.
Mass Storage Sort J operates on fixed-length data
records residing on a mass storage device. Up to
ten sorting keys can be accommodated. Honeywell
has released no estimates on the performance of
Sort J to date.
.122 Control Programs
The control programs of the Mod 2 Operating System handle all interrupt servicing, input-output
operations, and communications with the operator
and other programs. The principal control programs are the Resident Monitor J, Transitional
Monitor J, and Input-Output File Controller J.
Resident Monitor J, the central control portion of
Mod 2, is permanently resident in approximately
9,400 characters of core storage. It is responsible
for complete control of the computer's internal
environment and associated peripheral devices.
The Resident Monitor will control the concurrent
execution of two main programs. The monitor
functions performed during such multiprogrammed
operation include detecting the beginning and end
of input-output operations, alternating the assignment of processor cycles, and maintaining the
integrity of one program while the other program
is active.
The Resident Monitor also maintains a communication area and input-output tables in core storage. The communication area contains an
510:193.122
information interface between user-written programs and components of the Mod 2 Operating
System. Using the input-output tables, the
Resident Monitor and the Transitional Monitor
work as a team to select and assign peripheral
equipment for each program.
The Transitional Monitor J is loaded when necessary
by the Resident Monitor to handle automatically the
transfer of control between programs within a job.
This program interprets the user-supplied system
control cards and indicates to the Resident Monitor
the functions specified. It then locates the program
segment to be loaded and returns control to the
appropriate portion of the Resident Monitor.
The Input-Output File Controller J performs all
data file access and file control functions. Part
of the I/O File Controller remains in core storage
with the Resident Monitor at all times and uses
approximately 10,500 characters of core storage.
In the initial version, the resident portion of the
I/O Controller will execute all input-output operations for card equipment, printers, console typewriter and magnetic tape units. Later versions
will include extensive facilities for the control of
mass storage devices and data communication
equipment.
The I/O File Controller J routines direct the
dynamic allocation of input-output channels and
control the simultaneity of internal computing and
I/O operations. They also allocate data buffers,
block and unblock tape records, check tape labels,
and detect input-output errors. When errors
cannot be automatically corrected, the I/O File
Controller furnishes the operator with a description of the error and directions for its correction.
Exit points are provided in the resident portion
of the I/O Controller to permit insertion of owncoding routines.
File access functions are requested by statements
in the user's symbolic source programs. In
assembly-language programs, file-description
statements and macro instructions are directed
to the attention of the I/O File Controller. When
processed by Assembler J, the macro instructions are translated into machine-language links
to the appropriate resident I/O routines. In
COBOL and Fortran programs, directions for the
I/O File Controller are implemented within the
syntax of the compiler language itself.
The I/O File Controller will provide the following
automatic data access methods:
o Sequential access: Physical or logical records
are stored or retrieved serially, either on
demand or on a queued basis.
\) Direct access: The programmer specifies an
actual physical address, the relative position
of the record in the file, or the address at
which a search for a key match is to begin.
o Partitioned access: In this method, sequential
information is interspersed with special records
containing keys and other data. It is suited
for efficient storage and retrieval of relatively
short strings of sequential records.
o Controlled sequential access: This access
method uses a multi-level indexing scheme
which retrieves physical or logical records
stored either in a logical sequence defined by
a key field or randomly by individual keys.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:193.130
· 122 Control Programs (Contd.)
· 32
· 13
Availability
See Table I for scheduled release dates. The contents of the initial release of Operating System Mod 2 are roughly equivalent to the facilities of
the IBM 1410/7010 Operating System. Later versions of Mod 2 will include multiprogramming control, extensive capabilities for the control of mass
storage and data communications devices, improved
facilities for converting from the Mod 1 to the
Mod 2 Operating System, and improved conversion
aids for IBM 1410/7010 users who are moving to a
Honeywell Series 200 system.
. 1-1
Originator: .
. 15
Maintainer:.
·
,
. programmer names
symbolic device; system
control cards assign
devices to the symbolic
names at execution time.
.322 Alternation: . . . . . . . prepared by system control statements; made
operational by direct
request of user's program.
· 323 Reassignment: . . . . . . effected by system control
cards if job is aborted
prematurely.
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous Working: controlled by the resident
portion of the I/O File
Controller.
.42
Multiprogramming: .. up to two main programs,
controlled by the Resident
Monitor.
. Honeywell EDP Division .
. Honeywell EDP Division.
PROGRAM LOADING
~
.21 Source Programs
.211 Programs for on-line
libraries: . . . . . . . . System Operating File
(SO F) contains modules in
absolute format, including
all programs of the Mod 2
Operating System. This
file can reside on magnetic
tape or on a mass storage device.
.212 Independent programs: loaded at execution time by
system control cards
from the Standard Input
Unit (SIll) which can be
a card reader or a magnetic tape unit.
.213 Data: . . . . . . . • . • . . as required by users'
programs.
.214 Master routines:
. System Operating File and
Master History File
(MHF) . The latter is a
backup of the SOF in
source-language module
form.
.22 Library Subroutines: . macro-routines can be
called from the SOF by
macro-instructions at
assembly time.
.23 Loading Sequence; ... determined by sequence of
system control cards .
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31 Storage
.311 Sequencing of program
for movement
between levels: . . . . provided through use of the
Transitional Monitor
if directed by system
control cards.
. 312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . • • • . storage is allocated in a
fixed fashion by the
Resident Monitor prior
to program load; overlay
areas are also set aside
at that tim e.
7/66
Input-Output Units
.321 Initial assignment:.
Communications access: The Mod 2 Operating
System automatically queues input and output
messages sent to and received from remote
terminals. Dependent programs treat the
queues like data on sequential peripheral
devices.
.43
Multi-Sequencing: ... no provisions .
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
Check or
Interlock
Loading input error:
check
coded message on
printer.
Allocation
impossible:
check
Transitional Monitor message.
check
interrupt.
check
check
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
check
check
check
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
check
interrupt.
In-out error single:
In-out error persistent:
Storage overflow:
Invalid instructions:
Arithmetic
overflow:
Invalid operation:
Improper format:
Invalid address:
Reference to forbidden area of
core memory:
.45
Restarts: . . . . .
·5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
· 511 Tracing:.
.512 Snapshots:
.52
.6
.61
· none.
· provided through Storage
Print J Routine.
· Storage Print J is executed
in respons e to us er s '
control cards .
OPERATOR CONTROL
Signals to Operator
Post Mortem:
.611 Decision required
by operator: . . . .
A
· Resident Monitor's checkpoint routine writes
checkpoint program
status records when
directed; a system control statement directs
the restart routine to
begin at a specific checkpoint.
· Transitional Monitor J and
I/O File Controller J.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
®
/
510:193.612
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OPERATING SYSTEM - MOD 2
· 612 Action required
by operator: ..
.61:1 Reporting progress
of run: .•.•..••.• Resident Monitor J.
.813 Reserved equipment: . approximately the first
19,900 characters of
core storage (reserved
for Resident Monitor and
File Controller).
· 62
Operator's Decisions:. through typewriter console.
.82
.63
Operator's Signals
.821 Loading time: . . .
• . Transitional Monitor J and
I/O File Controller.
. 6:11 Inquiry: . . . . . . . . . . through typewriter console.
· !i32 Change of normal
progress: .
· • indicated by coded messages
on typewriter.
.7
LOGGING: .
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
. as incorporated in user's
program.
. dependent upon speed of
input unit used .
.822 Reloading frequency: . Resident Monitor need he
loaded only once; Transitional Monitor is loaded
upon completion of each
dependent program.
.83
.811 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . . 49, 192 characters of core
storage. Optional Instruction Package.
5 1/2-inch Tape 204B magnetic tape units* with
IBM Format and Code
Compatibility features.
1 card reader.
I printer with 132 print
positions.
1 console typewriter.
.812 Usable extra
facilities: ..•.
· • all (as incorporated in
program).
System Overhead
.84
.85
Program Space
Available: . . . .
Program Loading
Time: . . . • . . . .
Program Performance: . . . • .
. . the core storage that remains in excess of the
9,400 characters of
storage reserved for the
Resident Monitor control
routines and the 10,500
characters reserved for
the resident portion of the
File Controller.
. depends upon the speed
of the input device used.
.. no performance times have
been made available by
Honeywell to date.
I
\
"
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
510:201. 001
&
SI"''''
AEDP
AUEReAC~
-
•
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
REPIIRTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
The overall performance of Honeywell Series 200 systems naturally varies widely,
depending upon the user's choice of central processor model and peripheral equipment. Therefore, the performance of the Series 200 line on the AUE;RBACH Standard EDP Reports benchmark measures of system performance has been analyzed separately for representative
configurations using each of the processor models. For performance curves, summary worksheets, and analyses of the results, please turn to the System Performance sections of the
subreports on the models of interest:
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
120 . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ...
1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . .
4200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . .
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
Section
511:201
512:201
513:201
514:201
516:201
518:201
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510:211. 101
A
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
STANDARD
~DP,
IEPIIRTS
AUERBACH
~
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Model
-
H-120
120-P
121
121
122
123
214-1,2
U4
H-200
201-P
201
201
201
201
H-1200
1201-P
1201
1201
1201
1201
H-2200
2201-P
2201
2201
2201
2201
*
Unit
Logic Cabinet
.
(houses six drawers)
Logic Cabinet
(houses four drawers)
Power Unit
Central Processor
(2K-16K)
Central Processor
(20K-32K)
Printer (H-120 only)
Card Reader
(H-120 only)
Card Reader/Punch
Control for Models
122,123,214-1 and -2
(one drawer)
Power Unit
Central Processor
(4K-16K)
Central Processor
(20K-32K)
Central Processor
(40 K-49 K)
Central Processor
(52K-64K)
Depth,
inches
57
30
42
620
39
30
42
450
36
57
30
30
42
42
980
395
57
30
42
470
*
*
76
42
30
30
42
42
790
480
2.0
1.2
5,320
3,400
44
30
42
550
75
2.2
6,390
852
9.0
-
-
Height,
inches
-
Weight,
pounds'
36
42
30
30
42
42
1,000
450
84
30
42
675
84
30
42
750
84
30
42
825
Power Unit
Central Processor
(16K-32K)
Central Processor
(49K-65K)
Central Processor
(81K-98K)
Central Processor
(114K-131K)
36
84
30
30
42
42
1,000
675
84
30
42
750
84
30
42
825
84
30
42
900
Power Unit
Central Processor
(16K-32K)
Central Processor
(49K-65K)
Central Processor
(81K-98K)
Central Processor
(114K-131K)
72
72
30
40
42
68
1,300
1,125
72
40
68
1,200
72
40
68
1,275
72
40
68
1,350
Power,
KvA
BTU
per hr.
Width,
inches
-
-
7.2
8,883
4,072
*
*
*
*
*
8.4
*
*
*
*
9.2
*
*
*
*
5,568
10,990
5,444
6,715
8,361
10,007
10,240
5,965
6,891
7,847
,/
8,803
10,787
7,356
8,282
9,238
10,194
Power is obtained from Power Unit in processor cabinet.
(Contd.)
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
510:211.102
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Model
H-2200
(Contd.)
2201
2201
2201
2201
1100
Unit
Central
(165K)
Central
(196K)
Central
(229K)
Central
(262K)
Width,
inches
Depth,
inches
Weight,
pounds
Power,.
KVA
*
*
*
*
11,150
*
3,642
2.8
7,300
Processor
114
40
68
1,425
Processor
114
40
68
1,500
Processor
,
Processor
114
40
68
1,575
114
40
68
1,650
30
40
68
600
Scientific Unit
BTU
per hr.
Height,
inches
12,106
13,062
14,118
204A-1,2,3 Magnetic Tape Unit
(3/4-inch tape)
203A-1
Control Unit for
204A-1,2,3 (one drawer)
27
28
69
1,100
-
-
-
75
*
204B-1,3
27
28
61
900
2.1
5,100
27
28
61
900
1.7
4,100
-
-
-
75
*
1,460
27
28
69
2.8
7,300
-
-
-
*
1,460
27
28
69
1,100
2.8
7,300
-
-
-
75
*
1,044
27
28
69
900
2.1
5,100
-
-
-
75
*
1,769
27
28
69
1,100
2.8
7,300
-
-
-
*
1,769
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-9 (two drawers)
27
28
69
2.8
7,300
-
-
-
*
1,044
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-10 (two drawers)
27
28
69
1,100
2.8
7,300
-
-
-
75
*
1,044
27
28
61
900
1.08
2,800
-
-
-
75
*
20
28
61
700
1. 68
204B-2,4
203B-1
204B-5
203B-2
204B-6
203B-3
204B-7
203B-4
204B-8
204B-4
204B-9
203B-3
204B-10
203B-3
204B-12
204B-5
204B-11
*
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Magnetic Tape Un:t
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-1, 2,3, 4
(two drawers)
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-5 (two drawer,;)
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-6 (two drawers)
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-7 (two drawers)
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-8 (two drawers)
Magnetic Tape Unit
(1/2-inch tape)
Control Unit for
204B-12 (one drawer)
Electronic Unit for
204B-12
1,100
75
75
1,100
75
962
960
4,580
Power is obtained from Power Unit in processor cabinet.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510:211.103
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
Model
Width,
inches,
Unit
;
Depth,
inches
Height,
inches
Weight,
pounds
Power,
KVA
BTU
per hr.
,:
205
Magnetic Tape Switching
Unit (1-4 switches)
27
28
61
450
0.2
209
209
Paper Tape Reader
Control Unit
(one drawer)
Paper Tape Punch
Control Unit
(one drawer)
24
22
61
385
75
0.65
2:,080
' 282
24
22
61
380 "
75
0.55
1,785
293
-
550
75
2.2
210
210
-
-
-
-
-
-
,*
*
214-1,2
208-1,2
Punched Card, Units
Control Unit for
214-1,2 (one drawer)
44
220-1,2,3
Console
39
30
42
350
0.75
85
30
42
900
75
2.7
790
75
2.0
520
75
1.,2
525
75
0.7
1,300
75
1.2
222-1,2,3,4 Printer
222
Control Unit for
222-1,2,3,4 (one drawer)
222-5
Printer
222-5
Control Unit
(one d;rawer)
-
-
76
-
30
-
-
30
-
42
-
42
-
Card Reader
Control Unit
(one drawer)
Card Reader/Punch
Control Unit for
224-1,2 (one drawer)
Card Reader/Punch
Control for 227 Reader
(one drawer)
Control for 227 Punch
(one drawer)
42
233-2
Control Unit for
MICR Sorter/Reader
(one drawer)
-
-
-
251
252
253
250
Mass Memory File
Mass Memory File
Mass Memory File
Mass Storage Control Unit
(one drawer)
30
30
30
24
24
50
42
42
42
270
270
Random Access Drum
Control Unit (one drawer)
68
281
Single-Channel Communication Control, all
models (one drawer)
Communication Adapter,
all models (one drawer)
Multi-Channel Communication Control, all
models (one drawer)
223
223
224-1,2
208-1,2
227
207
208
285
280
303
311
312
Display station
Display station
Display Station
-
43
-
58
-
-
30
-
24
-
30
-
-
30
-
42
-
49
-
45
-
-
42
-
300
450
1,000
75
i.2
2.5
10.0
1,250
60
1.1
*
*
*
75
14
14
22
22
16
* Power IS
*
*
75
11
*
75
-
11
*
75
-
11
*
*
*
-
11
*
6/66
A '"
AUERBACH
6,390
480
950
6,830
520
5,320
520
3,415
480
1,700
485
3,500
562
562
496
5,460
8,500
13,590
680
2,~32
910
1,400
1,400
75
*
*
?
?
?
'?
?
?
?
?
?
obtamed from Power Umt m processor cabmet.
NOTE: Additional information on H-200 cabinetry is presented in Section 510:061, Console.
General ReqUirements
Temperature: ..••• .- 68°F to-78°F (20°C to 26°C) Dry Bulb.
Relative humidity: ••• 40% to 60%.
Power: ..••••...•. 120/208-volt, 60-cycle, 3-phase.
700
1,400,
510:221. 101
~
STANDARD
EDP
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PRICE DATA
REPDRTS
AUERBACH
•
PRICE DATA
In November 1965, Honeywell announced a major revision in its pricing policy for
the Series 200 equipment in a move designed to encourage either immediate purchase or longterm lease contracts. The essential elements of the new policy are summarized in Paragraph
.7 of the Honeywell Series 200 Introduction, Section 510:011.
The several columns of price data presented below include the short-term monthly
rental prices and the corresponding five-year lease plan prices, illustrating the savings to be
gained by renting on the five-year plan. Two columns of purchase price figures are also shown,
illustrating the savings to be gained by purchasing the equipment immediately rather than at
some time after the first year of installation.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
CENTRAL
PROCESSORS
Name
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
(I-Year
Term)
Monthly
Rental
(5-Year
Term)
Monthly
Maintenance
$
$
$
Purchase
(Immediate)
$
Purchase
(Mter 1
Year)
$
Hone~ell
120 Central Processor
characters of memory
characters of memory
characters of memory
characters of memory
characters of memory
characters of memory
characters of memory
characters of memory
characters of memory
121-1
121-2
121-3
121-4
121-5
121-6
121-7
121-8
121-9
2, 048
4, 096
8, 192
12, 288
16,384
20,480
24, 576
28,672
32,768
1011
1013
1014
1015
1016
Optional Features
Advanced Programming
Edit Instruction
8- Bit Code Handling Instruction
I/O Adapter (non-simultaneous)
I/O Adapter (simultaneous)
880
1,000
1,270
1,520
1,780
1,980
2, 190
2,390
2,600
795
910
1, 140
1,375
1,605
1,790
1,975
2, 160
2,345
86
93
105
118
130
140
150
160
170
32,900
37,700
47,800
58,200
68,750
78,370
86,470
94,570
102,670
38,700
44,325
55,575
66,825
78,075
87,075
96,075
105,075
114,075
75
50
25
155
310
75
50
25
140
280
6
4
2
15
30
2,880
1,900
960
5,740
11,500
3,375
2,250
1,125
6,750
13,500
1,360
1,615
1,870
2, 130
2,380
2,640
2,895
3,150
3,460
3,765
4,075
4,380
1,225
1,460
1,690
1,920
2, 150
2,380
2,615
2,845
3, 120
3,400
3,680
3,955
106
119
131
144
156
169
181
194
209
224
239
254
50,700
60.250
70,000
81,500
91, 000
102,000
112,000
122,000
134,000
149,000
161,500
174,000
59,625
70,875
82, 125
93,375
104,625
115, 875
127,125
138,375
151,875
165,375
166,350
178,910
100
90
155
50
25
100
90
140
50
25
8
7
12
4
2
3,800
3,400
5,750
1,900
950
4,500
4,050
6,750
2,250
I, 125
Hone~en
201-2-1
201-2-2
201-2-3
201-2-4
201-2-5
201-2-6
201-2-7
201-2-8
201-2-9
201-2-10
201-2-11
201-2-12
200 Central Processor
(includes Multiply-Divide and
Program Interrupt)
4, 096 characters of memory
8, 192 characters of memory
12, 288 characters of memory
16,384 characters of memory
20, 480 characters of memory
24, 576 characters of memory
28,672 characters of memory
32, 768 characters of memory
40,960 characters of memory
49,152 characters of memory
57, 344 characters of memory
65,,536 characters of memory
01x
013
015
016
017
Optional Features
Advanced Programming
Editing Instructions
Eight Additional I/O Trunks
Auxiliary Read/Write Channel
Stacker Select
\,
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
510:221. 102
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
CENTRAL
PROCESSORS
(Cont'd. )
Name
1201-1
1201-2
1201-3
1201-4
1201-5
1201-6
1201-7
1201-8
Hone~eIl 1200 Central Processor
(Includes Multiply-Divide,. Program Interrupt, and all optional
features for H-200).
16,384 characters of memory
32, 768 characters of memory
49,152 characters of memory
65,536 characters of memory
81,920 characters of memory
98, 304 characters of memory
114,688 characters of memory
131,072 characters of memory
1114
1100
0191
Optional Features
Storage Protection
Scientific Unit
Optional Instruction Package
2201-1
2201-2
2201-3
2201-4
2201-5
2201-6
2201-7
2201-8
2201-9
2201-10
2201-11
2201-12
Hone~ell 2200 Central Processor
(includes Multiply-Divide)
16,384 characters of memory
32, 768 characters of memory
49, 152 characters of memory
65,536 characters of memory
81,920 characters of memory
98, 304 characters of memory
11.4,688 characters of memory
131, 072 characters of memory
163,840 characters of memory
196,608 characters. of memory
229, 376 characters of memory
262,144 characters of memory
1117
1100
0191
Option'll Features
Additional 4 Read/Write Channels
and 16 I/O Trunks
Storage Protect
Scientifi c Unit
Optional Instruction Package
4201-1
4201-2
4201-3
4201-4
4201-5
4201-6
4201-7
4201-8
4201-9
Honeyy,rell 4200 Central Processor
65,536 characters of memory
98, 304 characters of memory
131,072 characters of memory
196,608 characters of memory
262, 144 characters of memory
327,680 characters of memory
393,216 characters of memory
458,752 characters of memory
524,288 characters of memory
1115
1101
1116
1118
Monthly
Rental
(I-Year
Term)
Monthly
Rental
(5-Year
Term)
$
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchase
(Immediate)
$
Purchase
(After 1
Year)
$
<
2,665
3,485
4,205
4.870
5,330
5,740
6,100
6,460
2,405
3, 145
3,795
4,395
4,810
5, 180
5,505
5,830
196
236
271
304
326
346
369
386
100,000
131,600
162,400
192,400
210,600
226,800
241,000
255, 150
117,000
153,000
184,500
213,750
234,000
252,000
267.750
283,500
50
310
50
50
280
50
4
24
4
1. 900
11,500
1,900
2.250
13,500
2,250
3,640
4,665
5,590
6,460
7,280
7,995
8,510
9,020
9,995
10,765
11,275
11,785
3,285
4,210
5,040
5,830
6,570
7,215
7,680
8,140
9,020
9,715
10,175
10,640
284
334
379
422
462
497
527
552
599
637
662
687
135,800
174,050
210,950
243, .800
281,200
308,900
336, 150
356,400
395,000
425,300
445,500
465,750
159,750
204,750
245,250
283,500
319;500
351,000
373,500
396,000;
438,750
472,500
495, 000
517,500
100
100
8
3,850
4,500
50
310
50
50
280
50
4
24
4
1,900
11,500
1,900
2,250
13,500
2.250
10,080
11,040
12,000
13,920
15,840
17,760
19,680
21,600
23,520
490
540
590
680
770
860
950
1,040
1,130
472,500
517,500
562,500
652,500
742,500
832,500
922,500
1,012,500
1,102,500
496,130
543.380
590,630
685, 130
779,630
874, 130
968,630
1,063, 130.
I, 157.630'
510
480
40
22,500
23,630
510
155
480
140
40
12
22,500
6,750
23,630
7,090
10,660
11,670
12,690
14,720
16',750
18,780
20,810.
22,840
24,870
Optiomil Features
Scientific. Unit
Additional 8 Read/Write Channels
and 32 I/O Trunks
Storage Protect
Hone~ell 8200 Central Processor
(see Model 8200 subreport,
page 518:221. 101)
(Contd.)
6/66
A
.,
AUERBACH
PRICE DATA
510:221. 103
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
INTERNAL
STORAGE
250
251
I
Mass Memor:t S:tstem
Mass Memory Control
Mass Memory File
(15 million chars)
Mass Memory File
(60 million chars)
Mass Memory File
(300 million chars)
Random Access Drum Storage
(all include control unit)
2.6 million characters
5.2 million characters
7. 5 million characters
Track Protection
Monthly
Rental
(5-Year
Term)
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
(Immediate)
Purchase
(Mter 1
Year)
$
$
$
$
$
14,625
14,725
335
300
670
600
163
29,250
29,400
1,155
1,045
281
50,625
50,775
2,280
2,058
556
100, 125
100,400
950
1,605
2,260
25
855
1,450
2,040
25
138
233
328
4
41,625
70,425
99,225
1. 125
41,725
70,525
99,500
1, 135
207
208
060
061
062
Punched Card and Printer
Card Reader-Card Punch (includes Early Card Read)
Card Reader Control (for 227)
Card Punch Control (for 227)
Direct Transcription (optional)
Hole Count Checking (optional)
Punch Feed Read (optional)
560
245
215
50
100
80
560
220
195
50
100
80
120
24
21
5
10
8
30,215
10,800
9,450
2,250
4,500
3,600
30,215
10,900
9,500
2,280
4,550
3,650
223
043
044
Card Reader and Control
51-Column Read (optional)
Direct Transcription (optional)
310
40
25
280
40
25
74
4
3
13,500
1,800
1,125
13,575
1,830
1, 140
214-1
214-2
Card Punch; 100-400 CPM
Card Reader/Punch; 100-400 CPM
310
360
280
325
74
87
13,500
15,750
13,575
15,850
224-1
224-2
Card Punch; 262 CPM
Card Punch; 354 CPM
310
425
310
425
34
41
19,900
21,050
19,900
21,050
208-1
208-2
Punch Control for 224 and 214-1
Punch Control and Punch Feed
Read feature for 224 and 214-2
Reject Stacker (optional)
155
140
15
6,750
6,875
230
20
210
20
22
1
10, 175
1, 100
10,225
1,100
Card Reader; 400 CPM (Honeywell 120 only)
205
185
50
9,000
9,100
280
255
34
12,375
12,450
230
210
28
10, 125
10,225
820
870
925
1,305
665
740
785
835
1,180
600
198
211
223
316
161
36,000
38,250
40,500
57,375
29,250
36,100
38,350
40,750
57,600
29,350
510
465
124
22,500
22,700
65
65
16
2,925
2,975
130
25
115
25
12
3
5,625
1. 125
5,685
1. 140
50
155
50
140
12
15
2,250
6,750
2,280
6,800
252
253
270-1
270-2
270-3
075
INPUTOUTPUT
Name
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
(I-Year
Term)
227
065
123
209
210
Paper Tape Reader (includes
control unit)
Paper Tape Punch (includes
control unit)
222-1
222-2
222-3
222-4
222-5
Printer (650 LPM; 96 positions)
Printer (650 LPM; 108 positions)
Printer (650 LPM; 120 positions)
Printer (950 LPM; 120 positions)
Printer (450 LPM; 120 positions)
(All above printers include
control units. )
122
Printer (450 LPM; 120 positions)Honeywell 120 only
032
034
035
1034
206A
Extension of print positions from
120 to 132 for 222-3 and 222-4
Printers (optional)
Numeric Print for 222-1, 222-2,
and 222-3 Printers (optional)
Numeric Print for 222-4 (optional)
Extension of print positions from
120 to 132 for 222-5 and 122
Printers (optional)
Control for 822-3 Printer
33
"
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
510:221. 104
HONEYWELL SERIES 200
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Cont'rt)
No.
204A-l
204A-2
204A-3
203A-l
203A-2
203A-3
204B-l
204B-2
204B-:l
204B-4
204B-5
204B-7
204B-8
204B-9
204B-11
204B-12
203B-l
203B-2
203B-4
203B-5
203B-6
103
050
051
057
1055
212
212-1
213-3
213-4
071
Monthly
Rental
(I-Year
Term)
Name
Magnetic Tape Units (3/4-inch)
31.760 characters per second
63. 520 characters per second
88,800 characters per second
Tape control for up to four
204A-l units
Tape control for up to four
204A-2 units
Tape control for up to four
204A-3 units
Magnetic Tape Units (1/2-inch)
19,980 charlsec - primary unit
19,980 char/sec - secondary
unit
44; 400 char/sec - primary unit
44,400 char/sec - secondary
unit
66.600 char/sec
28,800 char/sec
64,000 char/sec
fJ6, 000 char/sec
13,300 char/sec - primary unit
13,300 char/sec - secondary unit
Tape Control for up to eight 204B-1
and 204B-2, or 204B-3 and
204B-4 units
Tape Control for up to eight 204B-5
units
Tape Control for up to eight 204B-6
or 204B-8 units
Tape Control for up to four 204B-ll
and 204B-12 units
Tape Control for up to eight 204B-9
units
Tape Control for up to four 204B-ll
and 204B-12 units (includes one
204B-ll unit) - Honeywell 120
only)
IBM 729/7330 format (gap length
and EOF recognition) for 203B-l,
-2, - 3, and -4 Tape Controls
(optional)
IBM code compatibility (BCD) for
203B-1, -2, -3, and -4 Tape
Control (optional)
IBM (7-track) compatibility for
203B-5 Tape Control (optional)
IBM (7 -track) compatibility for
103 Tape Control (optional)
On-Line Adapters
On- Line Adapter (for direct connection of Series 200 and H-800
or H-1S00 Central Processors)
On-Line Adapter (for direct
connection of any two Series
200 Central Processors)
Clocks
Interval Timer (1 second)
Time of Day Clock
Interval Selector for 213-3
(optional)
Monthly
Rental
(5-Year
Term)
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
(Immediate)
Purchase
(After 1
Year)
$
$
$
$
$
450
900
900
450
900
900
100
155
155
20,250
43,200
43,200
20.250,
43.200
43,200
280
255
28
12,375
12,450
280
255
28
12,375
12,450
410
370
40
18,000
18, 100
360
325
74
14,800
15,750
310
515
280
460
63
105
12,700
21,150
13.500
22,500
460
720
410
615
820
280
230
415
650
370
555
740
255
210
95
147
84
126
168
58
48
19,035
28,350
16,920
24,300
32,400
12,375
10,125
20,250
31,500
18,000
27,000
36,000
12,475
10,225
435
395
42
17,220
19,125
435
395
42
17,220
19,125
435
395
42
17,220
19,125
310
280
30
12, 150
13,500
435
395
42
17,220
19. 125
460
415
63
19,050
20,250
50
50
5
2, ,250
2, 280
50
50
5
2,250
2.280
50
50
5
2,250
2,280
50
50
5
1,900
2.250
515
460
50
22.5()0
22,600
410
370
40
18.000
18. 100
80
205
SO
185
8
20
3,600
9,000
3,650
9,050
50
50
5
2,250
2,280
(Contd.)
A
6/66
AUERBACH
®
"/
,I' -
510:221. 105
PRICE DATA
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Cont'd)
Name
No.
Monthly
Rental
(I-Year
Term)
Monthly
Rental
(5-Year
Term)
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
(Immediate)
Purchase
(After 1
Year)
$
$
$
$
$
286-1
286-2
286-3
Communication Controls
155
Single-Channel Communication
to 230
Control (including adapter)
215
Multi -Channel Control (2-3 lines)
Multi-Channel Control (4-15 lines)
330
410
Multi-Channel Control (16-63 lines)
140
to 210
195
295
370
22
to 34
32
48
60
6,750
to 10, 125
9,450
14,400
18,000
6,800
to 10,225
9,550
14,500
18, 100
084-1
086
087
Reverse Channel Option
Parity Check
Long Check
25
50
50
25
50
50
4
7
7
1. 125
2,250
2,250
1,140
2,280
2,280
285
Communication Control Adapters
(one per line)
30
to 100
30
to 100
5
to 15
400
360
39
17,550
17,700
155
245
340
430
140
220
305
390
15
24
33
42
6,750
10,800
14,850
18,900
6,800
10, 900
14,950
19,000
75
75
8
3,375
3,425
205
310
185
280
20
30
9,000
13,500
9,050
13,575
155
140
32
6,750
6,800
65
65
15
2,925
2,975
180
60
85
165
60
85
37
14
19
7,875
2,700
3,825
7,925
2,725
3,950
70
70
15
3, 150
3,180
260
230
53
11,250
11,350
088-2
Buffer Option for 288-1 or 288-2
Control Unit
Extended Operations Option
70
30
70
30
15
7
3,150
1. 350
3, 180
1,375
303
311
312
Display
Display
Display
Display
77
57
62
72
53
58
20
16
18
2,500
2,900
I, 900
2,650
3,075
2,015
322
323
Universal Control Unit
Universal Control Unit
231
267
216
250
60
60
8,600
10,400
9, 120
11,025
331
332
Communication Module
Communication Module
88
116
82
106
10
12
3,720
5,150
3,945
5,335
341
342
343
Expansion Module
Expansion Module
Expansion Module
72
113
26
68
106
24
10
15
5
2,700
4,300
900
2,865
4,500
955
351
352
Message-Editing Module
Multi-Message Transactions
Module (no extra cost)
6
5
-
250
265
353
353A
355
357
Printer Control Module
Printer Control Module
Polling Control Module
KSR Control Module
57
26
16
57
53
24
15
53
8
3
2
1,950
950
530
2,020
2,070
1,010
555
2, 145
281
233-2
205-1
205-2
205-3
205-4
215-1
220-1
220-2
288-1
289-2
289-3
289-4
289-5
289-7
289-8
088-1
MICR Control Unit
Control Unit (for Burroughs
Sorter/Reader)
Switching Units
Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
Magnetic Tape Switching Unit
MagnetiC Tape Switching Unit
Communication Switching Unit
(used with 285-1, 2 adapters)
Consoles
Program Control
Hardware Control
Data Station
Central Control Unit
Page Printer (10 CPS) and
Keyboard
Page Printer (40 CPS) and
Keyboard
Paper Tape Reader (120 CPS)
Paper Tape Punch (120 CPS)
Card Reader (120 CPS) - requires
option 088-1
Optical Bar Code Reader (50 CPS) requires option 088-1
Stations
Station
Station
Station
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
9
to
1. 350
4,500
1,375
to
4,600
6/66
~,..c>
r
\1
1
1
J!
HONEYWEll 120
Honeywell EDP Division
(
c
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
HONEYWEll 120
Honeywell EOP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
511:011.100
A.
AUERBACH
STANOARD
EDP
HONEYWELL 120
REPORTS
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The Honeywell 120 Processor is a small-scale business-oriented processor that can
be connected to any of the Honeywell Series 200 peripheral units, can use any of the Honeywell
Series 200 programming languages, and can execute most programs originally written for an
IBM 1401. The 120 Processor is restricted by having an unusual set of input-output channels
which include built-in controllers for certain specific peripheral units. Therefore, it is likely
that thesc specific units will be used in most Honeywell 120 systems in order to minimize
equipment costs. The preferred set consists of the 400-card-per-minute card reader and thc
100-card-per-minute card punch, which are housed in a single cabinet and called the Honcywell
214 Card Reader/Punch; the 450-line-per-minute Honeywell 122 Printer; and the 13,3:l3-characterper-second 204B-11 and 204B-12 Magnetic Tape Units.
The Honeywell 120 Processor can contain between 2,048 and 32,768 characters of core
storagc, with a cycle time of 3 microseconds per character.
Standard features of the Honeywell 120 Processor include: Program Interrupt, two
read-write channels, three input-output trunkS, and integrated controls.
Optional features are: Advanced Programming, Edit Instruction, 8-Bit Code Handling
Instruction,. Control Unit Adapter, and Control Unit Adapter with Read/Write Channel.
Nonavailable features are: multiply-divide, floating-point, table look-up facilities,
and the Storage Protect feature.
The rental for typical Honeywell 120 systems ranges between approximately $2,000 and
$6,000 per month. Deliveries began in March 1966.
This report concentrates upon the characteristics and the performance of the Honeywell
120 in particular. All the general characteristics of the Honeywell Series 200 hardware and software are described in Computer System Report 510: Honeywell Series 200 - General.
The Systeni Configuration section which follows shows thc Honeywcll 120 in the following
standard System Configurations:
I:
II:
III:
Typical Card System
4-Tape Business System
6-Tape Business System
These configurations were prepared according to the rules in the Users' Guide, pagc
4:030.120, and any significant deviations from the standard specifications are listed.
Section 511:051 provides detailed central processor timings for the Honeywell 120.
The input-output channel capabilities of the Honeywell 120, and the demands upon the
processor during input-output operations, are described in Section 511:111.
The software that can be used with any Series 200 computer depends upon its core storage capacity and the number and type of peripheral devices. Several versions of the Easycoder
Assembler and COBOL Compiler will be made available. These languages, and numerous othcr
support routines for the Honeywell 120, are described in Sections 510:151 through 510:193.
Thcoverall performance of any Honeywell Series 200 system is heavily dependent npon
the processor model used. A full System Performance analysis of standardi7.ed configurations
utilizing the Honeywell 120 Processor is provided in Section 511:201.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
-..&.
511:031. 001
SI .... "
/AEDP
-
HONEYWELL 120
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
AUERBAC~
R(PORTS
~
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The Honeywell 120 Processor differs from all the other Series 200 Processors in
that it includes special input-qutput controllers for certain specific peripheral units: one Model
122 Printer, one Model 214 Card Reader/Punch, and up to four Model 204B-ll/12 Magnetic
Tape Units. If the optional Simultaneous or Non-Simultaneous I/O Adapteris added, any of the
available Series 200 peripheral units can be used in a Honeywell 120 system .. These peripheral
units are described in detail In the main Series 200 Computer System Report, and their trunk
requirements are summarized in the main System Configuration section, page 510:031.100 .
. 1.
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION I
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .. . . . . . . . card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is slower.
Multiply-Divide not available .
. 6 index registers instead of 1.
Equilmient
Rental*
121-3 Processor and Console
with 8,192 characters of
Core Storage.
$1,270
I/O Adapter (Simultaneous) t
222-4 Printer and Control:
950 lines/min (120 print
positions) **
310
1,305
223 Card Reader:
800 cards/min**
310
214-1 Card Punch:
100-400 cards/min
310
Optional Features Included: . . . . . • • . . • . . . • . . . . Advanced Programming
Edit Instruction
TOTAL RENTAL:.
*
75
50
$3,630
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The same
configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $3,285 per month.
** The basic Honeywe11120 system provides slower card reading and printing speeds. The basic
120 system, with the 450-lpm Model 122 Printer and the 400-cpm reading speed of the
Model 214-2 Card Reader/Punch, rents for $2,265 per month in Standard Configuration 1.
t
This feature provides an additional read-write channel for appreciably better performance
on the Standard File Processing Problems.
(Contd. )
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
511:031.200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION II
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . card reader is 20% slower.
ability to overlap printing and
one input-output operation with
internal processing is standard.
Optional Features Included:
Equipment
Rental*
121-3 Processor and Console
with 8,192 characters of
Core Storage
$1,270
214-2 Card Reader/Punch:
Reads: 400 cards/min
Punches: 100-400 cards/min
360
103 Non-Simultaneous Tape Control
(includes a 204B-11 Tape Unit)
204B-12 Magnetic Tape Units (3):
13,300 char/sec**
460
122 Printer:
450 lines/min (120 print
positions)
510
690
. . . . . • . . . . . Edit Instruction
Advanced Programming t
TOTAL RENTAL:
50
75
$3,415
*
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same equipment with a five-year rental agreement leases for $3,100 per month.
**
IBM 729 and 7330 Magnetic Tape (7-track) compatibility can be added at an extra cost of
$50 per month.
t
This optional feature, which permits indexing, indirect addressing, etc., is considered
well worth its price in all Honeywell 120 configurations.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 120
511:031. 300
.3
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION
m
Deviations from Standard Configuration: •. . • . . ..
card reader is 20% slower.
console typewriter input is included.
Multiply-Divide is not available.
Equipment
Rental*
121-5 Processor and Console with
16,384 characters of Core Storage
$1,780
. I/O Adapter (Non-Simultaneous)
155
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Unit (6):
28,800 char/sec (800 CPI)
435
220-1 Console (includes Teleprinter)
205
214-2 Card Reader/Punch:
Reads: 400 cards/min
Punches: 100-400 cards/min
360
122 Printer:
450 lines/min (120 print positions)
510
Optional Features Included: . . . . . • • . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Instruction
Advanced Programming
TOTAL RENTAL:
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same equipment with a five-year rental agreement leases for $5,460 per month.
6/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
2,460
50
75
$6,030
-&
511:051.100
"......
/AEDP
AUER9AC~
-
HONEYWELL 120
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
IfPBRTS
~
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..••.
.12
Description
Central Processor Models
121-1 through 121-9
The Model 121 Central Processor performs logical, addition, and subtraction operations in either
decimal or binary modes. (Honeywell provides
subroutines to perform decimal multiplication and
division operations.) The Central Processor
contains the following six basic functional units:
•
The functional, names of the control memory's
registers are:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Main memory.
• Control memory.
(8)
• Control unit.
e Arithmetic unit.
(9)
e Input-output traffic control.
• Integrated peripheral control.
Main memory is a magnetic core storage unit that
is modularly expandable from 2,048 to 32,768
alphanumeric characters. Cycle time is three
microseconds per one-character access, as described in Section 510:041. In Honeywell 120 systems that are equipped with the Advanced Programming optional feature, the first 24 locations
locations in main memory are used as six 4character index registers, and therefore cannot
be used as working storage.
Each character position consists of six data bits,
one parity bit, and two punctuation bits. The
punctuation bits can be used to indicate a word
mark, an item mark, or a record mark, which
define the length of a data field or instruction, an
item, or a record, respectively. An "item"
consists of a group of consecutive data fields.
(The IBM 1400 series computers utilize only one
punctuation bit - the "word mark" bit - and each
record mark occupies an entire character position.
The two punctuation bits used in Series 200 will
decrease data storage" requirements and provide
increased flexibility in data movement operations.
The optional Extended Move instruction, for
example, can be terminated by a word mark, an
item mark, or a record mark, as specified by the
programmer. )
The control memory is a magnetic core storage
unit that provides thirteen additional control registers for general usage by the central processor.
A 14th register is used with the Advanced Programming optional feature. The number of bit
positions in each register varies from 11 to 15, depending on the number of bits required to accommodate the maximum address size of the main
core memory unit. For example, eleven-bit
registers are sufficient to address 2,048 memory
locations, and fifteen-bit registers are required
to address 32,768 memory locations.
(10)
(11)
(13)
(14)
A-Address Register
B-Address Register
Sequence Register
Read/Write Channell - Current
Location Counter
Read/Write Channel 2 - Current
Location Counter
Read/Write Channel 3 - Current
Location Counter
Read/Write Channel 1 - Starting
Location Counter
Read/Write Channel 2 - Starting
Location Counter
Read/Write Channel 3 - Starting
Location Counter
Work Register 1
Work Register 2
External Interrupt Register
Change Sequence Register (optional).
The control unit controls the sequential selection,
interpretation, and execution of all stored program
instructions and checks for correct (odd) parity
whenever a character is moved from one location
to another. It also provides for communication
with the operator's Control Panel described in
Section 510:061.
The arithmetic unit executes all arithmetic and
logical operations. It consists of an adder that
can perform both decimal and binary arithmetic
and two one-character operand storage registers.
The Honeywell 120 is basically a two-address,
add-to-storage system. All operations are performed serially by character and terminated when
specific punctuation bit configurations are sensed.
This means that operand sizes are fully variable
and are limited only by the amount of core storage
available to hold them.
The input-output traffic control directs the timesharing of accesses to the main memory by the
various peripheral devices and the Central Processor. Up to three input-output operations can
occur simultaneously with internal processing.
The basic Model 120 is equipped with integrated
peripheral controls for a 450-line-per-minute
printer, a 400-card-per-minute card reader, and
a card punch that processes from 100 to 400 cards
per minute. Also available is the Type 103
Magnetic Tape Control Unit which can be connected
directly to the Model 120 peripheral interface
and which accepts four 13, 300-character-persecond magnetic tape units. The basic 120 processor can accept up to two standard Series 200
peripheral controls instead of the Type 103 control.
Either of two optional features (Feature 1015 or
1016) allows the connection of up to five standard
Series 200 peripheral controls in addition to those
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 120
511 :051. 120
.12
Description (Contd.)
and control indicators are automatically stored
and the contents of the sequence register and the
IR are exchanged. This action results in a transfer of control to the instructions indicated by the
previous contents of the IR. When the RNM
instruction is executed, all the pertinent address
registers, indicators, etc., are automatically
restored to their normal condition (i. e., their
status prior to the interrupt), and control reverts
to the address within the sequence register.
already mentioned. The exact number of standard
controls which can be added to the Model 120
varies according to the I/O trunk and address requirements of the controls.
The degree of peripheral simultaneity achieved by
any Series 200 processor depends upon the number
of read/write channels with which it is equipped.
The Model 120 processor provides as standard
equipment three read/write channels, any two of
which can be active at one time. Simultaneous use
of the third channel is available by means of
Feature 1016.
All peripheral devices can use any non-reserved
core storage areas of appropriate size as inputoutput areas.
The processor is well suited to general data manipulation, but editing, indexing, indirect addressing,
and full-record data movement capabilities are all
extra-cost options, as described below. (The
Advanced Programming option provides so much
more computing power and programming convenience that it would seem well worth its price of
$75 per month in virtually every Honeywell 120
installation.) Binary addition and subtraction,
logical AND, exclusive OR, and masking instructions are standard. The optional Move and Translate instruction uses a 64-character translation
table to translate any number of consecutive characters from one 6-bit code to another. Handling of
8-bit codes is another optional feature. Multiplydivide hardware is not available in the Honeywell 120 .
Instruction length is variable from one to nine characters. Arithmetic and data movement instructions
are most commonly seven characters long. Through
careful placement of data, instructions can sometimes be "chained" so that a one-character instruc
tion does the work of a seven-character one,
resulting in savings in both storage space and execution time. Chaining is possible only when a
series of operations is to be performed upon items
of data stored in consecutive locations, so that the
A- and B-Address Registers do not need to be reloaded before each instruction is executed.
The Honeywell 120 uses a pure binary addressing
system. In the 3-character mode, each address
portion within an instruction normally consists of
three characters, or 18 data bits. Fifteen bits
are used to specify an address between 0 and 32,767,
and the remaining three bits can specify address
modification - either indirect addressing or indexing by one of the six index registers. Both
indexing and indirect addressing are part of the
optional Advanced Programming feature. A special
instruction enables the Central Processor to switch
between the three-character addressing mode and a
special two-character mode. Use of two-character
addresses reduces both storage space and execution
time but has two significant disadvantages: only the
4,096 character positions within a single core
module can be addressed, and neither indexing nor
indirect addressing can be used.
Program interrupt capabilities are provided by the
Interrupt Register and a single character instruction
called Resume Normal Mode (RNM). The Interrupt
Register (IR) is under programmer control; i. e. ,
any particular memory address is loaded into the
IR. When the Central Processor receives a demand from an external device, pertinent arithmetic
6/66
Typical instruction execution times (using the threecharacter addressing mode) are 54 microseconds
for a 5-character move, 69 microseconds for a
5-digit decimal add, and 57 microseconds for a
5-character compare. These instruction times
are reduced by 6 microseconds when two-character
addresses are used. Indexing or indirect addressing requires an additional 9 microseconds per
modified address.
Optional Features
Advanced Programming: Makes six 3-character
registers in core storage available as index registers which can index any 3-character instruction
address; allows indirect addressing; permits the
loading of data into the control registers; permits
the transfer of complete records of data within
core storage by a single instruction; allows bisequence operations through the use of a consequence register; provides instructions for translating
6-bit codes (MAT), zero and adding or subtracting
(ZA and ZS), branching on character equal (BCE) ,
an extended form of the branch on character
condition (BCC) , a Read Reverse instruction for
204B Magnetic Tapes, and the Change Address
Mode instruction (for systems of 4,096 characters
or less).
Editing Instructions: All editing capabilities are
optional in the Honeywell 120. The capabilities
available are those of the basic and Expanded Print
Edit of the IBM 1401.
Type 103 Magnetic Tape Control Unit: Allows the
use of one Model 204B-ll master tape unit and
up to three 204B-12 slave tape units.
Magnetic Tape Compatibility feature: Allows the
Honeywell Model 120 Central Processor to read
and write tape using industry-compatible BCD
code. This feature can be installed on the Type
103 Magnetic Tape Control Unit.
Series 200 Control Unit Adapter: Allows the connection of up to five standard Series 200 peripheral
controls in addition to those available with the
basic Model 120.
Series 200 Control Unit Adapter with Read/Write
Channel: Provides unrestricted and simultaneous
use of a third read/write channel.
Eight-Bit Code Handling Instruction: Permits
automatic translation of 8-bit codes to and from .
6-bit codes through the use of translation tables in
core storage. Where an B-bit code (or any code
of up to 12 bits) is involved, two storage positions
are used to hold each character; the punctuation
bits are not used for code representations.
Instruction Compatibility with the IBM 1401
Please see the detailed comparison of instruction
lists in the Instruction List section, page 510:121.100.
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
'"
511:051. 140
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . March 1966 .
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
. 21
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
.211 Fixed point Add- subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.212 Floating point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.213 Boolean AND:
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
1 to N char.
subroutine
subroutine
decimal or
binary
decimal
decimal
Provision
Radix
Size
binary
1 to N char.
binary
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
subroutine.
subroutine.
subroutine.
automatic
none.
automatic
Size
Provision
(branch on high, low, equal, unequal, or zero
balance.)
automatic
1 to N char.
none.
automatic
1 to N char.
automatic
1 to N char.
.214 Comparison Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating
sequence:
o through 9,
then
A through Z, with
special symbols
interspersed.
.215 Code translation Provision: . . . . . . automatic with optional features (using
code table constructed by programmer) .
From: . . . . . . . . . any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
To: • . . • . . . . . . . any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
Size: . . . . . . . . . . 1 to N characters.
.216 Radix conversion: . none.
.217 Edit format Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert $, CR-*:
Float $:
Protection:
.218 Table look-up:
.219 Others Substitute:
Provision
Comment
optional feature
expand but
not contract.
optional
none
optional
optional
optional
optional
optional
none.
Size
1 to N char.
automatic
performs
binary
masking
Change Addressing Mode:
automatic
shift between
2- and 3character
addresses.
Branch on Sense
Switches:
automa.tic
16 possible
settings.
1 char.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
511:051.220
.22
HONEYWELL 120
.2372 Names: . . . . . . . . . indexing (with optional
Advanced Programming
feature).
· 2373 Indexing rule: . . . . . addition (modulo core
storage capacity).
.2374 Index specification: .. Address Type Indicator first 3 bits of 18-bit operand address.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . . . 6.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . . . . . all 3-character addresses.
.2377 Cumulative indexing: . . . . . . . . . . . none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . . . . . none .
. 238 Indirect addressing: .. with optional Advanced
Programming feature .
.2381 Recursive: . . . .
· yes.
· 2382 Designation:
· Address Type Indicator first 3 bits of operand
address.
.2383 Control: . . . . . .
· direct address has no indicator bit.
.2384 Indexing with indirect addressing: . yes.
.239 Stepping: . . . . . .. . none.
Special Cases of Operands
.221 Negative numbers:
.. absolute value, with B
zone bit in units position.
.222 Zero: ... : . . . . . . . . positive, negative, and
unsigned zeros and blanks
give same results in
decimal arithmetic but
are unequal in comparisons.
· 223 Operand size
determination: ..•.. word mark, item mark, or
record mark bits in high
or low order digit position. (Some instructions
imply one-character
operands).
.23
Instruction Formats
. 231 Instruction structure: . variable; 1 to 10 characters.
· 232 Instruction layout:
OP A or I
Part:
Size (char):
1
B
V lor C 1 V2 or C2 C 3
2 or 3 2 or 3
1
1
1
An instruction may consist of:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
OP only
OP, VI
OP,:A or I
OP, A or I, VI
OP, A or I, B
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
OP, A or I, B, VI
OP, A, B, VI' V2
OP, A or I, C1
OP, A or I, C1 , C2
OP, A or I, CIt C2,
C3·
.24
.233 Instruction parts Name
Purpose
OP: . . . . . . . . . . . operation code.
A: . . . . . . . . • . . . address of an operand or
field in core storage.
I: . . . . . . . . .. . location of next instruction
if a branch occurs.
B: . . . . . • . . .. . address of an operand or
field in core storage.
V 1 or C1 : . . . . . . . modifier for an operation
code, control field for an
I/o instruction, or
partial address in a translate instruction.
V 2 or C2 : . . . . . . . partial address in a translate instruction or control
field for an I/O instruction.
C3: • . . . . . . . . . . control field for an I/O
instruction.
.234 Basic address
structure: . • . . . . . . 2 + O.
. 235 LiteralsArithmetic: . . . . . • . none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . . . . . . . yes; single character.
Incrementing
modifiers: . . . . . . none.
Masking: . . . . . . . . yes; single character mask.
. 236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
type: . . . . . . . . . . core.
Minimum size: . . . . 1 character.
Maximum size: . . . . total capacity.
Volume accessible: . total capacity.
.237 Address indexing · 2371 Number of methods: . 1.
6/66
Special Processor
Storage: . . . . . ..
. 13 registers (14 optionally)
in magnetic core control
memory, as described on
page 511:051.100.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing
.311 Number of sequence
control facilities: ... 1.
.312 Arrangement: . . . . . . programmer can exchange
the contents of the sequence register and the
change sequence register
by use of Change Sequence
Mode instruction.
.313 Precedence rule: . . . . programmer indicates
register to be used.
.314 Special sub-sequence
counters: . . . . . . . . none.
.315 Sequence control step
size: • . • . . • . . . . . 1 character.
.316 Accessibility to
routines: . . . . . . . . yes; can be loaded and
stored by instructions.
· 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: . . . . . . . . no.
.32
Look-Ahead: . . . . . . . none .
· 33
Interruption
.331 Possible causes In-out units: . . . . . . ready to transfer one unit
of data (character or
record) .
Storage access: . . . . cannot initiate interrupts.
Processor errors: .. cannot initiate interrupts .
. 332 Control by routine: ... yes.
.333 Operator control: . . . . operator can initiate I/o
interrupt from console.
.334 Interruption conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . execution of current instruction is completed.
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
®
/
511:051.335
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
. 335 Interruption process Registers saved: ... contents of sequence register and interrupt register
are automatically interchanged; address register
and indicator settings are
automatically saved and
restored.
Destination:
. fixed location (contents of
Interrupt Register) .
. 34 Multiprogramming: .. none.
. 35
Multisequencing: . . . . none.
•4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
All execution times listed here are based on use of
the 3-character addressing modes; most instructions are 6 microseconds shorter in the 2character addressing mode.
o = operand length in decimal digits.
C = operand length in characters.
. 41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point:
Add-subtract Decimal: . . . . . . . 24 + 90.
Binary: . . . . . . . . 24 + 9C.
Multiply: . . . . . . . . 3,100 (using subroutine,
for 5-digit operands) .
Divide: ....•.•••• 3,700 (using subroutine,
for 5-digit operands) .
. 412 Floating point (performed by subroutines) Add-subtract: . . . . . 1,950.
Multiply: . . . . . . . . 4,478.
Divide: . . . . . . . • . . 7,710.
. 413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . . . . 9 per modified address.
Indirect addressing: . 9 per stage.
Re-complementing: . 60 •
. 414 ControlCompare: . . . • . . . . 27 + 60.
Branch: . • • • . . . . . 18.
.415 Counter control: . . . . none .
. 416 Edit: . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 + 210.
.417 Convert: . . . . . . . . . . none.
.418 Shift: . . . • . . . . . . . . none.
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses
c=a+bDecimal: . . . . . . .
Binary: . . . . . . . .
b=a+bDecimal: . . . . . . .
Binary: . . . . . . . .
Sum N itemsDecimal: . . . . . . .
Binary: . . . . • . . .
c = ab: . . . . . . . . . .
.422 For arrays of data:
Ci = ai + bj With indexing: . . . .
Without indexing: ..
b· = ai + b·With ind~xing: ...•
Without indexing: ..
Sum N items: •...•
c = c + aibj: . . . . . .
.424 SwitchingUnchecked: . . . . . . . 234; 144 with optional
feature.
Checked: . . . . . . . . 342; 144 with optional
feature.
List search: .•.••. 189 + (165 + 6D)N.
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: . . . . . . . . . 8. 9
Compose: . . . . . . . . 12. 9 (with optional Editing
Instructions) .
.426 Table look-up, per comparison
For a match: . . . . . . 159 + 6C.
For least or greatest: . . • • . • . • . . . 169.2 + 7C.
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . . 159 + 6C .
· 427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . .
Set bit in pattern: ...
Test bit in separate
location: .•.••...
Test bit in pattern: ..
(24 + 9D)N.
(24 + 9C)N.
3,100 (using subroutine, for
5-digit operands).
c = alb: . . . . . . . . . 3,700 (using subroutine, for
5-digit operands).
30.
33 .
58.
87.
· 428 Moving: . . • . . . . . . . 24 + 6C.
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
Check or
Interlock
Action
check
overflow
check
validity
check
set indicator.
set indicator.
Invalid operation:
check
stop with error
indication.
Arithmetic
error:
Invalid address:
none.
limit check
Invalid data:
24 + 90.
24 + 9C.
183 + 90.
180 + 90.
(138 + 9D)N.
3,180 (using subroutines,
for 5-digit operands) .
· 423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . . . • 252 + 60 •
Alphabetic data: .••• 252 + 6C .
(fixed point):
48 + 150.
48 + 15C.
225 + 150.
273 + 150.
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of
data:
parity check
set indicator.
stop with error
indication.
set indicator.
send parity
bit.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
511 : 111. 100
..
~ " ,,"
AEDP
-
AUERBAC~
!L
HONEYWELL 120
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
REPORTS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
The Honeywell 120 can control up to three input-output operations concurrently with internal
processing, as described below.
(1)
Computation within the central processor continues at all times, except during the individual 3-microsecond cycles required for each unit of data transferred between core
storage and any peripheral unit.
(2)
In every Honeywell 120 system, operation of any two of the system's basic peripheral
devices (450-1pm printer, Model 214 card unit, and 13KC magnetic tape unit) can proceed
at one time in addition to the continuing central processor operation.
(3)
If the optional Series 200 Control Unit Adapter (Feature 1015) is added to the system, up
to five standard Series 200 peripheral control units can be connected - in addition to the
basic Honeywell 120 peripheral units. However, the maximum number of input-output
operations that can proceed concurrently with computing is still two.
(4)
If the optional Series 200 Control Unit Adapter and Read/Write Channel (Feature 1016)
is added to the system instead of Feature 1015, the capability is provided to connect the
same maximum complement of peripheral control units as described in Paragraph (3),
and to control one additional concurrent input-output operation.
Table I (over) lists the peripheral data transfer operations. Lengths of the start time, data
transmission time, and stop time are shown for each operation, along with its demands upon
the central processor (CP) and the selected channel.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
511: 111. 101
HONEYWELL 120
Cycle
Time,
msec.
OPERATION
Data Transmission
Start Time
Time, CP Channel Time,
msec. Use
Use msec.
CP
Use
20.0
55.0
0.2%
Yes
Stop Time
Channel Time,
Use msec.
CP Channel
Use
Use
0
No
92.5
0
No
16
0
No
210
0
No
160
0
No
Yes
10
0
No
1. 5%
Yes
22
0
No
25.5%
Yes
17 +
5LS
0
No
46
36.0%
Yes
17 +
5LS
0
No
116
19.5%
Yes
17 +
5LS
0
No
0.3%
Yes
?
0
No
<0.1%
Yes
0
No
Yes
?
Oa
-
-
19.2%
Yes
Oa
-
-
Var.
26.7%
Yes
Oa
-
-
Yes
Var.
6.0%
Yes
Oa
-
-
0
Yes
Var.
13.2%
Yes
Oa
-
-
5.8 a
0
Yes
Var.
20.1%
Yes
Oa
-
-
-
20.8 a
0
Yes
Var.
8.4%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-8 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
7.5 a
0
Yes
Var.
19.2%
Yes
oa
-
-
204B-11, -12 Magnetic
Tape, 13KC*
-
18.7 a
0
Yes
Var.
4.0%
Yes
Oa
-
-
270 Random Access Drum
-
25.0
0
Yes
Var.
30.6%
Yes
0
-
-
-
0
No
214 and 123 Card Readers*
150
214 Card Punch*
150-600
223 Card Reader
75
224-1 Card Punch
335-1210
6:2
0
224-2 Card Punch
223-660
3.0
0
227 Card Reader
75
2lto46 0
Yes
227 Card Punch
222-1, 2, 3 Printer (51character se~)
240
42'to,120 0
92 + 5LS
0
-
63 + 5LS
0
133 + 5LS
209 Paper Tape Reader
210 Paper Tape Punch
204A-1 Magnetic Tape,
32KC
0
Yes
7.5
0
Yes
6.25n
<0.1%
Yes
13.0
0
Yes
46
0.3%
Yes
Yes
12.5n
<0.1%
Yes
Yes
6.25n
0.1%
Yes
44
13.5%
Yes
176
-
75
-
-
0
-
-
2.0
?
0
Yes
Var.
8.3
?
0
Yes
Var.
-
11.0 a
0
Yes
Var.
9.4%
-
5.5a
0
Yes
Var.
204A-3 Magnetic Tape,
89KC
-
5.5 a
0
Yes
204B-1, -2 Magnetic Tape,
20KC
-
12.5 a
0
204B-3, -4 Magnetic Tape,
44KC
-
7.5 a
204B-5 Magnetic Tape,
67KC
204B-7 Magnetic Tape,
29KC
-
222-4 Printer (46-:
character set)
222-5 Printer* (64character set)
' ..
204A-2 M~gnetic Ta:p~,
64KC
, ,
75.0
251 Mass Memory
16.7
95 avo
0
Yes
Var.
30%
Yes
252 Mass Memory
16.7
150 avo
0
Yes
Var.
30%
Yes
-
0
No
253 Mass Memory
16.7
225 avo 0
Yes
Var.
30%
Yes
-
0
No
a
b
LS
n
Var.
*
6/66
Cross-gap time for short gap (replaces start and stop times).
For the character mode; time for the record mode is variable.
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Number of characters punched.
Data transmission time varies with record length.
Basic Honeywell 120 peripheral units.
A
AUERBACH
'"
511 : 20 I. 001
.1 ""'. .
HONEYWELL 120
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
/AEDP
-
AU£RBAC~
•
REPORTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (511:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common
commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
Standard File Problems A, B, and C show the effects of three different record sizes in the
master file. Standard Problem D increases the amount of computation performed upon each
transaction. Each problem is estimated for activity factors (ratios of number of detail records
to number of master records) of zero to unity. In all cases a uniform distribution of activity is
assumed.
The basic Honeywell 120 system allows simultaneous computing, printing (by the basic
printer), and one other input-output operation. As an optional feature, one additional inputoutput operation can take place on any Series 200 peripheral unit connected to the I/O Adapters.
This special feature is included in Standard Configuration I.
In Configuration I, the master and detail input files are assigned to the card reader.
The output files are assigned to the basic card punch (updated master file) and printer (report
file). The card reader and printer used in Configuration I are faster than the basic Honeywell
120 equipment. The printer is assigned to the optional read-write channel and the card reader
to the basic read-write channel. For Problems A, B, C, and D, the combined time of the card
punch and the card reader is always the controlling factor on overall processing time.
In Configurations II and III, the master files are on magnetic tape. The detail file is
assigned to the card reader and the report file to the printer. Configuration II uses only the
basic Honeywell 120 peripheral devices. In Problems A, B, C, and D, for all activities, the
card reader and two master-file tapes are the controlling factors for both Configurations II and III.
SORTING (511:201.200)
The standard estimate for sorting SO-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed by the method explained in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users'
Guide. A two-way merge was used in System Configuration II (which has only four magnetic tape
units) and a three-way merge in Configuration III. The results are shown in Graph 511:201.200.
MATRIX INVERSION AND GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
It is not possible to install automatic floating-point operations in the Honeywell 120
Processor; therefore, these two mathematically-oriented standard problems have not been coded
for the 120.
\
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
511:201. 011
HONEYWELL 120
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE I (STANIlAIIIl FILE I'HOBLEM A)
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
REFERENCE
II
Clml'/block
lnput-
Hl'cords /block
mst'c/bloek
Output
Timt'S
(/"i1t'I)
0,
/Filt'l)
Fill' 1 -" File ::\
7fi/·l:n.
f---- __7,_'_ _ _ _, _ _ _ _ _15_0___
~~
f-----'-' __________
W
.
0
~ ...!:!!£..L
File 3
~'--
TimL's
msce/record
mSl'c/dctaU
msec/work
dominant
8,7
8.7
2.0
2.0
C,P.
I/O
C, P.
4:200.11:12
-
:/0
0.5
05
- - - - I - - 7--:-;-----. - I - - .-'--.
-
-
-
~.--- ~----- ~4-:-O-- ----~~~ - ~Mast(,l'In
~--~---I-..G_r--~-~I.-2---~5-4:200.1H
4:tL..r!- -----LJL_r---5~~_ ~_
~~~
t-.!h.!..
File 4: Hcports
Unit of ml'V
2
Time in Minutes to
put Records into
Required Order
10
/
~
lL
V
1/
7
1/
/'
/
4
V
2
~
~V
V
/
1
...,.
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
2
4
10,000
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWEll 200
Honeywell EDP Division
I
~-
c
(
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U.
s.
A.
HONEYWEll 200
Honeywell EOP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
512:0.11 ~'Io.o.';
1&.
AUERBACH
STANDARD
ED]?
HONEYWELl..:. 20.0.,;)
INTRODUCTION
REPORTS
INTRODUCTION
The Honeywell 20.0. Processor can be connected to any of the Honeywell Series 20.0. peripheral units, can use any of the Series 20.0. programming languages, and can run most programs
originally written for an IBM 140.1. It can contain between 4,0.96 and 65,536 characters of core
storage, with a cycle time of 2 microseconds per character.
Standard features of the Honeywell 20.0. Processor include: Multiply-Divide, 8-Bit
Code Handling Instruction, three read-write channels, eight I/O trunks, and Program Interrupt.
Optional features are: Advanced Programming, Edit Instruction, Eight Additional
I/O Trunks, and Auxiliary Read-Write Channel.
Nonavailable features are: floating-point arithmetic instrUctions, table look-up facilities, and the Storage Protect feature.
The rental for typical Honeywell 20.0. systems ranges between $4,0.0.0. and $9,0.0.0.
per month. Deliveries of the latest-model Honeywell 20.0. began in November 1965; deliveries
of the original Honeywell 20.0. began in July 1964.
This report concentrates upon the characteristics and the performance of the Honeywell
20.0. in particular. All the general characteristics of the Honeywell Series 20.0. hardware and software are described in Computer System Report 510.: Honeywell Series 20.0. - General.
The System Configuration section which follows shows the Honeywell 20.0. in the follOWing
standard System Configurations:
I:
II:
ill:
IV:
V:
Typical Card System
4-Tape Business System
6-Tape Business System
12-Tape Business System
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System
These configurations were prepared according to the rules in the Users' Guide, page
4:0.30..120., and any significant deviations from the standard specifications are listed. In addition,
the SY!'ltem Configuration section also shows a typical configuration for data communications applications.
Section 512:0.51 provides detailed central processor timings for the Honeywell 20.0..
The input-output channel capabilities of the Honeywell 20.0., and the demands upon the
processor during input-output operations, are described in Section 512:111.
The software that can be used with any Series 20.0. computer depends upon its core storage capacity and the number and type of peripheral devices. Several versions of the Easycoder
Assembler and COBOL Compiler will be made available. A FORTRAN compiler will be able to
operate on the Honeywell 20.0., without the floating-point arithmetic option, provided that the
other configuration requirements are met. These languages, and numerous other support routines for the Honeywell 20.0., are described in Sections 510.:151 through 510.:193.
The overall performance of any Honeywell Series 20.0. system is heavily dependent
upon the processor model used. A full System Performance analysis of standardized configurations utilizing the Honeywell 20.0. Processor is provided in Section 512:20.1.
\
"
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
512:031. 200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM: CONFIGURATION II
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . • . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
ability to overlap input-output operations
with internal processing is standard.
Multiply-Divide is standard.
Equipment
Renta1**
201-2-2 Processor and Console
with 8,192 characters of Core
Storage
$1,615
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-5"Tape Control Unit
204B-ll and -12 Magnetic Tape
Units (4): 13,300 char/sec
310
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . Editing Instructions
Advanced Programming*
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
970
90
100
$4,785
This optional feature, which permits indexing, indirect addressing, loading of control
registers, etc., is considered well worth its price in all Honeywell 200 configurations.
** The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement rents for $4,350 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 200
512:031. 300
.3
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM: CONFIGURATION III
Deviations from Standard Co"\lfiguration: . . . • . . . . . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
console typewriter input is included.
ability to read and write magnetic tape
simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Rental *
201-2-4 Processor and Console
with 16,384 characters of Core
Storage
$2,130
223 Card Reader and ,Control:
800· cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
28,800 char/sec (800 CPI)
220-1 Console (includes
Teleprinter)
Optional Features Included: •. , . • . . . • . . • . . . . . . Advanced Programming with BBE
Editing Instructions
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
925
460
2,460
205
100
90
$7,145
The rental prices qliotedare fcir a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The
same configuration with a five-year rental agreement rents for $6,465 per month.
./
(Contd. )
6/66
fA.
AUERBACH
OJ
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.4
512:031. 400
12-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM: CONFIGURATION IV
card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is slower.
Equipment
R ental *
201-2-8 Processor and
Console with 32,768 characters
of Core Storage
$ 3,150
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-4 Printer and Control:
950 lines/min (120 print positions)
1,305
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
203B-4 Tape Control
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
220-1 Console (includes Teleprinter)
Optional Features Included: . • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . Advanced Programming with BBE
Editing Instructions
Auxiliary Read/Write Channel
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
.5
205
100
90
50
$13,925
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement rents for $12,600 per month .
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM: CONFIGURATION V
This Configuration is identical to Configuration III for the Honeywell 200 (preceding page) except
for the addition of one 250 Mass Memory Control and one 251 Mass Memory File Transport, which
provide 15 million characters of storage and bring the total system rental to $8,150 per month for
a one-year contractual agreement. The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement rents
for $7, 365 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 200
512:031. 600
.6
TYPICAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
Equipment
Rental **
285 Communication Control Adapter
Units (up to 63: one per line used)
286-3 Multiple Communication
Control Unit and 085-61
Expansion Feature (total 63
lines)
201-2-8 Processor and Console
with 32, 768 characters of
Core Storage
*
$
410
3,150
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully punched cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
28,800 char/sec (800 CPI)
460
250 Mass Storage Control Unit
251 Mass Memory File
(15 million character capacity,
95 millisecond average access time)
2,460
335
670
/
Optional Features Included: . • . • • • . • • . . . . . • . . . Advanced Programming with BBE
Second Set of 1-0 Trunks
Editing Instructions
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
Cost of the necessary communication interface units is not included.
** The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement rents for $ 8,210 per month.
6/66
fA
AUERBACH
®
100
150
90
$9,525*
-&
512:051. 100
IT ......
/AEDP
'UER.AC~
HONEYWELL 200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
""om
L..--
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . • . . . . . . . . Central Processor.
Models 201-2-1 through
201-2-12 .
(7) Read-Write Channel 2 - Present Location
Counter.
Description
(8) Read-Write Channel 2 - Starting Location
Counter.
. 12
(6) Read-Write Channell - Starting Location
Counter .
The Model 201-2 Central Processor performs all
arithmetic and logical functions in a Honeywell 200
system under control of the internally stored
program. The Central Processor consists of five
basic functional units: the main memory, the control memory, the control unit, the arithmetic unit,
and the input-output traffic control.
The main memory consists of from 4,096 to
65,536 alphameric character positions of core
storage and is fully described in Section 510:041.
Cycle time is two microseconds per one-character
access.
Each character position consists of six data bits,
one parity bit, and two punctuation bits. The
punctuation bits can be used to indicate a word
mark, an item mark, or a record mark, which
define the length of a data field or instruction, an
item, or a record, respectively. An "item" consists of a group of consecutive data fields. (The
IBM 1400 series computers utilize only one punctuation bit - the "word mark" bit - and each
record mark occupies an entire character position.
The two punctuation bits used in the H-200 will decrease data storage requirements and provide increased flexibility in data movement operations.
The optional Extended Move instruction, for example, can be terminated by a word mark, an item
mark, or a record mark, as specified by the programmer.)
The control memory is a small magnetic core storage unit with an access time of 0.25 microsecond
and a cycle time of 0.50 microsecond. It holds 16
control registers, each capable of storing the address of one character position in the main memory.
Instructions are provided to load and store the contents of each of these registers. The 16 control
registers have the following functions:
(1) A-Address Register.
(2) B-Address Register.
(3) Sequence Register.
(4) Change Sequence Register.
(5) Read-Write Channell - Present Location
Counter.
(9) Read-Write Channel 3 - Present Location
Counter.
(10) Read-Write Channel 3 - Starting Location
Counter.
(11) Auxiliary R/W Channel - Present Location
Counter. *
(12) Auxiliary R/W Channel - Starting Location
Counter. *
(13) Interrupt Register.
(14) Work Register 1.
(15) Work Register 2.
(16) Unassigned.
* denotes optional registers.
The arithmetic unit executes all arithmetic and
logical operations. It consists of an adder that. can
perform both decimal and binary arithmetic and
two one-character operand storage registers. The
H-200 is basically a two-address, add-to··storage
system. All operations are performed serially by
character and terminated when specific punctuation
bit configurations are sensed. This means that
operand sizes are fully variable and are limited
only by the amount of core storage available to
hold them.
The control unit controls the sequential selection,
interpretation, and execution of all stored program
instructions and checks for correct (odd) parity
whenever a character is moved from one location
to another. It also provides for communication
with the operator's Control Panel described in
Section 510: 061.
The input-output traffic control directs the timesharing of accesses to the main memory by the various peripheral devices and the Central Processor.
Up to four input-output operations can occur simultaneously with internal processing. Three readwrite channels are included in the basic H- 200 system, and a fourth channel is available as an option.
The fourth channel is an auxiliary channel that
alternates with read/write channel 1. The auxiliary channel is interlocked when either a Model 227
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 200
512:051. 120
• 12
Description (Contd.)
Register and a single-character instruction called
Resume Normal Mode (RNM). The Interrupt
Register (ill) is under programmer control; i. e. ,
any particular memory address is loaded into the m.
Upon the Central Processor receipt of a demand from
an external device, pertinent arithmetic and control
indicators are automatically stored, and the contents
of the sequence register and the m are exchanged.
The latter action results in a transfer of control to
the instruction indicated by the previous contents
of the m.
Card Reader, any printer, a drum unit, mass
storage unit, or a magnetic tape unit (with a speed
of over 45KC) is operating on channel 1.
Highly significant is the fact that the programmer
can maximize the utilization of the read-write
channels by selecting anyone of the channels to
serve any input-output device; there is no need for
permanent assignment of each peripheral device to
a specific channel as in most competitive systems.
All peripheral devices can use any core storage
areas of appropriate size as input-output areas.
Demand on the Central Processor for most peripheral operations is two microseconds per character
transferred to or from core storage.
When the RNM instruction is executed, all the pertinent address registers, indicators, etc. , are automatically restored to their normal condition (i. e. ,
their status prior to the interrupt), and control
reverts to the sequence or the cosequence register
(the one in control when the interrupt occurred).
The processor is well suitcd to general data manipulation, but editing, indexing, indirect addressing,
and full-record data movement capabilities are all
extra-cost options, as described below. (The
Advanced Programming option provides so much
more computing power and programming convenience that it would seem well worth its price of
$100 per month in virtually every H-200 installation.) Binary addition and subtraction, logical
AND, exclusive OR, and masking instructions are
standard. The optional Move and Translate instruction uses a 64-character translation table to
translate any number of consecutive characters
from one 6-bit code to another. Translation of
8-bit codes is a standard feature, as is direct
decimal multiplication and division.
Typical instruction execution times (using the threecharacter addressing mode) are 36 microseconds
for a 5-character move, 48 microseconds for a 5digit decimal add, and 38 microseconds for a 5-character compare. Each of these instructions is 4
microseconds shorter when two-character addresses
are used and 4 microseconds longer when four-character addresses are used. Indexing or indirect
addressing requires an additional 6 microseconds
per modified address.
Optional Features
Advanced Programming: Makes six 3-character
registers in core storage available as index registers which can index any 3-character or 4-character
instruction address; allows indirect addressing;
permits the loading of data into the control registers;
permits the transfer of complete records of data
within core storage by a single instruction; allows
bisequence operations through the use of a consequence register; provides instructions for translating 6-bit codes (MAT), zero and adding or subtracting (ZA and ZS), branching on character equal
(BCE), an extended form of the branch on character
condition (BCC), a Read Reverse instruction for
204B Magnetic Tapes, the Change Address Mode
instruction (for systems of 4,096 characters or less),
and branching on bit equal (BBE).
Instruction length is variable from one to eleven
characters. Arithmetic and data movement instructions are most commonly seven characters long.
Through careful placement of data, instructions can
sometimes be "chained" so that a one-character instruction does the work of a seven-character one,
resulting in savings in both storage space and execution time. Chaining is possible only when a
series of operations is to be performed upon items
of data stored in consecutive locations, so that the
A- and B-Address Registers do not need to be reloaded before each instruction is executed.
The H-200 uses a pure binary addressing system.
In the 3-character mode, each address portion
within an instruction normally consists of three
characters, or 18 data bits. Fifteen bits are used
to specify an address between 0 and 32,767, and the
remaining three bits can specify address modification: either indirect addressing or indexing by one
of the six index registers. Both indexing and indirect addressing are part of the optional Advanced
Programming feature. A special instruction enables the Central Processor to switch between the
three-character addressing mode and a special
two-character mode. Use of two-character addresses reduces both storage space and execution
time but has two significant disadvantages: only
the 4,096 character positions within a single core
module can be addressed and neither indexing nor
indirect addressing can be used. A four-character
addressing mode is used for addresses 32,768 to
65,536. This mode permits the use of 15 index
registers ..
Editing Instructions: All editing capabilities are
optional in the H-200. The capabilities available
with the option are those of the basic and Expanded
Print Edit of the IBM 1401.
Second Set of Eight Input-Output Trunks: permits
additional peripheral units to be connected.
Auxiliary Read-Write Channel: Permits a total of
four simultaneous peripheral operations to occur
during processing.
Compatibility with the IBM 1401
Please see the detailed comparison of available instructions in the Instruction List section, page
510: 121. 100. A general review of the compatibility
between the Honeywell 200 Series and the IBM 1400
Series is presented in Section 510:131.
• 14
Program interrupt facilities are provided by a
control memory register called the Interrupt
6/66
First Delivery: . , ••• July 1964; deliveries of
the improved Model 201-2
Processors began in
November 1965.
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
'"
512:051. 200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
• 21
Operations and Operands
0Eeration and
Variation
.211 Fixed point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.212 Floating point Add- subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.213 Boolean AND
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
.214 Comparison:
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
decimal or
binary
decimal
decimal
1 to N char.
automatic
automatic
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
subroutine.
subroutine.
subroutine.
automatic
binary
1 to N char.
none.
binary
1 to N char.
automatic
branch on high, low, equal, unequal, or
zero balance.
automatic
1 to N char.
none.
automatic
1 to N char.
automatic
1 to N char.
o through 9, then
A through Z,
with special
symbols
interspersed .
. 215 Code translation Provision: . . . . . . . automatic (using code table
constructed by programmer).
From: . . . . . . . . . . any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
To: . . . . • . . . . . . . any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
Size: . . . . . . • . • . . 1 to N characters.
.216 Radix conversion: .•. none.
Provision
Comment
.217 Edit format Alter size:
optional feature expand but'
not contract.
Suppress zero:
optional
Round off:
none
Insert point:
optional
optional
Insert spaces:
Insert $, CR-*:
optional
Float $:
optional
Protection:
optional
.218 Table look-up:
none.
.219 Others SUbstitute:
automatic
performs binary masking
Change Addressing Mode:
automatic
shifts between
2, 3, and 4
char addresses.
Branch on Sense
automatic
Switches:
16 possible
settings.
. 22
SEecial Cases of 0Eerands
. 221 Negative numbers: ... absolute value, with B
zone bit in units
position .
. 222 Zero: . . . . . . . . . . . . positive, negative, and
unsigned zeros and
blanks give same result
in decimal arithmetic
Size
1 to N char.
1 char.
but are unequal in comparisons .
.223 Operand size
determination: . . . . . word mark, item mark, or
record mark bits in high
or low order digit position. (Some instructions
imply one-character
operands).
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
512:051. 230
HONEYWELL 200
. 23
Instruction Formats
.2:n Instruction structure: . variable; 1 to 12 characters •
. 232 Instruction layout:
Part:
OP
A or I
B
1
2, 3, or 4
2, 3, or 4
Sizc (char):
An instruction may consist of:
(1)
(2)
(:l)
(4)
(5)
OP only
OP, VI
OP. AorI
OP, A or I, VI
OP, Aorl, B
(6)
OP, A or I, D, VI
(7)
01', A, D, VI' V 2
OP, A or I, C 1
OP, A or I, Cl, C2
(10) OP, A or I, C1 ' C 2 ,
(H)
(9)
C3 ·
.233 Instruction parts
Name
Purpose
. . operation code.
· address of an operand or
field in core storage.
I: .
· location of next instruction
if a branch occurs.
· address of an operand or
B'
field in core storage.
· modifier for an operation
V 1 0rC 1 :·· . . .
code, control field for an
I/o instruction, or partial
address in a translate
instruction.
. . . . . . . partial address in a translate instruction or control
field for an I/O instruction.
· control field for an I/o
instruction.
· 234 Basic address
.2 + O.
structure: ..
.235 Literals Arithmetic:. . . .. . none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . . .
· yes; single character.
Incrementing
modifiers: . .
. none.
Masking: . . . . .
. yes; single character mask.
.236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
type: . . . . . .
· core.
Minimum size: .
· 1 character.
Maximum size: .
· total capacity.
Volume accessible: · total capacity.
· 237 Address indexing .2371 Number of methods: 1.
.2373 Names: . . . . . . . . · indexing (with optional
Advanced Programming
feature) .
.2373 Indexing rule: . . . . · addition (modulo core
storage capacity).
.2374 Index specification:. · Address Type Indicator first 3 bits of 18-bit
operand address or first
5 bits of 24-bit operand
address.
· 2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . . . 6 or 15.
OP:.
A:.
6/66
VIOl' C 1
1
V2 or C 2
1
C3
1
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . .. . all 3- and 4-character
addresses.
.2377 Cumulative indexing:. . . . . . . .. . none .
. 2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . . . . . none .
. 238 Indirect addressing: .. with optional Advanced
Programming feature .
. 2381 Recursive: .
. .. yes .
.2382 Designation:
. Address Type Indieatol' first 3 or 5 bits of operand address .
.2383 Control: . . . . . .
. direct address has no indicator bit.
.2384 Indexing with indirect addressing: . yes.
. 239 Stepping: . . . . . . . . . none .
.24
Special Processor
Storage:
16 registers in magnetic
core control memory
(described on page
512:051.100), plus 2
silicon-diode operand
storage registers .
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES.
.31
Instruction Scquencil!.g
.311 Number of sequence
control facilities: .•• 1.
.312 Arrangement: •••... programmer can exchange
the contents of the Sequence
Register and the Change
Sequence Register by use
of Change Sequence Mode
instruction.
.313 Precedence rule: . . . . programmer indicates
register to be used.
.314 Special sub-sequence
counter: . . . . . . . . . none.
.315 Sequence control step
size: • . . . . . . .
. 1 character.
.316 Accessibility to
routines: . . . . .
· yes; can be loaded and
stored by instructions.
.317 Permanent or optional
modifier: . . . . .
· no.
.32
Look-Ahead: .
.33
Interrupt
.331 Possible causes In-out units: . . . .
· none.
· ready to transfer one unit
of data (character or
record) .
In-out controllers: . · yes.
Storage access: ... · cannot initiate interrupts.
Processor errors: . · cannot initiate interrupts.
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
'"
512:051. 332
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
· 332 Control by routine: ••• yes.
.333 Operator control: •••• operator can initiate I/O
interrupt from console.
. 3:14 Interruption conditions: execution of current
instruction is completed.
• :1:15 Interruption process Registers saved: ... contents of sequence regis ter and interrupt
register are automatically interchang'ed;
address rcgister and
indicator settings are
automatically saved and
restored.
Destination: . . . . . . fixed location (contents
of Interrupt Register).
· 34 Multiprogramming: ••• Change Sequence Mode
instruction facilitates
switching control between two programs.
• 35
Multisequencing:...
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
none.
All execution times listed here are based on use of
the 3-character addressing modes; most instructions are 4 microseconds shorter in the 2-character
addressing mode, and 4 microseconds longer in the
4-character addressing mode.
D = operand length in decimal digits.
C = operand length in characters.
. 41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract:
Decimal: . . . . . . . 18 + 6D.
Binary: . . . . . . . . 16 + 6C.
Multiply: . . . . . . . 24 + 14D2; where the multiplier and multiplicand are
both D digits in length.
Divide: . . . . . . . . . 49 + 59D + 30D 2 ; where the
dividend is twice as long as
the divisor (D = no. of
digits in divisor) .
. 412 Floating point (performed by subroutines)
Add-subtract: . . . . . 1,440.
Multiply: . . . . . . . . 5,460.
Divide: . . . . . . . . . 9,820.
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . . . . 6 per modified address.
Indirect addressing: 6 per stage.
Re-complementing:
4D.
.414 ControlCompare: . . . . . . . . 18 + 4D.
Branch: . . . . • . . . . 14.
.415 Couuter control: . . . . none.
.416 Edit: . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 + 14C.
.416 Convert: . . . . . . . . . . none.
. 418 Shift: . . . . . . . . . . . . none.
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
. 421 For random addresses (fixed point) c = a + b:
Decimal: . . . . . . . 34 + 10D.
Binary: . . . . . . . . 32 + 10C.
b = a + b:
Decimal:
....
Binary: . .. . . . .
Sum N items:
Decimal: . . . . . . .
Binary: . . . . . . . .
c = ab: . . . . . . . . . .
c = alb: . . . . . . . . .
.422 For arrays of data c.=ai+ b .:
With indJxing: . . . .
Without indexing: ..
bj = ai + br
With indexing: . . . .
Without indexing: ..
Sum N items: . . . . .
c = c + aibj: . . . . . .
18 + 6D.
16 + 6C .
(18 + 6D)N.
(16 + 6C)N.
40 + 18D + 14D2.
83 + 71 + 30D2.
150 -I- 10D.
182 + 10D.
122 + 6D.
120 -I- 6D.
(92 + 6D)N.
168 + 30D -I- 14D2
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: ..
. 168 -I- 4D.
Alphabetic data:.
.168 +4C .
.424 SwitchingUnchecked: . . . . . . . 156; 96 with optional feature .
Checked: . . . . . . . . 228; 96 with optional feature.
List search: . . . . . . 126 -I- (110 + 4D)N.
.425 Format control per character Unpack: . . . . .. .. 5. 8
Compose: . . . . . . . . 8.6 (with optional Editing
Instruction) .
.426 Table look-up per comparison For a match: . . . . . . 106 -I- 4C .
For least or greatest:112.8 + 4.4C.
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . . 106 + 4C.
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . .
Set bit in pattern: . . .
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . .
Test bit in pattern: ..
.428 Moving: . . . . . . . . . .
.5
20.
22.
36.
58.
16 -I- 4C.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
Check or
Interlock
Invalid operation:
check
overflow
check
validity
check
check
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
none.
limit check
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
parity check
send parity
bit.
Invalid data:
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
Action
set indicator.
set indicator.
stop with
error
indication .
stop with
error
indication .
set indicator.
6/66
-
512:111. 101
A""""
AEDP
AUERBAC~
HONEYWELL 200
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
urORTS
~
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
The Honeywell 200 can control three or four input-output operations concurrently with
internal processing, as described below.
(1)
Computation within the central processor continues at all times,
except during the individual 2-microsecond cycles required for
each unit of data transferred between core storage and any
peripheral unit.
(2)
In addition, in every Honeywell 200 system, any three of the
peripheral data transfer operations listed in Table I (over) can
proceed at one time (one on each read-write channel) in addition
to the continuing central processor operation. Lengths of the
start time, data transmission time, and stop time are shown for
each operation, along with its demands upon the central processor
(CP) and the selected channel.
(3)
If the optional Auxiliary Read-Write Channel is added, one additional
simultaneous data transfer operation can occur, provided that the
data transfer rates on both Channell and the Auxiliary Read-Write
Channel are "comparatively undemanding." Input-output units which
do allow both Channel 1 and the Auxiliary Channel to operate in
parallel include the Model 227 Card Punch, Model 223 Card Reader,
Model 224 Card Punch, Model 214 Card Units, any magnetic tape
units operating at under 45,000 characters per second, and the
paper tape equipment.
(4)
The capability to read from one tape unit and write simultaneously on
another tape unit connected to the same Tape Control Unit is provided
in all 204B Series (one-half inch) Magnetic Tape Units except the 204B-ll
and -12, but not in the 204A Series (three-quarter inch) tapes.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 200
512:111.102
TAllLE I - SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
OPERATION
msec.
150
214 Card Reader
2 H Card Punch
150-600
Data Transmission
Start Time
Cycle
'Iinle,
CP Channel
Use
Use
Time,
msec.
20.0
0
Yes
Stop Time
CP
Use
Channel
Use
55.0
0.1%
Yes
75.0
0
No
<0.1%
Yes
92.5
0
No
7.5
0
Yes
6.25n
1:1.0
0
Yes
46
Time,
msec.
CP Channel
Use
Use
Time,
msec.
0.2%
Yes
16
0
No
224-1 Card Punch
335-1210
6.2
0
Yes
12.5n
<0.1%
Yes
210
0
No
22'1-2 Card Punch
22:1-660
3.0
0
Yes
6.25n
0.1%
Yes
160
0
No
22:1 Card Reader
75
227 Card Reador
75
21 to 46
0
Yes
44
9.0%
Ycs
10
0
No
227 Card Punch
240
42 to 102
0
Yes
176
1.0%
Yes
22
0
No
222-1, -2, -3 Printor (51character set)
92+5LS
0
-
-
75
17.0%
Yes
17+5LS
0
No
222-4 Printer (46character set)
6:1+5LS
0
-
46
24.0%
Yes
17+5LS
0
No
222-5 Printer (63character set)
1:13+5LS
0
-
-
116
13.0%
Yes
17+5LS
0
No
209 Paper Tape Reader
2.0
?
0
Yes
Var.
0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
210 Paper Tape Punch
8.3
?
0
Yes
Var.
<0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
a
-
-
204A-1 Magnetic Tape,
-
11.0 a
0
Yes
Val'.
6.4%
Yes
0
204A-2 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
r.: r.: a
<>.<>
0
Yes
Val'.
12.8%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204A-3 Magnetic Tape,
89KC
-
r.: r.:::
<>.<>
a
0
Yes
Var.
17.8%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204ll-1, -2 Magnetic Tape,
20KC
-
12.5 a
0
Yes
Var.
4.0%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204ll-3, -4 Magnetic Tape,
44KC
-
7 .<>r.:t
0
Yes
Var.
8.8%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204ll-5 Magnetic Tape,
67KC
-
5.8a
0
Yes
Var.
13.4%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204ll-7 Magnetic Tape,
29KC
-
20.0a
0
Yes
Var.
5.6%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204ll-8 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
7 .<>r. a
0
Yes
Var.
12.8%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204ll-11, -12 Magnetic
Tape, 13KC
-
18.7 a
0
Yes
Val'.
2.7%
Yes
Oa
-
-
25.0
0
Yes
Var.
20.4%
Yes
0
-
-
95 avo
0
Yes
Var.
20%
Yes
-
0
No
0
No
0
No
:l~KC
270 Random Access Drum
251 Mass Memory
16.7
252 Mass Memory
16.7
150 avo
0
Yes
Var.
20%
Yes
253 Mass Memory
16.7
225 avo
0
Yes
Var.
20%
Yes
a
b
LS
n
Var.
6/66
Cross-gap time for short gap (replaces start and stop times).
For the character mode; time for the record mode is variable.
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Number of characters punched.
Data transmission time varies with record length.
fA
AUERBACH
0,
512:201. 001
A
STAManD
AUERBACH
HONEYWELL 200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
R[PGlts
~
SYSTEM PERfORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (512:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common
commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
Standard File Problems A, B, and C vary the record sizes in the master file. Standard Problem D increases the amount of computation performed upon each transaction. Each problem is
estimated for activity factors (ratios of number of detail records to number of master records)
of zero to unity. In all cases a uniform distribution of activity is assumed.
The graphs for the Honeywell 200 are unusual in that there are three general purpose
read-write channels, permitting any three peripheral operations to occur simultaneously with
central processor functions. (A fourth read-write channel is optional, and is used in standard
System Configuration IV.) Since there are four peripheral units in use in System Configurations
II, m, and IV, the units were assigned to the read-write channels in such a manner as to minimize overall processing time.
In Configuration I, the master and detail input files are on the card reader. The output files are on the card punch (updated master file) and printer (report file). For Problems
A, B, C, and D, the card punch is always the controlling factor on overall processing time.
In Configurations II, III, and IV, the master files are on magnetic tape. The detail
file is assigned to the card reader and the report file to the printer. The curves for Configuration II for all problems show that the printer is the controlling factor at high and moderate activities, while the two master-file tapes (which are connected to a single-channel 203B-5 Tape
Control) control at lower activities.
In Problem A, the times at high and moderate activities for Configuration III are
controlled by the printer. At lower activities, the two magnetic tape units assigned to one readwrite channel become the controlling factor (the higher horizontal line on Graph 512:201.100).
When the activity becomes low enough so that the combined times for the printer and card reader
become less than the combined time for the tapes, the printer and card reader are assigned
to one channel and the two tapes are assigned to two separate channels (the sloping straight
line). Near zero activity, the combined times for the printer and card reader become less
than the time for each tape, so a single tape unit becomes the controlling factor (the lower horizontalline). The curves for Problems Band D (Graph 512:201.130) can be explained in the
same way.
The curves for Configuration IV in Problems A through C have the same general
slope as those for Configuration III, even though Configuration IV has the auxiliary readwrite channel. Because of the higher speed of the tape units used in this configuration, it
cannot use the auxiliary channel to advantage in the Standard File Processing Problem. Due
to the Honeywell 200's relatively high internal speed and simultaneity, the graph for Problem D (with trebled computation) is identical to the graph for Problem A.
SORTING (512:201. 200)
The standard estimate for sorting BO-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A by the method explained
in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users' Guide. A two-way merge was used in System Configuration II
(which has only four magnetic tape units) and a three-way merge in Configurations III and IV. The
results are shown in Graph 512:201. 200. Because of the Honeywell 200's ability to overlap magnetic
tape reading, writing, and computation in Configurations III and IV, its performance on the Sorting
program (as on the Standard File Problems at low activities) is significantly better than that of
several other computers in its price class which do not possess suchan overlap feature.
MATRIX INVERSION AND GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
It is not possible to install automatic floating-point arithmetic operations in the Honeywell
200 Processor; therefore, these two mathematically-oriented standard problems have not been
coded for the Honeywell 200.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 200
51 2: 20 1. 0 11
W()IlKSIIE~:T
DATA TABLE I (STANDAHI> FlU: I'IHlBU:M A)
CON FIGlffiA TION
ITEM
Chal'/block
(Filt> 1)
H(l
m
I,OHO
I,IIMO
10
10
II)
ml.7
!J~.!i
23.5
(File I)
~~~
~:I___.
-
FiI,' 4
InputOutput
1l1":;l'e/switdl
REFF.TIENCE
IT
7:I/l:;H
IV
I,OHO
- - -7!i- - - - - -7;'- - - - - - - - - - -75- 7:)
-- -- ---- --
- - I~!}
- -
- - -H4- - -
:)4
I::!!)
II
{)
()
()
0
()
()
~I~-=-- - - - - - o
Filt~ :!
---------- r-----
4:200. ll2
----- ---- - - - - - 0- - - - - - -c..---Il
n
0
TillH'H
File 4
~l~_~ _ _ _ _
11_,1_ _ - - ; _ ~~_ _ _ _ ~
~
________
__
~
___. _ I - ___O_.:_I_ _ t---
~
File 4
()~
11.0
--r----
11.0
11.0
_
~
_____o,-,=--_______0_.2
_
11.0
TlUH'c/block
~
mscl~/rCC()rd
~ _ _. _ _ _ _ _
1._1_ _
PZ'ol'cssor
mscc/dctail
~---.-----O.-2--.-t__~-I_----().~ _ _ _ ~ _
Ti 111 l'S
mscc/work
~ ________
!i._"_ _
b7 'bH
1.:1
Central
msec/rcport
al
V--- System
l'l'Ji'ormanc('
at F
t. n
mseclblock
for C.P. and
dominant
column.
'a}r--- Fil(~lMilstcrln
C.P.
0.:1
- I - ___0._:1_ _ _ _ _ _ ~.
t--- __1_.1_. - I - - _ _ _1.1_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _1_._I
~
1.:1
t--
Punch
C.P.
Spal't'
Required
Printer
2.2
C.P.
Printer
0 ..
-r----n:-o
2.2
-().~f--l:(i
---:;.~f---lTil.Il
Total
Stol'age
C.P.
0.:1
-m::;--
-
~2.U-+--
-
2.2
~Mastcro;;t().~f- ~~-I---- -~2-t---- --2.~1-
~Dclails
Unit of Measure
1.:1
1.3
Printer
0.3
'Filc4 ~ -
4::Wn.114
1-----~(;-1----~.6-+-~ -lJD.i)- T,2i)(.-----wLO---~()1,2!)()
19H. H
11), 2
4:21)0.11:12
- I - - ~ _ ' - _ _ _ "~
-O~ - - - r- IO.li· - I - - -11ll.:,--1- -:LS- , - - - ~ - I - - -f--- 0.1
_
_
1.2!H)
HIM.S
WH. H
H40
(character)
sw. routines
100
~I--------IH
~
2,250
2.25()
~)CkS 110 2:l)
--
~()cks 24 t~
---:!,m--I-- ~4---
-f_
1-'--'--- -'--'-1---- - -
---1-1l2---
-
-
-rn --- --- ~ 2,:1:14
-----2-,:I~
-r-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
~ _ _ _ _ ~ _ _ _72_0_ _ _' _ 1 - - WOl'king
2,2!iO
1 - - - - -1-8- - - - - 1 - 8 - - - - - - I H -
~,5fjO
I ()H
1 IlH
J OM
7, HH2
ItI.(J"~
10.042
tl
Total
_ _ _ _4_,7~ _ _ ~
4:~OO.
1151
_
(Contd.)
6/66
A
AUERBACH
®
5t2:201. toO
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
• 11
Standard File Problem A
• 111 Record sizes Master file: •••••.
Detail file: •••••••
Report file: ••••..•
. 112 Computation: .•..••.
.113 "Timmg basis: •••... using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 •
.114 Graph: ••••••••••. see graph below .
. 115 Storage space required
Configuration 1; • • • • 3, 522 characters.
Configuration II: ... 7,882 characters.
Configuration III: ••. 10, 042 characters.
Configuration IV: ... 10,042 characters .
108 characters.
1 card. "
1 line.
standard.
1,000.0
7
2
/
513:031. 200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION
n
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ...••••. . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
ability to overlap input-output operations
with internal processing is standard.
Multiply-Divide is standard.
Equipment
Rental*
1201-1 Processor and Console
with 16,384 characters of Core
Storage
$2,665
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-5 Tape Control Unit
204B-ll and-12 Magnetic Tape Units (4):
13,300 char/sec
310
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . none.
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
970
$5,645
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The
same configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $5,105 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
513:031. 300
.3
HONEYWELL 1200
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION III
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . • • • . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
console typewriter input is included.
ability to read and write magnetic tape
simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Rental*
1201-1 Processor with
16,384 characters of
Core Storage
$2,665
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
28,800 char/sec (800 bpi)
220-3 Console (includes
Teleprinter)
435
2,460
310
Optional Features Included: ••..••••••........ none.
TOTAL RENTAL:
$7,570
* The rental prices quoted are for
a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $6,835 per month.
/'
I
6/66
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.4
513:031. 400
12-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION IV
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . • • . . . . card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is up to 50% slower.
Equipment
Rental*
1201-2 Processor with
32,768 characters of Core
Storage
$ 3,485
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-4 Printer and Control:
950 lines/min (120 print
positions)
1,305
_~"'"''-',/
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
_~:.L.~'/
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
220-3 Console (includes
Teleprinter)
310
Optional Features Included: ...•.••••..••.••.. none.
TOTAL RENTAL:
$14,125
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $12,755 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
. 6/66
513:031. 500
.5
HONEYWELL 1200
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
console typewriter input is included.
ability to read and write magnetic tape simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Rental*
250 Card Mass Memory Control
251 Card Mass Memory File:
15,000,000 char;
access time 95 msec (av)
$
1201-1 Processor with
16,384 characters of Core
Storage
335
670
2,665
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
28,800 char/sec (800 cpi)
220-3 Console (includes
Teleprinter)
435
2,460
310
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . none.
TOTAL RENTAL:
$8,575
./
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $7,735 per month.
6/66
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
'"
513:031. 600
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.6
6-TA.PE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VI
Deviations from Standard Configuration:. . . . . • . . . . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
console typewriter input is included.
ability to read and write magnetic tape simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Rental*
1201-4 Processor with 65, 536
characters of Core Storage
$4,870
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
28,800 char/sec (800 cpi)
425
2,460
220-3 Console (includes Teleprinter)
310
Optional Features Included: . . . . . • . . . . . . • . . . . • Scientific Unit
TOTAL RENTAL:
310
$10,085
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The same
configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $9,105 per month.
(
\"
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 1200
513:031. 700
.7
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ••. . • . • . . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
Equipment
Rental*
1201-6 Processor with 98,304
characters of Core Storage
$ 5,740
220-3 Console (includes typewriter and direct control)
310
222-3 Printer and Control
(120 print positions); 650
lines/min
925
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 lines/min
310
20.8-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 fully-punched cards/min
155
310
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,075
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,075
Optional Features Included: • • • • • • . . . . . . . . • . . . Scientific Unit
TOTAL RENTAL
310
$15,080
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $13,615 per month.
6/66
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
513:031. 800
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.8
10-T.APE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAmED): CONFIGURATION VIIB
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ••••.•.•• card reader is 700% faster.
direct connection to satellite system.
Equipment
Rental*
1201-4 Processor and Console
with 65,536 characters of
Core Storage
$4,870
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (8):
64,000 char/sec
310
435
4,920
220-3 Console (includes Teleprinter and direct control)
310
212-1 On-Line Adapter Unit
(for connection to H-120)
410
To Satellite System
(next page)
Optional Features Included: . . . . • • . • . • . . . . • . . . Scientific Unit
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
310
11,565
3,560
$15,125
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The
same configuration with a five-year rental agreement leases for $13,675 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 1200
513:031. 801
•8
CONFIGURATION VIIB (Contd.)
SATELLITE EQIDPMENT (Honeywell 120)
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .•••••.•. card reader is 20% slower.
ability to overlap printing and
one input-output operation
with computing is standard.
console typewriter input is
included.
6 index registers.
Equipment
Rental
121-2 Central Processor and
Console with 4,096 character
positions of Core Storage
$1,000
I/O Adapter (Non-Simultaneous)
214-2 Card Reader/Punch:
Reads: 400 cards/min
Punches: 100-400 cards/min
155
360
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (2)
435
820
122 Printer:
450 lines/min (120 print positions)
510
220-1 Console
(includes Teleprinter)
205
Optional Features Included: . . . . . • . . . • • . . . . • . . Advanced Programming
Edit Instruction
75
50
To H-1200
System (previous page)
TOTAL SATELLITE EQIDPMENT
$3,560
/'
6/66
IA
AUERBACH
'"
A.
fA
AUERDAC~
-
•
513:051. 100
srmm
E]IJ)lF'
HONEYWELL 1200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
upons
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:.........
. 12
Central Processor.
Models 1201-1 through
1201-12.
Description
The Model 1201 Central Processor performs all
arithmetic and logical functions in a Honeywell
1200 system under control of the internally stored
program. The Central Processor consists of five
basic functional units: the main memory, the control memory, the control unit, the arithmetic unit,
and the input-output traffic control.
(8) Read-Write Channel 2 - Starting Location
Counter •
(9) Read-Write Channel 3 - Present Location
Counter.
(10) Read-Write Channel 3 - Starting Location
Counter.
(11) Auxiliary R/W Channel - Present Location
Counter.
(12) Auxiliary R/W Channel - Starting Location
Counter.
(13) Interrupt Register.
The main memory consists of from 16,384 to
131,072 alphameric character positions 'of core
storage and is fully described in Section 510:041.
Cycle time is 1. 5 microseconds per one-character access.
(14) Internal Interrupt Register (used with the
Storage Protect Feature).
Each character position consists of six data bits,
one parity bit, and two punctuation bits. The
punctuation bits can be used to indicate a word
mark, an item mark, or a record mark, which
define the length of a data field or instruction, an
item, or a record, respectively. An "item" consists of a group of consecutive data fields. (The
IBM 1400 series computers utilize only one punctuation bit - the "word mark" bit - and each
record mark occupies an entire character position.
The two punctuation bits used in the Series 200
will decrease data storage requirements and provide increased flexibility in data movement operations. The optional Extended Move instruction,
for example, can be terminated by a word mark,
an item mark, or a record mark, as specified by
the programmer.)
(17) Work Register 3.
The control memory is a small magnetic core storage unit with an access time of 0.25 microsecond
and a cycle time of 0.50 microsecond. It holds
up to 29 basic control registers.
Each register
either stores the address of one character position
in the main memory or functions as part of the
Scientific Unit (see "Optional Features" on the
following page).
Instructions are provided to load and store the
contents of each of these registers. The 29 basic
control registers have the following functions:
(1) A-Address Register.
(2)
B-Address Register.
(3)
Sequence Register.
(4) Change Sequence Register.
(5) Read-Write Channell - Present Location
Counter.
(6) Read-Write Channell - Starting Location
Counter.
(7) Read-Write Channel 2 - Present Location
Counter.
(15) Work Register 1.
(16) Work Register 2.
(18- 29) Scientific Unit (Feature 1100).
The control unit controls the sequential selection,
interpretation, and execution of all stored program instructions and checks for correct (odd)
parity whenever a character is moved from one
location to another. It also provides for communication with the operator's Control Panel described
in Section 510:061.
The arithmetic unit executes all arithmetic and
logical operations. It consists of an adder that can
perform both decimal and binary arithmetic and
two one-character operand storage registers. The
Honeywell 1200 is baSically a two-address, addto-storage system. All operations are performed
serially by character and terminated when specific
punctuation bit configurations are sensed. This
means that operand sizes are fully variable and are
limited only by the amount of core storage available
to hold them.
The input-output traffic control directs the timesharing of accesses to the main memory by the various peripheral devices and the Central Processor.
Up to four input-output operations can occur simultaneously with internal processing. Three readwrite channels and an auxiliary channel are included in the basic Honeywell 1200 system. The
auxiliary channel alternates with read/write channell, and is interlocked when the Model 227 Card
Reader, any printer, the drum, a mass storage
unit, or a magnetic tape unit with a speed of over
45KC is operating on channel!.
Highly significant is the fact that the programmer
can maximize the utilization of the read-write
channels by selecting anyone of the channels to
serve any input-output device; there is no need for
permanent assignment of each peripheral device to
a specific channel, as in many competitive systems.
All peripheral devices can use any core storage
areas of appropriate size as input-output areas.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
513:051. 120
.12
HONEYWELL 1200
Description (Contd.)
Program Interrupt capabilities are provided by two
control memory Interrupt Registers and a singlecharacter instruction called Resume Normal Mode
(RNM). The Interrupt Registers (IR) are under
programmer control; i. e., any particular memory
address can be loaded into an IR. When the Central
Processor receives a demand from an external device or a notification of a memory barricade violation, pertinent arithmetic and control indicators are
automatically stored, and the contents of the sequence register and an IR are exchanged. This
action results in a transfer of control to the instruction indicated by the previous contents of the IR.
Demand on the Central Processor for most peripheral operations is only 1. 5 microseconds per
character transferred to or from core storage.
The processor is well suited to general data manipulation. Editing, multiplication, diviSion, indexing, indirect addressing, and full-record data
movement capabilities are all standard in the
Honeywell 1200. Binary addition and subtraction,
logical AND, exclusive OR, and masking instructions are also standard. The Move and Translate
instruction uses a 64-character translation table
to translate any number of consecutive characters
from one 6-bit code to another. Handling of 8-bit
codes is also provided.
When the RNM instruction is executed, all the pertinent address registers, indicators, etc., are
automatically restored to their normal condition
(i. e., their status prior to the interrupt), and control reverts to the sequence register.
Instruction length is variable from one to eleven
characters. Arithmetic and data movement instructions are most commonly seven characters long.
Through careful placement of data, instructions can
sometimes be "chained" so that a one-character
instruction does the work of a seven-character one,
resulting in savings in both storage space aJ;ld execution time. Chaining is possible only when a
series of operations is to be performed upon items
of data stored in consecutive locations, so that the
A- and B-Address Registers do not need to be reloaded before each instruction is executed.
The Honeywell 1200 uses a pure binary addressing
system. In the 3-character mode, each address
portion within an instruction normally consists of
three characters, or 18 data bits. Fifteen bits
are used to specify an address between 0 and
32,767, and the remaining three bits can specify
address modification: either indirect addressing
or indexing by one of the six index registers. A
special instruction enables the Central Processor
to switch betweeil the three-character addressing
mode and a special two-character mode. Use of
two-character addresses reduces both storage space
and execution time but has two significant disadvantages: only the 4,096 character positions within
a single core module can be addressed, and neither
indexing nor indirect addressing can be used. A
four-character addressing mode is used for addresses 32,768 to 131,072. Fifteen index registers
can be used in the 4-character mode.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
.211 Fixed point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.212 Floating point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
*
Typical instruction execution times (using the
three-character addressing mode) are 27 microseconds for a 5-character move, 35 microseconds
for a 5-digit decimal add, and 29 microseconds
for a 5-character compare. Each of these instructions is 3 microseconds shorter when two-character
addresses are used and 3 microseconds longer when
four-character addresses are used. Indexing or
indirect addressing requires an additional 4. 5
microseconds per modified address.
Optional Features
Storage Protect: Protects the contents of one
designated memory area against accidental reference or alteration by unrelated programs; provides
15 additional index registers for use by programs
inside the protected area.
Scientific Unit: Provides instructions for floatingpoint operations and decimal-binary radix conversions.
Optional Instruction Package:
up control facilities.
Provides table look-
Instruction Compatibility with the IBM 1401 and
1410
Please see the detailed comparison of instruction
codes in the Instruction List section, page 510:121.100.
A general discussion of the compatibility between
the Honeywell Series 200 and the IBM 1401/1410 is
presented in Section 510:131.
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . February 1966 .
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
1 to N char.
automatic
automatic
decimal
or binary
decimal
decimal
automatic *
automatic*
automatic*
binary
binary
binary
36 & 12 bits.
36 & 12 bits.
36 & 12 bits.
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
with optional Scientific Unit.
(Contd.)
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
513:051. 213
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
Operation and
Variation
Radix
Provision
.213 BooleanAND
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
.214 Comparison:
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating
sequence:
automatic
binary
1 to N char.
none.
automatic
binary
1 to N char.
branch on high, low, equal, unequal, or zero
balance.
automatic
1 to N char.
none.
automatic
1 to N char.
automatic
1 to N char.
o through 9,
then A through
Z, with special
symbols interspersed.
. 215 Code translation Provision: ....•. automatic (using code table
constructed by programmer).
From: . . . . . . . . . any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
To: . . . . . . . . • . . any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
Size: .•.....••. 1 to N characters .
. 216 Radix conversion Provision: . . . . . . automatic (with optional
Scientific Unit).
From: . . . . . . . . . binary or decimal.
To: . . . . . . . • • . . decimal or binary.
.217 Edit format Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert $, CR-*:
Float $:
Protection:
• 218 Table look-up:
. 219 Others Substitute:
. 22
Provision
Comment
automatic
expand but
not contract.
automatic
none.
1 to N char.
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic (with Optional Instruction Package) .
automatic
performs
binary masking
Change Addressing Mode:
automatic
shifts between
2, 3, and 4
char addresses.
Branch on Sense
Switches:
automatic
16 possible
settings .
. 223 Operand size
determination: . . . . . word mark, item mark, or
record mark bits in high
or low order digit position. (Some instructions
imply one-character
operands).
.23 Instruction Formats
Special Cases of Operands
.221 Negative numbers: ... absolute value, with B
zone bit in units position.
.222 Zero: . . . . . . . • . . . pOSitive, negative, and unsigned zeros and blanks
give same result in
decimal arithmetic but
are unequal in comparisons.
OP
Part
Size (char):
1
A or I
2, 3, or 4
1 char.
.231 Instruction structure: . variable; 1 to 12 characters.
.232 Instruction layout:
B
VI or C1
V2 or C2
C3
2, 3, or 4
1
1
1
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 1200
513:051. 232
.232 Instruction layout (Contd.)
An instruction may consist of:
(1) OP only
(2) OP, VI
(3) OP, A or I
(4) OP, A or I, VI
(5) OP, A or I, B
(6) OP,
(7) OP,
(8) OP,
(9) OP,
(10) OP,
C3·
A or I, B, VI
A, B, VI, V2
A or I, C1
A or I, C1, C2
A or I, C1, C2,
.233 Instruction parts
Name
Purpose
OP: .••••..•.•..• operation code.
A: •.•••.••••••.• address of an operand or
field in core storage.
I: ••••••..••.•.• location of next instruction
if a branch occurs.
B: •••••••••••••• address of an operand or
field in core storage.
V1 or C1: •.••••.• modifier for an operation
code, control field for an
I/O instruction, or partial address in a translate instruction.
V2 or C2: •.••..••• partial address in a translate instruction or control field for an I/O
instruction.
C3: .•..••..••... control field for an I/O
instruction.
.234 Basic address
structure:
.2 + O.
• 235 LiteralsArithmetic: . . . . . . none.
Comparisons and
tests: •••••••.. yes; single character.
Incrementing
modifiers: •..•.. none.
Masking: ..•••••. yes, single character mask.
. 236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
type: .•..•...•• core.
Minimum size: .••• 1 character.
Maximum size: •••. total capacity.
Volume accessible: . total capacity.
• 237 Address indexing . 2371 Number of methods: . 1.
.2372 Name: . . . . . . . . . . indexing.
. 2373 Indexing rule: . . . . . addition (modulo core
storage capacity).
.2374 Index specification: .. Address Type Indicator first 3 bits of 18 -bit
operand address or first
5 bits of 24-bit operand
address.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: .••.... 15.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . . . . . all 3- and 4-character
addresses .
. 2377 Cumulative indexing: . . • . . . . . . . . none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . . . . . none.
.238 Indirect addressing: .. yes.
.2381 Recursive: . . . . . . . yes.
.2382 Designation: • . . . . . Address Type Indicator first 3 bits or 5 bits
of operand address.
.2383 Control: . . . • . . . . . direct address has no indicator bit.
.2384 Indexing with indirect addressing: • yes.
.239 Stepping: . . . . . . . . . none.
.24
Special Processor Storage
(see tables below.)
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing
.311 Number of sequence
control facilities: ..• 1
· 312 Arrangement: . . . . . . programmer can exchange the
the contents of the sequence and change sequence registers by use
of Change Sequence Mode
instruction.
.313 Precedence rule: ...• programmer indicates
register to he used .
· 314 Special sub-sequence
counters: • . . . . . . • none.
.315 Sequence control step
size: . • • . . . . . . . . 1 character.
.316 Accessibility to
routines: . . . . . . . . . yes; can be loaded and
stored by instructions •
· 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: • . . . . . . • no .
· 32
Look-Ahead: . • . . . . . none.
Number of
locations
Size in
characters
Control memory:
16
48
Arithmetic unit:
2
1
Scientific Unit:
12
32
.241 Category of
storage
. 242 Category of
storage
Control memory:
Arithmetic unit:
Total num her
of locations
Physical
form
magnetic
core
silicon
diodes
16
2
Program usage
address registers,
read/write counters,
interrupt register.
operand storage
registers (not accessible to programmer).
floating-point registers.
Access time,
~
Cycle time,
~
0.25
0.50
0.50
1. 00
(Contd. )
6/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
513:051. 330
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
· 33
Interruption
.418 Shift:
10.5 + O. 375N (optional binary mantissa shift); where
N = number of bits shifted.
· 331 Possible causes
In-out units: . . ..
. 332
.333
· :l3-!
.335
.34
. 35
.4
.41
.411
.412
. 413
.414
.415
. 416
. 417
. ready to transfer one unit
of data (character or
.42 Processor Performance in Microseconds
record).
Fixed point
Floating point
Storage access: ... · Storage Protection interrupt.
Processor errors: . · Storage Protection interrupt. .421 For random addresses Control by routine: . · yes.
c = a + b:
Operator control: . . . · operator can initiate I/O
Decimal:
. . . 25.5 + 7.5D
interrupt from console.
Binary:
.24.0 + 7.5C
84 .
b = a + b:
Interruption conditions: execution of current instruction is completed.
Decimal:
13.5 + 4. 5D
Interruption process Binary: .
12.0 + 4. 5C
84 .
Registers saved: . . . contents of sequence regisSum N items:
ter and an interrupt regisDecimal:.
.. (13.5 + 4. 5D)N
ter are automatically interBinary:
.. (12.0 + 4. 5D)N
30N.
changed; address register
c = ab:
... 30.0 + 13.5D +
120.
and indicator settings are
10.5D2
automatically saved and
c = alb:
. . . . 62.3 + 53.3D +
149.
restored.
22.5D2
Destination: . . . . . fixed location (contents of
.422 For arrays of data Interrupt Register).
ci = ai + bj= . . .
117. 5 + 7. 5D
166.5
bj = ai + bj= . . . . . . . 91.5 + 4.5D
166.5
Multiprogramming:
· concurrent execution of two
Sum N items: . . . . . (73.5 + 4. 5D)N
90N.
programs is controlled by
192.
c = c + aibf . . . . . . 126 + 22.5D +
the Operating System 10.5D2
Mod 2, described in
. 423 Branch based on comparison Section 510:193.
Numeric data: . . . . . 127.5 + 3D .
Multisequencing: . . . . none.
Alphabetic data: .
. 127.5 + 3C .
. 424 SwitchingPROCESSOR SPEEDS
Unchecked: . . .
. 72.
All execution times listed here are based on use of
Checked: . . . .
. . 72.
List search: .. . .. 34.5 + (84.0 + 3D)N.
the 3-character addressing modes; most instructions are 3 microseconds shorter in the 2-character .425 Format control per characteraddressing mode, and 3 microseconds longer in the
Unpack: . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Compose: . . . . • . . 6.4
4-character addressing mode.
.426 Table look-up per comparison D = operand length in decimal digits.
Unpack: . . . . . . . . . 1. 5C *
C = operand length in characters.
For least or greatest: 1. 5C *
Instruction Times in Microseconds
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . . 1. 5C*
Fixed point .427 Bit indicators Add-sui.itract:
Set bit in separate
Decimal: ..
.13.5 + 4.5D
12.0 + 4.5C
location: . . . . "
. 15.
Binary:
18 + 10.5D + 10. 5D2;
Set bit in pattern: . . . 16.5
Multiply: . . .
Test bit in separate
where multiplier and
multiplicand are both D
location: • . . . . . . . 18.
digits in length.
Test bit in pattern: .. 18.
.428 Moving: . . . . . . . . . . 12. 0 + 3C.
Divide: . . . . . . . . . · 36.75 + 44. 25D + 22. 5D2;
where the dividend is
* With optional features.
twice the length of the
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
divisor (D = no. of digits
in divisor).
Check or
Floating point Interlock
Action
Add-subtract:
. 30.
Overflow:
Multiply: . . . .
. 66.
check
set indicator.
Zero divisor:
Di vide:
. 95.
overflow
set indicator .
Additional allowance for check
Invalid data:
validity
set indicator.
Indexing: . . . . . . . . 4.5 per modified address.
check
Indirect addressing: . 4.5 per stage.
Invalid operation:
Re-complementing: .. 3D.
check
stop with
Controlerror
Compare: ... .
indication.
· 13.5 + 3D.
Arithmetic error:
none.
Branch: . . . . .
· 10.5
Invalid address:
Counter control:
limit check stop with error
· none.
Edit: . . . . . . . .
.12 + 10.5C
indication .
Receipt of data:
parity check set indicator .
Convert Dispatch of data:
send parity
Decimal to binary: .. 47.5*
bit.
Binary to decimal: .. 45. *
..
.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
-1.
513: 1 11. 101
m" ...
~'EDP
AUERBAC~
-
HONEYWELL 1200
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
IEItDITS
~
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
The Honeywell 1200 can control three or four input-output operations concurrently
with internal processing, as described below.
(1)
Computation within the central processor continues at all times,
except during the individual 1. 5-microsecond cycles required for
each unit of data transferred between core storage and any
peripheral unit.
(2)
In addition, in every Honeywell 1200 system any three of the
peripheral data transfer operations listed in Table I (over) can
proceed at one time (one on each read-write channel) in addition
to the continuing central processor operation. Lengths of the
start time, data transmission time, and stop time are shown for
each operation, along with its demands upon the central processor
(CP) and the selected channel.
(3)
One additional simultaneous data transfer operation can occur
(a total of four), provided that the data transfer rates on both
Channell and the AUXiliary Read-Write Channel are "comparatively
undemanding." Input-output units which do allow both Channell and
the Auxiliary Channel to operate in parallel include the Model 227
Card Punch, Model 223 Card Reader, Model 224 Card Punch,
Model 214 Card Units, any magnetic tape units operating at under
45, 000 characters per second, and the paper tape equipment.
(4)
The capability to read from one tape unit and write simultaneously
on another tape unit connected to the same Tape Control Unit is
provided in most of the 204B Series (one-half inch) Magnetic Tape
Units, but not in the 204A Series (three-quarter inch) tapes.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
513:111.102
HONEYWELL 1200
TABLE I - SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
OPERATION
Start Time
msec.
Time,
msec.
CP
Use
214 Card Reader
150
20.0
0
Yes
214 Card Punch
150-600
7.5
0
Yes
223 Card Reader
75
13.0
0
Yes
224-1 Card Punch
335-1210
6.2
0
Yes
224- 2 Card Punch
223-660
3.0
0
227 Card Reader
75
21 to 46
0
227 Card Punch
222-1, -2, -3 Printer
(51-character set)
240
42 to 102
0
Stop Time
Data Transmission
Channel Time,
Use
msec.
CP
Use
Channel Time,
Use
msec.
CP
Use
Channel
Use
55.0
<0.1%
Yes
75.0
0
No
6.25n
<0.1%
Yes
92.5
0
No
46
0.2%
Yes
16
0
No
12.5n
<0.1%
Yes
210
0
No
Yes
6.25n
0.1%
Yes
160
0
No
Yes
44
6.8%
Yes
10
0
No
Yes
176
0.8%
22
0
75
12.8%
Yes
Yes
17 + 5LS
0
No
No
92 + 5LS
0
-
-
222-4 Printer (46character set)
63 + 5LS
0
-
-
46
18.0%
Yes
17 + 5LS
0
No
222- 5 Printer (63character set)
133 + 5LS
0
-
-
116
9.8%
Yes
17 + 5LS
0
No
209 Paper Tape Reader
2.0
?
0
Yes
Val'.
01.%
Yes
?
0
No
210 Paper Tape Punch
8.3
?
0
Yes
Val'.
<0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
204A-l Magnetic Tape,
32KC
-
11.0a
0
Yes
Var.
4.8%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204A-2 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
5.5 a
0
Yes
Val'.
9.6%
Yes
00
-
-
204A-3 Magnetic Tape,
89KC
-
5.5 0
0
Yes
Val'.
13.4%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-1, -2 Magnetic
Tapc, 20KC
-
12.5a
0
Yes
Val'.
·3.0%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-3, -4 Mag;netic
Tape, ·!-IKC
-
7.5 a
0
Yes
Val'.
6.6%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-5 Magnetic Tape,
67KC
-
5.8 a
0
Yes
Var.
10.1%
Yes
00
-
-
204B-7 Magnetic Tape,
29KC
-
20.8 a
0
Yes
Var.
4.2%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-8 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
7.5 a
0
Yes
Var.
9.6%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-11, -12 Magnetic
Tape, 13KC
-
18.7 a
0
Yes
Val'.
2.0%
Yes
Oa
-
-
270 Random Access
Drum
-
25.0
0
Yes
Val'.
15.3%
Yes
0
-
-
251 Mass Memory
16.7
95 avo
0
Yes
Val'.
15%
Yes
No
16.7
150 avo
0
Yes
Val'.
15%
Yes
-
0
252 Mass Memory
0
No
253 Mass Memory
16.7
225 avo
0
Yes
Var.
15%
Yes
-
0
No
a
b
LS
n
Val'.
6/66
Cycle
Time,
Cross-gap time for short gap (replaces start and stop times).
For the character mode; time for tbe record mode is variable.
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lincs.
Number of characters punched.
Data transmission time varies witb record length.
A
AUERBACH
@
513:201. 001
fA
AUERBACH
SUI DUG
EDlP
HONEYWELL 1200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
UPDltS
SYSTEM PERfORMANCE
GENERAliZED FILE PROCESSING (513:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common
commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
Standard File Problems A, B, and C show the effects of three different record sizes in the
master file. Standard Problem D increases the amount of computation performed upon each
transaction. Each problem is estimated for activity factors (ratios of number of detail records
to number of master records) of zero to unity. In all cases a uniform distribution of activity
is assumed.
Conventional Processing (Configurations I. II.
m.
IV. VI. and VIlA)
In Configuration I, the master and detail input files are assigned to the card reader.
The output files are assigned to the card punch (updated master file) and printer (report file).
For Problems A. B, C, and D, the card punch is always the controlling factor on overall processing time.
In Configurations II, m, IV, VI. and VIlA, the master files are on magnetic tape.
The detail file is assigned to the card reader and the report file to the printer. For Configuration II. in all four Standard File Problems, the printer is the controlling factor at high and
moderate activities, while the two master-file tape units (which cannot read and write simultaneously) are the controlling factor at lower activities. For Configurations m. IV, VI. and
VIlA, in all four of the Standard File Problems. the printer is the controlling factor at high,
moderate, and low activities. One master-file tape controls at activities near zero.
In Configurations IV and VIlA. for problems A, B, and C. the auxiliary read/write
channel is interlocked because of the high speed of the tapes used. and only three read/write
channels are available. At low activity, the two magnetic tape units assigned to one read/write
channel become the controlling factor for Configurations IV and VIlA (the higher horizontal line
segment on graph 513:201:100). When the activity becomes low enough so that the combined
times for the printer and card reader become less than the combined time for the tapes, the
printer and card reader are assigned to one channel and the two tapes are assigned to two
separate channels (the sloping straight line). Near zero activity. the combined times for the
printer and card reader become lower than the time for each tape, so a single tape unit becomes the controlling factor (the lower horizontal line segment).
Tape-to-Tape Processing (Configuration VIIB)
In tape-oriented Configuration VIlB. all four files are on magnetic tape. Data transcriptions between tape and card or printer are performed off-line on a satellite system in this
configuration, and timings for the data transcription operations are therefore not shown. In
Problems A, B. and D. for Configuration VIIB with all four files blocked, the central processor
is the controlling factor at high to moderate activities, and one master-file tape and the reportfile tape control at low activity. In Problem C. one master-file tape and the report-file tape
control at all activities. For Configuration VIlB with unblocked detail and report files, one
master-file tape and the report-file tape are the controlling factors at all activities in all four
problems.
SORTING (513:201. 200)
The standard estimate for sorting SO-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem A by the method explained in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users' Guide. A two-way merge was used in System
Configuration II (which has only four magnetic tape units) and a three-way merge in Configurations m. IV. VI. VIlA, and VIIB. The results are shown in Graph 513:201. 200.
MATRIX INVERSION (513:201.300)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric. non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 1200
513:201. 002
involved. The standard estimate is based on the time required to perform cumulative multiplication (c = c+ aibj) in 8-digit-precision floating-point, as explained in Paragraph 4:200.3 of the
Users' Guide. The precision of floating-point operations is equivalent to approximately 11
digits in the Honeywell Series 200.
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (513 :201. 400)
This problem measures overall system performance on a simple mathematical application that involves widely varying ratios of input-to-computation-to-output volumes, as
described in Section 4:200.4 of the Users' Guide.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1 (STANDARD FILE PROBLEM A)
CONFIGURATION
I
ITEM
1
Recordslblock
K
Insce/block
File 1::.: File 2
InputOutput
Timcs
msce/switch
80
(File 1
Char/block
msce/record
Central
Processor msce/detail
Times
mace/work
msce/report
File
Problem
A
msec/block
for C.P.
.nd
dominant
column
1,080
1,080
1,080
I,OBO
10
10
10
10
10
99.7
58.5
23.5
23.5
23.5
94
129
129
94
129
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
File 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
75
75
75
File 4
!FII.
= File 2
•
·2
bG
0
0
0
0
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
~ I8 3
0.1
0.1
0.1
L.l.- I--
0.1
1.2
0.1
8.3
B.3
B.3
B.3
loB
0.2
0.27
0.B5
0.27
0.B5
0.27
0.85
0.27
0.B5
~ I--
0.27
0.85
0.27
0.B5
0.B5
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12
2.1B
2.1B
2.1B
2.1B
2.1B
2.18
b7 + b8
0.94
0.94
0.94
0.94
0.94
0.94
Punch
C.P. Printer
0.3
C.P.
0.3
~aBterOut
~etails
File 4: Reoorts
Printer
C.P.
0.3
~
32.3
Printer
C.P.
0.3
I/O
~ 4:200.1132
~
0.94
C.P.
0.3
I/O
.0.3- - . - . - ' - .-.. - .~
. - . .!.:.L . - -.!!..:..!!. . - .~ . 32.3
32.3
32.3
32.3
4:200.114
~ . - . .2:2.. . - .~ . - . ..2:2... . - ~ . - ~ ' - .~ . r--hl- 4li,.L .....h1. . - -h1... . - .-h1... . - . ....!:..L.. . - .-L.1. .~ . -L.1. .~
~ . - -1.:..Q.. . - • ...!.:..Q... . - . ....h!!.... . - . ....hL . - . -l:.! . - -l:.! . 4.2
6.7
Total
Printer C.P.
.- .- .-.-
f'1- = - - - - - I - -
~~
4:200.112
0
h5 + b9
C.P.
0.3
9.3
~
. - .~ I!!Z..!L--r--lhL
1.6
32.3
'3 K
F" 1.0
23.5
Filel=FileZ
75
REFEHENCE
~
20
. 25
75
3
Standard
1,080
File 3
IFile
msec/block
VIIB
VIIB
(Blocked Files (Unblocked
3 &. 4)
Files 3 & 4)
VIlA
10
75/437.5
File 3
-
IV
1.080
0.5
File 1
File 4
msce penalty
III &. VI
II
437.5
B3.0
1 290
B3.0
1 290
B3.0
940
B3.0
1 290
I.B
25.0
I.R
93.0
12B.5
1 290
12B.5
1,290
128.5
940
12B.5
1,290
47.5
4B.5
47.5
116.5
Unit of measure (characters)
~
100
2,250
2,250
2,250
2,250
2,250
1B
IB
1B
IB
45
45
45
350
612
612
612
612
612
612
2,334
2,334
2,334
2,334
2,334
2,334
2,334
720
2,560
4,720
4,702
4,720
8.320
4,720
0
lOB
lOB
lOB
lOB
lOR
108
3.522
7,882
10,042
10.042
10,069
13,669
10,Orm
Std. routines
Standard
File
Problem
Fixed
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
A
6 (Blocks 24 to 4B)
Space
Files
Working
Total
>I<
2,250
4:200.1151
Heeords blocked 10 records/block.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2 (STANDAIlD MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM A)
CONFIGURATION
VI,VIIA
ITEM
Unit name
Standard
~lathemat-
ieal
Problem
A
Size of record
msce/bloek
mace penalty
~
output
~
output
innut
U
output
T2
~"!L
outnut
~"
T5
msee/record
--'----- ----"~op_s__________T6__
msce/report
6/66
Floating point
Floating point
Fixed/ Floating Point
T7
___
22_3 Card Reader
204B-8 Magnetic Tape
222-3 Printer
______
BO_ _ _
204B-B Magnetic Tape
-------
120
_7_5_ _ _
-------
.-
_8_0_____________
4:200.413
80
B.8
B. B
92
-
HEFEHENCE
VlIB
0.1
0.1
B.3
10.71
0.1
10.71
7.14
7.14
2.06
2.06
-
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
@
513:201. 100
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.114 Graph:
.11
Standard File Problem A
.115 Storage space required
Configuration I: .•
Configuration II: ••
Configurations TIl,
IV, & VI:
Configuration VlIA: •
Configuration VIlE
(blocked Files 3&4):.
Configuration VIm
(unblocked Files
3&4): • . . . • . •
.111 Record sizes Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
. 112 Computation:
.113 Timing basis:
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
standard •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
• • • . . • . • see graph below.
3,522 characters.
7,882 characters.
10,042 characters.
10,069 characters.
13,669 charactcrs.
10,069 characters.
1,000.0
7
4
2
I
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
2
~
"\1.,
10.0
7
L
"
",
\\\,"J'\,
\"J'
::::::::-------
-
.-
//
4 -II
7 '. /
2
1.0
Ill, VI
7;/
7
V/
V
IV . -
10M"
~
4
~
VIlA
.......
~
---
1..---
V!!~
--
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
- - - unblocked Files 3 and 4.
---blocked Files 3 and 4.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
513:201. 120
• 12
HONEYWELL 1200
Standard File Problem B
.121 Record sizes 54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
Master file: •
Detail file:
Report file: •
. 122 Computation: • • ••
standard •
• 123 Timing basis: • . ••
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
.124 Graph: • • • • • . •.
see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
2
ll~1'T
10.0
7
./
4
2
1.0
1..0'
/' /"
//
-
~
7/
/
7
t:: VIIA . /
4
V
rc;~
2
~
III,VI
..",
./-
100 ....
----
vnB
---
---
0.1
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
- - - - unblocked Files 3 and 4.
_ _ _ blocked Files 3 and 4.
(Contd. )
6/66
A
AUERBACH
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.13
513:20 I. 130
Standard File Problem C
.132 Computation: .
.133 Timing basis: •
standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
.134 Graph:
see graph below.
.131 Record sizes -
4:200.13.
216 characters.
Master file: •
Detail file:
Report file: .
1 card.
1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
--------~
2
~.\\\.~\.
10.0
\~
II
7
'..;"
./
/' ./
4
2
1.0
.-
/7
III, VI
ff/f
V/
'/
7
------
VllB
-
VIlB
-~
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
- - - - unblocked Files 3 and 4.
---blocked Files 3 and 4.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
6/66
HONEYWELL 1200
513:201. 140
. 14
.142 Computation: •
.143 Timing basis: •
Standard File Problem D
.141 Record sizes Master file:
Detail file: •
Report file: .
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
.144 Graph:
trebled •
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14.
see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
~
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
2
,~
"\1,1"\1,'1\,
1"\1
10.0
7
....
/
4
2
1.0
7
4
//
- t-II
:::------
--
,,'/
III,VI
lib
V/
V
VIlA
"\1"\1"£>
.-
Ll . J .....
-"
u,1=::"'- I---"\I\\"£>
-- --- ---
~
/IV
--
,
.....
....
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
- - - - unblocked Files 3 and 4.
- - - blocked Files 3 and 4.
(Contd. )
6/66
A
AUERBACH
@
51 3: 20 1. 200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.213 Timing basis:
.2
SORTING
• 21
Standard Problem Estimates
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 •
see graph below •
. 214 Graph:
.211 Record size:
• 212 Key size:
80 characters.
8 characters •
1,000
7
4
~~
2
V
/
100
7
f
,/
~
/
'I'
4
V
<>-/'
/
2
~/
/11
Time in Minutes to
put Records into
Required Order
10
~
/
_
;#1
~
'l
~~'
7
~,/
/
~
/
4
/
/
L
2
1
/
'I'
II
V
7
/
~
/
~~
f
/
I
V
4
V
2
/
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
513:201. 300
HONEYWELL 1200
.312 Timing basis:
.3
MA TRIX INVERSION
• 31
Standard Problem Estimates
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200 •. 312 •
see graph below •
• 313 Graph: • • . • • • .
• 311 Basic parameters: •• general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits.
10.0
I
7
I
4
I
I
If
2
~
1.0
7
II
4
J
If
2
/
Time in Minutes
for Complete
0.1
Inversion
7
I
I
I
I
4
I
2
/
0.01
J
I
7
I
II
4
2
~
0.001
2
1
4
7
10
2
4
2
7
4
100
7
l. 000
Size of Matrix
(For all configurations equipped with the Scientific Option)
(Contd. )
6/66
fA
AUERBACH
@
513:201. 400
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
.413 Timing basis:
. 414 Graph:
• 411 Record sizes:
• 412 Computation: • • ••
••••
0
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413 •
see graph below .
••
10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits .
5 fifth-order polynomials,
5 divisions, 1 square root;
ll-digit-precision floatingpoint mode.
10,000
7
4
2
1,000
7
4
h
2
VI, VIIA
Time in
100
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
- ~ VI,
(R
/
= 1.0)
~"
~~
4
~\>
..........
......
-
10
~
0.01, 0.1)
VIlA (R
2
I'
-J
~~'l
\).
\)\.'
~\):
I'
i--'"
7
4
2
i,
\
1
2
0.1
4
7
2
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
4
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/66
HONEYWEll 2200
Honeywell EDP Division
(
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
HONEYWELL 2200
Honeywell EDP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
51 4: 0 11. 100
A""""
HONEYWELL 2200
INTRODUCTION
AEDP
AUER8AC~
REPORTS
"
INTRODUCTION
The Honeywell 2200 Processor can be connected to any of the Honeywell Series 2no
peripheral units, can use any of the Series 200 programming languages, can run most programs
originally written for an IBM 140] or 1410, and can operate in a multiprogrammed mode, using
the Storage Protect feature to help insure safe handling of the concurrently-operating programs.
The 2200 Processor can contain between 16,384 and 262,144 characters of core storage. with a
cycle time of one microsecond per character.
Standard features of the Honeywell 2200 Processor include: Program Interrupt,
Multiply-Divide, Advanced Programming. Edit Instruction. 8-Bit Code Handling. four read-write
channels, and 16 I/O trunks.
Optional features are: Scientific Unit (floating-point arithmetic), Storage Protect,
Additional Four Read-Write Channels and 16 I/O Trunks, and Optional Instruction Package
(table look-Up facilities).
The rental for typical Honeywell 2200 systems ranges from about $8,000 to $] 7,000
per month. Deliveries began in December 1965.
This report concentrates upon the characteristics and the performance of the Honeywell 2200 in particular. All the general characteristics of the Honeywell Series 200 computers,
peripheral equipment, and software are described in Computer System Report 510: Honeywell
Series 200 - General.
The System Configuration section which follows shows the Honeywell 2200 in the
following standard System Configurations:
lIT:
IV:
V:
VIlA:
VIIB:
6-Tape Business System
12-Tape Business System
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System
10-Tape General System (Integrated)
10-Tape General System (Paired with the Honeywell 120).
These configurations were prepared according to the rules in the Users' Guide. page
4:030.120, and any significant deviations from the standard specifications are listed.
Section 514:051 provides detailed central processor timings for the Honeywell 2200.
The input-output channel capabilities of the Honeywell 2200. and the demands upon the
processor during input-output operations, are described in Section 514:111.
Several levels of software support can be used with Honeywell 2200 systems. The
two versions of Operating System - Mod 1 can be used, providing software packages that are
resident on either magnetic tape or mass storage devices. Several levels of COBOL and
FORTRAN language processors and Easycoder assemblers are offered with Operating
System - Mod 1. Automatic stacked job processing facilities and several data management
routines are also provided. Honeywell 2200 systems that have at least 49K characters of core
storage can also use the advanced software of the Operating System - Mod 2, featuring automatic program scheduling and improved language processors. These software systems and the
Series 200 Basic Programming System are described in Sections 510:151 through 510:193.
The overall performance of any Honeywell Series 200 system is heavily dependent
upon the processor model used. A full System Performance analysis of standardized configurations utilizing the Honeywell 2200 is provided in Section 514:201.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
-~
514:031. 100
su,,'"
HONEYWELL 2200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
/AEDP
AUERIIAC~
REPIIRIS
_ -....'"'------1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The Honeywell 2200 Processor contains either 4 or 8 input-output channels and 16
or 32 input-output trunks. This means that up to 32 peripheral devices or controllers can
be connected, and a maximum of 8 data transfer operations can occur simultaneously with
internal processing. The connections between devices and channels are established under
program control.
Any of the available Series 200 peripheral units can be connected to a Honeywell
2200 Processor. These peripheral units are described in detail in the main Series 200 Computer System Report, and their trunk requirements are summarized in the main System Configuration section, page 510:031. 100 .
.1
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION III
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . . . card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
console typewriter input is included.
ability to read and write magnetic tape
simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Rental *
2201-1 Processor with
16, 384 characters of
core storage
$3,640
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
28,800 char/sec (800 cpi)
220-3 Console (includes
Teleprinter)
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . ..
Optional Instruction Package
(Table Look-up Facilities)
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
435
2,460
310
50
$8,545
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The same
configuration with a five-year agreement rents for $7,715 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
514:031. 200
.~
HONEYWELL 2200
U-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION IV
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is up to 50% slower.
Equipment
Rental*
2201-2 Processor with
32,768 characters of core
storage
$ 4,665
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/min
155
310
222-4 Printer and Control:
950 lines/min (120 print
positions)
1,305
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
220-3 Console (includes
Teleprinter)
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • Optional Instruction Package
(Table Look-up Facilities)
TOTAL RENTAL:
/
310
50
$15,305
* The
rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year agreement rents for $13,820 per month.
./
.3
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
This Configuration is identical to Configuration III for the Honeywell 2200 (preceding page) except
for the addition of one 250 Mass Memory File Control and one 251 Mass Memory File, which
provide 15 million characters of storage and bring the total system rental to $9,550 per month
($8,615 with a 5-year contract).
./
(Contd. )
7/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
.---
514:031. 400
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.4
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations for Standard Configuration: ..•...•.•..•••• card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
Equipment
Rental*
2201-6 Processor with 98,304
characters of core storage
$ 7,995
220-3 Console (includes typewriter and direct control)
310
222-3 Printer and Control
(120 print positions): 650
lines/min
925
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 lines/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/min
155
310
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
64, 000 char/sec
435
3,075
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,075
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . • . . Scientific Unit
Optional Instruction Package
(Table Look-up Facilities)
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
440
50
$17,515
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The same
configuration with a five-year agreement rents for $15,700 per month.
I
\,
© 1966 AUERBACH Corpcration and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 2200
514:031. 500
.5
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIlB
lkviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . • . . • • . . card reader is 700% faster.
direct connection to satellite system.
*
Equipment
Rental
2201-4 Proce.ssor and Console
with 65,536 characters of
core storage
$ 6,460
/
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (8):
64,000 char/sec
435
4,920
220-3 Console (includes
Teleprinter and direct control)
310
212-1 On-Line Adapter Unit
(for connection to H-120
Processor)
410
Optional Features Included: • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scientific Unit
Optional Instruction Package
440
50
To Satellite System
(next page)
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
$13,335
3,590
$16,925
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement. The
same configuration with a five-year agreement rents for $15,305 per month.
,/
(Contd.)
7/66
fA.
AUERBACH
®
-
514:031. 501
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.5
CONFIGURATION VIlB (Contd.)
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT (Honeywell 120)
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . • • . • • . • . . . . . card reader is 20% slower.
ability to overlap printing and one
input-output operation with
computing is standard.
console typewriter input is included.
6 index registers.
Equipment
Rental
121-2 Central Processor
Console with 4,096 character
$ 1,000
positions of core storage
Control Unit Adapter
(Non-Simultaneous)
155
214-2 Card Reader/Punch Reads:
400 cards/min
Punches: 100-400 cards/min
340
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (2):
28,800 char/sec
435
820
122 Printer:
450 lines/min (120 print positions)
510
220-1 Console
205
(includes Teleprinter)
To H-2200
System (previous page)
Optional Features Included:
. . . • • . . . . • . • • Advanced Programming
Edit Instruction
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
75
50
$ 3,590
7/66
514:051. 100
/1&
AUERBACH
STlNDlItD
EDP
HONEYWELL 2200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
REPORlS
~
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ...
.12
Description
. Central Processor.
Models 2201-1 through
2201-12
The Model 2201 Processor performs all the arithmetic and logical functions in a Honeywell 2200
system under control of one or more internally
stored programs. The processor works in conjunction with a control memory that contains program sequencing, program interrupt, and other
associated registers. Only one control memory
can be utilized in a Honeywell 2200 system. (The
original specifications, now withdrawn, called for
two control memories.)
The 2201 instruction code is basically a twoaddress, add-to-storage type. This code includes
all the Honeywell 200 instructions (which are almost identical with those of the IBM 1401), plus
alphanumeric comparison and table look-up operations. Fifteen index registers are also included in
the basic unit. The instruction repertoire, from
a programmer's view, is very similar to that of
the IBM 1410 and 7010 systems.
Binary addressing is used to minimize instruction
sizes; address lengths can vary from two characters to four characters. Four-character addressing permits direct addressing of any position
within the maximum 262K core memory. The type
of addressing in use at any time is controlled by
special instructions and can be varied by the programmer as needed. Even with this facility, the
multiple addressing modes may lead to complications in the interpretation of diagnostics and in the
use of operating systems.
The control memory is a small magnetic core
storage unit with an access time of 0.25 microsecond and a cycle time of 0.50 microsecond. It
holds up to 64 control registers, each capable of
storing the address of one character position in
the main memory. Instructions are provided to
load and store the contents of each of these registers. Only 37 of the control registers can
currently be used by the Model 2201 Processor:
(1) A-Address Register.
(2) B-Address Register.
(3) Sequence Register.
(4) Change Sequence Register.
(5) Read-Write Channell - Present Location
Counter.
(6) Read-Write Channel 1 - Starting Location
Counter.
(7) Read-Write Channel 2 - Present Location
Counter.
(8) Read-Write Channel 2 - Starting Location
Counter.
(9) Read-Write Channel 3 - Present Location
Counter.
(10) Read-Write Channel 3 - Starting Location
Counter.
(11) Auxiliary R/W Channel - Present Location
Counter.
(12) Auxiliary R/W Channel - Starting Location
Counter.
(13) Interrupt Register.
The Model 2201 Processor consists of five basic
functional units: the main memory, the control
memory, the control unit, the arithmetic unit,
and the input-output traffic control.
(14) Internal Interrupt Register (Storage Protect).
The main memory consists of from 16, 384 to
262, 144 alphanumeric character positions of core
storage with a cycle time of one microsecond per
character; see Section 510:041 for a complete
description. Each character position consists of
six data bits, one parity bit, and two punctuation
bits. The punctuation bits can be used to indicate
a word mark, an item mark, or a record mark,
which defines the length of a data field or instruction, an item, or a record, respectively. An
"item" consists of a group of consecutive data
fields. (The IBM 1400 series computers utilize
only one punctuation bit - the "word mark" bit and each record mark occupies an entire character
position. The two punctuation bits used in the
Honeywell 2200 will decrease data storage requirements and provide increased flexibility in data
movement operations. The Extended Move instruction, for example, can be terminated by a word
mark, an item mark, or a record mark, as specified by the programmer.)
(30-37) Optional I/O Sector - 4 additional
Read-Write Channels.
(15-17) Work Registers.
(18-29) Scientific Unit (Feature 1100).
The control unit controls the sequential selection,
interpretation, and execution of all stored program
instructions and checks for correct (odd) parity
whenever a character is moved from one location
to another. It also provides for communication
with the operator's control panel.
The input-output traffic control directs the timesharing of accesses to the main memory by the
various peripheral devices and the central processor. This control operation is associated with
the control memories, which contain the control
information used by each of the data transfers.
Up to eight input-output operations can proceed
simultaneously under the supervision of the control memory. The basic processor contains four
read-write channels; one of them is termed an
"auxiliary" channel and can transfer data at a
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 2200
514:051. 120
. 12
Description (Contd.)
maximum rate of 33, 333 characters per second.
Four additional read-write channels are available
as an option.
The allocation of data transmission channels to
input-output trunks is flexible. The actual allocation of a specific peripheral device to a specific
channel is initiated by an instruction, rather than
by the operator.
The arithmetic unit executes all arithmetic and
logical operations. It consists of an adder that
can perform both decimal and binary arithmetic
and two one-character operand storage registers.
The 2200 is basically a two-address, add-to-storage system. All operations are performed serially
by character and terminated when specific punctuation bit configurations are sensed. This means
that operand sizes are fully variable and are
limited only by the amount of core storage available to hold them.
The processor is well suited to general data
manipulation, including, as standard features,
excellent editing capabilities, indexing, indirect
addressing, an Item Move instruction, a Move
and Translate instruction, multiplication, and
division.
The indexing facilities are comparatively numerous. Each of the 15 or 30 registers is held in
the main core memory, so indexing takes one
microsecond per character or three microseconds
per address modified.
The Move and Translate instructions can effect
translations between any two 6-bit codes. A table
must be provided for every code into which conversions are to be made, arranged in the order
of the bit patterns of the code from which conversion is planned. Handling of 8-bit codes is also
provided.
. 21
Instruction length is variable from one to twelve
characters. Arithmetic and data movement instructions are most commonly nine characters
long when using the four-character addressing
mode. Through careful placement of data, instructions can sometimes be "chained" so that a onecharacter instruction does the work of a ninecharacter one, resulting in savings in both storage
space and execution time. Chaining is possible
only when a series of operations is to be performed
upon items of data stored in consecutive locations,
so that the A- and B-Address Registers do not need
to be reloaded before each instruction is executed.
Typical instruction execution times, usill,g the
four-character addressing mode, are 28 microseconds for a five-digit decimal addition and 224
microseconds for a five-digit multiplication.
Optional Features
Additional 4 Read-Write Channels and 16 InputOutput Trunks: Permits 16 additional peripheral
units or controllers to be connected to a Honeywell
2200, and provides up to 4 additional simultaneous
data transfers.
Storage Protect: Protects the contents of one
specified block of memory against accidental
reference or alteration by unrelated programs;
provides 15 additional index registers for use by
programs inside and outside the protected area.
Scientific Unit: Provides automatic floatingpoint arithmetic and decimal-binary radix
conversion operations.
Optional Instruction Package: Provides table
look-up instructions.
. 14
First Delivery: . . . . . December 1965.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
Operations and Operands
Operation and
Variation
.211 Fixed point Add- subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.212 Floating point Add- subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
1 to N char.
automatic
automatic
decimal
or binary
decimal
decimal
automatic*
automatic*
automatic*
binary
binary
binary
36 & 12 bits.
36 & 12 bits.
36 & 12 bits.
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
*with optional Scientific Unit .
. 213 BooleanAND
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
. 214 ComparisonNumbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating
sequence:
7/66
binary
automatic
none.
automatic
binary
branch on high, low, equal,
zero balance.
automatic
none.
automatic
automatic
1 to N char.
1 to N char .
unequal, or
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
o through
9, then
A through Z,
with special
symbols
interspersed.
A
AUERBACH
~
/'
(Contd.)
514:051. 215
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.215 Codc translation Provision: . . . . . .
Fl'om:
To: ..
Sil'.c: .
.216 Radix convcrsion Pl·ovision: . . . .
From:
To: ..
· automatic (using code table
constructed by programmer).
· . any 6-bit through 12-bit codc.
· . any 6-bit through 12-hit code.
· . 1 to N characters.
· . automatic (with Scientific
Unit).
· decimal or binary.
· binary or decimal.
.217 Edit formatAltcl' size:
Suppress zcro:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert $, CR-*:
Float $:
Protection:
.218 Table look-up Condition
Provision
Equality:
automatic*
Not equal:
automatic*
Greater than
(or equal):
automatic*
Less than
(01' equal):
automatic*
Greatest:
none.
Least:
none.
Provision
Comment
automatic
expand
but not
contract
automatic
none.
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
Comment
1 to N entries,
delimited by
word marks.
Fixed size
table arguments
are required.
*with Optional Instruction Package .
. 219 OthersSubstitute
Change
Addressing
Mode:
Branch on
Sense
Switches:
automatic
1 to N
char.
· 223 Operand size
determination: .
· 23
. •. word mark, item mark,
or record mark bits in
high or low-order digit
position. (Some instructions imply one-character
operands. )
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure: . variable; 1 to 12 characters.
· 232 Instruction layout:
performs binary
masking on a
single 6- bit
character.
An instruction may consist of:
shifts between 2,
3, or 4 character
addressing.
(2) OP, VI
(3) OP, A or I
branches according
to each of 30
possible settings.
(5) OP, A or I, B
(1) OP only
automatic
(4) OP, A or I,
automatic
Branch on
Data Control
Indicators: automatic
. 22
Size
. 222 Zero: . . . . . . . • .
VI
(9) OP, A or I, C 1, C 2
(10) OP, A or I, C 1 , C 2 , C3
(11) OP, A, C 1 , C2 , C3 , Cn
(6) OP, A or I, B, VI
.233 Instruction parts branches on any
specific combination of the Data
Control Indicators.
Special Cases of Operands
. 221 Negative numbers:
(7) OP, A, B, VI' V2
(8) OP, A or I, C 1
. absolute value, with B
zone bit in units position.
. positive, negative, and
unsigned zeros and blanks
give same result in most
decimal arithmetic operations but are unequal in
comparisons.
Name
OP:
A:
I: •
B:
Purpose
. . . . . . . . . operation code.
. address of an operand or
field in core storage .
. location of next instruction
if a branch occurs .
... address of an operand or
field in core storage .
. . . . . . . . . modifier for an operation
code, control field for
an I/O instruction, or
partial address in a
translate instruction.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 2200
514:051. 233
. 233 Instruction parts - (Contd.)
Purpose
Name
V2 or C 2: . . . • . . . . · partial address in a translate instruction or control field for an I/o
instruction.
· control field for an I/O
C,,: . • . . . . . •
oJ
instruction.
.234 Basic address
• 2 + O.
structure: ..
. 235 LiteralsArithmetic: .
. none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . . . . . . • . yes; single character.
Incrcmcnting
modifiers: .
· none'.
· yes; single character
Masking: . . . .
mask.
. 236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
type: . . . . . .
. . core.
Minimum size: . . . . . 1 character.
Maximum size: ..•. total capacity.
Volume accessible: .. total capacity .
. 237 Address indexing . 2371 Number of methods: . 1.
.2372 Name: . . . . . . . . · .. indexing.
.2373 Indexing !'llle: .•...• addition (modulo core
size).
.2374 Index specification: .. Address Modifier - first
3 bits of an l8-bit operand or first 5 bits of a
24- bit operand.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . .. 15 or 30.
· 2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . • . . . . all 3- and 4-character
addresses.
· 2377 Cumulative indexing: . none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . • . • . none .
. 238 Indirect addressing: · . yes.
· 2381 Recursive: ...
· . yes.
· . Address Modifier - first
· 2382 Designation: ..
3 or 5 bits of an operand.
. direct address has no
.2383 Control: . . . .
indicator bit.
.
. 24
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
· 31
Instruction Sequencing
· 311 Number of sequence
facilities: . . . . . . . 2; sequence and co-sequence
registers. Programmer
may switch at will from
one to the other by use of
Change Sequence Mode
instruction .
.312 Arrangement: . . . . . one set per processor .
· 313 Precedence rule: ... only one register in use
at anyone time.
(Programmer indicates
the register to be used.)
.314 Special sub-sequence
counters: . . . .
. none.
.315 Sequence control
step size: . . . .
. 1 character .
.316 AcceSSibility to
routines:. . . . .
. yes; can be loaded and
stored by instruction.
· 317 Permanent or optional
modifier:. . . . . . no.
.32
Look-Ahead:
· 33
Interruption
....• none .
.331 Possible causes In-out units: . . . . . end of operation, including
availability of all error
indications.
Storage access: ... violation of Storage
Protection, either by
alteration of contents or
by reference to contents.
Processor errors: . cannot initiate interrupts.
Others: . . . . . . . . . via two programmed
instructions and console
control panel.
.332 Control by routine: .. each peripheral interrupt
can be set or reset individually by the program.
External interrupts are
recognized during the
operation of an internal
interrupt routine .
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of
storage
Number of
locations
Size in bits
Control memory:
23
18
Arithmetic unit:
2
16
Scientific unit:
.242 Category of
storage
12
18
Total number
of locations
Control memory:
23
Arithmetic unit:
2
Scientific unit:
7/66
.3
12
Physical
form
magnetic
core
silicon
diodes
magnetic
core
IA
AUERBACH
'"
Program usage
address registers,
read/write counters,
interrupt register.
operand storage
registers (not accessible to programmer).
floating-point registers.
Access time,
tJ.sec
Cycle time,
Ilsec
0.25
0.50
0.50
1. 00
0.25
0.50
(Contd. )
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
· a3a Opel'ator control:.
514:051. 333
. interrupt can be caused via
console.
· :l:l4 Interl'uption
conditions:
. IntcI'l'upt I·cquested.
Interrupt not inhibited.
IntcI'l'upt routine not in
operation.
Intcrl'uption process -
Registers saved: .. The active sequencing
I'egister is stored. The
next instruction is taken
from the address given
in the interrupt register.
The interrupt routine
operates and, when
completed, causes the
original sequcncc register
to be I'estored.
Dl·stination: . . . . . . 2 different locations,
depending on whether
interrupt is external or
internal.
. 336 Control methods Determine cause: , . test indicators for
explicit cause.
Enable interruption: by instruction.
.34
.41
.411 Fixed point:
Add-subtract Decimal:.
Binary:.
Multiply: ..
.412
.413
.414
.415
.416
Multiprogramming
. 341 Method of control:.
. executive program; see
Sections 510: 192 and
510:193.
. 417
.342 Maximum number of
programs: . . . . . . . . one main program and one
or more peripherallimited programs .
. 418
. 343 PI'ecedence rules: ... determined by executive
program.
.42
· 344 Program protection Storage: . . . . . . . . . storage area on one side
of movable, logical
boundary must not be
read, written or tested
by a program stored on
the other side of the
boundary.
In-out units: . . . . . . protected via disallowance
of the two peripheral
device control instructions.
.35
Multisequencing: . . . . none.
·4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
All execution times listed here are based on use
of the 4-character addreSSing mode; most instructions are 4 microseconds shorter in the 2-charactel' addressing mode, and 2 microseconds shorter
in the 3-character addressing mode.
D
=
operand length in decimal digits.
C = operand length in characters.
Instruction Times in Microseconds
13 + 3D.
12 + 3C.
2
14 + 7D +7D ; where the
multiplier is the same
length as the multiPlicand.
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . 26.5 + 29. 5D + 15D ; where
the dividend is UI/ice the
length of the divisor
(D no. of digits in
divisor).
Floating point (with Scientific Unit) Add-subtract: . . . . . 20 (min).
Multiply: . . . . . . . . . 45 (avg).
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . 63 (max).
Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . . . . . 3 per modified address.
Indirect addressing: . 3 per stage.
Re-complementing: .. 2D.
Control Compare: ... .
· 13 + 2C .
Branch: . . . . .
· 10.
Counter Control:
· none.
Edit: . . . . . . . .
12 + 4C + 2(No. of characters scanned during
zero-suppression plus
no. scanned for floating
dollar sign insertion) .
Convert (5-char . fields) To binary: ..
.33.
To decimal:.
.32.
Shift: . . . . . .
· 9 + O. 25N (binary mantissa
shift with Scientific Unit,
where N = no. of bits
shifted).
Processor Performance in Microseconds
Fixed point
.421 For random addresses:
c=a+bDecimal:
25 + 5D
Binary:
24 + 5C
b=a+bDecimal:
13 + 3D
Binary:
12 + 3D
Sum N itemsDecimal:
(13 + 3D)N
Binary:
(12 + 3C)N 2
c = ab:
24 + 9D + 7D
c = alb:
47. 5 + 35. 5D +
15D2
.422 For arrays of data 100 + 5D
c. = a. + b.:
I
I
J
bi = a i + bi :
82 + 3D
Sum N items:
66 + 3D
108 + 12D + 7D2
c = c + a.b.:
1 J
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: 103 + 2D.
Alphabetic data: 103 + 2C.
.424 Switching Unchecked: . . . . . . 64.
Checked: . . . . . . . . 64.
Floating point*
56.
56.
20.
81.
99.
128.
128.
73.
146.
* with optional Scientific Unit.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 2200
514:051. 425
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: . . . . . . . . 3. O.
Compose: . . . . . . . 5.3.
. 426 Table look-up, per comparison For a match: . . . . . lC. *
:For least or
greatest: . . . . . . . lC. *
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . .. lC. *
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in scparate
location: . . . . . . . 14.
Set bit in pattern: .. 16.
Test bit in separate
locatiOll: . . . . . . . 16.
Test bit in pattern: . 16.
. 428 Moving: . . . . . . . . . l2t 2C.
5.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
check
overflow
check
Invalid data:
validity
check
Invalid operation: check
Arithmetic error: none.
Invalid address:
limit check
Receipt of data:
parity check
Dispatch of data: send parity bit.
Reference to
protected area: check
Overflow:
Zero divisor
*\\'ith optional Scientific Unit.
set indicator.
set indicator.
set indicator.
interrupt. **
interrupt. **
set indicator.
interrupt. **
**with optional Storage Protect Feature.
/
/
7/66
fA.,
AUERBACH
514: 111. 100
1.
""'AR'
~EDP
AUER8AC~
NHUAIS
HONEYWELL 2200
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
-
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Input-output operations in the Honeywell 2200 Computer System are initiated by the prog-ram and subsequently supervised by the input-output traffic control unit in conjunction with the control memory unit of the central processor.
The control memory can control either four or eight input-output operations concurrently
with internal processing-, as described below.
(1)
Computation within the central processor continues at all times,
except during- the individual I-microsecond cycles required for
each unit of data transferred between core storage and any
peripheral unit.
(2)
In addition, either three or six (depending upon the configuration
chosen) of the peripheral data transfer operations listed in Table I
(over) can proceed at one time (one on each read-write channel) in
addition to the continuing central processor operation. Lengths of
the start time, data transmission time, and stop time are shown
for each operation, along with its demands upon the central processor (CP) and the selected channel.
(3)
One or two additional simultaneous data transfer operations can
occur, provided that the data transfers occurring on both Channel 1
and Channel l' (the auxiliary read/write channel) are "comparatively
undemanding." In general, these "split" channels can service any
two units operating at less than 33,000 characters per second each.
The capability to read from one tape unit and write simultaneously on another tape unit
connected to the same Tape Control Unit is provided in most of the 204B Series (one-half inch)
Magnetic Tape Units, but not in the 204A Series (three-quarter inch) tapes.
Up to 16 peripheral devices or peripheral control units can be connected to a basic
Model 2200 system. By adding Feature 1115, the optional Input-Output Sector, 16 additional
peripheral device control units can be added. This feature also provides four additional ReadWrite channels, doubling the basic system's capacity to perform input-output operations
simultaneously with computing.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 2200
514: 111. 101
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
StnrtTlme
Cycle
OPEHATION
ms('c.
Time,
mace.
CP
Use
20.0
0
Yes
55.0
7.5
0
Yes
~14
Card Header
l!)O
~14
Card Punch
150-HOO
~23
Card Header
75
~~4-1
Card Punch
:!24-2 Card Punch
Stop Time
Channel Time, CP
Use
msee. Use
Channel
Use
Time,
msee.
CP
Use
Channel
Use
<0.1%
Yes
6.25n <0.1%
Yes
75.0
0
No
92.5
0
No
13.0
0
Yes
46
0.1%
Yes
16
0
No
222-1200
6.2
0
Yes
12.5n <0.1%
Yes
210
0
No
166-645
3.1
0
Yes
6.25n <0.1%
Yes
160
0
No
~27
Card Header
75
21 to 46
0
Yes
44
4.5%
Yes
10
0
No
~27
Card Punch
240
42 to 102
0
Yes
176
0.5%
Yes
22
0
No
222-1, -2, -3 Printer
(51-character set)
92 + 5LS
0
-
-
75
8.5%
Yes
17 + 5LS 0
No
222-4 Printer
(46-chnracter set)
-
-
46
12.0%
Yes
17 + 5LS 0
No
63 + 5LS
0
222-5 Printer
(55-character set)
133 + 5LS
0
-
-
116
6.5%
Yes
17 + 5LS 0
No
209 Paper Tape Reader
2.0
?
0
Yes
Var.
0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
210 Paper Tape Punch
8.3
?
0
Yes
Val'.
<0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
204A-l Magnetic Tape,
32KC
-
11.0 a
0
Yes
Var.
3.2%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204A-2 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
5.5 a
0
Yes
Var.
6.4%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204A-3 Magnetic Tape,
89KC
-
5. sa
0
Yes
Var.
8.9%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-1, -2 Magnstlc
Tape, 20KC
-
12. Sa
0
Yes
Var.
2.0%
Yes
oa
- -
204B-3, -4 Magnetic
Tape, 44KC
-
7.5 a
0
Yes
Var.
4.4%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-5 Magnetic Tape,
67KC
-
5.8 a
0
Yes
Var.
6.7%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-7 Magnetic Tape,
29KC
-
12.58
0
Yes
Var.
2.8%
Yes
08
-
-
204B-8 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
7. Sa
0
Yes
Var.
6.4%
Yes
Oa
- -
204B-11, -12 Magnetic
Tape, 13KC
-
18.7 a
0
Yes
Var.
1.3%
Yes
oa
-
270 Random Access
Drum
-
25.0
0
Yes
Var.
10.2%
Yes
0
-
-
251 Mass Memory
16.7
94 avo
0
Yes
Var.
10%
Yes
-
0
No
252 Mass Memory
16.7
150 avo
0
Yes
Var.
10%
Yes
0
No
253 Mass Memory
16.7
225 avo
0
Yes
Var.
10%
Yes
0
No
a
Cross-gap time for short gap (replaces start and stop times).
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Number of characters punched.
Data transmission time varies with record length.
LS
n
Var.
7/66
Data Transmission
Time,
A
AUERBACH
'"
-
-
514:201.001
~.,
AUERBACH
STAMOUO
EDP
HONEYWELL 2200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
REPORTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (514:201.100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common
commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
Because the Honeywell 2200 is capable of multiprogrammed operation, the central
processor time requirements are shown on all of the graphs in addition to the usual curves of
elapsed time (i. e., total processing time). The difference between the curves of elapsed time
and central processor time represents the amount of central processor time that is potentially
available for concurrent processing of other programs.
In order to show its true potential for business data processing in a varity of equipment configurations and operational modes, the Honeywell 2200's performance on the Standard
File Problems has been analyzed for two different cases, as described in the following paragraphs:
(1)
Conventional processing with on-line card reading
and printing.
(2)
Tape-to-tape processing with off-line card-to-tape
and tape-to-printer transcriptions.
Conventional Processing (Configurations III, IV, and VIlA)
In Configurations III, IV, and VIlA, the master files are on magnetic tape. The detail
file is assigned to the on-line card reader and the report file to the on-line printer. For Problems A, B, C, and D, the printer is the controlling factor at high, moderate, and low activities.
One master-file tape controls at activities near zero.
In Configuration IV, for Problems A, B, C, and D, the auxiliary read/write channel
is interlocked because of the high speed of the tapes used, and only three read/write channels
are available. At low activity, the two magnetic tape units assigned to one read/write channel
become the controlling factor for Configurations IV and VIlA (the higher horizontal line segment
on graph 514:201.100). When the activity becomes low enough so that the combined times for
the printer and card reader become less than the combined time for the tapes, the printer and
card reader are assigned to one channel and the two tapes are assigned to two separate channels
(the sloping straight line). Near zero activity, the combined times for the printer and card
reader become lower than the time for each tape, so a single tape unit becomes the controlling
factor (the lower horizontal line segment).
Tape-to-Tape Processing (Configuration VIlB)
In tape-oriented Configuration VIlB, all four files are on magnetic tape. Data transcriptions between tape and card or printer are performed off-line on a satellite system in this
configuration, and timings for the transcription operations are therefore not shown. For Configuration VIlB, with blocked or unblocked detail and report files, one master-file tape and the
report-file tape are the controlling factors at all activities in Problems A, B, and C. In Problem D, for Configuration VIlB with blocked files, the central processor is the controlling
factor at high activity. The report-file tape and one master-file tape are controlling at activities
near zero. The Problem D curve for the case of unblocked files is the same as that for Problem A.
SORTING (514:201. 200)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records on magnetic tape (graph
514: 201. 200) was developed from the time calculated for Standard File Problem A by the method
explained in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users' Guide. The times for Honeywell's SORT C
routine (graph 514:201. 220) were calculated from timing formulas supplied by Honeywell.
MATRIX INVERSION (514:201. 300)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the
straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are involved. The standard estimate is based on the time required to perform cumulative multiplication(c = c + aibQ in 8-digit-precision floating point, as explained in Paragraph
4:200.3 of the Users' Guide. The precision of floating-point operations is equivalent to
approximately 11 digits in the Honeywell Series 200.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
514:201,002
HONEYWELL 2200
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (514:201.400)
This problem measures overall system perfol'lnance on a simple mathematical
application that involves widely varying ratios of input-to-computation-to-output volumes,
as described in Section 4:200.4 of the Users' Guide.
WORKSHEET DATA TABUE I (STANDARD FILE PROBLRM A)
CONFIG URA TION
ITEM
IV
VilA
VIIB
(blocked Fih~8
3 and 4)
VIIB
(unblocked Filml
3 and 4)
(I'll" L)
I. {lHO
I, ORO
I, ORO
I,OBO
1.080
Hl~('(lrds /blO(~k
K
(File 2)
10
10
10
10
10
llu:l('('/hlm'k
Fill' 1
Fill' :!
!is. !i
23.5
23.5
23,5
7!i
75
75
20.0*
l2H
94
128
25.0*
Char/block
SI;ln,I:II',1
Filp :1
Fill'
Pl'nhl t 'l1l A
Fill' 4
nUH'c,.' ! switch
Input-
III
OutPlIt
Tinw:-;
Filt' 1
Filt·
-
l'l'ntl'al
Pt'(.lt't'S$Ol'
Tin1l"~
FHC" 1
I-"-=-,--'.Fill'
2
File :1
~---
:lnCt'
:It F
1.\)
1.1
1.1
1.1
0.1
0.1
n, B*
5,li
5,5
5.5
1. 2*
0.22
0.22
0.22
0,57
0.57
0.57
msC'C Idl'tail
b6
0.09
0.09
0.09
mSf.'c,"wol'k
bii + uO
I. IB
LIB
LIB
ms('c/l't"'pol't
b7
b8
0.63
0,63
0,63
mSl'('/block
0,2
5.7
a3 K
19.0
19.0
1.1
1.1
fat' C.P. and
File 1: Master In
~M~
column.
~:;~~:s
===11- 1 . l
Total
Unit of measurp
0.2
n.22
----+----~
0.57
0.09
0-:0;-
1. IB
1. 18
~
---:.:...:.-=--+--0.63
0.2
19.0
19.0
19.0
1. 1
1. I
I. 1
5.7
- r - ""5.7'""r- -rr,.7 -
1.0
4:200.11:12
-
-
-f----t, 1:--+--- -t-_-'_01'=,·.':'SI-:--_+1--:2:-::3'--.5=-t---:1.-:I=~t~-~2::-3...:..~_5-1
4:200.114
O.R
55.0
I, 2S055. 0
940-+-5:-:5-:-.-=-0- -I1-:1"',"'2"'BO::-t
8:1.1
1. ""0
940
R3.1
0.12
0.2
' - - - I -__-t-·
- 1 - -1-.-1-+~I-- - 1.0
-t-----~
R3.1
1,280
-""1:-.-::2~1-25.0~.2 ~1.O
116. !j
29.1
4S.5
29.1
charaet('rs
4. :l00 ......
routim~5
Std.
-
Storag:l'
SP:1(·'('
Rl'quil"l'ct
0.2
.- ~
1
R2K
dominant 110
1.1
0.22
a2
3
Svstl'lll
Pl'l'fol'lll-
1.1
0,1
mSt'c/}'('('ol'd
I
4:220.112
-+---~
-
Fill' 4
I11st'l:.ihlm'k
R. H
-+----~
Pill' 2
a
Fill> 4
mAt'e pt'naity
-
REFER~;NCE
~-
18
----612
~~
2.334
~-
4.720
3 (BlockS~
lOR
Working
12,092
Total
*
4,300**
4.300**
75
4,300"'*
4.:l00*
---7:-:5-- -+---7~
- -IB- - --11---
-=-:-:---1----'6:':'12'--+612
r.l~
612
---'2:-,-::3:;:'34
2.334
2.~~~
2,334
,..---.---1----,4-"-:-:.20
S,320
4.7204,720
-'-:-:,.,.---I----:I':'OB - - t - - --:1"'08:--- f-----:10; ; - lOB
12.092
12.149
4:200.IF.l
12~~
15. 74!l
Blocked 10 records per hlock.
Includes estimated storage requirements for Tape ]/0 Package.
II'ORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2 (STANDARD MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM A)
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
VIlA
.;
Floating point
Fixed/Floating point
Unit name
~- 1 - - - output
Standard
:\1:lthematical
Prohlem A
Size of record
msee/block
7/66
222-3 Printer
204B-8 Magnetic Tape
BO
BO
BO
input
75
.!L... - - - T2
~!L.
output
T4
~e~
____
T5
~l~
____ ~
msee/report
204B-8 Magnetic Tape
120
output
msce penalty
Floating point
223 Card Reader
output
~- I-
T7
----
111-:F 1·:11 1-::01(,1'
VIm
-
-
B. B
- - - -8.8- - - -
12B
0.1
----
5.5
B.44
4.B4
---1.46
fA
AUERBACH
----
0.1
0.1
4:200.41:1
-
8.44
- - - 4-.-B-4-- -
--------1.46
,/
(Contd. )
514: 20 I. 100
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
. 114 Graph: . . . • . • • . . . . see graph below .
.115 Storage space required Configuration III: ..• 12,092 characters •
Configuration IV: .•. 12,092 characters.
• 111 Record sizes -
Master file: . • . . . .
Detail file: ..•••.•
Report file: •••..••
.112 Computation: .••.••.
.113 Timing basis: .•...•
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
Configuration VIIB
(blocked files 3 & 4): 15,749 characters.
Configuration VIIB
(unblocked files
3 & 4): • . . . • • • . • 12,149 characters.
Configuration VIlA: . 12,149 characters.
4:200.113.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Mastel' File Records
2
~
10.0
7
.-
4
. / ./"
/'
2
~
--
V/
~{;~
'lUB
.,.
"",,",VIIA_
7
-" ----
tr'--
./'
~"
. --- -
1'1 'lIlA Cp111.
•
\TUB _ _ -
-~
I"
2
~
//
1.0
4
--
rJ'
'lIlB
_Cp-
____Cp - - ~-
1.0
-
~
0.1
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Pel' Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - - - Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
__ _
-- _
- - Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
- - - - C P - - - Central processor time
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
514:201. 120
.12
HONEYWELL 2200
Standard File Problem B
.122 Computation: ••••••. standard .
• 123 Timing basis: •.••.• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
• 124 Graph: .••••••••.. see graph below.
.121 Record sizes Master file: • . . . . • 54 characters.
Detail file: ..••••• 1 card.
Report file: . . . . • • . 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
./
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
-
2
10.0
7
4
2
1.0
i""
//
V/
If'
III/;
VIlB
,
....
I
7
prVIIA
4
2
.-
~
./
./ ./
......
~
""'.~C~/
..,..,..
.....--
~.
J.
-----
iC~ ~--
~
Jii'"
-
&---I--Cl'-
--"nA
~
Cl'~ll, IV, V
---
_~lk
_ _Cl' VIlI.L._-
--
...... 1.0
::;;;;;;;;iiOi
O. 1
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
- - - - C P - - - Central processor time
7/66
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
514:201. 130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.13
Standard File Problem C
.132 Computation: .•••.•• standard .
• 133 Timing basis: ••.••• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' GUide,
4:200.13.
• 134 Graph: ••.••••••.• see graph below.
.131 Record sizes Master file: ••..•• 216 characters.
Detail file: .•••••. 1 card.
Report file: •.••••. 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
-
2
10. 0
7
./'
/./
4
//
III
2
1.0
7
4
2
'" I'" .-
----
/jt'
-'
L
-
//
--
.--CV
l/
-----
VUB
_
...
VIIB
i'J ' VIlP-4.11.
--"""
_cP-
J!Il#-==--
CP-
I--""
---
::YJ1B...
_CP
1.0
-
O. 1
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
_ _ - C P - Central processor time
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
514: 20 1. 140
.14
HONEYWELL 2200
Standard File Problem D
.142 Computation: •.•.•.• trebled •
• 143 Timing basis: ..•.•. using estimating procedure
.141 Record sizes -
outlined in Users' Guide,
Master file: ..•••• 108 characters.
Detail file: . . . . • . • 1 card.
Report file: .•.•... 1 line.
4:200.14.
.144 Graph: ...•••.•.•. see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
i
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
-
2
10.0
.
7
./
/~
4
2
1.0
7
4
2
-- -- -......
.....
//
~
W
p-VIIA __
.,
tf"-- -
..
VllB
~~lll\
C1' \\\, -rJ '
- -------- _...-
----
-'
C~'
~-
-1.0
VllB.........
~\~ C1'-'"
/_: r~
~
O. 1
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time; unblocked Files 3 & 4
_
_______ _
Elapsed time; blocked Files 3 & 4
___ _ _
_
Central processor time
7/66
A
,/
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
514: 20 I. 200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
.212 Key size: . . . . . . . . . 8 characters .
. 213 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
. 214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 211 Record size: . . . . . . . 80 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
1/
II
4
V
~V
2
II~
tV 1/~
Time in Minutes to
Put Re cords into
Required Order
10
~
.
~
/
7
~)'
)
/
4
/
2
V
V
1
,/
,/
,/
7
/
I
III
........ 1.0
/
,/
~
4
/
/
2
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
iOIl,O()O
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 2200
514:201.220
.223 Timing basis: . . . . . . timing formulas supplied
by Honeywell .
. 224 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 22~ORT C Times
. 221 Record size: . . . . . . . 80 characters .
. 222 Key size: . . . . . . . . . 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
II
4
17
~
2
17
/
Time in Minutes to
10
Put Records into
Required Order
7
7
IJIII
~~~
.I.!~'
10
.A
I
~
4
~
2
/
1I
V
/
1
V
)1
1I
7
... 1.0
./
V
/
4
V
2
0.1
2
100
4
7
4
2
7
1,000
2
4
10,000
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations)
7/66
A
(eontd. )
AUERBACH
®
514: 20 1. 300
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.312 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
.3
lVlA TRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
outlined in Users' Guide.
4:200.312 .
.313 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 311 Basic parameters: ... general, non-symmetric
matrices. lIsing floating
point to at least R decimal
digits.
10.0
I
7
I
I
I
4
1/
2
IJ
1.0
... 1.0
7
II
4
II
2
I
Time in Minutes
for Complete
0.1
Inversion
7
I
I
4
I
2
I
/
0.01
I
7
I
I
I
4
II
2
~
0.001
2
1
4
2
1
4
10
1
2
4
100
7
1. 000
Size of Matrix
(For all configurations equipped with the Scientific Option)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
514:201.400
HONEYWELL 2200
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.412 Computation: . . . . . . . 5 fifth-order polynomials,
5 divisions, -I square
.41
.standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
root; ll-digit precision
floating-point mode .
. 413 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413.
.414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
.411 Record sizes: . . . . . . . 10 signed numbers. avg.
size 5 digits', max.
size 8 digits.
10,000
7
4
2
1,000
7
4
~"
'I"
2
A~
VIlA (R = 1. 0)
/. ~
Time in
100
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
VIIA(R
./
0.01, 0.1)
'/
I
0'.
~~~
4
"\1\\'\'>
2
~
~'l
~\\'\'>
_...
--
10
7
<;:,\.'
<;:,.
4
2
1
~
2
0.1
4
7
4
2
7
2
10.0
1.0
4
1.0
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
7-'66
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
®
~
HONEYWEll 4200
Honeywell EDP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U.
s.
A.
(
..
,HONEYWEll 4200
Honeywell EDP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
516:011. 100
A. ~';;p
AUERBAC~
HONEYWELL 4200
INTRODUCTION
RHOR1S
_ _.....---...J
INTRODUCTION
The Honeywell 4200 Processor can be connected to any of the Honeywell Series 200
peripherru. units, can use any of the Series 200 programming languages, can run most programs
originru.ly written for an IBM 1401, 1410, or 7010, and can operate in a multiprogrammed mode,
using the Storage Protect feature to help insure safe handling of the two concurrently-operating
programs. The 4200 Processor can contain from 65,556 to 524,288 characters of core storage,
with a cycle time of 0.75 microsecond per four characters.
Standard features of the Honeywell 4200 include: Program Interrupt, Multiply-Divide,
Advanced Programming, Edit Instruction, 8-Bit Code Handling, eight read/write channels, 32
peripherru. address assignments, and table lookup instructions.
Optionru. features are: Scientific Unit (Goating-point arithmetic), Storage Protect,
and eight additionru. read/write channels and 16 peripheral address assignments.
The rentru. for typicru. Honeywell 4200 systems is expected to range from $16,400 to
$25,500 per month. Deliveries will begin in October 1967.
This report concentrates upon the characteristics and the performance of the Honeywell
4200 in particular. All the generru. characteristics of the Honeywe 11 Series 200 computers,
peripherru. equipment, and software are described in Computer System Report 510: Honeywell
Series 200 - Generru..
The System Configuration section which follows shows the Honeywell 4200 in the following System Configurations:
III:
IV:
V:
VI:
VIIA:
VIlB:
VIllB:
6-Tape Business System
12-Tape Business System
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System
6-Tape BUSiness/Scientific System
10-Tape Generru. System (Integrated)
10-Tape Generru. System (paired with the Model 120)
20-Tape Generru. System (paired with the Model 120)
These configurations were prepared according to the rules in the Users' Guide, page
4:030.120, and any significant deviations from the standard specifications are listed.
Section 516:051 provides detailed central processor timings for the Honeywell 4200.
The input-output channel capabilities of the Honeywell 4200, and the demands upon the
processor during input-output operations, are described in Section 516:111.
Several levels of software support can be used with Honeywell 4200 systems. The two
versions of Operating System - Mod 1 can be used, providing software packages that are resident
on either magnetic tape or mass storage devices. Several levels of COBOL and FORTRAN language processors and Easycoder assemblers are offered with Operating System - Mod 1. Automatic stacked-job processing facilities and several data management routines are ru.so provided.
Honeywell 4200 systems that have at least 49K characters of core storage can also use the advanced
software of the Operating System - Mod 2, featuring automatic program scheduling and improved
language processors. These software systems and the Series 200 Basic Programming System are
described in Sections 510:151 through 510:193.
The overall performance of any Honeywell Series 200 system is heavily dependent upon
the processor model used. A full System Performance analysis of standardized configurations
utilizing the Honeywell 4200 processor is provided in Section 516:201.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
516:031. 100
/!&•
AUERBACH
SUMDARII
EDP
HONEYWELL 4200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
REPORTS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The Honeywell 4200 Processor contains either 8 or 16 input-output channels and
either 32 or 48 peripheral address assignments. This means that up to 48 peripheral devices
or controllers can be connected, and a maximum of 16 data transfer operations can occur simultaneously with internal processing. The connections between devices and channels are established
under program control.
Any of the available Series 200 peripheral units can be connected to a Honeywell 4200
Processor. These peripheral units are described in detail in the main Series 200 Computer
System Report, and their trunk requirements are summarized in the main System Configuration section, page 510:031. 100 .
.1
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION III
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . .
card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
console typewriter input is included.
ability to read and write magnetic tape
simultaneously is standard.
core storage is 200% larger.
Equipment
Rental*
4201-1 Processor with
65,536 characters of core
storage
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/min
155
310
222-3 Printer and Control:
650 lines/min (120 print positions)
925
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
28,800 char/sec (800cpi)
220-3 Console (includes Teleprinter)
Optional Features Included:
....................
$10,660
435
2,460
310
none.
TOTAL RENTAL:
* The rental prices quoted are for a
one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
same configuration with a five-year agreement leases for $14,460 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
$15,565
The
7/66
HONEYWELL 4200
516:031. 200
.2
12-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION IV
card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is up to 50% slower.
core storage is 100% larger.
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . .
Equipment
Rental*
4201-1 Processor with
65, 536 characters of core
storage
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/min
155
310
222-4 Printer and Control:
950 lines/min (120 print
positions)
1,305
203B-2 Tape Control Unit
204B-5 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-5 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,690
220-3 Console (includes Teleprinter)
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310
none.
TOTAL RENTAL:
.3
$10,660
$21,250
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
This configuration is identical to Configuration III (preceding page) except for the addition of one
250 Mass Memory Control and one 251 Mass Memory File, which provide 15 million characters
of storage and bring the total system rental to $16,570 per month for a one-year term agreement.
Rental under the five-year agreement is $15, 360 per month .
.4
6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VI
This configuration is also identical to Configuration III, except for the addition of the Scientific
Unit. The cost of this unit is $510 per month on a one-year term agreement and $490 per month
for the five-year agreement. Core storage requirements for Configuration VI are satisfied by
the minimum-sized 65K-character Model 4201-1 Processor.
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year agreement leases for $19,760 per month.
(Contd. )
7/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
516:031. 500
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.5
IO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED),; CONFIGURATION VIIA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . ..
card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
Rental *
Equipment
4201-2 Processor with 98,304
$11,650
characters of core storage
220-3 Console (includes type-
310
writer and direct control)
222-3 Printer and Control
(120 print positions):
925
650 lines/min
Optional Features Included :
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 lines/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/min
155
310
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
64,000 char/sec
435
3, 075
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
64,000 char/sec
435
3,075
Scientific Unit
510
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
configuration with a five-year agreement leases for $19,680 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
$21. 59()
The same
7/66
HONEYWELL 4200
516:031. 600
.6
lO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIIB
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . ..
card reader is 700% faster.
direct connection to satellite system.
Rental *
Equipment
4201-1 Processor and Console
with 65,536 characters of
core storage
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (8):
64,000 char/sec
$10,660
310
435
4,920
220-3 Console (includes Teleprinter and direct control)
310
212-1 On-Line Adapter Unit
(for connection to H-120
Processor)
410
Scientific Unit
510
To Satellite System
(next page)
Optional Features Included:
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
$17,555
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
$ 3,610
TOTAL RENTAL:
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
$21, 165
The
same configuration with a five-year agreement leases for $19,605 per month.
,/
(Contd.)
7/66
A
AUERBACH
@
516:031. 601
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.G
CONFIGURATION VnB (Contd.)
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT (Honeywell 120)
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ...
card reader is 20% slower.
ability to overlap printing and one
input-output operation with
computing is standard.
console typewriter input is included.
6 index registers.
Equipment
Rental
121-2 Central Processor
Console with 4, 096 character
$J,OOO
positions of core storage
I/O Adapter (Non-Simultaneous)
155
214-2 Card Reader/Punch:
Reads:
400 cards/min
Punches: 100-400 cards/min
360
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-7 Magnetic Tape Units (2):
28,800 char/sec
435
820
122 Printer:
450 lines/min (120 print positions)
510
220-1 Console
205
(includes Teleprinter)
To Model 4200 System
(previous page)
Optional Features Included:
Advanced Programming
Edit Instruction
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
75
50
$3,610
7/66
HONEYWELL 4200
516:031. 700
.7
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIllB
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . ..
direct connection to satellite system:
card reader is 700% faster.
magnetic tape is 20% slower.
Rental*
Equipment
4201-3 Processor with
131,072 characters of
core storage
$12,690
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-9 Magnetic Tape Units (8):
96,000 char/sec
435
6,560
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-9 Magnetic Tape Units (8): .
96,000 char/sec
435
6,560
220-3 Console (includes Teleprinter
and direct control)
310
212-1 On-Line Adapter Unit
(for connection to Honeywell 200
Processor)
410
Scientific Unit
510
To Satellite System
(next page)
Optional Features Included:
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
TOTAL
S~TELLITE
EQUIPMENT:
TOTAL RENTAL:
$28,220
$ 6,675
$34,895
* The rental prices quoted are for a one-year monthly rental base term agreement.
The same configuration with a five-year monthly agreement leases for $32,080 per month.
(Contd.)
7/66
A
.,
AUERBACH
516:031. 701
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.7
CONFIGURATION VIllB (Contd.)
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT (Honeywell 120)
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ...
card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is slower.
console-typewriter input is included.
ability to read and write magnetic
tape simultaneously is standard.
Equipment
Bental
120-3 Processor and Console
with 8,192 characters of
core storage
$1.270
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 cards/min
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/min
155
310
222-4 Printer and Control:
950 lines/min (120 print
positions)
1,305
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (4):
64,000 char/sec
435
2,460
220-3 Console (includes Teleprinter)
310
To Honeywell 4200 System
(previous page)
Optional Features Included:
Advanced Programming
Editing Instructions
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
75
50
$6,675
i
\",
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
516;051. 100
A
STAMDnD
EDP
AUERBACH
HONEYWELL 4200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
R(PDR1S
~
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
. Central Processor.
Models 4201-1 through
4201-5.
Description
The Model 4201 Processor performs all the arithmctic and logical functions in a Honeywell 4200
system under control of one or more internally
stored programs. The processor works in conjlIDction with a control memory that contains program sequencing, program interrupt, and other
associated registers. Only one control memory
can be utilized in a Honeywell 4200 system.
The 4201 instruction code is basically a twoaddress, add-to-storage type. This code includes
all the Honeywell 200 instructions (which are almost identical with those of the IBM 1401), plus
alphanumeric comparison and table look-up operations. Fifteen index registers are also included
in the basic unit; the instruction repertoire, from
a programmer's view, is very similar to that of
the IBM 1410 and 7010 systems.
Binary addressing is used to minimize instruction
sizes; address lengths can vary from two characters to four characters. Four-character addressing is the mode normally used in programs written
for the Honeywell 4200; it permits direct addressing of any position within the maximum 524K core
memory. The type of addressing in use at any
time is controlled by special instructions and can
be varied by the programmer as needed. Even
with this facility, the multiple addressing modes
may lead to complications in the interpretation of
diagnostics and in the use of operating systems.
The Model 4201 Processor consists of five basic
functional units: the main memory, the control
memory, the control unit, the arithmetic unit,
and the input-output traffic control.
The main memory consists of from 65, 536 to
524, 288 alphanumeric character positions of core
storage with a cycle time of 0.75 microsecond
per 4-character word; see Section 510: 041 for a
complete description. Each character position
consists of six data bits, one parity bit, and two
punctuation bits. The punctuation bits can be used
to indicate a word mark, an item mark, or a
record mark, which defines the length of a data
field or instruction, an item, or a record, respectively. An "item" consists of a group of consecutive data fields. (The IBM 1400 series computers
utilize only one punctuation bit - the "word mark"
bit - and each record mark occupies an entire
character position. The two punctnation bits used
in the Honeywell 4200 will decrease data storage
requirements and provide increased flexibility in
data movement operations. The Extended Move
instruction, for example, can be terminated by a
word mark, an item mark, or a record mark, as
specified by the programmer. )
The control memory is a small magnetic core
storage unit with an access time of O. 125 microsecond and a cycle time of 0.25 microsecond.
Control memory provides 64 processor control
registers, each containing as many bits as required to address all of the installed main memory
locations. Instructions are provided to load and
store the contents of most of these registers.
Of the available 64 processor control registers,
only 56 have functions currently assigned to them.
The basic Model 4200 Processor includes 24 program registers - 16 for input-output channel
control, two sequence control registers, an external interrupt register, A-address and B-address registers, and three processor work registers. Fifteen additional registers are provided
if the Scientific Unit (floating-point) feature is
installed, and each of these registers contains 18
bits. The optional Storage Protect feature makes
use of another control register, and installation
of the second set of eight Read/Write Channels
provides 16 more control registers.
The control unit controls the sequential selection,
interpretation, and execution of all stored program instructions and checks for correct (odd)
parity whenever a character is moved from one
location to another. It also provides for communication with the operator's control panel.
The input-output traffic control directs the timesharing of accesses to the main memory by the
various peripheral devices and the central procesSOl'.
This control operation is associated with the
control memories, which contain the control information used by each of the data transfers. Up to
sixteen input-output operations can proceed simultaneously under the supervision of the control
memory. The basic processor contains eight
normal Read/Write Channels; two of them can be
split into two subchannels, provided that neither
operation proceeds at a higher rate than 45,000
characters per second, which takes into account
worst-case conditions. Eight additional Read/
Write Channels are available as an option.
The allocation of data transmission channels to
input-output trunks is flexible. The actual allocation of a specific peripheral device to a specific
channel is initiated by an instruction, rather than
by the operator.
The arithmetic unit executes all arithmetic and
logical operations. It consists of an adder that
can perform both decimal and binary arithmetic
and two one-character operand storage registers.
The 4200 is basically a two-address, add-tostorage system. All operations are performed
serially by character and terminated when specific punctuation bit configurations are sensed.
This means that operand sizes are fully variable
and are limited only by the amount of core storage
available to hold them.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 4200
516:051. 120
. 12
Description (Contd.)
The processor is well suited to general data manipulation, including, as standard features, excellent
editing capabilities, indexing, indirect addressing,
an Item Move instruction, a Move and Translate
instruction, multiplication and division, and table
lookup instructions.
The indexing facilities are comparativcly numerous. Fifteen index registers are supplied as
standard equipment, and fifteen more are available
when the optional Storage Protect feature is installed.
The Move and Translate instructions can effect
translations between any two 6-bit codes. A table
must be provided for every code into which conversions are to be made, arranged in the order of
the bit patterns of the code from which conversion
is planned. Handling of 8-bit codes is also provided.
Instruction length is variable from one to eleven
characters. Arithmetic and data movement instructions are most commonly nine characters
long. Through careful placement of data, instructions can sometines be "chained" so that a onecharacter instruction does the work of a ninecharacter one, resulting in savings in both storage
space and execution time. Chaining is possible
.21
only when a series of operations is to be performed
upon items of data stored in consecutive locations,
so that the A- and B-AddreSs Registers do not
need to be reloaded before each instruction is
executed.
Typical instruction execution times, using the fourcharacter addreSSing mode, are 10.7 microseconds for a five-digit decimal addition and 81.7
microseconds for a five-digit multiplication.
Optional Features
Additional 8 Read/Write Channels and 16 InputOutput Trunks: Permits 16 additional peripheral
units or controllers to be connected to a Honeywell
4200, and provides up to 8 additional simultaneous
data transfers.
./
Storage Protect: Protects the contents of one
designated memory area against accidental reference or alteration by unrelated programs; provides 15 additional index registers for use by
programs inside the protected area.
Scientific Unit: Provides automatic floating-point
arithmetic and decimal-binary radix conversion
operations.
. 14
First Delivery: . . . . . October 1967.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
Operations and Operands
012eration and
Variation
.211 Fixed point Add- subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.212 Floating point Add- subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
1 to N char.
automatic
automatic
decimal
or binary
decimal
decimal
automatic*
automatic*
automatic*
binary
binary
binary
36 & 12 bits.
36 & 12 bits.
36 & 12 bits.
binary
1 to N char.
binary
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
1 to N char.
*with optional Scientific Unit .
. 213 BooleanAND
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
Operation and
Variation
.214 ComparisonNumbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating
sequence:
. 215 Code translation Provision: . . . . . .
From:
To: .
Size: .
7/66
automatic
none.
automatic
Provision
branch on high, low, equal, unequal, or
zero balance.
automatic
1 to N char.
none.
1 to N char.
automatic
1 to N char.
automatic
o through
9, then
A through Z,
with special
symbols
interspersed .
· automatic (using code table
constructed by programmer).
· any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
· any 6-bit or 8-bit code.
1 to N characters.
ItA
AUERBACH
'"
./
(Contd.)
516:051. 216
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.216 Radix conversion Provision: ...
From:
To: ..
. 217 Edit format Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Insert $, CR-*:
Float $:
Protection:
· automatic (with Scientific
Unit. ).
· decimal or binary.
· binary or decimal.
Provision
Comment
automatic
expand but
not contract
Size
automatic
none.
automatic
automatic
automatic
automatic
optional
1 to N
char.
· 232 Instruction layout:
Part:
OP
Size (char):
A or [
~,to
4
n
2104
An instruction may consist of:
(1) OP only
(2) OP,V 1
" (3) OP, Aor I
(4) OP, A or I, VI
(5) OP, A or I, B
(6) OP, A or I, B, VI
(7) OP, A, B, VI' V2
(8) OP, A or I, C 1
(9) OP, A or I, C I , C2
(10) OP, A or I, C 1 , C2 , C 3
· 233 Instruction, parts Name
Purpose
OP:
· operation code.
· address of an operand or
field in core storage .
I: .
. . . . location of next instruction
if a branch occurs.
B:
· address of an operand or
field in core storage.
· modifier for an operation
code, control field for an
I/o instruction, or partial
address in a translate
instruction.
V 2 or C2 : .•••••• · partial address in a translate instruction or control
field for an I/O instruction.
· control field for an I/O
instruction.
.234 Basic address
str~cture: . .
.2 + O.
.235 Literals Arithmetic: .
· none.
Comparisons ,and ,
· yes; single character.
tests: .. ' .. ,'
Incr!;lmenting
modifiers: ..
· none.
Masking: . . . . . . . . . yes; single character mask.
· 236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
type: . . . . . . . . . • core.
Minimum size:. .
. 1 character.
Maximum size:.
. total capacity.
Volume accessible: .. total capacity .
A:
.221 Negative numbers:
· 222 Zero:.........
· 223 Operand size
determination: .
· 23
.. absolute value, with B
zone bit in units position.
.. positive, negative, and
unsigned zeros and blanks
give same result in decimal arithmetic but are
unequal in comparisons.
. word mark, item mark, or
record mark bits in high
or low-order digit position. (Some instructions
imply one-character
operands. )
Instruction Formats
. 231 Instruction structure: . variable; 1 to 11 characters.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info. Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 4200
516:051. 237
.237 Address indexing.2371 Number of methods: .
.2372 Name: ...••••.•..
.2373 Indexing rule: . . . • . .
. 2374 Index specification: ..
1.
indexing.
addition (modulo core size) •
Address Modifier - first 3
bits of an 18-bit operand
or first 5 bits of a 24-bit
operand.
. 2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . . . . . 15 or 30.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . . . . . . all 3- and 4-character
addresses.
.2377 Cumulative indexing: . none.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . . . . . . . . none.
· 238 Indirect addressing: .. yes.
. 2381 Recursive: . . . . . . . . yes.
.2382 Designation: . . . . . . . Address Modifier - first
3 or 5 bits of an operand~
.2382 Control: . . . . . . • . . direct address has no
indicator bit.
· 24
Special Processor
Storage: .' . . . . • . . see Paragraph. 21,
Control Memory.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
· 31
Instruction Sequencing
· 311 Number of sequence
facilities: . . . . . • . . 2; sequence and co-sequence
registers. Programmer
may switch at will from
one to the other by use of
Change Sequence Mode
instruction.
.312 Arrangement: ..•.... one set per processor.
.313 Precedence rule: . . . . only one register in use
at anyone time.
(Programmer indicates
the register to be used.)
. 314 Special sub-sequence
counters: . . . . . . . . none.
.315 Sequence control
step size: . . . • . . . . 1 character.
.316 Accessibility to
routines: . . . . . . • . . yes; can be loaded and
stored by instruction.
.317 Permanent or optional
modifier: . . . . . • , . no.
· 32
Look-Ahead: •....•. none.
· 33
Interruption
.331 Possible causes In-out units: . . ..
.332 Control by routine: ... each peripheral interrupt
can be set or reset individually by the program. All
interrupts are inhibited
during the operation of an
interrupt routine.
.333 Operator control: ...• none.
. 334 Interruption conditions: Interrupt requested .
Interrupt not inhibited.
Interrupt routine not in
operation.
.335 Interruption process Registers saved: ... The active sequencing
register is stored. The
next instruction is taken
from the address given
in the interrupt register .
The interrupt routine
operates and, when completed,causes the original sequence register to
be restored.
Destination: . . . . . . . 2 different locations,
depending on whether
interrupt is external or
internal.
· 336 Control methods Determine cause: ... test indicators for
explicit cause.
Enable interruption: . by instruction.
· 34
.341 Method of control: .•• executive program; see
Section 510: 192.
· 342 Maximum number of
programs: . . . . . . . . one main program and one
or more peripherallimited programs.
.343 Precedence rules: ... determined by executive
program .
· 344 Program protection Storage: . . . . . • • . . storage area on one side
of movable, logical
boundary must not be
read, written or tested
by a program stored on
the other side of the
boundary.
In-out units: . . • . . . no protection.
.35
Multisequencing: . . . . none.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
. end of operation, including
availability of all error
indications.
Storage access: .•.. violation of Storage
Protection, either by
alteration of contents or
by reference to contents.
Processor errors: .. cannot initiate interrupts.
Others: . . . . . . , ..• none.
7/66
Multiprogramming
fA.
AUERBACH
All execution times listed here are based on use
of the 4":character addreSSing mode; most instructions require 1. 0 microsecond less time in the 2character and 3-character processing modes.
D = operand length in decimal digits.
C
=
operand length in alphanumeric characters.
(Contd,)
516:051. 410
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point:
Add-subtract Decimal: . . . . . . . . 5.6 to O. 96D
Binary: . . . . . . . . . 5.6 to O. 96C
2
Multiply: . . . . . . . . . 7.9 + 2.5D + 2.5D ; where
multiplier and multiplicand are both D digits
in length.
2
Divide: . . . . .
14. 9 + 11. 8D + 6D ; where
j.
the dividend is twice the
length of the divisor.
(D = no. of digits in
divisor. )
.412 Floating point Add-subtract: . . .. 16.0
Multiply: . . . . . . . . 23.0
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . 26.0
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . • . . . 0.75 per modified address.
Indirect addressing: . 0.75 per stage.
Re-complementing: .. O. 75D
.414 ControlCompare: . . . . . . . . 5.6 + O. 47D
Branch: . . . . . . . . . 5.6
. 415 Counter control: . . . . . none.
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . . . . 52. 5 + .47D
Alphabetic data: . . . . 52.5 + .47C
.424 Switching Unchecked: . . . . . . . 30.0
Checked:. . . . . . . . . 30. 0
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: . . . . . . . . . 1. 2
Compose: . . . . . . . . 2.1
.426 Table Look-up, per comparison For a match: . . . . . . O. 8C
For least or greatest: O. 8C
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . . O. 8C
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 5.6
Set bit in pattern: . . . 6.4
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 6.4
Test bit in pattern: .. 6.4
.428 Moving: . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 + O. 38C
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Action
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
.416 Edit: . . . . . . . • . . . . 6.4+ 1. 7C + 1. l(N + Nn).
N = no. of characters
scanned during zero
suppression; Nn = no.
scanned for floating
dollar sign insertion.
Invalid operation:
set indicator.
set indicator .
interrupt or
stop. *
interrupt or
stop. *
Arithmetic error: none.
Invalid address:
limit check
Receipt of data:
.417 Convert (with Scientific Unit) Decimal to Binary: .. 15. 75
Binary to Decimal: .. 14. 75
Dispatch of data:
Reference to
protected area:
.418 Shift: . . . . . . . . . • • . 5.6 + O. 13N (binary
mantissa shift using
Scientific Unit, where
N = no. of bits shifted).
. 42
check
overflow
check
validity
check
check
interrupt or
stop. *
parity check interrupt or
stop. *
send parity bit.
check
interrupt.
*Specific action is determined by status of
program protect bits .
Processor Performance in Microseconds
Fixed point
. 421 For ran<~om addresses:
c=a+bDecimal: . . . . . . . .
Binary: . . . . . . . . .
b=a+bDecimal: . . . . . . . .
Binary: . . . . . . . . .
Sum N itemsDecimal: . . . . . . . .
Binary: . . . . . . . . .
c = ab: . . . . . • . . . .
c = alb: . . . . . . . . .
.422 For arrays of data c i = a i + bj : , . . . . . •
b j = a i + bj : . . . . . . •
11.3 + O. 96D
11.3 + O. 96C
31.0
5.6 + O. 96D
5.6 + O. 96C
31. 0
(5.6 + O. 96D)N
(5.6 + O. 96C)N
2
13.5 + 3. 25D + 2. 5D
20.5 + 12. 55D + 6D2
16.0
43.5
45.8
46.9 + 1. 97D
67.6
39.7 + 1. 59D
67.6
Sum N items: . . . . . . 23.9 + 1. 59D
2
c = a + a.b.: . . . . . . . 51. 7 + 4.66D + 2. 5D
1 )
Floating point
35.3
83.5
I
\ ..
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
516:111. 100
fA
HONEYWELL 4200
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
AUERBACH
e
$JalDua
EDP
RrPDITS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Input-output operations in the Honeywell 4200 computer system are initiated by the
executive program and subsequently supervised by the Control Memory. A fully-expanded
Honeywell 4200 system can handle between 8 and 16 input-output operations simultaneously
with computing, and can be connected to between 32 and 48 different peripheral units or peripheral controllers. Table I shows the start time, data transmission time, and stop time for
most of the Series 200 peripheral operations, along with their demands upon the central
processor (CP) and the selected channel.
/
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
OPERATION
Time,
mace.
Data Transmission
msce.
CP
Use
Channel
Use
Time. CP
msce. Use
Stop Time
Channel
Time.
CP
Use
msee.
Use
Channel
Use
21-1 Cnrd Rendl'r
]liO
20.0
0
Yes
G5,O
<0.1%
Yc:';
75.0
0
No
21·1 Card Punch
laO-600
7. ii
0
Yes
6.25n <0.1%
Yes
92. !i
0
No
~:!:\
75
13.0
0
Yes
46
<0.1%
Yes
16
0
No
2:!·1-1 Card Punch
335-1210
6.2
0
Yes
12.5n <0.1%
Yes
210
0
No
22-1-2 Card Punch
223-(j60
3.0
0
Yes
6.25n <0.1%
Yes
160
0
No
Card Render
en l'd
75
21 to 46
0
Yes
44
0.9%
Yes
10
0
No
227 Card Punoh
240
42 to 102
0
Yes
176
<0.1%
Yes
22
0
No
222-1, 2, 3 Printer
(!iI-character sct)
02 + GiS
0
-
-
75
1.7%
Yes
17 + 5LS
0
No
222--1 Printer
63 + aLS
0
-
-
46
2.4%
Yes
17 + 5LS 0
No
133 +·5LS
0
-
-
116
I. 3%
Yes
17 + 5LS 0
No
209 Paper Tape Reader
2.0
?
0
Yes
Var.
<0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
210 Paper Tape Punch
8.3
?
0
Yes
Var.
<0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
20~A-l
Magnetic Tape.
-
11. On
0
Yes
Var.
0.7%
Yes
oa
-
-
Magnetic Tape.
-
5.5 a
0
Yes
Var.
1.3%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204A-3 Magnetic Tape.
89KC
-
5. Sn
0
Yes
Var.
I.B%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-l. -2 Magnetic
Tape. 20KC
-
12. Sa
0
Yes
Var.
0.4%
Yes
Oa
-
-
-
7.5 a
0
Yes
Var.
0.9%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-5 Magnetic Tape.
67KC
-
5. Sa
0
Yes
Var.
1.6%
Yes
on
-
-
204B-9 Magnetic Tape.
96KC
-
5.8
0
Yes
Var.
1.9%
Yes
0"
-
-
204B-7 Magnetic Tape.
29KC
-
20.8
0
Yes
Var.
0.6%
Yes
On
-
-
-
7. Sa
0
Yes
Var.
1.5%
Yes
Oa
-
-
-
18.7 a
0
Yes
Var.
0.3%
Yes
Oa
-
-
227
Reader
(~6-character
set)
222-5 Printer
(63-chn,racter set)
32KC
20~A-2
6~KC
204B-3. -4 Magnetic
Tape. 44KC
204B-8 Magnetic Tape.
64KC
204B-ll. -12 Magnetic
Tape. 13KC
270 Random Access Drum
-
25.0
0
Yes
Var.
2.1%
Yes
0
-
-
251 Mass Memory
16.7
95 avo
0
Yes
Var.
2.0%
Yes
-
0
No
252 Mass Memory
16.7
150 avo
0
Yes
Var.
2.0%
Yes
-
0
No
253 Mass Memory
16.7
225 avo
0
Yes
Var.
2.0%
Yes
-
0
No
a
Cross-gap time for short gap (replaces start and stop times).
LS
n
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Number of characters punched.
Data transmission time varies with record length.
Var.
7/66
Start Time
Cycle
Time.
fA..
AUERBACH
,/
516:201.001
A
,
AUERBACH
STANDARD
ED]?
HONEYWELL 4200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
RfPOItTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (516:201. 100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common
commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
Standard File Problems A, B, and C show the effects of three different record sizes in the
master file. Standard Problem D increases the amount of computation performed upon each
transaction. Each problem is estimated for activity factors (ratios of number of detail records
to number of master records) of zero to unity. In all cases a uniform distribution of activity
is assumed.
Because multiprogramming is a featured capability of the Honeywell 4200, the central
processor time requirements are shown on all of the graphs in addition to the usual curves of
elapsed time (i. e., total processing time). The difference between the curves of elapsed time
and central processor time represents the amount of central processor time that is potentially
available for concurrent processing of other programs.
An analysis of the resulting graphs shows that in Standard Configurations III, VI, and
VIlA, the central processor is available to process other programs during more than 95% of the
total time required to handle the Standard File Problems. In Configuration IV, central processor
availability averages about 95% of the total processing time. In Configuration VIlB, central processor availability averages about 75% or 85%, depending upon whether the detail and report files
are blocked or unblocked, respectively. In Configuration VIIIB, central processor availability is
about 60% or 80%, depending upon whether the detail and report files are blocked or unblocked.
In order to show its true potential for business data processing in a variety of equipment configurations and operational modes, the Honeywell 4200's performance on the Standard
File Problems has been analyzed for two different cases, as described in the following paragraphs:
(1)
Conventional processing with on-line card reading and printing.
(2) Tape-to-tape processing with off-line card-to-tape and tape-toprinter data transcriptions.
Another way of processing that may become standard in Honeywell 4200 systems is to
combine these two approaches and run the data transcription operations as separate entities,
independent of the main processing run but on the same computer. Times required in this mode
of operation, using on-line data transcription routines which are run concurrently with some other
main program, can be estimated by using the times shown for Configurations III, IV, VI, and
VIlA as the elapsed times required for the data transcription runs, and the times shown for the
tape-to-tape operations, Configurations VIlB and VDIB, as the times used by the central processor and by the tape drives during the main processing run.
Conventional Processing (Configurations III, IV, VI, and VlIA)
In Configurations DI, IV, VI and VIIA, the master files are on magnetic tape. The
detail file is assigned to the on-line card reader and the report file to the on-line printer. For
Standard File Problems A, B, C, and D, the printer is the controlling factor at high, moderate,
and low activities. One master-file tape controls at activities near zero.
Tape-to-Tape Processing (Configurations VIIB and VDIB)
In tape-oriented Configurations VIIB and VIlill, all four files are on magnetic tape.
Data transcriptions from cards to tape and from tape to printer are performed off-line on a
satellite system in these configurations, and timings for the data transcription operations are
therefore not shown.
(
"
For Configuration VIlB with blocked or unblocked detail and report files, one masterfile tape and the report-file tape are the controlling factors at all activities in Problems A, B, C,
and D. For Configuration VIIIB, with all four files blocked, the report-file tape controls at high
activities and one master-file tape controls at moderate and low activities in Problems A and B.
In Problem C, one master-file tape controls at all activities. In Problem D, where computation
is trebled, the central processor controls at high activities, and one master-file tape controls
at moderate and low activities.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
516:201. 002
HONEYWELL 4200
In Problems A, B, and D, for Configuration VillB with unblocked detail and report
files, the report-file tape controls at high and moderate activities. In Problem C, one masterfile tape controls at moderate activities. At lower activities, one master-file tape is the controlling factor.
SORTING (516:201. 200)
The standard estimate for sorting SO-character records on magnetic tape (graph
516:201. 200) was developed from the time calculated for Standard File Problem A by the method
explained in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users' Guide.
MATRIX INVERSION (516:201. 300)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are
involved. The standard estimate is based on the time required to perform cumulative multiplication (c=c + ~bjl in S-digit-precision floating point, as explained in Paragraph 4:200.3 of
the Users' Guide. The precision of floating-point operations is equivalent to approximately 11
digits in the Honeywell Series 200.
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (516:201.400)
This problem measures overall system performance on a simple mathematical
application that involves widely varying ratios of input-to-computation-to-output volumes, as
described in Section 4:200.4 of the Users' Guide.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE I (STANDAHD FILE PROBLEM A)
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
III & VI
I
Records/block
msee/block
Times
K
~=~
msee/ switch
129
Central
Processor
Times
msec/record
msce/detail
maec/work
maee/report
6.2
0
°
6.S
-~ -~
_ L -0
4:200.112
-..-.!!.0
_O~ -~
_0.15
1.05
~.---
r----£.:..0~ ~~ I--~ -~
I---~
___
o:£.. ~~
_ _ _0_
•.2!,
.~
-~
~~ _0.23
_ _ _O_.O!., r-------£:-0!..- --..Y~
r--~ _ _0_·9!.. c--....Q.!L 4:200.1132
-~
"2
-:-=-----
~.--~.--b7 + bS
a2 K
~.
~
1.05
0.20
~
1.05
~I~ I--~
0.23*
0.02
_ _ _O_,!~
0.23*
-~
___
0_.47
0.25
0.25
C.P.
I/O
i/o
0.09
0.09
2:2s -
r-------£:-4L
0.25
C.P.
0.09
I/O
:--2.28
.
-:-- ~ -~
7.66
:---- ..!!:..!!L0.02
_ _ _O.~
0.09
7.66
---..!!. :!Z- I--~ _ _ _
O_.~!..
0.25
0.25
C.P. i/O
C.P.
0.09
0.09
I/O
c - - ...Q,J1-
0.25
C.P.
I/O
0.25
C.F.
0.09
0.09
rua
I--- 2.28 1 - 2.'28
,
I--- 7.66 t - - r-:r:-as
1'-7,66
7.66
2.28
I/O
I-I--
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
. - 020
r-- '020 - r-o-2o Sis t--02o ~ ii20 1--- r-ozo . - 4:200.114
File 2: Master Out r-o:2O
1--r-r--=I--1
--ii\;I-o~
ru;;-;oe~ 'ii:lB
0.15
O~
FUe I: Master In
-=-::-:.--
0.20
~
'-
File 4: Reports
Total
_
~---
~k.lto23)
~k.24t04S)
~.--Working
Total
I-Jii:49
2S.54
Unit of measure (characters)
~:routines
standard
Fae
Problem A
Space
i'ii:OT'
.J:!!£.L--FUe 4
-=::--:-::--
4
-
-~ -~ ~O_ ~.~ 1 - - - - -
C.P.
Cor C. P. and
dominant VO
column.
1O
17.0
r-
~=FiIe2
-"I' - : ; - - standard
Flle
Problem A
F = 1.0
--a-s -
REFERENCE
1,080
1O
17.0
---'-22.9*
9.3
~- -~
0
0
VIllB
(Unblocked
Files 3 & 4)
I,oao
1O
23.5
1- __
0_
--_.~- -~ 1 - _0_ _
__
0_
-~
3
msec/block
-~
25.0
129
VIllB
(Blocked
Files 3 & 4)
1,080
1O
23.5
° --
f---'-' -
94
0
~=Flle2
..I!kl. _ _ _ -~
File 4
maec/block
1O
10
22.0
22.
__
75_ _ ~-
- - ---.-
Flle 4
mseo penalty
2
10
58.5
1,080
1,080
1,080
1,080
JFUe I
~--- -~
InputOJtput
File 1
Char/block
vnB
VIIB
(Blocked
(Unblocked
Files 3 & 4) Files 3 & 4)
VnA
IV
1,290
r-- 1-'
10~49 940 10.49
1,290
28.54
r---.!. 300
!L..-.612
-
I~
I~
~ r-- ~ I-- -
1,290 0.23 25.0
0.23
940 2S.54 1,290 11.01 4S.5 11.01
4.300
4.300
0
0
612
612
4~
93.0 .
116.5
----=-0.23
I--19.4
0.23
11.01
19.4
11. 01
r--64
64
~
---idOL- 1---4...:!ill!..._O_
..!L61_2_ _ _ _ _
6_12_
61~ _ _
61L 233L- _2~ ~- f---&.3~ 4:200.1151
0
_ _0_ _
r--
t---
2,334_ --2,334
2,334
4,720
4.720
4,720
lOS
108
lOS
108
lOS
108
108
12 149
12,149
12,149
15 749
12 149
15 749
12 149
*
832L- _4~
~- f-----h7~
Records blocked 10 records/block.
/
(Contd.)
7/66
A
AUERBACH
I!>
516:201. 100
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
·1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
· 11
Standard File Problem A
.114 Graph: . . . • . . . . . • . see graph below.
.115 Storage space required Configurations III,
IV, VI, VIlA: . . . . 12, 149 characters.
Configurations VIIB
& VIIIB (blocked
files 3 & 4): . . . . . 15,749 characters.
Configurations VIIB &
VIIIB (unblocked
files 3 & 4): . . . . . 12,149 characters.
· III Record sizes -
Master file: . . . . • .
Detail file: . . . • . .
Report file: . . • . ..
· 112 Computation: . . • . ..
· 113 Timing basis: •...•.
lOB characters.
1 card.
1 line.
standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
4 ~--~~----------~------------------------------~
--
2 +---~---------+---------------------=--~~~
'J1.,'l1.~
~~
10.
01:==t======t:~~~2==~========1
7 ;-----;-----------~~~~~~~~~~------------------------------~
-"
4
i"
4----+--~~~~~~-4------------------------------~
//
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
VIIIB
---
4 ~----~----------~------------------------------~
2+-~-------+--------------------~)
0.01-+----~-----------+----------------------------------~
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
I
\.
Elapsed Time, Unblocked Files 3 & 4.
Elapsed Time, Blocked Files 3 & 4.
_ _ _ C P _ Central Processor Time.
__ -
-
__ -
_
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc .
.I
'J
7/66
516:201. 120
• 12
HONEYWELL 4200
. 122 Computation: . . . . •. standard •
.123 Timing basis: •...•• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
.124 Graph: . . . • . . . . • • see graph below.
Standard File Problem B
.121 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
• • • • •• 54 characters.
.••..• 1 card.
. . • . .. 1 line.
100.0
7
4
-
2
\~,'
10.0
7
./
2
1.0
7
//
IJiI!
I
~-
0.1
7
J"
/'
~
-
~
- -- -----7
./"
",
VillB
-'
-----
-
C~~
--,-
1.0
..---
".""
~
~
"Vl11B
".
./
~
4
,/ /
'/7 VITA
4
2
",
./ ./
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
--
\"'.J
"VllB _ - - -
-
"'.Jl~C;:::::----
--
\:.;0.101\ \"'.J,_ __. • _ -
lB ~IB_cP"VI ,.j.
---
-
.--Cl'-
100-
2
0.01
0.0
o. 1
0,33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed Time, Unblocked Files 3 & 4.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed Time, Blocked Files 3 & 4.
- - - C P - Central Processor Time.
(Contd. )
7/66
A
AUERBACH
516: 20 I. 130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 13
.132 Computation: .••... standard •
.133 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard File Problem C
.131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
. . • . . . 216 characters.
.•..•• 1 card.
• . . • .. 1 line.
100.0
7
4
--
2
111, ~ ,
10.0
7
~
".,
./
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
1.0
7
/' ./
1'l:
--
//
III, VI
I V/
ff/;
iF
....--
- -----
vnB
-
VIIB_-----
~11\1'--
0.1
7
4
~C\!~
- ..,.
"
1.0
VIllB
4
2
A
Vl~-\l 1~,_,
'\: '
~~~--
CP
---
_CP-
=
Cl'
~-
2
0.01
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations. )
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed Time, Unblocked Files 3 & 4.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed Time, Blocked Files 3 & 4.
_ _ _ C P - Central Processor Time.
(
\
',--
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 4200
516: 20 1. 140
. 14
.142 Computation: .••..• trebled .
. 143 Timing basis: • . . . . • using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide, '
4:200.14.
.144 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard File Problem D
. 141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file:
Report file:
• • • . •. 108 characters.
•..••• 1 card.
• . . . •• 1 line.
100.0
7
4
--
2
\\\,
10.0
7
-"
ioo""
//
4
//
III, VI
2
~
1.0
V/
II'
brVIIA
7
.-
I'1I.~-. 1-i-"""
4
.- .-
~
7
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
1'J
~
-
'VIll13
'VI]l_
~
./
2
0.1
,
1
,~
--~
--
'V \Tl, \TUA--=CP-
~
.--
VIIIB
t.... 1.0
....~1B_C1?---- ..- '11113,
----;;;;
"" .....
-*C~?
....
II'
4
2
0.01
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed Time, Unblocked Files 3 & 4.
- - - - - - - Elapsed Time, Blocked Files 3 & 4.
_ _ _ C P - Central"Processor Time.
(Contd.)
7/66
A
AUERBACH
®
516:201. 200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
.212 Key size: . . . . . • . . • 8 characters .
.213 Timing basis: . . . • . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
. 214 Graph: . . • . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 211 Record size: . . . . . . . 80 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
~
I
4
.:o.y
2
Time in Minutes to
Put Records into
Required Order
10
0/
"-;
,
7
/
/
1
4
111
I~
,
,, /
7
V
~
11
'1
.:0.1/'
~'
~
~rh
~
/
//
I
2
II
.:0.'
'"
L
4
V
I
V
III
.,., 1.0
""
/
/
h
'/
,//
2
0.1
100
2
4
7
2
1,000
4
1
2
4
10,000
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
516:201. 300
HONEYWELL
•3
MATRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
4~00
.312 Timing basis: .•...• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4;200.312 •
• 313 Graph: ..••.•••.• see graph below •
. 311 Basic parameters: .• general., non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits.
100
I
7
I
I
4
I
2
I
I
/
10
7
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
4
J
2
V
V
1
....... 1.0
I
7
I
II
4
2
I
/
I
I
O. 1
,
I
7
I
I
4
I
1/
2
0.01
2
1
4
2
7
4
10
7
2
4
100
7
1.000
Size of Matrix
(For all configurations equipped with the Scientific Option)
(Contd.)
7/66
fA..
AUERBACH
®
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
516:201. 400
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
.412 Computation: . . . . . . . 5 fifth-order polynomials,
5 divisions, 1 square
root; II-digit precision
floating-point mode .
• 413 Timing basis: . . . . • . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413.
.414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
.411 Record sizes: •.•...• 10 signed numbers. avg.
size 5 digits; max.
size 8 digits.
10,000
7
4
2
1,000
7
4
2
VIlA (R=1. 0)
Time in
100
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
VIlA
(A
0.61
~
0.1)
,
"
~
4
2
~~~~
V
./
/'
~
10
7
i.oo"'"
~\\"?o I.] '!:J'~'\0/
~~"?ol.!
"l
-~~
4
2
....
1
..... 1.0
2
0.1
4
7
2
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
4
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 8200
Honeywell EDP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
HONEYWEll 8200
Honeywell EDP Division
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
-&
.
518:011. 100
SlINDARD
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
HONEYWELL 8200
INTRODUCTION
RHIIRTS
INTRODUCTION
The Honeywell Model 8200 system, announced in June 1965, is in the unique position of
forming the top of the product line for two current Honeywell computer families: the characteroriented Series 200 system and the 48-bit word-oriented Honeywell 800 and 1800 systems. This
unusual situation results from the hybrid design of the Model 8200 processing unit which contains
a character-oriented processor (closely resembling a Series 200 Model 4200 processor in speed
and performance) and a word-oriented processor (based on the logical design of the Honeywell 800/1800 systems but with significant improvements in speed and performance).
The Honeywell Model 8200 offers users of the earlier H 800/1800 systems a more powerful, fully compatible processing system at virtually the same cost as their present systems.
Typical Model 8200 systems will rent at prices between $30,000 and $50, 000 per month. The
8200 word processor can perform up to 400, 000 three-address instructions per second - almost
four times the instruction speed of an H 1800 processor. Also, the main core memory cycle time
of the 8200 is 750-nanoseconds per 8-character word, as compared to the core storage cycle time
of 2 microseconds per word in the 1800. (The H 800 system is approximately three times slower
than the H 1800.) In addition, the Model 8200 provides twice the main memory storage capacity
of the H 1800: 1,048,576 characters versus 524,288 characters, respectively; and up to four 8200
memory modules can be accessed simultaneously, as compared to the lack of simultaneous
memory access capability in the H 1800.
Multiprogramming, or the ability to execute more than one main program concurrently
in a single processor, has been for some time an outstanding feature of the Honeywell 1800 systems:
up to eight programs can be executed concurrently with no overhead delays incurred by program
switching. The Model 8200 processing unit provides the same multiprogramming capabilities as
the H 1800, plus many more. The 8200 includes a ninth group of processor control registers that
is completely dedicated to usage by an overall system control program, permitting the remaining
eight independent groups of processor control registers to be used exclusively by concurrently
running user programs.
The standard method of multiprogrammed processing in the 8200 word processor consists of hardware assignment of single instruction execution opportunities to each active program
in a consecutive, cyclic manner. When the execution of an instruction is initiated by a program,
control remains with that program until the instruction is completed. An instruction overlap
feature enables the word processor to fetch the next instruction in the multiprogramming sequence
while the current instruction is being executed.
The Model 8200 processing unit also provides true multiprocessing capability with the
inclusion of the character-oriented, variable-length-field (VLF) processor - in addition to the
word-oriented processor. Program execution in the character processor can proce.ed independently
of the multiprogrammed operations occurring simultaneously in the word processor. In fact, the
character processor can itself function in a multiprogramming mode, permitting the concurrent
execution of up to two main programs. Both processors share a common main memory and common
Honeywell Series 200 peripheral devices.
Multiprogramming and multiprocessing operations in a Model 8200 system can take advantage of an extensive interrupt control system and a comprehensive memory protection scheme
that features hardware-controlled protection of individual 512-word blocks of main core storage.
Inter-processor communication is facilitated through use of specialized instructions in the word
processor and a set of privileged instructions reserved for the system I s master control facility.
I
Effective usage of the potential multiprogramming power of a Model 8200 system is made
feasible by provision of a high-capacity, expandable input-output system. An independently operating
Input-Output Controller permits up to 34 I/O data transfer operations to be performed concurrently
with computing in the word and character processors. The I/O Controller also permits connection
of up to 96 peripheral device control units, serviced by up to 48 "floating" input-output channels.
The maximum aggregate data transfer rate that can be accommodated by the input-output system
is 2,833,333 characters per second.
(
Current users of Honeywell Series 200 Model 4200 equipment will probably find that replacement of their 4200 system with a Model 8200 system, for the purpose of expanding their
current processing capabilities, is an undesirable step. A typical Model 8200 system is substantially more expensive (approximately $10,000 more per month for processing unit and required
mass storage device) than a typical Model 4200 system. Much of the additional expense is due to
the fact that the Model 8200 contains two processors - a word-oriented processor and a Series 200
character-oriented processor that provides virtually the same performance as the standard Model
4200 processor. In addition, an upward move to a Model 8200 system from a Model 4200 system
~
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518:011. 101
HONEYWELL 8200
could require a complete re-orientation and re-education of personnel in order to take advantage
of what would be a new world of word-oriented processing. This extensive re-orientation probably
would not be necessary if the installation writes the great majority of its programs in high-level
programming languages.
Thus the Honeywell Model 8200 system represents an attractive upward move for users
of Honeywell 800 and 1800 systems, but a somewhat questionable move for users of Series 200
systems who desire to upgrade their systems quantitatively, rather than qualitatively.
The competitive position of the Honeywell 8200 system with respect to the offerings from
the other major computer manufacturers can be indicated by determining the relationship between
the 8200 and the IBM System/360. The pricing of the Model 8200 is similar to that of the IBM
System/360 Model 65: monthly rental prices typically range between $30,000 and $50,000. In
addition, the core storage cycle times of these two systems are roughly equivalent, and the binary
arithmetic instruction execution times of the 8200 word processor and the System/360 Model 65
are also very similar. However, the word processor of the Model 8200 can perform typical
decimal arithmetic tasks, such as c = a+b, c = alb, from three to five times faster than the Model
65 processing unit, aided largely by the 8200's three-address instructions and add-to-storage logic.
As a result, when executing programs that contain an instruction mix that is oriented to processing
commercial, decimal information, a Model 8200 processing unit will probably outperform an
IBM System/360 Model 65 processing unit.
This competitive position of the Honeywell Model 8200 system is also made possible
by the availability of the wide range of Honeywell Series 200 peripheral devices - a range that,
in general, offers devices that are directly comparable to those offered with the IBM System/360
Model 65.
Software support for the Honeywell Model 8200 will consist of a variety of language
processors and service programs designed to function under control of a system of integrated
supervisory programs. The complete mass memory-resident software system is called the
Operating System - Mod 8, and requires permanent use of about 65, 536 characters of core storage
and an additional 15 million characters of random-access storage. The Operating System - Mod 8
provides virtually uninterrupted operation of the Model 8200 system; little operator intervention
will be required. Automatic and dynamic program scheduling is also provided, designed to
utilize as much as possible of the available hardware configuration at all times. The concurrent
execution of multiple user programs is also controlled automatically.
All software programs provided with the earlier Honeywell 800 and 1800 systems can
function without modification in the Model 8200 word processor, and all Series 200 Model 4200
programs can function without modification in the Model 8200 character processor. Because of
this high degree of compatibility with current Honeywell computer systems, the Model 8200 will
have a large body of time-proven software available for use with its initial systems.
Operating System - Mod 8 will include an ASA FORTRAN IV compiler, an ASA COBOL
compiler, and a large-scale assembler. All Model 8200 programs, including compilers, will
initially operate in a batched job processing mode, although these jobs can be batched from remote
locations. Conversational, time-sharing software will be provided some time after initial deliveries of the hardware.
The Honeywell Model 8200 system - complete with software - is scheduled for delivery
in January 1968.
,/
7/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
- & ST"""
IA
AUERBAC~
518:031. 001
HONEYWELL 8200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
EDP
REPORts
~
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The Input-Output Controller of the Honeywell 8200 processing unit contains either
16 or 32 input-output channels. Read/write channels associated with the controller are capable
of variable assignments under program control.
All peripheral devices associated with the Series 200, and selected devices used
with the Honeywell 800/1800 systems, can be connected to an 8200 system. In the following
system configurations, Honeywell's newer 1/2-inch magnetic tape units are used rather than
the 3/4-inch units that are standard on the 800/1800 systems. Selection of the 1/2-inch units
was made because the specialized software being developed for use with the Model 8200 system
requires the use of 1/2-inch magnetic tape units.
Since the Model 8200 consists of a word and character processor within a single
system, the use of a satellite computer system in conjunction with the 8200 can frequently be
unnecessary. As a result, the two Standard Configurations shown in this section are both
integrated systems. However, Honeywell notes that a Series 200 Model 120 system can
effectively serve the 8200 as a remote terminal processor or as a local data communications
controller or data adapter.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 8200
518:031: 100
.1
IO-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . ..
two processors are included
in basic Processing Unit.
mass storage with a capacity
of 15 million characters is
required for the 8200's Mod 8
operating system.
card reader is 60% faster.
printer is 30% faster.
core storage is 170% larger.
84 additional index registers.
Rental *
Equipment
250 Mass Storage Control Unit
251 Mass Memory File,
15 million characters
$
335
670
8201-1 Processor with
262,144 characters of core
storage
25,580
Input-Output Console (includes
typewriter and direct control)
222-3 Printer and Control
(120 print positions):
650 lines/minute
925
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 lines/minute
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/minute
155
310
!]03B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
64,000 char/second
435
3,075
203B-4 Tape Control Unit
204B-8 Magnetic Tape Units (5):
63,520 char/second
435
3,075
/
Optional Features Included:
.....................
Feature 8214 (permits buffered
transfer of 4-character data
blocks; also provides 16
additional read/write
channels)
TOTAL
*
1,525
$36,830
The rental prices quoted above represent monthly rental prices
under a one-year monthly term agreement. The same configuration under a five-year agreement rents for $34,405 per month.
(Contd.)
7/66
A
AUERBACH
@
518:031. 200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.2
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIllA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . ..
two processors are included
in basic Processing Unit.
mass storage with a capacity
of 15 million characters is
required for the 8200's Mod 8
operating system.
core storage is 36% larger.
84 additional index registers.
magnetic tape is 20% slower.
card reader is 20% slower.
Equipment
250 Mass Storage Control Unit
251 Mass Memory File,
15 million character capacity
Rental*
$
335
670
8201-1 Processor with 262,144
characters of core storage
25,580
Input-Output Console (includes
typewriter and direct control)
222-4 Printer and Control
(120 print positions):
950 lines/minute
Optional Features Included:
.....................
1, 305
223 Card Reader and Control:
800 lines/minute
310
208-1 Card Punch Control
214-1 Card Punch:
100 to 400 cards/minute
155
310
203B-6 Tape Control
204B-9 Magnetic Tape Units (7):
96,000 char/sec
435
5,740
203B-6 Tape Control Unit
204B-9 Magnetic Tape Units (7):
96,000 char/sec
435
5,740
203B-6 Tape Control Unit
204B-9 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
96,000 char/sec
435
4,920
Scientific Unit (floating-point
arithmetic)
Feature 8214 (permits buffered
transfer of 4-character data
blocks; also provides 16
additional read/write
channels)
TOTAL
760
1,525
$48,655
* The rental prices quoted above represent monthly rental prices
under a one-year monthly term agreement. The same configuration under a five-year agreement rents for $45, 115 per month.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518:041. 100
4•
AUERBACH
STANDARD
HONEYWELL 8200
INTERNAL STORAGE
CORE STORAGE
EDP
IIfPORI5
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ••.••... Honeywell 8201 Core Storage.
• 12
Basic Use:
• 13
Description
processor. This alternating scheme serves to
avoid the possibility of one processor dominating
the use of a single memory module. Note that the
word-oriented processor never has a memory
access conflict with itself, since each memory
module will contain either all right-halves or all
left-halves of stored words.
..•..• working storage.
The main memory of the Model 8200 is a core
storage unit that consists of either two, four, or
eight independent memory modules with a cycle
time of 750 nanoseconds. Each memory module
stores either 16,384 or 32,768 36-bit (4-character)
"half-words." Combinations of these two module
sizes make up the four models of 8200 core storage,
ranging in size from 32,768 8-character words to
131,072 8-character words (262,144 to 1,048,576
characters). Up to four memory accesses to four
different, independent memory modules can occur
simultaneously.
Consecutive memory addresses are interleaved
accross all installed memory modules in the 8200
core storage unit. The central processor can
thereby automatically access several memory
modules concurrently to speed execution of most
instructions. As an example, Figure 1 shows the
amount of memory overlap possible with the 8200's
word-oriented processor as contrasted with the
non-overlapped memory operation of the earlier
Honeywell 800 and 1800 processors.
Each word of stored data can consist of either one
48-bit word plus 8 check bits or eight characters
with six data bits, two punctuation bits, and one
parity bit per character.
A central memory controller unit routes memory
access requests from four potential sources: the
Input-Output Controller, the 8200 characteroriented processor, and the "left and right sides"
of the 8200 word-oriented processor. The 8200
word processor simultaneously accesses two adjacent memory modules to obtain the left and right
side of each addressed 72-bit word. If two or
three sources request the same module simultaneously, the memory controller always grants
access first to the I/O controller, and then, alternately, to either the character-or-word-oriented
800/1800
00
o
A parity bit is provided for each 6-bit character
during its recording in core storage. When the
stored data is read out of memory, the parity of
each character is checked and an error is signalled
if improper parity is discovered.
Memory protection in the 8200 is provided for each
block of 512 words of storage. Each block has an
associated four-bit "Lock" register, and each active program element, whether in the character
I COMPI
- t--
IC-DELI
0
BUFFER
~ CYCLES
8200
A-FETCH
I
AF
B-FETCHI
BF
I
INSTRUCTION
FETCH
.
IF
COMPUTEI
COMP
C-DELIVERyl
A- FETCH
IC-DELI
I~_,---A_F~
Figure 1. Honeywell 8200 Memory Overlap Compared to Non-Overlapped
Operations of Honeywell 800 and 1800.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
/ ' !
7/66
HONEYWELL 8200
518:041. 130
.13
. 14
.16
Description (Contd.)
processor or in one of the eight control portions
of the word processor, has a four-bit "Key" register. Every memory access, whether to extract
an instruction, fetch an operand, deliver a result,
or transfer input-output data, requires the use of
a memory key. The memory controller compares
the key to the lock of the addressed memory block.
If a match occurs, the memory access is allowed;
if a mismatch is detected, control is transferred
to the master control program.
Memory locks can be set so that only active program elements that have matching keys can both
read and write in the protected parts of memory.
Locks can also be set to permit reading of core
storage blocks by all active program elementsreserving the privilege of writing in core storage
to active program e~ements with matching keys.
Finally, locks can be set to allow both reading
and writing in a common portion of memory by all
active program elements.
Availability: •..••.•• January Hl68 •
Reserved storage
Address Range
Purpose
Communication withThe word-oriented
processor: . . . . . . . . • . . 100 - 107
The master group:
110 - 113
The character-oriented
processor: ••• ~ •..
114 - 117
120 - 123
The I/O Controller:
Unit of data:
•..• one-half-word of four 9-bit
characters.
Gain factor: •••.. 2 to 4 modules can be a
accessed simultaneously.
Data rate: •••.. 1,333, 000 half-words per
second per module.
Compound
data rate: ..••• 2,667,000 to 5,334,000
half-words per second.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes: ... see Table I.
.4
CONTROLLER:
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.52
Simultaneous Operations: ..•. access to any four
modules can take
place independent·
ly of other modules.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
. • . . . . • •• no separate controller; all required control facilities are included
in processor and
storage modules.
.531 For uniform access (each module) Access time: .••...•...• 0.38 /J-sec.
Cycle time:
•.••.•.•••. 0.75 /Jsec.
For data unit of: ...•.••.. one half':'word
(containing four
characters) •
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
storage Medium:
magnetic core.
.7
PERFORMANCE
. 23
Storage Phenomenon:
direction of
magnetization.
.72
Transfer Load Size
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
With self: ••••.....•..•. one 6-bit character
to N 48-bit words;
N is limited only
by storage capacity.
.292 Peak data rates Cycling rates: ..• up to 1,333,000 cps. per
module .
. 73 Effective Transfer Rate (With Self)
871,000 words/sec (average); 1,332,565 words/ sec (max).
6,968,000 char/sec (average); 10,660,520 chari sec (max) •
•8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Action
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Timing conflict:
check
check
check
check
Machine malfunction:
Barricade violations:
check
check
transfer to Master Group.
controlled by program.
controlled by program.
resolved automatically
by priority control.
transfer to Master Group.
transfer to Master Group.
TABLE 1: MODULE AND SYSTEM SIZES
Words:
Characters:
Packed digits:
8201-3
0/4
0
0
0
2/0
4
0
8
0
0
4
0
32,768
65,536
98,304
131,072
262,144
524,288
786,432
1,048,576
393,216
786,432
1,179,648
1,572,864
*The 48 x 2 10 half-word module is a combination of the two smaller module sizes.
7/66
8201-4
8201-2
8201-1
16 x 2 10 half-word modules:
32 x 2 10 half-word modules:
48 x 2 10 half-word modules*:
A
AUERBACH
'"
518:051. 100
/i&•
AUERBACH
SUNDIRD
EDP
HONEYWELL 8200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
REI'8RTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
. 11
GENERAL
Identity: .•.
. 12
Description
. Honeywell 8201 Central
Processor.
The processing portion of the Honeywell 8200
computer system features both multiprogramming
and multiprocessing operations. The 8200 is a
multiprocessing system in that it features both a
word-oriented and a character-oriented processor,
each capable of independent and simultaneous
operation. It is a multiprogramming system in that
both the word and character processors can concurrently execute more than one program. The
word processor is an improved but direct descendant of the earlier Honeywell 800 and 1800
processors, and, as such, features hardware
facilities to permit execution of up to eight user
programs concurrently. The character processor
(or Variable Length Field processor) is compatible
with the other processors of the Honeywell Series
200 and most closely resembles the Model 4200
processor. The character processor can concurrently execute up to two main programs. Both
processors share a common core storage unit
which can be accessed in either 48-bit words or
8 -bit characters.
Coordinating the activities of the word processor,
the character processor, and a shared Input-Output Controller is the function of a master control
facility that uses the specialized "Master Group"
of control registers. Program data and control
information are passed between the several principal components of the Honeywell 8200 through the
use of common buffer areas and interconnecting
channels .
.121 Word Processor
The word processor is made up of eight groups of
program control registers, plus a Master Group
of control registers and a single Arithmetic Unit.
Each program control group consists of 32 program control registers in a control memory unit
that has a read/write cycle time of 125 nanoseconds. Figure 2 identifies each of the registers
within a group. Each register in a group is 24 bits
in length, 6 bits longer than the control registers
provided in the earlier Honeywell 800 and 1800 pro'
cessors. The additional register bits are used
only by certain special instructions that have been
added to the basic 8200 instruction set.
Multiprogramming control in the Model 8200 word
processor is performed largely by hardware alone.
A Sequence Register Traffic Controller passes
control cyclically - one instruction execution per
program - to the nine programs (including the
master control program) that potentially can be
processed concurrently. Since each program has
its own complete set of 32 control registers, including two sequence counters, no program control
information need be stored when control passes
between programs. Control remains with each
program until its entire instruction is executed.
This situation occurs because there is only one
arithmetic unit in the word processor; partial
results of arithmetic instructions could be lost if
control were allowed to pass to instructions of
another program.
Word Processor
Program
Control
Registers
External
Interrupt
Registers
Arithmetic
Unit
Internal
Interrupt
Registers
Arithmetic Unit
Character Processor
I
\
PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Figure 1. Logical Diagram of the Principal Components of the Honeywell Model 8200.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518:051. 121
HONEYWELL 8200
.121 Word Processor (Contd.)
Instruction Format
The basic instruction format of the 8200 word processor consists of four 12-bit fields: the operation
code, A address, B address, and C address. The
, high-order bit of each address field contains an
addressing mode indicator. The remaining 11
address bits can designate one of the 2,048 word
locations in a bank of memory. (There are eight
banks per memory module and a maximum of eight
memory modules per system.) These 11 bits are
apperided to the specific bank selector bits contained
in the sequence counter register that accessed the
instruction. The resultant 23-bit address field
represents a direct memory address to potentially
8,388,608 'words of core storage. The current
maximum size'of Model 8200 core storage is
131,072 words (see Section 518:041). Thus, the
method of direct addressing will facilitate later
expansion of the 8200 main core storage unit, and'
it also provides the potential capability to address
directly a m3,ssive auxiliary core storage unit although Honeywell has given no indication that such
a unit is being developed.
'
The automatic sharing of processor cycles among
programs can be inhibited by the master control
facility in order to obtain exclusive use of all
available memory cycles. Individual user ,pro.,..
grams can also obtain from the Monitor program
dedicated, non-shared use of the word processor.
By contrast, whenever active programs do not
require immediate use of processor cycles - for
example, during input-output operations performed
by the independent I/O Controller - the Traffic
'
Controller passes processor control to those programs that can utilize processor cycles and loses
no cycles while skipping those nondemanding programs.
Thus, the Model 8200 word processor is a single
processor with effective hardware facilities for
executiilg up to eight core-resident user programs
concurrently. Switching of control from' program to
program is accomplished by hardware without any
overhead switching time.
The principal advantage of the multiprogramming
hardware of the Model 8200 word processor is the
fact that each active program has its own set of
processor control registers. Program switching by
the method of sharingprocessor cycles ,between
resident programs has the, same general problem
as all other forms of multiprogramming control: its
effectiveness is totally dependent upon the nature of
the program mix. For exal'nple, the execution of
eight compute-bound prog:t:ams running concurrently
in the Model 8200 word processor will consume
essentially the same amount of time as running
these same programs in the conventional sequential
batch processing manner. However, when the
Model 8200 word processor is executing a balanced
mix of I/O and compute-bound programs, definite
increases,in throughput, can be gained by processing
in a multiprogramming mode rather than in a
sequential mode.
AUl
Depending on the values of the high-order bit of
each address and the Memory Designator bit contained in the operation code field of the instruction,
several other basic forms of main memory addressing can be specified: indirect addressing, with an
addressed program control register (one of 32
, , within each group) providing the actual 23-bit address; indexed addressing; 'using one of the eight
index registers within each register group; and
indexed indirect addressing, in which the indexed
value points to any of the 256 program control registers for accessing the contents of the indicated
register or for specifying an operand location in
main memory. In addition, all 32 program registers within each of the 8 program control groups
can be addressed in the direct 'and indirect modes.
The Model 8200 word processor also utilizes an
extended instruction format that can occupy two
Aritlm1ctic Control Registers
Am
SC
Sequence Counter
CSC
Cosequence Counter
SH
Sequence History Register
CSH
Cosequence History Register
UTR
Unprogrammed Transfer Register
MXR
Mask Index Register
XO - X7
Index Registers 0 - 7
RO - R7
General Purpose Registers 0 - 7
SO - S7
General Purpose Registers 0 - 7
Ixlxlxlxl
..
Key Re&ister
I Base Relocation Register
Stopper Relocation Register
Figure 2. Program Control Registers within a Control Group; eight Control Groups
are provided within the Model 8200 Word Processor.
7/66
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
",,---
518:051. 200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
Note:
.21
Unless otherwise indicated, the entries below refer to the capabilities of the
8200 word processor only. The capabilities of the character processor are,
in general, identical with those of the Honeywell Model 4200 processor,
described in Section 516:051.
Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation
.211 Fixed point Add/ subtract:
Provision
Radix
automatic
binary
decimal
Multiply:
automatic
binary
decimal
Divide:
automatic
binary
decimal
. 212 Floating point* (available both with and without normalization) -
Size
44
11
44
11
44
11
bits + sign.
digits + sign.
bits + sign.
digits + sign.
bits + sign.
digits + sign .
Add/subtract:
*automatic
binary
or
decimal
40 & 7.
Multiply:
*automatic
binary
or
decimal
40 & 7.
Divide:
*automatic
binary
or
decimal
40 & 7.
* Provided only when Scientific Unit is included in word processor.
. 213 BooleanAND:
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
.214 ComparisonNumbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
.215
. 216
• 217
. 218
.219
. 22
automatiC}
automatic
automatic
binary.
automatic
automatic.
automatic.
character processor only.
Code translation: . • . . . • . .
Radix conversion .••.••..
Edit format: . . . . . • . . • . .
Table lookup: . • . • • . . . . . .
OthersAccumulate: .••.•••.•.
character
character
character
character
processor only •
and word processors .
processor only .
processor only
automatic •
Special Cases of Operands
.221 Negative numbers: .....•• in fixed-point representation, the sign is stored as 4 bits,
but used as 1 bit; in floating point, I-bit sign representation is used •
• 222 Zero: . . . . . . • • . . . . . . • . positive or negative z~ro possible. These behave
differently in alphabetic comparisons but identically in
numeric comparisons •
. 23
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure: .•..• I-word, 3-address instructions. Two-wordinstructions
with extended addressing can also be used (see Paragraph .121).
.
.232 Instruction layout: ....••• see diagram on the following page.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518:051. 233
HONEYWELL 8200
BITS
1
General Instructions
Unmasked
S
2
/
C
3
1st
Part of
Op Code
4
5
7
6
Memory
Designator
AIBI C
8
9
10
12
11
13-24
25-36
37-48
2nd Part of
Operation Code
A
B
C
Operation Code
A
B
C
Operation Code
A
B
C
A
B
C
S
General Instructions
Masked
/
Partial Mask
Address
C
Peripheral Address
Peripheral
Instructions
I/O
Channel
Device
D
Simulator
Instructions
/
Remainder of Address
I
1
.233 Instruction parts -
Name
SIC: • • . • . . . .
.
Op Code: . . . . . . . .
Memory Designator: .
D/I:
.........
A,B,C:
.234 Basic address
structure: . . .
.235 LiteralsArithmetic:
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . .
Incrementing
modifiers:.
1
.2374 Index
specification:
.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . • . . . .
.2376 Address which can
be indexed: . . • . . .
.2377 Cumulative
indexing:. . . • . . . .
.2378 Combined index
and step: . . • . . . .
PUrpose
to designate either the
Sequence Counter or the
Cosequence counter as
providing the next instruction.
operation code of 6, or 6
and 2 bits.
part of addressing structure of the operands
part of addressing
structure
part of addresses of
operands.
. 3-address.
. none.
. . character processor only.
. • yes, by use of indirect
addressing.
• 236 Directly addressed operands
Internal storage Minimum Maximum Volume
~
size
size
accessible
Core Storage:
1 bit
48 bits 2,048words
Special Registe·r:
1 bit
24 bits
256 words
. 237 Address indexing .2371 Number of
methods: . . . . . . . one. (However, see "Indirect addressing," whose
increment feature allows
index-type operation.)
. . indexing.
. 2372 Names: . . . .
. up to 256 is added to (or
. 2373 Indexing rule:
subtracted from) the
storage address given in
the specified index register. Extended addressing
permits indexing by
values up to 131,072. The
lR is not modified. The
storage address can be
either in Main Memory or
in the Control Memory
(where the 288 24-bit
processor control registers are implemented) and
the augmented address obtained can be used directly or indirectly.
7/66
1
within the instruction.
288.
211.
none.
not using index registers,
but available using an
index register simply as
a special register. See
"Indirect addressing. "
.238 Indirect addressing .2381 Recursive: .
· no .
. 2382 Designation: ..•.. · special bit in instruction,
which then interprets the
11 address bits of the
appropriate A, B, or C
address as an increment
·and the address of
anyone of the control
registers in .any group .
.2383 Control: ..•.•.•. · absolute address must be
contained in an addressed
special register.
.2384 Indexing with indirect
addressing: . . . . . . modification occurs before
the indirect address is
determined .
. 239 SteppingIndex registers: ..
.2391
.2392
.2393
. 2394
.2395
.24
fA
AUERBACH
'"
· own coding or a special
register .
Indirect addressing: · as specified above .
Specification of
increment: . . . . . . in instruction.
Increment sign: . . . . special register sign.
Size of increment: .. 0 through 17 bits.
End value: . • . . . . . own coding .
Combined step
and test:
... yes.
Special Processor
Storage: . . . . . • .
· the nine groups of program
control registers are implemented in a special
control memory. See
Figure 2 for a listing of
the registers within each
group.
(Contd.)
518:051. 300
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing
.311 Number of sequence
control facilities: ... 18.
.312 Arrangement: . . . . . • 2 per program, 9 programs
per word processor.
.313 Precedence rule
(within program): ... continues with one control
until instructed to transfer
control to other.
Precedence rule
(within processor): .• cyclically in turn to all
active programs unless
inhibited.
. 314 Special s'ub-sequence
counters: . . . . . .. nine (the Unprogrammed
Transfer Registers).
• 315 Sequence control
step size: . . . . .
. instruction words.
.316 Accessibility to
routines:. . . • . .. . yes.
.32
Look-ahead:
· 33
Interruption
· yes; see Paragraph
518:041. 13.
. 331 Possible causes: . . . . see Table 1.
.332 Control by routine Individual control: .• all interrupts within one
program; positions relative to a standard control
register.
Method: . . • . . . . . . either the sign of the increment or the base of the
increment can be adjusted.
.333 Operator control:
. none.
· 334 Interruption conditions: interruption condition
arises in program channel.
· 335 Interruption process Disabling interruption: . . . . . . . • automatic
Registers saved: ••. all.
.4
Designation: . . • . . . standard distance away
from variable base address stored in special
register of program
group. Base address
varies depending on interruption cause.
· 336 Control methods Determine cause: ... given by entry place.
Enable interruption: • enabled whenever Master
Group enters the Hunt or
Ready operating mode.
.34
Multiprogramming
· 341 Method of control: ... multi sequence counters .
• 342 Maximum number of
programs: . . . . . • . 11 - 8 user programs in
word processor, 1 control
program in word processor, and 2 user programs
in character processor.
.343 Precedence rules: ..• cyclic; first-off, first-on,
with cycling inhibition in
own coding.
• 344 Program protectionStorage: . . . . . . . . . by hardware, under control
of Master Group .
I/o areas: •..••... by hardware, under control
of Master Group.
I/O units: . . . . . . . . by hardware, under control
of Master Group, or by
software.
.35
Multi-Sequencing; . . . . a single program within
the word processor can
use as many program control groups as desired to
perform subprograms
concurrently with the
main program. In addition, the word and character processors execute
programs simultaneously .
PROCESSOR SPEEDS*
NOTE: The entries below refer to the speeds of the 8200 word processor only. The internal
speeds of the 8200 character processor are identical with those of the Model 4200 processor, described in Section 516:051.
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point (binary and decimal) Add/subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.412 Floating point** Add/ subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing:
Indirect addreSSing:
Recomplementing:
.. . ......
....... . ... ...
· ....... ......
. .....
. .....
. .....
......... . .....
"
· .........
.........
........
*
"}
...
....
Minimum
1. 75
5.0
14.0
Maximum
3.0
5.0
14.0
2.25
5.0
13.0
5.0
5.0
13.0
can be completely
overlapped with access
of another operand
0.75
Minimum times assume maximum overlap of instruction and operand accesses using 4-way
interleaving of memory addresses; all addresses are considered active and in direct main
memory. Maximum times assume that all addresses are indirect and indexed.
** With optional equipment.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
7/66
518:051. 414
HONEYWELL 8200
.414 ControlCompare: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . .
Branch: • . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compare and Branch: . . . . • . . . . . . . • . . .
.415 Counter control Step: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . •
Step and Test: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . .
.416 Edit: • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 417 ConvertFixed decimal to floating binary Conversion:.
Floating binary to fixed decimal Conversion:.
. 418 Shift: . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.42
Maximum
3.5
2.25
3.5
not available for index registers;
included in use of indirect address.
not available.
3.0
3.5
6.4 + 1. 7C + 1. IX (performed in character
processor) .
C = number of characters scanned during
zero suppression; X = number scanned
for floating dollar sign insertion .
17.75
9.5
1. 75
17.75
9.5
4.5
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses c = a + b: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • •
b = a + b: • . • . • • • • • • . . • . . • . • . . . . . •
Sum N items: . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c = ab: . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
c = alb: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.422 For arrays of data ci = aibf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
bj = ai-fbj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
Sum N items (uniform signs): . . . . . . . . . .
Sum N items (different signs: . . . . . . . . . .
c = c+aibr . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data:
................. .
Alphabetic data:
................. .
.424 Switching ~
Unchecked:
................. .
Checked: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
List search:
................. .
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compose: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
.426 Table lookup, per comparison For a match: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For least or greatest: . . . . . • , . . . . • . . .
For interpolation point: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate location: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set bit in pattern: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test bit in separate location: . . . . . . . . . . .
Test bit in pattern: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test AND for B bits: . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . .
Test OR for B bits:
............... .
.428 Moving (per N 72-bit words): . . . . . . . . . . .
.5
Minimum
3.0
1. 75
3.0
Fixed Point
Min.
Max.
3.0
1. 75
3.0
1. 75
1. 25+ .25N
I.5+.75N
5.0
5.0
14.0
14.0
3.5
3.5
3.0+0.25N
3.0+0.25N
8.5
5.25
5.25
3.25 + O. 75N
3.25 + O. 25N
10.25
10.75
10.75
Floating
Min.
2.25
2.25
2.25N
5.0
13.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
7.0
9.0
Point
Max.
5.5
5.5
5.5N
5.0
13.0
7.75
7.75
7.75
11. 25
12.75
12.75
12.75
4.25
11. 25
3.5+4.25N
3.75
9.75
3.0+3.75N
1. 2 (character processor).
2.1 (character processor).
3.75
5.5
3.75
4.25
6.5
4.25
1. 75
2.5
1. 75
2.5
2.5
2.5
I.25+0.75N
3.0
3.75
3.0
3.75
2.5
2.5
1. 25 + 1. 5N
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or Interlock
Overflow:
Underflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:.
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Action
Program Group interrupt.
Program Group interrupt.
Program Group interrupt.
Program Group interrupt.
Master Group interrupt.
Master Group interrupt.
Master Group interrupt.
Program Group interrupt.
Program Group interrupt.
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
check
A
AUERBACH
'"
-£. ""'"'
5f8:fft.fOf
HONEYWELL 8200
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
•
REPOITS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
A Honeywell Model 8200 Proccssing Unit consists of three principal processing
components: the word processor, charactcr processor, and Input-Output Controller. These
components can simultaneously and independcntly access four different core storage memory
modules. The word processor always accesses two modules in parallel for every 72-bit word
access - one 36-bit half-word from each module. The character processor and I/O Controller
can access only one module at a time. Thus, four modules of memory are required to achieve
the highest degree of simultaneous accessing of core storage. The minimum 8200 system
configuration includes two memory modules, permitting simultaneous memory access by the
character processor and the I/O Controller, or a single memory access (to both modules) by the
word processor.
The overall capacity of a Honeywell 8200 system with four memory modules permits
the simultaneous execution of:
III
Two independent instructions, one in each processor; and
•
Three memory accesses, one from each processor and one
from the I/O Controller; and
III
From 16 to 34 data transfer operations between the I/O
Controller and the 96 potential peripheral devices or
peripheral device control units; and
III
As many buffered peripheral I/O operations as have been
initiated by the peripheral device control units and not yet
terminated.
The Input-Output Controller in the basic Model 8200 system provides two sets of 16
input-output channels, up to 16 of which can be used simultaneously. One set performs the
functions of the Read-Write Channels of the Series 200 processors, and the other set performs
the functions of the Read-Write Channels of the Honeywell 800/1800 processors. Normally,
only the character processor uses the Series 200-type channels, and only the word processor
uses the 800/1800-type channels. Up to 16 channels in any combination can transfer data
simultaneously.
An expanded Model 8200 system with Feature 8214 provides 16 character processor
channels and 32 word processor channels, and up to 34 of these channels in any combination
can transfer data simultaneously.
The basic Honeywell 8200 I/O Controller has three input-output sectors, each of
which permits the permanent connection of up to 16 peripheral device control units. Feature
8214 increases the number of sectors to six and provides connection for up to 96 permanently
installed peripheral control units - again, 16 per sector. The 32 basic I/O channels (48 with
Feature 8214) are not permanently associated with any sector or any peripheral device connected to a sector. Instead, each channel floats to any sector and device currently addressed,
thereby increasing the likelihood of achieving a high degree of simultaneous input-output data
transfers.
The maximum input-output data transfer capacity of the basic Honeywell 8200 I/O
Controller (i. e., without Feature 8214) is 1,333,333 characters per second. One character of
data is transferred between main memory and the I/O Controller during each memory cycle.
Sectors 1 and 2 of the basic I/O Controller have a maximum transfer capacity of 500, 000 characters per second, and Sector 3 has a maximum capacity of 333,333 characters per second.
Up to six peripheral devices within Sector 1 can concurrently share its sector's 500KC data
capacity, resulting in a maximum I/O data capacity of 83, 333 characters per second for each
device if all six peripheral devices in Sector 1 were operating concurrently. Similarly,
Sector 2 permits up to six peripheral devices to operate concurrently, provided its 500KC
data transfer rate is not exceeded. Sector 3 of the basic I/O Controller permits up to four
peripheral devices to function simultaneously, also at a maximum rate of 83,333 characters
per second for each device when all four devices are concurrently operating. Therefore,
the basic Model 8200 I/O Controller permits the concurrent operation of up to 16 peripheral
devices or peripheral control units within its three sectors, provided none of the 16 data
transfer operations exceeds 83,333 characters per second.
Peripheral devices with higher data transfer rates are accommodated by the I/O
Controller'S interlocking of the six memory cycles available to each sector (four cycles available
to Sector 3) and assigning the six cycles to either one, three, four, or five devices, thereby
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518: 111. 102
HONEYWELL 8200
providing sector data transfer capacities of either 500KC, 333KC, 250KC, or 166KC, respectively. Sector 3 can be interlocked to provide transfer rates of either 166KC or its maximum
333KC.
Feature 8214 provides four "buffered" sectors instead of the basic Sector 2. Each of
these four sectors effectively has the same characteristics as the single Sector 2 which they
replace. For example, each buffered sector has a maximum data rate capacity of 500,000 characters per second, can handle a maximum of 6 concurrent I/O operations, and can connect up to
16 peripheral contrql devices. The explanation for the apparently quadrupled data transfer capacityin relation to that of Sector 2 lies in the fact that each of these four 8214 sectors contains
4-character buffers in which four data characters are accumulated before requiring an access to
main memory.
Table I shows the start time, stop time, and data transmission time (including demand
on main memory) for each of the principal Honeywell Series 200 peripheral devices that will be
used with the Model 8200 system. Certain devices cannot be used in the buffered I/O mode (with
Feature 8214), and such devices are so indicated.
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Start Time
Cycle
Time,
maee
Time,
maee
214 Card Reader
150
~ 14
150-600
223 Card Reader
75
224-1 Card Punch
OPERATION
Stop Time
Ttme,
mace
CP
Use
Channel
Use
Yes
75.0
0
No
Yes
92.5
0
No
NA
Yes
16
0
No
<0.1%
<0.1%
Yes
210
0
No
6.25n
<0.1%
<0.1%
Yes
160
0
No
Yes
44
3.4%
NA
Yes
10
0
No
Yes
176
0.4%
NA
Yes
22
0
No
-
-
47
10.7%
NA
Yes
20 + BLS
0
No
92 + 5LS 0
-
-
75
6.4%
NA
Yes
17 + 5LS
0
No
222-4 Printer
(46-charactcr sct)
63 + 5LS 0
-
-
46
9.0%
NA
Yes
17 + 5LS
0
No
222-5 Printer
(63-character set)
133+5LS 0
-
-
116
4.B%
NA
Yes
17 + 5LS
0
No
209 Paper Tape Reader
2.0
?
0
Yes
Var.
0.1%
<0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
210 Paper Tape Punch
a.3
?
0
Yes
Val'.
<0.1%
<0.1%
Yes
?
0
No
204A-l Magnetic Tape,
32KC
-
n.Oa
0
Yes
Val'.
2.4%
o.a%
Yes
oa
-
-
204A-2 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
5.5a
0
Yes
Val'.
4.a%
1.2%
Yes
Oa
-
-
-
5.5a
0
Yes
Val'.
6.8%
1.7%
Yes
Oa
-
-
12.5 a
0
Yes
Val'.
1.5%
0.4%
Yes
Oa
-
-
-
7.5a
0
Yes
Val'.
3.3%
o.a%
Yes
Oa
-
-
-
5. aa
0
Yes
Var.
5.0%
1.2%
Yes
oa
-
-
-
20. a
0
Yes
Var.
2.2%
0.6%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-8 Magnetic Tape,
64KC
-
7•. 5a
0
Yes
Var.
4.8%
1.2%
Yes
Oa
-
-
204B-9 Magnetic Tape,
-
5. aa
0
Yes
Var.
7.2%
1.a%
Yes
Oa
-
-
-
18.7 a
0
Yes
Var.
1.0%
0.3%
Yes
0·
-
-
270 Random Access Drum
-
25.0
0
Yes
Var.
7.9%
2.0%
Yes
0
-
-
251 Mass Memory
16.7
95 avo
0
Yes
Var.
7.5%
1.9%
Yes
-
0
No
252 Mass Memory
16.7
150 avo
0
Yes
Var.
7.5%
1.9%
Yes
0
No
253 Mass Memory
16.7
225 avo
0
Yes
Var.
7.5%
1.9%
Yes
0
No
a
Cross-gap time for short gap (replaces start and stop times).
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Number of characters punched.
Data transmission time varies with record length.
Device cannot be used in the buffered 110 mode.
Core
Use
Yes
55.0
<0.1%
NA
Yes
6.25n
<0.1%
NA
0
Yes
46
0.1%
335-1210 6.2
0
Yes
12.5n
224-2 Card Punch
223-660
3.0
0
Yes
227 Card Reader
75
21 to 46
0
227 Card Punch
240
42 to 102 0
206 High-Speed Printer
67 + 8LS 0
222-1, 2, 3 Printer
(51-character set)
Card Punch
204A-3 Magnetic Tape,
a9KC
2048-1, -2 Magnetic
Tape, 20KC
204B-3, -4 Magnetic
Tape, 44KC
204B-5 Magnetic Tape,
67KC
204B-7 Magnetic Tape,
29KC
96KC
204B-11, -12 Magnetic
Tape, 13Ke
Channel
Use
20.0
0
7.5
0
13.0
LS
n
Var.
NA
7/66
Data Transmission
Core Use
W/Feature
B214
Time,
mace
CP
Use
/fA.
AUERBACH
'"
Channel
Use
-
- .&.
518: 121. 100
IT"''''
IA
EDP
AUERBAC~
-
HONEYWELL 8200
INSTRUCTION LIST
REPORTS
~
INSTRUCTION LIST
The instruction complement of the dual-processor Honeywell 8200 processing unit includes all instructions found in the earlier Honeywell 800/1800 processors, and all instructions
found in the Honeywell Series 200 Model 4200 processor, except for the optional Scientific Unit
instruction set. Certain additional instructions are supplied to control the interaction of the
8200's word processor, character processor, Master Group, and I/O Controller.
This section lists the privileged instructions supplied for Master Group processor
control operations. Also listed are the several "Communication Buffer Calls" which enable
the major 8200 processing components to communicate with each other. Finally, a complete
listing of the 8200 word processor instructions is provided, together with the minimum and maximum instruction execution times. (The timing variations result from the degree of overlapping
of memory accesses and the use of indirect and indexed addresses.) The instruction set of the
8200 character processor is identical to that of the Honeywell Model 4200 processor except for
the nonavailability of the Scientific Unit instructions. Please refer to Section 510: 121 for a
complete list of Model 4200 instructions.
MASTER GROUP CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
Operation Code
Function
Acknowledge
ACK
Barricade Load
BLD
Barricade Read
BRD
Execute
EXC
Group Set Up
GSU
Group Read
GRD
Read Punctuation
RPU
Set Punctuation
SPU
Master Group Call
MGC
Restart the specified processor or
processor group after performing
a specified action.
Load a memory protection barricade
address for the processor.
Read the contents of a group's
barricade register.
Transfer the contents of N words of
main memory to the Master Group
Communication Buffer and raise
the Service Request Line to the
processor specified by the B field.
Branch if the called processor is
busy.
Load the Base Relocation, Stopper
and Protection Identification Tag
from main memory to a group
register.
Read the contents of Base Relocation, Stopper and Protection
Identification Tag registers.
Take Series 200 punctuation bits
associated with a full word and
store them in specified bit positions of another word.
Move a data word, adding the Series
200 punctuation bits specified by
the B address.
Initiate a call from the character
processor to Master Group.
Instruction Name
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518:121. 101
HONEYWEI..I.. 8200
COMMUNICATION BUFFER CALLS
Call Code
Reason for Call
Calls From
Calls To
Word Processor
Master Group
Bal
Ba2.
Ba3
Ba4
Ba5
Ba6
Trapping of I/o Order.
Trapping of I/O Order.
Multiprogram Control Order.
Barricade Violation.
Machine Malfunction.
Program Malfunction.
Character Processor
Master Group
Cal
Ca2
Ca3
Ca4
Ca5
Master Call (in user program).
I/O Order.
Barricade Violation.
Machine Malfunction.
Program Malfunction.
I/O Controiler
Master Group
Dal
Da2
Da3
Da4
I/O Interrupts.
Special Timer Interrupts.
Barricade Violation.
I/O FaUlts.
Master Group
Character Processor
Acl
Execute Character Instruction.
Master Group
I/O Controller
Adl
Ad2
Ad3
Ad4
Ad5
Ad6
I/O Orders.
Group Set Up.
Group Read.
Barricade Load.
Barricade Read.
Program Control Register
Contents.
Read/Write I/o Counters.
Read/Write Steering; Register
Counters.
Read Time Assignment Table.
Ad7
AdS
Ad9
Word Processor
Character Processor
Note:
I/o
Bdl
Controller
I/O Controller
Bd2
Program Control Register
Contents.
Read/Write I/O Counters.
Cdl
Cd2
I/O Order.
Read/Write I/O Counters.
/
In addition to these communication calls, several other calls are provided that ask
each processor for the contents of additional control registers.
(Contd.)
7/66
ItA
AUERBACH
'"
518: 121. 102
INSTRUCTION LIST
WORD PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET
Name of Operation
Fixed-Point Arithmetic
Binary Add, Subtract
Binary Accumulate
Binary Multiply
Binary Divide
Decimal Add, Subtract
Decimal Accumulate
Decimal Multiply
Decimal Divide
Word Add, Difference
Scientific Processing Instructions t
Floating Binary Add, Subtract
Floating Binary Multiply
Floating Binary Divide
Floating Decimal, Add, Subtract
Floating Decimal Multiply
Floating Decimal Divide
Normalized Less Than Comparison
Normalized Inequality Comparison
Multiple Unload
Fixed Decimal to Floating-Binary
Conversion
Floating Binary to Fixed-Decimal
Conversion
Fixed-to- Floating Normalize
Logical Functions
Halt Add
Superimpose
Substitute
Extract
Inequality Comparison, Alphanumeric
Inequality Comparison, Numeric
Less Than Or Equal to Comparison,
Alphanumeric
Less Than Or Equal to Comparison,
Numeric
N
Execution Time in Microseconds*
Minimum
Maximum
1. 75
1.25 + O. 25N
5.0
14.0
1. 75
1.25 + 0.25N
5.0
14.0
1. 75
3.0
1.5 + 0.75N
5.0
14.0
3.0
1.5 + 0.75N
5.0
14.0
3.0
2.25
5.0
13.0
2.25
5.0
13.0
3.0
3.0
1. 75
17.75
5.5
5.0
13.0
5.5
5.0
13.0
3.5
3.5
3.0
17.75
9.95
9.95
1. 75
3.0
1. 75
1. 75
2.5
1. 75
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.75
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.5
= number of 72-bit words.
* Minimum times are for maximum overlap with 4-way interleaving, all addresses active
and direct main memory. Maximum times are for all addresses indexed-indirect with
no memory overlap. All times are exclusive of masking, which can take a maximum of
two additional memory cycles, depending on amount of overlap.
t Single-precision, floating-point operands consist of a I-bit sign, followed by a 7-bit
exponent and a 40-bit mantissa.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518:121.103
HONEYWELL 8200
WORD PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION SET (Contd.)
Execution Time in Microseconds*
Name of Operation
Minimum
Shift Instructions t
Shift Word and Substitute
Shift Preserving Sign and Substitute
Shift Word and Extract
Shift Preserving Sign and Extract
Shift Word and Select
1. 75
1. 75
1. 75
1. 75
3.0
Maximum
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
6.0
,,/.-.'
Data Move Instructions
Transfer A to C
Transfer A to B and Go to C
Multiple Transfer
N Word Transfer
Item Transfer
Record Transfer
1. 75
1. 75
1.25 + 0.75N
1.25 + O. 75N
1.25+0.75N
1.25 + O. 75N
2.25
2.25
1. 25 + 1.5N
1. 25 + 1.5N
1.25 + 1.5N
1. 25 + 1. 5N
General Control Functions
Compute Orthocount
Check Memory Parity
Multiprogram Control
Proceed
3.75+0.50N
2.5
3.5
1. 75
6 + 1.5N
3.0
3.75
1. 75
Input!Ou!Eut and Other Peripheral
Functions #
Read Forward
Read Backward
Write ForWard
Peripheral Data Transfer
Print Alpha, Decimal, or Octal
Rewind Tape
Peripheral Control and Branch
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
N = number of 72-bit words.
* Minimum times are for maximum overlap with 4-way interleaving, all addresses active and
direct main memory. Maximum times are for all addresses indexed-indirect with no memory
overlap. All times are exclusive of masking, which can take a maximum of two additional
memory cycles, depending on overlap.
7/66
t
Execution times for shift instructions are based on an average shift distribution over 1-48 bits.
#
These instructions are performed in an independent logic module of the processing unit. In
most cases their instruction execution times will be completely masked.
fA
AUERBACH
®
518:191. 100
r--
1.
STlNDm
fA.
AUERBAC~
-
HONEYWELL 8200
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
OPERATING SYSTEM-MOD 8
EDP
R£paRTS
~
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: OPERATING SYSTEM -IVIOD 8
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:..
. 12
Description
. . . . . . . Operating System-Mod 8.
The Honeywell Operating System-Mod 8 is a complete software package designed exclusively for
use with the hybrid Model 8200 computer system.
Control facilities are included within the Mod 8
software to supervise and coordinate the operations
of the principal functional components of a Model
8200 system: word processor, with nine groups
of program control registers; character processor;
Input-Output Controller, with up to 48 floating
input-output channels; and peripheral device control units, up to 96 of which can be attached.
The principal control programs provided with
Operating System-Mod 8 are the following:
G
A Monitor program that regulates the concurrent execution of up to eight user programs
in the word processor and up to two main user
programs in the character processor-all
sharing a common main memory and common
peripheral devices. Processor interrupt
conditions are also handled by the Monitor.
The Monitor performs its functions through
use of the Master Group of processor control
registers, and is itself often referred to, by
association, as "Master Group. "
13
A Scheduler program that builds a job queue
according to program priority and availability
of system resources. As programs are executed, the Scheduler re-evaluates the job mix and
schedules additional programs, automatically
allocating core storage, processor register
groups, and peripheral equipment.
G
A Loader program that loads program segments
into whatever portions of core storage are
currently available. The Loader program can
be called by the Master Group at any time to
relocate dynamically any active program segment. The Loader also handles calls by active
programs for other program segments or subroutines from the on-line object-code library.
• A Central I/O control system that supplies all
input-output routines, including logical file
handling routines and standard device error
recovery routines.
The Operating System-Mod 8 is designed to function exclusively as a mass storage-oriented software system. Mod 8 requires use of at least 15
million characters of random-access storage in
any of the family of such devices offered by
Honeywell with its Series 200 systems. Another
65, 536 characters of Model 8200 core storage is
required for permanent residence of the control
portions of the Mod 8 system.
Although a Model 8200 system can be obtained
with a core storage size of 131,072 characters
(by special request only), Honeywell will generally sell a minimum core storage size of 262, 144
characters to ensure that the customer will be
able to utilize effectively the multiprogramming
and multiprocessing capabilities of the 8200
system.
Because the Model 8200 proceSSing unit contains
two processors-one that closely resembles the
earlier Honeywell 800/1800 processors and one
that closely resembles the Series 200 Model 4200
processor-all current 800/1800 software programs can be executed in the 8200 word processor, and all current Model 4200 software support
can be used in the 8200 character processor.
Thus the user of a Model 8200 system will have
time-proven software available when the system
is first delivered in January 1968. Only the
control program portions of the Operating System
-Mod 8 software will have been redesigned to
take advantage of the unconventional design of the
Model 8200 ProceSSing Unit. However, the new
Mod 8 Monitor program need not be used during
the early days of equipment installation. Alternatively, the word processor can function under
control of any of the current Honeywell 800/1800
monitor programs, permitting direct usage of all
800/1800 production programs. Also, current
users of Series 200 Model 2200 or 4200 systems
who are moving to a Model 8200 system can load
their Series 200 monitor program into the 8200
character processor and then execute all of their
existing Series 200 programs without modification.
Since the new Mod 8 Monitor program functions
through use of its own specialized "Master Group"
of control registers, this program can control the
execution of new or recompiled Model 8200 programs without interfering with other programs
running in parallel under their original monitor
programs in the so-called "compatibility mode. "
Among the more significant language processors
that will function under control of Operating
System-Mod 8 are a FORTRAN IV compiler that
incorporates all features of the FORTRAN IV
language as approved by the American Standards
Association, and an A. S. A. COBOL compiler
that includes a complete implementation of the
SORT verb plus mass storage and table handling
language features. The FORTRAN IV language
also includes provisions to permit usage of mass
storage devices through explicit language statements.
A large-scale assembler will provide macro
processing capabilities and the ability to call
routines from an on-line library of programs
originally written in COBOL, FORTRAN, or the
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 8200
5t8: t91. t20
. 12
Description (Contd.)
expects that the COBOL compiler will process from
2, 500 to 3,000 card images per minute; that the
FORTRAN IV compiler will process between 2,000
and 2, 500 card images per minute; and that the
assembler will assemble between 2, 500 and 3,000
card images per minute.
assembly language. In fact, all language processors can call program segments originally written in any 8200 language, since the output of all
compilers and generators is produced in a common data file format and in relocatable program
segments. Macro routines are provided to give
the programmer control 'of the multiprogramming
capabilities of the 8200 processing unit. Subprograms can be specified to run in parallel with the
main task of a problem program, and the generation of re-entrant code can be specified when
entering a routine into the on-line library.
The initial design of Operating System-Mod 8
software features batched-job processing in a
multiprogramming mode. Jobs can be batched
from remote sites or at the central computer
complex. Remote, conversational time-sharing
software will eventually be provided, appearing in
gradual phases. An early Time-Sharing phase
will contain a control system that will permit
users at remote locations to call for specified online library routines and to enter input data or
accept output data remotely, This multiple remote
access to the central computer can occur while
processing up to eight background programs in the
word processor.
Linear programming, PERT TIME, and PERT
COST programs, virtually identical to those used
with the Honeywell 800/1800 systems, will also be
provided with Operating System-Mod 8.
According to Honeywell, all Model 8200 language
processors will generate object code at high speeds
and in highly efficient form due to the addition of
several instructions in the 8200 word processor
to assist in standard compiler functions. Honeywell
7/66
The Operating System-Mod 8 is scheduled for
delivery in January 1968, concurrently with the
first deliveries of the Model 8200 hardware.
A
AUERBACH
'"
518:201.001
~
AUERBACH
SHNDUD
EDP
HONEYWELL 8200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
REPDRTS
~
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (518:201. 100)
These problems involve updating a master file from information in a detail file and
produCing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most common commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
Standard File Problems A, B, and C show the effects of three different record sizes in the master
file. Standard File Problem D increases the amount of computation performed upon each transaction. Each problem is estimated for activity factors (ratios of number of detail records to
number of master records) of zero to unity. In all cases a uniform distribution of activity is
assumed.
Because multiprogramming is an essential characteristic of Honeywell 8200 operation,
the central processor time requirements are shown on all of the graphs in addition to the usual
curves of elapsed time (i. e., total processing time). These central processor times have been
calculated by using both available processors to handle the computational load. The file handling
and editing capabilities of the character processor have been matched with the processing capabilities of the word processor.
The magnetic tape master file is formatted to allow fixed-field-length operations by
the word processor. The word processor performs the entire standard problem up to and including updating each new master record. Prior to generating the report file, control is relinquished by the word processor and transferred to the character processor. There the print line
is formatted and either printed immediately or written on magnetic tape for later printing. In
the latter case, the tape-to-printer transcription may be performed either on-line in conjunction
with other programs or as a separate off line operation.
The difference between the plotted curves of elapsed time and central processor time
represents the amount of central processor time that is potentially available for concurrent
proceSSing of other programs. Configuration VIllA, with its three tape control units and the
capability to perform six simultaneous tape operations, could perform two Standard File Processing Problems (A version) within the 15.45 minutes required to perform the single Problem A
with printing performed on-line.
If eight file update programs were being performed concurrently in the word processor,
the character processor would not have the speed and capacity to process concurrently the report
files from each of these eight programs. In such program mixes, Honeywell suggests that the
word processor store its unedited report files directly on mass storage devices. The character
processor can then process these files consecutively as time permits. Processing in this manner
helps to assure that both the character and word processors will operate at steady efficiency
throughout a given work period.
SORTING (518:201. 200)
The standard estimate for sorting 80-character records on magnetic tape (graph
518:201.200) was developed from the time calculated for Standard File Problem A according to
the technique described in Paragraph 4:200.213 of the Users' Guide.
MATRIX INVERSION
,,
,
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure the central processor speed on the
straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations
are involved. The standard estimate is based on the time required to perform cumulative multiplication (c = c + aibj) in 8-digit-precision floating point, as explained in Paragraph 4:200.3 of
the Users' Guide. For the Model 8200, the word processor was used throughout, and floatingpoint binary format was selected. This format provides approximately 12-digit precision.
STANDARD MATHEMATICAL PROBLEM A (518:201.400)
(
The standard estimating procedure outlined in the Users' Guide, Paragraph 4:200.413,
was used. Computation includes 5 fifth-order polynomials, 5 diviSions, and 1 square root. The
computation was performed exclusively by the word processor because its arithmetic capabilities
far outstrip those of the character processor. The penalty incurred by printing on-line is clearly
shown by the R = 1. 0 curve (one output line for each card entered).
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
518:201 002
HONEYWELL 8200
WORK8IIEET DATA TABLE
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
.REFERENCE
VIlA (on-line card/print) VIlA (off-line card/print)
1
Standard
File
Problem A
Char/block
Records/block
maee/block
K
Output
Times
(File I)
940
940
940
(File I)
10
10
10
File I = File 2
1------
~--File 4
lnputmaee/swltch
~=~
~--File 4
mBee penalty
~.--File 4
.,
Central
Processor
Times
3
Standard
File
Problem A
~-----
maee/record
msee/detail
maee/work
maee/report
"2
~
f:-L.:.-.
~
b7 + bB
maee/block
t------0
~---.-
0
0.01
I---~-
for C. P.
a3 K
~Masterln
ro.os
I---
~.--
File 3: DetaUs
File 4: Reports
Total
Unit of measure
f - - _ _O
_ ._
IB _ _ _
O.OS*
r-- --o.2:i, Char.ep
J/OCti.
-fo.ii4 II--"oiz
. - ~~ -
1.05
Wnrll CI'
0.05
I~ 1-0 .
0.80
I--- I - - -
4:200.1132
0.25
O.BO
1 - - It:so -. -1 - -"0.09 ~
~ I--.~
I. 60
0.09
4:200.114
0.09
O~oaI -f - - f - - -
2.72
1--- ~
0.05
0.09
~
IOCII.
. -1 - -
~ '--. 25 1---
0.80
'o:oB - -I - - o:os
t-o:o'l 10.50 137-:0 0.01
Clmr.ep
\VClrd CI'
~
- -1---- ~- I - - I---
0.04
O.BO
0.09
Ifoetl.
('har.CP
.o:os1 - -I - -
0.05
0.09
0
0
0.05
I-j:ao ~ - T.60 "2.50
. - f--- I - 0.09
4:200.112
---~- ~~---~-- I--~0.10*
0.05
137.0
r- --1-7-.5'
92.7
1 - -1--- 'o.os I--- ! -
0.23
25.6
0.01
'Jo.So
92.7
0.01
.
- it7:-5
0.23
2.73
25.6
2.72
13.00
92.7
2.72
2.73
17.5
(characters)
~routlnes
_ ~
~--~kBlt023)
1,600
-~- I-~~- I-~-
612
_ _6_1_2_ _ _ _6_12_ _ _
3,_64_0_ _ _
3,640
2,_28_0_ _ _
5,880
-~- -~-~- _5~_
612
1,160
1,160
15,292
18,892
Working
Total
6,~_
6,000
I---I~
~~
~.---
Space
~
1------0
f-
13.00
10
l4.B
~~__
7_5_ _ !-~,
1--- __0 _ _ 1- _ _0_
f - - - -o - - - . 1 - - - __
0_ _
0 _ _ 1- _ _
1-
2.72
940
0
0.05
I--- - - -Io:os
File 2: Master Out 0.09
column.
Standard
File
Problem A
0.05
0.25
f-";;---
and
21. 2
---19.-5-'--· -
lIoctl. Wonl CP
Char.eP
0.04
1=-:-::-4
0
0.12
"I
r-::--fi2K
I-
1-------1----25.~137
Wordell
dominant
F = 1.0
21.2
r - - - -75- - · -
~~ I--~-
mscclblock
VIllA (on-line card/print) VIllA (off-line card/print)
1,160
1,160
15,292
18.892
4:200.1151
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
VIlA (on-line card/print) VIIA (off-line card/print) VIIIA (on-line card/print) VIIIA (off-line card/print)
;)
Standard
Mathematical Size of record
Problem A
msee/block
~.---output
~,
output
~
outout
Floating point
Floating point
Floating point
~rdReader
204B-B Tape Unit
223 Card Reader
222- 3 Printer
204B-B Tape Unit
222-4 Printer
~-
80 characters
120 characters
80 characters
80 characters
80 characters
120 characters
120 characters
120 characters
Floating point
Fixed/Floating point
Unit name
Tl
T2
75
137
0.01
204B-9
6.7
75
5.9
7.7
0.01
92.7
0.01
6.7
0.01
0.01
1. 05
0.01
0.43
T4
---1. 05
~ord
T5
0.43
0.43
0.43
~OPS
msee/report
T6
0.42
0.42
0.42
0.42
T7
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
msee penalty
*
~..!Loutput
REFERENCE
-
4:200.413
.-
Files 3 and 4 are on magnetic tape. blocked 10 records per block.
(Contd_ )
7/66
fA
AUERBACH
'"
518:201. 100
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
·1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
· 11
Standard File Problem A
. 115 Storage space required Configuration VIlA
(on-line card and
print): . . • . . . . . . 15,292
Configuration VIlA
(off-line card and
print): • • • . • . . . . 18,892
Configuration VIllA
(on-line card and
print): . . . . . . . . . 15,292
Configuration VIllA
(off-line card and
print): . . . . . . . . . 18,892
· III Record sizes Master file: . . . . . .
Detail file: . . . . . . .
Report file: . . . . . . .
· 112 Computation: . . . . . . .
94 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
shared between word and
character processors.
· 113 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
· 114 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
characters.
characters.
characters.
characters.
100.0
7
4
2
~
-<..J~~
10.0
7
./
./
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
--
_line print)
'111~
---
.iooo""""
./
//
V/
/;V
2
1.0
"I" 1.0
~
7
I
I
4
lon-line
I
----------
VIlA (off-line print)
VIllA (off-line print)
2
0.1
...,
7
4
2
/
~
0.01
0.0
/'
It.:..-
"
O. 1
~
~'
---""
...
..-
"..;-----
..."",' ."...--
~,.".
./
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
''''.
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time
_
_
Word processor time
__
Character processor time (off-line print)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Character processor time (on-line print)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 8200
518:201. 120
• 12
. 122 Computation:....... shared between word and
character processors .
.123 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12 .
• 124 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below. '
Standard File Problem B
• 121 Record sizes Master file: .•..•. 47 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file:. . . . . • . 1 line.
100.0
7
4
2
~ \On-une;e:;;l--
10.0
7
~
./
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
--
../
.......
-
~
//
//
2
I
h
1.0
... 1.0
7
I
4
-rint ) _ _ _ _ _
{{-line))
~'o , ,o{t-hne
.~
~
-
0.1
7
4
0.01
-
..----------
2
2
_
~'
,/'
~
i
0.0
."
-",r
.,. ".
..---/'
O. 1
--."'"
--...-0:--
..- ~-
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Word processor time
_ _ _ _ _ _ Character processor time (off-line print)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Character processor time (on-line print)
(Contd.)
7/66
A '"
AUERBACH
518:201. 130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 13
Standard File Problem C
• 132 Computation: . . • . . . . shared between word and
character processors .
. 131 Record sizes -
.133 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
Master file: . . . . . . 188 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . • . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
outlined in Users' GUide,
4:200.13
• 134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
100.0
7
4
2
\Tl~
~
~V>
10.0
/'
4
1.0
-
~
./
1/
/'
2
_liue priut)
.J>
7
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
~Ou.-\iu.e
/
/' /'
V/
V
t
"'" 1.0
"IJ
VIIA (off line print)
7
VIlIA (off-line print)
4
---------
2
0.1
"
7
."
4
2
0.01
--/
0.0
/
;,'
~
".
/
.... '
- --
.
-~,
..
---~
::;;..
~./'
/
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
\
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
____________
_
__
__
___________
LEGEND
Elapsed time
Word processor time
Character processor time (off-line print)
Character processor time (on-line print)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 8200
518:201. 140
• 14
.142 Computation: .•.••.. trebled in the main process-
Standard File Problem D
ing portion of the Standard
File Processing Problem.
.143 Timing basis: •.•••• using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
. 141 Record sizes -
Master file: ...••. 94 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: ..•..•. 1 line.
4:200.14 .
• 144 Graph: .•.••...••. see graph below.
100.0
7
4
2
~
~
10.0
7
./
Time in Minutes to
Process 10.000
Master File Records
./
//
/; '/
1.0
4
_line prmt)
//
2
7
\111~n
/'"
/
4
-- --
1..0n-11.~
,. 1.0
II
I
1/
/
-
VIlA (off-line print)
VIlIA (off line print)
2
7
~,
~'
4
"
~/.~
./
~
/
0.01
0.0
~
-----
-' --.......
0.1
2
-
.'
--
~--
---- ---,.............. --------
--
..
I
1-0, ...........
/"
O. 1
1.0
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time
__
_
Word processor time
__
Character processor time (off-line print)
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Character processor time (on-line print)
(Contd. )
7/66
fA
.,
AUERBACH
518:201. 200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
.213 Timing basis: ...••. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213; 3-way tape
merge .
. 214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
.211 Record size: . . . . . • . 80 characters.
. 212 Key size: . . • . . . . . . 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order
10
1111
V
II
" ,"
~
7
,/
~~/
4
~
/f
2
II"
/
/
/
II ;
1
7
~
/
4
,
... 1.0
A
~
I
/
/
/ /
//'
2
V
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
2
4
10,000
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
HONEYWELL 8200
518:201. 300
. 312 Timing basis: . . . . . . estimating procedure out-
•3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
Standard Problem Estimates
lined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312, using word
processor with optional
floating-point arithmetic
feature.
. 313 Graph: ..•..••.•.• see graph below.
.311 Basic parameters: .•. general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits precision.
... 1.0
1.0
""
I
I
7
I
I
4
I
I
II
2
0.1
7
II
4
J
If
2
V
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
0.01
I
7
I
4
I
2
I
J
/
I
.001
I
7
I
I
I
4
I
'I
2
0.0001
2
4
7
2
4
10
7
100
2
4
7
1,000
Size of Matrix
(Contd.)
7/66
A
AUERBACH
'"
518: 201. 400
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
performed in floatingpoint decimal mode, using
word processor with
optional floating-point
arithmetic feature.
.413 Timing basis: . • . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users I Guide,
4:200.413 .
• 414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
.411 Record sizes: . . . . . . 10 signed numbers; average
size 5 digits, maximum
size 8 digits.
.412 Computation: . • . . . . . 5 fifth-order polynomials;
5 divisions and 1 square
root; computation is
CONFIGURATIONS VIlA AND VIIIA
1,000
7
4
2
R = 1. 0 (VIIA)
l
on-line
card and
print
operations
0
R = 1. (VliIA)
R 0.1,0.01
100
7
4
~
II
2
/~
R
1.0 (VIlA)
4
J!II"
-rf ?, ,
~
C"\?·v
2 - f=--,
-
-print)
.
R· 1. 0 (on-1m-
4
-
off-line
card and
print
operations
}
';"'/
R = 0.1, 0.01 (VIIIA)
1
/
R = 1. 0 (VIIIA); R = 0.1, 0.01 (VIlA)
Time in
10
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
~
:\.\-,~
e~
1---"
.
i<"0~
"
~
.~'" .;~
riU'I.),·
1.)\
{ line.\l
1.).
R - 1 0 ~o{ - ;""'T ......~ '"
~-:..~
....... W'l.y,
...otf-iine.\l"t
R = 0.1 ~
...... 1.0
2
0.1
2
4
0.1
2
7
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
4
1
100.0
C, Number of Computations Per Input Record
(R
= number of Output
Records per Input Record.)
(
\
"
LEGEND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Elapsed time
- C P - - - - - - Word processor time
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
--.
518:221. 101
A "1M""
~EDP
AUERBAC~
'.
HONEYWELL 8200
PRICE DATA
REPORTS
PRICE DATA: HONEYWELL 8200
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLAHH
No.
Name
Monthly
Rental
$
(I-year term)
Monthly
Monthly
Rental
Maintenance
$
$
(!i-year lerm)
Purchase
Purchase
(immediate) (aiter 1 year)
$
$
---
Honeywell
PROCESSING
UNIT
8~OO
Cvntral Processor
8~OI-1
262,1H characters of memory
25,580
24,190
1,920
1,149,120
1,209,600
8201-2
524,288 characters of memory
34,210
32,350
2,560
1,536,720
1,617,600
8201-3
786,432 characters of memory
43,140
40,800
3,230
1,938,000
2,040,000
8201-4
1,048,576 characters of memory
51,770
48,960
3,880
2,325,600
2,048,000
760
720
60
34,200
36,000
1,525
1,440
120
68,400
72,000
Optional Features
8201-B
8214
Scientific Unit (Floating-Point
Arithmetic)
Additional 8 Read/Write Channels
and 8 Auxiliary Read/Write
Channels
For prices of the Honeywell Series 200 peripheral devices, please refer to the general Honeywell Series 200 Price Data section,
beginninp; on page 510:221. 101.
(
',,-,
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
7/66
MONROBOT XI
Monroe Calculating Machine Co., Inc.
Division of Litton Industries
/
(
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
MONROBOT XI
Monroe Calculating Machine Co., Inc.
Division of Litton Industries
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
531 :001.001
Monrobot XI
Contents
CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
\
'17
18
Introduction
Data Structure .
System Configuration
Configuration IX; Desk Size System
Configuration I; Punched Card System.
Internal Storage: Drum.
Central Processor
•
Console.
••
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
Paper Tape Reader.
.
Edge-Punched Card Reader
Paper Tape Punch
Edge - Punched Card Punch.
Card Reader
24 Coupler
Card Punch
26 Coupler •
Photoelectric Reader
Input-Output; Printer
Typewriter
•.
Teletype Printer
Input-Output; Other
16-Key Keyboard
Monroe-Card Processor
Simultaneous Operations
Input-Output Buffer
Instruction List .
Coding Specimens
Machine Code
Symbolic Assembly Program
Data Codes
8-Bit Code •
•.
5-Bit Code
Punched Card Code
Problem Oriented Facilities
Floating Point Routines
Mathematical Routines
Matrix Inversion
Polynomial Approximation
Chi -Square Test of Independence
Open Traverse Survey ••
Machine Oriented Languages
Easy Programming System
Symbolic Assembly Program
Program Translator
Symbolic Assembly Program
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
011
021
031.1
031.2
041
051
061
071
072
073
074
075
075.4
076
076.4
077
081
082
101
102
111
111.1
121
131
132
141
142
143
151.17
151.17
151.17
151.17
151.17
151.17
171
172
181
10/62
531:001.002
MOHROBOT XI
COHTEHTS-Contd.
19
20
21
22
10/62
Operating Environment
General ••
•
••••••
Loading Routine for Program Tapes
Parameter Output Programs
Program Relocation System
System Performance
Generalized File Processing
Matrix. Inversion • • • •
Generalized Mathematical Processing
Generalized Statistical Processing
Physical Characteristics
Price Data
••••
•
••
191
191.12
191.12
191.12
201.1
201.3
201.4
201.5
211
221
531 :011.100
Monrobot XI
Introduction
I NTRODUCTI ON
§ 011.
The Monrobot XI is a compact, solid-state data processing system that is suitable
for a variety of fairly complex but low-volume business and scientific applications. It is
also being used in small instrumentation and process control systems. The basic system,
consisting of computer, input-output typewriter, and paper tape reader and punch, can be
purchased for $24,500 or leased for $700 per month. This makes it one of the lowest
priced internally programmed data processing systems currently available.
The central processor is housed in a desk-size cabinet and weighs only 375 pounds.
Most of the peripheral devices are housed in matching cabinet modules of desk height that
can be arranged in a number of ways for maximum operating efficiency. There are no
special power or air conditioning requirements.
A magnetic drum provides 1,024 word locations of working storage; a 2,048-word
drum is a recently-announced option. Each 32-bit location can hold two single-address
instructions, one binary data word, or from four to six alphameric characters. Seven of
the addressable storage locations are Fast Access Registers with a constant access time
of 0.73 milliseconds. Average access time for all other storage locations is 5.85
milliseconds.
The small but convenient instruction repertoire includes addition, subtraction, and
multiplication of single word-length, fixed point binary data. Division can only be accomplished by subroutines. Binary and decimal shifts and a repetitive subtraction ("detract")
instruction facilitate the programmed radix conversions that usually must be performed
upon input and output data. Neither index registers nor indirect addressing are provided,
so a large proportion of the instructions in many programs w ill be devoted to "housekeeping"
operations. Program execution speed will usually average 60 to 80 instructions per second.
Somewhat higher speeds can be achieved if operand addresses are optimized where possible,
but the increase in speed will seldom justify the extra coding time.
Up to three separate input devices and three output devices can be connected to the
Monrobot XI and selected under program control. Each input or output instruction initiates
the transfer of a single character between the processor and the addressed peripheral device. Overlapping of input-output operations and internal processing is possible.
Paper tape or verge-punched cards with 5- or 8-level codes can be punched and read
mechanically at a peak speed of 20 characters per second. A photoelectric reader provides
maximum input speeds of 40 to 50 characters per second. IBM 024 or 026 Card Punches can
be connected through special couplers and used for on-line punched card input, output, or
both. Standard80-columncards are read and punched at 16 columns per second.
Printed output can be produced at up to 10 characters per second by either a modified
IBM electric typewriter or a Teletype printer; either unit can also be used for manual entry
of data. A 16-key keyboard is useful for rapid entry of all-numeric data.
The Monroe-Card Processor reads and records information on magnetizable cards.
Up to 1,566 decimal digits or 1,044 alphameric characters can be stored on each card.
Monroe-Cards will be useful for master file storage in a variety of data processing
a pplicatio ns.
\
'-,
The Monrobot XI software situation, when viewed by potential users with a strong
desire to minimize programming time and effort, leaves much to be desired. Routines
currently available from the manufacturer are limited to general utility routines, a userdeveloped symbolic assembly system, and a group of scientific routines (floating point
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
MONROBOT XI
531:011.101
INTRODUCTION-Contd.
§ OIl.
arithmetic, functions, matrix inversion, etc.). No compiler systems, interpretive
systems, or report generators are available or under development.
Most coding is done in machine language; the coder writes four hexadecimal digits
per instruction, or eight per word. The hexadecimal addressing scheme is easy to master,
but the operation codes have no mnemonic relationship to their effects. Generalized subroutines are available to handle division, loop control, address modification, and inputoutput with radix conversions, but the manufacturer encourages the use of individuaUytailored, user-coded routines for greater efficiency.
A Monrobot XI users' group is now being formed, under Monroe's auspices, to
encourage and control the publication, standardization, and distribution of routines developed
bY' users and by the manufacterer.
!
10/02
I AUERBACH I @
531 :021.1 00
_STANDARD
II
EDP
Monrobot XI
Data Structure
REPORTS
DATA STRUCTURE
.2
§021.
.1
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location Size
Word:
Tetrad:
Row:
Column:
Purpose or Use
basic addressable
location.
non -addressable sub
4 bits
group of a word.
8 or 5 bits punched tape.
12 positions p\lnched cards.
INFORMATION FORMATS
Type of Information
Repre sentation
Character: • . . •
6
1
1
1
1
32 bits
©
Hexadecimal digit:
Number: ••
Instruction:
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
or 5 bits (internal).
row (punched tape).
column (punched cards).
tetrad (4 bits).
word (sign bit, overflow
bit, and 30 data bits).
16 bits (2 instructions per
word).
10/62
531:031.100
.'1"""'0
EDP
_
Monrobot XI
System Configurotion
RfPORl'
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.1
DESK SIZE SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION IX)
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
storage is smaller by about 700 words;
automatic division is not available;
tape reader and punch are faster by 10 char/sec.
Equipment
Rental
Drum Storage:
2,048 words.
$ 185
Central Processor
$700
Input-Output Typewriter:
10 char/sec.
Paper Tape Reader:
20 char/sec.
Paper Tape Punch:
20 char/sec.
Total Rental:
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . . . .
$ 885
2, 048-Word Drum.
Notes: Use of standard I, 024- Word Drum decreases monthly rental to $700.
Addition of a second Paper Tape Reader, required for the Generalized File
Processing problem (Section :201. I), increases monthly rental to $945.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
MONRO BOT XI
531:031.200
§
031.
.2
PUNCHED CARD SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION I)
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
input-output devices are slower by factors of 20 to 200;
automatic division and indexing are not available.
Equipment
Rental
Drum Storage:
1,024 words.
Central Processor
$ 700
Input-Output Typewriter:
10 char/sec.
Optional Features Included:. . . • . . . . . . "
10/62
mM 024 Card Punch and Coupler:
reads 16 columns/sec.
$ 40
mM 026 Printing Card
Punch and Coupler:
punches 16 columns/sec.
$
Total Rental:
$ 800
none.
60
531:041.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
Monrobot XI
Internol Storage
Drum
R[PDRTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: DRUM
§
041.
Optional Feature
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
Drum Storage (part of Monrobot XI Computer).
. 12
Basic Use:
working storage .
.13
Description:
The magnetic drum is an integral part of the Monrobot XI Computer. It provides a total of 1,024
addressable locations of working storage. Each
word location contains 32 bit positions and can hold
two instructions, one numeric data word, five 6-bit
alphameric characters, or six 5-bit characters.
2, 04S-Word Drum: Announced in September, 1962,
this unit can be installed in place of the standard
1, 024-word drum at a rental increase of $IS5 per
month. It provides 16 additional bands of general
storage. One of the six "command" bits in the Monrobot XI instruction format is never used in operation codE;§ that reference storage; this bit is used in
addressing the 1, 024 additional locations, and the
resulting hexadecimal addresses are SOO through
TXX. Except for its increased capacity, all operational characteristics of the 2, 048-word drum are
the same as those of the standard model.
.14
.15
There are IS 'addressable bands: 16 for "general"
storage and two for "fast access" storage. Each
band of general storage is divided into 16 "sectors",
and each sector is further divided into four "phases", .16
each capable of holding one word. Each band of fast
access storage contains four recirculating registers,
and each register is available for access every sector time, or 16 times per drum revolution.
One of the eight fast access registers is the Instruction Register, which holds the next two instructions
to be executed and is addressed automatically by the
control circuitry. The addresses 000 through 006
are assigned to the other fast access registers.
Fast Access Register 6 serves as the accumulator,
and Registers 2, 4, and 5 are also involved in certain machine operations (see Instruction List). Fast
Access Registers 0, 1, and 3 have no special functions and can always be used as working storage.
Addresses 007 through 3XX (in hexadecimal) refer
to general storage, representing 1, 017 addressable
locations.
Drum speed is 5,124 revolutions per minute. Access
time for general storage ranges from 0.73 to 11.7
milliseconds (one sector time to one revolution
time). For the fast access registers, access time
is a constant 0.73 millisecond. One fixed head
serves each track, and reading and recording are
serial by bit. Bits for the four words within each
sector are interleaved in both general and fast access storage, so that only every fourth bit on the
drum surface is read or recorded at a time. Internal transfer rates are low because of the lack of
block transfer facilities and indexing. No error
checks are provided.
©
Availability: . ."
3 to 6 months.
First Delivery:
December, 1960.
Reserved Storage
Purpose
Number of
locations
Index registers:
Fast access
registers:
I/O control:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: .
.22
Physical Dimensions
none.
S (7 addressable)
none.
none.
.222 Drum
Diameter:
Ll'ngth: .
Number on shaft: .
.23
Storag:e Phenomenon: .
.24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by instructions:
. 242 Data regenerated constantly: .
• 243 Data volatile: .
. 244 Data permanent:
. 245 Storage changeable: .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Locks
none.
magnetic drum.
S inches.
1.75 inches across recording surface.
1.
magnetization.
yes .
fast access bands only .
no .
no .
no.
10/62
531:041.250
§
MONROBOT XI
041.
.25
. 26
Data volume per band of 1 track
General
Words: . . . . . . .
64.
. Characters (6-bit code): 320.
Digits (decimal equivalent):
576
Instructions: . . .
128.
Bands per
unit:
Interleaving Levels:
.28
Access Techniques
. 281 Recording method: .
. 283 Type ,of access
Description of stage
Wait for selected
sector: .' .
Read or write one
word:
.29
20.
36.
8.
four.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
always.
no.
· 5,124 rpm.
· 2,150 inches/sec.
81.
175,000 bits/sec/track.
word.
32 bits/word.
1 track/band.
4 interleaved words/sector.
1,370 words/second (but
see paragraph. 73).
Module and System Sizes
CONTROLLER: .
•5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
.511 Number of stacks
Stacks per system:
Stacks per module:
. 512 Stack movement: . .
. 513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: . . . . . .
10/62
.531 For uniform access (fast
access storage)
Access time:
730/J. sec.
730 /J. sec.
Cycle time: . .
For data unit of: .
1 word.
.532 Variation in access time
(general storage)
Variation, /J.sec.
Stage
Wait for selected sector:
o to 11,000
Read or write one
730
word:
730 to 11,730
.6
CHANGEABLE STORAGE: . . . . . . . none.
.7
STORAGE PERFORMANCE
.71
Data Transfer
Example,
/J. sec.
5,110.
730.
5,840.
Pair of storage unit
possibilities: . . . . with self only .
. 31
.4
. track address (4 bits) designates stack to be used .
Simultaneous Operations: . . . . . . . none .
Possible starting stage
DATA CAPACITY
Rules for Combining
Modules:
1, 024 per module.
1,024 per system .
.52
· fixed heads.
.3
Identity: . .
Drums: . .
Words: . .
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules: . .
.515 Relationship between
stacks and locations: . . . . . .
. 64 or 4.
16 general.
2 fast access.
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates
Cycling rates:
Track/head speed:
Bits/inch/track: .
Bit rate per track:
.292 Peak data rates
Unit of data: . . .
Conversion factor:
Gain factor: . .
Loss factor:
Data rate: . .
.32
4.
.
ph~sical
.27
Fast Access
.514 Accessible locations
By single stack:
By all stacks
With no movement:. . . .
standard.
• 72
1.
Transfer Load Size
With self: . . . . . .
1,024.
5,120.
2,048.
1 word.
1.
.73
1 drum per system, as
above (2, 048-word drum
is optional; see. 13).
Effective Transfer Rate
With self, using
loop:. . . . . . . . 14 words/sec.
With self, using straightline coding:. . . . . 85 words/sec. max .
Monrobot XI Computer .
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
· 18.
· 18.
· none.
· 1 per band.
Invalid address:
Invalid code: .
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Check or Interlock
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
all addresses valid.
none.
none .
none .
none.
none.
none.
531 :051.100
•
STANDARD
_EDP
.,-,
Monrobot XI
Central Processor
R£PDRTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:.
. 12
Description:
for execution. Each automatic jump instruction also
requires four sector times. A pair of program instructions and the automatic jump instruction that
loads them can be executed in a single drum revolution (11. 7 milliseconds) if the operands of both program instructions are carefully located to minimize
access times. Optimization of the operand addresses is time-consuming and often impossible, so
two or three drum revolutions are more commonly
required for each pair of instructions. Both minimum and typical execution times are shown in the
Processor Performance section (paragraph. 4).
. . . . . . Monrobot XI Computer.
The Monrobot XI Computer is a desk-size, solidstate unit that also houses the magnetic drum store.
The Console Control Unit is swivel-mounted on top
of the Computer cabinet.
Two single-address instructions are stored in each
32- bit word location. The basic instruction format
is a 6-bit operation code and a lO-bit operand address. Coding is usually done in machine language,
with four hexadecimal characters per instruction.
There are 26 instructions available, including addition' subtraction, and multiplication of single word.13
length binary data. Automatic division is not provided; but the "detract" command causes repetitive
.14
subtraction with counting; it is useful in division subroutines and in binary-to-decimal radix conversions.
The "extract" command is a logical AND. Binary or .2
decimal shifts of up to 8 positions may be performed;
the decimal shifts are automatic multiplications or
.21
divisions by powers of ten. Input and output instructions initiate the transfer of a single character of up
to eight bits from or to the addressed input-output
device, with automatic processor interlock if the device is not ready.
.211
The Monrobot XI differs from most one-address
processors by having no sequence counter. A threeinstruction "control loop" consists of the 16-bit control register, which decodes the instruction being
executed, and the 32-bit instruction register, which
provides fast access storage for two instructions
that are about to be or have just been executed. One
of the three instructions in the cQntrol loop is always
an "automatic jump" that contains the address of the
next instruction word to be brought into the loop for
execution. During normal sequential operation, every third instruction executed is the automatic jump;
it loads the next pair of instructions into the instruction register and is itself incremented by one and
recirculated through the loop. As far as the user is
concerned, the instructions in his program are executed sequentially except when a programmed branch
causes a different address to be placed into the automatic jump instruction. Therefore, the unusual sequence control facility can be ignored in programming except for its effect upon execution times.
All of the Monrobot XI instructions except multiply,
detract, and shifts require four sector times (2.92
milliseconds, or one-fourth of a drum revolution)
Use of one or more of the seven fast access registers for temporary storage of data or instructions
can significantly decrease execution times in many
applications. "These registers have a constant access time of 0.73 milliseconds, so they are always
"optimum. "
Availability:
3 to 6 months.
First Delivery:
December, 1960.
PROCESSING FACILITIES
0eerations and 0l2erands
Operation
and Variation
Provision
Radix
Size
Fixed point
Add -subtract:
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
RI!mainder:
automatic
binary
1 word.
automatic
binary
1 word.
none.
subroutine
binary
1 word.
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
binary
binary
binary
24& 8 bits.
24& 8 bits.
24& 8 bits.
automatic
none.
binary
1 word.
none.
.212 Floating point
Add-Subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.213 Boolean
AND:
Inclusive OR:
.214 Comparison
Numbers:
Absolute:
Letrers:
Mixed
Collating sequence:
subtract & test
none.
subtract & test
subtract & test
irregUlar (see Data Code
Tables 1 & 2).
.215 Code translation: none.
.216 Radix conversion
Provision
From
subroutines
subrOl1tines
decimal
binary
To
binary
decimal
1 word.
1 word.
1 word.
Size
1 to 9 digits.
1 word.
(
\.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531 :051.217
§
MONROBOT XI
051.
Provision Comment
Size
.217 Edit format:
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Protection:
none.
subroutine
none.
subroutine
none.
none.
• 218 Table look-up: •••
• 219 Others
Decimal shift:
Binary shift:
Detract:
automatic
'automatic
automatic
1 word.
1 word.
see Instruction
..
..
. .....
none •
left or right
left, right, end
around
.236 Directly addressed operands
. 2361 Internal storage type; drum .
Minimum size:
1 word.
Maximum size:
1 word.
Volume accessible: 1,024 locations.
.2362 Increased address
capacity: ..
. none .
.237 Address indexing: .
none.
.238 Indirect addressing:
none.
.239 Stepping:
own coding required
.24
Special Processor Storage
• 241
Category of Number of
locations
storage
1 word
1 word; 2 words
for end around
shift.
1 word.
.
Drum:
Drum:
Processor:
List
.22
· 223 Operand size
determination:
.23
.242 Category of Total
storage
number
Special Cases of Operands
· 221 Negative numbers: .
.222 Zero: . . . . .
7
1
1
locations
two's complement.
1 form, interpreted as plus
zero i.n tests.
Drum:
8
Processor:
1
Size in
bits
32 each
32
16
Physical
form
recirculatingtracks
flip-flops
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Seg,uencing
.311
N~mber
Program usage
fast access storage.
insrruction register.
control register.
Access
time,
p. sec
Cycle
time,
p.'sec
'730
730.
?
730.
fixed; 1 ':Vord.
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure: . 2 instructions per word.
· 232 Instruction layout:
Part
Command
Operand
6
10
Size (bits)
of sequence
control facilities:
.314 Special sub- sequence
counters: .
.315 Sequence control step
size:
.316 Accessibility to
routines:
1 ("automatic jump" instruction in control loop).
none.
1 word (2 instructions).
by means of "jump mark"
instruction (see
Instruction List).
· 233 Instruction parts
Name
Command:
Operand: .
Purpose
specifies operation
1) specifies track (4 bits),
sector (4 bits) and phase
(2 bits) address of operand;
2) specifies length of a
shift operation; or
3) contains the 8-bit code
for an output character .
. 234 Basic address structure: 1 + o.
· 235 Literals
Arithmetic:. . . .
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . .
none.
Incrementing
modifiers:.
none.
Shifting:
1 to 8 binary or decimal
digit positions.
.317 Permanent or optional
modifier: .
no.
.32
Look-Ahead:
none.
.33
Interruption:
none.
.34
Multi-running:
none.
.35
Multi - seg,uenci~:
none.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
Conditions
I: .
II:
III:
operands in optimum locations wherever possible.
operands randomly placed,
as in typical user coding.
floating point mode, using
standard subroutines.
10/62
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
531 :051.410
051.
.41
Condition:
Instruction Times in IL secs
Condition:
II
III
.411 Fixed pOint
Add-subtract:
5,800
11,700
35,000
Multiply:
29,200
Divide (estimated)
Using generalized
subroutine:
700,000 700,000
Using special
routines:
300,000 300,000
.412 Floating point
Add:
420,000.
Subtract:
480,000.
Multiply:
500,000.
Divide:
600,000.
.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing:
none.
Indirect addressing: none.
Re - complementing: none.
.414 Control
Branch:
5,850
11, 700
Compare and branch:
11, 700
23,400
.415 Counter control
Step and test:
29,200
58,500
(5 instructions)
. 416 Edit:
see Note below •
.417 Convert:
see Note below.
.418 Shift N positions:
3,650 +
9,500+
(decimal or binary)
730N
730N
Note: Radix conversion and straightforward editing
of numeric data can usually be accomplished
during the 47 milliseconds available between
characters at the maximum input-output speed
of 20 char/sec. when specially-coded, optimized routines are used.
.423 Branch based dh"comparison
Numeric data:
117,000
Alphabetic data:
117,000
.424 Switching
Unchecked:
46,800
Checked:
82,000
List search:
58,500+
82,OoON
. 425 Format control per
character (including
radix conversions)
Unpack:
47,000(**).
Compose:
47,000(**).
.426 Table look up per comparis on
For a match:
70,000
For least or greatest:
72,000
For interpolation point:
70,000
.427 Bit indicators
Set bit in separate
location:
11,700
Set bit in pattern:
35,100
Test bit in separate
location:
17,600
Test bit in pattern:
23,400
Test AND for B bits:
29,200
Test OR for B bits:
58,500
.428 Moving N words
Using loop:
7o,OOoN
Using straight-line
coding:
l1,70oN
.5
152,000.
152,000.
58,500.
117,000.
58,000+
105,ooON.
94,000.
96,000.
94,000.
23,400.
46,800.
35,100.
46,800.
58,500.
82,000.
82,OooN.
23,40oN.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
.42
II
Check or
Interlock
Action
Processor Performance in IL secs
Condition:
I
II
III
.421 For random addresses
c = a + b:
17,600 35,100 443,000.
b = a + b:
17,600 35,100 443,000.
5, 850N 11,70oN 42o,OOoN.
Sum N items:
c = ab:
41,000 58,500 523,000.
e = alb (estimated)
Using generalized
subroutine:
712,000 723,000 623,000.
Using special
routines:
312,000 323,000
.422 For arrays of data
105,000 129,000 537,000.
ci = ai + b j :
105,000 129,000 537,000.
bj = ai + bj :
58,500 94,000 502,000.
Sum N items:
105,000 140, 000 1, 040,000.
c = c + aibj :
©
Overflow:
Underflow:
Zero divisor:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:·
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
programmed test
none.
checked by Divide
subroutine
none.
none.
none.
all addresses valid.
none.
none.
see note below.
transfer to fixed
location.
varies.
Note: The two high-order bit positions (sign and "overflow" bits)
of an arithmetic result will always have the same values
except when overflow has occurred; a programmed test is
required.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:061.100
.STAliDAAD
EDP
_
Monrobot XI
Console
REPORTS
CONSOLE
§
.23
061.
Stops and Restarts
Comment
Form
Name
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:. .
Console Control Unit.
HALT switch:
off-on button
.12
Associated Units:
Input-Output Typewriter
stands on console desk
and provides keyboard input and typed output. Optional 16-Key Keyboard
can be used ~or manual
input of numeric data.
START switch:
button
. 13
.24
Stepping: . . . . . . . with HALT switch on, one
instruction is executed
each time START is depressed.
.25
Resets
Description:
The basic Monrobot XI system consists of the desksize Computer cabinet and a knee -hole desk that
holds the input-output equipment. The two cabinets
are commonly arranged in an "L" shape with the
input-output desk on the right. Additional matching
cabinet modules can be used to house expanded
equipment configurations.
The Console Control Unit is a small box that is
swivel-mounted on the top of the Computer cabinet,
at desk-top level. It contains five back-lighted control buttons, eight intervention (sense) switches,
seven input-output alarm lights, and a 16-light binary display of the next instruction to be executed.
Name:
Form:
Comment:
. 26
The controls are simple and convenient, but the lack
of a display of the contents of the accumulator seri0usly hampers console debugging. This deficiency
can be remedied by the addition of the optional Os.27
cilloscope View. Box, which can be manually switched
to provide a binary display of the accumulator, controlloop, or Fast Access Register 4 or 5.
In the RESET mode, automatic operation is suspended and data can ,be entered into the accumulator from
.28
the typewriter or 16-key keyboard. Only the hexadecimal characters 0 through 9 and S through X may
be typed. If tn9re than eight characters are typed
the first ones will be shifted beyond the high order
end of the accumul<1tor and lost. The reset mode is .3
necessary for loading initial "boot-strap" programs,
for transferring control to the beginning of a specific .31
program, and for mairual alteration of data in st9rage.
.2
CONTROLS
. 21
Power
• 22
Name:
Form:
Comment:
ON switch.
off-on button.
controls system power.
Connections:
none.
©
halts automatic operation after execution of instruction in control
register.
initiates automatic
operation.
RESET switch.
off-on button.
halts and prevents automatic operation and sets
control loop to zero.
Loading
Name:
Form:
Comment:
.LOAD switch.
button.
transfers contents of accumulator to instruction
register whl;ln in RESET
mode.
Sense Switches
Name:
Form:
Comment:
Intervention Switches.
8 off-on buttons.
status can be tested by the
stored program.
Special:
none.
DISPLAY
Alarms
Name
Form
Input:
3 lights
Output:
3 lights
Parity:
light
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Comment
lit when no character is
available from an addressed input device .
lit when output cannot be
made to an addressed
device (busy, not connected, etc.)
indicates even parity in
last character entered .
10/62
531:061.320
§
MONROBOT XI
061.
.32
.41
Into Control Registers: . . . . . .
Conditions
Name
ON:
RESET: }
LOAD:
HALT:
START:
. 33
Form
.42
lighted
buttons
Control Registers: ....
.34
Storage: . . . . . . .
.4
ENTRY OF DATA
10/62
Comment
lit when corresponding
switch is "on".
.16 Control Register Lights
provide binary display of
next instruction to be exe cuted.
Optional Oscilloscope View
Box provides binary display of anyone of the
following, selected by
manual switch: accumulator, Fast Access Register
4 or 5, or control loop.
no direct display available.
in RESET mode, can be
typed into accumulator (in
hexadecimal form) and
transferred into instruction register by depressing LOAD SWitch.
Into Storage
1. Depress RESET switch.
2. Type "TADR", where ADR is hexadecimal address of the location to be filled.
3. Depress LOAD button.
4. Type desired data value, in hexadecimal form .
5. Depress START button .
5
CONVENIENCES
.51
Communications:
.52
Clock:
.53
Desk Space:
tops of Computer cabinet
and knee-hole desk provide ample free work
space •
• 54
View:
most equipment configurations can be arranged so
that seated operator has
clear view of entire systern.
.
none.
, • none.
531:071.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Paper Tape Reader
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§071.
.24
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . .
. 12
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/ stack: .
Method of use:
Paper Tape Reader.
(8-Track and 5-Track
Models.)
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
Description
.31
Form of Storage
The Paper Tape Reader is manufactured by Commercial Controls Corporation. It reads standard paper
tape codes at a peak speed of 20 characters per
second. The two models differ only in tape code
level: 8-track or 5-track. The feed pan permits tape
to be fed from the inside of a roll, so no rewinding
is necessary. In the basic Monrobot XI system, the
reader mechanism is mounted on the front of the upper drawer of the input-output desk, just below desktop level.
. 311 Medium:.
.312 Phenomenon:
Each input instruction reads a single character into
the low-order bit positions of the accumulator and
then advances the tape to the next row. Execution of
the input instruction takes less than three milliseconds, and other internal operations can be carried out during the remaining 47 milliseconds (4
drum revolutions) of each reader cycle. If consecutive input instructions occur too close together, the
processor waits until the next character is available
from the reader.
Optional Feature
5-8 Channel Switch: Permits reading either 5-track
of 8-track punched tape, depending upon the position
of a manual switch. Since all code conversions are
programmed, the switch simply deactivates three of
the eight sensing pins.
• 13
Availability:
3 to 6 months.
.14
First Delivery: .
December, 1960.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head:.
. 212 Reservoirs:.
.32
paper or plastic tape .
round holes, fully punched
or chadless.
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Model:
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing (sprocket
track):
Control signals
(end line):
Unused:
Total (exclusive of
sprocket track):
.325 Row use
llita:
Redundancy check:.
Timing:.
Control signals: .
Unused:
Gap:
.33
Coding:
.34
Format Compatibility:
sprocket drive, pull only.
none.
1 to N rows at 10 per inch;
N is controlled by
program.
8 or 5 tracks at standard
spacing.
8-Track
6
1
(1)
5-Track
5.
O.
(1).
o
1
O.
O.
8
5.
1 to N.
O.
O.
1 (optional delimiter).
O.
none required.
1 character per row, as in
Data Code Table 1 or 2 .
(Since code translation
is programmed, other
codes can be read.)
with all devices using standard 8- or 5-track punchedtape .
Physical Dimensions
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system:
. 23
reading punched tape.
1.
8 or 5 .
reads 1 row at a time.
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
.35
.22
Arrangement of Heads
Multiple Copies:
none.
sensing pins.
.351 Overall width
8-track tape:
5-track tape:
.352 Length:
none.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corparation and BNA Incorporated
1.0 inch.
0.6875 inch .
up to about 400 feet per
roll .
10/62
531:071.400
§
MONROBOT XI
on.
.55
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:... .
. 42
Connection to System
3 buffers (2 standard, 1
optional).
none.
.422 Off-line:.
. 43
.56
Testable Conditions
Disabled: . . . .
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End of medium
marks: . . . .
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions: . . . . . maximum of 1 input and 1
output device (or 1 inputoutput device) per buffer.
.44
no.
no.
no.
no.
no .
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind: . . .
Input-Output Buffer (housed
in Computer cabinet).
.421 On-line: .
Control.Operations
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
.62
Speeds
no .
no; lockout.
no .
no .
no.
Olta Transfer Control
.441 Size of load:
.442 Input area:
1 character of 8 or 5 bits •
accumuIator (low order
bits).
fully accessible to program.
processor waits on lockout
until the cha;racter has
been read.
none.
by program for successive
characters.
see .444 .
.443 Input area access:
.444 Input area lockout:
.445 Table control: .
.446 Synchronization:
.447 Synchronizing aids:
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . .
.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
.623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speed:
. 63
Demands on System
. variable .
. as programmed; any character can be used as a
delimiter, or a fixed num - .7
ber of characters can be
read.
.n
processor .
2.9
5.8
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Adjustments:. . . . . none .
Other Controls
Input-Output Operations
· 521 Input: . . . . . . . .
.522
. 523
.524
.525
· 526
Output: .
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching:
· 53
Code Translation:
. 54
Format Control:
10/62
20 char/sec .
asynchronous; reading
rate is controlled by program .
. . . 20 char/sec if less than 50
m. sec elapse between
successive input instructions .
Component: . . .
m. sec. per char:
Percentage: . . .
• 72
.52
. . . none.
Form
Comment
Function
Manual Gear
knob
advances or backs up
read 1 character into low
Wheel:
order bit positions of
tape manually.
accumulator and advance
5-8 Channel
tape to next row; set all
Switch:
2-way optional; selects code
other accumulator bit
switch level.
pos itions to 0, except
set sign bit to 1 if input
character has even parity.
.73 Loading and Unloading
none .
none.
·.731 Volumes handled
none.
Capacity
Storage
none.
6- inch dia. roll (about 400
Feed pan: . .
none.
feet).
Take-up reel:
6-inch dia. roll (about 400
by program; Data Code
feet).
Tables 1 and 2 show the
0.5 to 1.0 minute; reader
.732 Replenishment time:
standard 8-track and Sneeds to be stopped.
track codes.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . .
about 40 minutes.
none.
531:071.720
INPUT -OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§
.8
071.
• 72
Other Controls
Function
Manual Gear
Wheel:
5-8 Channel
Switch:
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Form
knob
2-way
switch
Comment
advances or backs up
tape manually.
optional; selects code
level.
©
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Im perfect medium:
Timing conflicts
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Check or
Interlock
parity check (8track only)
not possible.
reads all codes into
accumulator.
"no tape" switch
"tight tape" switch
lockout
Action
set bit indicator in
accumulator.
stop reader.
stop reader.
processor waits until character is
available.
10/62
531 :072.100
.STANIl'JID
EDP
_
REPORTS
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Edge-Punched Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: EDGE-PUNCHED CARD READER
§
072.
.12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . Edge-Punched Card Reader.
.12
Description
Description (Contd.)
can be read if the optional 5-8 Channel Switch is
added •
The Edge-Punched Card Reader has all the facllities,
features, and specifications of the Paper Tape Reader, described in section :071. In addition, it is
equipped to feed rectangular cards of widely varying
size and to read information punched along their margins in standard paper tape code formats at a peak
speed of 20 characters per second. Eight-track and
five-track models are available; both levels of coding
No facilities are provided for feeding or stacking
consecutive cards, so each card or short fanfold set
must be loaded into the reader and removed by the
operator. This can be done in a few seconds, and
the more rapid loading and unloading represents a
major advantage of cards over punched tape for
applications where the external storage must be of
the random access type. Change-overs between
punched tape and cards require no special adjust·ments. The punched tape feed reel and take-up pan
are identical to those in the Paper Tape Reader.
c·
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:073.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Paper Tape Punch
REI'DRTS
INPUT -OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE PUNCH
§
.24
073.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
. 12
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/ stack: .
Paper Tape Punch .
(8-Track and 5-Track
Models).
Method of use:
Description:
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
The Paper Tape Punch described here is built by
Monroe. Other punches have been supplied with
the Monrobot XI, but all have the same functional
specifications. The punch is usually housed in the
lower drawer of a cabinet module, where it can be
rolled forward for convenient loading, unloading,
and maintenance.
.31
Form of Storage
Punched tape codes of eight or five tracks can be
produced at a peak speed of 20 characters per second. Since all code conversions are programmed,
ed, any code that uses standard hole spacings can
be accommodated. Each output instruction initiates
the punching of a single character code, after which
the tape is advanced one row. The processor is delayed for less than three milliseconds, and the remaining 47 milliseconds of the punch cycle are usually used to prepare the next character for punching. If consecutive output instructions occur too
close together, the processor waits until the punch
is ready. There are no checks on recording, but a
parity bit can be computed and punched automatically on 8-track tape.
Optional Feature
. 311 Medium:.
.312 Phenomenon:
.32
.321 Serial by:
. 322 Parallel by:
Model
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing (sprocket
track):
Control signals
(end line):
Unused:
Total (exclusive
of sprocket track):
Availability:
3 to 6 months .
. 14
First Delivery: .
December, 1960.
.33
Coding:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.34
Format Compatibility: . . . . .
.22
sprocket drive, pull only.
none.
.35
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system: .
die punches.
none.
. 23
none.
Multiple Copies: .
©
1 to N rows at 10 per inch;
N is controlled by program .
8 or 5 tracks at standard
spacing .
. 324 Track use
. 13
.211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs: . . .
paper or plastiC tape .
fully punched round holes.
Positional Arrangement
.325 Row use
Data:
Redundancy check:
Timing:
Control signals: .
Unused:
Gap:
5-8 Channel Switch: Permits punching either Strack or 8-track codes, depending upon the position
of a manual switch.
punching tape.
1.
8 or 5 (plus sprocket
punch).
punches 1 row at a time.
8-Track
5-Track
6
1
5.
(1)
(1).
1
0
o.
8
5.
o.
O.
1 to N.
O.
O.
1 (optional delimiter).
O.
none required .
1 character per row, as in
Data Code Table 1 or 2.
(Since code translation is
programmed, other codes
can be punched.)
with all devices using standard 8 - or 5 -track punched tape .
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width
8 -track tape:
5-track tape:
. 352 Length: . . .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1.0 inch.
0.6875 inch .
up to 1.000 feet per roll .
10/62
531:073.400
MONROBOT XI
073.
CONTROLLER
.4
§
.41
Identity: .
.42
Connection to S}:,:stem
.421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line: .
. 43
1.
maximum of 1 inPl1t and 1
output device (or 1 inputoutput device) per buffer.
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: .
.442 Output areas:
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
.62
Speeds
.51
Blocks
Demands on System
Component:
m.sec per char.:
Percentage:
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Output: . .
.73
.521 Input: .
. 522 Output:
. 523
.524
. 525
. 526
Stepping:.
Skipping:.
Marking:.
Searching:
. 53
Code Translation:
.54
. 55
Format Control: .
10/62
none.
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind:
Form
Comment
button
prepares leaders.
2-way
switch
optional; selects code
level.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
none .
punch 1 character as deStorage
fined by low-order bits of
Fast Access Register 5 or
, Feed reel:
of the output instruction
Take -up reel:
itself; parity bit is com.732 Replenishment
puted and punched autotime:
matically on S -track tape.
none.
.734 Optimum reloading
none.
period: . . . . .
none .
none .
by program; Data Code
Tables 1 and 2 show the
standard S-track and Strack codes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
.S
none.
Other Controls
. as programmed.
Input-Output Operations
5.S.
Adjustments:.....
Tape Feed:
5-S Channel
Switch:
. variable.
processor.
2.9 .
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Function
.52
none .
20 char/sec.
asynchronous; punching
rate is controlled by program .
. 624 Effective speeds: . . . 20 char/sec. if less than
50 m. sec. elapse between successive output
instructions .
.5
. 447
...
.621 Nominal or peak
speed: .
. 623 Overhead: . . .
1 character of S or 5 bits .
low order bits of Fast
Access Register 5 or of
.63
the output instruction itself.
Output area access: .
fully accessible to program.
Output area lockout:.
none required .
Table control:. .
none .
Synchronization: .
by program for successive
.7
characters .
Synchronizing aids:
processor waits on lock.71
out until previous character has been punched.
.72
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.443
.444
. 445
. 446
no.
no; lockout.
no.
no .
no.
Disabled:
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller:
End of medium marks.
Input-Output Buffer (housed
in Computer cabinet).
3 buffers (2 standard, 1
optional).
none.
Testable Conditions
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions: .
.44
.56
Capacity
1,000 feet.
1,000 feet.
2 to 3 minutes; punch needs
to be stopped .
100 minutes .
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
single char. only•
all codes valid.
"no tape" switch
"tight tape" switch
lockout
Receipt of data:
none.
Action
none.
stop punch.
stop punch.
wait until operation can proceed.
531:074.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Edge-Punched Card Punch
INPUT -OUTPUT: EDGE-PUNCHED CARD PUNCH
§
074.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .
.12
Description
. . . • • Edge-Punched Card Punch.
The Edge-Punched Card Punch has all the facilities,
features, and specifications of the Paper Tape Punch,
described in section :073. In addition, it is equipped
to feed rectangular cards of widely varying size and
to punch information along their margins in standard
©
Description (Contd.)
paper tape code formats. No facilities are provided
for feeding or stacking the cards, so each individual
card or short fanfold set must be inserted and removed by the operator; the process takes only a few
seconds. Feed and take-up facilities are provided
for punched tape, and change-overs between cards
and tape require no special adjustments. Eighttrack and five-track models are available.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:075.100
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READER
§
075.
.22
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
· 12
. . . . . . . Card Reader.
(mM 024 Card Punch or
026 Printing Card Punch
with Model 24 Coupler).
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system: .
.222 Sensing system: .
. 223 Common system:
die punches.
brushes .
no.
.23
Multiple Copies: .
none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Description
The Card Reader used in the Monrobot XI system is
the mM 024 Card Punch or 026 Printing Card Punch
(the familiar mM "keypunches"). Each model includes a feeding, transport, and stacking mechanism
for standard SO-column punched cards; a punch station; a read station; and a manual keyboard. Model
026 includes a printing mechanism that prints each
character at the top of the card column in which it is
punched. The printing feature is not useful unless
the unit will also be used for on-line or manual
punching.
Cards are read column by column at the rate of 16
columns per second. Skipping occurs at SO columns
per second. The standard Hollerith card code is
used, and a translation matrix in the required Model
24 Coupler translates each column code into the corresponding S-track paper tape code, which enters
the low-order eight bit positions of the accumulator.
Each input instruction causes a single column to be
read, after which the card is advanced to the next
column. Sixty-four milliseconds are available for
internal processing between columns at the peak
speed of 16 columns per second. Parity checks are
made on the translated codes.
Use of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/ stack:. .
Method of use: .
punching.
1.
12.
punches 1 column at a time.
Use of station:
Distance: . . .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack:.
Method of use:
printing (026 only).
at punch station.
1.
1.
prints each punched character at top of column; not
used when reading.
.
.
.
.
Use of station: .
Distance: .
Stacks: .
Heads/stack: •
Method of use: .
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
. 311 Medium: . . •
. 312 Phenomenon: . .
A single Card Punch can be used for both input and
· 32 Positional Arrangement
output. In this case both the Model 24 and Model 26
Couplers must be used. The couplers can be substi- .321 Serial by:
tuted for the paper tape reader and punch in the
basic Monrobot XI system on a one-for-one basis;
.322 Parallel by:
the Card Punches themselves must be rented or purchased from mM. Before the Card Punch can be
. 324 Track use: .
used for off-line keypunching, the cable connecting it . 325 Row use: .
to the Model 24 and/or Model 26 Coupler must be
disconnected.
· 33 Coding:..
· 13
Availability:.
3 to 6 months.
· 14
First Delivery:
1961 (with Monrobot XI).
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs: • . . •
pinch roller friction .
none.
©
reading.
1 card length to left of
punch station.
1.
12.
reads 1 column at a time.
standard SO-column cards .
rectangular holes .
SO columns at standard
spacing.
12 tracks at standard
spacing.
all for data •
all for data .
column code as in Data
Code Table No.3.
.34
Format Compatibility:. with other devices using
standard SO-column
cards •
. 35
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
standard SO-column cards.
Model 24 Coupler .
Input- Output Buffer •
(Both are required).
10/62
531:075.420
§
MONROBOT XI
075.
.42
.......
.54
Format Control: . • . . program card controls
skipping.
.55
Control 0eerations
1 Model 24 Coupler.
3 Input-Output Buffers
(2 standard, 1 optIonal).
. 422 Off-line
Use
Associated equipment
All normal keypunch
functions: • . • . ; none (must be disconnected
from Coupler).
... ..
.
.
Disable:
Request interrupt: .
Offset card: ·
Select stacker: .
Select format:
Select code:
Skip: . . . . .
Connection to Device
. 431 Devices per controller: 1.
. 432 Restrictions: • . • • . . maximum of 1 input and 1
output device (or 1 inputoutput device) per buffer;
if both Card Reader and
Card Punch are used, they
must be connected to the
same buffer.
. 44
Code Translation: • . . automatic translation from
card code to 8-track tape
code as in Data Code
Table No.1 (but translation from tape code to
internal codes must be
programmed) .
Connection to System
.421 On-line:
.43
.53
.56
Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size of load:
. 442 Input area: •
. 443 Input area access:
. 444 Input area lockout: •
. 445 Table control: . .
.446 Synchronization: .
.447 Synchronizing aids:
1 column, translated to one
8-bit character.
accumulator (low order
bits) .
fully accessible to program .
processor waits on lockout
until the character has
been read.
none.
.6
by program for successive
characters.
.61
see .444.
Testable Conditions
Disabled: • . . . .
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
Hopper empty: .
Stacker full: . .
no .
no; lockout.
no .
no.
no .
no.
PERFORMANCE
...
Conditions: .
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 62
.51
Blocks
.621 Nominal or peak speed
Reading:
Skipping: . • . '.'
.623 Overhead:
.52
1 card.
fixed.
Input- Outeut 0eerations
.521 Input: . • . . . . . . . . . read 1 column, translate,
and store in low order 8
bit positions of accumulator; set all other bit positions to 0, except set
sign bit to 1 if input character has even parity.
. 522 Output: .
see section :076 .
none.
.523 Stepping:
skip 2 to 80 columns, ac.524 Skipping:
cording to format of program card on Card Punch
drum; skipping can be
initiated by the program
card or by a special
instruction .
. 525 Marking: .
none •
. 526 Searching:
none.
10/62
.....
.624 Effective speeds:
.63
none .
Speeds
.5
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation:
no .
no •
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
16 columns/ sec.
80 columns/sec.
O. 25 second for card
release-feed cycle.
15 char/sec (or 11 cards/
min. ) for fully punched
cards if less than 67 m.
sec elapse between successive input instructions.
Demands on S:y:stem
· ..
Component:
m. sec per char.:
Percentage:
· ..
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments: .
.. . ..
processor.
2.9.
4.6.
none .
INPUT·OUTPUT: CARD READER
§
531:075.720
075.
• 72
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Other Controls
Error
Function
Form
button
Program Control:
lever
Pressure Roll
Release:
. 73
Action
Comment
Reading:
Feed:
Check or
Interlock
initiates card feedrelease cycle.
selects program
card format
control.
lever
permits manual removal of cards.
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
parity check on
translated code
translation matrix
assigns even parity
none.
lockout
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
check
check-
Invalid code:
set bit indicator in
accumulator.
set bit indicator in
accumulator.
processor waits until
character is
available.
stop reader.
stop reader •
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . . . .
Stacker: . . . .
. 732 Replenishment time:.
• 734 Optimum reloading
period: • . • . . .
Capacity
. 500 cards.
500 cards.
0.5 to 1. 0 minute; reader
needs to be stopped .
44 minutes.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:076.100
•
II
STANDARD
REPORTS
EDP
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Cord Punch
INPUT -OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH
§ 076.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
• 12
Description
. 23
Multiple Copies: . . .
.24
Arrangement of Heads
Card Punch. (lBM 024
Card Punch or 026 Printing Card Punch with Model 26 Coupler).
The Card Punch used in the Monrobot XI system is
the IBM 024 Card Punch or 026 Printing Card Punch
(the familiar IBM "keypunches"). Each model includes a feeding, transport, and stacking mechanism
for standard SO-column punched cards; a punch station; a read station; and a manual keyboard. Model
026 includes a printing mechanism that can print
each character at the top of the column in which it
is punched.
Each output instruction causes one character to be
transmitted from the processor in 8-track paper
tape code, converted to a standard Hollerith card
code by a translation matrix in the Model 26 Coupler, and punched into one card column. At the peak
speed of 16 columns per second, 64 milliseconds
are available for internal processing between
columns.
Skipping occurs at 80 columns per second; it can be
initiated by a special output instruction or by the
program card on the Card Punch drum. The program card and/or computer program can also initiate the card release-feed cycle and control the
duplication of information from one card into corresponding fields of the next card. No checks are
performed on punching or on character validity, but
certain illegal code patterns will cause the punch to
"hang up."
A single Card Punch can be used for both input and
output, in which case both the Model 24 and Model
26 Couplers must be used. Before the punch can be
used for off-line keypunching, the cable connecting
it to the Coupler(s) must be disconnected.
. 13
Availability:. .
3 to 6 months.
• 14
First Delivery: .
1961 (with Monrobot XI).
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Drive Mechanism
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
punching .
1.
12.
punches 1 column at a
time •
Use of station:
Distance:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
printing (026 only).
at punch station.
1.
1.
prints each character at
top of column, simultaneous with punching.
Use of station:
Distance:
reading.
1 card length to left of
punch station.
1.
12.
reads 1 column at a time.
Stacks: . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
.25
Range of Symbols (printed by 026 only)
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Total:
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use: .
. 325 Row use:
#@",%$.*&O-
column code as in Data
Code Table No.3 .
.33
Coding:
.34
Format Compatibility:
...
Physical Dimensions:
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
©
11
80 columns at standard
spacing.
12 tracks at standard
spacing.
all for data.
all for data .
.22
die punches .
brushes.
no.
0-9.
Positional Arrangement
.35
. 221 Recording system: .
. 222 Sensing system:
. 223 Common system:
A-Z.
standard 80-column cards.
rectangular holes.
. 311 Medium: .
.312 Phenomenon:
.211 Drive past the head: . . pinch roller friction .
. 212 Reservoirs: . . . . . none.
Sensing and Recording Systems
10
26
47 and blank
.3
.32
none.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
with other devices using
standard 80-column cards •
standard 80-column cards.
Model 26 Coupler .
Input-Output Buffer.
(Both are required) .
10/62
MONROBOT XI
531:076.420
§
076.
.4~
.53
Code Translation:
.54
Format Control
Connection to System
1 Model 26 Couplet .
3 Input-Output Buffers
(2 standard, 1 optional).
. 421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line
Use
As sociated equipment
All normal keypunch
none (must be disconnectfunctions: .
ed from Coupler).
.43
1.
maximum of 1 input and 1
output device (or 1 inputoutput device) per buffer;
if both Card Reader and
Card Punch are used,
they must be connected
to the same buffer.
.55
• 442 Output areas:
.443 Output area access: .
.444 Output area lockout:
.445 Table control:
•.446 Synchronization:
aids:
one 8-bit character, translated to 1 card column.
low order bits of Fast Access Register 5 or of the
output instruction itself.
fully accessible to program.
none required.
none.
by program for successive
characters.
processor waits on lockout
until previous character
has been punched.
.447
Syn~hronizing
•5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 51
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation:
1 card .
fixed.
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input:
.522 Output:
.523 Stepping:
. 524 Skipping:
.525 Marking:
. 526 Searching:
see section :075.
translate to card code and
punch 1 column, as defined by low order 8 bits
of Fast Access Register
5 or of the output instruction itself.
none.
skip 2 to 80 columns, according to format of program card on Card Punch
drum; skipping can be initiated by the program
card or by a special instruction.
none.
none.
Select code:
Skip:
Duplicate:
Release and fee!! next
card:
Multiple punch: .
.56
2 with Alternate Program
feature on 024 or 026.
no .
026 only.
no.
yes.
no .
yes.
yes.
no.
no.
no .
no.
1 of 2 with Alternate Program feature only.
no .
yes.
yes.
yes .
yes.
Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Nearly exhausted: .
Busy controller:
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
.62
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speed
Punching: .
Skipping: .
.623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds:
.63
program card.
Control Operations
Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Offset ca:rd:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load:
. 52
Rearrangement:
Suppress zeros:
Insert point:
Insert spaces:
Recording density:
Section sizes:
Alphabetic shift:
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller:
. 432 Restrictions: .
.44
Control: .
Format alternatives:
. automatic translation from
'8-track tape code to card
code (but translation from
internal codes to tape code
must be programmed).
no •
no; lockout.
no.
no.
no .
no .
none .
16 columns/sec.
80 columns/sec.
O. 25 second for card release-feed cycle.
15 char/sec (or 11 cards/
min.) for fully punched
cards if less than 67 m .
sec. elapse between successive output instructions.
Demands on System
Component:
m. sec per char.:
Percentage:
processor.
2.9.
4.6 .
10/62
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD PUNCH
531 :076.700
§076.
.7
. 71
• 72
.73
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: . .
Stacker: . .
.732 Replenishment
time:
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Adjustments:. . . . . .none .
Capacity
500 cards.
500 cards.
O. 5 to 1. 0 minute; plinch
needs to be stopped •
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: .
Other Controls
Function
Loading and Unloading
Form
Feed:
button
Program Control:
lever
Pressure Roll Release:
lever
Comment
initiates card release -feed
cycle.
selects program card format
control.
permits manual removal of
cards.
Note: Duplication, skipping, shifting, multiple
punching, release, and registration can all be
controlled manually by keyboard buttons.
©
.8
44 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
none.
single char. only.
none
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
none.
lockout
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
check
check
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
punch illegal card
code or hang up.
wait until operation
can proceed.
stop punch.
stop punch.
10/62
531:077.100
.STANDARO
II
REPCRTS
EDP
Monrobot XI
Input.Output
Photoelectric Reader
INPUT· OUTPUT: PHOTOELECTRIC READER
.12
§077.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:....... Photoelectric Reader.
. 12
Description
The Photoelectric Reader is a Monroe development,
announced in September, 1962. It reads 8-track or
5-track punched tape, and all programming considerations are the same as for the mechanical reader
described in Section :071. Peak speed is 300 char-
©
Description (Contd.)
acters per second, but the maximum rate at which
the Monrobot XI can accept data from the reader is
40 to 50 characters per second.
The reader can be mounted in a drawer of the standard Monrobot cabinet modules. Tape threading is
semi-automatic and rapid. Eight lights on the front
panel provide a display of the next code pattern that
will be read. Detailed technical specifications are
not yet available.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531 :081.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Typewriter
REPDRTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: TYPEWRITER
§081.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •
. 12
Description
Input-Output Typewriter.
Output Typewriter.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head:
.212 Reservoirs:
.22
These are single-case IBM Model B electric typewriters with modifications and control circuitry by
Soroban Engineering, Inc. The two models are
mechanically the same, but the Output Typewriter is
usable only for printed output at a maximum speed
of ten characters per second; the Input-Output Typewriter can be used for keyboard input as well. One
Input-Output Typewriter is included in the basic
Monrobot XI system; it is usually connected to inputoutput channel 1 and placed on the knee-hole inputoutput desk. An additional typewriter will be useful
in many commercial applications where two different
types of printed records must be produced; e.g.,
payroll checks and ledgers.
•
Sensing and Recording
Systems
• 221 Recording system:
.222 SenSing system:
.223 Common system:
. 23
platen friction (Pinfeed
Platen is optional).
none •
engraved hammers •
typewriter keyboard.
no.
Multiple Copies
.231 Maximum number:
• 233 Types of master
Multilith: .
Xerox:
Spirit:
depends on stationery;
approximately 6.
yes.
yes.
yes.
In the normal mode of operation, each input or out-
put instruction causes one 8- bit character to be
.24
transferred from or to the typewriter. When the
console RESET switch is depressed, automatic operation is halted and only four, bits enter the accumu1ator each time a key is depressed. Only the hexadecimal characters 0 through 9 and S through X may
be entered in the reset mode;. it is used primarily
for loading "bootstrap" routines and in console debugging.
Optional Features
20-inch Carriage: Replaces the standard 16-inch
.25
carriage and permits typing on forms up to 19 inches.
wide.
Pinfeed Platen: Provides positive feeding and alignment of forms; available for 16- or 20-inch carriage.
Form Aligner: Tractor feed mechanism for continuous forms.
Form Stand: Holds feed and take-up form stacks,
each up to seven inches high.
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/ Stack:
Method of use:
printing.
1.
1 print station.
1 character at a time.
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
keyboard input.
Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters: •
Special:
Alternatives: •
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set: •
Total: •
•3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium:
.13
1.
48 keys.
1 character at a time.
Availability:. • • • • 3 to 6 months.
10
26
8
none.
no.
no.
44 and
0-9.
A-Z.
,./;-'*$
blank .
continuous fanfold stationery
or individual sheets •
• 312 Phenomenon
Input:
• 14
First Delivery:
•••
December, 1960.
©
Output: ••
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
key depression •
printing.
10/62
531:081.320
§
MONROBOT XI
081.
.32
Positional Arrangement
. 321 Serial by:
character at 10 per inch.
.324 Track use: .
140 print positions for data
(180 with optional 20-inch
carriage).
.325 Row use:
all for data; 6 rows per inch
.33
engraved character font
(internal coding as in Data
Code Table No.1).
Coding:
.34
Format Compatibility:
.35
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width:
•
.352 Length:
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:.
. 42
Connection to System
.51
Blocks
continuously variable to
maximum of 15 inches (19
inches with optional car,riage).
Output:. •
.52
3 buffers (2 standard, 1
optional).
.522 Output:
.524 Skipping:
.53
Code Translation:
.54
Format Control
Input:
Output:
.55
Data Transfer Control
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control:
•446 Synchronization:
.447 Synchronizing aids:
10/62
accept 1 manually typed
character and load it into
low order 8 bit positions
of accumulator; set all
other positions to 0, except set sign bit to 1 if input character has even
parity.
type 1 character as defined
by low order 8 bits of Fast
Access Register 5 or of
the output instruction itself •
return carriage and step 1,
2, or 3 lines.
"tab" to next preset tab
position .
none •
none.
.521 Input: • • •
by program; Data Code
Table No. 1 shows the internal code corresponding
to each typewriter character. .
Associated equipment
none •
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
•432 Restrictions:. •
maximum of 1 input and 1
output device (or 1 inputoutput device) per buffer.
• 443 Input-output area
access:
Input-Output Operations
• 525 Marking:
.526 Searching:
Connection to Device
.442 Input-output areas
Input:
Output:.
•
as programmed; any character can be used as a delimiter, or a fixed number
of characters can be typed.
. " as programmed.
none.
Input-Output Buffer (housed
in Computer cabinet).
.422 Off-line
Use
Manual typing: •
•441 Size of load: •
variable .
.511 Size of block: •
• 512 Block demarcation
Input:
•
.523 Stepping:
.421 On-line:
.44
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
no limit.
.4
. 43
.5
••
manual.
by program.
•
Control Operations
Disable: •
•
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: • • •
1 character of 8 bits (~ bits
for input in reset mode).
. 56
accumulator.
Fast Access Register 5, or
low-order 8 bits of output
instruction.
no.
no .
no.
no •
Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:..
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:.
End of medium marks:
no.
no; lockout.
no.
no .
no.
fully accessible to program.
processor waits on lockout
until the input or output
operation can be initiated.
none •
by program for successive
characters.
see .444.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
.62
Speeds
•
.621 Nominal or peak speed
InpUt:
Output:. •
;
none.
manual typing speed.
10 char/sec •
INPUT-OUTPUT: TYPEWRITER
§
531 :081.623
081.
.623 Overhead:
.624 Effective speeds
Input:
Output: • • • •
.63
.73
maximum of 0.75 second
for carriage return.
.731 Volumes handled (using optional Form Stand)
Storage
Capacity
Feed:. • • • •.
7-inch stack.
manual typing speed.
Take-up: . • ••
7-inch stack.
depends upon number of
.732 Replenishment time:
2 to 3 minutes; typewriter
carriage returns and efneeds to be stopped.
ficiency of output routines • • 733 Adjustment time: . •
3 to 4 minutes.
Demands on System
Component:
m. sec. per char. :
Percentage:
Loading and Unloading
.8
processor.
2.9*
2.9*
*These are minimum demands, assuming device is
not busy on output and has a character available on
input; i. e., no processor lockouts.
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments:. . • . • standard typewriter
facilities.
.72
Other Controls:
none.
©
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Recording:
Reading:
none.
parity check
Input area
overflow:
Output block
size:
Invalid cnde:
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
Timing conflicts:
Action
set bit indicator in
accumulator
not possible.
single char. only.
none
no character is printed.
none.
none.
lockout.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
wait.
10/62
531:082.100
•
II
STANDARD
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Teletype Printer
REPORTS
ED
P
INPUT-OUTPUT: TELETYPE PRINTER
§082.
.24
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description
Teletype Send-Receive
Printer.
Model 28.
The Teletype Model 28Send-Receive Printer can be
used in place of or in addition to the Input-Output
Typewriter for keyboard input and printer output at
a peak speed of ten characters per second. The 5bit Teletype code is used for both input and output;
no parity checking can be done. Keyboard input in
the non-automatic reset mode is impossible with the
Teletype Printer, so either a typewriter or a 16-Key
Keyboard must be available for "bootstrap" operations and console debugging.
Fanfold or roll stationery can be used, but the form
width is limited to 8.5 inches. There is no horizol).tal movement of the platen. A typebox containing 64
type pallets is moved to bring the selected character
into printing position, and a single print hammer
drives the type pallet against the ribbon and paper.
The primary advantages of the Teletype Printer over
the standard Input-Output Typewriter are its higher
reliability record and its code and keyboard compatibility with other communications equipment. These
must be weighed against the Teletype unit's lower
flexibility of operation and lack of parity checking.
Availability:
3 to 6 months.
. 14
First Delivery: .
1961 (with Monrobot XI) .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head:. .
.212 Reservoirs: . . . . .
. 22
platen friction.
none.
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:
.25
.222 SenSing system:
.223 Common system:
. 23
maximum not specified.
Multiple Copies:
©
printing .
1.
1 print station.
prints 1 character at a
time.
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
keyboard input .
1.
37 keys; 32 characters and
5 controls.
1 character at a time.
Range of Symbols
10
0-9
26
A-Z
14
.,;:()?$&"'#/other special chars
available.
no.
no.
50 and blank.
Numerals:
Letters: . . .
Special:
Alternatives: •
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set: .
Total:
.....
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
continuous roll or fan-fold
stationery .
. 311 Medium: .
.312 Phenomenon
Input:
Output: .
key depression.
printing.
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
. 324 Track use:.
. 325 Row use: .
character .
all for data.
all for data.
.33
Coding:
engraved character font
(internal coding as in
Data Code Table No.2) .
.34
Format Compatibility: . . . . .
.35
64 engraved type pallets,
actuated by a single printing hammer.
keyboard.
no.
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
Method of use:
Because the Teletype Printer's control circuitry is
modified for on -line use with the Monrobot XI, direct
connection to a communications line is not recom.32
mended.
.13
Arrangement of Heads
.
none .
Physical Dimensions
. 351 Overall width:
.352 Length:
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity: .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
8.5 inches .
'l
Input-Output Buffer (housed
in Computer cabinet).
10/62
531:082.420
MONROBOT XI
§082.
.42
3 buffers (2 standard, 1
optional).
· 422 Off -line
Use:
.....
Associated equipment: . . . . .
.54
Format Control
manual typing.
Input: .
Output:
.55
.443 Input-output area
access: .
.444 Input- output area
lockout:
. 445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:
.447 Synchronizing aids:
1 character of 5 bits .
PROGRAH FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
variable.
as programmed; any character can be used as a
delimiter, or a fixed number of characters can be
entered.
Output: . . . . . . . as programmed.
0
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
.62
Speeds
no.
no; lockout.
no.
no.
no.
. . .
.621 Nominal or peak speed
Input:
Output: . . . ,
.623 Overhead: ... .
. 624 Effective speeds
Input:
Output: . . . .
.63
Input-Output Operations
10/62
Testable Conditions
••
.521 Input: . . . . . . . . accept 1 manually typed
character and load it into
low order 5 bit positions
of accumulator.
type 1 character as defined
· 522 Output:
by low order bits of Fast
Access Register 5 or of
the output instruction itself.
feed 1 to °l lines, depending
· 523 Stepping:.
upon position of manually
inserted stops.
0524 Skipping:.
"tab" to next manually inserted tab stop.
. 525 Marking:
none.
. 526 Searching:
none.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Disabled:
Busy device: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller:
End of medium
marks: . . . .
fully accessible to program.
.5
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . .
056
accumulator.
Fast Access Register 5, or
low order bits of output
instruction.
processor waits on lockout
until the input or output
operation is initiated.
none.
by program for successive
characters.
see .444
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: .
Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size bf load:
.442 Input-output areas
Input:
Output: .
manual.
by program.
none.
Note: Because of circuit modifications, the use of
this device for normal Teletype transmission
via cables is not recommended.
• 52
Code Translation:. . . by program; Data Code
Table No. 2 shows the 5bit code for each character.
Connection to System
.421 On-line:
.44
.53
manual typing speed.
10 char/sec.
O. 20 second for carriage
return .
manual typing speed.
depends upon number of
carriage returns and
efficiency of output routines.
Demands on System
Component:
processor.
M. sec per char.:
2.9.*
2.9 .
Percentage:
*
.8
none •
These are minimum demands, assuming device is
not busy on output and has a character available .
on input; i.e., no processor lockouts.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or Intcsrlock
Action
Recording:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts
none.
none.
not possible.
single char. only.
all codes valid.
none •
none •
lockout
wait.
531:101.100
II
•
STANDARD
EDP
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
16-Key Keyboard
R£l'QRTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 16 -KEY KEYBOARD
§
101.
.12
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: .
.12
Description
. . . • . 16-Key Keyboard.
The 16-Key Keyboard is a compact unit that stands
on top of the computer cabinet or input-output desk
and permits manual entry of decimal or hexadecimal
information. Each key depression sends one 4-bit
code into the low order end of the accumulator.
©
Description (Contd.)
Input may be in either the automatic mode (one character per input instruction) or the reset mode (automatic shift left of four bit positions before each
character is entered). Eight hexadecimal characters
fill a 32-bit word, and no code conversion is required. When the input is in the form of decimal numeric data, the usual decimal-to-binary radix conversion
is required. Input of alphameric information via the
16-Key Keyboard is not practical.
1962 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531: 102.100
Monrobot XI
Input-Output
Monroe-Card Processor
INPUT-OUTPUT: MONROE-CARD PROCESSOR
§102.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.. . . . . . Monroe -Card Processor.
. 12
Description
Monroe-Cards, announced in September, 1962, are
the same size as standard 80-column punch cards.
One side has a magnetizable coating upon which 96
or 174 32-bit words can be recorded in Monrobot XI
internal format. The 96-word card has 16 tracks
and can be used in any reasonable environment; the
174-word card has 29 tracks and requires a humidity-controlled environment to insure dimensional
stability. Each track is divided into 6 sectors, and
each sector can hold one 32-bit word, recorded
serially by bit. The cards can be handled manually
without affecting the recorded information. Up to
ten columns at each end of the Monroe-Card can be
punched on standard 80-column punched-card equipment, but magnetically recorded information may be
affected when the cards are passed through some
punched-card machines.
The Monroe-Card Processor is a compact, desk-top
unit that connects to the Monrobot XI and reads and
records upon Monroe-Cards. While a given card is
in the Processor, it can be considered a random access store of 96 or 174 words' capacity. The input
hopper can hold up to 250 cards, or they can be
inserted singly. One card at a time is loaded into
the Processor by a special instruction. Then reading
and/or recording can be done in any or all of the 96
or 174 locations on the card, and the card can be
ejected into either of two stackers under program
control. Ejection of one card and loading of the next
card takes 1. 5 seconds.
©
Description (Cont'd)
When a card enters the processor, it is aligned at
the "home" position. When a read or record
instruction is received, the card moves forward to
the appropriate sector; this takes from 56 to 336
milliseconds, during which time internal processing
is inhibited. After a single word has been read or
recorded, execution of the stored program can continue while the card moves back to the home position; this takes from 37 to 222 milliseconds.
For error-detection purposes, 34 check bits are
recorded along with each 32- bit information word,
and an automatic comparison of the two patterns is
made when the word is read. There is no automatic
check on recording, so each recorded word should
be read back and compared with the original word.
Total recording time, therefore, is twice as great
as reading time and will range from about 200 to
1100 milliseconds per word.
One Monroe-Card Processor can be connected to a
Monrobot XI system in addition to the full complement of three other input and three other output devices.
No off-line equipment is available for transcribing
data to or from Monroe-Cards, and the information
recorded on them cannot be sensed by human operators. Therefore, their major function will be the
storage of master file data that is updated from input
data on punched tape, punched cards, or a keyboard.
Monroe-Cards should be useful in semi-automated
"random access" systems where the operator manually selects the appropriate master record card for
each transaction. Up to I, 566 decimal digits or
1,044 alphameric characters can be stored on each
card.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531: 111.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Monrobot XI
Simultaneous Operotions
R[J'()RTS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§ 111.
.1
SPECIAL UNITS
. 11
Identity: . .
.12
Description
.2
. . . . Input-Output Buffer .
.3
Two Input-Output Buffers are supplied as part of the
basic Monrobot XI system, and a third buffer is
optional. One input device and one output device, or
one combination input-output device, can be connected to each buffer. The Input-Output Buffers provide
no actual buffer storage, but only the control circuitry for input-output operations.
Each input or output instruction initiates the transfer
of a single character code of up to eight bits from or
to the addressed input or output device. Internal
processing is delayed until a character is available
from the addressed input device, or until the addressed output device is ready to accept the character to
be punched or printed. Execution of an input or output instruction takes only 2.92 milliseconds (four
sector times), after which the processor is available
for other computation while the input or output device
completes its character cycle. Theoretically, up to
three input and three output devices could be operating simultaneously. In practice, however, most or
all of the inter-character time is required to process
the last character read or the next character to be
written, and it is unusual for more than one input or
output operation to occur at a time.
Each output instruction can specify one, two, or all
three output devices, so output information can be
duplicated on devices that accept the same codes
(e. g., the typewriter and paper tape punch). When
an input instruction specifies two or three devices, a
character will be accepted from the first input device
that makes one available; if two devices are ready at
the same time, their codes will be ORed together.
The multiple input facility is useful when data may be
entered from one of two or three different input devices (e.g., paper tape for routine transactions and
keyboard for exceptions).
©
.4
CONFIGURATION
CONDITIONS:
•.
none .
CLASSES OF
OPERATIONS
Class
Members
A:
input from Paper Tape
Reader.
input from Edge-Punched
Card Reader.
input from Typewriter.
input from Teletype Printer.
input from l6-Key Keyboard.
•
B:
input from Card Reader.
C:
output on Paper Tape Punch.
output on Edge- Punched
Card Punch.
output on Typewriter.
output on Teletype Printer.
D:
output on Card Punch.
P:
internal processing.
RULES
a + b = at
c + d = at
b = at
d = at
p = at
most
most
most
most
most
3.
3.
1.
1.
1.
Note: The above rules represent the maximum
theoretical simultaneity. In most applications.
only one input- output operation at a time is
practical.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10(62
531:121.101
•
STANDARD
_EDP
.'
§
Monrobot XI
Instruction List
REPORTS
INSTRUCTION LIST
121.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
Mnemonic
Command
Address
Hexadecimal
Code
Arithmetic
(A)+(Y)~A
S
M
Y
Y
Y
Xyyy
Wyyy
Syyy
D
Y
lyyy
J
JZ
JM
Y
Y
Y
Y
3yyy
6yyy
7yyy
3(4+y)yy
XT
Y
X(4+y)yy
K
S
U4ss
LD
RD
N
N
N
N
80nn
88nn
90nn
98nn
8Unn
9Unn
A
IN
L
R
LC
RP
N
N
(A) - (Y)~A
(A) x (Y)~A & FAS; low-order 32 bits are in FAS and highorder 32 bits in A.
DETRACT: Subtract (Y) from (A) until (Y) is less than (A);
add 1 to (FAS) each time a subtraction is made.
AND: Place a 1 bit in A wherever there is a 1 bit in the corresponding positions of both A and Y; otherwise place a 0 bit
in A.
Set A to all 1 bits if Intervention Switch S is set; otherwise set
A to O.
Multiply (A) by ION (N = 1 to 8).
Divide (A) by ION.
Shift (A) left N binary positions.
Shift (A) right N binary positions.
Shift (A & FAS) left N binary positions in circular fashion.
Shift (A) right N binary positions, inserting 1 bits in vacated
high order positions if original sign bit was a 1.
No operation.
Stop.
S100
0000
N
H
Logic
Jump unconditionally to Y.
Jump to Y if (A) = O.
Jump to Y if high order bit of (A) = 1.
JUMP MARK: (IR)~FA2; (Y)~IR.
Data Transfers
(Y)~A
(A)~Y
XC
Y
Y
Y
Vyyy
Tyyy
Uyyy
(A)~
C
C
006
005
USOO
SOOO
U400
all ones--»-A
CA
T
Y and (Y)~ A; Y must be 000, 001, 002, 003, 004,
005, or 006.
O-;:.A
O~FAS
Input-Output: General
D
2DOO
OR
D
SD7X
os
DCC
S(D+1)CC
Read one character of up to 8 bits into low order positions of
A from input device D. Set all other positions of A to 0, except set sign bit to 1 if input character has even parity.
Send low order 8 bits of (FAS) to output device(s) D, then set
FAS to O.
Send low order 8 bits of this instruction (CC) to output
device(s) D.
Note: The input-output instructions cause automatic
rearrangement between the external bit format
876P4321 and the internal format 8P764321, where
P is the parity bit and 8 is the "end line" bit.
Input-Output: Monroe-Cards
40MM
48MM
080B
©
Read contents of magnetic card register MM into FAS. Set
A to 0 unless a parity error occurs.
Transfer (FA 5) to magnetic card register MM.
Eject card into stacker B and feed next card (B = 0 or 1).
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
10/62
531:121.102
§
INSTRUC:rION LIST NOMENCLATURE
121.
A: .
D: .
MONROBOT XI
.,
accumulator (Fast Access Register 6).
address specifying anyone input device or anyone,
two, or three output devices.
FAn: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast Access Register n (storage location DOn, where
n = 0 through 6).
IR:
Instruction Register.
N: .
length of a shift operation in binary or decimal
positions (N = 1 to 8).
S: .
address of one of 8 Intervention Switches.
Y: .
address of a drum storage location.
yyy: .
address of a drum storage location in hexadecimal
form (000:::: yyy :::: 3XX).
( ): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . contents of a register or storage location;
e. g., (A) means contents of accumulator.
\
10/62
531:131.100
Monrobot XI
Coding Specimen
Machine Code
CODING SPECIMEN: MACHINE CODE
§
131.
.1
CODING SHEET
PAGE
MONRO BOT
MARK
XI
PROGRAM
110 1
1101
11 0
0
1
12
110 13
110 14
110 15
110 1 6
110 17
110 18
STEP
1 10
Is
110 IT
1 10 I u
110
Iv
V~
0 1
0 4
Load 1010 (decimal 10) in FA 6
Store 1010 in FA 4
A
V 2
0 0
B
T 0
T 0
B
U 5
0 1
0 0
0 0
A
T 0
0 3
Load 1 (decimal 11 in FA 6
Store 1 in FA 1
Write 1 in FA 1 as ];!ositive sign
Clear FA 6 to zero
Store zeros in FA 3 (store for conversion)
B
3 1
0 6
Jump to input routine
A
V
0
B
8 0
Load conversiQIl into FA 6
Multiplv conversion bJL 10
Add input digit from FA 5
Store conversion --I2.1us input digit
Read input digit from Device No. 1
Test for pari tr error' if parity error;ump tn
A
A
X
0
0 3
0 1
0 5
8
T 0
0 3
A
2 2
0 0
B
7 3
it X
A
B
T 0
W0
0 5
0 4
A
7
1
6 1
0 4
0 U
Test fA 6 ne ga t h!:fl; j f nega ti lle, j limp to conllersj Oll-Test FA 6 for zero' if zero input ceases
A
W0
B
6 1
0 1
0 T
Subtract 1 frOID in.tlliJ; digH
Test FA 6 for zero' if zero
A
3 ~
~1
JumI2 to reset inQut routine, error code ente;red
B
0 0
T 0
0 0
0 0
B
3 1
0
Fill instruction
Store 0 in FA 0 as minus sign
Jump to input routine for next digit
A
V I-(L Q ~
t-
B
6 1
A
A
B
,
'-
Ix
NOTES
T 0
110lw .-- - A
I
CONTENTS
B
B
(
DATE
A
B
1 10 19
I
SHEET
PROGRAMMER
DECIMAL 'ro BINARY CONVERSION
REGISTER
PROGRAM
A
(3
0 IV
Y-- I~ 0 I L
3 0 0 2
minus sign entered
Load FA 6 wi.:t.LsiglL-I:agis.t.e.r...
Test FA 6 for zero' i f zero number~ve
Load FA 6 with cO!lvert~d number
Jump to exit to next program step
w ~ ~- 3
_.Qom];!lement converted number as negative
3
Jump to exit to next program stell
p_
O
3XX
ingu:!; digit in fA 5 ·as tflmpQ:ca:c~ stnrage..-_.
Subtract 1010 from in~ut di!1'it
~_tore
2
-
-
-_..
...-
II
Reprinted from MonrobotXI Programming Manual, p. 89,
@. 1962 by Auerbach Corporation and ilNA Incorporated
10/62
531:131.200
§
MONROBOT XI
131.
.2
COMMENTS
This routine accepts and binarizes input from a 16-Key Keyboard. Keys 0 (code 0000) through 9 (code 1001)
are the allowable digit values. Key S (code 1010) causes input to cease. Key T (code 1011) is a minus sign.
The other four keys (U. V. W. X) give error indications which erase all previously entered digits.
10/62
531: 131.1 00
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Monrobot XI
Coding Specimen
Machine Code
REPORTS
CODING SPECIMEN: MACHINE CODE
§ 131,
•1
CODING SHEET
PAGE
MONROBOT
MARK
XI
PROGRAM
110
10
1101
1
11 0 12
STEP
CONTENTS
A
V~ 0 1
B
T 0
o4
A
V 2
0 0
B
110 14
110 15
110
16
110 17
110 10
1 10 19
T 0
T 0
U 5
0 0
0 0
lois
1 10
I
T
Iu
Load 1010 (decimal 1O) in FA 6
Store 1010 in FA 4
A
T 0
0 3
3 1
0 6
Jump to input routine
A
V 0
0 3
B
8 0
0 1
0 1
A
X 0
0 5
Load conversion into li'A fi
Multiply conversion by 10
Add input digit from FA 5
R
T 0
0 3
Store conversion plus input digit
A
2 2
0 0
B
7 3
it X
Read input digit from Device NQ. 1
Test for parity error' if pari tv error _iumoto 3XX
A
T 0
0 5
B
W 0
0 4
A
7 1
0 4
B
6 1
0 U
A
W0
0 1
6 1
3
0 T
B
o
o0
A
T 0
3 1
A
B
1 10
NOTES
B
A
B
1
DATE
Load 1 (decimal 1) in FA 6
Store 1 in FA 1
Write 1 in FA 1 as positive silrn
Clear FA 6 to zero
Store zeros in FA 3 ~store for conversiQlll
B
11 0 13
I
SHE E T
PROGRAMMER
DECIMAL 'fO BINARY CONVERSION
REGISTER
PROGRAM
A
-
Store in2ut digit in FA (2 ·a::; tempo~a~)!: stora gB--_.
Subtract 1010 from iI!Qut dilli t
Test FA g nega ij ]lej j f nega t j lle • .:i limp to conlle~sj OllTest FA 6 for zero' i f zero input ceases
Subtract 1 from in.tmJ; digit
'I'est FA 6 for zero' if zero
rL ~ 1
0
Jum~
minus si-.Kn entered
to reset in2ut routine, error code
entex.~_
Fill instruction
Store
0 in FA o as minus sign
0 6 Jump to input routine for next digit
0 0
V rQ... t-Q {L
Lo.ad
Test
Load
Jump
FA 6 wi:tLfii gn..-r:egi.s:tal::.-
FA 6 for zero' if zero number nerrative
FA 6 with converted number
to exit to next program step
B
Iv
6 1
A
V
B
3 0
110lw
A
W~ r--0 3 . _Complement cOI!yerted number as ne.zp,tive _________
B
3 ~
110
1
1x
A
0 IV
L -o 13 0 2
0
Jump to exit to next prOgrAm sten
2
-
--
Il
Reprinted from Monrobot_XI Programming Manual, p. 89.
@. 1962 by Auerbach Corporation and !INA Incorporated
10/62
531:131.200
§
MONROBOT XI
131.
.2
COMMENTS
This routine accepts and binarizes input from a 16-Key Keyboard. Keys 0 (code 0000) through 9 (code 1001)
are the allowable digit values. Key S (code 1010) causes input to cease. Key T (code 1011) is a minus sign.
The other four keys (U, V, W, X) give error indications which erase all previously entered digits.
10/62
531: 132.100
•
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
Monrobot XI
Coding Specimen
Symbolic
CODING SPECIMEN: SYMBOLIC ASSEMBLY PROGRAM
§
132.
.1
CODING SHEET
iJ;QilliJ.:crrol'lli
cr
NAMF:
I
PROGRAM Example
NAME
----L-
P IR IT,
_C IA
~ 0,1 10 1 1
I
I
iLL- ~!Ol
I
1
,
I
I
I
Use s;!.l12h aLnum ou t 12U t
iLL-
I
I
1
I
I
I
Routine
I I
t
~-
- ,
I
I
---L-
I
I
I
I
I
--l-
I
I
1
--l-
I
1
,
,I
1
,,,
I
I
--l- .
I
I
--l-
I
I
I
I
--l-
,,
I
I
I
-L
I
-Ll......!.- ----L-
;;;fij
~
I I
I
I
I
I_-L- - L
I
--L.
t
I
i
--4-
OPERAND
l.,FITIOITIAILI I
01 2 11 10 I
°
,
I I 1
~ 0,0 1 1 1
I
I
I
~ 317 16 12 1
I
I I 1 1
I
~ 01 2
to 18 ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 1
1 I I
1 I
I
I
1
,,
I
I
I I
I
1
,
I
-L
I
I
I
I
I
I
-1-__
I
I
t
t
I
1 I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 1
>--J
fn:-L
1 I 1
~
,
.J~ ----1_.
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
-L-
I
I
I
I t
I-LL-L.L.-
1 I
1
-L-
I
I
I
I
I
._--L.
I
I
I I
_---L-
1 I
--L-L_I
__ L._
1
I
I
I
---1-_
I
I
I
I
,
--I--
I
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
-'--I
-I
I
1 I
I
1 1
I
I
I
1 I
I
I
--L. -L--L-I-
----1--.
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
_---.L
---L- ----L I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I- f--LL..L _..L- ~I- ---L-
1
1 1 I
I
1 LJ..-----L-
1 I
t
I
1
I
1
-L_
I
I
--I-
I
I 1
_--1--
I
I
I- f-L.LL- - L -
I
1 1
.--L-
1 1
1 1 I
--1-.
I
-I-+-·
1
r-- i---L_LL
f-- f---L.J--L-.-
1 I
I---L-
L_. _---1-
LL-.L_LL __ --L.
-
,
I
1 I
,
_-L-I!
1
I
1-1-_
,
I
1 I
I L-L-L_
I
I
I
t
1 I --LL
I
1
I
I
I
1 I
1
,
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
.1-.
--I _ I
I
I
I
1 1
I-L_.'
~
...-._--.
----------_.
-
,
,
I
I
-
1
,
-L
I
Routine
--
--l- _ 1 I
I
Use numeric out12ut
I I 1 I I
I
f-- i-_LL-L-
For out2ut
--
I
I
I
FA 0
1 I
I
1 1
I
Place 107 in
,
,
-L-
I
4
Place 8 channel
Codes for total in
Reg. 010
I 1
1 1
,
26
COMMENTS
QJlL L,Dll,OIO,OIOIOIO,OI_
1 1 I
I
I
opm
I
,
I I I
PAGE
QNI.Y_
INCI(
1 I
I
I-
MONROE XI SYMBOLIC ASSEMBLER PROGRAM SHEET
,---
---- .-.-
---.
--"-'
.
--.--
..-.-
-_.-..._-.--.-
CT-CORREC'l'ION TYPE (I,E,H)
INCR-INCREMENT
OPER-OPEHATION CODE
Reprinted from_The Symbolic AssemblYPJ;ogram, p. 26.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531: 132. 200
§
MONROBOT XI
132 .
.2
COMMENTS
This example illustrates the use of alphameric and decimal literals and the Easy subroutines Read/Write/Store
Alphameric and Write Numeric (cued by machine-code instructions) to print or punch "TOTAL" and "10000000"
10/62
531:141.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
Monrobot XI
Data Code Table
8-Bit Code
REPORTS
DA iA CODE TABLE NO. 1
§
141.
.1
.23
8-track punched tape, typewriter, and 6- bit internal
code.
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:
.22
...
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
16
32
48
-
* or
/
J
A
2
S
K
B
3
3
T
L
C
2 zone bits; 32, 16.
4
4
U
M
D
4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2, 1.
5
5
V
N
E
6
6
W
0
F
7
7
X
P
G
8
8
y
Q
H
9
9
Z
R
I
10
;
$
1. c.
8 bits; 6 data, 1 odd parity,
1 end line (only the 6 data
bits need be used internally).
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: • • . .
.222 Less significant
pattern: • . • .
Character Codes
0
space
1
1
2
,
11
• or
&
%
u.c.
12
.
13
14
b.s.
tab
15
b. s.: .
l.c.: .
u.c.: •
· backspace.
· lower case.
· upper case.
(
\
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:142.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Monrobot XI
Data Code Table
5-8it Code
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO. 2
§
.23
142.
.1
.2
USE OF CODE:
5-track punched tape, Teletype printer, and 5- bit
internal code.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size.. .
.22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: .
.222 Less significant
pattern: .
5 bits.
2 bits; 16, 8.
3 bits; 4, 2, 1.
Character Codes
CI.l
p::;
ril
1-<
1-<
ril
....l
CI.l
ril
p::;
D
9iI..
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
a
8
16
24
a
blank
1. f.
E
A
1
T
L
Z
W
2
c.r.
R
D
J
3
a
G
B
figs.
4
space
I
S
U
5
H
P
Y
Q
6
N
C
F
K
7
M
V
X
ltrs.
a
blank
1.f.
3
-
1
5
)
"
2
2
c.r.
4
$
.
3
9
&
?
figs.
4
space
8
bell
7
5
#
a
6
6
,
:
.
1
;
/
7
c.r. : .
figs.: •
ltrs.: .
1.f.
..
(
ltrs.
.. carriage return.
figures shift.
letters shift.
• line feed.
I
\
©
1962 by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:143.100
Monrobot XI
Data Code Table
Card Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO. 3
§ 143.
.23
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size: . . . . 1 column.
Character Codes
punched cards.
OVERPUNCH
UNDERPUNCH
None
None
12
11
blank
&
-
0
12
11
0
0
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
$
.
*
%
8-2
8-3
#
8-4
@
0
8-5
8-6
8-7
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:151.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
Monrobot XI
""OR1S
P. O. Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
Float and Unfloat: Handles conversions between
fixed and floating point internal formats; requires
74 storage locations.
151.
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
.11
Simulators of Other
Computers:
.12
.13
Simulation by Other
Computers:
Mathematical Routines: All of the following routines
operate on single word-length, fixed point operands.
. none.
. none.
Data Sorting and
Merging: .
none.
.14
Report Writing:
none.
.15
Data Transcription:
none.
. 16
File Maintenance:
none.
.17
Scientific and Engineering
Sine-Cosine:
Tangent-Cotangent:
Arcsine-Arccosine:
Arctangent -Arccotangent:
Log-Antilog:
Square Root:
Cube Root:
420
480
500
600
1,300
3,000
6,000
2,300
2,900
4,200
4,500
Storage
locations
64
18
59
49
111
48
30
Matrix Inversion: Inverts matrices of orders 2
through 16 in Single precision floating point form .
The Floating Point Arithmetic and Input-Output subroutines are used.
Floating Point Arithmetic: Full facilities are provided for floating pOint arithmetic on single wordlength operands. Eight bits are used for the exponent and 24 for the fixed point part. One of the operancts.is always in the accumulator; the address of
the other operand is specified in the one-word subroutine linkage. Storage required is 132 locations.
Execution times are as follows.
Addition: . . .
Subtraction:. .
Multiplication:
Division: . . .
Time,
m.sec.
Name
m.sec.
m.sec.
m.sec.
m.sec.
Floating Point Square Root: Single precision, requires 35 storage locations and 3, 800 milliseconds.
Floating Point Input-Output: Handles input, output,
and radix conversions of floating point data items on
specified input-output device(s); requires 109 storage .2
locations.
©
Least Squares Polynomial Approximation: Computes
the coefficients' of a power series which best represents a set of X, Y co-ordinates, using the Matrix
Inversion routine. Time required to fit a second order polynomial to five pairs of data values was 109
seconds.
Chi-Square Test of Independence: Given a contingency table, this routine computes the expected frequencies from the observed frequencies, chi-square
for each frequency, total chi-square, and the number of degrees of freedom. Time required for three
classes and three variables was 37 seconds.
Open Traverse Survey Program: Computes and
prints azimuth error of closure, total distance,
closure errors of X and Y co-ordinates, closure
precision, and a table of station names, adjusted
azimuths, distances, and co-ordinates. Up to 61
stations can be handled; total running time for 9 stations was 4 minutes (1. 7 minutes for calculations).
PROBLEM ORIENTED
LANGUAGES:. . . .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
none.
10/62
531:171.100
_STANDARD
II
EDP
Monrobot XI
M. O. Longuoge
REPORTS
Eosy
MACHINE-ORIENTED LANGUAGE: EASY
§ 171.
.22
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
Easy Programming System.
. 12
Origin: ".
Monroe Calculating Machine
Company, Inc.
. 13
Reference: .
Monroe publications MO97, MO-147.
. 14
Description
Legend
drum storage address of
the instruction or constant, in hexadecimal
form.
A or B, designating first or
second simple instruction
in a location, or first or
second half of a compound
instruction.
instruction or constant .
comments for coding sheet
documentation.
Register:
Step:
Contents:
Notes:
The Easy Programming System is a group of generalized subroutines that facilitate the coding of input-output, radix conversion, multiplication, division' and loop control operations. Because of the
Monrobot Xl's half-word instruction structure,
coding with the Easy system resembles coding in an
interpretive language. Cueing of each Easy subroutine requires a single word; the first half contains
a "jump mark" instruction that transfers .control to
the subroutine, and the second half contains the
parameters for the subroutine, in the form of up to
four hexadecimal digits. The Easy subroutine cues
are called "compound instructions," and are written
as if the operands were in decimal form. The Monrobot XI machine operations are called" simple instructions." Routines using the Easy system consist of intermixed simple and compound instructions.
The Easy system was designed to enable inexperienced programmers to use the Monrobot XI without
having to learn binary arithmetic and write complex
input-output routines. For this purpose, the system
is quite useful, but it does not permit maximum
utilization of the Monrobot Xl's capabilities. The
generalized nature of the subroutines makes them
less efficient than routines tailored for the job at
hand, and the binary system must be understood to
utilize the Monrobot' s logical and binary shifting
facilities. Because Easy coding is basically machine
language, the coder must learn and use the hexadecimal instruction address system and the nonmnemonic hexadecimal operation codes.
The Easy subroutines are described in Paragraph
. 6. They are normally stored in hexadecimal addresses 290 through 3VX - a total of 376 storage locations. Each of the subroutines is also available
individually in relocatable format. Execution times
for the Easy subroutines have not been made available. Wherever maximum operating speeds are important, the manufacturer recommends the use of
hand-coded routines in place of the generalized subroutines.
. 15
Publication Date: . . . July, 1960.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram:
.23
Corrections: .
.24
Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses:
.242 Multi -addresses:
.243 Literals:
none.
none.
used only in shifting and
input-output instructions.
.244 Special coded addresses:
.3
LABELS:
.4
DATA
Al
Constants
none.
none; all operands are
specified by their addresses in 3-digit hexadecimal form.
All Maximum size constants
Machine Form
Integer
Binary:
Fixed numeric:
Floating numeric:
Alphameric:
Coding Sheet Form
8 hexadecimal digits.
none.
none.
8 hexadecimal digits per
word (2 per character) .
0412 Maximum size literals
Machine Form
Integer
Binary:
Fixed numeric:
Floating numeric:
Alphameric: .
see coding sheet, Section
:131.
©
no special facilities; generally handled by substitution or "patching."
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Coding Sheet Form
1 hexadecimal digit; used
only to specify length of a
shift or size of an inputoutput item .
none.
none.
2 hexadecimal digits per
character (input-output
only).
10/62
sal:.lXl:42Q
§ 17i~ todo~!,oM
\!Illllugmd .U oM
Wor~ Areas
.42
implied bX use .
implied t)j!tt~ .:3tJAUnon . '1-1>u1:rW[U:dJl~JOlrlT!OJ r_: .
noil:)ln:l8lli
0
0
0
•
0
• :.lIlOIl
•
hn.f; glriJ}irl8 !Ii v:Irro bS8lJ
.
. "rwiJ~lJ,!:J1\fli JljqJl1~-:rJJqJ!i
•
•
i~a8"Y'I£l:JR}I?.tnlf:vrI1f~s.
.e~c. C?n:po~J\~:HWlJu'i·.1.s: .
tlOn .
. 52
.6
~f~9.!b:~f(~2t,lAP:'llff~R-V~I~~B~~. :2JHHld
•i.J..s 'lLGrf.:1.J¥.d h c f · } i . ? S 0 8 · ..·-----
E.
_£)(~1PrF: i!ih·~enfoJs~~~~ subroutines comprise the Easy
g -lT0!ff~mml1t£ System and are cued by the
.• r~Ibrrip6lill.&')iiistructions .. ; each is also available as an individual subroutine in relocatable format.
ATAQ
.61
Special Arithmetic
21n.s:JSIIO:)
----.~
Divide:
..---.
U.
divides cO)ltents of E4 1
.
B:lIlB(ii'l!S't !,'2Ceg-~lJro!-gt~'furJ i)" .
by c~ntelJ.1;S of B;c,S.qmulator; Ytdfle's~iffiHde"d or unrounded quo~~enf In FA 1
and accu~~~~ and remainder ill 1fi:~V\3,~
m:ro'ii Jssri2 gnlbo::>
a1i:-gib Ismi:)sbEXsri 8
Multiply, Shift, airHOfl
Round: . . . .' ~n<;n •
'I!;q a1igib I£f!Ii::Jsb£.X9ri 8
,("1!;ll::>.fnsrb J::3q S:) b'IOW
•
: ~I":t~)fHUH b::)x.! t:~.
· rriaftlpl1fliM s8~tP~tq of ac·
'Cumuiatarrg:f~t>ltents of
FA 1
shiftsprQdu~t r~l!:ht
21 !i'l:gpYc'flil:fdrnotW~-flvOf ...:-11;' .
m'Io'ii :l9Sri2 'l..'llibo::>
'.'
bS8JJ ;3i-gih ISlTli::J5br..xen 1
s 10 r!:tgnsI v:1bsq8 01 yIno
sfu1f1iWIfl'{f)uaa mtffi:
Place~1:8~1~op~i~lly)
rounus {f 1~1i:S'i: '!ll~icant digit; 'p;r:odj1~t is in
accumulatdf'l!ffiiI'FA I,
'aII'd may it~t~Seed 9
decimal digits in length.
-:J lJCJ
MUltiplf.IT;":lI. jlfq~lJO.
• SHorr
. SHan
1:sq 811-gID Ismbsb.sxsrl S;
:luq1uo-1IJqrrl) "J5:t::>B'Isri:J
· 62
hand:~~s roup~~~d shifto ing-lffpHYtMe'ducts
not gic4IHe¥J.th1ii
deci · mal tliirlts?l'15m
. . . :~.t'I5m£rlqIA
.8
MACRO ANO)~Et@Ol
TABLES
• 81
Macros: .
TAlvU!O"I $)l\.UOVlAJ
none.
l~.
rrob.?s2 ,j5sr!a -gnibo.? 9S8
.82
Special Function;s:rr:m . . none.
bsl"lOqlo,nl AVIS
Pseudos: • . • • IeI~
Ibl}J/PW&CM)J~~J"'d'SUA ~d \:,," r \:.il
s.
none.
531: 172.100
•
STANDARD.
II
REPORTS
ED
P
Monrobot XI
M. O. Language
Symbolic
MACHINE-ORIENTED LANGUAGE: SYMBOLIC
§
172.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Origin: . . . . . . . . . G. Whitney and D. Dunlop,
Western Electric Co.,
Inc., Princeton, N. J.
Revised by Monroe Calculating Machine Co., Inc.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram: .
.22
Legend
. . . . • . . . Symbolic Assembly
Program.
. 13
Reference: .
.14
Description
CT* : . .
Monroe publication MO-140 .
The Symbolic Assembly Program for the Monrobot
XI was designed and developed at Western Electric's
Engineering Research Center (where it is called
SYMBO). After certain revisions and additions by
Monroe, the system was made available for general
distribution.
The system permits straightforward use of the computer's facilities, but offers few refinements.
There are no provisions for macro-codes, relative
addressing, allocation counter control, or program
listings. An unusual feature is the provision of
three special fields on the coding sheet that facilitate
corrections to the source program. A correction
tape can be pr~pared and merged automatically with
the master source program tape at translation time,
.23
or the corrections can be manually typed.
Literals <;an be written in the operand field as
groups of hexadecimal, decimal, Teletype, or 8channel characters. Each literal is converted to
binary form and stored as a constant. When a specific literal appears in more than one source program instruction, it will be stored only once.
Since all transfers of control are to the first instruction in a pair, each named instruction is placed in
the first half of a word. A "no operation" instruction is placed in the second half of the prevfous word
when necessary. Machine language instructions, in
the form of four hexadecimal digits, can be interspersed with the symbolic instructions. Machine
addresses may also be used with the mnemonic operation codes, which consist of one or two letters.
Since the programmer cannot control the allocation
counter nor reserve areas of storage, indiscriminate use of machine addresses can lead to conflicts
in storage assignments.
.15
Publication Date:. . . . August, 1961.
©
see coding sheet, Section
:132.
. 24
Correction Type: insert,
eliminate, or replace a
source statement.
NAME*:.
. • • • . . last named entry preceding
point at which a correction is to be made.
INCR*: . . . . . . . . Increment: number of
statements between last
named entry and entry to
be corrected.
NAME: . . .
symbolic name for a
location.
OPERATION: .
mnemonic operation code.
OPERAND: . .
1) an actual storage address in hexadecimal
-form;
2) a symbolic operand address; or
3) a literal in decimal,
hexadecimal, Teletype,
or 8-channel code.
Note: * denotes columns used for corrections only.
Corrections: . . . . . . special columns on coding
sheet specify correction
type (insert, eliminate,
or replace) and name of
and increment from last
named entry preceding
the statement to be
corrected.
Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses:
.242 Multi-addresses:
.243 Literals: . . . . .
• 244 Special coded
addresses: •
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
not permitted; i. e., relative addressing is not
possible.
none.
/ in operand column, followed by D for decimal,
H for hexadecimal, T for
Teletype, or F for 8channel code •
none.
10/62
531:172.300
§
MONROBOT XI
172.
.3
LABELS
.31
General
.311 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . . . . . 232 names (limited by
translator ).
. 312 Common label formation
rule: . . . . . . .
yes.
.313 Reserved labels:. .
none.
.314 Other restrictions:
none.
. 315 Designators: . . . .
none.
. 316 Synonyms permitted:
no.
. 32
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 Mnemonic
, Existence:
Number: ,.
Example: .
.512 Absolute
Existence:
Number: •
Example: .
Comment:
Universal Labels
.321 'Labels for procedures
Existence:
...
Formation rule
First character:
.323
. 324
. 325
. 326
Others:
Number of
characters:
Labels for library
routines: .
Labels for constants:
Labels for files: . . .
Labels for records: .
Labels for variables:
.33
Local Labels:
.4
. 41
. 322
.5
....
mafidatory if referenced by
another statement.
alphameric; may not be 0,
1, 2, or 3; must be numeric if name is 4 characters long.
alphameric.
.6
1 to 4.
none .
same as procedures.
none.
none .
same as procedures.
optional.
27.
X = "add" .
"generate" pseudo permits
specification of absolute
operation code and address as 4 hexadecimal
digits.
none in symbolic form;
standard subroutines are
in machine code format
and are usually loaded
separately at run time .
.7
LmRARY FACILITIES:
none.
.52
Macro-Codes:
none .
DATA
. 53
Interludes: . .
none .
Constants
. 54
Translator Control
none.
.411 Maximum size constants
Machine Form
Coding Sheet Form
Integer
Binary: . .
9 decimal or 8 hexadecimal
digits.
Fixed numeric: •
none.
none.
Floating numeric:
58-channel code or six
.8
Alphameric: .. .
Teletype code characters.
,.81
. 412 Maximum size literals: same as constants.
.42
SPECIAL ROUTINES
AVAILABLE: . . . .
optional; required when
address is symbolic.
25.
A = "add" .
Allocation counter:
Label adjustment:
Annotation:. . . . .
none.
none.
none.
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
Macros: . . • . . . . . none •
Working Areas
.82
.421 Data layout: •
. 422 Data type: .•
.423 Redefinition:.
implied by use .
implied.
none.
Pseudos
Code
G (Generate): .
.43
Input- Output Areas
Input: •.
Output: .
accumulator.
Fast Access Register 5 or
the output instruction
itself.
Note: As in machine coding, each input or output instruction initiates the transfer of a single
character.
10/62
Description
permits use of machine
language instructions in a
symbolic program.
I (Insert): . .
permits insertion of new
instruction(s) between two
old ones.
E (Eliminate):
permits deletion of instruction(s) from source
program.
R (Replace):, . . . . . permits substitution of new
instructions for old ones.
531:181.100
.STANOARD
II
EDP
Monrobot XI
Program Translator
Symbolic
REPORTS
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: SYMBOLIC
§
181.
· 23
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: .
· 12
Size Limitations
· 231 Maximum number of
source statements:.
Symbolic Assembly
Program.
· 232 Maximum size of
source statements: .
Description
limited by target computer
storage.
1 coding sheet line of up to
24 characters.
· 233 Maximum number of
This program translates routines written in the
data items: . . . . .
see next entry.
Monrobot XI Symbolic Assembly language (described .234 Others
in Section :172) into machine language form. The
Maximum number of
labels: . . . . . . . 232.
translation can be performed on the basic Monrobot
Maximum number of
XI system (computer, typewriter, paper tape reader
and punch). All facilities of the target system can
different constants:. 83.
be utilized. Source program input and object program output are on 8-track punched tape. The only
.3
OUTPUT
typed documentation is a table of labels and constants
.31 Object Program
and the machine addresses assigned to them.
. 13
. 14
.15
.311 Language name:
Two tape passes are required in the translation
Monrobot XI machine code •
"normal parameterized
process. Phase I forms the label table and generates. . 312 Language style:
the required constants. Phase II assigns machine
binary format": tape is
operation codes and addresses to all symbolic inheaded by initial and final
loading addresses; each
structions and punches the object program tape. No
word (2 instructions or a
attempt is made to reduce rotational delays by opticonstant) is represented
mizing operand locations. The maximum number of
by 8 hexadecimal digits
labels that can be processed is 232, and up to 83
and followed by a carriage
different constants can be generated. Error checkreturn code .
ing"is limited to parity checking of the input and no. 313 Output media: . . • . . punched tape {or punched
tation of duplicate names in the typed label table.
cards with special I/O
routines) .
Originator: .
G. Whitney and D. Dunlop,
· 32 Conventions
Western Electric Co. ,
Inc., Princeton, N. J.
.321 Standard inclusions: •
none.
Revised by Monroe Calcu.322
Compatible
with:.
.
.
program loading routines
lating Machine Co., Inc.
and Program Relocation
System .
Maintainer: . . . . . . Monroe Calculating
Machine Co., Inc.
· 33 Documentation
Availability:
August, 1961.
Subject
Provision
•2
INPUT
· 21
Language
· 211 Name: . .
.212 Exemptions:
.22
Symbolic Assembly language; see :172.
none.
Form
.221 Input media:
.222 Obligatory ordering:.
· 223 Obligatory grouping: .
punched tape (or punched
cards with special I/O
routines).
in coding sheet line
sequence.
none.
©
Source program: .
Object program: .
Label table: • . .
Restart point list:
Language errors:
none .
none.
typewriter listing.
none.
none.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Phase I (first tape
pass): . . . . . .
Phase II (second tape
pass): . . . . . . . .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
forms symbol table and
generates constants.
assigns machine addresses
and punches object program tape.
10/62
MONROBOT XI
531:181.420
§
18!.
.42
0Etional Modes
.421
. 422
.423
. 424
Translate:
Translate and run: .
Check only:
Patching: . . • . .
.43
Special Features
...
...
.431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptimized
.
translate: .
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:
.. .
yes .
no.
no .
yes.
no.
no •
no.
.44
Bulk Translating:
yes; not necessary to reload translator.
.45
ProgEam Diagnostics:
none associated with
translator.
.46
Translator Library: .. none.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program SEace
.53
Optimizing Data: .
.54
Object ProgEam
Performance: •
O. ISS minutes, where S is
number of source instructions (***).
unaffected; i.e., same as
unoptimized hand coding.
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating ComEuter
.611 Minimum configuration: basic Monrobot XI system,
with typewriter, paper
tape reader and punch.
.612 Larger configuration
2 paper tape readers peradvantages: . . • . .
mit automatic merging of
source and correction
tapes.
.62
Target ComEuter
.621 Minimum configuration: basic Monrobot XI system.
.622 Usable extra facilities: all.
.7
Translation Time
.521 Normal translating:
none .
.6
.511 Fixed overhead: . . . • 25 locations for program
loading routine.
.512 Space required for each
input-output file: . . . as coded.
.513 Approximate expansion
unity.
of procedures: .
.52
...
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
none.
none.
check
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer
overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Input error:
none.
none.
none.
none.
parity cbeck
ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS:
. ..
Action
noted in label table
typeout.
halt processor.
none.
)
10/62
531:191.100
.STANMRD
EDP
_
REPORTS
Monrobot XI
Operating Environment
General
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: GENERAL
§
191-
.1
.11
.12
.13
Availability: . . . . .. all routines' described here
are currently available .
.14
Originator: . . . • . . . Monroe Calculating
Machine Co., Inc.
• 15
Maintainer:
·2
PROGRAM LOADING
· 21
Source of Programs
GENERAL
Identity: . . . . . . . . Loading Routine for
Program Tapes.
Parameter Tape Output
Program.
Parameter Type Output
Program.
Parameter Ta pe/Type
Output Program
Program Relocation
System.
Description
No integrated operating system is available for the
Monrobot XI. The facilities covered in this section
must be provided by individual utility routines such
as those listed above, by the user's own coding, or
by the operator at run time.
Programs are normally coded in hexadecimal form.
They may be converted to punched tape off-line
(e. g., by a Flexowriter) and loaded by the Loading
Routine for Program Tapes; or they may be typed
directly into storage, tested, and punched out by the
Parameter Tape Output Program. In either case,
the program tapes will be in "normal parameterized
binary format": the tape is headed by the initial and
final loading addresses for the program, and each
word is represented by 8 hexadecimal digits and followed by a carriage return code. Object program
tapes produced by the Symbolic· Assembly Program
translator have the same format.
as above .
• 211 Programs from on-line
libraries: . . . . . . . none.
· 212 Independent programs: punched tape, punched
cards, typewriter, or
16-key keyboard.
. 213 Data: . . . • . . .
same as .212 •
· 214 Master routines: .
S-location "bootstrap" routine is keyed in from
typewriter or 16-key keyboard; it loads the appropriate program loading
routine from punched tape.
· 22
Library Subroutines:
same as . 212.
· 23
Loading Sequence.: ..
manually controlled.
·3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
· 311 Sequencing of program
for movement between
levels: . . . '.' . . . as coded.
.312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . . . Program Relocation System
converts 8-track binary
program tapes to a relocatable format (Phase I),
The binary program tapes are non-relocatable. To
and then to a relocated
permit loading of programs into core storage locabinary format (Phase II);
tions other than the ones for which they were written,
see .12.
the Program Relocation System is provided. This
routine requires two tape passes. The first phase
.32 Input-Output Units
converts the original binary tape into a special format that designates those instructions whose ad. 321 Initial assignment: •
fixed by coder •
dresses are relocatable. The second phase converts . 322 Alternation: . . . .
as coded .
the "relocatable" tape back into a standard binary
object tape that can be loaded into anyone specified
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
storage area. The "relocatable" tape can be used to
produce any number of relocated object tapes for
.41 Simultaneous Working:. as coded; see Section: 111.
loading into different areas.
not possible •
. 42 Multi-pro8Eamming:.
No standard program input or output routines using
punched cards have been made available to date.
• 43 Multi-sequencing: ..
not possible .
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
MONROBOT XI
531: 191.440
§
191.
. 44
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL: as incorporated in user's
program •
.7
LOGGING: . . • . . . . as incorporated in user's
program.
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
Loading input
error:
Allocation
impossible:
In-out error:
Storage overflow:
Arithmetic overflow:
Invalid operation:
Improper format:
Invalid· address:
Check or
Interlock
parity check
none.
parity check
none.
hardware check
none.
none.
all addresses valid.
Action
processor halt.
set bit indicator.
set bit indicator.
.45
Restarts:. . . . . . . . as incorporated in user's
program.
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.811 Minimum configuration: all routines described here
are usable on the basic
Monrobot XI system.
.812 Usable extra facilities: as incorporated in user's
program.
.813 Reserved storage locations
Loading Routine for
Program Tapes:.
25 locations.
Manual Typewriter
Input Program: .'
26 locations.
Parameter Tape
31 locations.
Output Program:.
Parameter Type
35 locations.
Output Program:.
Parameter Tape/Type
Output Program:
51 locations •
. 82
.51
Dynamic
.511 Tracing:
.512 Snapshots: ..
.52
Post Mortem:
10/62
System Overhead
.821 Loading time: . .
no routine available; manual .822 Reloading frequency:
sequence checking is possible, using Halt switch
. 83 Program Space
and control register disAvailable: ..
play.
none.
Parameter Output Programs
print and/or punch (on
tape) the contents of a
specified series of stor.84
age locations in "normal
parameterized binary
format" (see. 12).
approx. 2 minutes for program loading routine.
can be maintained in working storage.
0.51 + D:S 992, where I is
number of instructions
and D is number of data
items, when standard program loading routine is
used.
Program Loading Time: 0.5 (0.51 + D) seconds,
using punched tape; i. e.,
2 words/second (**).
531:201.001
•
STANDaRD
EDP
•
REPORTS
Monrobot XI
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
·1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
Among stored-program data processing systems, the Monrobot XI is near the bottom
of the scale in both price and performance. To illustrate its performance on the
Standard File Problems, the time scale on ·performance graphs. 114, .124, .134, and
. 144 was shifted by a factor of 100. This should be kept in mind when making performance comparisons.
In Standard Configuration IX, punched tape is the obvious choice as the input medium
for both the master and detail files. Therefore, it was necessary to add a second
Paper Tape Reader to the system shown in :031. 1, raising the monthly rental for
Configuration IX to $945.
In Standard Configuration I, which uses punched card input, it is assumed that the
master and detail cards will be collated off-line, so only one Card Reader is required •
.2
SORTING
Magnetic tape cannot be used with the Monrobot XI system, and no sorting routines are
available.
·3
MATRIX INVERSION
The standard problem estimate and the manufacturer's standard routine use the Floating Point Arithmetic subroutines described in :151.17. No timing data has been made
available for the standard Matrix Inversion routine •
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
The problem is coded in machine language, with operand addresses optimized and fast
access registers used wherever practical. Specially-tailored subroutines are used for
the radix conversions and input-output. All input is from punched tape and all results
are printed on the Typewriter .
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
Fixed point machine coding is used, optimized where practical. Input is via the Paper
Tape Reader.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:201.100
•
STANDARD
_EDP
."
Monrobot XI
System Performance
REPORTS
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
· 114 Graph: . • . . . . . . . see graph below.
· 115 Storage space required
750 locations.
Configuration I: .
Configuration IX:. . • 750 locations.
· 112 Computation:.
• 113 Timing basis:
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A Estimates
. 111 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: •
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
100,000
7
4
2
10,000
7
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
4
Master File Records
(Note shifted time scale)
I
-
~
2
IX*
~
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
4
2
10
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
*
Extra Paper Tape Reader added to Standard Configuration IX, at a
rental increase of $60 per month.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:201.120
§
MONROBOT XI
201.
.12
. 122 Computation:.
.123 Timing basis:
standard .
using estimating procedur~
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12 .
. 124 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
Standard File Problem B Estimates
. 121 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: •
54 characters.
1 card.
lUne.
100,000
7
4
2
10,000
7
Time in Minutes to
4
Process 10,000
Master File Records
(Note shifted time scale)
2
1,000
---v----~
I
~
IX*
-
7
4
2
100
7
4
;
2
10
"
0.0
0.1
O. 3
. Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
*
10/62
Extra Paper Tape Reade'r added to Standard Configuration IX, at a
rental increase of $60 per month.
1. o
531:201.130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
. 13
standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 .
· 134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
· 132 Computation:.
• 133 Timing basis:
Standard File Problem C Estimates
• 131 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
216 characters.
1 .:ard.
1 line.
100,000
7
4
2
10,000
I
7
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
(Note shifted time scale)
4
-
IX*
2
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
4
2
10
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
*
©
Extra Paper Tape Reader added to Standard Configuration IX, at a
rental increase of $60 per month.
1962 by Auerba~h Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531 :201.140
§
MONROBOT XI
201.
.14
. 142 Computation:.
.143 Timing basis:
trebled.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 .
.144 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard File Problem D Estimates
. 141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
100,000
7
4
2
10,000
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
(Note shifted time scale)
4
I
--------
IX*
~
2
I"""
--
.1,000
7
4
2
100
7
4
2
10
0.0
0.1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
*
10/62
Extra Paper Tape Reader added to Standard Configuration IX, at a
rental increase of $60 per month.
1.0
531:201.300
SYSTEM PERFORMANC.E
§
.312 Timing basis: • . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312 .
.313 Graph: . . • • . . . . . see graph below .
201.
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
,.311 Basic parameters: . • . general, non- symmetric
matrices,' using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits.
100.00
II
1
g
I
1
~
10.00
1
~
Time in Minutes for
Complete Inversion
V
1.00
I
I
If
0.10
0.01
1
10
100
1,000
Size of Matrix
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531 :~O1.400
§
MONROBOT XI
. 412 Computation:. • . • . . 5 fifth-order polynomials .
5 divisions.
1 square root •
.413 Timing basis: . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413 .
.414 Graph: • . . . . . • • • Configuration IX; paper
tape input, typewriter output, fixed point machine
coding.
201.
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
. 411 Record sizes: • . . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max. size 8
digits.
Configuration IX; Single Length (9 digit precision); Fixed Point.
R
=Number of Output
Records per Input Record
1,000,000
.
~
J
"
/
~
'P'
100,000
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record
....
R:);.
1-'",,1-
~'
~,.
... ~~
,
~
~ t"I
~
\.
~.~
~.,
10,000
1,000
100
0.1
1.0
10.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
10/62
100.0
SYSTEM
§
PERFO~MANCE
531:201.415
201.
Configuration IX; paper
tape input, typewriter output, floating point arithmetic using subroutines
described in :151.17.
.415 Graph:
Configuration IX; Single Length (7 digit precision); Floating Point.
R := Number of Output Records per Input Record
1,000,000
/
'"
i.Jj~~
A~
100,000
"
~
~L
-
",
R"'\."'-
:::::T'G •\. ~ ~
G.G\.
,~
~'"
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record
~
10,000
1,000
100
0.1
1.0
10.0
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531:201.500
§
MONROBOT XI
augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables.
using estimating procedure
.513 Timing basis:
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.513 .
. 514 Graph: . . . . . . . . • see below .
201.
.512 Computation:.
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
.51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
. 511 Record size: . . . . • • thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
1,000,000
100,000
/
Time in Milliseconds
per Record
V
V
V
V
10,000
1/
..7
.....
JIll"
1,000
100
1
10
100
T, Number of Augmented Elements
Roman Numerals denote Standard Configurations
10/62
1,000
531 :211.101
Monrobot XI
Physical Characteristics
MONROBOT XI
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
531 :211.102
MONROBOT XI
MONRO BOT XI PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit Name
Monrobot XI
Computer
Poper Tape
Reader
Paper Tape
Punch
Typewriter
Teletype
Printer
28X48X22
6X 11 X 13
8 X 11 X 10
llX20X17
39x23X37
375
?
?
?
120
ID"ENTITY
Model Number
Height XWidth XDepth, in.
Weight, lbs.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths to
indicated units, feet
Not specified
Temperature, of.
Storage
Ranges
Humidity, '7.
Temperature, of.
ATMOSPHERE
Working
Ranges
Humidity, '7.
Not specified
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
Air Flow, cfm.
Intemal Filters
Nominal
115
Tolerance
±10
115
Voltage
Nominal
ELECTRICAL
10/62
60
Cycles
Tolerance
NOTES
60
Not- specified
Phases and Lines
l¢, 3-wire
Load Power
850 watts
Control Unit, 7 X
12 X 12 inches,
stands on top.
65 watts
Housed in upper
Housed in lower
drawer of desk or drawer of desk or
cabinet.
cabinet.
531:211.103
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
MONROBOT XI PHYSICAL CHARACTE RISTICS-Contd.
Cabinet
(2 legs)
Table
(2 legs)
Knee-hole Desk
(2 legs)
7 X 15 X 10
28X26X22
28 X 26 X 22
28 X51 X22
?
?
?
?
Unit Name
IBM
Card Punch
Punchad Card
Coupler
Model Number
024 and 026
24 and 26
Height XWidth XDepth, in.
39 x 32X29
225 max.
IDENTITY
Weight, Ibe.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths to
indicated units, feet
Temperature,oF.
Storage
Ranges
Humidity, 'l'.
Temperature, of.
ATMOSPHERE
Working
Ranges
Humidity, '7.
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
Air Flow, elm.
Internal FUters
Nominal
115,208, or 230
Voltage
Tolerance
Nominal
ELECTRICAL
60
Cycles
Tolerance
lCP, 3-wire
Phases and Lines
Load Power
320 watts
Usually housed in Houses paper tape Provides work
desk Or cabinet.
reader and punch surface only.
or card couplers.
NOTES
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Houses I/O units
in basic system.
10/62
531:221.101
Monrobot XI
Price Data
PRICE DATA
fi 221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Central
Processor
Name
Monrobot XI - Basic System
Includes the following units:
Computer and control unit
Input-Output Typewriter
Paper Tape Reader
Paper Tape Punch
Knee-hole Desk
2 Input-Output Buffers
Optional Features
Oscilloscope View Box
Input-Output Buffer
Cabinet (2 legs)
Table (2 legs)
2, 048-word Drum
Note: For punched card inputoutput, 24 and 26 Couplers
can be substituted for Paper
Tape Reader and Punch on a
one-for-one basis; 024 or
026 Card Punches must be
ordered from IBM.
InputOutput
Paper Tape Reader (includes
Cabinet)
Paper Tape Punch (includes
Cabinet)
Paper Tape Reader and Punch,
in single Cabinet
Edge-Punched Card Reader
Edge-Punched Card Punch
Optional Features
5-8 Channel Switch
Paper Tape Unwind Reel
/
(
24
26
Coupler (for punchedcardinput)
Coupler (for punchedcardojJ.tp4t)
Input-Output Typewriter
Output Typewriter
Optional Features
20 -inch Carriage
20-inch Pinfeed Platen
16 -inch Pinfeed Platen
Form Aligner (tracter feed)
Form Stand (paper tray)
Special keys (each)
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
$
Annual
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
700.00
1,200.00
24,500.00
NA
20.00
12.50
NA
185.00
5.25
30.00
0
0
?
105.00
600.00
400.00
60.00
5,250.00
60.00
82.50
1,650.00
33.00
55.00
1,100.00
81.00
70.00
43.00
125.00
97.50
70.00
2~500.00
5.00
NA
4.50
0
90.00
20.00
25.00
25.00
40.00
40.00
800.00
800.00
120.00
80.00
165.00
123.75
3,300.00
2,475.00
0
0
0
0
0
0
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
65.00
75.00
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
1,950.00
1,400.00
Teletype Printer:
In lieu of basic Typewriter
As additional output unit
50.00
120.00
50.00
165.00
1,000.00
3,300.00
Monroe-Card Processor:
96 words/card
174 words/card
230.00
290.00
?
?
6,500.00
8,500.00
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
i'
531:221.102
MONROBOT XI
PRICE OAT A-Contd.
§
221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
InputOutput
Data
Orig!nation
Monthly
Rental
$
Annual
Maintenance
$
16-Key Keyboard
12.50
20.00
400.00
Synchro-Monroe Punch Tape Adding
Machine:
One-register model
Two-register model
88.00
98.00
110.00
120.00
1,950.00
2,175.00
Name
Notes: NA in rental column means unit or feature is available for purchase only.
Maintenance charges apply only to purchased equipment.
Prices do not include Manufacturers' Excise Tax of 6 percent on purchase or
10 percent on rental.
10/62
Purchase
$
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:05:10 17:31:30-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:05:11 13:32:14-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:05:11 13:32:14-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:0f7447d2-524e-9840-b187-a23fce3df72b Instance ID : uuid:b356b8b5-679a-534a-82fd-56405b37258b Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 804EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools